Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPP - 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY - TWIN PEAKS - PERMITS AND PLANS17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY ASSOCIATED PERMITS 16-F-0156 16-F-0136 16-H-126 16-5-111 D15-0293 Ml5-0i56 99-5-164 99-5-047 99-F-040' 99-F-026 4411t."44, CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE MARSHAL'S OFFICE 206-575-4407 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. **PLEASE PRINT** SITE LOCATION Site Address: q 5 + �' 641-e( D `�`� Suite Number: Floor: Tenant Name: TO r g i'S4-A 4 Lir U/ (rINFO P" S 7 New Tenant? -Yes ❑ - No King Co. Assessor's Tax No.: Property Owner's Name: J D Jo' t O 5 OS Mailing Address: 5 6 itvt CONTACT PERSON -if there are questions about the submittal. 1'4 ails 4✓IQ6/1-1 Name: Company Name: #M If/ 5 C G City State Zip Day Telephone: 7 06 y "3Z PS -3 Mailing Address: -17°6�C 4-/5 %L NCt (C tArt, E-mail Address: 14 6.41 • (I -w 1.0 v /6 7 c,- �i',ty C/ 5 Contractor's City of Tukwila Business License number: Total number of new/relocated devices or sprinkler heads: Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ «- o r' 3 . c 4, (I /LK 7 c,. 1Jev s i 014'N, ti IVC,✓ )3✓,' I l 11 l/i//I- 1960c State Zip Fax Number: Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES Value of Construction - In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Fire Marshal to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review -Every permit issued shall become invalid unless the work on the site authorized by such permit is commenced within 180 days after its issuance, or if the work authorized on the site by such permit is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days after the time the work is commenced. The Fire Marshal is authorized to grant, in writing, one or more extensions of time, for periods not more than 180 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OR WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWN R OR AUTHORIZED AGENT: Signature: Print Name: 1-/P1,4; /1-(1,€73 M Plan Permit App.doc Date: 10it Day Telephone: Z of c(-3-1' 53 8/22/14 TFD FP Form 8 44iitt"44 SITE LOCATION CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE MARSHAL'S OFFICE 206-575-4407 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. **PLEASE PRINT** King Co. Assessor's Tax No.: 3523049123 Site Address: 17920 Southcenter PKWY Suite Number: Floor: Tenant Name: Twin Peaks Restaurant New Tenant? 51- Yes ❑ - No Property Owner's Name: West Coast Commercial Realty LLC Mailing Address: City State Zip CONTACT PERSON -if there are questions about the submittal. Name: Martin Traicoff Day Telephone: 425-956-3434 Company Name: Brimstone Fire Safety Management LLC Mailing Address: 23422 57th Ave SE Woodinville, Wa 98072 E-mail Address: martin@brimstonefiresafety.com City State Zip Fax Number: Contractor's City of Tukwila Business License number: BUS -0995388 Total number of new/relocated devices or sprinkler heads: 164 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 23,700 Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): ADDING NEW PENDENT AND UPRIGHTS FOR NEW WET & DRY SPRINKLER SYSTEM FOR A RESTAURANT. PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Fire Marshal to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review -Every permit issued shall become invalid unless the work on the site authorized by such permit is commenced within 180 days after its issuance, or if the work authorized on the site by such permit is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days after the time the work is commenced. The Fire Marshal is authorized to grant, in writing, one or more extensions of time, for periods not more than 180 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OR WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER OR AUTHORIZED AGENT: Signature: Print Name: MARTIN TRAICOFF Plan Permit App.doc Date: 5-20-16 Day Telephone: 425-956-3434 8/22/14 TFD FP Fonn 8 FIRE DEPARTMENT SPRINKLER PLAN REVIEW COMMENTS Project Name: Twin Peaks Restaurant 17920 Southcenter Parkway Permit No.: 16-S-111 Date: June 1, 2016 Reviewer: Al Metzler Fire Protection Project Coordinator (206) 575-4407 option # 2 (Inspection Requests) (206) 971-8718 (Plan Review Questions) • Lateral sway bracing is required at a maximum spacing of 40' for all mains, cross mains, and branch lines 2.5" and larger. Bracing is provided for the last length of pipe but within 6' of the end of a feed or cross main. Bracing is required unless all the pipe is supported by rods less than 6" or by 30 ° wrap-around U -hooks for any size pipe, 9.3.5.3. • Minimum clearance around pipes: 2 "for 1"-3.5", 4" for 4" and larger, see 4 exceptions, 9.3.4. • Longitudinal sway bracing is a maximum of 80' for mains and cross mains and within 40 ` of the end of the line, 9.3.5.4. • Provide lateral and longitudinal bracing for changes in pipe direction per section 9.3.5.11.2 for pipe size 2'/z inches and larger. • Restrain branch lines at the end sprinkler of each line, restrain against vertical and lateral movement, 9.3.6.3. • Restraints for branch lines shall be at intervals per table 9.3.6.4 and section 9.3.6.4, and restrain sprig ups greater than 4', 9.3.6.6. • Comply with ASCE 7-02, section 9.6.2.6.2 (e). • Ceilings used for flex drop attachments shall comply with ASTM C 635 and ASTM C 636 per section 9.2.1.3.3.2. • Where flexible sprinkler hose fittings exceed 6ft. in length and are supported by a suspended ceiling, a hanger(s) attached to the structure shall be required to ensure that the maximum unsupported length does not exceed 6 ft.(9.2.1.3.3.3). • Flexible sprinkler hose bends shall not exceed the maximum radius permitted by the listing. • Provide sprinkler protection beneath all obstructions greater than 4 ft. in width. • Extend sprinkler protection to all combustible concealed spaces. • Comply with NFPA 13 obstruction tables. • All valves controlling the water supply for automatic sprinkler systems and waterflow switches on all sprinkler systems shall be electrically supervised. • All interior control valves shall be readily accessible, labeled and located not more than 6 ft. above the floor. • Comply with obstructed/non-obstructed construction rules for sprinkler head placement. • Sprinkler heads spaced closer than 6 ft. apart must be baffled. • Maintain a 4 ft. clearance around the sprinkler riser for emergency access. • When the sprinkle riser is located inside a room, the door to the room shall have a sign with one -inch letters which reads "SPRINKLER RISER". • Provide a spare sprinkler heads and wrench box at the riser. • An electrically supervised post indicating valve (PIV) is required. • The PIV height shall be 36 inches. • The height of the fire department connection (FDC) shall be 36 to 48 inches above grade. • The FDC and PIV shall have the building number served by the FDC stenciled vertically in 3 -inch high white numbers on a "safety red" background, facing the direction of vehicular access. • The FDC shall have a downward angle bend of 30 degrees with a 5 -inch Storz connection and a Knox locking Storz cap. • The underground fire line installation requires a separate Public Works Permit. • All new underground piping shall be hydrostatically tested and inspected. Contact Dave Stuckle, Public Works Inspector, at 206-433-0179 to make an appointment. • When subjected to vehicular damage, protective guard posts or curbs are required around sprinkler valves and hydrants. Posts and curbs are to be painted yellow. • All interior control valves shall be readily accessible, labeled, and located not more than 6 ft. above the floor. • Modifications involving 20 or more sprinkler heads require hydrostatic test and system isolation if necessary. • For dry pipe and double interlock preaction systems in addition to the standard hydrostatic test, an air pressure leakage test at 40 psi shall be conducted for 24 hours. Any leakage that results in a loss of pressure in excess of 1.5 psi for the 24 hours shall be corrected. These conditions apply to all sprinkler piping exposed as necessary to accomplish the permitted scope of work. • These conditions apply to all sprinkler piping exposed as necessary to accomplish the permitted scope of work. All code references are NFPA 13, 2013 Edition. SITE LOCATION CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, WA 98188 206-575-4407 Date application accepted: FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. **PLEASE PRINT** J Site Address: 1 b / 6 Tenant Name: Pc5 Property Owner's Name: Mailing Address: CONTACT PERSON -if there are questions about the submittal. Name: CA ( tA)01-ALT013 Company Name: - cS, flND5m 4 jam, (- Mailing Address: 4 6� t WS ---'1 'TO 12,4 -mail Address: 1U C %r ti SSMc • C— King Co. Assessor's Tax No.: Suite Number: Floor: New Tenant? - Yes ❑-No City State Zip Day Telephone: 105' fit 9 Total number of new/relocated devices or sprinkler heads: Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 75in Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): 1409& U P I i4AltW' City 15 Fax Number: 3{?,ittate-1531Zip i C-lur>r ( sc~Q SUV f RISS) f PJ 4 ►PC -9 k-tuNA S 14,00) PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES Value of Construction - In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Fire Marshal to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review -Every permit issued shall become invalid unless the work on the site auth:rized by such permit is commenced within 180 days after its issuance, or if the work authorized on the site by such permit is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days after the time the work is commenced. The Fire Marsha: is author:zec :o grant, in writing, one or more extensions of time, for periods not more than 180 days each. The extension shall ire -rquested in writing, and justifiable cause demonstrated. I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE S MV.E TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OR WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OW - A UTHoRIZED AGENT: i *nature: Pr:n_ Name: PI: Permit Apr.d x Da,, THiel.'hon,e: (J) Eat : 6 016 ►��S 3O FIRE DEPARTMENT HOOD SUPPRESSION PLAN REVIEW COMMENTS Project Name: Twin Peaks Restaurant 17920 Southcenter Py Permit No.: 16-H-126 Date: June 10, 2016 Reviewer: Al Metzler Fire Protection Project Coordinator (206) 575-4407 option # 2 (Inspection Requests) (206) 971-8718 (Plan Review Questions) • Nozzle heights above appliances to be per manufacturers installation guidelines. • Fryers shall be installed with at least a 16 inch space between the fryer and surface flames from adjacent cooking equipment or a minimum 8 inch high steel or tempered glass baffle plate shall be installed between the appliances. • Upon activation of the suppression system, the make-up air supply will shut off and the exhaust will keep running. • Type 1 hood systems shall be designed and installed to automatically activate the exhaust system whenever cooking operations occur. The activation of the exhaust system shall occur through an interlock with the cooking appliances, by means of heat sensors or by means of other approved methods. • Activation of the suppression system shall shunt all electrical power under the hood as well as the gas supply. • Install a "K" rated portable fire extinguisher within 30 ft. of the cooking equipment. • The hood suppression system shall be monitored by a U.L. Central Monitoring Station. • A minimum 110 candela horn/strobe shall be installed above the kitchen hood suppression system manual pull station at a height of 80 inches above the floor. • A separate fire alarm permit from the Tukwila Fire Department is required for all fire alarm work. • The suppression system manual pull station shall be located no closer than 10 ft. and no farther than 20 ft. from the cooking equipment and be placed at a height of 42 to 48 inches above the floor. • The inside lower edge of the hood shall overhang or extend a horizontal distance of not less than 6 inches beyond the edge of the top horizontal surface of the appliance on all open sides. The vertical distance between the front lower lip of the hood and such surface shall not exceed 4 feet. • If cooking appliances are wheeled, the appliance wheels shall be set in tracks permanently mounted to the floor to ensure appliance is returned to original location if moved for cleaning or maintenance. CORRECTION NOTICE/REINSPECTION FEE Permit number: TUKWILA FIRE MARSHAL'S OFFICE Inspector: TVI c 7 Office: 206-575-4407 Fax: 206-575-4439 Email: Fire Marshal(tukwilawa.gov Business Name: 1 pi.5 Type of Inspection: 'r— Location Address: i 1-q 7,0 (, /21(AA1 Date : (SO (/-9-- bo Contact Person1,1 6�M.,� Glawso— Phone No. : i-, .1,3_ .,414 - 74/0 ACTION REQUIRED : - p--(2._ pwm, (.47,,, Fa-Ovv-- v - 11-(tei &ow-. -1-7.(4.--- bo /2666- 72)f ()Niers. - c,- VEZT'Ys ✓L -vnti L ce":- tg6----("Ie /6-12 (13 !/V"U \c/ • V cod, • ^ 0 iV G\ 0/5 \f \ ik fl tif c.k At • Vii - . CORRECTION OF THE ABOVE I MS ARE, REQUIRED B ( j 1/ �' ►�.ULT IN THE ISSUANCE OF A CRI NAL CITATION/TICKET. FAILURE TO CO • Signature. Billin ailing Address : Attn: Company Name: Address: City: 1 State: Zip: ❑ - A $100.00 Reinspection Fee is,required. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. ❑ Ticket Issued. Citation # ' Correction Notice Reins') Fee2.doc Revised 6117/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 100 7 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Pf42 Z13 Retain a copy with permit D/ b PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project:/ WM/ ?e?tXS' Type of Inspection: Address: Suite #:/77Z0 . , /211 Cont Person: Special Instructions: Occupancy Type: Phone No.: pproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Cmritc�y.�- G.-2.7 64' PA5s Needs Shift Inspection: M Sprinklers: I Fire Alarm: ,b+ Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: o _ 140/4-1,.. Date: 9/44y/ ‘ Hrs.: 4 a $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T. F.. D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 7v.—D�93 /4i F- Q/S PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: Sprinklers: Type of Ins ction: i'i- Monitor: Address: Suite #: 1 �g Sc "/ZPVyfX'vi Contact erson: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: / Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: 4. IZIruG /A e#/' %a(d( — Die •N ,o 0#4 /' G Ai m ox- '-� J d.r - , t 4 0rut X /, :tiZ etfl r - '0/ri Y,� �� o iV /A-/ 7ZZ - ifir, A ez,4e,‘A- - ,.� A7 `,,,,���"00 7/ - $7 e) Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector:: i 4 Date: V/ W/4 Hrs.: / d $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 / tri /Al PSProje— S Type of Ir pectin : Address Suite #:779 � a(AJ7 Contact Person: Special Instructions: Occupancy Type: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: rrections required prior to approval. —� Nip 74 ,o/ h AI J -d'- /(4W-1 -74 / ,v5012"-<, hr- 5P/Oc(--- Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector /%'7 Date: 9h3 p` Hrs.: / 6 $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 y INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 1iS-o z93 0/5-6 /t -E- /34 PERMIT NUMBERS /b- - iz CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project— / '„v /91,W4 Typof Inspection: P74- - go —/(v I - Atq1- j / Address: Suite #: /79Z0 5C fi/(Ajy Contact Person: Special Instructions: Occupancy Type: Phone No.: (j) 39 7— 604 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: '4 (46-0c_Z3.5'/ 7 .' 7cu,-- Hood & Duct: %ae Monitor: ,,t� Pre -Fire: t 6,--. / - As -5 „dr.. ,4 . e .044 1-4 s Occupancy Type: Tod' ASS ' Ass #/�/` ,e‘ __ } / i../ 3 4 4144, iv 4!” c.tL .."C. / 710 .0-, /,n''ed ,A,-- ,WPA /3 G e" 4.A.5 a -.-,., ` .. firoov .i..11,7/k/ Joie/ 44- 4 0 X # L 0- eli• A e/ 4 _•11-(7 ‘--$1.--- l 0.0 .27( --g ?z40 -/A�' / 4p/ l i,4-e/ -A - N ci ��/r-‘(er -//f i =. Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: '4 Fire Alarm:.,ed ,�; Hood & Duct: %ae Monitor: ,,t� Pre -Fire: t Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: .M/47 Date: 9/aG Hrs.: 3 0 $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.O. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit /6 f-/6 1)/S - C193 PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Proje /4(/////te2t-ec Type of In pection: `/f Address: Suite #: MO 564 ®/6u y Conta Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. 1,4. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: /07 /4/6 / /5 Not /0//vIL �' o,.,g ,/ A, �,�/ , -( w%*JI Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: r�2t.57 Date: 9ik//‘ Hrs.: $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F, D. Form F.P. 113 / INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit l)S — 0293 PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project' — 742-0•114- Fire Alarm: Type of spe ' n: Address:Contact Suite #:/ 7 S.."'C.., J IB Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. IrCorrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: /404i -- ;a.¢/ y/ ,r , 76 A%/tlt /,,v2 L'z j y 1 -b -P Jho✓ f Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: _5-3 Date: 9 2 /6 Hrs.: / • 1 $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 V 3 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: — 40/7 Peogl-S Fire Alarm: Type of In ection: Address: /7 Suite #: < 57C. / lC 7 Contact P son: Special Instructions: Phone No.: pproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sgelo PASO 9P',444,- w--- 0/4Si �� Z Ak9&#CC Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspectoi;J� _ 1053 Date: 7�/45// . Hrs.: Z. 0 $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip:: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit 16—S-1tt PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: T1,11/^) P674,6S. Type of Inspection: Address: Suite #: / 7g Sc. Fk 7 Contact Person: S ecial Instructions: P Occupancy Type: Phone No.: pfApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: — 00/ -/e) CeweA 0 EA-Ms./MA/fry bN4(i GlX/, /y geidk—'- Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector:_ 17-341,5-3 Date: 7 /) I i c Hrs.: i. 0 $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F..D. Form F.P. 113 V l INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: Pe Ips' Sprinklers: Type Inspection: Co0-e - I A�'�1,tiv S i\f4-2,v--( t),) L.) Address: 17 i a..p S _ C _ Suite #: ) / Contact Person: Occupancy Type: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: __pK Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: 1. fi-b A A A- 6 vim. K. c C .7. i U --G ke s 1,1\ ,Or -ow.- d et eif r kJ 14, 140 lU Li t(619 Sickv:e 0 k ^/u 0 rope OU -Q4 C k J S 0( s Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: Date: 74 pi Hrs.: P $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 I Washington Alarm 1253 South Jackson Street Seattle, WA 98144 Contact: Neal Rider (206)328-3288 City of Tukwila Fire Department 444 Andover Park East Tukwila, WA 98188 Dear Mr. Metzler: I am applying for a fire alarm permit to tie in a new duct detector to the existing fire alarm control panel. The detector is located in tenant space 18340 Southcenter Parkway. The detector will be zoned separately and resettable in the affected tenant space. Sincerely, Neal Rider Tuk-fire.TH UL LISTED AND FM APPROVED CENTRAL STATION LICENSED AND BONDED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WASHINGTON ALARM, INC. • 1253 South Jackson Street • Seattle, Washington 98144-2018 (206) 328-3288 Sales • (206) 328-1800 Central Station • (206) 322-7214 FAX 4 47$ May 18, 2016 WOMER & ASSOCIATES Reid B. Saario Brimstone Fire Safety Management, LLC. 23422 57th Ave. SE., Woodinville, WA. 98072 RE: Reid; ARCHITECTURAL • ENGINEERING • STRUCTURAL • PLANNING A CERTIFIED MINORITY DESIGN FIRM Old City Hall Building - 221 North Wall Street, Suite 600 - Spokane, WA 99201 T: (509) 534-4884 F: (509) 534-4943 Toll -Free: (888) 966-3778 Twin Peaks Fire Sprinkler Plan Review 17920 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, WA Larry Johnson, CFPS larryj@wwomer.com We have reviewed the following documents for the Fire Sprinkler System at the above referenced location: • Fire Sprinkler Shop Drawings Sheets: FP 1, FP 2 & FP 3 (PDF files provided) • Hydraulic Calculation for 1 Remote Area(PDF files provided • Seismic Bracing Calculations (PDF files provided) Fire Sprinkler NFPA 13 Section 22 "Working Drawings": The work is for the installation of new fire sprinkler protection in an existing single story building. Building construction and area layout are adequately provided. The FDC location and connection point to city main are shown. The dedicated fire service is 6". Site Fire Flow is stated to be 150 PSI static pressure, 20 PSI residual pressure at 6000 GPM flowing. Fire Sprinkler System A wet pipe system protects the interior of the building, and a dry pipe system protects an outside seating area. Steel piping is used throughout. Fire Sprinkler System Design Calculations Hydraulic calculations were submitted for the most demanding hydraulic remote area. Twenty One (21) K=5.6 sprinklers are calculated at a minimum density of 0.15 GPM/SF over 1500 SF, at a maximum spacing of 130 SF. Calculation requires 409 GPM + 250 GPM outside hose demand for a total flow of 659 GPM. The pressure required is 111 PSI for a safety margin of 37 PSI. I Twin Peaks - Fire Sprinkler Plan Review May 18, 2016 Page 2 of 2 Fire Sprinkler System Seismic Bracing Calculations Calculations were submitted to prove typical bracing loads. This review does not cover contractor compliance with project specifications. Womer & Associates are not under agreement to provide field observations of the installation and therefore are not responsible for changes made during installation/construction. This review can be considered comprehensive only to the extent of information provided to us. Field review and acceptance of the installation is by others. Operational satisfaction of the system is the responsibility of the contractor and design engineer. The plans and calculations are found to be in significant compliance with NFPA 13 (ed. 2013) subject to the above review comments. PDF files including our review stamp will be forwarded to your office. Should there be any questions concerning this review of sprinkler system plans, please contact us. In the Interest of Fire Safety Excellence, WOMER & ASSOCIATES Larry Johnson NFPA Certified Fire Protection Specialist (509) 534-4884 extension 4898 WASHINGTON SURVEYING AND RATING BUREAU 2003 Western Avenue, Suite 300 Seattle, Washington 98121-2190 (206) 441-6676 FAX (206) 728-2864 February 3, 1999 PLAN SHEETS 1 of 1 SUBJECT Newport Bay Restaurant South 180th Street & Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Washington The attached plans have been Accepted as meeting requiremenits for classification as a sprinklered risk: The following revisions or additions to the design as shown would qualify the protection for improved rates based upon information shown on these plans. Arrangements should be made to allow a representative of this Bureau to complete a cover inspection of all piping before it is concealed by building construction and to witness tests of the local alarm and 2 -inch water supply test pipe. Completed copies of the Contractor's Material and Test Certificates for both the overhead and underground piping should be submitted to this Bureau. All piping, valves, and fittings should be listed and labeled by UL for fire service and installed, tested, and flushed in accordance with NFPA standards. A minimum temperature of 40°F must be maintained with a thermostatically controlled heating system in all areas containing wet pipe sprinkler equipment. 1. Trapeze hangers used to support piping below lightweight wood and metal tube trusses should span 3 trusses for 3 -inch and smaller piping and span 4 trusses for larger piping, or provide written certification from a licensed structural engineer that the trusses and roof loads have been analyzed for the additional loads imposed by water filled pipe plus an additional 250 pounds at each point of support. Trapeze hangers should be secured to the trusses. 2. Install 212°F sprinklers in blind roof space. 3. Provide details of the connection to the dry pendent sprinklers in the coolers and freezers. See attached detail for recommended method of installation. 4. Extend sprinkler protection to all areas including hood and duct in kitchen, exterior eaves, soffits, canopies, and to roof skylights. ACCEPTED BY C ASIICNGTON SURVEYING AND ,, ;.reproved rates. ycceptarce and furconstruction and occupancy shown thereon. ; Finished � + ins ;oa:,, i.0.0` len tot into acaVangli :9 TYPICAL INSTALLATION OF DRY PENDENT SPRINKLER IN ALL COLD STORAGE FREEZERS AND COOLERS i 8" FOR COOLERS /2" FOR FREEZERS LV Awn SPACZ Asort carts VAR/ES r i • • WET • PIPE os -FILL WITH MASTIC I Vz" FLOOR FLANGE / W " THRE.ADED PIPE SLEEVE GASKET IW FLOOR FLANGE MAY USt WASNCN. $4S4117, ANO XNOY/r Nur /N L/t4 Of 'tool? /LANOt ORY PENDENT SPRINKLER • ADVANCED FIRE PROTECTION, INC. P.O. BOX 1543 WOODINVILLE, WA 98072 HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS FOR NEWPORT RESTAURANT TUKWILA,WA FILE NUMBER: 2i26 DATE: 1-21-99 -DESIGN-DATA- OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: ORDINARY GRP. I DENSITY: .13 gpm/ sq . f t . AREA OF APPLICATION: 3000 sq. ft. COVERAGE PER SPRINKLER: 130 sq. ft. NUMBER OF SPRINKLERS CALCULATED: 44 sprinklers TOTAL SPRINKLER WATER FLOW - REQUIRED-: 8-90-.4 gpm TOTAL WATER REQUIRED (including hose): 1540.4& gpm FLOW- AND- PRESSURE -W BOR-)- : 8,90-4-gpm-@- 49,4 -psi SPRINKLER ORIFICE SIZE: 1/2" inch NAME- OF CONTRACTOR: ADVANCED- EIRE- P-RO-TECTIION DESIGN/LAYOUT BY: JAMES B. AUTHORITY- HAVING JURISDICTION-: TUKWILA & WSRB CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION NUMBER: ADVANFP199B6 CALCULATIONS- BY -IBES COMPUTER PROGRAM--- (LICENSE #-414D27-69L- HRS SYSTEMS, INC. A-TLAWA-, GA SPRINKLER SYSTEM HYDRAULIC ANALYSIS Page 1 Date 01/22/19-99- JBNEWPT.SDF JOB TITLE: NEWPORT BAY RESAURANT WA'TBR SUPPLY DATA SOURCE- STATIC RESID. FLOW AVAIL_ TOTAL REQ'D NODE PRESS. PRESS. @ PRESS. @ DEMAND PRESS. TAG (PSI (PSI) (GPM). (PSL)- (GPM) (PSI) SRC 150.0 20.0 6163.0 140.0 1540.4 52.9 AGGREGATE FLOW ANALYSIS: TOTAL FLOW AT SOURCE TOTAL HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE AT SOURCE OTHER HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCES TOTAT, DISCHARGE FRONL ACTIVE SPRTNKT,ERS NODE ANALYSIS DATA 1540.4 GPM 500.0 CPM 150.0 GPM 890..4. GPM NOIR. TAG. RLEVATION DZOIIE TYPE PRESSURE DISCHARGE (FT) (PSI) (GPM) L 15.0 K= 5_ _6.Q. 14.9 21.6 2 15.0 - - - - 17.7 3 15-.0 K= 5._6.Q 15.0 21.7 4 15.0 16.9 5_ 1_5_0 K. 5..6_0_ 16.3 22.6 6 15.0 K= 5.60 16.2 22.5 7 15.0 K. 5_6 L 16.2 22.5 `' 8 15.0 K. 5.60 16.3 22.6 9 15.0 K= 5_60 6_Q_ 18.8_ 24.3 10 15.0 18.5 11_ 15.0 K.= a.641 14.8 21.5 12 15.0 16.2 11 15_0 K= 5._60 13._6 20.7 14 15.0 16.0 1_5_ L5_0 K= 5__Ea 11.7 20.7 16 15.0 - ,- - .- 15.2 17 15_ Q K= 5__6.0_ 14.9 21.6 18 15.0 K= 5.60 14.8 21.6 19- 15=_0 K< 5_6=Q 14 9- 21.6 20 15.0 K= 5.60 15.1 21.8 2L 15_0 K= 5_6.0_ 9_5 - 17.2 21A 15.0 K= 5.60 10.3 18.0 22 15_0 K= 5_6:0_ 9..8- 17.5 23 15.0 10.9 24_ 15_0 K= 5..6.0. 1.0._4_ 18.1 25 15.0 - - - - 11.6 2g 15.0 K= a.F-O- 9-.1 16.9 27 15.0 K= 5.60 10.1 17.8 28_ 15__0 13.3 29 15.0 K= 5.60 12.7 20.0 34L 1&.0 - - - - 13-.9 31 15.0 K= 5.60 11.1 18.7 32 15__0__ - - - - 12_6_. 11 15.0 K=- 5_6.0- 1Q_0. 17.7 SPRINKLER. SY&TEM_ HYDRAULLC ANALYSIS Page. 2 Date: 01/22/1999 JBNEWPT.SDF JOB TTTT,R • NEWPORT BAY RESAURANT NODE TAG ELEVATION NODE TYPE PRESSURE DISCHARGE (FT)- (PSI) (GPM) 34 15.0 11.0 3s_ 15_0_ K= 5_60_ 4._5 17.3 36 15.0 10.7 17- 15_0 K=-. 5-60- a.2 17.0 38 15.0 10.4 3a-. 15.._0_ K. 5_6.0_ 4.4. 17.2 40 15.0 10.3 - - - 41_ 15_0- 17.5 42 11.0 21.6 43._ 15_0_ K. 5_6.0_ 11.3 18.9 43A 15.0 K. 5.60 11.2 18.8 44, 15_0= K. 5_60 11-7 19.2 45 15.0 K. 5.60 12.4 19.7 4.6_ 15_1 K. 5 60 15.1_ 21.7 46A 15.0 16.9 - - - 47 15-._0 K. 5_60 13.9 20.9 47A 15.0 15,0 - - - 48.. L5.0 K. 5_60 15_0 21.7 49 15.0 - - - - 15.2 5a 15.0 K. 5_60- 14.6 21.4 51 15.0 16.0 52 L50 17 .3 53 15.0 K. 5.60 13.9 20.9 54- 1.5._0- - - - - 15.0- 55 15.0 K. 5.60 12.5 19.8 56 15__0 13._5_ - - - 57 15.0 K. 5.60 11.7 19.2 N 58_ 15.0 13.0 59 15.0 K. 5.60 11.9 19.3 6.1 15_Q 12.9 61 15.0 17.3 62 11.0 21.9 63 15.0 K. 5.60 16.5 22.7 64 15.0 17.8 65 15.0 K. 5.60 18.3 24.0 66. 15.0 K= 5_6Q 15.4 22.0 67 15.0 K. 5.60 12.6 19.8 68 15.0 13.8 69 15.0 K. 5.60 13.4 20.5 6.9k 15.0 K. 5_60_ 12.0 19.4 69B 15.0 13.6 70 15.0 19.1 71 11.0 22.5 72_ 15.0 31..8 73 11.0 34.5 TOR 11.0 36.9 BFIN 6.0 39.1 REQUIT 6.0 47.1 BOR 1.0 HOSE STREAM 49.4 150.0 SRC 1.5 SOURCE_ 52.9 1040.4 SPRINKLER- SYSTEM HYDRAULIC ANALYSIS Date: 01/22/1999 JOB- TITLE: NEWPORT BAY RESAURANT PIPE DATA PIPE_ TAG END ELEV. NOnES (FT) Pipe: 1 1 1.5.a 2 15.0 Pipp 2 2 15.0 4 15_0_ Pipe: 3 3 15.0 4 15.0 Pipe__ 4_ 4 15.0 5- 15.0 Pipe: 5 5_ 15.0_ 6 15.0 Pipe: 6_ 6 15.0 7 15_0 Pipe: 7 7 15.0 8 15.0 Pipe 8 8 15.0 72 15.0 Pipe: 9 2 15.0 10 15.0 Ripe:. 10 9 15.0 14 15_0. Pipe: 11 l4 15.0 12 15.0 Pipe_: 12 11 15.0 12 15.0 NOZ. (K) Q(_GPM). DIA(IN) LENGTH PT DISC. VEL(FPS) HW(C) (FT) (PSI). (GPM} - 21.6 1.049 PL 10.00 5.6 L4_9 2.1_6 8_0_ 120 FTG 2ET 0.0 17.7 0.0 0.150 TL 19.00 67 _5. 1-610 PL 0.0 17.7 0.0 10.6 120 FTG 0.0 16_9 Q_0 0.153 TL - 21.7 1.049 PL 5.6 15-.4 21.7 8-.0- 120 FTG 0.0 16.9 0.0 0.151 TL 0.0 16.9 0.0 5.6 16-.3 22.6 45.9 1.610 PL 7.2 120 FTG 0.075 TL 5.00 5.00. 4.00 2ET 13.00 8.00 8.00 Page 3 JBNEWPT.SDF PRESS. SUM. (PSI) PF PR PV PE PE PV PF PE PV PE PE PV 23.2 1.610 PL 6.00 PF 5.6 16_1 32__6 3.7 120 FTG ---- PE 5.6 16.2 22.5 0.021 TL 6.00 PV 5.6 16.2 5.6 16-2_ 5.6 16.2 5.6 16.3 5.6 16.3 0.0 3-1.8 0.0 17_7 0.0 18.5 5.6 18.8 0.0 18_5. 0.0 18-.5 0.0 16.2 5.6 14.8 0.0 - 16-.2 Pipe: 13 - 12 15_0_ 0.0 14 15__Q 0.0 16_0_ 0.7 1.610 PL 6.00 PF 22.5 0.1 120 FTG ---- PE 22.5 0.000 TL 6.00 PV r•, -21.8 1.610 PL 6.00 PF 22.5 3.4 120 FTG ---- PE 22.6 0.019 TL 6.00 PV 2.8 0.0 0.4 0.8 0.0 0.8 2.0 0.0 0.4 0.6 0.0 0.4 0.1 O .0 0.1 0.0 O .0 0.0 O .1 0.0 0.1 - 44.5 1.610 PL 170.00 PF 15.4 22.6 7.0 120 FTG 4E4T PE 0.0 0.0 0.071 TL 218.00 PV 0.3 - 89.1 1.610 PL 3.00 PF 0_0 14.0 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 0.256 TL 3.00 PV 1x4_4 4_316 PL 2.00 PE 24.3 4.0 120 FTG ET PE 0-0. 0_008 TL 44.00. PV 95.2 1.610 PL 8.00 PF 4.0 15.0 120 FTG ---- PR 0.0 0.290 TL 8.00 PV - 21_5. 1_049 PL 2_0Q 21.5 8.0 120 FTG ET 0.4 0.149 TL 9-.00- 73.7 -.04 73.7 1.610 PL 1.00 0_0_ 116_ 120 FTG - - - 0.0 0_180 TL 1.00 PE PE PV PF PE PV O .8 O .0 1.3 0.4 0.0 0.1 2.3 0.0 1.5 1.3 O .0 0.4 O .2 O .0 O .9 SPRINKLER SYSTEM HYDRAULIC ANALYSIS Date: 01/22/1999 SOB_ TTTT,E: NEWPORT BAY RESATJRANT PIPE DATA (cont.) PIPE_ TAG END ELEV. NC)fRS (ET) Pipe: 14 13- 15-g 14 5-.0- 14 15.0 Pipe_: 15 14 15.0 16 15.0 (gGPM} DIA(IN) LENGTH NOZ. PT DISC. VEL(FPS) HW(C) (FT) (K) (-PS2.) (GPM. F.L./FT - 20.7 1.049 PL 10.00 5.6 13-.6- 24.7 7.7 120 FTG ET 0.0 16.0 0.0 0.138 TL 17.00 Page 4 JBNEWPT.SDF PRESS. SUM. (PSI) PF PE PV 51_Q 1_610 PL 8.00 PF 0.0 16.0 0.0 8.4 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 15.2 Q.0 0.098 TL 8.00 PV Pipe: 16 15 15.0_ 5.6 16 15.0 0.0 PipP • 17 16 15.0 1.7 15_0_ Pipe: 18 17 15.0- 18 15.0 Pipe: 19 18 15.0 19- 15.0 Pipe: 20 19 15_0 0 20 15.0 Piper 21 20 15.0 72 15.0 Pipe: 22 21 15.0 21A 15.0 PipaL 22A 21A 15.0 23 15.0 Pipe: 23 22 15.0 23 15.0 Pipe-: 24 23 15.0 25- 15.0 Pipe: 25 24- 15.0 25 15.0 0.0 - 20.7 1.049 PL 2.00 PF 13_7 2_Q_7 7_7 120 FTG 2ET PE 15.2 0.0 0.139 TL 11.00 PV 15.2 0.0 5.6 14.9- 21_6 32.__3 1.610 PL 8.00 PF 5.1 , 120 FTG ---- PE 0.039 TL 8.00 PV 10.7 1.610 PL 5.6 14.9- 21.6 1.7 120 FTG 5.6 14.8 21.6 0.005 TL - 10.8 1.610 PL 5.6 14.8 21.6 1.7 120 FTG 5.6 14.9 21.6 0.005 TL 5.6 14.9 5.6 15.1 -32.4 1.610 PL 21__6 5_.1. 120 FTG 21.8 0.039 TL 6.00 6.00 PF PE PV 6.00 PF - --- PE 6.00 PV 6.00 PF - --- PE 6.00 PV 2.4 0.0 0.4 0.8 0.0 0.5 1.5 0.0 0.4 0.3 0.0 0.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.2 0.0 0.2 - 54_2 1.610 PL 115.00 PF 16.6 5.6 15.1 21.8 8.5 120 FTG 4E4T PE 0.0 0.0 31_8- Q0_ 0.102 TL 163.00 PV 0.5 -17.2 1.049 PL 2.00 PF 5.6 9.5- 17.2 6.4 120 FTG ET PE 5.6 10.3 18.0 0.099 TL 9.00 PV - 35__2 1.610 PL 13.00 PF 5.6 10.3 18.0 5.6 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 10.9- 0-.0 0.046 TL 13.00 PV - 17.5 1.049 PL 4.00 PF 5.6 9_8_ 17_5 6__5 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 10.9 0.0 0.102 TL 11.00 PV - 52_.8 1.610 PL 7.00 PF 0.0 10.9 0.0 8.3 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 11_6_ Q_0 0.097 TL 7.00 PV -18.1 1.049 PL 4.00 PF 5.6 10-.4- 18-.1 6.7 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 11.6 0.0 0.108 TL 11.00 PV 0.9 0.0 0.3 0.6 0.0 0.2 1.1 0.0 0.3 0.7 0.0 0.5 1.2 0.0 0.3 SPRINKLER SYSTEM HYDRAULIC ANALYSIS Date: 01/22/1999 JOB TITLE:- NEWPORT BAY RESAURANT PIPE DATA (cont.) Page 5 JBNEWPT.SDF PIPE TAGS Q GPM) DIA (IN) LENGTH PRESS. END ELEV. NOZ. PT DISC. VEL(FPS) HW(C) (FT) SUM. NF R& (FT) (K) (P -HI). (GPM) F_Is./FT (PSI) Pipe: 26 -70.9 1.610 PL 10.00 PF 1.7 25 1.5 _0 4_0. 11_E. Q_Q 11_2_ 120. FTG ---- PE 0.0 28 15.0 0.0 13.3 0.0 0.168 TL 10.00 PV 0.8 Pipe_:_ 27 -16.9 1.049 PL 6.00 PF 1.0 26 15.0 5.6 9.1 16.9 6.3 120 FTG 2E PE 0.0 2.7 15_Q 5.6 1Q_1_ 17..-.8 _ 0.095 TL 10.00 PV 0.3 Pipe: 28 -34.7 1.049 PL 4.00 PF 3.2 27 15.0 5.6 10.1 17.8 12.9 120 FTG T PE 0.0 28 15.0 0.0 13.3 0.0 0.360 TL 9.00 PV 1.1 pipp- 29 -105_5 1.610 PL 4.00 PF 4.2 28 15.0 0.0 13.3 0.0 16.6 . 120 FTG T PE 0.0 4-1 15.0 0.0 17.5- 0.0 0.350 TL 12.00 PV 1.9 Pipe: 29A 107.8 1.610 PL 2.00 PF 3.6 41 15.0 0.0 17.5 0_0. 17.0 120 FTG T PE 0.0 30 15.0 0.0 13.9 0.0 0.364 TL 10.00 PV 1.9 pipe 1Q -20_0 1.049 PL 2.00 PF 1.2 29 15.0 5.6 12.7 20.0 7.4 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 30 15.0 0.0 13.9 0.0 0.130 TL 9.00 PV 0.4 r, Pipe: 31 87.8 1.610 PL 5.00 PF 1.2 30- 15.0 0.0 13.9 0.0 13.8 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 32 15.0 0.0 12.6 0.0 0.250 TL 5.00 PV 1.3 Pipe: 32 -18.7 1.049 PL 6.00 PF 1.5 31 15.0 5.6 11.1 18.7 6.9 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 32 15.0 0.0 12.6 0.0 0.115 TL 13.00 PV 0.3 Pipe: 33 69.2 1.610 PL 10.00 PF 1.6 32 15.0 0.0 12.6 0_0 10_9 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 34 15.0 0.0 11.0 0.0 0.160 TL 10.00 PV 0.8 Pip:- 34 -17.7 1.049 PL 3.00 PF 1.0 33 15.0 5.6 10.0 17.7 6.6 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 34. 15.0 0.0 11.0 0.0 0.104 TL 10.00 PV 0.3 Pipe: 35 51.5 1.610 PL 3.00 PF 0.3 34- 15.0 0.0 11.0- 0-.0 8.1 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 36 15.0 0.0 10.7 0.0 0.093 TL 3.00 PV 0.4 Pipe.: 16 -17.3 1.049 PL 5.00 PF 1.2 35 15.0 5.6 9.5 17.3 6.4 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 36 15.0 0.0 10.7= 0-.0 0.099 TL 12.00 PV 0.3 Pipe: 37 - 34.2 1.610 PL 7.00 PF 0.3 16 15_0= 0.0 1O 7- Q_0 5.4. 12.0 FTG ---- PE 0.0 38 15.0 _ 0..0 - 10.4 - 0.0 0_044 TL 7.00- PV 0.2 SPRINKLER SVSTRM HYDRAULIC ANALYSIS Date: 01/22/1999 JOB_TITLE• NEWPORT BAY RESAURANT PIPE DATA (cont.) Page 6 JBNEWPT.SDF PIPE -TAG, Q GPM) DIA(IN) LENGTH PRESS. END ELEV. NOZ. PT DISC. VEL(FPS) HW(C) (FT) SUM. NQF?R S (ET} (K) (R11 (RP14) F . L . / FT (PSI) Pipe: 38 -17.0 1.049 PL 6.00 PF 1.2 3-7- 15.0- 5.6 9.2 17.0 6.3 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 38 15.0 0.0 10.4 0.0 0.096 TL 13.00 PV 0.3 Pipe: 39 17.2 1.610 PL 8.00 PF 0.1 38 15.0 0.0 10.4 0.0 2.7 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 4-0- 15-.0 0.0 10.3- 0.0 0.012 TL 8.00 PV 0.0 Pipe: 40 -17.2 1.049 PL 2.00 PF 0.9 3a 15-.0 5.6 9.4- 17.2 6.4 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 40 15.0 0.0 10.3 0.0 0.099 TL 9.00 PV 0.3 Rip: 42_ -213- 3 - 2.727 PL 4.00 PF 2.3 41 15.0 0.0 17.5 0.0 11.7 120 FTG T PE 1.7 42- 11__0 0.0 21_6 0_0 0.099 TL 23.50 PV 0.9 Pipe: 43 -422.0 4.316 PL 10.00 PF 0.4 42 11.0- 0.0 21.6- 0.0 9.3 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 62 11.0 0.0 21.9 0.0 0.037 TL 10.00 PV 0.6 Pipe.. 43A -1a_S 1.610 PL 7.00 PF 0.1 43A 15.0 5.6 11.2 18.8 3.0 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 43 15.0 5.6 11.3- 18.9 0.014 TL 7.00 PV 0.1 Pipe: 44 -37.6 1.610 PL 7.00 PF 0.4 43 15-_0 5.6 11_._3__ 1$_9 5.9 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 44 15.0 5.6 11.7 19.2 0.052 TL 7.00 PV 0.2 Pipe:. 45_ -56A, 1_610 PL_ 6.00 PF 0.7 44 15.0 5.6 11.7 19.2 9.0 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 45 15.R 5_6 12.4- 19.7 0 .111_ TL- 6.0a PV 0.5 Pipe: 46 -76.5 1.610 PL 10.00 PF 2.7 45- 15-. 0- 5.6 12.4- 19-. 7- 12.1 120 FTG E PE 0.0 46 15.0 5.6 15.1 21.7 0.193 TL 14.00 PV 1.0 Pipe: 47 -74,2_ 1_61G PL 4-.00- PF 2.2 46 15.0 5.6 15.1 21.7 11.7 120 FTG T PE 0.0 5-2- 15- 0- 0-. 0-- 1-7-. 3- a-.0 - 0.183- TL 12.00- PV- q.9 Pipe: 48 -20.9 1.049 PL 1.00 PF 1.1 47- 15.0- 5.6 13-.9- 20-.9- 7.8- 120 FTG ET PE- 0.0 47A 15.0 0.0 15.0 0.0 0.141 TL 8.00 PV 0.4 Pipe 4-9- -20.9 1.610 PL 12Q0-- PF- 0.2 47A 15.0 0.0 15.0 0.0 3.3 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 4-9- 15.a 0-. 0- 1-5-:2- 0.0- 0-.017 TL 12.00- PV 0.1 Pipe: 50 -21.7 1.610 PL 1.00 PF 0.2 46- 15-.G- 5-;-a- 21.7 1.4 120-- FTG ET PE- R.0 49 15_Q - 0__0 15._1. 0_0. 0_019_. TIS 13_00 PV 0..1. SPRINKLER- SYSTEM- HYDRAULIC ANALYSIS - Date: 01/22/1999 JOB- TITLE-: NEWPORT BAY- RBS-AURZk.NT PIPE DATA (cont.) Page 7 JBNEWPT.SDF PIPE TAG-- Q(GPM-} DIM -IN} LENGTH PRESS. END ELEV. NOZ. PT DISC. VEL(FPS) HW(C) (FT) SUM. NODES (-FT} (-K} (-PS-I}- (GPM}- F.L./FT (PSI) Pipe: 51 -42.6 1.610 PL 12.00 PF 0.8 4-9 15.0- 0-. 0 15.2 0-. 0 6-. 7 120 FTG - - - - PE 0.0 51 15.0 0.0 16.0 0.0 0.065 TL 12.00 PV 0.3 Pipe: 5-2 -21.4- 1.049- PL- 3.0-0- PF 1.5 50 15.0 5.6 14.6 21.4 7.9 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 51 15-.0- Q. 0 16-.0 0 . Q 0.147 TL 10-.00- PV 0.4 Pipe: 53 -64.0 1.610 PL 9.00 PF 1.2 51 15.0 0.0 16-.0- 0-. 0- 10-.1 120- FTG - - - - PE 9.0 61 15.0 0.0 17.3 0.0 0.139 TL 9.00 PV 0.7 Pipe-: 54- -98.2 4.316 PL 4-.00 PF 0.0 52 15.0 0.0 17.3 0.0 2.2 , 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 61 15.0 0.0 17.3 0.0 0.003 TL 4.00 PV Q.0 Pipe: 54A -24.0 1.049 PL 3.00 PF 1.8 4-6- 15.0 5.6 15.1 21.7 &.9 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 46A 15.0 0.0 16.9 0.0 0.183 TL 10.00 PV 0.5 Pipe: 54B- -24,0- 1.6-14 PL 8.00 PF 0.4 46A 15.0 0.0 16.9 0.0 3.8 120 FTG T PE .0.0 52 15-.0 0.0 17.3 0.0- 0.023 TL 16.00 PV 0.1 Pipe: 54C 79.1 1.610 PL 3.00 PF 2.3 �1 15-.0 0.0 17.3 0.4 12.5 120 FTG T PP Q.0 54 15.0 0.0 15.0 0.0 0.206 TL 11.00 PV 1.0 Pipe: 55- -24.1 1.449 PL 1.00 PF 1.1 53 15.0 5.6 13.9 20.9 7.7 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 54 15.0- 0.0 15.0- 0.0- 0.14-1 TL 4.00 PV Q.4 Pipe: 56 . 58.3 1.610 PL 13.00 PF 1.5 54- 15-.0 4.0 15-.0 0.0 9.2 120 FTG ---- PE- 0.0 56 15.0 0.0 13.5 0.0 0.117 TL 13.00 PV 0.6 Pipe: 57- -19.8 1.049 PL 1.40- PF 1.0 55 15.0 5.6 12.5 19.8 7.3 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 56- 15.0 0 .0 13-.5 0.4 0.128 TL 8.44 D -V- 0.4 Pipe: 58 38.5 1.610 PL 9.00 PF 0.5 56- 15-.4 0.4 13.5- 0-.0- 6.1 120 FTG - - - - PE- Q.0 58 15.0 0.0 13.0 0.0 0.054 TL 9.00 PV 0.2 Pipe-: 59- -19-.2 1.04-9 PL 4-.00- P -F 1.3 57 15.0 5.6 11.7 19.2 7.1 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 58- 15.4- 0.0 13-. 0-- 0.0- 4.120 TL 11.00-- PV- q. 3 Pipe: 60 19.3 1.610 PL 9.00 PF 0.1 54 15-.0-- 0-.0- 13- � 0- 0-_ 0- 3-. 0 120- FTC - - - - LLE- 0.0 60- 15.0- 0.0 - 12.9 0.0 0.015 TL 9.00 PV 0.1 SPRINKLER SYSTEM. BYDRAIJL.IC ANALYSIS Date: 01/22/1999 JOB- TITLE •_ NEWPORT BAY RESAURNT PIPE DATA (cont.) Page 8 JBNEWPT.SDF RIPE -TAG- Q -(GPM.) DIA(IN) LENG•TB- PRESS. END ELEV. NOZ. PT DISC. VEL(FPS) HW(C) (FT) SUM. NODS- (RT} (K) ( P--S-I )- (QW4Y F.L./FT (1.I ) Pipe: 61 -19.3 1.049 PL 1.00 PF 1.0 5.9 15.0- 5.6 11.9- 19-.3 7.2 120 FTG ET PE 9.0 60 15.0 0.0 12.9 0.0 0.122 TL 8.00 PV 0.3 Pipe: 6-3 -241.3 2.727 PL 4-.0-4 PF 2.9 61 15.0 0.0 17.3 0.0 13.3 120 FTG T PE 1.7 62 11.0- 0.0 21.9- 0-.0- 0.124 TL 23.50- PV ;.2 Pipe: 64 -663.3 4.316 PL 7.00 PF 0.6 6-2 11.0- 0.4 21.9- 4.0- 14.5 124 FTG - - - - P. 0.0 71 11.0 0.0 22.5 0.0 0.086 TL 7.00 PV 1.4 Pipe.: 6-5- -22.7 1.449 PL 1.44 PF 1.3 63 15.0 5.6 16.5 22.7 8.4 , 120 FTG ET PE 0.0 64- 15-.4 0.4 17.8. 4.4 4.165 TL 8.44 WV 0.5 Pipe: 66 -22.7 1.610 PL 12.00 PF 0.5 64 15-.0 0.0 17.8 0.E} 3.6 120 FTG 3E- PE Q.0 65 15.0 5.6 18.3 24.0 0.020 TL 24.00 PV 0.1 Pipe: 67 -46.7 1.6.14 PL 3.04 PF 0.9 65 15.0 5.6 18.3 24.0 7.4 120 FTG T PE 0.0 7-0 15.0- 0.0 19.1 0.0 0.077 TL 11.04 PV 9.4 Pipe: 67A 81.7 1.610 PL 9.00 PF 3.7 70 15.4 0.0 19.1 01.4 12.9 124 FTG T PE 0.0 66 15.0 5.6 15.4 22.0 0.218 TL 17.00 PV 1.1 Pipe: 68 59.7 1.610 PL 13.44 PF 1.6 66 15.0 5.6 15.4 22.0 9.4 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 68 15.4 0.0 13..8- 4.4 4.122 TL 13.44 WV- 0.6 Pipe: 69 -19.8 1.049 PL 3.00 PF 1.3 67 15.0 5.6 12.6 19-.0 7.4 120 FTG ET PE Q.0 68 15.0 0.0 13.8 0.0 0.128 TL 10.00 PV 0.4 Pipe: 70 39.9 1.610 PL 5.44 PF 0.3 68 15.0 0.0 13.8 0.0 6.3 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 69$ 15.0- 0.0 13-.6 0-.0- 0.058 TL 5.09- P- 9.3 Pipe: 71 -19.4 1.049 PL 4.00 PF 1.6 69A 15.4 5.6 12.0 19.4- 7.1 110 FTG 2ET PFS 0.0 69B 15.0 0.0 13.6 0.0 0.123 TL 13.00 PV 0.3 Pipe: 71A 20.5 1.610 PL 10.00 PF 0.2 69B 15.0 0.0 13.6 0.0 3.2 120 FTG ---- PE 0.0 6-9- 15-.0 5.6 13.4- 20.5 0.017 TL 10.00 PV 0.1 Pipe: 72 -128.4 2.727 PL 4.00 PF 1.7 70 15.0- 0.0 19.1 0.0 7.1 120 FTG 2T PE- 1.7 71 11-_X1 0.0 22.5_ (1._Q 0 _Q3-9 TL 43 _ 0 Q PV. 0.3 SPRINKLER SYSTEM HYDRAULIC ANALYSIS Date: 01/22/1999 JOB TITLE: NEWPORT BAY RESAUR4NT PIPE DATA (cont.) PIPE TAG- Q 4GPM)- DIA (IN) LENGTH END ELEV. NOZ. PT DISC. VEL(FPS) HW(C) (FT) NOD (FT)- (K) (LSI) (GPM)- F.L./FT Pipe: 73 71 11.4- 73 11.0 Pipe-: 74- 72 15.0 73 11.0- 7-3 TOR Pipe: 75 11.0 11.0 Pipe-: 76 TOR 11.0 B-PIW - 791.7 0.0 22.5- 0-.4- 17.4 0.0 34.5 0.0 4.316 PL 58.00 120 FTG 3E- 0.120 TL 100.00 Page 9 JBNEWPT.SDF PRES. SUM. (PSI) PF 12.0 PE- 0.0 PV 2.0 -98-.7- 2.7-27 PL 4-.04- PF 0.0 31.8 0.0 5.4 120 FTG 2T PE 0.0 34.5- 0.4- 4.424 TL 4-3.04 RV 1.0 1.7 0.2 - 890.4 4.316 PL 2.00 PF 2.4 0.0 34.5 0-.0-- 19--.5 120 FTG E P$ Q.0 0.0 36.9 0.0 0.149 TL 16.00 PV 2.6 0.0 36.9 0.0- 3-9--.1 Pipe: 77 B.FOUT 6.4 4.0 BFIN 6.0 0.0 39.1 -8-90-.4 6.385 PL 0.0 8.9 , 120 FTG 0.0 0.022 TL 4.44 PF 0.1 ---- PE 2.2 4.&& PV FIXED PRESSURE LOSS DEVICE 47.1 4.4 8.4 psi, 894.4 Rpm 0.0 Ripe: 78 BFOUT 6.0 0.0 BOR 1.0 H.S. Pipe: 79 BOR- 1.0- H.S. SRC 1.5 SRCE Pipe: 80 42 11.0 9- 15.0 -894.4 47.1 0.0 8.9 49.4 154.4 -1040.4 49-.4 150.0 11.2 52.9 (N/A) 248.7 0.0 21.6 0.0 4.6 5.6 1&.& 24.3 6.385 120 0.422 6.150 140 0.027 4.316 120 0.010 PL 4.44 FTG ---- TL 4-.00 PL 35.00 FTG 2ETG TL 140.00 PL 15-.00 FTG 4ET TL 99.00 Q.5 PF 0.1 PE 2.2 PV 0.5 PF 3.7 PE -Q.2 PV 0.8 PF 1.0 PE -1.7 PV Q.1 NOTES: (-1)- Calculations were performed by the HASS 6.3.0 computer program under license no. 414D769 granted by HRS Systems, Inc. 2193 Ranchwood Dr., N.E. Atlanta, GA- 30.345 (2) The system has been balanced to provide an average imbalance- at each node of 0-.442- gpm and a maximum imbalance at any node of 0.161 gpm. (-33-- Velocity pressures are -printed -for information only, and -re not used in balancing the system. Maximum water velocity is 19.5- et/sec at p-ipa 7-s. SPRIT` KJ LF SYSTEM HYT)R AUL T C ANALYSIS Date: 01/22/1999 JOB TITLE: NEW ORT BAY RESAUWIT (4) PIPE FITTINGS TABLE Pipe- Table- Name: STANDARD__P I P PAGE: A D-iameter (in) 1_049 L.6_10 PAGE: D - Diameter (int MATERIAL: S40 HWC: 120 Equivalent Fitting Lengths E T L C B Ell Tee T,ngEll Chkvly BLyV1v Page. 10 JBNEWPT.SDF in Feet G A GatVly A1mChk D DP,Vly N NPTee 2.40- 5-.0-0- 2.40 5-.44 6-00 1.44 10.00- 10_00 5.00 4_.00 8__QQ 2__QO 9.__Qd 6_00 1 _d0_ 10__00_ 10.00 8.00 MATERIAL: CL5-2D1 HWC: 140 Equivalent Fitting Lengths E T L C B Ell Tee LngEll ChkV1v BfyVly 6-.150 24.00 52.00- 16.00 55.00- 17.00 PAGE: F Diameter_ (in) 2.727 4.316 6.385 MATERIAL: FLW795 HWC: 120 Equivalent- Fitting Lengths E T L C B Ell Tee- LagE-ll ChkV v- B-fyV1v 10.00 14.00 18.00 19.50 28_0_0 39.00 4.00 8.00 12.00 23.00 31_00 42.00 11.50 17.00 13.00 in Feet G N GatV1v NPTee 5.00 52,.00 in Feet G A Gat\ily AlmChk 2.00 3.00 4.00 28.00 40 GQ 40.00 D DP 38.00 44,.00 44.00 SPRINKLER SYSTEM - HYDRAULIC ANALYS I S Date: 01/22/1999 JQB_ TTTT,E _ NRWPQRT BAL RESAI RANT WATER SUPPLY CURVE \ \ \ 117+ \ \ \ \ P104+- R \ E \ S \ S 91+ U \ R \ E P S I 78+ 65+ 52+ X 39-+ \ \ \ \ 2.6+- LEGEND \ 'I X = Required Water Supply " * <-20.0 psi @ 6163 gpm 52.91 psi @ 1540.4 gpm " Flow Test Point \ \ \ Page 11 JBNEWPT.SDF 13-+ It 0 = Available Water Supply " 140.00 psi @ 1540.4 gpm " il +-+---+----+ + + + + + + 16002400 3200 4000 4800 5600 6400 7200 8000 PLOW Ell Erl 0 F1 CD - 0 tilEsr •-• .r �--� O N tr 00 9' C\ J tv rr- tn C0. W O O W U4- - O O .L1 A to •a _t,, A O C\ ti . O CJS O O C\ tat w O J LA Qt 0 O N N 0 O C' R3- 00 U' N J W O W W A W U O W ' gyp. A 00 O O A vi O J O O to to to O Os C' O O C' 41 C' O ON J W J O 0 J c,r 00 J O 00 W A 00 4P O 00 O 00 00 U O A 00 O 4--- N td O O to w P W 0 to O tr U A A cn O O O Ui A 00 O Vi O O O 0 0 0 Q O N On -wog -10A) V 7 a 0 0\ (IuozuoH) g X 00 4fgroa'49/$ 'ATauassy Jo7Daq( TIT 9'Teor1aaJX :an.nJ A101d t C-) 0 • i1 Tol-Brace Seismic Calculations Project Address: 1WIN PEAKS— Brimstone Fire Safety Manly 2422 57TH Ave SE B -Line Woodinville, Wa 98072 425-956-3434 by F:T•N on 2013 NFPA Pamphlet #13 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY _._ TUKWILA,WABRIMSFS918KO Job # 16-1017 Calculations based Brace Information Tolco Brace Components Maximum Spacing 40' Maximum Brace Length 7_0" Bracing Material 1" Angle from Vertical 60° Least Rad. of Gyration 0.42" LJR Value 200 Max Horizontal Load 160.4 Force Factor (Cp) 0.65 0" (12.19 m) _ (2.13 m) Tolco Component Fig. Number Adjusted Load Fig. 4LA Clamp 866 lbs (393 kg) Fig.980 Universal Swivel 1745 lbs (792 kg) Based on CONCENTRIC Loading *Please Note: These calculations are for Tolco components only. Use of any other components voids these calculations and the listing of the assembly. Sch.40 Min.*Calculation - . _. _...... .- - 11 mm . )_- lbs (728 kg) Assembly 84.17.4401.0 &UME 11otL°MKA .rte . _ - I* FIG all / Detail .s "a+ar._- \ • ;; � • �'' _ ©, ,, Fastener Information Fastener Orientation NFPA Maximum Load 600 Diameter 1/tin.9 Length 3-1/2in. Type Through Type F lbs (272 kg) - - _ _. . . - - - - -Bolt Brace Identification on Plans 2-1/2" LONGITUDINAL Orientation of Brace Longitudinal Braced Pipe: 2.5" Sch.7 Steel Pipe Load Information Size and Type of Pipe Total Length Total Calculated Load 2.5" Sch.7 Steel Pipe (63.5 mm) 40ft (12.2 m) 133 lbs (60 kg) This stamp implies that the and required supporting calculations drawings/calculations are found NFPA standards, specifically review comments noted in this office. The review can extent of the data supplied Project: Twin Peoks designing agency has submitted the plans for professional review and the to be in significant compliance with pamphlet NFPA 13 - 2013, subject to the May 18, 2016 review letter issued by be considered comprehensive only to the to the reviewer. - Tukwila, WA 16-1017 Brimstone Fire # Percentage added for Fittings aid Wod1FR A ASSCINATFS 15% 20 lbs (9.07 kg) Total Adjusted Load of ahW+itrIgfZB Tec LILTING ENGINEERS 152 lbs (69 kg) I fTol-Brace Verizon 81 Tol-Brace Seismic Calculations Project Address: TWIN PEAKS 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY TUKWILA,WA Job # 16-1017 Brimstone Fire Safety Manage 2422 57TH Ave SE Woodinville, Wa 98072 425-956-3434 BRIM5FS918K0 Calculations based on 2013 NFPA Pamphlet #13 B -Line by Fil•N Brace Information Tolco Brace Components Maximum Spacing 12' 6' (3.81 m) Maximum Brace Length ? 0 (2.13 m) Bracing Material Angle from Vertical Least Rad. of Gyration LIR Value Max Horizontal Load Force Factor (Cp) 1" Sch.40 60° Min. 0.42" (11 mm) 200 1604 lbs (728 kg) _ 0.65 Tolco Component Fig. Number Adjusted Load Fig. 1001 Clamp 1386 lbs (629 kg) Fig.980 Universal Swivel 1745 lbs (792 kg) *Calculation Based on CONCENTRIC Loading "Please Note: These calculations are for Tolco components only. Use of any other components voids these calculations and the listing of the assembly. Fastener Information Fastener Orientation Maximum Load Diameter Length Type NFPA Type F_ 600 lbs (272 kg) 1/tin. 3-1/2in. Through -Bolt Assembly Detail TOLCO FIG. 98 UNIVERSAL SWAY BRACE ATTACHMENT TOLCO FIG. 1001 FAST CLAMP STEEL PIPE Brace Identification on Plans 2-1/2" LATERAL Orientation of Brace Lateral Braced Pipe: 2.5" Sch.7 Steel Pipe Load Information Size and Type of Pipe 2.5" Sch.7 Steel Pipe (63.5 mm) 12.5ft (3.8 m) 41 lbs (19 kg) 1.5" Sch.7 Steel Pipe altjsrrekpmp implies that the designing agencyllba434gilbsjlitted the p CMS los (91 kg) 1.25" Sch.7 Steel PioellT.7 n supporting colwluliuna GApru m►ieview and them Hu (7 kg) nwin je • rnlculations are found to by in SigNITIHNIt compliance witn14 lbs (6 kg) Total Length Total Calculated Load 1" Sch.7, Steel Pipe 24k1fPUtOstandards, specifically pamphlet NFPA Percentage added fo Total Adjusted 11114441:91 3, subject to review comments noted in the MAT 12, 2016 review letter issued by this office. The review con be considered comprehensive only to the extent of the data supplied to the reviewer. Project: Medford Fire Station #2 MEDFORD, OR — Lowco Fire Protection r L Nilbe vrBfiF aeC ilk GEENGINEERS I SAMIN & ASSOCIATES 115% 41 lbs (18.6 kg) 311 to (141 kg) Rol -Brace Verizon 81 Tol-Brace Seismic Calculations Brimstone Fire Safety Managi Address: TWIN PEAKS _ 2422 57TH Ave SE Wa 98072� 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY _ - 425-956-3434 TU KWILA,WA BRIMSFS918Ko Job # 16-1017 Calculations based on 2013 NFPA Pamphlet #13 M.Woodinville by E:,T.N inProject Brace Information Tolco Brace Components Maximum Spacing 40' 0• (12.19 m) Maximum Brace Length T 0" (2.13 m) _ Bracing Material 1" Sch.40 Angle from Vertical' Min 9 . — Tolco Component Fig. Number Adjusted Load Fig. 4LA Clamp 866 lbs (393 kg) Fig.980 Universal Swivel 1745 lbs (792 kg) *Calculation Based on CONCENTRIC Loading *please Note: These calculations are for Tolco components only. Use of any other components voids these calculations and the listing of the assembly. Least Rad. of Gyration 0.42" (11 _mm) — _. LIR Value 200 Max Horizontal Load 1604 lbs (728 kg) _ Force Factor (Cp) 0.65 Assembly Detail .SIWERSAI. \ LACE MAI:WM ®6!' MACE refi-N, Fastener Information Fastener Orientation NFPA Type F - Maximum Load 600 lbs (272 kg)•;- Diameter, 1/tin. Length 3-1/2in. 11$4.21r SWAY PIACI ATfACIMBR �:`' ,;_ ,k ' /it ;: IQ' �' Type Through -Bolt Brace Identification on Plans 2" LONGITUDINAL Orientation of Brace Longitudinal Braced Pipe: 2" Sch.7 Steel Pipe Load Information Load Size and Types stomp implies that the des�ning ogence 'tRtS'JOS/RAN:I the pl XVflal Calculated 2" Sch.7 Steel Pipe (59!84n1� wired supporting calculations for profei Ql2�new and the ,e 99 Its (45 kg) --64..wi,nye/4.LI..ulutions are found to Lnr aiyrirfii.unl c.urnpliunt,e with NFPA standards, specifically pamphlet NFPA 13 — 2013, subject to review comments noted in the May 18, 2016 review letter issued by this office. The review can be considered comprehensive only to the extent of the data supplied to the reviewer. Project: Twin Peaks — Tukwila, WA 7, 1 Brimstone Fire # 16-1017 WOMER & ASSOCIATES FIRE PROTECTION CONSULTING ENGINEERS Percentage added tor I-itnngs and SpnnKiers r i5 0r- i3 lbs (6.8 kg) Total Adjusted Load of all pipe within Zone of Influence 113 lbs (51 kg) iTol-Brace Verizon 81 Tol-Brace Seismic Calculations Project Address: TWIN PEAKS 17920 SOUTHGENTER PKWY TU KWILA,WA Job # 16-1017 Brimstone Fire Safety Manage 2422 57TH Ave SE Woodinville, Wa 98072 425-956-3434 BRIMSFS918KO Calculations based on 2013 NFPA Pamphlet #13 B -Line by ETN Brace Information Tolco Brace Components Maximum Spacing 7' 0" (2.13 m) Maximum Brace Length 7' 0" (2.13 m) Bracing Material 1" Sch.40 Angle from Vertical Least Rad. of Gyration UR Value Max Horizontal Load Force Factor (Cp) 60° Min. 0.42" (11 mm) 200 1604 lbs (728 kg) _ _ 0.65 Tolco Component Fig. Number Fig. 1001 Clamp Fig.980 Universal Swivel Adjusted Load 866 lbs (393 kg) 1745 lbs (792 kg) 'Calculation Based on CONCENTRIC Loading 'Please Note: These calculations are for Tolco components only. Use of any other components voids these calculations and the fisting of the assembly. Fastener Information Fastener Orientation Maximum Load Diameter Length Type NFPA Type F 600 lbs (272 kg) 1/2in. 3-1/2in. Through -Bolt Assembly Detail TOLCO FIG. 98 UNIVERSAL SWAY BRACE ATTACHMENT TOLCO FIG. 1001 FAST CLAMP STEEL PIPE Brace Identification on Plans 2" LATERAL Orientation of Brace Lateral Braced Pipe: 2" Sch.7 Steel Pipe Load Information Size and Type of Pipe Total Length Total Calculated Load 2" Sch.7 Steel Pipe (50.8 mm) 7ft (2.1 m) 17 lbs (8 kg) 1.5" Sch.7 Steel Pipe (38.1 mm) 1.25" Sch.7 Steel Pipe 1" Sch.7 Steel Pipe (2 102ft (31.1 m) 180 Ills (82 kg) (31b77 randrnp implies that the designing agen Rt submitted the e of roview and the s ��)compliance w it lbs i 4J ))r eyun ed supporting calculations for pr drawing,:/cahulatlOnS me found to he in NFPA standards, specifically pamphlet NFPA 13 — 2013, subject to review comments noted in the May 18, 2016 review letter issued by this office. The review can be considered comprehensive only to the extent of the data supplied to the reviewer. 41fft Percentage added for Fitt Total Adjusted Log iToi-Brace Verizon 81 Project: Twin Peaks — Tukwila, WA 3piia1T l Stone Fire # 16-101 1 pi iltt zatrRluence 15% riicE PROTECTION CONSULTING ENGINEERS 35 lbs 1 266 lb: 5 kg) 10 kg) 15.88 kg) (121 kg) WASHINGTON STATE CERTIFICATE OF COMPETENCY FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Darin Syverson 3135-0914-C Level Brimstone Fire Safety Management, L.I.C. BRIMSFS918KO , L 5/13/2016 Signature Date ... Fire Protection by Computer Design BRIMSTONE FIRE SAFETY 23422 57TH AVE SE Your Street Address 2 WOODINVILLE, WA 98072 425-956-3434 Job Name : TWIN PEAKS Building : FP -1 Location : 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY TUKWILA,WA 98188 System : ONE Contract : 16-1017 This stamp implies that the designing agency has submitted thl plans Data File : Twin Peaks.WAFrequiired supporting calculations for professional review and the drawings/calculations are found to be in significant compliance with NFPA standards, specifically pamphlet NFPA 13 — 2013, subject to review c.vr nits nvteJ hr the Muy T8, 20I8 review letter IssueU by this office. The review con be considered comprehensive only to the extent of the data supplied to the reviewer. Project: Twin Peaks — Tukwila, WA Brimstone Fire # 16-1017 WOMER & ASSOCIATES FIRE PROTECTION CONSULTING ENGINEERS Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 Water Supply Curve C )Lo ▪ co c)•O) Mco CDOf000) 100.-OLO t t�N(0M N -a C co (o 3 N ^ E 02-04) cU tL CD C as N EE E E N O a) 15 v)Dw2 >. >. WClU) U)� C.—NN OM (o co0DDIOV) E G) 0 O 0 0 O O 0 N CO 7 N y f2 O aW u To' To" O. 7-cny N.9Qa) 1 1 000 U 0 N 0 O O OO O O O co O N O N 0 0 CO CSI 00 O() CO ▪ et cc) N 0 CO V' N 0 OD (O ▪ N (3) OD N. CO Mr M (V a W cn (/) CC W G O O M O O N N 0 O O O O N. Fittings Used Summary BRIMSTONE FIRE SAFETY TWIN PEAKS Page 2 Date 4/5/16 Fitting Legend Abbrev. Name 1/2 % 1 1% 1% 2 2% 3 3% 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 B NFPA 13 Butterfly Valve 0 0 0 0 0 6 7 10 0 12 9 10 12 19 21 0 0 0 0 0 "E NFPA 13 90' Standard Elbow 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 14 18 22 27 35 40 45 50 61 G NFPA 13 Gate Valve 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 13 T NFPA 1390' Flow thru Tee 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 17 20 25 30 35 50 60 71 81 91 101 121 Units Summary Diameter Units Inches Length Units Feet Flow Units US Gallons per Minute Pressure Units Pounds per Square Inch Note: Fitting Legend provides equivalent pipe lengths for fittings types of various diameters. Equivalent lengths shown are standard for actual diameters of Sched 40 pipe and CFactors of 120 except as noted with *. The fittings marked with a * show equivalent lengths values supplied by manufacturers based on specific pipe diameters and CFactors and they require no adjustment. All values for fittings not marked with a * will be adjusted in the calculation for CFactors of other than 120 and diameters other than Sched 40 per NFPA. Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 Pressure / Flow Summary - STANDARD BRIMSTONE FIRE SAFETY TWIN PEAKS Page 3 Date 4/5/16 Node Elevation K -Fact Pt Pn Flow Density Area Press No. Actual Actual Req. 1 10.0 7.16 na 2 10.0 8.03 na 3 10.0 8.86 na 4 10.0 9.55 na 5 10.0 10.76 na H6 13.0 5.6 12.13 na 19.5 0.15 130 7.0 H7 13.0 5.6 13.2 na 20.35 0.15 130 7.0 H8 13.0 5.6 14.31 na 21.19 0.15 130 7.0 H9 13.0 5.6 15.22 na 21.84 0.15 130 7.0 H10 17.0 5.6 11.41 na 18.92 0.15 49 7.0 H11 17.0 5.6 12.12 na 19.5 0.15 84 7.0 H12 17.0 5.6 16.66 na 22.86 0.15 84 7.0 H13 17.0 5.6 17.75 na 23.59 0.15 84 7.0 H14 17.0 5.6 19.74 na 24.88 0.15 84 7.0 H15 21.0 5.6 8.55 na 16.38 0.15 79 7.0 15 21.0 5.6 9.18 na 16.97 0.15 49 7.0 H16 21.0 5.6 9.9 na 17.62 0.15 84 7.0 H17 21.0 5.6 10.72 na 18.34 0.15 84 7.0 H18 21.0 5.6 12.09 na 19.47 0.15 84 7.0 H19 21.0 5.6 14.26 na 21.14 0.15 84 7.0 H2O 21.0 5.6 17.47 na 23.41 0.15 84 7.0 M1 10.0 22.43 na M2 13.0 21.3 na M3 17.0 28.26 na M4 21.0 29.68 na M5 10.0 70.69 na TOR 10.0 107.52 na BOR 2.0 111.86 na BFI 2.0 105.92 na UG 0.0 107.95 na 250.0 CITY 0.0 110.99 na H01 9.0 5.6 7.37 na 15.2 0.15 43 7.0 H2 9.0 5.6 7.97 na 15.81 0.15 72 7.0 H3 9.0 5.6 8.76 na 16.57 0.15 72 7.0 H4 9.0 5.6 9.4 na 17.17 0.15 72 7.0 H5 9.0 5.6 11.09 na 18.65 0.15 72 7.0 The maximum velocity is 23.23 and it occurs in the pipe between nodes M3 and M4 Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 Final Calculations - Hazen -Williams BRIMSTONE FIRE SAFETY TWIN PEAKS Page 4 Date 4/5/16 Hyd. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv Point Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn ******* Notes 1 15.20 1.08 0.0 12.710 7.162 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2 15.2 0.0681 0.0 12.710 0.865 Vel = 5.32 2 15.81 1.408 0.0 12.000 8.027 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3 31.01 0.0698 0.0 12.000 0.838 Vel = 6.39 3 16.57 1.728 0.0 12.000 8.865 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 4 47.58 0.0569 0.0 12.000 0.683 Vel = 6.51 4 17.18 1.728 0.0 12.000 9.548 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 5 64.76 0.1006 0.0 12.000 1.207 Vel = 8.86 5 18.64 1.728 2E 11.29 51.130 10.755 to 120.0 T 11.29 22.580 -1.299 M2 83.4 0.1607 0.0 73.710 11.845 Vel = 11.41 0.0 83.40 21.301 K Factor = 18.07 H6 19.50 1.08 0.0 10.000 12.125 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 H7 19.5 0.1078 0.0 10.000 1.078 K Factor = 5.60 Vel = 6.83 H7 20.35 1.408 0.0 10.000 13.203 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 H8 39.85 0.1111 0.0 10.000 1.111 K Factor = 5.60 VeI = 8.21 H8 21.18 1.728 0.0 10.000 14.314 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 H9 61.03 0.0902 0.0 10.000 0.902 K Factor = 5.60 Vel = 8.35 H9 21.85 1.728 T 11.29 25.960 15.216 to 120.0 0.0 11.290 1.299 M1 82.88 0.1588 0.0 37.250 5.917 K Factor = 5.60 Vel = 11.34 0.0 82.88 22.432 K Factor = 17.50 H10 18.92 1.08 0.0 7.000 11.412 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 H11 18.92 0.1019 0.0 7.000 0.713 K Factor = 5.60 Vel = 6.63 H11 19.50 1.08 0.0 12.000 12.125 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 H12 38.42 0.3778 0.0 12.000 4.533 K Factor = 5.60 Vel = 13.46 H12 22.85 1.728 0.0 12.000 16.658 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 H13 61.27 0.0908 0.0 12.000 1.090 K Factor = 5.60 Vel = 8.38 H13 23.60 1.728 0.0 12.000 17.748 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 H14 84.87 0.1660 0.0 12.000 1.992 K Factor = 5.60 Vel = 11.61 H14 24.88 1.728 T 11.29 20.620 19.740 to 120.0 0.0 11.290 0.0 M3 109.75 0.2670 0.0 31.910 8.520 K Factor = 5.60 Vel = 15.01 0.0 109.75 28.260 K Factor = 20.65 Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 Final Calculations - Hazen -Williams BRIMSTONE FIRE SAFETY TWIN PEAKS Page 5 Date 4/5/16 Hyd. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv Point Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn Notes H15 16.38 1.08 T 5.762 2.250 8.553 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 5.762 0.0 15 16.38 0.0780 0.0 8.012 0.625 Vel = 5.74 15 16.96 1.08 0.0 2.500 9.178 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 H16 33.34 0.2904 0.0 2.500 0.726 Vel = 11.68 H16 17.63 1.53 0.0 7.000 9.904 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 H17 50.97 0.1169 0.0 7.000 0.818 Vel = 8.89 H17 18.33 1.728 0.0 12.000 10.722 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 H18 69.3 0.1142 0.0 12.000 1.370 Vel = 9.48 H18 19.48 1.728 0.0 12.000 12.092 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 H19 88.78 0.1803 0.0 12.000 2.164 Vel = 12.15 H19 21.14 1.728 0.0 12.000 14.256 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 H2O 109.92 0.2678 0.0 12.000 3.214 Vel = 15.04 H2O 23.41 1.728 T 11.29 20.620 17.470 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 11.290 0.0 M4 133.33 0.3827 0.0 31.910 12.213 Vel = 18.24 0.0 133.33 29.683 K Factor = 24.47 M1 82.88 2.203 0.0 3.460 22.432 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 -1.299 M2 82.88 0.0486 0.0 3.460 0.168 Vel = 6.98 M2 83.40 2.203 6E 40.916 8.330 21.301 to 120.0 0.0 40.916 -1.732 M3 166.28 0.1765 0.0 49.246 8.691 Vel = 14.00 M3 109.75 2.203 0.0 7.000 28.260 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 -1.732 M4 276.03 0.4507 0.0 7.000 3.155 VeI = 23.23 M4 133.32 2.703 7E 65.277 39.750 29.683 to 120.0 0.0 65.277 4.764 M5 409.35 0.3451 0.0 105.027 36.245 Vel = 22.89 M5 0.0 2.703 5E 46.627 60.080 70.692 to 120.0 0.0 46.627 0.0 TOR 409.35 0.3451 0.0 106.707 36.825 Vel = 22.89 TOR 0.0 4.31 B 16.724 8.000 107.517 to 120.0 0.0 16.724 3.465 BOR 409.35 0.0356 0.0 24.724 0.879 Vel = 9.00 BOR 0.0 4.31 T 27.874 1.000 111.861 to 120.0 0.0 27.874 0.866 BFO 409.35 0.0356 0.0 28.874 1.027 Vel = 9.00 0.0 409.35 113.754 K Factor = 38.38 BFI -409.35 4.31 0.0 1.000 105.924 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 7.866 BFO -409.35 -0.0360 0.0 1.000 -0.036 * * Fixed Loss = 7 Vel = 9.00 Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 r Final Calculations - Hazen -Williams BRIMSTONE FIRE SAFETY TWIN PEAKS Page 6 Date 4/5/16 Hyd. Qa Dia. Fitting Pipe Pt Pt Ref. "C" or Ftng's Pe Pv Point Qt Pf/Ft Eqv. Ln. Total Pf Pn ******* Notes 0.0 -409.35 113.754 K Factor = -38.38 BFI 409.35 4.1 2E 29.067 5.000 105.924 to 140.0 0.0 29.067 0.866 UG 409.35 0.0341 0.0 34.067 1.162 Vel = 9.95 UG 250.00 6.16 G 4.304 115.500 107.952 to 140.0 T 43.037 152.065 0.0 CITY 659.35 0.0113 2E 40.168 267.565 3.036 EqI 64.556 Qa = 250 Vel = 7.10 0.0 659.35 110.988 K Factor = 62.59 H01 15.20 1.08 E 2.305 1.000 7.371 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 2.305 -0.433 1 15.2 0.0678 0.0 3.305 0.224 Vel = 5.32 0.0 15.20 7.162 K Factor = 5.68 H2 15.81 1.08 T 5.762 1.000 7.966 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 5.762 -0.433 2 15.81 0.0731 0.0 6.762 0.494 VeI = 5.54 0.0 15.81 8.027 K Factor = 5.58 H3 16.57 1.08 T 5.762 1.000 8.759 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 5.762 -0.433 3 16.57 0.0797 0.0 6.762 0.539 Vel = 5.80 0.0 16.57 8.865 K Factor = 5.57 H4 17.17 1.08 T 5.762 1.000 9.405 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 5.762 -0.433 4 17.17 0.0852 0.0 6.762 0.576 Vel = 6.01 0.0 17.17 9.548 K Factor = 5.56 H5 18.65 1.08 0.0 1.000 11.089 K Factor = 5.60 to 120.0 0.0 0.0 -0.433 5 18.65 0.0990 0.0 1.000 0.099 Vel = 6.53 0.0 18.65 10.755 K Factor = 5.69 Computer Programs by Hydratec Inc. Route 111 Windham N.H. USA 03087 /Firm iliapirimair realsgrELVIVAIMIFilt!ir Material Submittal Twin Peaks Restaurant 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY TUKWILA, WA 98188 JOB # 16-1017 INDEX 1: PIPE & FITTINGS 2: SPRINKLER HEADS 3: HANGERS & BRACING 4: VALVES 5: MISC. 23422 57th Ave SE Woodinville WA 98072 (425) 956-3434 office (425) 956-3723 fax Contractor License: BRIMSFS918KO Steel Fire Sprinkler Pipe Wheatland Tube INC STEEL GROUP • II • 11) 41) • 0 Wheatland Tube Fire Sprinkler Products Wheatland Tube began producing steel fire sprinkler pipe in 1931, and today offers the most complete line of products in the industry. Engineers and contractors across the continent depend on us for steel fire sprinkler pipe and a number of proprietary products— always in stock and ready to deliver. 100% Compatibility We guarantee our steel pipe is 100% compatible with fire protection systems that use only steel pipe. Why risk incompatibility? Wheatland's complete line of steel sprinkler pipe makes design easy and brings you peace of mind.* Accurate and Efficient Our products help you work safer and smarter—not harder. With our extensive in-house capabilities, we offer the shortest production cycle times in the industry, and we deliver to you accurately and on time, every time. 'Wheatland Tube has never warranted compatibility between its steel pipe products and CPVC products. Green and Sustainable Our steel fire sprinkler pipe contains recycled steel and provides decades of reliable service. At the end of its life, the steel may be almost fully recycled, supporting your green policies. The Strength to Deliver Wheatland Tube is a division of JMC Steel Group, the largest independent manufacturer of steel hollow structural sections (HSS) and steel pipe in North America. We leverage our 100 -plus years of pipe and tube manufacturing experience and expertise to produce two million tons of pipe and tube annually. Backed by JMC, Wheatland has the strength to deliver a complete line of steel fire sprinkler pipe that sets the industry standard. ID 3.6% larger than Schedule 40 Saves costs in threadable applications Superior flow characteristics Can be joined by ' screwed, grooved or plain -end fittings, or welded Safer to weld than many zinc -coated, light -wall threadable products Threads smoothly and easily; requires no thread warning Proprietary mill coating extends shelf life, makes painting quicker and easier Approved for standard hanger spacing Mega -Thread Greater hydraulics, greater value Wheatland's Mega -Thread is an engineered, light -wall steel sprinkler pipe that offers ID 3.6% larger than Schedule 40 for superior flow. Mega -Thread saves costs in threadable applications and can be joined by screwed, grooved or plain -end fittings, or welded. With its proprietary mill coating, Mega -Thread is an excellent Schedule 40 alternative that threads smoothly and easily so you can downsize your entire sprinkler system with the same or greater quality. TECHNICAL DATA CHART NPS CI) 1'/n 2 WT./ FT. NOM ID LBS. WT./ FT. WT./ LIFT H2O FILLED PCS./LIFT 21' WT./LIFT WT./LIFT 24' 25' 1.087 1.462 1.865 70 2149 2456 2559'. 0.416 1.989 2.674 51 2130 2435 2536- '1.650 2.370 3.297 44 2190 2503 2607 2.117 3.094 4.621 30 1949 2228 2321 SPECIFICATIONS NOM NPS OD NOM ID Mega -Thread YYY I 1 1.315 1.087 11/4 1.660 1.416 [Schedule 40 1.049 UL CRR` MEGA -THREAD Nominal wt./ft. 1.00 1.00 .61 1.462 Mega -Thread ' Schedule 40 L.W.T. Pipe 1.380 1.00 11/2 1.900 1.650 1.610 1.00 2 11 2.375 " 2.117 2.067 1.00 • Calculated using Standard UL CRR formula, UL Fire Protection Directory, Category VIZY. • The CRR is a ratio value used to measure the ability of a pipe to withstand corrosion. Threaded Schedule 40 steel pipe is used as the benchmark (value of 1.0). 1.00 .39 1.00 .31 1.00 .25 Pcs./ Lift 70 1.989 51 2.370 44 3.094 30 Mega -Thread Meets or Exceeds These Standards: • NFPA 13, NFPA 14 • ASTM A795, Type E, Grade A • UL, C -UL and FM Listed for wet, dry and preaction sprinkler systems • FM Approved for use in wet systems • Hot -dip galvanized meets FM requirements for dry systems • Rated 300 psi working pressure CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS ANVIL Class 125 (Standard) ❑FIGURE 358 Tee Size A B Unit Weight Black hB-' -Ei NPS ON in mm in mm bs J® 1/4 8 1/2 13 13/16 22 0.22 0.10 3/8 10 5/8 16 1 25 0.35 0.16 112 15 11/16 17 11/8 29 0.56 0.25 3/4 20 13/16 22 15116 33 0.84 0.38 1 25 15/16 24 11/2 38 125 0757 1114 32 ` 11/8 `29 , 16/4 44 2.03 0.92 11/2 40 15/is !33 115/ie 49 2.70 1.222 2 50 19/16 40 21/4 57 4.23 1.92 21/2 65 113/16 47 211/16 68 6.67 3.02 3 80 23/16 56 31/8 79 10.00 4.54 3.21 1.46 - A--k-A -� A - - f B 31/2 90 27/16 62 37/16 87 13.29 6.03 4 100 211/16 68 33/4 95 16.33 7.41 5 125 35/16 84 41/2 114 27.33 12.39 6 150 37/8 98 51/8 130 40.85 18.53 8 200 53/16 132 69/16 167 79.00 35.83 ❑FI 0 Crest Sizc A B Meek N0t6 tav in in las le 9s 45 mm 9146 -14 mm 43/46 22 2.80 1.27 a/4 28 13/46 22 15/4s 33 1.03 0.47 1 25 15/46 24 1}/a38 1.50 0.72 I Lt °•° -.=°= 1 -- j H $ ---- $ 44/4 32 196 20 144 44 2.42 1.10 4-92 40 15/46 33 1'46 49 3.21 1.46 2 1946 40 294 57 5.28 2.39 50 24/2 65 14-346 47 2}1/4.6 68---8:97---------3:66 �1-•1•- A-' ri: I 3 80 29/4s 56 31-/s 79 11.84 5.37 B-..--4- $ I 4-1-00---29/4 70 3 /+S 98 10.63 8.96 6 150 3'/6 98 596 130 47.67 21.62 Note: See following page for pressure -temperature ratings. PROJECT INFORMATION Project: 0 Approved APPROVAL STAMP Address: ❑ Approved as noted Contractor: 0 Not approved Engineer: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: Remarks: PF -11.13 • CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS tiwiL Anvil standard and extra heavy cast iron threaded fittings are manufactured in accordance with ASME-B16.4 (except plugs and bushings, ASME B16.14). Dimensions also conform to Federal Specifications, WW -P-501 (except plugs and bushings WW -P-471). C APPROVED For Listings/Approval Details and Limitations, visit our website at www.anvilintl.com or contact an Anvil Sales Representative. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Pressure - Temperature Ratings Temperature Pressure Class 125 Class 250 iF Pressure Rating psi bar psi bar 1 -20° to 150° -28.9 to 65.6 175 12.1 400 27.6 200° 93.3 165 11.4 370 25.5 250° 121.1 150 10.3 340 23.4 300° 148.9 140 9.7 310 21.4 350° 176.7 125 8.6 300 20.7 400° 204.4 — — 250 17.2 Standards and Specifications Dimensions Material Galvanizing""' Thread Pressure Rating Federal/Other CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS Class 125 ASME B16.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME 816.4• ASME B16.4■ Class 250 ASME 816.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME B16.4• ASME B16.411 CAST IRON PLUGS AND BUSHINGS ASME 816.14• ASTM A- 126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME 816.14• WW -P-471 • an American National standard (ANSI), + ASME B1.20.1 was ANSI B2.1, ■ Formerly WW -P-501 ASTM B 633. Type I, SC 4, may be supplied as alternate zinc coating per applicable ASME 616 product standard. PF -11.13 CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS &) 4N • General Assembly of Threaded Fittings 1) Inspect both male and female components prior to assembly. • Threads should be free from mechanical damage, dirt, chips and excess cutting oil. • Clean or replace components as necessary. 2) Application of thread sealant • Use a thread sealant that is fast drying, sets -up to a semi hard condition and is vibration resistant. Alternately, an anaerobic sealant may be utilized. • Thoroughly mix the thread sealant prior to application. • Apply a thick even coat to the male threads only. Best application is achieved with a brush stiff enough to force sealant down to the root of the threads. 3) Joint Makeup • For sizes up to and including 2" pipe, wrench tight makeup is considered three full turns past handtight. Handtight engagement for 1/2" through 2" thread varies from 41/2 turns to 5 turns. • For 2'/2" through 4" sizes, wrench tight makeup is considered two full turns past handtight. Handtight engagement for 2'/2" through 4" thread varies from 5'/2 turns to 63/4turns. PF -11.13 • CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS (�Z�MNIL Class 125 (Standard) [II FIGURE -389 Gored Size Bleep- alv. EW 4 100 3 82 1 73 3 82 1 73 5 125 650 295 650 295 6 150 994 451 994 4.51 8 200 20 26 919 20 26 919 FIGURE 387 Square Head Plugs, Cored Size Approved as noted Contractor: Unit Weight Engineer: Remarks: Black GaIv. Notes 2: NPS ON tbs kg t6 kg kg 3/4 20 0.13 0.06 0.13 0.06 1 25 0.25 0.11 0.25 0.11 11/4 32 0.39. 0.18 0.39 0.18 11/2 40 0.50 0.23 0.50 0.23 2 50 0.82 0.37 0.82 0.37 21/2 65 1.32 0.60 1.32 0.60 3 80 1.87 0.85 1.87 0.85 31/2 90 2.50 1.13 2.50 1.13 4 100 4.00 1.81 4.00 1.81 [II FIGURE -389 Gored Size Bleep- alv. EW 4 100 3 82 1 73 3 82 1 73 5 125 650 295 650 295 6 150 994 451 994 4.51 8 200 20 26 919 20 26 919 n 80Solid 8e Meek 4 100 568 258 5 125 960 435 6 150 1478 670 According to specifications, hex bushings and cored plugs should be used with 150# malleable iron and 125# cast iron. Solid plugs and face bushings are recommended for use with 250# and 300# fittings. Note: See following page for pressure -temperature ratings. PROJECT INFORMATION Project: FIGURE -388 Square-HeedDi Muter 5014 Address: Approved as noted Contractor: Unit -Weight Engineer: Remarks: BlackSRlr��. Notes 1: Notes 2: NPs ON i lbs kg lbs kg ih2 42 15 0.10 0.05 0.10 0.05 3/4 20 0.17 0.08 0.17 0.08 1 25 0.32 0.15 0.32 0.15 494 32 0.53 0.24 0.53 0.24 4-92 40 0.76 0.34 0.76 0.34 50 1.23 0.56 1.23 0.56 21-k 65 2.00 0.91 2.00 0.91 3 80 3.18 1.44 3.18 1.44 392 90 4.38 1.99 n 80Solid 8e Meek 4 100 568 258 5 125 960 435 6 150 1478 670 According to specifications, hex bushings and cored plugs should be used with 150# malleable iron and 125# cast iron. Solid plugs and face bushings are recommended for use with 250# and 300# fittings. Note: See following page for pressure -temperature ratings. PROJECT INFORMATION Project: APPROVAL STAMP fl Approved Address: Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PF -11.13 CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS (7)))- /AM/IL • Anvil standard and extra heavy cast iron threaded fittings are manufactured in accordance with ASME-B16.4 (except plugs and bushings, ASME B16.14). Dimensions also conform to Federal Specifications, WW -P-501 (except plugs and bushings WW -P-471). C �7 US APPROVED For Listings/Approval Details and Limitations, visit our website at www.anvilintl.com or contact an Anvil Sales Representative. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Pressure - Temperature Ratings Temperature Pressure Class 125 Class 250 CR i Federal/Other CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS pet k -20° to 150° -28.9 to 65.6 175 12.1 400 27.6 200° 93.3 165 11.4 370 25.5 250° 121.1 150 10.3 340 23.4 300° 148.9 140 9.7 310 21.4 350° 176.7 125 8.6 300 20.7 400° 204.4 — — 250 17.2 Standards and Specifications Dimensions Material Galvanizing"" Thread Pressure Rating Federal/Other CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS Class 125 ASME B16.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME B16.4• ASME 816.4■ Class 250 ASME 816.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME 81.20.1+ ASME B16.40 ASME 616.4U CAST IRON PLUGS AND BUSHINGS ASME B16.14• ASTM A- 126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME B16.14• WW -P-471 • an American National standard (ANSI), + ASME B1.20.1 was ANSI B2.1, ■ Formerly WW -P-501 "" ASTM B 633. Type I, SC 4, may be supplied as alternate zinc coating per applicable ASME B16 product standard. PF -11.13 CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS *4.4..mfolx; General Assembly of Threaded Fittings 1) Inspect both male and female components prior to assembly. • Threads should be free from mechanical damage, dirt, chips and excess cutting oil. • Clean or replace components as necessary. 2) Application of thread sealant • Use a thread sealant that is fast drying, sets -up to a semi hard condition and is vibration resistant. Alternately, an anaerobic sealant may be utilized. • Thoroughly mix the thread sealant prior to application. • Apply a thick even coat to the male threads only. Best application is achieved with a brush stiff enough to force sealant down to the root of the threads. 3) Joint Makeup • For sizes up to and including 2" pipe, wrench tight makeup is considered three full turns past handtight. Handtight engagement for '/2" through 2" thread varies from 4'/2 turns to 5 turns. • For 2'/2" through 4" sizes, wrench tight makeup is considered two full turns past handtight. Handtight engagement for 21/2" through 4" thread varies from 51/2 turns to 153/4 turns. PF -11.13 CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS Class 125 (Standard) ❑FIGURE 367 Concentric Reducer APPROVAL STAMP ❑ Approved ._ _, � - __ _ Engineer: Remarks: Size Notes 1: A B* Unit Weight Black NPS ON NPS ON in mm in mm lbs !q1 3/4 20 1/2 15 5/8 16 19/16 40 0.40 0.18 1 t/2 (Nei , 15 11/16 17 111/16 43 0.54 0.24 0.63 0.29 3/4 (Hex) 20 7/16 11 11/2 38 1/2 15 9/16 14 15/8 41 0.84 0.38 11/4 32 3/4 20 1 25 21/8 54 0.90 0.41 1 25 15/16 24 21/8 54 1.07 0.49 112 15 1/2 13 15/8 41 1.00 0.45 11/2 40 3/4 20 1/2 13 15/8 41 1.20 0.54 1.50 0.68 1 25 1/2 13 13/4 44 11/4 32 1 25 21/4 57 1.45 0.66 1/2 15 5/8 16 2 51 2.00 0.91 3/4 20 3/4 19 2 51 1.90 0.86 2 50 1 25 3/4 19 2 51 1.83 0.83 11/4 32 13/16 22 21/8 54 1.78 0.81 11/2 40 7/8 22 23/16 56 1.98 0.90 21/2 65 11/2 40 3/4 19 2 51 3.10 1.41 2.98 1.35 2 50 1 25 29/16 65 3/4 20 15/16 24 21/2 64 4.31 1.95 3 80 2 50 11/16 27 23/4 70 3.96 1.80 21/2 65 15/16 24 213/16 73 4.40 2.00 2 50 13/16 30 215/16 75 6.50 2.95 4 100 21/2 65 13/16 30 31/8 79 7.78 3.53 3 80 11/16 27 31/8 79 7.01 3.18 5 125 4 100 11/16 27 35/16 84 10.48 4.75 6 150 4 100 11/8 29 37/16 87 13.83 6.27 15.53 7.04 5 125 11/8 29 39/16 90 8 200 6 150 11/4 32 37/8 98 29.10 13.20 * Dimension "B" does not conform to ASME standard. Note: See following page for pressure -temperature ratings. PROJECT INFORMATION Project: APPROVAL STAMP ❑ Approved Address: ❑ Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: nr in 1A CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS Anvil standard and extra heavy cast iron threaded fittings are manufactured in accordance with ASME-B16.4 (except plugs and bushings, ASME B16.14). Dimensions also conform to Federal Specifications, WW -P-501 (except plugs and bushings WW -P-471). C APPROVED For Listings/Approval Details and Limitations, visit our website at www.anvilintl.com or contact an Anvil Sales Representative. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Pressure - Temperature Ratings Temperature Pressure Class 125 Class 250 en (°C) p0 bar psi bar -20° to 150° -28.9 to 65.6 175 12.1 400 27.6 200° 93.3 165 11.4 370 25.5 250° 121.1 150 10.3 340 23.4 300° 148.9 140 9.7 310 21.4. 350° 176.7 125 8.6 300 20.7 400° 204.4 — — 250 17.2 Standards and Specifications Dimensions Material Galvanizing"" Thread Pressure Rating Federal/Other CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS Class 125 ASME 816.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME B16.4• ASME 816.4■ Class 250 ASME 816.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME 816.4• ASME 816.4■ CAST IRON PLUGS AND BUSHINGS ASME B16.14• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME 816.14• WW -P-471 • an American National standard (ANSI), + ASME 81.20.1 was ANSI B2.1, • Formerly WW -P-501 **** ASTM B 633. Type I, SC 4, may be supplied as alternate zinc coating per applicable ASME 1316 product standard. PF -11.13 CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS (Z) General Assembly of Threaded Fittings 1) Inspect both male and female components prior to assembly. • Threads should be free from mechanical damage, dirt, chips and excess cutting oil. • Clean or replace components as necessary. 2) Application of thread sealant • Use a thread sealant that is fast drying, sets -up to a semi hard condition and is vibration resistant. Alternately, an anaerobic sealant may be utilized. • Thoroughly mix the thread sealant prior to application. • Apply a thick even coat to the male threads only. Best application is achieved with a brush stiff enough to force sealant down to the root of the threads. 3) Joint Makeup • For sizes up to and including 2" pipe, wrench tight makeup is considered three full turns past handtight. Handtight engagement for '/2" through 2" thread varies from 41/2 turns to 5 turns. • For 2'/2" through 4" sizes, wrench tight makeup is considered two full turns past handtight. Handtight engagement for 2'/2" through 4" thread varies from 5'/2 turns to 63/4turns. PF -11.13 CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS ANVIL Class 125 (Standard) nFIGURE 390 Countersunk Plugs Size Unit Weight Black GaIv. See Fig. 390 in Malleable Iron for other available sizes. NPS ON kg lbs.0 kq 1 25 0.20 0.09 0.20 0.09 11/4 32 0.32 0.15 0.32 0.15 11/2 40 0.47 0.21 0.47 0.21 2 50 0.84 0.38 0.84 0.38 21/2 65 1.40 0.63 — — 3 80 2.25 1.02 — – 31/2 90 3.02 1.37 — — 4 100 3.76 1.71 — — FIGURE -381 Size Unit -Weight Black Col NPS ON lbs kg 030 1m 2}'o 65 2 55 1 16 3 80 410 186 4 100 640 290 5 125 1070 485 6 150 1420 644 14.20 6.44 FIGURE70 t:oekttrt Size —Unit -Weight A B C D Block C:0 NM ON 24/O 65 iI mm in mm to mm is RIM 3 500 89 3180 81 590 15 0 90 2 Ib® 113 051 3 80 4 270 108 3 840 98 670 17 090 2 1 60 0 73 According to specifications, hex bushings and cored plugs should be used with 150# malleable iron and 125# cast iron. Solid plugs and face bushings are recommended for use with 250# and 300# fittings. Note: See following page for pressure -temperature ratings. Project: PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP ▪ Approved Address: ▪ Approved as noted Contractor: 0 Not approved Engineer: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: Remarks: PF -11.13 CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS Anvil standard and extra heavy cast iron threaded fittings are manufactured in accordance with ASME-616.4 (except plugs and bushings, ASME B16.14). Dimensions also conform to Federal Specifications, WW -P-501 (except plugs and bushings WW -P-471). C "L US APPROVED For Listings/Approval Details and Limitations, visit our website at www.anvilintl.com or contact an Anvil Sales Representative. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Pressure - Temperature Ratings Temperature Pressure Class 125 Class 250 Thread r0 Federal/Other or Class 125 ASME 816.4• -20° to 150° -28.9 to 65.6 175 12.1 400 27.6 200° 93.3 165 11.4 370 25.5 250° 121.1 150 10.3 340 23.4 300° 148.9 140 9.7 310 21.4 350° 176.7 125 8.6 300 20.7 400° 204.4 — — 250 17.2 Standards and Specifications Dimensions Material Galvanizing""" Thread Pressure Rating Federal/Other CAST IRON. THREAD D FITTINGS Class 125 ASME 816.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME B16.4• ASME B16.4U Class 250 ASME 816.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME 81.20.1+ ASME B16.4• ASMEB16.4111 CAST IRON PLUGS AND BUSHINGS • ASME B16.14• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME B16.14• WW -P-471 • an American National standard (ANSI), + ASME 81.20.1 was ANSI B2.1, • Formerly WW -P-501 "" ASTM B 633. Type I, SC 4, may be supplied as alternate zinc coating per applicable ASME B16 product standard. PF -11.13 CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS 7i)i,�rEa�.r, t General Assembly of Threaded Fittings 1) Inspect both male and female components prior to assembly. • Threads should be free from mechanical damage, dirt, chips and excess cutting oil. • Clean or replace components as necessary. 2) Application of thread sealant • Use a thread sealant that is fast drying, sets -up to a semi hard condition and is vibration resistant. Alternately, an anaerobic sealant may be utilized. • Thoroughly mix the thread sealant prior to application. • Apply a thick even coat to the male threads only. Best application is achieved with a brush stiff enough to force sealant down to the root of the threads. 3) Joint Makeup • For sizes up to and including 2" pipe, wrench tight makeup is considered three full turns past handtight. Handtight engagement for 1/2' through 2" thread varies from 41/2 turns to 5 turns. • For 21/2" through 4" sizes, wrench tight makeup is considered two full turns past handtight. Handtight engagement for 21/2" through 4" thread varies from 51/2 turns to 63/4turns. PF -11.13 ,ST IRON THREADED FITTINGS ;lass 125 (Standard) 7 FIGURE 90° Elbow 351 Size A B Unit Weight Black € 1 t r ` NPS DN in mm in mm lbs kg 1/4 8 1/2 13 13/16 22 0.16 0.07 3/8 10 9/1s 14 15/16 24 0.25 0.11 1/2 15 11/16 17 11/8 29 0.40 0.18 3/4 20 13/16 22 115/16 33 0.60 0.27 1916' .1-4--B -AH [ 25 (24 11/2 (38 0.92 0.42 11/d. W.„ _1-/6 a-4- 32_,_ (29 1 /4 1.44 0.65. 11/2 40 15/16 33 115/16 49 1.95 0.88 2 50 19/16 40 21/4 57 3.13 1.42 21/2 65 113/16 47 . 211/16 68 4.94 2.24 3 80 23/16 56 31/8 79 7.21 3.27 31/2 90 27/16 62 37/16 87 9.67 4.39 4- 100 211/16 68 313/16 98 12.17 5.52 5 125 35/16 84 41/2 114 21.46 9.73 6 150 37/8 98 51/8 130 31.33 14.21 8 200 53/16 132 69/16 167 64.56 29.28 te: See following page for pressure -temperature ratings. Dt: ss: actor: eer: ittal Date: PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP ❑ Approved ❑ Approved as noted ❑ Not approved 1: Remarks: Ci ST OG OM TC;1R[ ! ®[E® Cr OSP 1t lRMS 1(*;) ARM L Anvil standard and extra heavy cast iron threaded fittings are manufactured in accordance with ASME-816.4 (except plugs and bushings, ASME B16.14). Dimensions also conform to Federal Specifications, WW -P-501 (except plugs and bushings WW -P-471). C�7US APPROVED For Listings/Approval Details and Limitations, visit our website at www.anvilintl.com or contact an Anvil Sales Representative. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Pressure - Temperature Ratings Temperature Pressure Class 125 Class 250 (°F) (°C) psi bar psi bar -20°1° 150° -28.9 to 65.6 175 12.1 400 276 200° 93.3 165 11.4 370 25.5 250° 121.1 150 10.3 340 23.4 300° 148.9 140 9.7 310 21.4 350° 176.7 125 8.6 300 20.7 400° 204.4 — — 250 17.2 Standards and Specifications Dimensions Material Galvanizing"" Thread Pressure Rating Federal/Other CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS Class 125 ASME 616.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME 81.20.1+ ASME B16.4• ASME B16.41 Class 250 ASME B16.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME 816.4• ASME B16.4111 CAST IRON PLUGS AND BUSHINGS ASME 816.14• ASTM A- 126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME 81.20.1+ ASME 816.14• WW -P-471 • an American National standard (ANSI), + ASME B1.20.1 was ANSI B2.1, ■ Formerly WW -P-501 """ ASTM B 633. Type I, SC 4, may be supplied as alternate zinc coating per applicable ASME B16 product standard. PF -11.13 CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS ANVIL General Assembly of Threaded Fittings 1) Inspect both male and female components prior to assembly. • Threads should be -free from mechanical damage, dirt, chips and excess cutting oil. • Clean or replace components as necessary. 2) Application of thread sealant • Use a thread sealant that is fast drying, sets -up to a semi hard condition and is vibration resistant. Alternately, an anaerobic sealant may be utilized. • Thoroughly mix the thread sealant prior to application. • Apply a thick even coat to the male threads only. Best application is achieved with a brush stiff enough to force sealant down to the root of the threads. 3) Joint Makeup • For sizes up to and including 2" pipe, wrench tight makeup is considered three full turns past handtight. Handtight engagement for 1/2" through 2" thread varies from 41/2 turns to 5 turns. • For 21/2" through 4" sizes, wrench tight makeup is considered two full turns past handtight. Handtight engagement for 2'/2" through 4" thread varies from 5'/2 turns to 63/4 turns. PF -11.13 CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS ,moo (l(„�,/1111VIL Class 125 (Standard) Note: See following page for pressure -temperature ratings. PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP D x -B' - - I i Contractor: ❑ Not approved FIGURE 352-y� 90° Elbow, Reducing Remarks: , Notes 1: Notes 2: Size A B C D Unit Weight Black NPS DN NPS DN in mm in mm in mm in mm lbs kg 1/2 15 1/4 8 3/8 10 5/8 16 5/8 16 3/4 19 11/16 17 11/16 27 11/16 27 11/16 27 11/16 27 0.40 0.18 0.34 0.15 3/4 20 1/2 15 11/16 17 13/16 22 11/4 32 11/4 32 0.51 0.23 15 j'lz (- 3/4 20 11/16 17 13/16 22 '15/16 24 15/16 24 13/8 35 17/16 37 13/8 35 17/16 37 0.67 0.30 25 0.76 0.34 VA 32 1/2 15 3/4 20 (1) 25 11/16 17 13/16 22 15/16 24 11/16 27 11/8 29 11/8 29 11/2 38 15/8 41 111/16 43 11/2 38 15/8 41 111/16 43 1.07 0.49 1.02 0.46 1.21 0.55 (1,1,4 40 1/2 15 3/4 20 CO 25 (o74, 32 3/4 19 7/8 22 1 25 13/16 30 11/4 32 15/16 33 11/4 32 11/4 32 15/8 41 113/16 47 113/16 47 17/8 48 15/8 41 113/16 47 113/16 47 17/8 48 1.53 0.69 1.55 0.70 1.44 0.65 1.74 0.79 2 50 1/2 15 3/4 20 1 25 11/4 32 11/2 40 13/16 30 15/16 33 11/16 27 13/16 30 15/16 33 17/is 37 11/2 38 17/16 37 17/16 37 11/2 38 13/8 35 2 51 2 51 21/16 52 21/8 54 13/8 35 2 51 2 51 21/16 52 21/8 54 2.22 1.01 2.20 1.00 2.08 0.94 2.33 1.06 2.59 1.17 21/2 65 1 25 11/4 32 11/2 40 2 50 1 25 13/16 30 15/16 33 19/16 40 13/4 44 13/4 44 113/16 47 17/8 48 25/16 59 23/8 60 27/16 62 29/16 65 25/16 59 23/8 • 60 27/16 62 29/16 65 2.93 1.33 3.41 1.55 3.68 1.67 4.01 1.82 3 80 11/4 32 11/2 40 2 50 21/2 65 15/8 41 15/8 41 15/8 41 17/8 48 "25/16 59 25/16 59 21/4 57 23/16 56 . 215/16 75 215/16 75 215/16 75 31/16 78 215/16 75 215/16 75 215/16 75 31/16 78 5.98 2.71 5.65 2.56 5.25 2.38 6.44 2.92 4 100 2 50 21/2 65 3 80 23/16 56 23/16 56 23/16 56 215/16 75 23/4 70 211/16 68 35/8 92 35/8 92 35/8 92 35/8 92 35/8 92 35/8 92 11.89 5.39 11.27 5.11 10.63 4.82 5 125 4 100 213/16 73 35/16 84 43/8 111 43/8 111 16.47 7.47 6 150 3 80 4 100 5 125 25/16 59 213/16 73 33/8 86 313/16 98 37/8 98 313/16 98 413/1s 124 415/16 125 5 127 413/16 124 475/16 125 5 127 19.43 8.81 23.53 10.67 26.66 12.09 Note: See following page for pressure -temperature ratings. PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP Project: ❑ Approved Address: ❑ Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: 0LS'Y MOM TWICE ®CED FBTITEIG:90S ® &DAVI L • Anvil standard and extra heavy cast iron threaded fittings are manufactured in accordance with ASME-B16.4 (except plugs and bushings, ASME B16.14). Dimensions also conform to Federal Specifications, WW -P-501 (except plugs and bushings WW -P-471). C `!L US APPROVED For Listings/Approval Details and Limitations, visit our website at www.anvilintl.com or contact an Anvil Sales Representative. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Pressure - Temperature Ratings Temperature Pressure Class 125 Class 250 (°F) (°C) psi bar psi bar -20° to 150° -28.9 to 65.6 175 12.1 400 27.6 200° 93.3 165 11.4 370 25.5 250° 121.1 150 10.3 340 23.4 300° 148.9 140 9.7 310 21.4 350° 176.7 125 8.6 300 20.7 400° 204.4 – – 250 17.2 Standards and Sp2cificatlons Dimensions Material Galvanizing— Thread Pressure Rating Federal/Other CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS Class 125 ASME 816.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME 81.20.1+ ASME B16.4• ASME B16.4U Class 250 ASME 816.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTMA-153 ASME 81.20.1+ ASME 816.4• ASME 816.4■ CAST IRON PLUGS AND BUSHINGS ASME 816.14• ASTM A- 126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME 816.14• WW -P-471 • an American National standard (ANSI), + ASME 81.20.1 was ANSI 132.1, • Formerly WW -P-501 ""' ASTM B 633. Type I, SC 4, may be supplied as alternate zinc coating per applicable ASME B16 product standard. PF -11.13 CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS ANVIL General Assembly of Threaded Fittings 1) Inspect both male and female components prior to assembly. • Threads should be free from mechanical damage, dirt, chips and excess cutting oil. • Clean or replace components as necessary. 2) Application of thread sealant • Use a thread sealant that is fast drying, sets -up to a semi hard condition and is vibration resistant. Alternately, an anaerobic sealant may be utilized. • Thoroughly mix the thread sealant prior to application. • Apply a thick even coat to the male threads only. Best application is achieved with a brush stiff enough to force sealant down to the root of the threads. 3) Joint Makeup • For sizes up to and including 2" pipe, wrench tight makeup is considered three full turns past handtight. Handtight engagement for 1/2" through 2" thread varies from 4'/2 turns to 5 turns. • For 21/2' through 4" sizes, wrench tight makeup is considered two full turns past handtight. Handtight engagement for 21/2" through 4" thread varies from 51/2 turns to 63/4turns. PF -11.13 CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS ®Am Class 125 (Standard) Note: See page 6 for pressure -temperature ratings. Project: PROJECT INFORMATION •,4. ., f F rEH-(- -i -.1-.-A 1 f -- - Engineer: FIGURE 359B Tee Reducing Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Size A B C D E F Unit Weight Black NPS ON NPS DN NPS DN in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm lbs kg 1/2 15 1 /2 15 1/4 8 3/8 10 3/4 20 1 25 11/16 17 11/16 17 13/16 22 1 25 11/16 17 11/16 17 13/16 22 1 25 13/16 22 3/4 19 11/16 17 13/16 22 11/8 29 11/8 29 11/4 32 17/16 37 11/8 29 11/a 29 11/4 32 17/16 37 11/8 29 11/8 29 13/16 22 13/8 35 0.57 0.26 0.57 0.26 0.68 0.31 1.00 0.45 3/4 20 1/4 8 3/4 20 13/16 22 15/16 24 13/16 22 15/16 24 11/4 32 15/16 24 0.79 0.36 1/2 15 1/2 15 3/4 20 11/16 17 13/16 22 11/16 17 13/16 22 13/16 22 13/16 22 13/16 22 15/16 24 11/a 29 11/4 32 11/4 32 15/16 24 0.64 0.29 0.75 0.34 3/4 20 1/4 8 3/8 10 15 1/211/1611/1613/1613/1613/161 1 25 9/16 14 11/16 17 17 15/16 24 9/16 14 11/16 17 17 15/16 24 7/8 22 15/16 24 22 13/16 22 11/16 17 13/16 22 22 17/16 37 11/16 17 13/16 22 22 17/16 37 13/16 22 11/4 32 1 /4 32 13/8 35 0.62 0.28 0.75 0.34 0.76 0.34 0.99 , 0.45 • 25 1/4 8 1 25 15/16 24 15/16 24 15/16 24 11/2 38 11/4 32 11/2 38 1.08 0.49 1/2 15 1/2 15 3/4 20 1 25 11/16 17 13/16 22 15/16 24 3/4 19 13/16 22 15/16 24 15/16 24 15/16 24 15/16 24 11/4 32 13/8 35 11/2 38 13/16 22 11/4 32 13/8 35 13/8 35 1'/16 37 11/2 38 0.90 0.41 0.91 0.41 1.08 0.49 3/4 20 1/2 15 3/4 20 1 25 11/16 17 13/16 22 15/16 24 11/16 17 13/16 22 15/16 24 15/16 24 15/16 24 15/16 24 11/4 32 13/8 35 11/2 38 13/16 22 15/16 24 17/16 37 13/8 35 17/16 37 11/2 38 0.89 0.40 1.00 0.45 1.13 0.51 1 25 1/4 8 Vi 15 3/4 20 11/4 32 11/2 40 2 50 11/16 17 11/16 17 13/16 22 11/8 29 11/4 32 17/16 37 11/16 17 11/16 17 13/16 22 11/8 29 11/4 32 17/16 37 11/8 29 15/16 24 15/16 24 15/16 24 1 25 1 25 11/8 29 11/4 32 13/6 35 111/16 43 113/16 47 2 50 11/4 32 11/4 32 13/8 35 111/16 43 113/16 47 2 50 13/8 35 13/8 35 17/16 37 19/16 40 15/8 41 13/4 44 1.01 0.46 1.01 0.46 1.11 0.50 1.49 0.68 1.84 0.83 2.70 1.22 Note: See page 6 for pressure -temperature ratings. Project: PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP ❑ Approved Address: I ❑ Approved as noted Contractor: j ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: • CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS Anvil standard and extra heavy cast iron threaded fittings are manufactured in accordance with ASME-B16.4 (except plugs and bushings, ASME 516.14). Dimensions also conform to Federal Specifications, WW -P-501 (except plugs and bushings WW -P-471). US APPROVED For Listings/Approval Details and Limitations, visit our website at www.anvilintl.com or contact an Anvil Sales Representative. Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Pressure - Temperature Ratings Temperature Pressure Class 125 Class 250 (°F) (°C) psi bar psi bar -20° to 150° -28.9 to 65.6 175 12.1 400 27.6 200° 93.3 165 11.4 370 25.5 250° 121.1 150 10.3 340 23.4 300° 148.9 140 9.7 310 21.4 350° 176.7 125 8.6 300 20.7 400° 204.4 — — 250 17.2 Standards and Specifications Dimensions Material Galvanizing"" Thread Pressure Rating Federal/Other CAST IRON THREADED FITTINGS Class 125 ASME 816.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME B16.4• ASME 816.411 Class 250 ASME 816.4• ASTM A-126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME 81.20.1+ ASME 816.4• ASME 816.4111 CAST IRON PLUGS AND BUSHINGS ASME 816.14• ASTM A- 126 (A) ASTM A-153 ASME B1.20.1+ ASME 816.14• WW -P-471 • an American National standard (ANSI), + ASME 81.20.1 was ANSI B2.1, ■ Formerly WW -P-501 "" ASTM B 633. Type I, SC 4, may be supplied as alternate zinc coating per applicable ASME B16 product standard. PF -11.13 FIG. 7401 Rigidlok® Coupling The Fig. 7401 Rigidlok Coupling from Gruvlok provides a rigid pipe connection. Rigidity is attained simply; it is designed in. The Fig. 7401 Rigidlok coupling utilizes a technologically advanced housing design that conforms to and grips the pipe. With the Fig. 7401 there emerges a new generation of rigid couplings. Coupling installation is fast and easy, remove only one nut and swing the housing over the gasket and into the grooves. The exclusive Guidelok®feature automatically separates the grooved pipe ends and guides the coupling into position as the bolts are tightened. Precisely sized and oriented tines in the housing key section firmly grip the pipe. The combination of these designed in features produce a secure, rigid pipe joint connection. This coupling is an ideal connector for service and applications that require a rigid connection. The Fig. 7401 Rigidlok Coupling is designed for use with roll grooved or cut grooved standard weight and roll grooved lightweight pipe, as well as with grooved -end fittings and valves. The Rigidlok Coupling maintains a rigid connection with I I LISTED APPROVED For Listings/Approval Details and Limitations, visit our website at www.anvilintl.com or contact an Anvil° Sales Representative. support and hanging in conformance with applicable ANSI B31.1 Power Piping Code, ANSI B31.9 Building Service Pipe Code as well as NFPA 13 sprinkler systems. The Fig. 7401 Rigidlok Coupling allows for working pressure ratings to 750 psi (51.7 bar) when used on standard wall roll or cut grooved pipe. MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS ANSI BOLTS & HEAVY HEX NUTS: Heat treated, oval neck track head bolts conforming to ASTM A 183 Grade 2 with a minimum tensile strength of 110,000 psi and heavy hex nuts of carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 563 Grade A or Grade B, or J995 Grade 2. Bolts and nuts are provided zinc electroplated as standard. METRIC BOLTS & HEAVY HEX NUTS: Heat treated, zinc electroplated oval -neck track head bolts made of carbon steel with mechanical properties per ISO 898-1 Class 8.8. Hex nuts are zinc electroplated followed by a yellow chromate dip. STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS & NUTS: 304SS Stainless Steel bolts and nuts are available as a standard option. (316SS are available for special order). HOUSING: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 COATINGS: Rust inhibiting paint — Color: ORANGE (standard) Hot Dipped Zinc Galvanized (optional) Other Colors Available (1ERAL3000 and RAL9000) For other Coating requirements contact an Anvil Representative. GASKETS: Materials Properties as designated in accordance with ASTM D 2000 Grade "EP" EPDM (Green and Red color code) -40T to 250T (Service Temperature Range)( -40°C to 121°C) Recommended for water service, diluted acids, alkalies solutions, oil -free air and many other chemical services. NOT FOR USE IN PETROLEUM APPLICATIONS. For hot water applications the use of Gruvlok Extreme Temperature lubricant is recommended. NSF -61 Certified for cold and hot water applications up through 12': Grade `i'T" Nitrile (Orange color code) -20°F to 180°F (Service Temperature Range)( -29°C to 82°C) Recommended for petroleum applications. air with oil vapors and vegetable and mineral oils. NOT FOR USE IN HOT WATER OR HOT AIR Grade "0" Fluoro -Elastomer (Blue color code) Size Range:1" - 12" (C style only) 20°F to 300T (Service Temperature Range)( -29°C to 149°C) Recommended for high temperature resistance to oxidizing acids, petroleum oils, hydraulic fluids, halogenated hydrocarbons and lubricants. Grade "C' Silicone (Red color code) Size Range:1' -12" (C style only) -40°F to 350°F (Service Temperature Range)( -40°C to 177°C) Recommended for dry, hot air and some high temperature chemical services. Contact an Anvil Representative for availability. GASKET TYPE: C Style (1" - 24") Flush Gap (1" - 24") LUBRICATION: Standard Gruvlok XtremeTM (Do Not use with Grade "L") 18 GL -3.14 ANVIL I I 141111. OK. COUPLINGS FOR GROOVED -END PIPE FIG, 7 1 Rigidlok® Coupling SIZES 1 1/3" - 14" IFsea I Efil SIZE 16" SIZES 18"-24" r ANVIL 1 I IC 19 T"I r;l _Q 1 I f FIGURE 7401 RIGIDLOK COUPLING Nominal Size O.D' Max. Working Pressure Max. End Load Range of Pipe End Separation Coupling Dimensions Coupling Bolts* Specified Torque § Approx. Wt. Ea. X Y Z Qty. Size Min. Max. In10N(mm) Inimm PSI/bar Lbs./kN Inimm In./mm Inimm Inimm Inimm Ft-Lbs/IV-M Lbs./kg 0'%z, (1.900 750 2,126 0?1/42, (3 5'/e ow (21 %x 2'/g7 (30 45 1.81 (40 48.3 51.7 9.46 0-0.79 -76 I30 48- M10 x 57 40 60 _ 0,8 (2 2.375 750 3,323_ 0 1 (3Yz (Ve (1' (2 3/8 x 211/4 (O 45 2.41 50 60.3 51.7 14.78 0-0.79 89 143 48 M10 x 63 40 60 1.1 (g'%3 (2.875 750 4,869 0 -?/z, (4 614 (lye' (2 i (l3x 212 (30 45 2.9;' 65 73.0 51.7 21.66 0-0.79 102 156 48 M10 63 40 60 1.3 3 0.D. 2.996 750 5.207 0--1; 41/4 61/4 11/4 2 -/ x 21 80 100 3.4 76.1 76.1 51.7 23.52 0-0.79 105 156 48 M10 x 63 110 150 1.5 3 3.500 750 7,216 0-1/22 4% 714 1% 2 / x 3 80 100 3.6 80 88.9 51.7 32.10 0-0.79 121 184 48 M12x76 110 150 1.6 04 4.500 750 11,928 0-%2i (7h: (8W (2'% (2) 0A x 3 80 100 5.00 100 114.3 51.7 53.06 0-2.38 149 213 54 M12x76 110 150 2.3i 51/2 0.0. 5.500 750 17,819 0-%2 7 9'/a 21 2 5/ x 31/4 100 130 6.9 139.7 139.7 51.7 79.26 0-2.38 178 248 54 M16 x 85 135 175 3.1 5 5.563 750 18,229 0-%2 7 10 21/8 2 5/8 x 31/2 100 130 6.9 125 141.3 51.7 81.09 0-2.38 178 254 54 M16 x 85 135 175 3.1 61/4 0.0. 6.500 750 24.887 0-3Av 8 11 21/4 2 5% x 31% 100 130 7.6 165.1 165.1 51.7 110.70 0-2.38 203 279 54 M16 x 85 135 175 3.4 6 6.625 750 25,854 0-%2 8/ 111/2 21/8 2 % x 3/ 100 130 7.9 150 168.3 51.7 115.00 0-2.38 206 283 54 M16 x85 135 175 3.6 8 8.625 600 35,056 0-3/32 101/2 14/ 2% 2 % x 41/2 130 180 15.9 200 219.1 41.4 155.94 0-2.38 267 359 67 M20 x 110 175 245 7.2 10 10.750 500 45,381 03/3z 12% 171/2 2% 2 1 x 6 200 250 25.6 250 273.1 34.5 201.87 0-2.38 327 445 67 M24 x 150 270 340 11.6 12 12.750 400 51,070 0-%2 15 19/ 2% 2 % x 6 180 220 30.5 300 323.9 27,6 227.17 0-2.38 381 495 67 M22x 150 245 300 13.8 14 14.000 300 46,181 0-%2 161/a 19% 3 2 % x 512 180 220 36.1 350 355.6 20.7 205.43 0-2.38 413 502 76 M22x 140 245 300 16.4 16 16.000 300 60,319 0-%2 18/ 2214 3 3 % x 512 180 220 42.0 400 406.4 20.7 268.31 0-2.38 460 565 76 M22x 140 245 300 19.1 18 18.000 300 76,341 0-%2 20/ 24% 3Y/ 4 1 x 4 200 250 51.6 450 457.2 20.7 339.58 0-2.38 521 619 79 M24 x 100 270 340 23.4 20 20.000 300 94,248 03/32 23 26% 31/2 4 1 x 4 200 250 68.3 500 508.0 20.7 419.23 0-2.38 581 683 79 M24 x 100 270 340 31.0 24 24.000 250 113,097 03/32 271/8 30% 31/2 4 1 x 4 200 250 89.3 600 609.6 17.2 503.08 0-2.38 689 784 79 M24 x 100 270 340 40.5 NOTE: For additional details see "Coupling Data Chart Notes" on page 17. Range of Pipe End Seperation values are for roll grooved pipe and may be doubled for cut groove pipe. ' Available in ANSI or metric bolt sizes only as indicated. t Maximum Working Pressure Rating is for schedule 40 steel pipe. For light wall, stainless steel, aluminum and ISO pipe pressure ratings, please refer to §- For additional Bolt Torque information, see page 216. the technical data section. See Installation & Assembly directions on page 179. Not for use in copper systems. ANVIL 1 I IC 19 T"I r;l _Q 1 I f 111 COUPLINGS FOR GROOVED -END PIPE AMOK FIG. 7401-2 Rigidlok® Coupling Gruvlok® introduces new 2 -piece large diameter standard groove couplings in both rigid and flexible styles • Uses standard grooves (conforming to AWWA C-606) • No special grooves or grooving tools needed • Pressures to 350 P.S.I. on cut or roll grooved pipe with a wall thickness of 0.250" or greater • No special fittings needed • No special valves needed • Up to 23% less weight than competitive models • Sizes: 14' through 24" in Rigid: Figure 7401-2 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS ANSI BOLTS & HEAVY HEX NUTS: Heat treated, oval neck track head bolts conforming to ASTM A 183 Grade 2 with a minimum tensile strength of 110,000 psi and heavy hex nuts of carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 563 Grade A or Grade B, or J995 Grade 2. Bolts and nuts are provided zinc electroplated as standard. STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS & NUTS: 304SS Stainless Steel bolts and nuts are available as a standard option. (31655 are available for special order). HOUSING: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 COATINGS: Rust inhibiting paint - Color: ORANGE (standard) Hot Dipped Zinc Galvanized (optional) Other Colors Available (IE: RAL3000 and RAL9000) For other Coating requirements contact an Anvil Representative. GASKETS: Materials Properties as designated in accordance with ASTM D 2000 Grade "E" EPDM (Green color code) -40°F to 230°F (Service Temperature Range)( -40°C to 110°C) Recommended for water service, diluted acids, alkalies solutions, oil -free air and many other chemical services. NOT FOR USE IN HOT WATER OR HOT AIR CASKET TYPO- flush Gap (Standard) LUBR!CATEON: Std Gruvlek-Xtferrre m WORKINC PRESSURE, END LOAD & PIPE END SEPARATION. with Gruvlok specifications. Scc technical data section for dcsign factors. Range of Pipe End Separation values are for roll grooved pipe and may be doubled for cut groove pipe. See Installation & Assembly directions on page 183. Max — Pressure lGU Mme- End Eee9 E 7401-2 Raffgt`e RIGIDLOK CCUPL:NG W-. .. Wt. Ea. M..:u::,6:nu'' �.:,1.i.h �1'�i1�1 � ,, � � �YiYi �Yi tiYi INIIMMA4101 WI Remrowpmmetemmairwmwww liMilliONEWAIN ramie � . rrimumffi-Efflumnisamisiummwmg NM • ffilifflillIMIPION �c�,a.ate—.,.,.,...,m._,....—`cammagamem WIWIIMETROWTAIllalimmou 4,6_„_51/2 immEnNE Ye -m -5%M EM 1.011M IIMI � Range of Pipe End Separation values are for roll grooved pipe and may be doubled for cut groove pipe. See Installation & Assembly directions on page 183. FIG. 7402 S1ideLOKTM Ready for Installation Coupling Patent D680629, D680630, D696751 SlideLOK Pressure Responsive Gasket The SlideLOK coupling is a ready for installation coupling designed to reduce installation time. The slide action allows for greater flexibility during installation. The patented gasket provides four separate sealing surfaces for added protection. The engineered metal -to -metal installation requirement is a quick and easy indication of proper assembly. The SlideLOK is designed to be used with roll groove or cut groove steel pipe, as well as with. grooved light wall pipe, Gruvlok®grooved-end fittings, and valves. The SlideLOK coupling produces a secure, rigid pipe joint connection. The SlideLOK coupling allows for a maximum working pressure of 750 psi on roll or cut grooved standard wall pipe. Contact an Anvil representative for light wall pipe pressure ratings. The SlideLOK coupling maintains a rigid connection with support and hanging in conformance with applicable ANSI B31.1 Power Piping Code, ANSI B31.9 Building Service Pipe Code. MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS ANSI BOLTS & HEAVY HEX NUTS: Heat treated, oval neck track head bolts conforming to ASTM A 183 Grade 2 with a minimum tensile strength of 110,000 psi and heavy hex nuts of carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 563 Grade A or Grade B, or J995 Grade 2. Bolts and nuts are provided zinc electroplated as standard. HOUSING: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 COATINGS: Rust inhibiting paint Color: ORANGE (standard) Hot Dipped Zinc Galvanized (optional) ANVI L GASKETS: Materials Properties as designated in accordance with ASTM D 2000 Grade "EP" EPDM (Green and Red color code) -40°F to 250°F (Service Temperature Range)( -40°C to 121°C) Recommended for water service, diluted acids, alkalies solutions, oil -free air and many other chemical services. NOT FOR USE IN PETROLEUM APPLICATIONS. Grade "T" Nitrite (Orange color code) -20°F to 180°F (Service Temperature Range)( -29°C to 82°C) Recommended for petroleum applications. air with oil vapors and vegetable and mineral oils. NOT FOR USE IN HOT WATER OR HOT AIR GASKET TYPE: SlideLOK (2" - 8") LUBRICATION: Standard Gruvlok XtremeTM 0 U 0 0 cn 0 U O ) c ins+ - 0 CC 43 6.3 0 c ?` o.0 175 111 CC U o � CO c0 C � U � L•K COUPLINGS CektIT� FOR GROOVED -END PIPE FIG. 7402 S1ideLOKTM Ready for Installation Coupling Patent D680629, D680630, D696751 SlideLOK Pressure Responsive Gasket The SlideLOK coupling is a ready for installation coupling designed to reduce installation time. The slide action allows for greater flexibility during installation. The patented gasket provides four separate sealing surfaces for added protection. The engineered metal -to -metal installation requirement is a quick and easy indication of proper assembly. The SlideLOK is designed to be used with roll groove or cut groove steel pipe, as well as with. grooved light wall pipe, Gruvlok®grooved-end fittings, and valves. The SlideLOK coupling produces a secure, rigid pipe joint connection. The SlideLOK coupling allows for a maximum working pressure of 750 psi on roll or cut grooved standard wall pipe. Contact an Anvil representative for light wall pipe pressure ratings. The SlideLOK coupling maintains a rigid connection with support and hanging in conformance with applicable ANSI B31.1 Power Piping Code, ANSI B31.9 Building Service Pipe Code. MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS ANSI BOLTS & HEAVY HEX NUTS: Heat treated, oval neck track head bolts conforming to ASTM A 183 Grade 2 with a minimum tensile strength of 110,000 psi and heavy hex nuts of carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 563 Grade A or Grade B, or J995 Grade 2. Bolts and nuts are provided zinc electroplated as standard. HOUSING: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 COATINGS: Rust inhibiting paint Color: ORANGE (standard) Hot Dipped Zinc Galvanized (optional) ANVI L GASKETS: Materials Properties as designated in accordance with ASTM D 2000 Grade "EP" EPDM (Green and Red color code) -40°F to 250°F (Service Temperature Range)( -40°C to 121°C) Recommended for water service, diluted acids, alkalies solutions, oil -free air and many other chemical services. NOT FOR USE IN PETROLEUM APPLICATIONS. Grade "T" Nitrite (Orange color code) -20°F to 180°F (Service Temperature Range)( -29°C to 82°C) Recommended for petroleum applications. air with oil vapors and vegetable and mineral oils. NOT FOR USE IN HOT WATER OR HOT AIR GASKET TYPE: SlideLOK (2" - 8") LUBRICATION: Standard Gruvlok XtremeTM 0 U 0 0 cn 0 U O ) c ins+ - 0 CC 43 6.3 0 c ?` o.0 175 111 CC U o � CO c0 C � U � Li FIG. 7402 SlideLOK"' Ready for Installation Coupling Impact gun can be used for installation, verity that the output of toe impact gun is within the required torque range. Not for use on "EG" rolled or cut grooved pipe ends. Contact an Anvil Representative for use on light wall and SS pipe applications. GL -9.15 ANVIL FIGURE 7402 SLIDELOK COUPLING Nominal Size 0'D' Max. Working Pressure t Max. End Load Range of e End Separation Coupling Dimensions Coup ing Bolts Specified Torque § Approx. Wt. Ea. Xa Xb Y Z Qty. Size Min. Max. In✓0N(mm) . Inform PSUbar Lbs./IN In✓mm Inform Inform In./mm In./mm ln✓mm Ft.•Lbs/N-M Lbs1kg (2 2.375 750 3,323 14.78 0-1/27, , ^0--0.79 (TA_) 333‘r . 2 2 Yz x 21/2) (80 110 100 150 2.9) 50 60.3 51.7 95 86 152 51 M12 x 70 1.3 (2A (2.875 750 4,869 _0-''/311 (4% (4'/ (6%B• (2 �2)) 04X23/d= 80 100 3.11 73.0 51. 110 150 1.4) (65 21.66 0-0.79 - 117' 108 163 51 M121 70 3 80 3.500 88.9 750 51.7 7,216 32.10 0-1/32 0-0.79 51 132 4"/,s 119 7 178 2 51 2 12 x 31/2 M12 x 89 80 110 100 150 3.6 1.6 (4 4.500 750 11,928 0-3/g2) (6' (6_ 85 (2 _ 2) U x 3'/i, M12 x 89 (80 110 100 4.9) 100 114.3 51.7 53.06 0-2.38 165 152 212 51 150 2.2 5 125 5.563 141.3 750 51.7 18,229 81.09 0-3/32 0-2.38 73/4 . 196 7'/s 181 93/2 248 2 51 2 % x 31/2 M16 x 89 100 135 130 175 6.1 2.8 6 150 6.625 168.3 700 48.3 24,130 107.34 0-3/32 0-2.38 8% 224 81/s 208 10% 274 2 51 2 % x 31/2 M16 x 89 100 135 130 175 ' 6.8 3.1 8 200 8.625 219.1 600 . 41.4 35,056 155.94 0-3/32 0-2.38 11% 289 10% 270 13% 340 21/2 64 2 3/4 x 41/2 M20 x 115 130 175 180 245 10.9 4.9 NOTES: Range of Pipe End Separation values are for roll grooved pipe and may be doubled for cut groove pipe. Maximum Working Pressure Rating is for schedule 40 steel pipe. For light wall, stainless steel, aluminum and ISO pipe pressure ratings, please refer to the•technical data section. For additional details see °Coupling Data Chart Notes' on page 17. §- For additional Bolt Torque information, see page 216. See Installation & Assembly directions on pages 180-181. . Not for use In copper systems. Impact gun can be used for installation, verity that the output of toe impact gun is within the required torque range. Not for use on "EG" rolled or cut grooved pipe ends. Contact an Anvil Representative for use on light wall and SS pipe applications. GL -9.15 ANVIL �I el,14 Flexible Coupling The Gruvlok® Fig. 7001 Coupling forms a flexible grooved end pipe joint connection with the versatility for a wide range of applications. Services include mechanical and plumbing, process piping, mining and oil field piping, and many others. The coupling design supplies optimum strength for working pressures to 1000 PSI (69 bar) without excessive casting weight. The flexible design eases pipe and equipment installation while providing the designed -in benefit of reducing pipeline noise and vibration transmission without the addition of special components. To ease coupling handling and assembly and to assure consistent quality, sizes 1" through 14" couplings have two 180° segment housings,16" have three 120° segment housings, and 18" through 24" sizes have four 90° segment housings, while the 28" O.D. and 30" O.D. couplings have six 60° segment housings. The 28" O.D. and 30" O.D. are weld -ring couplings. ! MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS c CL us LISTED APPROVED For Listings/Approval Details and Limitations. visit our website at www.anwhntl com or contact an Anvil` Sales Representative. ANSI BOLTS & HEAVY HEX NUTS: Heat treated, oval neck track head bolts conforming to ASTM A 183 Grade 2 with a minimum tensile strength of 110,000 psi and heavy hex nuts of carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 563 Grade A or Grade B, or J995 Grade 2. Bolts and nuts are provided zinc electroplated as standard. METRIC BOLTS & HEAVY HEX NUT& Heat treated, zinc electroplated oval -neck track head bolts made of carbon steel with mechanical properties per ISO 898-1 Class 8.8. Hex nuts are zinc electroplated followed by a yellow chromate dip. STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS & NUTS: 304SS Stainless Steel bolts and nuts are available as a standard option. (316SS are available for special order). HOUSING: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 COATINGS: Rust inhibiting paint — Color: ORANGE (standard) Hot Dipped Zinc Galvanized (optional) Other Colors Available (IE: RAL3000 and RAL9000) For other Coating requirements contact an Anvil Representative. GASKETS: Materials Properties as designated in accordance with ASTM D 2000 Grade "EP" EPDM (Green and Red color code) -40°F to 250°F (Service Temperature Range)( -40°C to 121°C) Recommended for water service, diluted acids, alkalies solutions, oil -free air and many other chemical services. NOT FOR USE IN PETROLEUM APPLICATIONS. For hot water applications the use of Gruvlok Extreme Temperature lubricant is recommended. NSF -61 Certified for cold and hot water applications up through 12': Grade "T" Nitrile (Orange color code) -20°F to 180°F (Service Temperature Range)( -29°C to 82°C) Recommended for petroleum applications. Air with oil vapors and vegetable and mineral oils. NOT FOR USE IN HOT WATER OR HOT AIR Grade "0" Fluoro -Elastomer (Blue color code) Size Range:1" -12" (C style only) 20°F to 300°F (Service Temperature Range)( -29°C to 149°C) Recommended for high temperature resistance to oxidizing acids, petroleum oils, hydraulic fluids, halogenated hydrocarbons and lubricants. Grade "L" Silicone (Red color code) Size Range:1" -12" (C style only) -40°F to 350°F (Service Temperature Range)( -40°C to 177°C) Recommended for dry, hot air and some high temperature chemical services. Contact an Anvil Representative for availability. GASKET TYPE: C Style (1" - 30") Flush Gap (1" - 24") LUBRICATION: Standard Gruvlok XtremeTM (Do Not use with Grade "L") WORKING PRESSURE, END LOAD, PIPE END SEPARATION & DEFLECTION FROM CENTER LINE: Based on standard wall steel pipe with cut or roll grooves in accordance with Gruvlok specifications. See technical data section for design factors. 0 CC 0 .7 Fig. 7001 with Standard Gasket Fig. 7001 with Flush Gap Gasket L COUPLINGS FOR GROOVED -END PIPE 1911 L•K° FIG. 7001 Flexible Coupling SIZES 1" - 14" SIZES 16" - 24" z I I SIZES 28" - 30" 24 GL-9.15 ANVIL INTERNATIONAL FIGURE 7001 FLEXIBLE COUPLING Nominal Size 0'D' Max. Work. Pressures Max. End Load Range of Pipe End Separation Deflection from Q Coupling Dimensions Bolt Dimensions" Specified Torque § Approx. Wt. Ea. Per Coupling of Pipe X Y Z City. Size Min. Max. InJDN(mm) In./mm PSUbar LbslkN In./mm Dcgrees0-Minus Q In.Ht-mm/m Inimm Inimm Inimm Inimm Ft.-Lbs'W-m Lbslkg 1 1.315 1000 1,358 0-12 1° 22' 0.29 21/2 41/2 1% 2 % x 21/4 30 45 1.3 25 33.4 68.9 6.04 0-0:79 23.8 64 114 48 M10 x 57 40 60 0.6 11/4 1.660 1000 2,164 0132 1° 5' 0.23 2% 41/2 1% 2 % x 21/2 30 45 1.4 32 42.2 68.9 9.63 0-0.79 18.8 70 114 48 M10 x 57 40 60 0.6 (11 (1.900 _ 1000 r, 2,835 0? (0° 57'_ 0.20 _ 3 4%: (1% (2 3exc 2' : (30 45 1.5 {40 48.3 68.9 12.61 0-0.79 16.5 76 117 48 -- M10x57 -40 - 60 0.7 2 2.375_ _1.000 4,430_ 0;Y3z 0° 45' _0.16 _35/s,6Ye 1% 2I 0/2x 3_ 80_ _100_ _3.1) 50 60.3 68.9 19.71 0-0.79 13.1 92 156 48 M12 x 76 110 150 1.4 (V4 (2.875 1000 6,492 01/3z (0° 37' 0.13 4Yk (61 OW (22) (Y2 x3_ 80_ ! 100_ 3.7) 65 73.0 68.9 28.88 0-0.79 10.9 108 165 48 M12 x 76 110 150 1.7 3 0.0. 2.996 1000 7.050 0-% 0° 36' 0.13 41/4 6'/. 1% 2 % x 3 80 100 4.3 76.1 76.1 68.9 31.36 0-0.79 10.4 108 171 48 M12 x 76 110 150 2.0 3 3.500 1000 9,621 0-'/32 0° 31' 0.11 4% TA 1% 2 12 x 3 80 100 4.3 80 88.9 68.9 42.80 0-0.79 8.9 124 181 48 M12x76 110 150 2.0 312 4.000 1000 12,566 0-1/22 0° 27' 0.09 51/2 81/21 1'/e 2 % x 31/2 100 130 5.1 90 101.6 68.9 55.90 0-0.79 7.8 133 210 48 M16x89 135 175 2.3 (4 4.500_ 15,904 _0- 3%321 (..12; 0.25 6'/ (8%' (2 2) to x 31h, (100, . 130 6.81 100 114.3 _1000 68.9 70.75 0-2.38 20.8 159 222 51 M16 x 89 135 175 3.1 5 5.563 1000 24,306 0-%2 0° 58' 0.20 71 111/21 2 2 % x 412 130 180 9.6 125 141.3 68.9 108.12 0-2.38 16.8 184 286 51 M20 x 110 175 245 4.4 610.0. 6.500 1000 33,183 0-Y3, 0° 50' 0.17 8% 115A 2 2 3/<x 41/2 130 180 11.8 165.1 165.1 68.9 147.61 0-2.38 14.4 210 298 51 M20 x 110 175 245 5.4 6 6.625 1000 34,472 0-3/32 0° 49' 0.17 8% 11% 2 2 3/a x 41/2 130 180 11.8 150 168.3 68.9 153.34 0-2.38 14.1 219 298 51 M20 x 110 175 245 5.4 8 8.625 800 46,741 0-3/32 0° 37' 0.13 11 14% 2% 2 % x 512 180 220 21.7 200 219.1 55.2 207.91 0-2.38 10.9 279 365 60 M22 x 140 245 300 9.8 10 10.750 800 72,610 0-3/32 0° 30' 0.11 131/8 16% 2% 2 r/o x 51/2 180 220 27.0 250 273.0 55.2 322.99 0-2.38 8.7 333 422 67 M22 x 140 245 300 12.2 12 12.750 800 102,141 0-3/32 0° 25' 0.09 151/2 18% 2% 2 % x 6 180 220 35.0 300 323.9 55.2 454.35 0-2.38 7.3 394 473 67 M22 x 150 245 300 15.9 14 14.000 300 46,181 03/32 0° 23' 0.08 161/2 201/2 3 2 % x 51/2 180 220 37.0 350 355.6 20.7 205.43 0-2.38 6.7 410 521 76 M22 x 140 245 300 16.8 16 16.000 300 60,319 0-%2 0° 20' 0.07 181e 22% 3 4 1 x 4 200 250 50.0 400 406.4 20.7 268.31 0-2.38 5.9 460 581 76 - - 22.7 18 18.000 300 76,341 0-3/32 0° 18' 0.06 211/2 25% 31/2 4 1 x 4 200 250 72.0 450 457.2 20.7 339.58 0-2.38 5.2 537 645 79 - - 32.7 20 20.000 300 94,248 0-%2 0° 16' 0.06 23 281/2 3/ 4 11/ex 41/2 225 275 82.0 500 508.0 20.7 419.23 0-2.38 4.7 584 718 79 - - 37.2 24 24.000 300 135,717 0-%2 0° 13' 0.05 27 32% 31/8 4 11/2 x 41/2 225 275 90.0 600 609.6 20.7 603.70 0-2.38 3.9 686 822 79 - - 40.8 28" 0.D. 28.875 150 98,226 0-%2 0° 11' 0.04 331/2 3512 3% 6 1 x 51/2 200 250 105.0 733.4 733.4 10.3 436.93 0-2.38 3.2 851 902 79 - - 47.6 30" I.D. 31.00 150 113,215 0-3/32 0° 10' 0.04 33% 38% 3% 6 1 x 51/2 200 • 250 137.0 787.4 787.4 10.3 503.61 0-2.38 3.0 857 972 92 - - 62.1 NOTES: r ' Available in ANSI or metric bolt sizes only as indicated. Range of Pipe End Separation and Angular Deflection values are for roll grooved pipe and may be doubled for cut groove pipe. See page 216 for details. For additional details see 'Coupling Data Chart Notes" on page 17. Refer to page 222 for Misalignment & Deflection Calculations and page 223 for Curve Layout Calculations. §- For additional Bolt Torque information, see page 216. t Maximum Working Pressure Rating is for schedule 40 steel pipe. For light wall, stainless steel, aluminum and ISO pipe pressure ratings, please refer to See Installation & Assembly directions on page 182. the technical data section.Not for use in copper systems. . 24 GL-9.15 ANVIL INTERNATIONAL 7005 eck® Coupling pus srm I Details and Limitations. t vavw.anvilintl.com or Sales Representative. The Fig. 7005 Roughneck Coupling is an effective and reliable way of joining plain -end or beveled end pipe. The Roughneck Coupling is ideal for use in a variety of applications including mining, process piping, manifold piping and oilfield services. The unique gripper action provides a positive pipe joint and allows for working pressure ratings up to 750 PSI (52 bar) for schedule 40 pipe. Contact an Anvil Representative for schedule 10 pressure ratings. MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS HOUSING: Ductile Iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 or Malleable Iron conforming to ASTM A 47, Grade 32510. BOLT & NUTS: Heat treated, oval -neck track head bolts conforming to ASTM A 183 Grade 2 with a minimum tensile strength of 110,000 psi and heavy hex nuts of carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 563 Grade A or Grade B, or J995 Grade 2. Bolts and nuts are provided zinc electroplated as standard. GRIPPERS: 2"-8" heat treated, electroplated carbon steel. 10"-16" heat treated stainless steel. COATINGS: Rust inhibiting paint - Color: Orange Standard, (7' -12") Hot Dipped Zinc Galvanized Optional, Other Colors Available (IE: RAL3000 and RAL9000). For other Coating requirements contact an Anvil Representative. GASKET: Grade E (EPDM) or Grade T (Nitrile) Elastomers with properties as designed by ASTM D 2000 for each gasket grade. Is see "Coupling Data Chart Notes" on page 17. tort Toroue information. see sane 216. Gasket Pipe Housing Grippers Working pressure and end load are based on a properly assembled Roughneck coupling with bolts fully torqued to the above specifications, on plain -end or beveled standard wall steel pipe and Gruvlok Plain- End Fittings. Roughneck Couplings are designed to be used on plain -end pipe and Gruvlok Plain -End Fittings only. For externally coated pipe applications, contact an Anvil Representative. Not recommended for use on steel pipe with a hardness greater than 150 Brinell, Stainless Steel, plastic, HDPE, cast iron or other brittle pipe. Not recommended for pipe schedule transitioning Suitable for schedule 10 steel pipe, for pressure ratings contact an Anvil Representative. *Bolt torque ratings shown must be applied 'at installation. FIGURE 7005 ROUGHNECK® COUPLING Max. Wk. Max. End No. of Coupling Dimensions Coupling Bolts Specified Torque § Approx. I' Pressure Load Grippers PP X Y Z Qty. Size Min. Max Wt. Ea. 'im PSI/bar LbsikN Inimm Infirm Minn Inimm ft-Lbs✓N-m R-Ibs✓N-m Lbs./Kg t5 750 3,323 8 33%4) (63/8i (3Y2 (2; Is/e x 3'/c 050 6.6) 3 51.7 14.78 95 162 89 - 203~ _190 257 3.0 t5_, 600 3,895 8 4'/4 '(7Ye (3W (2 (5/8x 3%i 050 190 7.4, 0 41.4 17.33 108 181 89 - 203 257 3.4 )0 600 5,773 8 4% 8% 31/2 2 3/4 x 41/2 200 250 10.5 9 41.4 25.68 124 206 89 - 271 339 4.8 )0 _ 450_ _7,157 ' 8 63/8 (99%1 (4'i' (2'. %/4 x 4t/ii (200 _250_ _16.4; .3 31.0 31.84 162 238 105 - 271.339 7.4 33 350 8,507 8 71/2 11% 4% 2 '/e x 5 250 300 23.8 .3 24.1 37.84 191 283 111 - 339 406 10.8 6 300 10,341 12 83/4 12% 4% 2 1 x 6 250 300 31.7 .3 20.7 46.00 222 327 111 - 339 406 14.4 6 300 17,528 12 10% 141/2 41/2 4 % x 5 250 300 38.6 .1 20.7 77.97 276 368 114 - 339 406 17.5 50 300 27,229 8 12% 18 5% 4 1 x 61/2 500 600 40 .1 20.7 121.12 321 457 137 - 678 814 18.1 50 250 31,919 12 14% 20% 5% 4 1 x 6% 550 700 56 .9 17.2 141.98 378 514 137 - 746 949 25.4 - 00 200 30,788 12 16% 22% 6% 4 1 x 6% 550 700 88 .6 13.8 136.95 425 562 159 746 949 39.9 00 150 30,159 12 183/4 24 6% 4 1 x 61/2 550 700 95 .4 10.3 134.15 476 610 159 - 746 949 43.1 Is see "Coupling Data Chart Notes" on page 17. tort Toroue information. see sane 216. Gasket Pipe Housing Grippers Working pressure and end load are based on a properly assembled Roughneck coupling with bolts fully torqued to the above specifications, on plain -end or beveled standard wall steel pipe and Gruvlok Plain- End Fittings. Roughneck Couplings are designed to be used on plain -end pipe and Gruvlok Plain -End Fittings only. For externally coated pipe applications, contact an Anvil Representative. Not recommended for use on steel pipe with a hardness greater than 150 Brinell, Stainless Steel, plastic, HDPE, cast iron or other brittle pipe. Not recommended for pipe schedule transitioning Suitable for schedule 10 steel pipe, for pressure ratings contact an Anvil Representative. *Bolt torque ratings shown must be applied 'at installation. ci GRUVLOK INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY ct4111LOKR FIG. 7402 S1ideLOKTM Rigid Coupling INSTALLATION READY FOR INSTALLATION - RIGHT OUT OF THE BOX Do not disassemble the SlideLOK"Coupling. The Figure 7402 coupling is ready for installation. The bolt and gasket do not need to be removed. 1 Pipe Preparation— Pipe ends are to be rolled or cut grooved according to Anvil specifications. Not for use on "EG" rolled or cut grooved pipe ends. The pipe end must be smooth and free from metal burrs or projections. Gasket Preparation— Ensure the ',Gasket is suitable for the intended application by referring to the Anvil gasket compatibility chart. Apply a light coating of Gruvlok®Xtreme" Lubricant to exposed gasket surfaces. METHOD #1 Slide the SlideLOK coupling completely over the grooved pipe end. This will allow a clear and un -obstructed view of the pipe for correct alignment. A. Slide the coupling on the pipe past the groove. The bolts and nuts can be hand tightened to position the coupling in place. B. Align the mating pipe end. Align the two adjoining pipes together. C. Slide the coupling back over the grooves so that the coupling keys are located over the respective grooves on both pipe ends. D. Follow the instructions on fastening the coupling as shown in Step 4. Al Final Assembly e SlideLOK coupling is designed to achieve pad to pad (metal -to -metal contact) using either an impact wrench* or wrench. The intended torque range for the coupling is located in the Table 1. Securely tighten nuts alternately and equally until the housing halves are in metal -to -metal contact. CAUTION: When using an impact wrench, verify that the output of the impact wrench is within the required torque range. It is recommended that a torque wrench be used for accurate assembly in order to obtain specified performance. 3 Assembly— The SlideLOK Figure 7402 may be installed by one of two methods. The preferred method depends on the type of pipe components being joined and their orientation. Please review both methods before installing. METHOD #2 Slide the SlideLOK" coupling half way onto the pipe end or fitting. This will better accommodate fitting, and valve accessories during installation. A. Slide the coupling on the fitting so that the groove and keys are aligned. B. Bring the pipe end or fitting towards the coupling and insert so that the groove and coupling keys are aligned. C. Hand tighten the nuts to correctly position the couplings keys over the respective grooved ends. D. Follow the instructions on fastening the coupling as shown in Step 4. 5Final Inspection Ensure the coupling is properly aligned in the grooves and the housing halves are in metal -to -metal contact, depicted in the pictures to the right. TABLE 1— TORQUE RANGES Sizes In. 2:- 4 5:-6 8 Torque Ft. -Lbs 80 -100 100-130 130-180 180 �.� GL -9.15 ANVIL GRUVLOK INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBL FIG. 7402 S1ideLOKTM Rigid Coupling RE -INSTALLATION REINSTALLATION OF THE FIGURE 7402 SLIDELOKTM COUPLING The SlideLOK coupling is designed to be installed in the ready for installation assembly position once. After the initial assemble the following steps are to be taken to re -install the Fig. 7402 SlideLOK coupling. 1 De -pressurize the System— De -pressurize the system before removing the SlideLOK Coupling. Dis-assemble the couplings by removing the nuts, bolts and gasket from the housing halves. A wrench is required to overcome the epoxy used to secure the nuts on the bolts. 2)Pipe Preparation Pipe ends are to be rolled or cut grooved according to Anvil specifications. Not for use on "EG rolled or cut grooved pipe ends. The pipe end must be smooth and free from metal burrs or projections. 6Final Assembly The SlideLOK coupling is designed to achieve pad to pad (metal -to -metal contact) using either an impact wrench* or wrench. The intended torque range for the coupling is located in the Table 1. Securely tighten nuts alternately and equally until the housing halves are in metal -to -metal contact. ',Gasket Preparation Ensure the gasket is suitable for the intended application by referring to the Anvil gasket compatibility chart. A light coating of GruvlokeXTreme"lubricant must be applied to the gasket prior to installation. r kNowitri (17 * CAUTION: When using an impact wrench, verify that the output of the impact wrench is within the required torque range. It is recommended that a torque wrench be used for accurate assembly in order to obtain specified performance. A Pipe Alignment and Gasket Installation Slide the gasket onto the pipe then align the two pipe ends together. Pull the gasket into position, centering it between the grooves on each pipe. Gasket should not extend into the groove on either pipe. 7Final Inspection Ensure the coupling is properly aligned in the grooves and the housing halves are in metal -to -metal contact, depicted in the pictures to the right. TABLE 1- TORQUE RANGES Sizes In. 2-4 5-6 8 Torque Ft -Lbs 80 - 100 100-130 130 - 180 jHousing Assembly Place each housing halves on the pipe making sure the housing key fits into the groove. Be sure that the tongue and recess portions of the housing mate properly. Insert the bolts. Incorrect Installation Examples Low Torque or Out of Groove ANVIL Excess Torque or Shallow Groove Dimension 11 tfi CIETCJ -ag CI) cu (I) __ _ al 75 8 CC co C_.2 y LS, Co= of] ag VU ri1 .,_.... ig CO U F- r CO 0 d OO. LL op d 2c0 2a 1.___ co 'a 1R a a 181 0 f,l -4 1s \ I I GRUVLOK INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY FIG. 7001 Flexible Coupling 1 I I CHECK & LUBRICATE GASKET— Check gasket to be sure it is compatible for the intended service. Apply a thin coating of Gruvlok lubricant to the exterior surface and sealing lips of the gasket. Be careful that foreign particles do not adhere to lubricated surfaces. AI GASKET INSTALLATION— Slip the gasket over the pipe end making sure the gasket lip does not: overhang the pipe end. On couplings 10" and larger it may be easier to turn the gasket inside out then lubricate and slide the gasket over the pipe end as shown. ALIGNMENT— After aligning the two pipe ends, pull the gasket into position centering it between the grooves on each should not extend into the groove on either pipe. On couplings 10" and larger, flip or roll the gasket into centered position. HOUSINGS— Place the coupling ousing halves over the gasket making sure the housing keys engage the grooves. Insert bolts and turn nuts finger tight. E.TIGHTEN NUTS— Tighten the nuts alternately and equally to the specified bolt torque. The housing bolt pads must make metal - to -metal contact. CAUTION: Uneven tightening may cause the gasket to pinch. NOTE: The housings for sizes 16" and larger are cast in four or more segments. TO INSTALL: Loosely pre -assemble the segments into two "Housing Halves" making sure that the alignment tang(s) and slot(s) on the bolt pad(s) are properly mated. Install the "Housing Halves" as shown in steps 4 & S. The coupling is properly installed when all bolt pads are firmly together - Metal -to -Metal. D 182 GL -3.14 , ASSEMBLY IS COMPLETE— Visually inspect the pipe joint to assure the coupling keys are fully engaged in the pipe grooves and the bolt pads are in firm even metal - to -metal contact on both sides of the coupling. CAUTION: Proper torquing of coupling bolts is required to obtain specified performance. Over torquing the bolts may result in damage to the bolt and/or casting which could result in pipe joint separation. Under torquing the bolts may result in lower pressure retention capabilities, lower bencl�ad capabilities, joint leakage and pipe joint separation. Pipe joint separation may result in significant property damage and serious injury. ANVIL INTERNATIONAL 11 .,,,,,.*,111:11L OK' GRUVLOK INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBL FIG. 7001-2 & FIG. 7401-2 2 -Piece Large Diameter Groove Couplings • 7001-2 & 7401-2 bolts must be lightly coated with Gruvlok Xtreme" lube before installation. See chart for torque requirements. • Minimum wall pipe suitable for 14" – 24": 7001-2 & 7401-2 roll grooved installation is 0.250" wall thickness • Pipe preparation Grooved dimensions must conform to the Gruvlok Roll/Cut groove specification IID [ a 0 U 0 0 0 I CHECK & LUBRICATE GASKET— A. Check gasket to be sure it is compatible for the intended service. Apply a thin coat of Gruvlok lubricant to the exterior surface and sealing lips of the gasket. Be careful that foreign particles do not adhere to lubricated surfaces. JGASKET INSTALLATION— Slip the gasket over the pipe end, making sure the gasket lip does not overhang the pipe end. 3ALIGNMENT— After aligning the two pipe ends together, pull the gasket into position, centering it between the grooves on each pipe. Gasket should not extend into the groove on either pipe. U Co a, D Ai HOUSING— Place each housing half on he pipe and into each groove making sure that the gasket does not slip out of position in between the pipe ends or groove. BOLTS— Apply a thin coat of Xtreme lube to the bolt threads. Tighten the nuts alternately and equally to the specified bolt torque. CAUTION: Uneven tightening may cause the gasket to pinch. 6FINAL ASSEMBLY— Visually inspect the pipe joint to assure the coupling keys are fully engaged in the pipe grooves, the bolt pads are in firm even metal -to -metal contact on both sides of the coupling, and gasket is not visible. Pipe Sizes ANSI SPECIFIED Bolt Size BOLT TORQUE Specified Bolt Torque Lubrication In. In. R.-!bs - 14 '/s 180 - 220 , Gruvlok Xtreme TM Lubricant 16 1 250 C. 300 18 1 250 300 20 1% 375 - 425 24 1% 375 - 425 ANVIL CAUTION: When using an impact wrench, verify that the torque output on the impact wrench is within the required torque range. O .0 183 11 r_i 21 GRUVLOK INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY FIG. 7011 Standard Coupling .PIPE PREPARATION Inspect the pipe ends making sure the criteria, in the Gruvlok Large Diameter Pipe Roll and Cut Groove Specifications, are met. 11 2GASKET INSTALLATION Turn the gasket inside out and slide the gasket completely over one of the pipe ends. Turning the gasket inside out will reduce the stretching necessary to put the gasket into position. Ideally, approximately 75% of the pipe's gasket -sealing surface, (Dimension A) should be visible when the gasket is in proper position. This will aid in step 4. LUBRICATE GASKET ij Lubricate the gasket sealing lips. The use of Gruvlok lubricants ensures compatibility between the lubricant and the gasket. 5 LUBRICATE GASKET �t Lubricate the exterior surface of the gasket. This helps prevent pinching of the gasket during assembly. 6HOUSINGS—Secure the housings about the pipes making sure the coupling keys are engaged in the pipe end grooves. Hint: For horizontal assembly, place housing segment on top of the pipe to support the weight of the housing segment. Secure the adjacent housing with an oval neck track bolt and heavy hex nut and then rotate the secured housings, again balancing the weight of the housings on the top of the pipe. Continue this procedure for all segments. 7 TIGHTEN NUTS— Firmly torque each bolt. The specified minimum torque for each nut is 600 ft -lbs. The speci- fied maximum torque for each nut is 800 ft: lbs. fjj ALIGNMENT -Pull the o pipes into contact aligning the pipe ends. CAUTION: Be careful not to pinch fingers during this step. Working your way around the circumference of the pipe, flip the gasket toward the pipe end so that the proper side is facing out. The end of this procedure will result in the gasket snapping into place. Position the gasket centrally between the grooves of the two pipe ends. ASSEMBLY IS COMPLETE Installation of the Figure 7011 Standard Coupling is completed. Igo CAUTION: Proper torquing of coupling bolts is required to obtain specified performance. Over torquing the bolts may result in damage to the bolt and/or casting which could result in pipe joint separation. Under torquing the bolts may result in lower pressure retention capabilities, lower bend load capabilities, joint leakage and pipe joint separation. Pipe joint separation may result in significant property damage and serious injury. D_-7 184 �.� GL -3.14 ANVIL +ILOK` GRUVLOK INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBL FIG. 7000 Lightweight Flexible Coupling 11 41 CHECK & LUBRICATE GASKET— X.Check gasket to be sure it is compatible fo the intended service. Apply a thin coating of Gruvlok lubricant to the exterior surface and sealing lips of the gasket. Be careful that foreign particles do not adhere to lubricated surfaces. GASKET INSTALLATION— Slip the gasket over the pipe end, making sure the gasket lip does not overhang the pipe end. ALIGNMENT— After aligning the two pipe ends together, pull the gasket into position, centering it between the grooves on each pipe. Gasket should not extend into the groove on either pipe. HOUSINGS— With one nut unthreaded o the end of the bolt, unthread the other nut completely and swing the coupling housing halves over the gasket, making sure the housing keys engage the grooves. Insert the bolt and turn the nuts finger tight. TIGHTEN NUTS— Tighten the nuts alternately and equally to the specified bolt torque. The housing bolt pads must make metal - to -metal contact. CAUTION: Uneven tightening may cause the gasket to pinch. ASSEMBLY IS COMPLETE— Visually inspect the pipe joint to assure the coupling keys are fully engaged in the pipe grooves and the bolt pads are in firm even metal - to -metal contact on both sides of the coupling. CAUTION: Proper torquing of coupling bolts is required to obtain specified performance. Over torquing the bolts may result in damage to the bolt and/or casting which could result in pipe joint separation. Under torquing the bolts may result in lower pressure retention capabilities, lower bend load capabilities, joint leakage and pipe joint separation. Pipe joint separation may result in significant property damage and serious injury. ANVIL 185 GL=3.14 L� GRUVLOK INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY EWi %OK' FIG, 7 ,+0 Rigidlite® Coupling .1 CHECK & LUBRICATE GASKET— ,J1,Check the gasket to be sure it is compatible for the intended service. Apply a thin coating of Gruvlok Xtreme Lubricant to the entire surface, both internal and external, of the gasket. Be careful that foreign particles do not adhere to lubricated surfaces. 2GASKET INSTALLATION— Slip the gasket over the one pipe, making sure the gasket lip does not overhang the pipe end. A HOUSINGS— Remove one nut and bolt and loosen the other nut. Place one housing over the gasket, making sure the housing keys fit into the pipe grooves. Swing the other housing over the gasket and into the grooves on both pipes, making sure the tongue and recess of each housing is properly mated. Reinsert the bolt and run-up both nuts finger tight. 5TIGHTEN NUTS— Securely tighten nuts alternately and equally to the specified bolt torque, keeping the gaps at the bolt pads evenly spaced. CAUTION: Uneven tightening may cause the gasket to pinch. Gasket should not be visible between segments after bolts are tightened. ALIGNMENT— After aligning the two pipe ends together, pull the gasket into position, centering it between the grooves on each pipe. The gasket should not extend into the groove on either pipe. ASSEMBLY IS COMPLETE— Visually inspect the pipe joint to assure the coupling keys are fully engaged in the pipe grooves. The bolt pads are to have equal gaps on each side of the coupling. CAUTION: Proper torquing of coupling bolts is required to obtain specified performance. Over torquing the bolts may result in damage to the bolt and/or casting which could result in pipe joint separation. Under torquing the bolts may result in lower pressure retention capabilities, lower bend load capabilities, joint leakage and pipe joint separation. Pipe joint separation may result in significant property damage and serious injury. �" 186 GL -3.14 I I GRUVLO INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBL FIG. 6402 CTS S1ideLOKTM Rigid Coupling INSrTALLTAATIT READY FOR INSTALLATION - RIGHT OUT OF THE BOX Do not disassemble the CTS SlideLOK"Coupling. The Figure 6402 coupling is ready for installation. The bolt and gasket do not need to be removed. I Copper Tube Preparation— Coppe tube ends are to be roll grooved copper tube according to Anvil specifications. The tube end must be smooth and free from metal burrs or projections. 2Gasket Preparation— Ensure the gasket is suitable for the intended application by referring to the Anvil gasket compatibility chart. Apply a light coating of Gruvlok®Xtreme" Lubricant to exposed gasket surfaces. METHOD #1 Slide the CTS SlideLOK coupling completely over the grooved copper tube end. This will allow a clear and un -obstructed view of the tube for correct alignment. A. Slide the coupling on the copper tube past the groove. The bolts and nuts can be hand tightened to position the coupling in place. B. Align the mating copper tube end. Align the two adjoining tubes together. C. Slide the coupling back over the grooves so that the coupling keys are located over the respective grooves on both copper tube ends. D. Follow the instructions on fastening the coupling as shown in Step 4. A�Final Assembly `1'The CTS SlideLOK coupling is designed to achieve pad to pad (metal -to - metal contact) using either an impact wrench* or wrench. The intended torque range for the coupling is located in Table 1. Securely tighten nuts alternately and equally until the housing halves are in metal -to -metal contact. * CAUTION: When using an impact wrench, verify that the output of the impact wrench is within the required torque range. It is recommended that a torque wrench be used for accurate assembly in order to obtain specified performance. ANVIL 3 Assembly— The CTS SlideLOK Figure 6402 may be installed by one of two methods. The preferred method depends on the type of components being joined and their orientation. Please review both methods before installing. METHOD #2 Slide the CTS SlideLOK' coupling half way onto the copper tube end or fitting. This will better accommodate fitting, and valve accessories during installation. A. Slide the coupling on the fitting so that the groove and keys are aligned. B. Bring the copper tube end or fitting towards the coupling and insert so that the groove and coupling keys are aligned. C. Hand tighten the nuts to correctly position the couplings keys over the respective grooved ends. D. Follow the instructions on fastening the coupling as shown in Step 4. [� Final Inspection a Ensure the coupling is properly aligned in the grooves and the housing halves are in metal -to -metal contact, depicted in the pictures to the right. TABLE 1– TORQUE RANGES Sizes In. 2-4 Torque Ft -Lbs 80 - 100 I I 0 j0Ws co a2 —ars "187 f_I _4 1 A \ u GRUVLOK INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLY FIG. 6402 CTS SlideLOKTM Rigid Coupling RE -INSTALLATION REINSTALLATION OF THE FIGURE 6402 CTS SLIDELOK" COUPLING The CTS SlideLOK coupling is designed to be installed in the ready for installation assembly position once. After the initial assemble the following steps are to be taken to re -install the Fig. 6402 CTS SlideLOK coupling. 1 De -pressurize the System— De -pressurize the system before removing the CTS SlideLOK Coupling. Disassemble the couplings by removing the nuts, bolts and gasket from the housing halves. A wrench is required to overcome the epoxy used to secure the nuts on the bolts. 2CopperTbe Preparation Copper tube ends are to be roll grooved copper tube according to Anvil specifications. The tube end must be smooth and free from metal burrs or projections. 6Final Assembly The CTS SlideLOK coupling is designed to achieve pad to pad (metal -to - metal contact) using either an impact wrench* or wrench. The intended torque range for the coupling is located in Table 1. Securely tighten nuts alternately and equally until the housing halves are in metal -to -metal contact. 0 Gasket 'Preparation Ensure the gasket is suitable for the intended application by referring to the Anvil gasket compatibility chart. A light coating of Gruvlok®XTreme'"lubricant must be applied to the gasket prior to installation. * CAUTION: When using an impact wrench, verify that the output of the impact wrench is within the required torque range. It is recommended that a torque wrench be used for accurate assembly in order to obtain specified performance. Copper Tube Alignment and Gasket Installation Slide the gasket onto the copper tube then align the two tube ends together. Pull the gasket into position, centering it between the grooves on each copper tube. Gasket should not extend into the groove on either copper tube. iFinal Inspection Ensure the coupling is properly aligned in the grooves and the housing halves are in metal -to -metal contact, depicted in the pictures to the right. TABLE 1— TORQUE RANGES Sizes In. 2-4 Torque Ft -Lbs 80 -100 5 Housing Assembly Place each housing halves on the copper tube making sure the housing key fits into the groove. Be sure that the tongue and recess portions of the housing mate properly. Insert the bolts. Incorrect Installation Examples Low Torque or Out of Groove ,188 1 �.� GL -8.14 Excess Torque or Shallow Groove Dimension www.anvilintl.com ANVIL 31 1„..14164LOK GRUVLO INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBL FIG. 6 Rigid Coupling The Fig. 6400 Coupling from Gruvlok is specially designed to provide a rigid pipe connection to meet the specific demands of copper tubing installation. Fast and easy swing -over installation of the rugged lightweight housing produces a secure, rigid pipe joint. Available with the EPDM flush gap style gasket as the standard gasket. CAUTION: Uneven tightening may cause the gasket to pinch. The gasket should not be visible between segments after the bolts are tightened. Proper torquing of coupling bolts is required to obtain specified performance. Over torquing the bolts may result in damage to the bolt and/or casting which could result in pipe joint separation. Under torquing the bolts may result in lower pressure retention capabilities, lower bend load capabilities, joint leakage and pipe joint separation. SPECIFIED BOLT TORQUE Bolt Size In. 1/2 6/8 Wrench Size In. r/6 1'/16 Specified Bolt Torque* FL -Lbs 30-45 30-45 60-90 Non -lubricated bolt torques. CHECK & LUBRICATE GASKET - Check the gasket to be sure it is compatible for the intended service. Apply a thin coating of Gruvlok®Xtreme Lubricant to the entire surface, both internal and external, of the gasket. Be careful that foreign particles do not adhere to the lubricated surfaces. �} GASKET INSTALLATION— Slip the gasket over one tube, making sure the gasket lip does not overhang the tube end. �� 0 U ' rN I` a� cn Iu_ oe a2 Ce d l�¢i I L.m� aJ Cl CD U a ~N�C.) 0.I O- oZl 3ALIGNMENT— After aligning the two tube ends together, pull the gasket into position, centering it between the grooves on each tube. The gasket should not extend into the groove on either tube or between the tube ends. Ai HOUSINGS— Remove one nut and bolt and loosen the other nut. Place one housing over the gasket, making sure the housing keys fit into the tube grooves. Swing the other housing over the gasket and into the grooves on both tubes, making sure the tongue and recess of each housing is properly mated. Re-insert the bolt and run-up both nuts finger tight. 5 TIGHTEN NUTS— Securely tighten nuts alternately and equally to the specified bolt torque, keeping the gaps at the bolt pads evenly spaced. Assembly is complete. Visually inspect the pipe joint to assure the coupling keys are fully engaged in the pipe grooves. The bolt pads are to have equal gaps on each side of the coupling. NOTE: Copper is a soft material, in some cases, the bolt pads may come close to metal -to -metal contact. CAUTION: Uneven tightening may cause the gasket to pinch. The gasket should not be visible between segments after the bolts are tightened. Proper torquing of coupling bolts is required to obtain specified performance. Over torquing the bolts may result in damage to the bolt and/or casting which could result in pipe joint separation. Under torquing the bolts may result in lower pressure retention capabilities, lower bend load capabilities, joint leakage and pipe joint separation. ANVIL 189 0 (.1_717 QUICK RESPONSE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS GL SERIES UPRIGHT 0 PENDENT VERTICAL SIDEWALL HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL CONVENTIONAL (OLD STYLE) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The Globe Quick Response GL Series Sprinklers are a low profile yet durable design which utilizes a 3mm frangible glass ampule as the thermosensitive element. This provides sprinkler operation approximately six times faster than ordinary sprinklers. While the Quick Response Sprinkler provides an aesthetically pleasing appearance, it can be installed wherever standard spray sprinklers are specified when allowed by the applicable standards. It offers the additional feature of greatly increased safety to life and is available in various styles, orifices, temperature ratings and finishes to meet many varying design requirements. Quick Response Sprinklers should be used advisedly and under the direction of approving authorities having jurisdiction. The heart of Globe's GL Series sprinkler proven actuating assembly is a hermetically sealed frangible glass ampule that contains a precisely measured amount of fluid. When heat is absorbed, the liquid within the bulb expands increasing the internal pressure. At the prescribed temperature the internal pressure within the ampule exceeds the strength of the glass causing the glass to shatter. This results in water discharge which is distributed in an approved pattern depending upon the deflector style used. TECHNICAL DATA • See reverse side for Approvals and Specifications. °Temperature Ratings - 135°F (57°C), 155°F (68°C), 175°F (79°C), 200°F (93°C), 286°F (141°C) °Water Working Pressure Rating - 175 psi (12 Bars) • Factory tested hydrostatically to 500 psi (34 Bars) • Maximum low temperature glass bulb rating is -67°F (-55°C) • Frame - bronze • Deflector - brass ° Screw - brass ° Lodgement Wire - stainless steel • • Bulb seat - copper 0 Spring - nickel alloy • Seal - teflon *Bulb - glass with alcohol based solution, 3mm size CK RESPONSE CONVENTIONAL K RESPONSE VERTICAL SIDEWALL QUICK RESPONSE HORIZONTAL LPC/CE SIDEWALL HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL SPRINKLER TEMPERATURE RATING/CLASSIFICATION and COLOR CODING CLASSIFICATION AVAILABLE SPRINKLER TEMPERATURES BULB COLOR N.F.P.A. MAXIMUM CEILING TEMPERATURE ORDINARY INTERMEDIATE HIGH 135°F/155°F 57°C/68°C 175°F/200°F 79°C/93°C 286°F 141°C ORANGE/RED YELLOW/GREEN BLUE 100°F 38°C 150°F 66°C 225°F 107°C 4077 AIRPARK DRIVE, STANDISH, MICHIGAN 48658 JULY 2012 A-20 989-846-4583 • FAX 989-846-9231 BULLETIN GL5615, REV. #9 QUICK RESPONSE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS GL SERIES UPRIGHT. PENDENT • VERTICAL SIDEWALL HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL • CONVENTIONAL (OLD STYLE) SPECIFICATIONS NOMINAL "K" FACTOR THREAD SIZE LENGTH' FINISHES 2.8 4.2 5.6 7.8 8.1 (39 metric) (59 metric) (80 metricji (111 metric) (116 metric) 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NP,,T) 1/2" NPT 3/4" NPT 2 1/4" (5.7cm) 2 1/4" (5.7cm) �) 2 1/4" (5.7cm 2 1/4" (5.7cm) 2 7/16" (6.2cm) Factory Bron Chrome White Polyester Black Polyester 2,3 METRIC CONVERSIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. 1 HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL IS 2 9/16". 2 FINISHES AVAILABLE ON SPECIAL ORDER. AVAILABLE AS cULus LISTED CORROSION RESISTANT WHEN SPECIFIED ON ORDER. APPROVALS STYLE SIN MODEL K FACTOR HAZARD' 135°F 57°C 155°F 68°C 175°F 79°C 200°F 93°C 286°F 141°C cULus FM LPC CE NYC - DOB MEA 101-92-E UPRIGHT/ GL2815 GL4215 GL56151 GL8115 GL8118 2.8 4.2 5.6 ('? 7.8° 8.1 LH LH LH/OH LH/OH LH/OH X X 0 X (' X X X X X X X X X O X l,) X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X O X X X — — O X — X — — O X — X — — O X — X X X O X X X O( PENDENT] GL2801 GL4201 GL5601) GL8101 GL8106 2.8 4.2 5.6 (' 7.8' 8.1 LH LH LH/OH LH/OH LH/OH X X X ''. X X X X X X X X X 0 X !) X X X X X It X X X X X ;I X X X X XO i) X X — — X t) X X — — X {) — X — — X !} — X X X X. X X ( VERTICAL SIDEWALLI GL5632 GL8133 5.6 8.1 LH LH X X X X X X X X X X X X X — — — — — — — HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL GL2826 § GL4226 § GL5626 § GL56270 GL8127 § 2.8 4.2 5.6 5.6 8.1 LH LH LH/OH LH/OH LH/OH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X — X — — X — — — — — X — — — — X — X X X — — CONVENTIONAL (OLD STYLE) GL5624 GL8125 5.6 8.1 LH/OH LH/OH X X X X X X X X X X — — — — X X X X — — 1SPRINKLERS SHALL BE LIMITED AS PER THE REQUIREMENTS OF NF §HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL cULus LISTED FOR DEFLECTOR 4" TO 12" BE °INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE TO BS5306 AND ANY OTHER RELATED DO /PENDENT VERTICAL SIDEWALL cULus LISTED FOR 6' MIN. SPACING. (UPRIGHT VERTICAL SIDEWALL cULus LISTED FOR 9' MIN. SPACING. OH: ORDINARY HAZARD LH: LIGHT HAZARD `1/2" NPT ORDERING INFORMATION SPECIFY • Quantity • Model Number • Style • Orifice • Thread Sizes • Temperature • Finishes desired • Quantity - Wrenches - P/N 325390 (1/2"); P/N 312366 (L.O.) PA13 AND ANY OTHER RELATED DOCUMENTS. LOW THE CEILING, FM APPROVED 4" TO 6" BELOW THE CEILING. CUMENTS. GL©BE FIRE SPRINKLER CORPORATION GLOBE® PRODUCT WARRANTY Globe agrees to repair or replace any of its own manufactured products found to be defective in material or workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. For specific details of our warranty please refer to Price List Terms and Conditions of Sale (Our Price List). 4077 AIRPARK DRIVE, STANDISH, MICHIGAN 48658 989-846-4583 FAX 989-846-9231 1-800-248-0278 www.globesprinkler.com JUNE2012 PRINTED U.S.A. BULLETIN GL5615, REV. #9 PPER TUBING HANGERS CT -69 n1/2" through 4" :arbon steel Dper plated =commended for suspension of non -insulated stationary copper tube. Complies with Federal Specification A -A -1192A (Type 10) -E (Type 10), ANSI/MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -58 (Type 10). ids are countersunk so that they cannot become burred or damaged. ed swivel nut provides vertical adjustment after piping is in place. J red swivel nut will not fall off. Specify nominal tube size, figure number, name and finish. ric nut available upon request. 3/8 G h 11/4" pipe 11/2" through 4" pipe Adjustable Swivel Ring 1 FIG. CT -69: LOADS (LBS) • WEIGHT (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Size Max Load Weight B C F Width 300 0.10 3 23/16 1% 5/s 0.10 213/16 2 19/16 i 0.10 211/6 113/16 11/4 0.10 21/2 1% 15A 6 0.10 211As 173/6 1 I 0.11 3'/16 21/2 1% 525 0.25 313/16 215/ 6 111/16 3/4 0.27 41/4 3% 1% I 650 0.48 4% 31/ 11/2 changes in rod diameter from previously published data per recent revisions in MSS -SP -58 & 69 VERTICAL MOUNT SAMMYS® SAMMYS° for Wood Installs VERTICALLY into the bottom of wood structures easily and quickly! Not less than 2' nominal width (1-1/2°) Wood Flooring I f Not less than 3' nominal thickness (2-1/2') (depth or side vertical member) For vertical use - install in center of lower face. Double Sheetrock Ceiling Minimum 2' embedment into base material for NFPA 13 compliance. Composite I Truss Consult truss manufacturer for recommended installation poinL 'Pre -drilling maybe required for GST 25-380. Tool available on page 10. Product Features • No pre -drilling required. • Quick to install using the Sammy Nut Driver with an 18V cordless drill/driver. • Saves time from traditional methods. • Reduces installation cost. • Made in the U.S.A. Approvals Rod Size Part Model Number Screw Ultimate UL Test FM Test Box Descriptions Pullout (lbs) Load (lbs) Load (lbs) Qty Case Qty 1/4' 8002957 GST 100 1/4 x 1" 1/4° 8003957 GST 200 1/4 x 2" 1/4' 8004957 3/8" 8006957 Lj:(318" 8008957 3/8" 8068925 GST 20 -SS 1/4 x 2 3/8" 8009925 GST 25-380 3/8 x 2.1/2" 2113 (Fir) 3/8' 8007957 f GST 300 GST .75 GST 10 GST 20 1/4 x 3" 210 (7/16' OSB) 670 (3/4" Ply) 1760 (Fir) 2060 (Fir) 1/4 x 3/4" 564 (3/4" Ply) 25 125 25 125 111 25 125 25 125 1/4 x l' 210 (7/16" OSB) 670 (3/4" Ply) 1/4x2' 1760 (Fir) 1760 (Fir) 3/8" 8010957 3/8° 8069925 GST 30 GST 30 -SS 1/4 x3" 1/4x3' 3/8" 8011925 GST 40 114x 4' 3/8" 8012925 GST 60 1/4 x 6" 1/2" 8013925 GST 2 1/4 x 2' 1/2" 8014925 1/2" 1/2° 1/2" 8015925 8016925 8017925 2060 (Fir) 2060 (Fir) 2180 (Fir) 2230 (Fir) 1760 (Fir) GST 2.5-380 3/8 x 2-1/2" 2113 (Fir) GST 3 GST 4 GST 6 1/4 x 3' 1/4x4" 1/4 x 6° 2275 (Fir) 2180 (Fir) 2230 (Fir) 850 1475 25 125' 850 25 125 1500 25 125 1500 1475 25 125 25 125 25 125 1 25 125 125 125 (1/14 Blac—k) Nut Driven Part#8113910 125 1 125 125 1 #14 SW Red Nut Driver Part # 8114910 SAMMY Swivel Head° for Wood Product Features • Eliminates distortion of threaded rod. • Accommodates up to 3'/" x 12 pitch roof. • Allows 17° deflection from vertical. • Saves time from traditional methods. • Reduces installation cost. • Made in the U.S.A. Approvals O 3/8" 8139957 SH -GST 20 QL0 3/8" 8141957 SH -GST 30 Rod Part Size Number Model Screw Ultimate UL Test FM Test Min Box Case Descriptions Pullout (lbs) Load (lbs) Load (lbs) Thickness Qty Qty 1/4x2' 1257 (Fir) 1050 1475 25 125 125_1 1/4x 3" 1720 (Fir) 1500 1475 25 125 #14 Black Nut Driver SPECIAL NUT DRIVER SYSTEM: The nut drivers were designed with a unique spin-off feature which provides a fast and safe installation each time. When the face of the driver comes into Part # 8113910 contact with the material you are installing into, continue drilling until nut driver spins free, Installation is then complete. Warranty requires the use of the appropriate nut driver for installations. For the most up to date information, visit www.sammysuperscrew.com �oHS SAMMYS® HORIZONTAL MOUNT SIDEWINDERS° for Wood Installs HORIZONTALLY into the side of wood structures easily and quickly! (#14 SW Red} Nut Driver) Part# 8114910' Not less than 2° nominal width (1-112') up to 3-1/2' pipe; not less than 3' (2-1/2°) nominal width 4° 8 5' pipe f� Minimum 2-1/2° from bottom for branch lines. Minimum 3' from bottom for main lines. Exception: This requirement shall not apply to 2° or thicker nailing strips resting on top of steel beams. Composite/Truss Consult truss manufacturer for recommended installation point. 'Pre -drilling may be required for Model SING 25-380 (tools available on pg 10 ) Product Features • No pre -drilling required. • Quick to install using the Sammy Nut Driver with an 18V cordless drill/driver. • Saves time from traditional methods. • Reduces installation cost. • Made in the U.S.A. Approvals Rod Part Size Number Model Screw Ultimate UL Test Box Descriptions Pullout (lbs) Load (lbs) Qty Case Qty 1/4" 8018957 1/4" 8019957 SWG 100 • SWG 200 1/4 x 1' 622 (Fir) 25 125 1/4 x 2" 1725 (Fir) 25 125 3/8" 8020957 (3/8" 8021957 JEL 3/8" 8073925 3/8" 8022925 SWG 10 1/4 x 1" 622 (Fir) 300 25 125 1 SWG 20 1/4 x 2" 1725 (Fir) 1050 25 125 SWG 20 -SS 1/4 x 2" 1725 (Fir) 850 25 125 1 SWG 25.380 3/8 x 2-1/2" 2249 (Fir) 1500 25 125 3/8" 8023925 SWG 30 1/4 x 3" 1884 (Fir) 25 125 1 E."E• r ; , "C -i:.? ' VERTICAL Iv'cj • (Y J-; ;;, 1. Insert the appropriate nut driver into a 3/8" or 1/2" portable drill. 2. Insert the SAMMYS into the #14 (black) nut driver (p/n 8113910). Drill should be in a vertical position. 3. Push the face of the nut driver tight to the member. When the • nut driver spins freely on the SAMMYS, stop drill and remove. 4. The SAMMYS is now ready to receive 1/4", 3/8", 1/2" or metric all thread rod, bolt stock. (The 1/2" requires the #14SW red nut driver) Note: When installing DSTR, follow the above instructions, then add retainer nut and torque to 20 foot lbs. for maximum pullout in puffin steel. 1267!-:y1•41^JHORIZONTAL 1.`.`.',c, 41r114(: 1. Insert the appropriate nut driver into a 3/8" or 1/2" portable drill. 2. Insert the SAMMYS into the #14SW (red) nut driver (p/n 8114910). With drill unit in a horizontal position and at a right angle to the structural member, begin installation. 3. When the nut driver spins free on the SAMMYS, stop the drill and remove. 4. The unit is now ready to receive 1/4", 3/8" or metric all thread rod or bolt stock. Note: When installing SWDR, follow the above instructions, then add retainer nut and torque to 20 foot lbs. for maximum pullout in puffin steel. SPECIAL NUT DRIVER SYSTEM: The nut drivers were designed with a unique spin-off feature which provides a fast and safe installation each time. When the face of the driver comes into contact with the material you are installing into, continue drilling until nut driver spins free. Installation is then complete. Warranty requires the use of the appropriate nut driver for installations. 5 To find a distributor near you, call 800-BUILDEX 1475 .105° 1 APPROVALS PIPE HANGER SAMMYS° FOR WOOD Pipe Hanger Part No. Model Rod Size Mount Direction UL Max UL Test UL Min Wood FM Max FM Test FM Min Wood Pipe Size Load (lbs) Thickness Pipe Size Load (lbs) Thickness 8007957 GST 10 8020957 SWG 10 3/8° 3/8" Vertical Horizontal CPVC 1-1/2° 300 1-1/2° ( CPVC 1-1/2" 300 1-1/2° 8008957 GST 20 3/87 Vertical 8068925 GST 20 -SS 3/8" Vertical 2-1/2° 850 2-1/2" 850 8010957 GST 30 3/8° 8009925 GST 25-380 I 8022925 SWG 25-380 3/8° Vertical Vertical 4° 1500 4" 1500 1-1/2° 1-1/2° 1-1/2" 1° 1475 1112"I 1475 1-1/2° 3/8" Horizontal 3.1/2° - 4" 1500 1-1/2° (8021957_ SWG 20 3/8° I 8073925 SWG 20 -SS Horizontal 2-1/2". - 3 1050 1-1/2 3/8" Horizontal 2-1/2" 850 1-1/2" (8139957 SH -GST 20 3/8° 17° Angle off Vertical 3" 1050 I 8141957 SH -GST 30 3/8° 17° Angle off Vertical 4° 1500 SAMMYS° FOR STEEL Pipe Hanger 1-1/7 (4" ,1475 11/2°) 1-1/2" , 4" 1475 1.1/2° 1 Part No. Model , Rod Si Sze Mount Direction UL Max UL Test UL Min. Steel FM Max FM Test FM Min. Steel Pipe Size Load (lbs) Thickness Pipe Size Load (lbs) Thickness ) 8038957 8037957 DSTR 1 DSTR 1-1/2 3/8° 3/8" Vertical Vertical 4" 1500 .035° 4" 1475 .105° 4" 1500 .035" 4° 1475 .105° 8039957 DSTR 516 3/8° Vertical 4° 1500 .037" 4" 8045957 DST 516 3/8° Vertical 4" 1500 .188" / 4" 1475 .188" 8046957 TEK 50 3/8" 8055957 SWDR 1 I 8056957 SWDR 516 3/8" Vertical Horizontal 4° 1500 .250" 4° 1475 .188° 1500 .037" 1475 .060" 3/8° Horizontal 4° 1500 .037" 1475 8054957 SWDR 1-1/2 3/8° Horizontal 4° 1500 .037° 4° 1475 .060" I .060° 8137957 SH-DSTR 1 3/8" 17° Angle off Vertical 4" 1500 .035" 8150922 XP 20 3/8' Vertical 2-1/2° 850 .027" 4" 2° 4" 1475 940 1475 .105° 029° .105" 8153922 XP 35 3/8° Vertical 4° 1500 .060" 2' 4° 8294922 8295922 8293957 SXP 20 SXP 35 SWXP 35 3/8" Vertical or up to 45° 3/8" Vertical or up to 89° 3/8° Horizontal SAMMYS° FOR CONCRETE 2" 3-1/2° 3-1/2° 750 1250 1250 Pipe Hanger .027" .060" .060" 2 940 1475 635 635 .029° .105" 029" .029° Part' No. Eing CIA Mount Direction 011,03 Pipe Size Load (lbs) UM GUM l7 ca Pipe Size Load (lbs) GED L8059957 CST 20 8061957 SWC 20 I 8150922 XP 20 8150922 XP 20 3/8' 3/8" Vertical 4° 1475 3000 I Horizontal 4" 1475 3000 3/8° 3/8° Vertical Vertical TRUSS -T HANGER® Pipe Hanger 2-1/2° 850 Pre -Pour Structural @ 3000psi 2-1/2° 850 Post -Pour Range II LWC -< 35 PCF (Ibs/fP) Part No. Model Rod Size Mount Direction UL Load Rating (lbs) UL Test Load (lbs) Listed Application I 8296900 8297900 HD38TC HD38BC 3/8° 3/8° Top Chord Bottom Chord I 8198900 HD12CZP 1/2° Bottom Chord 8298900 HD12TC 1/2° Top Chord 1200 6075 1200 6075 Maximum 4" Schedule 40 pipe Maximum 4" Schedule 40 pipe - 1200 6075 f Maximum 8" Schedule 40 Pipe ,I 1200 6075 Maximum 8" Schedule 40 Pipe 8299900 HD12BC 1/2° Bottom Chord 1200 6075 Maximum 8° Schedule 40 Pipe 1 'SWG 25-380 Maximum pipe size in composite wood joist allowed by UL is 3-1/2° UL compliance with NEC Standards. 'SWG 25-380 Maximum pipe size in wood timber or joist allowed by UL is 4° UL and FM tests were performed in compliance with NFPA 13 Standards. **SWG 20 Maximum pipe size in composite wood joist allowed by UL is 2.1/2° Fastening requirement: 5 times weight of water -filled schedule 40 pipe plus 250 pounds. -**SWG 20 Maximum pipe size in wood timber or joist allowed by UL is 3° For the most up to date information, visit www.sammysuperscrew.com 14 S LISTED PIPE HANGER ALSO LISTED AS CONDUIT AND CABLE HARDWARE ALSO LrSTEDAS ANCHOR FOR LUMINAIRE HRZN APPROVED LUMINAIRE, CONDUIT, TUBING, & CABLE APPROVALS SAMMYS° FOR STEEL Luminaire Fitting 8150922 XP 20 3/8' Vertical 8153922 XP 35 3/8° Vertical 185 250 185 250 .027° 035° .027" .035° 8181922 XP 200 1/4° Vertical 185 250 .027° .035° 8294922 SXP 20 3/8" Vertical 45° 170 80 .027" .027° 8295922 SXP 35 3/8° Vertical 900 250 80 .060° .060" 8293957 SWXP 35 3/8" TRUSS -T HANGER® Horizontal Luminaire Fitting 80 060° Part No. Model Rod Size Mount Direction UL Load UL Test Rating (lbs) Load (lbs) Listed Application • 8296900 8297900 8198900 8298900 8299900 HD38TC HD38BC HD12CZP HD12TC HD12BC 3/8" 3/8" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" Top Chord Bottom Chord Bottom Chord Top Chord Bottom Chord 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 6075 Overhead Lighting & Luminaire Fittings 6075 Overhead Lighting & Luminaire Fittings 6075 Overhead Lighting & Luminaire Fittings 1 6075 Overhead Lighting & Luminaire Fittings 6075 Overhead Lighting & Luminaire Fittings SAMMYS° FOR STEEL Conduit, Tubing, and Cable 1 8150922 XP 20 3/8" 8153922 XP 35 3/8° 1 8294922 SXP 20 3/8° 8295922 SXP 35 3/8" r 8293957 SWXP 35 3/8" Sheet Steel Sizes Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical Horizontal 283 .027° Max 4 trade size EMT, RMC, and IMC & 5 trade size rigid PVC conduit j 500 .060" Max 4 trade size EMT & 6 trade sze RMC, IMC, and rigid PVC conduit 283 .027° Max 4 trade size EMT, RMC, and IMC & 5 trade size rigid PVC conduit 500 .060" Max 4 trade size EMT & 6 trade sze RMC, IMC, and rigid PVC conduit 500 :060" Max 4 trade size EMT & 6 trade sze RMC, IMC, and rigid PVC conduit 1 eet tee auges Gauge No. Nominal Decimal Equivalent 22 ga. 20 ga. .030" TRUSS -T HANGER® .036° 18 ga. .048" 16 ga. .060" Conduit, Tubing, and Cable 14 ga. .075° 12 ga. .105" 3/16° .188° 1/4" .250° Part No. Model Rod Size Mount UL Load UL Test Direction Rating (lbs) Load (lbs) Listed Application 1 8296900 HD38TC 8297900 HD38BC I 8198900 HD12CZP 8298900 HD12TC 3/8" 3/8" 1/2" 1/2° Top Chord Bottom Chord Bottom Chord Top Chord 1200 6075 Up to 6° Trade Size EMT, IMC, and Rigid PVC conduit ' 1200 6075 Up to 6" Trade Size EMT, IMC, and Rigid PVC conduit 1200 6075 Up to 6° Trade Size EMT, IMC, and Rigid PVC conduit 1 1200 6075 Up to 6° Trade Size EMT, IMC, and Rigid PVC conduit 8299900 H012BC 1/2" Bottom Chord 1200 6075 Up to 6° Trade Size EMT, IMC, and Rigid PVC conduit ' yr us LISTED PIPE HANGER ALSO LISTED AS CORD= AND CABLE HARDWARE ALSO LISTED AS ANCHOR FOR LUMINAIRE HRH APPROVED 15 UL compliande with NEC Standards. To find a distributor near you, call 800-BUILDEX I® Flexible Sprinkler Drops Braided Flexible Sprinkler Connection Data Sheet EASYFLEX Flexible Sprinkler Drops are designed to significantly reduce labor and installation costs. By eliminating the need for pipe cutting and midline connections, you save valuable time and money. Easyflex flexible sprinkler connections offer braided and unbraided flexible hoses in 2',3',4',5', and 6' with top loading or front loading brackets for variety of ceiling and wall applications: T Bars, metal studs, hat channels, wood beams, concrete sidewalls, and more. The system is qualified to be installed at commercial, hotel, retail, restaurants, cultural, entertainment, educational, government, healthcare, and religious buildings. EASYFLEX Flexible Sprinkler Drops Appliance Standards National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): • NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems • NFPA 13D: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in One and Two -Family Dwellings and Manufactured Homes • NFPA 13R: Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems in residential Occupancies up to and including four stories in height • NFPA 13 Section 9.2.1.3.3.3: No hangers are required for flexible connections as long as the length does not exceed 6ft. American Society for Testing and Methods (ASTM): • ASTM C635: Standard specifications for the manufacture, performance, and testing of metal suspension systems for acoustical tile and lay -in panel ceilings • ASTM C636: Standard practice for installation of metal ceiling suspension systems for acoustical tile and lay -in panels Factory Mutual (FM), FM Class No, 1637: • Approved standard for flexible sprinkler hose with threaded end fittings Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), UL 2443: • Standard for flexible sprinkler hose with fittings for fire protection service International Building Code (IBC) Section 1621 / American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7 9.6.2.6.2 & 9.6.2.6.2.2: • Flexible Sprinkler Connections are an alternative solution to install without seismic escutcheons Job Name : Engineer / Architect : Job Location : Wholesaler : Submittal Date : Contractor : WEST OFFICE Toll Free (888) 577-8999 • info@easyflexusa.com EAST OFFICE Toll Free (855) 388-2600 • info@easyflexeast.com EASYFLE�C TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BRAIDED FLEXIBLE HOSE 3 2 .yaw` 0IIIIII 11111NAB �IIIII III; h IIIII011INiI► I ■ 4%%.�.�.3 16-11 IIIIIIIIIIIIII ii 1. TUBE 2. ISOLATION RING 3. SEALING GASKET 4. NUT 5. NIPPLE (1") 6. REDUCER 7. BRAID 8. PRESS RING (INNER) 9. PRESS RING (OUTER) SPECIFICATIONS Lengths Available 24", 36", 48", 60" and 72" Outlet 1/2" or 3/4" Hose TypeBraided EPDM/ NYLON Max. Ambient Temperature Rating 225°F Max. Working Pressure Rating 175 psig _ * No hangers and seismic escutcheons required * Required torque to assemble reducer and nipple with the flexible hose : 50 ft -lb C LISTED FRICTION LOSS DATA US EFB Series Braided Hose TBS Bracket Systems Hose Stainless Steel 304 Nut & Nipple Zinc -Plated Steel Sealing Gasket / Isolation Ring EPDM/ NYLON Minimum Bend Radius 4" (UUULC) and 8" (FM) * DO NOT bend within 2.52 inches from connection nuts Connection Inlet 1 "NPT Outlet 1/2" ora/4"NPT Length (in.) Outlet Connection K -Factor Max. Number of 90° Bends Equivalent Length of 1 in. Schedule 40 Pipe, ft. 24" 1/2" 5.6 'N 1 18 3/4" 8.0 1 18 36" 1/2" 5.6 2 - 31 3/4" 8.0 2 34 gfili .6 3 48) 48" 3/4" 8.0 3 51 60" 1/2" 5.6 4 60 3/4" 8.0 4 65 72" 1/2" 5.6 4 71 3/4" 8.0 4 72 UL: 4" minimum bend radius, where C=120 WEST OFFICE Toll Free (888) 577-8999 • info@easyflexusa.com EAST OFFICE Toll Free (855) 388-2600 • info@easyflexeast.com EASYFLE C. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BRAIDED FLEXIBLE HOSE 3 2 �iIIIJIjf[IiIlIJJIIiIIIiJiI AI.AAAg.A♦ vI►I►I► ►I►I►IpIj i• lank.el 1611 111111111111111111 1. TUBE 2. ISOLATION RING 3. SEALING GASKET 4. NUT 5. NIPPLE (1") 6. REDUCER 7. BRAID 8. PRESS RING (INNER) 9. PRESS RING (OUTER) SPECIFICATIONS Lengths Available 24", 36", 48", 60" and 72" Outlet 1/2" or 3/4" Hose Type Braided Max. Ambient Temperature Rating 225,E Max. Working Pressure Rating 175 psig No hangers and seismic escutcheons required " Required torque to assemble reducer and nipple with the flexible hose : 50 ft -lb APPROVED FRICTION LOSS DATA EFB Series Braided Hose OGSB, TBS Bracket Systems Hose Stainless Steel 304 Nut & Nipple Zinc -Plated Steel Sealing Gasket / Isolation Ring EPDM/ NYLON Minimum Bend Radius 4" (U VULC) and 8" (FM) * DO NOT bend within 2.52 inches from connection nuts Connection Inlet 1"NPT Outlet 1/2" or 3/4"NPT Length (in.) Outlet Connection K -Factor Max. Number of 90° Bends Equivalent Length of 1 in. Schedule 40 Pipe, ft. 24" 1/2" 5.6 1 27.0 3/4" 8.0 1 18.6 36" 1/2" 5.6 2 ' 37.4 3/4" 8.0 2 30.4 (4£51) (I/2 j 5.6 3 54.9 3/4" 8.0 3 48.3 60" 1/2" 5.6 4 72.5 3/4" 8.04 66.2 72" 1/2" 5.6 4 90.5 3/4" 8.0 4 83.0 * FM: 8" minimum bend radius, where C=120 WEST OFFICE Toll Free (888) 577-8999 • info@easyflexusa.com EAST OFFICE Toll Free (855) 388-2600 • info@easyflexeast.com "THE INCH" E31 QUICK RESPONSE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS FIRE SPRINKLER CORPORATION GL SERIES DRY TYPE ONE INCH ADJUSTABLE FLAT PLATE CONCEALED PENDENT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The Globe Quick Response GL Series Dry Type Adjustable Concealed Pendent Sprinkler is designed for use in special applications such as freezing environments and conditions where sediment or foreign materials might accumulate in ordinary drop nipples. All that is seen at the ceiling is a 3 5/16" diameter ceiling plate color finished to match the specifier's exact requirements. The Quick Response GL Series Dry Adjustable Concealed Sprinkler may be virtually invisible as it does not interrupt the "smooth flow" of the ceiling. The quick response sprinkler with operation approximately six times faster than ordinary sprinklers, should be used advisedly and under the direction of approving authorities having jurisdiction. Globe's Dry Adjustable Concealed. Sprinkler utilizes its frangible 3mm glass bulb type sprinkler which is located above the ceiling and concealed from view by the ceiling plate. The plate is soldered to the sprinkler special upper support assembly in three places. Upon the application of sufficient heat, the plate falls to the floor exposing the pendent spray sprinkler. At the ampule's rated temperature, the sprinkler opens releasing the bulb seat, causing the inner tube assembly to move allowing the spring assembly to pivot alongside the inner tube. At this time, water flows through the sprinkler and is distributed by the deflector in an approved discharge pattern. The provided protective cap needs to be removed in order to install the sprinkler with the proper wrench. The protective cap must be replaced on the sprinkler until the time the cover plate is to be installed. The "push on - screw off" designed cover plate is easily installed and with a nominal 1" inch of adjustment makes it easier to get a proper fit at the ceiling. TECHNICAL DATA •See reverse side for Approvals and Specifications. •Temperature Ratings - 135°F (57°C) Sprinkler, 135°F (57°C) Cover Plate 155°F (68°C) Sprinkler; 135°F (57°C) Cover Plate 175°F (79°C) Sprinkler; 155°F (68°C) Cover Plate (200°F (93°C) Sprinkler; 155°F (68°C) Cover Plate) •Water Working Pressure Rating - 175 psi (12 Bars) •Factory tested hydrostatically to 500 psi (34 Bars) ' •Maximum low temperature glass bulb rating is -67°F (-55°C) •Frame - bronze • Deflector - brass • Screw - brass • Bulb Seat - brass .Spring - nickel alloy • Seal - teflon • Retainer - brass • Pin - stainless steel .Torsion Spring - stainless steel • Lodgement Wire - stainless steel .Bulb - glass with alcohol based solution, 3mm size • Orifice Insert - brass .1 "NPT • Outer Tube - galvanized steel pipe • Inner Tube - stainless steel •Cover Plate - brass • Upper Escutcheon Assembly - plated steel QUICK RESPONSE FLAT PLATE DRY CONCEALED PENDENT NOTE: Globe's wrench P/N 337014 must be used to install this sprinkler. •SPRINKLER TEMPERATURE RATING/CLASSIFICATION and COLOR CODING CLASSIFICATION AVAILABLE SPRINKLER TEMPERATURES BULB COLOR N.F.P.A. MAXIMUM CEILING TEMPERATURE ORDINARY 135°F/155°F 57*C/68°C 175°F/200°F 79°C/93°C ORANGE/RED 100°F 38°C 150°F 66°C (INTERMEDIATE YELLOW/GREEN JULY 2014 A-54 BULLETIN GL5634, REV. #1 "THE INCH" QUICK RESPONSE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS GL SERIES DRY TYPE ONE INCH ADJUSTABLE FLAT PLATE CONCEALED PENDENT SIN MODEL NOMINAL "K" FACTOR THREAD SIZE LENGTH FLAT COVER PLATE FINISHES GL5634' ',5..6,(80metnc)(-Chrome'cULus 1"NPT Variable to 48" FM Variable to 36" White Painted Painted Finishes1'2 GL8134 8.1 (116 metric)Other NOTE: METRIC CONVERSIONS AREAPPRO❑IMATE. FINIS❑ES AVAILABLE ON SPECIAL ORDER, 'FOR PAINTED PLATES OT❑ER T❑AN W❑ITE, CONTACT GLOBE FOR ORDERING SPECIFICATIONS. APPROVALS STYLE SIN MODEL HAZARD' TEMPERATURE cULus *FM MIN. DISTANCE BETWEEN SPRINKLERS Feet (Meters) **135°F (57°C) Sprinkler with 135°F (57°C) Flat Cover Plate 155°F (68°C) Sprinkler with 135°F (57°C) Flat Cover I Plate **175°F (79°C) Sprinkler with 155°F (68°C) Flat Cover Plate 200°F (93°C) Sprinkler with 155°F (68°C) Flat Cover Plate Adjustable Concealed Pendent GL5634 L❑/O❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ 6 (1.8) GL8134 L❑/O❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ --- SPRIN❑LERS S❑ALL BE LIMITED AS PER T❑E REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA13 AND ANY OT❑ER RELATED DOCUMENTS. TM APPROVED AS STANDARD RESPONSE LINO FM APPROVALS O❑❑ORDINARY ❑ACARD L❑LLIG❑T ❑ADARD CROSS SECTION FACE OF _L TEE FITTING 9 1/4' MIN. (FACE OF FITTING TO FINISHED CEILING) , CUP TEE FITTING ANSI 1316.3 CLASS 155 or ANSI 016.4 CLASS 125 2 3/0" DIA. 2 3/4' DIA. MIN. 1 1/2"" MIN. HOLE IN CEILING (DEFLECTOR TO CEILING 1 5/16") 2 1/2" MAX. (DEFLECTOR TO CEILING 5/161 f3' DIA. CEILING CEILING COVER PLATE 3 5/16" DIA. 1/8 1" ADJUSTMENT FLAT PLATE CONCEALED PENDENT FLAT COVER PLATE SIZE 135°F (57°C) PART # 155°F (68°C) PART # 3 5/16" DIA. WHITE 332892 332898 CHROME 332891 332897 GL BE FIRE SPRINKLER CORPORATION JULY 2014 IMPORTANT INSTALLATION DATA Globe GL Series Dry Concealed sprinklers should be installed in accordance with the requirements set forth in NFPA 13. These sprinklers are to be installed using a pipe wrench applied to the outer tube. When this is not possible, the proper sprinkler head wrench may be used with extreme care for lengths up to approximately 18". Excessive force may distort the frame thus destroying the unit. When installed in a wet system extending into a freezing area see chart on Dry Caution sheet for minimum exposed barrel length to prevent ice plug's. Please refer to our Dry Caution Sheet for further important installation data. ORDERING INFORMATION SPECIFY •Quantity. Model Number. Style. Orifice .Temperature •Finishes desired •Quantity - Wrenches - P/N 337014 •Quantity - Protective Caps - P/N 332868 •"A" Dimension - Distance from face of fitting to finished ceiling. GLOBE® PRODUCT WARRANTY Globe agrees to repair or replace any of its own manufactured products found to be defective in material or workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. For specific details of our warranty please refer to Price List Terms and Conditions of Sale (Our Price List). 4077AIRPAR❑ DRIVE, STANDIS❑, MIC❑IGAN 48658 989-846-4583 FAD 989-846-9231 1-800-248-0278 www.globesprinkler.com BULLETIN GL5634, REV. #1 PRINTED U.S.A. FIRE SPRINKLER CORPORATI QUICK RESPONSE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS GL SERIES UPRIGHT • PENDENT � VERTICAL SIDEWALL HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL CONVENTIONAL (OLD STYLE) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The Globe Quick Response GL Series Sprinklers are a low profile yet durable design which utilizes a 3mm frangible glass ampule as the thermosensitive element. This provides sprinkler operation approximately six times faster than ordinary sprinklers. While the Quick Response Sprinkler provides an aesthetically pleasing appearance, it can be installed wherever standard spray sprinklers are specified when allowed by the applicable standards. It offers the additional feature of greatly increased safety to life and is available in various styles, orifices, temperature ratings and finishes to meet many varying design requirements. Quick Response Sprinklers should be used advisedly and under the direction of approving authorities having jurisdiction. The heart of Globe's GL Series sprinkler proven actuating assembly is a hermetically sealed frangible glass ampule that contains a precisely measured amount of fluid. When heat is absorbed, the liquid within the bulb expands increasing the internal pressure. At the prescribed temperature the internal pressure within the ampule exceeds the strength of the glass causing the glass to shatter. This results in water discharge which is distributed in an approved pattern depending upon the deflector style used. TECHNICAL DATA • See reverse side for Approvals and Specifications. •Temperature Ratings - 135°F (57°C), 155°F (68°C), 175°F (79°C), 200°F (93°C), 286°F (141°C) •Water Working Pressure Rating - 175 psi (12 Bars) • Factory tested hydrostatically to 500 psi (34 Bars) • Maximum low temperature glass bulb rating is -67°F (-55°C) • Frame - bronze • Deflector - brass • Screw - brass • Lodgement Wire - stainless steel • • Bulb seat - copper • Spring - nickel alloy • Seal - teflon *Bulb - glass with alcohol based solution, 3mm size •SPRINKLER TEMPERATURE RATING/CLASSIFICATION and COLOR CODING QUICK RESPONSE UPRIGHT CONVENTIONAL QUICK RESPONSE PENDENT VERTICAL_ SIDEWALL QUICK RESPONSE HORIZONTAL LPC/CE SIDEWALL HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL CLASSIFICATION AVAILABLE SPRINKLER TEMPERATURES BULB COLOR N.F.P.A. MAXIMUM CEILING TEMPERATURE ORDINARY INTERMEDIATE HIGH 135°F/155°F 57°C/68°C 175°F/200°F 79°C/93°C 286°F 141°C ORANGE/RED YELLOW/GREEN BLUE 100°F 38°C 150°F 66°C 225°F 107°C 4077 AIRPARK DRIVE, STANDISH, MICHIGAN 48658 JULY 2012 A-20 989-846-4583 • FAX 989-846-9231 BULLETIN GL5615, REV. #9 QUICK RESPONSE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS GL SERIES UPRIGHT .PENDENT • VERTICAL SIDEWALL HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL • CONVENTIONAL (OLD STYLE) SPECIFICATIONS NOMINAL "K" FACTOR THREAD SIZE • LENGTH' FINISHES 2.8 4.2 5.6 7.8 8.1 (39 metric) (59 metric) (80 metric) (111 metric) (116 metric) 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT/ 1/2" NPT 3/4" NPT 2 1/4" (5.7cm) 2 1/4" (5.7cm) 2 1/4" (5.7cm)' 2 1/4" (5.7cm) 2 7/16" (6.2cm) Factory Bronze, Chrome White Polyester,' Black Polyester 2,3 METRIC CONVERSIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. 1 HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL IS 2 9/16". 2 FINISHES AVAILABLE ON SPECIAL ORDER. 3 AVAILABLE AS cULus LISTED CORROSION RESISTANT WHEN SPECIFIED ON ORDER. APPROVALS STYLE SIN MODEL K FACTOR HAZARD' 135°F 57°C 155°F 68°C 175°F 79°C 200°F 93°C 286°F 141°C cULus FM LPC CE NYC - DOB MEA 101-92-E GL2815 2,8 LH X X X X X X -- — — X GL4215 4.2 LH X X X X X X — — — X UPRIGHT) GL5615) 5.6 (' LH/OH () X () X (I X (I X `I X 'I X (I X ,; X U X X GL8115 7.8* LH/OH X X X X X X — — — X GL8118 8.1 LH/OH X X X X X X X X X X GL2801 2.8 LH X X X X X X — — — X GL4201 4.2 LH X X X X X X — — — X PENDENT) GL5601) 5.6 (, LH/OH () X () X ;! X () X ; I X i t X 0 i) X I X U X ...�X GL8101 7.8* LH/OH X X X X X X X — — X GL8106 8.1 LH/OH X X X X X X X X X X VERTICAL GL5632 5.6 LH X X X X X X X — — — SIDEWALLt GL8133 8.1 LH X X X X X X — — — — GL2826 § 2.8 LH X X X X X X — — — X HORIZONTAL? GL4226 § 4.2 LH X X X X X X — — — X SIDEWAL°L GL5626§ 5.6 (' LH/OH (} X (I X (i X 0 XO I) X () X 0X (i — (' — (: X ( GL5627n 5.6 LH/OH X X X X X — — X X — GL8127 § 8.1 LH/OH X X X X X X — — — — CONVENTIONAL GL5624 5.6 LH/OH X X X X X — — X X — (OLD STYLE) GL8125 8.1 LH/OH X X X X X — — X X — 1SPRINKLERS SHALL BE LIMITED AS PER THE REQUIREMENTS OF NF §HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL cULus LISTED FOR DEFLECTOR 4" TO 12" BE DINSTALL IN ACCORDANCE TO BS5306 AND ANY OTHER RELATED DO tPENDENT VERTICAL SIDEWALL cULus LISTED FOR 6' MIN. SPACING. tUPRIGHT VERTICAL SIDEWALL cULus LISTED FOR 9' MIN. SPACING. OH: ORDINARY HAZARD LH: LIGHT HAZARD *1/2" NPT ORDERING INFORMATION SPECIFY • Quantity • Model Number • Style • Orifice • Thread Sizes • Temperature • Finishes desired • Quantity - Wrenches - P/N 325390 (1/2"); P/N 312366 (L.O.) PA13 AND ANY OTHER RELATED DOCUMENTS. LOW THE CEILING, FM APPROVED 4" TO 6" BELOW THE CEILING. CUMENTS. GL IIE FIRE SPRINKLER CORPORATION GLOBE° PRODUCT WARRANTY Globe agrees to repair or replace any of its own manufactured products found to be defective in material or workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment. For specific details of our warranty please refer to Price List Terms and Conditions of Sale (Our Price List). 4077 AIRPARK DRIVE, STANDISH, MICHIGAN 48658 989-846-4583 FAX 989-846-9231 1-800-248-0278 www.globesprinkler.com JUNE2012 PRINTED U.S.A. BULLETIN GL5615, REV. #9 !wilco Fire Protection Products Worldwide Contacts www.tyco-fire.com ries DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers ill Horizontal Sidewall indard and Quick Response, Extended Coverage neral scription Series DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers, (-factor Horizontal Sidewall, and (5 mm Bulb) and Quick )nse (3 mm Bulb) and Extended age, are decorative glass bulb iatic sprinklers typically used the sprinklers and/or a portion connecting piping may be ed to freezing temperatures; for )le, horizontal piping extensions Ih a wall to protect an unheated of a building. Series DS -1 'pe Sprinklers are designed for led coverage use in light hazard ancies. DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers bed herein must be installed 7aintained in compliance with ocument, as well as with the able standards of the National -otection Association (NFPA), in m to the standards of any other ities having jurisdiction. Failure to may impair the performance of ievices. wner is responsible for main- their fire protection system and s in proper operating condition. ct the installing contractor Dduct manufacturer with any Dns. DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers must e installed in fittings that meet luirements of the Design Criteria 'l. IMPORTANT ys refer to Technical Data at TFP700 for the "INSTALLER tNING" that provides cautions respect to handling and instal- , of sprinkler systems and )onents. Improper handling and Ilation can permanently damage rinkler system or its compo- s and cause the sprinkler to fail lerate in a fire situation or cause Sprinkler Identification Numbers (SINs) TY3338 - 3 mm Bulb Type TY3358 - 5 mm Bulb Type Technical Data Approvals UL and C -UL Listed NYC Approved under MEA 352-01-E Refer to Table A. Maximum Working Pressure 175 psi (12,1 bar) Inlet Thread Connections 1 inch NPT or ISO 7-R 1 Discharge Coefficient K=5.6 gpm/psi1/2 (80,6 Ipm/bar112) Temperature Ratings Refer to Table A. Finishes Sprinkler: Natural Brass, Chrome Plated, or Signal White Escutcheon: Signal White, Chrome Plated, or Brass Plated Physical Characteristics Inlet Copper Plug Copper Yoke Stainless Steel Casing Galvanized Carbon Steel Insert Bronze Bulb Seat Stainless Steel Bulb Glass Compression Screw Bronze Deflector Bronze Frame Bronze Guide Tube Stainless Steel Water Tube Stainless Steel Spring Stainless Steel Gasketed Spring Plate Seal Beryllium Nickel w/TEFLON Escutcheon Carbon Steel Operation When TYCO Series DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers are in service, water is prevented from entering the assembly by the Plug and Gasketed Spring Plate Seal (Ref. Figure 1) in the Inlet of the sprinkler. The glass bulb contains a fluid that expands when exposed to heat. When the rated temperature is reached, the fluid expands sufficiently to shatter the glass bulb, and the Bulb Seat is released. The compressed Spring is then able to expand and push the Water Tube as well as the Guide Tube outward. This action simultaneously pulls inward on the Yoke, withdrawing the Plug and Gasketed Spring Plate Seal from the Inlet allowing the sprinkler to activate and flow water. TFP520 Page 2 of 8 PLUG WITH YOKE GASKETED SPRING PLATE SEAL INLET CASING INSERT FRAME 3 or 5 mm DEFLECTOR BULB 1" NPT SPRING WATER TUBE GUIDE BULB VENT COMPRESSION TUBE SEAT FIGURE 1 EXTENDED COVERAGE HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL ASSEMBLY HOLE SCREW ORDER LENGTHS: 2-3/4" to 48" (69,9 to 1219,2 mm) IN 1/4" (6,4 mm) INCREMENTS FACE OF SPRINKLER FITTING 1-3/4" DIA. (44,5 mm) 1 11111116=1; \1 2-3/8" ± 1/8" (60,3 ± 3,2 mm) FACE OF MOUNTING SURFACE 3" DIA. (76,2 mm) SPRINKLER FITTING (REFER TO DESIGN CENTERLINE CRITERIA SECTION) OF WATERWAY 7/16" (11,1 mm) FIGURE 2 EXTENDED COVERAGE HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL WITH STANDARD ESCUTCHEON TY3338 (3 MM BULB) AND TY3358 (5 MM BULB) Design Criteria TYCO Series DS -1 Dry Type Sprinklers are intended for use in fire sprinkler systems designed in accordance with the standard installation rules recognized by the applicable Listing or Approval agency; for example, UL Listing is based on NFPA 13 requirements. Sprinkler Fittings Install 1 inch NPT Series DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers in the 1 inch NPT outlet or run of the following fittings: • malleable or ductile iron threaded tee fittings that meet the dimen- sional requirements of ANSI B16.3 (Class 150) • cast iron threaded tee fittings that meet the dimensional requirements of ANSI B16.4 (Class 125) Do not install Series DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers into elbow fittings. The Inlet of the sprinkler can contact the interior of the elbow. The unused outlet of the threaded tee is plugged as shown in Figure 5. You can also install Series DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers in the outlet. The configuration shown in Figure 6 is only applicable for wet pipe systems where the sprinkler fitting and water - filled pipe above the sprinkler fitting are not subject to freezing and where the length of the Dry -Type Sprinkler has the minimum exposure length depicted in Figure 6. Refer to the Exposure Length section. For wet pipe system installations of 1 inch NPT Series DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers connected to CPVC piping, use only the following TYCO CPVC fittings: • 1" x 1" NPT Female Adapter (P/N 80145) • 1" x 1" x 1" NPT Sprinkler Head Adapter Tee (P/N 80249) For dry pipe system installations, use only the side outlet of maximum 2-1/2 inch reducing tee when locating Series DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers directly below the branch line. Otherwise, use the configuration shown in Figure 4 to assure complete water drainage from above Series DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers and the branch line. Failure to do so may result in pipe freezing and water damage. NOTICE Do not install Series DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers into any other type fitting without first consulting the Technical Services Department. Failure to use the appropriate fitting may result in one of the following: • failure of the sprinkler to operate prop- erly due to formation of ice over the Inlet Plug or binding of the Inlet Plug • insufficient engagement of the Inlet pipe threads with consequent leakage Drainage In accordance with the minimum requirements of the National Fire Protection Association for dry pipe sprinkler systems, branch, cross, and feed -main piping connected to Dry Sprinklers and subject to freezing temperatures must be pitched for proper drainage. TFP520 Page 3 of 8 WRENCH FLAT WRENCH RECESS PUSH WRENCH IN TO ENSURE ENGAGEMENT WITH SPRINKLER WRENCH FLATS FIGURE 3 W -TYPE 7 SPRINKLER WRENCH TO DRY SYSTEM DSB-2 INTENDED FOR FREEZER STRUCTURES AREA SUBJECT TO FREEZING NIM FIGURE 4 SPRINKLER FITTING UNHEATED AREA 1-3/4" DIA. (44,5 mm) CLEARANCE HOLE ADHESIVE, DSB-2 BOOT INSULATED FREEZER STRUCTURE STRAP TIES (ENDS ON OPPOSING SIDES OF BOOT) DS -1 SHOWN WITH STANDARD ESCUTCHEON FIGURE 7 MODEL DSB-2 DRY SPRINKLER BOOT WITH DRY -TYPE SPRINKLER DSB-2 RUN INTENDED OUTLET FOR FREEZER PLUGGED STRUCTURES 1 INCH NPT TEE (SEE DESIGN CRITERIA SECTION) TO DRY SYSTEM AREA SUBJECT TO FREEZING FIGURE 5 SPRINKLER FITTING UNHEATED AREA Exposure Length When using Dry Sprinklers in wet pipe sprinkler systems to protect areas subject to freezing temperatures, use Table C to determine a sprinkler's appropriate exposed barrel length to prevent water from freezing in the connecting pipes due to conduction. The exposed barrel length measure- ment must be taken from the face of the sprinkler fitting to the,surface of the structure or insulation that is exposed to the heated area. Refer to Figure 6 for an example. For protected area temperatures between those given above, the minimum recommended length from the face of the fitting to the outside of the protected area may be determined by interpolating between the indicated values. EXPOSURE LENGTH (SEE DESIGN CRITERIA SECTION) FACE OF SPRINKLER FITTING DSB-2 INTENDED FOR FREEZER STRUCTURES HEATED AREA FIGURE 6 EXPOSURE LENGTH Clearance Space In accordance with Section 8.4.9.2 of the 2010 edition of NFPA 13, when connecting an area subject to freezing and an area containing a wet pipe sprinkler system, the clearance space around the sprinkler barrel of Dry -Type Sprinklers must be sealed. Due to temperature differences between two areas, the potential for the formation of condensation in the sprinkler and subsequent ice build-up is increased. If this condensation is not controlled, ice build-up can occur that might damage the dry -type sprinkler and/or prevent proper operation in a fire situation. - Use of the Model DSB-2 Dry Sprinkler Boot, described in Technical Data Sheet TFP591 and shown in Figure 7, can provide the recommended seal. TFP520 Page 4 of 8 Application Coveragel W x L, Ft. x Ft. (m x m) TY3338 Horizontal Sidewall with Standard Escutcheon (3 mm Bulb Type) TY3358 Horizontal Sidewall with Standard Escutcheon Temperature Bulb Color (5 mm Bulb Type) Rating Code (Ref. Figure 2) , 21.6 SPRINKLER FINISH TY3338 Horizontal Sidewall (4,9 x 4,9) Natural Brass Chrome Plated Signal White 135°F (57°C) Orange 29 26.8 (3 mm Bulb Type) 1,2,3 (155°F'(68°C) . Red) (1,85) Notes: 1. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (maximum order length of 48 inches). 2. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories for use in Canada (maximum order length of 48 inches). 3. Approved by the City of New York under MEA 352-01-E. TABLE A SERIES DS -1 EXTENDED COVERAGE HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL DRY -TYPE SPRINKLERS LABORATORY LISTINGS AND APPROVALS Application Coveragel W x L, Ft. x Ft. (m x m) Minimum Flow, gpm (Ipm) Minimum Pressure,. psi (bar) Temperature Rating Top of Deflector -to -Ceiling Distance2, Inches (mm) 16x16 26 21.6 TY3338 Horizontal Sidewall (4,9 x 4,9) (98) (1,49) 16 x 18 29 26.8 (3 mm Bulb Type) (4,9 x 5,5) (110) (1,85) For Quick Response, Light Hazard (16 x 20 32-- A„ -2-.'li. Extended Coverage (4,9 x 6,1) _,_ (121) _ (2,25) per NFPA 13 18x16 29 26.8 (5,5 x 4,9) (110) (1,85) 135°F and 155°F 4 to 12 16 x 16 26 21.6 (57°C and 68°C) (100 to 300) TY3358 Horizontal Sidewall (4,9 x 4,9) (98) (1,49) 16 x 18 29 26.8 (5 mm Bulb Type) (4,9 x 5,5) (110) (1,85) For Standard Response, Light Hazard 16 x 20 32 32.7 Extended Coverage (4,9 x 6,1) (121) (2,25) per NFPA 13 ,18 x 16 29 26.8 (5,5 x 4,9) (110) (1,85) Notes: 1. The minimum allowable spacing between sprinklers to prevent cold soldering is 14 feet (4,3 m). 2. To meet the deflector -to -ceiling distance of 4 to 12 inches (100 to 300 mm), the centerline of the sprinkler waterway must be 4-7/16 to 12-7/16 inches below the ceiling. TABLE B SERIES DS -1 EXTENDED COVERAGE HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL DRY -TYPE SPRINKLERS UL AND C -UL INSTALLATION CRITERIA TFP52O Page 5 of 8 Ambient Temperature Exposed to Discharge End of Sprinkler Temperatures for Heated Areal 40°F (4°C) 50°F (10°C) 60°F (16°C) Minimum Exposed Barrel Length2, Inches (mm) 40°F (4°C) 0 0 0 30°F (-1°C) 0 0 / 0 20°F (-7°C) 4 (100) 0 0 10°F 8 1 (-12°C) . (200) (25) 0 0°F 12 3 (-18°C) (305) (75) 0 -10°F 14 4 1 (-23°C) (355) (100) (25) -20°F 14 6 3 (-29°C) (355) (150) (75) ' -30°F 16 8 4 (-34°C) (405) (200) (100) -40°F 18 8 4 (-40°C) (455) (200) (100) -50°F 20 10 6 (-46°C) (510) (255) (150) -60°F 20 10 6 (-51°C) (510) (255) (150) Notes: , 1. For protected area temperatures that occur between values listed above, use the next cooler temperature. 2. These lengths are inclusive of wind velocities up to 30 mph (18,6 kph). TABLE C ' EXPOSED SPRINKLER BARRELS IN WET PIPE SYSTEMS MINIMUM RECOMMENDED LENGTHS TFP52O Page 6 of 8 Installation TYCO Series DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers must be installed in accordance with this section. General Instructions Series DS -1 Dry Type Sprinklers must.. only be installed in fittings that meet the requirements of the Design Criteria section. Refer to the Design Criteria section for other important require- ments regarding piping design and sealing of the clearance space around the Sprinkler Casing. Do not install any bulb type sprinkler if the bulb is cracked or there is a loss of liquid from the bulb. With the sprinkler held horizontally, a small air bubble should be present. The diameter of the air bubble is approximately 1/16 inch (1,6 mm). A leak -tight 1 inch NPT sprinkler joint should be obtained by applying a minimum -to -maximum torque of 20 to 30 ft. -lbs. (26,8 to 40,2 Nm). Higher levels of torque may distort the sprinkler Inlet with consequent leakage or impairment of the sprinkler. Do, not attempt to compensate for insufficient adjustment in an escutcheon plate by under or over - tightening the sprinkler. Re -adjust the position of the sprinkler fitting to suit. Step 1. Install horizontal sidewall sprin- klers in the horizontal position with their centerline of waterway perpendicular to the back wall and parallel to the ceiling. The word "TOP" on the Deflector is to face towards the ceiling. Step 2. With a non -hardening pipe - thread sealant such as TEFLON tape applied to the Inlet threads, hand - tighten the sprinkler into the sprinkler fitting. Step 3. Wrench -tighten the sprinkler using either: • a pipe wrench on the Inlet Band or the Casing (Ref. Figure 1) • the W -Type 7 Sprinkler Wrench on the Wrench Flat (Ref. Figure 3) Apply the Wrench Recess of the W -Type 7 Sprinkler Wrench to the Wrench Flat. Note: If sprinkler removal becomes necessary, remove the sprinkler using the same wrenching method noted above. Sprinkler removal is easier when a non -hardening sealant was used and torque guidelines were followed. After removal, inspect the sprinkler for damage. Step 4. After installing the ceiling or wall and applying a ceiling finish, slide on the outer piece of the escutcheon until it comes in contact with the ceiling or wall. Do not lift the ceiling panel out of its normal position. Care and Maintenance TYCO Series DS -1 Dry -Type Sprinklers must be maintained and serviced in accordance with this section. Before closing a fire protection system main control valve for maintenance work on the fire protection system that it controls, obtain permission to shut down the affected fire protection systems from the proper authorities and notify all personnel who may be affected by this action. Absence of the outer piece of an escutcheon, which is used to cover a clearance hole, may delay the time to sprinkler operation in a fire situation. A Vent Hole is provided in the Bulb Seat (Figure 1) to indicate if the Dry Sprinkler is remaining dry. Evidence of leakage from the Vent Hole is an indication that there may be seepage past the Inlet seal and that the sprinkler needs to be removed for determining the cause of leakage (e.g., an improper installation or an ice plug). The fire protection system control valve must be closed and the system drained before removing the sprinkler. Sprinklers which are found to be leaking or exhibiting visible signs of corrosion must be replaced. Automatic sprinklers must never be painted, plated, coated, or otherwise altered after leaving the factory. Modified sprinklers must be replaced. Sprinklers that have been exposed to corrosive products of combustion, but have not operated, should be replaced if they cannot be completely cleaned by wiping the sprinkler with a cloth or by brushing it with a soft bristle brush. Care must be exercised to avoid damage to the sprinklers — before, during, and after installation. Sprinklers damaged by dropping, striking, wrench twist/slippage, or the like, must be replaced. Also, replace any sprinkler that has a cracked bulb or that has lost liquid from its bulb. (Ref. Installation Section.) If a sprinkler must be removed, do not reinstall it or a replacement without reinstalling the Cover Plate Assembly. If a Cover Plate Assembly becomes dislodged during service, replace it immediately. The owner is responsible for the inspection, testing, and mainte- nance of their fire protection system and devices in compliance with this document, as well as with the appli- cable standards of the National Fire Protection Association (e.g., NFPA 25), in addition to the standards of any other authorities having jurisdiction. Contact the installing contractor or product manufacturer with any questions. Automatic sprinkler systems are recom- mended to be inspected, tested, and maintained by a qualified Inspection Service in accordance with local requirements and/or national codes. TFP520 Page 7 of 8 P/N* 60 - XXX - X - XXX SIN 350 EC Sidewall 3 mm Bulb (1" NPT), 135°F (57°C) TY3338 351 EC Sidewall 3 mm Bulb (1" NPT), 155°F (68°C) TY3338 950 EC Sidewall 5 mm Bulb (1" NPT), 135°F (57°C) TY3358 951(1" EC Sidewall 5 mm Bulb NPT), 155°F (68°C) TY3358 SPRINKLER FINISH ESCUTCHEON FINISH CHROME PLATED SIGNAL WHITE (RAL9003) NATURAL BRASS SIGNAL WHITE (RAL9003) NATURAL BRASS BRASS PLATED SIGNAL WHITE (RAL9003) SIGNAL WHITE (RAL9003) CHROME PLATED CHROME PLATED ORDER LENGTH** 055 5.50" 082 8.25" 180 18.00" 187 18.75" 372 37.25" 480 48.00" Notes: Use Prefix "I" for ISO 7-R 1 Connection (e.g., 1-60-351-1-180). " Dry -Type Sprinklers are furnished based upon "Order Length" as measured per Figure 2. After the measurement is taken, round it to the nearest 1/4 inch increment. TABLE D SERIES DS -1 STANDARD AND QUICK RESPONSE, STANDARD COVERAGE, DRY -TYPE SPRINKLERS PART NUMBER SELECTION Limited Warranty For warranty terms and conditions, visit www.tyco-fire.com. Ordering Procedure Contact your local distributor for avail- ability. When placing an order, indicate the full product name, including description and Part Number (P/N). Dry Sprinklers When ordering 5.6 K -factor Series DS -1 Horizontal Sidewall, Standard or Quick Response, Extended Coverage Dry -Type Sprinklers, specify the following information: • SIN: TY3338 - Quick Response TY3358 - Standard Response • Bulb Size (3 or 5 mm) • Order Length: Dry -Type Sprinklers are furnished based upon Order Length as measured from the face of the wall to the face of the sprinkler fitting (Ref. Figure 2). After the measurement is taken, round it to the nearest 1/4 inch increment. • Inlet Connections: 1 inch NPT or ISO 7-R 1 • Temperature Rating • Sprinkler Finish • Standard Escutcheon and Finish • Part Number from Table D Sprinkler Wrench Specify W -Type 7 Sprinkler Wrench, P/N 56-850-4-001 Sprinkler Boot Specify Model DSB-2 Dry Sprinkler Boot, P/N 63-000-0-002 This Part Number includes one (1) Boot, two (2) Strap Ties, and 1/3 oz. of Adhesive (a sufficient quantity for installing one boot). TFP520 Page 8 of 8 GLOBAL HEADQUARTERS 11400 Pennbrook Parkway, Lansdale, PA 19446 I Telephone +1-215-362-0700 Copyright © 2014 -Tyco Fire Products, LP. All rights reserved. TEFLON is trademark of The DuPont Corporation tqco Fire Protection Products BRACE SEISMIC ����� VAY — �ar).ANYA; Fig. 771 Sway Brace Swivel Attachment ;ize Range: Brace Pipe: 1"cvD4" Sch. 40 IPS Service Line: 1' through 8" laterial: Ductile iron, shear head bolts and hex head mounting bolt inish:EJ Plain orZinc Plated (Hot -Dip Galvanized optional) ;ervice: Used to rigidly brace piping systems subjected to sway and seismic disturbances. >race pipe fitting component of Anvil's 700 series sway brace assembly. Functions as a way brace attachment that is directly attached to Fig. 772 Adjustable Beam Attachment, 778 Bar Joist Attachment and Fig. 779 Multi -Connector Adapter. Can be utilized as a race fitting for either a lateral brace or a longitudinal brace, that can be mounted on iorizontal or vertical structures. UL and ULC Listed (UL and FM Approved (FM 1950:2010). Complies with seismic bracing requirements of AFPA-13. Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) State of California approved. ,eatures: • Requires no threading of bracing pipe • Sway brace fitting designed for concentric loadings of seismic connections and fasteners. nstallation Instructions: 1. Mount Figure 771 Sway Brace Fitting to structure using suitable fasteners as defined by NFPA-13. I. Place the Schedule 40 brace pipe into the brace pipe connector until it bottoms out. 3. Tighten shear bolt until the head shears off. The use of an impact wrench is not recommended. 4. Then position the brace pipe to the appropriate angle. 5. Ensure that the brace fitting hex bolt is tightened to a minimum torque value of 40 Ft -Lbs. )rdering: Specify brace pipe diameter, figure number, name and finish. 0PA-280410 ^OUSMED APPROVED Fig. 778 Fig. 771 SwaBrace Swivel Attachment 1^m1Y�Sch. 4OBrace Pipe !et: mss: ractor: neer: nittal Date: Fig. 770 Q Brace Clamp Typical Assembly (Bar Joist) PROJECT INFORMATION Fig. 771 SwaBrace Swivel Attachment 1^m1Y4"Sch. 40Brace Pi o Typical Assembly ▪ Approved Fig. 776 Brace Clamp APPROVAL STAMP J Approved as noted Not approved nt SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC \zf 4N . 1L Fig. 771 Sway Brace Swivel Fitting (cont.) Y Socket Depth "A" Mounting Bolt Dia. FIG. 771: WEIGHT (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Brace Pipe Diameter Sch. 40 Bolt Diameter A H L WY 1800 Weight g 1 1/2 2.85 1.65 1.69 1.38 1.95 11/4 2.98 2.28 FIG. 771 FM MAX LOADS: LOADS (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) • ANGLES (DEGREES) Brace Pipe Diameter Sch. 40 Brace Angle* FM Max Load 1 and 11/4 30° - 44° 1800 45° - 59° 2500 60° - 74° 3100 75° - 90° 3400 * Brace Pipe Angles are determined from vertical. The allowable FM approved capacity of brace subassemblies have been determined by resolving the load rating to the horizontal direction and dividing by a safety factor of 1.5 to allow The values to be used directly for Allowable Stress Design. For Load Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) capacities, the above values will need to be multiplied by 1.5. FIG. 771 UL MAX LOADS: LOADS (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Brace Pipe Diameter Sch. 40 UL Max Load 1 and 11/4 2765 Disclaimer: Anvil International ("Anvil") does not provide any warranties and specifically disclaims any liability whatsoever with respect to Anvil bracing products and components that are used in combination with products, parts or systems not manufactured or sold by Anvil. In no event shall Anvil be liable for any incidental, direct, consequential, special or indirect damages or lost profits where non -Anvil bracing components have been, or are used. Notes: 1. For fire protection installations - sway braces are intended to be installed in accordance with NFPA-13 and Anvil's installations instructions and local codes. 2. The required type, number and size of fasteners used for the structural attachment fitting shall be in accordance with NFPA-13. 3. To assure proper performance, installer is responsible for: a. Structural integrity of attachment member to safely handle load requirements. b. Securely tightening the component on the brace pipe. 4. Anvil International® brand bracing components are designed to be compatible ONLY with other Anvil International° brand bracing components, resulting in a Listed seismic bracing assembly. - 5. Updated UL listing information may be viewed at www.ul.com and FM approvals may be viewed at www.fmgobal.com Go to www.anvilintl.com/OPA for State of California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) for design information relating to OSHPD projects. Seis Brace® Seismic Fire Protection Design Tool may be accessed at www.seisbrace.com P11-1.14 SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC ffr Fig. 772 Size Range: Beam Widths: 4" through 15" Flange Thickness:'/2" through 11/4" Minimum Flange Thickness: 3/e" (FM), 1/2' (UL) Type A: Flange Thickness Range:1/2" - 3/4" Type B: Flange Thickness Range: 7/8" -11/4" Material: Carbon steel Finish:❑ Plain or DZinc Plated (Hot -Dip Galvanized optional) Service: Used to rigidly brace piping systems subjected to sway and seismic disturbances. Structural attachment component of Anvil's 700 series sway brace assembly. For attachment to the bottom flange of structural steel beams. Can be utilized as a structural connection for either a lateral brace or a longitudinal brace. Approvals: UL and ULC Listed (UL 203A:2009), and FM Approved (FM 1950:2010). Complies with seismic bracing requirements of NFPA-13. Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) State of California approved. Features: • Adjustable Steel Beam Attachment Permits secure quick connection to a structural steel beam where drilling and/or welding of a brace connection is not allowed or is not easily accomplished. • Adjustable sizes to insure a proper fit for a wide range of beam widths and flange thicknesses. • Steel beam attachment is designed for concentric loadings of seismic connections and fasteners. • Functions as a lateral or longitudinal structural connection of a sway brace assembly Installation Instructions: 1. Place Figure 772 on structural beam by loosening'/2" hex bolts to correctly position C-clamp bodies. 2. C-clamp bodies should fully bottom out on the flange of beam. 3. Tighten 1/2" shear bolt until the head shears off. The use of an impact wrench is not recommended. 4. Tighten 1/2" hex head bolt into C-clamp bodies until lock washers bottom out on C -channel and the required torque of 55 Ft -Lbs is achieved. 5. Attach 700 Series Anvil Brace Fittings to the center bolt and adjust orientation as needed for proper brace angle. Ordering: Specify figure number, type, L channel Dim. (length), name and finish. 1/2° Dia. Hex Head C -Clamp Bolts— /2° Dia. Hex Head Mounting Bolt (Included) (X) - Perpendicular to Beam Axis (Z) - Parallel to Beam Axis FIG. 772 UL MAX LOADS: LOADS (LBS) • WEIGHT (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Type Length (L) Beam Flange Perpendicular to Beam Parallel to Beam D Weight g Width Range Thickness Range A 9 4-7 1/2 - 3/4 1600 1000 1 3.15 12 7 -10 3.74 14 9 -12 4.19 B 9 4-7 7/a - 11/4 1000 1000 1 3.15 12 7 -10 3.90 14 9-12 4.35 17 12 -14 4.90 PROJECT INFORMATION Project: APPROVAL STAMP ❑ Approved Address: ❑ Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PH -1.15 SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC '":'1i /ANVIL Fig. 772 1/2" Dia. Hex Head C -Clamp Bolts— Adjustable Steel Beam Attachment (cont.) Shear Bolt (X) - Perpendicular to Beam Axis (Z) - Parallel to Beam Axis /2" Dia. Hex Head Mounting Bolt (Included) FIG. 772 FM MAX LOADS* LOADS (LBS) • WEIGHT (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) • ANGLES (DEGREES) Type Length (L) Beam Flange Brace Angle** X Lateral Z Longitudinal D Weight Width Range Thickness Range 30° - 44° BRACE ANGLE A 9 4-7 3/8 - 3/4 30° - 44° 540 470 1 3.15 12 7 -10 3.74 14 9 -12 4.19 17 12 -15 4.74 B 12 7 -10 7/8 - 11/4 30°- 44° 470 330 1 3.90 14 9 -12 4.35 17 12 -15 4.90 45° - 59° BRACE ANGLE A 9 4-7 3/8 - 3/4 45° - 59° 710 480 1 3.15 12 7 -10 3.74 14 9 -12 4.1919 17 12 -15 4.74 B 12 7-10 7/8 - 11/4 45° - 59° 740 640 1 3.90 14 9 -12 4.35 17 12 -15 4.90 60° - 74° BRACE ANGLE A 9 4-7 3/8 - 3/4 600 - 74° 880 580 1 3.15 12 7 -10 3.74 14 9 -12 4.19 17 12 -15 4.74 B 12 7 -10 7/8 - 11/4 60° - 74° 910 790 1 3.90 14 9 -12 4.35 17 12 -15 4.90 75° - 90° BRACE ANGLE A 9 4-7 3/8 - 3/4 75° - 90° 980 640 1 3.15 12 7 - 10 3.74 14 9 -12 4.19 17 12-15 4.74 B 12 7 -10 7/8 - 11/4 75° - 90° 1000 880 1 3.90 14 9 -12 4.35 17 12 -15 4.90 * The allowable FM approved capacity of brace subassemblies have been determined by resolving the load rating to the horizontal direction and dividing by a safety factor of 1.5 to allow the values to be used directly for Allowable Stress Design. For Load Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) capacities, the above values will need to be multiplied by 1.5. ** Brace Pipe Angles are determined from vertical. Go to www.anvilintl.com/OPA for State of California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) for design information relating to OSHPD projects. Seis Brace® Seismic Fire Protection Design Tool may be accessed at www.seisbrace.com PH -1.14 SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC ANVIL Fig. 772 Adjustable Steel Beam Attachment (cont.) r Pipe Brace — Parallel to Beam Z Pipe Brace — Perpendicular to Beam X FIG. 772 SIZE CHART: DIMENSIONS (IN) Type A (1/2" -3/4" Flange Thickness) B ('/a" -11/4" Flange Thickness) Channel Length (L) 9" 12" 14" 17" 12" 14" 17" Beam Width Range 4"-7" 7"-10" 9"-12" 12"-15" 7"-10" 9"-12" 12"-15" Beam Size W4x13 W8x35 W10x49 • W12x65 W8x67 W10x77 W12x96 W5x16 W8x40 W10x54 W12x72 W21x93 W10x88 W12x106 W6x16 W8x48 W10x60 W12x79 W24x94 W10x100 W12x120 W6x20 W10x39 W10x68 W14x90 W10x112 W12x136 W8x21 W10x45 W12x58 W14x99 W14x82 W14x109 W8x24 W10x49 W12x65 W24x104 W16x89 W14x120 W10x22 W12x40 W14x61 W16x100 W14x132 W10x30 W12x45 W14x68 - W18x97 W21x111 W12x26 W12x50 W16x67 W18x106 W21x122 W12x35 W12x53 W16x77 W18x119 W21x132 W14x30 W12x58 W18x76 W24x94 W21x147 W14x38 W14x43 W18x86 W27x94 W24x117 W16x26 W14x48 W24x84 W27x114 W24x131 W16x40 W14x53 W27x84 W24x146 W18x40 W14x61 W27x102 W24x162 W18x46 W14x68 W27x146 W21x50 W16x45 W27x161 W21x57 W16x50 W27x178 W16x57 W18x50 W18x55 W18x60 W18x65 • W21 x62 W21 x68 W21 x73 W24x68 W24x76 W27x84 W27x94 Notes: 1. For fire protection installations - sway braces are intended to be installed in accordance with NFPA-13 and Anvil's installations instructions and local codes. 2. The required type, number and size of fasteners used for the structural attachment fitting shall be in accordance with NFPA-13. 3. To assure proper performance, installer is responsible for: a. Structural integrity of attachment member to safely handle load requirements. b. Securely tightening the component on the brace pipe. 4. Anvil International®brand bracing components are designed to be compatible ONLY with other Anvil International®brand bracing components, resulting in a Listed seismic bracing assembly. 5. Updated.UL listing information may be viewed at www.ul.com and FM approvals may be viewed at www.fmgobal.com Disclaimer: Anvil International ("Anvil") does not provide any warranties and specifically disclaims any liability whatsoever with respect to Anvil bracing products and components that are used in combination with products, parts or systems riot manufactured or sold by Anvil. In no event shall Anvil be liable for any incidental, direct, consequential, special or indirect damages or lost profits where non -Anvil bracing components have been, or are used. PH -1.14 SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC *Awl"; Fig. 773 Surge Restrainer Size Range: 3/4" thru 2" Swivel Ring Hanger, Figure 69 Material: Carbon steel Finish: Zinc Plated (Hot -Dip Galvanized optional) Service: Designed to be used with Anvil Figure 69, Adjustable Swivel Ring Hanger, for bracing steel service pipe against up thrust during a seismic disturbance or sprinkler head activation. Approvals: UL and ULC Listed (UL 203A:2009). Complies with seismic bracing requirements of NFPA-13. Features: • One universal size accommodates ring hangers from 3/4" to 2' • Quick and simple to install by just snapping the surge restrainer into a locking position onto the ring hanger. Installation Instructions: 1. The threaded hanger rod must protrude a minimum of 1/2' beyond the bottom of the knurl nut. 2. Snap the surge restrainer onto the threaded rod above and below the knurl nut. 3. When in the proper locking position, the maximum gap between the surge restrainer and the steel service pipe is an 1/8". Ordering: Specify figure number and name. FIG. 773: LOADS (LBS) • WEIGHT (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Service Pipe Size Rod Size UL Max Load Weight 3/4 thru 2 3/8 300 .08 Go to www.anvilintl.com/OPA for State of California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) for design information relating to OSHPD projects. Seis Brace® Seismic Fire Protection Design Tool may be accessed at www.seisbrace.com C CLIS LISTED '/s" Max. Notes: 1. For fire protection installations - sway braces are intended to be installed in accordance with NFPA-13 and Anvil's installations instructions and local codes. 2. The required type, number and size of fasteners used for the structural attachment fitting shall be in accordance with NFPA-13. 3. To assure proper performance, installer is responsible for: a. Structural integrity of attachment member to safely handle load requirements. b. Securely tightening the component on the brace pipe. 4. Anvil International® brand bracing components are designed to be compatible ONLY with other Anvil International® brand bracing components, resulting in a Listed seismic bracing assembly. 5. Updated UL listing information may be viewed at www.ul.com and FM approvals may be viewed at www.fmgobal.com Disclaimer: Anvil International ("Anvil") does not provide any warranties and specifically disclaims any liability whatsoever with respect to Anvil bracing products and components that are used in combination with products, parts or systems not manufactured or sold by Anvil. In no event shall Anvil be liable for any incidental, direct, consequential, special or indirect damages or lost profits where non -Anvil bracing components have been, or are used. PROJECT INFORMATION Project: APPROVAL STAMP ❑ Approved Address: ❑ Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PH -1.15 SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC A.31,14 Fig. 775 Lateral / Longitudinal Brace Clamp Size Range: Service Pipe: 21/2" through 8" Sch.10 and Sch. 40 IPS Service Pipe: 21/2" through 6 Flow Pipe Brace Pipe:1" or 11/4" Sch. 40 IPS Material: Carbon steel clamp, ductile iron brace connector Finish: 0 Plain or 0 Zinc Plated Service: Used to rigidly brace piping systems subjected to sway and seismic disturbances. Pipe clamp component of Anvil's 700 series sway brace assembly. Can be utilized as either a lateral brace clamp or a longitudinal brace clamp. Approvals: UL and ULC Listed (UL 203A:2009), and FM Approved (FM 1950:2010). Complies with seismic bracing requirements of NFPA-13. Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) State of California approved. Features: • No threading of bracing pipe • Functions as a lateral or longitudinal brace clamp Installation Instructions: 1. Installation of the pipe must be at a minimum 6 away from a pipe joint. 2. Position pipe clamp at desired location and loosely tighten the clamp hex bolts. Ensure that the spacer and brace pipe connector are positioned between the pipe clamp ears. 3. Place the Schedule 40 brace pipe into the brace pipe connector until it bottoms out. 4. Tighten shear bolt until the head shears off. Then position the brace pipe to the appropriate angle. The use of an impact wrench is not recommended. 5. Tighten the pipe clamp hex bolts equally and alternately until metal -to -metal contact is achieved with the following torque values. Clamp Bolt Minimum Torque Values : 21/2" thru 3" Dia. Clamps (80 Ft -Lbs) , 4" & 5" Dia. Clamps (100 Ft -Lbs), 6" Dia. Clamp (120 Ft -Lbs), 8" Dia. Clamp (140 Ft -Lbs), 6. Note: For 6" and 8" service pipe, a thread lubricant such as Gruvlok®Xtreme"'Lubricant should be used to ease assembly of pipe clamp hex bolts and nuts. Ordering: Specify service pipe diameter x brace pipe diameter, figure number, name and finish. OPA-2804-10 c US LISTED APPROVED Spacer Location 1" or 11/4" Sch. 40 Brace Pipe Shear Bolt Lateral Brace Orientation (Brace Pipe Perpendicular to Service Pipe Axis) 1"or11/4" N.NSch. 40 Brace Pipe Longitudinal Brace Orientation (Brace Pipe Parallel to Service Pipe Axis) PROJECT INFORMATION Project: APPROVAL STAMP ❑ Approved Address: ❑Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PH -1.15 SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC ®/.41NY11; Fig. 775 Shear Bolt—. Lateral / Longitudinal Brace Clamp (cont.) FIG. 775: WEIGHT (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Service Pipe Size B L J Y Weight Brace Pipe Brace Pipe Brace Pipe 1" i'/a" 1" & 1t/4" 1" 11/4 21/2 23/8 6 2.85 2.98 1.38 2.19 2.54 3 23/4 63/4 2.36 2.71 4 31/2 81/2 2.62 2.97 5 4 91/2 3.74 4.09 6 4'/8 111/2 6.32 6.67 8 6 133/4 7.42 7.77 FIG. 775 UL MAX LOAD: LOADS (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Service Pipe Size (1" or 11/4" Brace Pipe) UL Max Load* Sch. 10/Sch. 40 21/2 1000 3 4 5 1600 6 8 2015 Notes: 1. For fire protection installations - sway braces are intended to be installed in accordance with NFPA-13 and Anvil's installations instructions and local codes. 2. The required type, number and size of fasteners used for the structural attachment fitting shall be in accordance with NFPA-13. 3. To assure proper performance, installer is responsible for: a. Structural integrity of attachment member to safely handle load requirements. b. Securely tightening the component on the brace pipe. 4. Anvil International® brand bracing components are designed to be compatible ONLY with other Anvil International® brand bracing components, resulting in a Listed seismic bracing assembly. 5. Updated UL listing information may be viewed at www.ul.com and FM approvals may be viewed at www.fmgobal.com FIG. 775 FM MAX LOAD: LOADS (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) • ANGLES (DEGREES) Service Pipe Size (1" or 11/4" Brace Pipe) Brace Angle*** FM Max Load** Sch. 10 Sch. 40 Flow Pipe 2'/2 30-44 1300 1500 45-59 2100 2200 60-74 2300 1600 75-90 2600 1800 3 30-44 1300 1500 45-59 2100 2200 60-74 2300 1600 75-90 2600 1800 4 30-44 1200 1500 45-59 1800 1000 60-74 - 1600 900 75-90 1800 1000 5 30-44 1300 1500 45-59 2100 2200 60-74 2300 1600 75-90 2600 1800 6 30-44 1500 1500 45-59 2100 2200 60-74 2500 900 75-90 2800 1000 8 30-44 1500 – 45-59 2200 – 60-74 2700 – 75-90 3100 – * See FM Approval guide for approved flow pipe. ** The allowable FM approved capacity of brace subassemblies have been determined by resolving the load rating to the horizontal direction and dividing by a safety factor of 1.5 to allow the values to be used directly for Allowable Stress Design. For Load Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) capacities, the above values will need to be multiplied by 1.5. *** Brace Pipe Angles are determined from vertical. Disclaimer: Anvil International ("Anvil") does not provide any warranties and specifically disclaims any liability whatsoever with respect to Anvil bracing products and components that are used in combination with products, parts or systems not manufactured or sold by Anvil. In no event shall Anvil be liable for any incidental, direct, consequential, special or indirect damages or lost profits where non -Anvil bracing components have been, or are used. Go to www.anvilintl.com/OPA for State of California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) for design information relating to OSHPD projects. Seis Brace® Seismic Fire Protection Design Tool may be accessed at www.seisbrace.com PH -1.15 SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC (Z)/�MtIL Fig. 775 Lateral / Longitudinal Brace Clamp Size Range: Service Pipe: 21/2" through 8" Sch.10 and Sch. 40 IPS Service Pipe: 21/2' through 6" Flow Pipe Brace Pipe:1" or 11/4" Sch. 40 IPS Material: Carbon steel clamp, ductile iron brace connector Finish: ❑ Plain or ['Zinc Plated Service: Used to rigidly brace piping systems subjected to sway and seismic disturbances. Pipe clamp component of Anvil's 700 series sway brace assembly. Can be utilized as either a lateral brace clamp or a longitudinal brace clamp. Approvals: UL and ULC Listed (UL 203A:2009), and FM Approved (FM 1950:2010). Complies with seismic bracing requirements of NFPA-13. Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) State of California approved. Features: • No threading of bracing pipe • Functions as a lateral or longitudinal brace clamp Installation Instructions: 1. Installation of the pipe must be at a minimum 6" away from a pipe joint. 2. Position pipe clamp at desired location and loosely tighten the clamp hex bolts. Ensure that the spacer and brace pipe connector are positioned between the pipe clamp ears. 3. Place the Schedule 40 brace pipe into the brace pipe connector until it bottoms out. 4. Tighten shear bolt until the head shears off. Then position the brace pipe to the appropriate angle. The use of an impact wrench is not recommended. 5. Tighten the pipe clamp hex bolts equally and alternately until metal -to -metal contact is achieved with the following torque values. Clamp Bolt Minimum Torque Values : 21/2 thru 3" Dia. Clamps (80 Ft -Lbs) , 4" & 5" Dia. Clamps (100 Ft -Lbs), 6" Dia. Clamp (120 Ft -Lbs), 8" Dia. Clamp (140 Ft -Lbs), 6. Note: For 6" and 8" service pipe, a thread lubricant such as Gruvlok®Xtreme Lubricant should be used to ease assembly of pipe clamp hex bolts and nuts. Ordering: Specify service pipe diameter x brace pipe diameter, figure number, name and finish. OPA-2804-10 cCLDS LISTED APPROVED Spacer Location 1" or 11/4" Sch. 40 Brace Pipe Shear Bolt Lateral Brace Orientation (Brace Pipe Perpendicular to Service Pipe Axis) 1"or11/4" Sch. 40 Brace Pipe Longitudinal Brace Orientation (Brace Pipe Parallel to Service Pipe Axis) PROJECT INFORMATION Project: APPROVAL STAMP ❑ Approved Address: ❑Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PH -1.15 SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC Fig. 775 Lateral / Longitudinal Brace Clamp (cont.) Shear Bolt—. FIG. 775: WEIGHT (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Service Pipe Size B L J Y Weight Brace Pipe Brace Pipe Brace Pipe 1" 11/4" 1" & 11/4" 1" 11/4 21/2 23/8 6 2.85 2.98 1.38 2.19 2.54 3 23/4 63/4 2.36 2.71 4 31/2 81/2 2.62 2.97 5 4 91/2 3.74 4.09 6 47/8 111/2 6.32 6.67 8 6 133/4 7.42 7.77 FIG. 775 UL MAX LOAD: LOADS (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Service Pipe Size (1" or 11/4" Brace Pipe) UL Max Load* Sch. 10/Sch. 40 21/2 1000 3 4 5 1600 6 8 2015 Notes: 1. For fire protection installations - sway braces are intended to be installed in accordance with NFPA-13 and Anvil's installations instructions and local codes. 2. The required type, number and size of fasteners used for the structural attachment fitting shall be in accordance with NFPA-13. 3. To assure proper performance, installer is responsible for: a. Structural integrity of attachment member to safely handle load requirements. b. Securely tightening the component on the brace pipe. 4. Anvil International® brand bracing components are designed to be compatible ONLY with other Anvil International® brand bracing components, resulting in a Listed seismic bracing assembly. S. Updated UL listing information may be viewed at www.ul.com and FM approvals may be viewed at www.fmgobal.com FIG. 775 FM MAX LOAD: LOADS (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) • ANGLES (DEGREES) Service Pipe Size (1" or 11/4" Brace Pipe) Brace Angle*** FM Max Load** Sch. 10 Sch. 40 Flow Pipe 21/2 30-44 1300 1500 45-59 2100 2200 60-74 2300 1600 75-90 2600 1800 3 30-44 1300 1500 45-59 2100 2200 '60-74 2300 1600 75-90 2600 1800 4 30-44 1200 1500 45-59 1800 1000 60-74 1600 900 75-90 1800 1000 5 30-44 1300 1500 45-59 2100 2200 60-74 2300 1600 75-90 2600 1800 6 30-44 1500 1500 45-59 2100 2200 60-74 2500 900 75-90 2800 1000 8 30-44 1500 — 45-59 2200 — 60-74 2700 — 75-90 3100 — * See FM Approval guide for approved flow pipe. ** The allowable FM approved capacity of brace subassemblies have been determined by resolving the load rating to the horizontal direction and dividing by a safety factor of 1.5 to allow the values to be used directly for Allowable Stress Design. For Load Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) capacities, the above values will need to be multiplied by 1.5. *** Brace Pipe Angles are determined from vertical. Disclaimer: Anvil International ("Anvil") does not provide any warranties and specifically disclaims any liability whatsoever with respect to Anvil bracing products and components that are used in combination with products, parts or systems not manufactured or sold by Anvil. In no event shall Anvil be liable for any incidental, direct, consequential, special or indirect damages or lost profits where non -Anvil bracing components have been, or are used. Go to www.anvilintl.com/OPA for State of California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) for design information relating to OSHPD projects. Seis Brace® Seismic Fire Protection Design Tool may be accessed at www.seisbrace.com PH -1.15 SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC 6 -"ANVIL Fig. 776 Brace Clamp Size Range: Service Pipe: 21/2" through 8" Sch. 10 and Sch. 40 IPS Service Pipe: 21/2" through 6" FM Approved Flow Pipe Brace Pipe:1" or 11/4" Sch. 40 IPS Material: Carbon steel Finish:❑ Plain or❑Zinc Plated (Hot -Dip Galvanized optional) Service: Used to rigidly brace piping systems subjected to sway and seismic disturbances. Pipe clamp component of Anvil's 700 series sway brace assembly. Utilized only as a lateral brace clamp. Approvals: FM Approved (FM 1950:2010). Complies with seismic bracing requirements of NFPA-13. Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) State of California approved. Features: • Used to brace schedules 10 IPS, 40 IPS, and Flow pipe • Field adjustable design requires no threading of bracing pipe • Can be used as a component of a four-way brace support • Brace clamp design for installation of brace pipe above or below horizontal service pipe. Installation Instructions: 1. Installation of this component must be a minimum of 6" from any pipe joint, so that any deformation does not affect the pipe joint. 2. Minimum brace pipe extension 1" beyond clamp stirrup. 3. Tighten hex bolt until heads bottom out on surface Ordering: Specify service pipe diameter x brace pipe diameter, figure number, name and finish. Fig. 771 Sway Brace Swivel Attachment Fig. 776 Brace Clamp 1" or 11/4" Sch. 40 Brace Pipe Brace Clamp Stirrup Typical Assembly (Brace Pipe Below Service Pipe) Hex Bolt 2" Min. PROJECT INFORMATION Project: APPROVAL STAMP ❑ Approved Address: ❑Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC ' j4ENVIa; Fig. 776 Brace Clamp (cont.) FIG. 776 FM MAX LOAD: LOADS (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) • ANGLES (DEGREES) Service Pipe Size (1" or 11/a" Brace Pipe) Brace Angle*** FM Max Load** (Horizontal) Sch. 10 Sch. 40 Flow Pipe 21/2 30-44 620 600 45-59 880 850 60-74 1000 1000 75-90 1200 1100 3 30-44 620 520 45-59 880 740 60-74 1000 910 75-90 1200 1000 4 30-44 690 520 45-59 980 740 60-74 1200 910 75-90 1300 1000 5 30-44 670 520 45-59 940 740 60-74 1100 910 75-90 1200 1000 6 30-44 670 560 45-59 940 790 60-74 1100 970 75-90 1200 1000 8 30-44 540 — 45-59 770 — 60-74 940 — 75-90 1000 — * See FM Approvals for approved flow pipe. ** The allowable FM approved capacity of brace subassemblies have been determined by resolving the load rating to the horizontal direction and dividing by a safety factor of 1.5 to allow the values to be used directly for Allowable Stress Design. For Load Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) capacities, the above values will need to be multiplied by 1.5. *** Brace Pipe Angles are determined from vertical. FIG. 776: WEIGHT (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Service Pipe Size Weight 1" Brace Pipe 11/a" Brace Pipe 21/2 1.26 1.50 3 1.44 1.58 4 1.55 1.68 5 1.66 1.87 6 1.74 1.95 8 1.98 2.29 Notes: 1. For fire protection installations - sway braces are intended to be installed in accordance with NFPA-13 and Anvil's installations instructions and local codes. 2. The required type, number and size of fasteners used for the structural attachment fitting shall be in accordance with NFPA-13. 3. To assure proper performance, installer is responsible for: a. Structural integrity of attachment member to safely handle load requirements. b. Securely tightening the component on the brace pipe. 4. Anvil International® brand bracing components are designed to be compatible ONLY with other Anvil International®brand bracing components, resulting in a Listed seismic bracing assembly. 5. Updated UL listing information may be viewed at www.ul.com and FM approvals may be viewed at www.fmgobal.com Disclaimer: Anvil International ("Anvil") does not provide any warran- ties and specifically disclaims any liability whatsoever with respect to Anvil bracing products and components that are used in combination with products, parts or systems not manufactured or sold by Anvil. In no event shall Anvil be liable for any incidental, direct, consequential, special or indirect damages or lost profits where non -Anvil bracing com- ponents have been, or are used. Go to www.anvilintl.com/OPA for State of California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) for design information relating to OSHPD projects. Seis Brace® Seismic Fire Protection Design Tool may be accessed at www.seisbrace.com PH -1.14 SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC EVIL Fig. 777 Swivel Joint Connector L Size Range: 3/8" rod diameter, Service Line:1" through 4" Material: Carbon steel Finish: Zinc Plated Restraint Service: Used to restrain pipe systems. A lateral restraint connector that is attached to a structure or structural attachment for a branch line restraint assembly, consisting of a Figure 69 and Figure 773 "Surge Restrainer" Hanger Service: Used to adapt 3/8" threaded rod to angled building structures. Approvals: UL Listed (UL 203A), cULus Listed (UL203). Complies with hanging and seismic bracing requirements of NFPA-13. Features: • Comes assembled and ready for installation • 3/8-16UNC threaded hole to receive threaded rod Installation Instructions: 1. Install upper 3/8" mounting bolt into structure or structural attachment (restraint only) and tighten upper hex nut with split ring washer, include an additional hex nut to lock the upper nuts into place or thread the upper mounting bolt into a 700 Series attachment (restraint only). 2. Screw the hanger rod into the threaded hex union until it bottoms. Back off one turn and securely tighten rod nut to assure proper performance 3. Must be installed within 6 inches of a vertical hanger, when used as a component of a restraint device. 4. Adjust angle as necessary. Ordering: Specify rod size, figure number, name and finish. Notes: 1. For fire protection installations - sway braces are intended to be installed in accordance with NFPA-13 and Anvil's installations instructions and local codes. 2. The required type, number and size of fasteners used for the structural attachment fitting shall be in accordance with NFPA-13. 3. To assure proper performance, installer is responsible for: a. Structural integrity of attachment member to safely handle load requirements. b. Securely tightening the component on the brace pipe. 4. Anvil International® brand bracing components are designed to be compatible ONLY with other Anvil International® brand bracing components, resulting in a Listed seismic bracing assembly. 5. Updated UL listing information may be viewed at www.ul.com and FM approvals may be viewed at www.fmgobal.com Disclaimer: Anvil International ("Anvil") does not provide any warranties and specifically disclaims any liability whatsoever with respect to Anvil bracing products and components that are used in combination with products, parts or systems not manufactured or sold by Anvil. In no event shall Anvil be liable for any incidental, direct, consequential, special or indirect damages or lost profits where non -Anvil bracing components have been, or are used. Go to www.anvilintl.com/OPA for State of California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) for design information relating to OSHPD projects. Seis Brace° Seismic Fire Protection Design Tool may be accessed at www.seisbrace.com PROJECT INFORMATION Project: APPROVAL STAMP ❑ Approved Address: . ❑Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PH -3.16 SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC ,1111 ANY11.4 Fig. 777 Swivel Joint Connector (cont.) FIG. 777: LOADS (LBS) • WEIGHT (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Rod Size UL Max Seismic Restraint Load (UL 203a) UL Max Hanger Load (UL 203) Max Hanger Load 3/8 1,000 Up to 4" Pipe 250 Branch Line Restraint Assembly PH -3.16 Hanger Assembly SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC ('Z)1)/SM/IL Fig. 778 Bar Joist Beam Attachment Size Range: Structural Steel: Minimum Thickness —'/s" (FM), 3/1a" (UL), Maximum Thickness — 3/4" OPA-2804-10 Service Pipe:1" through 8" Material: Ductile iron beam attachment, shear head bolts and hex head mounting bolt Finish:❑ Plain or❑Zinc Plated (Hot -Dip Galvanized optional) Service: Used to rigidly brace piping systems subjected to sway and seismic disturbances. Structural attachment component of Anvil's 700 series sway brace assembly. Recommended for use under roof installations with bar joist construction or for attachment to the top or bottom flange of structural steel beams. Can be utilized as a structural connection for either a lateral brace or a longitudinal brace. Approvals: UL and ULC Listed (UL 203A:2009), and FM Approved (FM 1950:2010). Complies with seismic bracing requirements of NFPA-13. Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development cVus (OSHPD) State of California approved. LISTED APPROVED Features: • . Permits secure quick connection to structural members where drilling and/or welding of brace connection is not allowed or is not easily accomplished • Shear head bolt design ensures that the proper installation torque is accomplished for a tight non -slip fit to the structural member. • Bar joist beam attachment is designed for concentric loadings of seismic connections and fasteners. Installation Instructions: 1. Place Fig. 778 on the structural steel beam. Steel member must fully engage throat of Fig. 778. 2. Tighten the set bolts equally and alternately until bolt heads shear off (30-40 Ft -Lbs). 3. Attach 700 Series Anvil Brace Fittings using the included'/2" mounting bolt and adjust orientation as needed for proper brace angle. Ordering: Specify figure number, name and finish. Set Bolts 3/4" 1/2" Hex Head Mounting Bolt FIG. 778: WEIGHT (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) H L W T Weight 2.63 4.13 2.25 .69 2.26 Fig. 778 (Shown in Horizontal Position) Fig. 771 Sway Brace Swivel Attachmnet Top or Bottom Flange of Steel Beams Typical Assembly (Wide Flange) Fig. 775 Lateral/Longitudinal Brace Clamp PROJECT INFORMATION Project: APPROVAL STAMP ❑ Approved Address: ❑ Approved as noted Contractor: ❑ Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Date: Notes 1: Notes 2: PH -3.16 SWAY BRACE - SEISMIC ANVIL Fig. 778 Min. Bar Joist Beam Attachment (cont.) A I-4-6"Max. Section A -A Steel Joist A Elevated View FIG. 778 UL MAX LOADS: LOADS (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Beam Flange Thickness Perpendicluar to Beam Parallel to Beam 3/16 1000 1000 1/4 1600 1600 1/2 2015 2015 FIG. 778 FM MAX LOADS*: LOADS (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) • ANGLES (DEGREES) Beam Flange Thickness Brace Angle ' Perpendicular to Beam Parallel to Beam 1/8 _ 3/4 Bar Joist (Vertical Position) 30-44 440 620 45-59 740 880 60-74 920 940 75-90 1010 1050 1/8 _ 3/4 Bar Joist and Wide Flange Beam (Horizontal -Position) 30-44 380 370 45-59 540 520 60-74 660 640 75-90 700 720 * The allowable FM approved capacity of brace subassemblies have been determined by resolving the load rating to the horizontal direction and dividing by a safety factor of 1.5 to allow the values to be used directly for Allowable Stress Design. For Load Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) capacities, the above values will need to be multiplied by 1.5. ** Brace Pipe Angles are determined from vertical. Fig. 778 (Shown in Vertical Position) Fig. 771 Sway Brace Swivel Attachment 1" or 11/4" Sch. 40 Brace Pipe Fig. 770 0 Brace Clamp Typical Assembly (Bar Joist) Notes: 1. For fire protection installations - sway braces are intended to be installed in accordance with NFPA-13 and Anvil's installations instructions and local codes. 2. The required type, number and size of fasteners used for the structural attachment fitting shall be in accordance with NFPA-13. 3. To assure proper performance, installer is responsible for: a. Structural integrity of attachment member to safely handle load requirements. b. Securely tightening the component on the brace pipe. 4. Anvil International® brand bracing components are designed to be compatible ONLY with other Anvil International® brand bracing components, resulting in a Listed seismic bracing assembly. 5. Updated UL listing information may be viewed at www.ul.com and FM approvals may be viewed at www.fmgobal.com Disclaimer: Anvil International ("Anvil") does not provide any warranties and specifically disclaims any liability whatsoever with respect to Anvil bracing products and components that are used in combination with products, parts or systems not manufactured or sold by Anvil. In no event shall Anvil be liable for any incidental, direct, consequential, special or indirect damages or lost profits where non -Anvil bracing components have been, or are used. Structural Note: Steel Joist Manufacturers require that all seismic bracing connections be within 6" of the cord panel point. Installation of the Fig. 778 must be limited to the outer third sections of the joist span. Go to www.anvilintl.com/OPA for State of California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) for design information relating to OSHPD projects. Seis Brace® Seismic Fire Protection Design Tool may be accessed at www.seisbrace.com PH -1.14 PER TUBING HANGERS CT -69 Adjustable Swivel Ring 1/2" through 4" =arb.on steel )per plated ?commended for suspension of non -insulated stationary copper tube. : Complies with Federal Specification A -A -1192A (Type 10) -E (Type 10), ANSI/MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -58 (Type 10). ds are countersunk so that they cannot become burred or damaged. ed swivel nut provides vertical adjustment after piping is in place. ired swivel nut will not fall off. Specify nominal tube size, figure number, name and finish. ric nut available upon request. 3�^ G h 11/4" pipe 11/2" through 4" pipe FIG. CT -69: LOADS (LBS) • WEIGHT (LBS) • DIMENSIONS (IN) Size Max Load Weight B C F G Width 300 0.10 3 23/ 6 1'/6 5/8 0.10 213/16 2 19/s 0.10 211/16. 113/16 1 1/4 0.10 21/2 1 5/8 15/ 6 0.10 211/46 113/16 1 ! 0.11 31/46 21/2 1% 2 525 0.25 313/16 215/8 111/6 3/4 0.27 41/4 33/8 1% 650 0.48 43/8 312 11/2 changes in rod diameter from previously published data per recent revisions in MSS -SP -58 & 69 tqcci Fire Protection Products Worldwide Contacts www.tyco-fire.com Model BFV-N Butterfly Valve Grooved End General Description The Model BFV-N Grooved End But- terfly Valves (Ref. Figure 1) are indi- cating type valves designed for use in fire protection systems where a visual indication is required as to whether the valve is open or closed. They are used, for example, as system, sectional, and pump water control valves. They have cut groove inlet and outlet connections that are suitable for use with grooved end pipe couplings that are listed and approved for fire protection systems. For applications requiring supervision of the open position of the valve, the Gear Operators for the Model BFV-N Butterfly Valves are provided with two sets of factory installed inter- nal switches each having SPDT con- tacts (Ref. Figure 3). The supervisory switches transfer their electrical con- tacts when there is movement from the valve's normal open position during the first two revolutions of the handwheel. NOTICE The Model BFV-N Grooved End But- terfly Valves described herein must be installed and maintained in compliance with this document, as well as with the applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Association, in addition to the standards of any other authori- ties having jurisdiction. Failure to do so may impair the performance of these devices. The owner is responsible for main- taining their fire protection system and devices in proper operating con- dition. Contact the installing contrac- tor or product manufacturer with any questions. Technical Data Approvals UL and C -UL Listed FM Approved Listed by California State Fire Marshall under Listing No. 7770-1670:100 All laboratory listings and approvals are for indoor and outdoor use. Sizes 2-1/2 thru 10 Inch (DN65 thru DN250) Maximum Working Pressure 2-1/2 to 8 Inch (DN65 to DN200) 300 psi (20,7) bar 10 Inch (DN250) 175 psi (12,0 bar) Materials of Construction Body Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A395 Body Coating Polyamide Disc Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A395 Disc Seal Grade EPDM "E" encapsulated rubber conforming to ASTM D2000 Upper & Lower Stem Type 416 Stainless Steel conforming to ASTM 582 Lower Plug PVC Operator Gear operator with iron housing. Page 1 of 4 JULY 2015 TFP1510 TFP1510 Page 2 of 4 NominalNominal Sizes Inches (DN) Pipe pe OD Inches (mm) Installation Dimensions Inches (mm) Weight Lbs. (kg) A B C D E F G H 2-1/2 2.88 3.85 11.94 3.25 5.67 5.90 5.82 2.130 22 (65) (73,0) (98,0) (303,3) (83,0) (144,0) (149,9) (147,8) (54,1) (10,0) 76,1mm 3.00 3.85 11.94 3.25 5.67 5.90 5.82 2.130 22 (65) (76,1) (98,0) (303,3) (83,0) (144,0) (149,9) (147,8) (54,1) -- (10,0) 3 3.50 3.85 12.48 3.54 5.94 5.90 5.82 2.13 0 23 (80) (88,9) (98,0) (317,0) (90,0) (150,9) (149,9) (147,8) (54,1) (10,4) r 4.50 . 4.56 5418 4.35' `6.31)_ 5.90. 7.64 2.13' _ ;,. ., � '28., ((100) (114,3) :(116,0), {(360,2) (110,0) ;(160,3)' (149,9) (194,1) (54,1) :,0 ,.0 (12,7)' 5 5.56 5.86 15.17 4.84 7.32 5.90 7.64 2.13 0 31 (125) (141,3) (149,0) (385,3) (123,0) (185,9) (149,9) (194,1) (54,1) (14,1) 165,1mm — 5.86 17.54 5.93 8.62 5.90 7.64 2.13 0.67 41 (150) (165,1) (149,0) (445,5) (151,0) (218,9) (149,9) (194,1) (54,1) (17,0) (18,6) 6 6.63 5.86 17.54 5.93 8.62 5.90 7.64 2.13 0.67 41 (150) (168,3) (149,0) (445,5) (151,0) (218,9) (149,9) (194,1) (54,1) (17,0) (18,6) 8 8.63 5.26 19.42 6.87 9.80 9.80 7.91 2.13 5.86 53 (200) (219,1) (134,0) (493,3) (174,0) (248,9) (248,9) (200,9) (54,1) (148,8) (24,1) 10 10.75 6.29 24.03 9.17 11.61 18.00 9.49 3.03 7.41 88 (250) (273,1) (160,0) (610,4) (233,0) (294,9) (457,2) (241,0) (77,0) (188,2) (40,0) GEAR OPERATOR BODY HANDWH EEL INDICATOR FLAG 1/2" NPT CONDUIT i CONNECTION e-rA oz■ 1� H A FIGURE 1 MODEL BFV-N GROOVED END BUTTERFLY VALVE NOMINAL DIMENSIONS DISC CONTACT RATING: 1/2A @ 125 VDC 1/4A @ 250 VDC 15.1A/12HP @ 125, 250 VAC 5A @ 125 VAC "L" I— SUPERVISORY SWITCH SWITCH SHOWN WITH VALVE FULL OPEN END OF LINE RESISTOR r L GND • z w w 2 i • POWER w J 0 0 w CC w -J CO I— AUXILIARY SWITCH SWITCH SHOWN WITH VALVE FULL OPEN FIGURE 2 MODEL BFV-N BUTTERFLY VALVE INTERNAL SWITCH WIRING DIAGRAM WITH VALVE IN OPEN POSITION BELL TFP1510 Page 3 of 4 300 400 600 FLOW RATE IN LITRES PER MINUTE (LPM) (1 GPM = 3,785 LPM) 1000 2000 4000 6000 10000 5.0 11111 IIJHI)UII I lI Il Il1 L I I I 1 1111 4.0 3.0 2.0 0= c 0 pz cc cc z0 co aw z 0.5 o z 0.4 z0 a 0.3 z 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.2 0.1 20000 40000 I I I 1111111t1 IJI)II11 II I It 1I1 IA II 0 I I I i I ,:oo� ry4) `O `Ory Q_ C) C) C)� till Illi 0,30 0,20 0,10 0,08 0,06 0,05 0,04 cr coa. z 0< 0 m wCY) CC o gc w II CC 0,03 Q a z 0,02 z 0,01 60 100 200 400 600 1000 2000 4000 6000 10000 15000 FLOW RATE IN GALLONS PER MINUTE (GPM) GRAPH A DN65 THROUGH DN250 MODEL BFV-N BUTTERFLY VALVE NOMINAL PRESSURE DROP VERSUS FLOW Installation The Model BFV-N Grooved End Butter- fly Valves may be installed with flow in either direction and can be positioned either horizontally or vertically. The grooved end pipe couplings used with the Model BFV-N must be listed or approved for fire protection service and installed in accordance with the manu- facturers instructions. The Model BFV-N Butterfly Valve may be installed with any schedule of pres- sure class of pipe or tubing that is listed or approved for fire protection. As applicable, refer to Figure 2 for the internal switch wiring diagram. Conduit and electrical connections are to be made in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction and/ or the National Electrical Code. With reference to Figure 2, the supervisory switch is intended for connection to the supervisory circuit of a fire alarm control panel in accordance with NFPA 72. The auxiliary switch is intended for the unsupervised connection to aux- iliary equipment in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electric Code. NOTE: For outdoor applications with internal supervisory switches, it is rec- ommended that wiring connections be made at a temperature above 15°F (-9°C), in order to insure sufficient flex- ibility of the wire lead insulation. Stop Adjustment Procedure The gear operator's OPEN and SHUT position have been factory set. The following procedure should be used if slight adjustments are needed. Refer to Figure 3. Step 1. Turn the Handwheel until the valve is fully closed. Step 2. Remove two lockscrews (A) from the gear operator body. Step 3. Turn the Shut Stop Screw (B) clockwise until snug. Step 4. Turn the Handwheel until the valve is fully open. Step 5. Turn the Open Stop Screw (C) clockwise until snug. FIGURE 3 MODEL BFV-N GROOVED END BUTTERFLY VALVE OPERATOR ADJUSTMENT Step 6. Close the valve by turning the Handwheel until the valve is fully in the closed position. Ensure the disc has returned to the fully closed posi- tion and the disc is centered in the seat area. Readjust the Shut Stop Screw if necessary. Step 7. Replace two lockscrews (A) into the gear Operator body locking the stops into position. TFP1510 Page 4 of 4 Care and Maintenance Before closing a fire protection system control valve for maintenance or inspection work on either the valve or fire protection system which it con- trols, permission to shut down the affected fire protection systems must be obtained from the proper authorities and all personnel who may be affected by this decision must be notified. The owner is responsible for the inspection, testing, and maintenance of their fire protection system and devices in accordance with the applicable stan- dards of the National Fire Protection Association.(e.g., NFPA 25), in addition to the standards of any authority having jurisdiction. Contact the installing con- tractor or product manufacturer with any questions. Any impairment must be immediately corrected. It is recommended that automatic sprinkler systems be inspected, tested, and maintained by a qualified inspec- tion service. Limited Warranty For warranty terms and conditions, visit www.tyco-fire.com. Ordering Procedure Grooved End Butterfly Valves Specify: (specify inch size) Model BFV-N Grooved End Butterfly Valve with internal supervisory switches, P/N (specify): 2-1/2 inch (DN65) 59 -300 -F -025N 76,1mm (DN65)* 59 -300 -F -076N 3 inch (DN80) 59 -300 -F -030N 4 inch (DN100) 59 -300 -F -040N 5 inch (DN125) 59 -300 -F -050N 165,1mm (DN150)* 59 -300 -F -165N 6 inch (DN150) 59 -300 -F -060N ' 8 inch (DN200) 59 -300 -F -080N 10 inch (DN250) 59 -300 -F -100N `Available for EMEA and APAC markets only GLOBAL HEADQUARTERS 1 1400 Pennbrook Parkway, Lansdale, PA 19446 I Telephone +1-215-362-0700 Copyright © 2015 Tyco Fire Products, LP. All rights reserved. tyco Fire Protection Products tqccs Fire Protection Products Worldwide www.tyco-fire.com Contacts Model CV -1F Grooved End Swing Check Valves General Description The TYCO Model CV -1F Grooved End Swing Check Valves are compact and rugged swing -type units that allow water flow in one direction and prevent flow in the opposite direction. A resilient elastomer seal facing on the spring-loaded clapper ensures a leak - tight seal and non -sticking operation. The Model CV -1F Check Valves are designed to minimize water hammer caused by flow reversal. The Model CV -1F Grooved End Swing Check Valves are furnished with grooved ends and can be installed using GRINNELL Grooved Couplings or GRINNELL Figure 71 Flange Adapt- ers. The Model CV -1F Check Valves have been designed with a removable cover for ease of field maintenance. These valves can be installed horizon- tally (with cover in the upward position) or vertically with the flow in the upward direction (Ref. Figure 3). A check valve maintenance kit is avail- able to allow backflushing through a fire department connection without removing the Model CV -1F Grooved End Swing Check Valve from the riser. Refer to technical data sheet TFP1555. Model CV -1F is a re -designation for Central Figure 590F and GRINNELL Figure 590F Grooved End Swing Check Valves. NOTICE The TYCO Model CV -1F Grooved End Swing Check Valves described herein must be installed and maintained in compliance with this document and with the applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), in addition to the standards of any authorities having jurisdiction. Failure to do so may impair the perfor- mance of these devices. Never remove any piping component nor correct or modify any piping defi- ciencies without first de -pressurizing and draining the system. Failure to do so may result in serious personal injury, property damage, and/or impaired device performance. The owner is responsible for main- taining their fire protection system and devices in proper operating con- dition. Contact the installing contrac- tor or product manufacturer with any questions. Technical Data Approvals Compliance with CE Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) and Standards of Engineering Practice • 2 to 12 Inch (DN50 to DN300): UL and C -UL Listed, FM Approved, Bureau Veritas • 2-1/2 to 10 Inch (DN65 to DN250): VdS Approved Certificate No. G4060018 Sizes 2 to 12 Inch (DN50 to DN300) Maximum Working Pressure UL/FM - 300 psi (20,7 bar) VdS - 16 bar Valve Assembly Finish Red, non -lead paint VdS For fire protection pressure rating, listing and approval information, contact your TYCO representative. Installation The Model CV -1F Grooved End Swing Check Valves are to be installed in accordance with this section: Step 1. The arrow cast on the body must point in the direction of the flow. Step 2. Valves installed vertically must be positioned with the flow in the upward direction. Step 3. Valves installed horizontally must be positioned with the cover facing up (Ref. Figure 3). Step 4. Grooved end pipe couplings used with the Model CV -1F Grooved End Swing Check Valves must be installed in accordance with manufac- turer's instructions. Note: Valves should be installed a rea- sonable distance downstream from pumps, elbows, expanders, reducers, or other similar devices to extend the valve life. Standard piping practices call for a minimum of five (5) times the pipe diameter for general use. Page 1 of 6 FEBRUARY 2016 TFP1550 TFP1550 Page 2 of 6 Nominal Pipe Size Nominal Dimensions Inch (mm) Cover Bolt Torque Lbs. -ft. (Nm) Approx. Weight Lbs. (kg) Valve Size Inch (DN) Pipe O.D. Inch (mm) A B C D E F J 2 2.37 6.75 1.96 1.96 2.57 3.25 4.75 1.62 18 9.0 (50) (60,3) (171,5) (49,8) (49,8) (65,3) (82,3) (120,7) (41,5) (25) (4,5) 2-1/2 2.88 8.00 5.38 2.63 3.09 3.87 5.87 1.63 39 10.0 (65) (73,0) (203,2) (136,7) (66,7) (78,5) (98,3) (149,1) (41,7) (54) (4,5) 76,1 mm 3.00 8.00 5.38 2.63 3.09 3.87 5.87 1.63 39 10.0 (65) (76,1) (203,2) (136,7) (66,7) (78,5) (98,3) (149,1) (41,7) (54) (4,5) 3 3.50 8.37 5.72 2.81 3.31 3.87 5.87 1.63 39 11.0 (80) (88,9) (212,6) (145,3) (71,4) (84,1) (98,3) (149,1) (41,7) (54) (5,0) !41 '4.50 +9.63', 6.68:, {3.80 3.63' (4.53`, 7.13'_ 1.84 501, (25.0 ((100) ;(114,3) 1(244,6)' 169,7)' ((96,5) ;(92,2)` ,(115,4) (181,1)' ((46,7) !(69)F ((11,3)' 139,7 mm 5.50 10.50 7.40 4.46 4.13 4.90 7.50 1.75 39 29.0 (125) (139,7) (266,7) (188,0) (113,3) (104,9) (124,5) (190,5) (44,5) (54) (13,2) 5 5.56 10.50 7.40 4.46 4.13 4.90 7.50 1.75 39 29.0 (125) (141,3) (266,7) (188,0) (113,3) (104,9) (124,5) (190,5) (44,5) (54) (13,2) 165,1 mm 6.50 11.50 8.00 4.62 4.50 5.00 7.60 1.85 60 47.0 (150) (165,1) (292,1) (203,2) (117,3) (114,3) (127,0) (193,0) (47,0) (82) (21,3) 6 6.63 11.50 8.00 4.62 4.50 5.00 7.60 1.85 60 47.0 (150) (168,3) (292,1) (203,2) (117,3) (114,3) (127,0) (193,0) (47,0) (82) (21,3) 8 8.63 14.00 10.14 6.67 5.52 5.46 8.46 2.13 120 66.0 (200) (219,1) (355,6) (257,8) (169,4) (140,2) (138,7) (214,9) (54,1) (164) (29,9) 10 10.75 18.00 12.38 8.62 6.41 7.50 10.50 3.00 130 109.7 (250) (273,1) (457,2) (314,5) (218,9) (162,8) (190,5) (266,7) (76,2) (178) (49,4) 12 12.75 21.00 14.28 9.93 7.27 7.62 10.62 2.75 130 151.0 (300) (323,9) (533,4) (362,7) (252,2) (184,7) (193,5) (269,7) (69,9) (178) (68,0) FIGURE 1 MODEL CV -1F GROOVED END SWING CHECK VALVES NOMINAL DIMENSIONS Care and Maintenance The TYCO Model CV -1F Grooved End Swing Check Valves must be main- tained and serviced in accordance with this section. Before closing a fire protection system main control valve for maintenance work on the fire protection system that it controls, obtain permission to shut down the affected fire protection system from the proper authorities and notify all personnel who may be affected by this decision. After placing a fire protection system in service, notify the proper authorities and advise those responsible for moni- toring proprietary and/or central station alarms. The owner is responsible for the inspection, testing, and maintenance of their fire protection system and devices in compliance with this document, as well as with the applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Associa- tion (e.g., NFPA 25), in addition to the standards of any authority having juris- diction. Contact the installing contrac- tor or product manufacturer with any questions. Any impairments must be immediately corrected. Automatic sprinkler systems are rec- ommended to be inspected, tested, and maintained by a qualified Inspec- tion Service in accordance with local requirements and/or national codes. TFP1550 Page 3 of 6 No. Part Material Qty. 1 Body Ductile Iron 1 2 Cover Ductile Iron 1 3 Cover Gasket Nitrile Rubber Rubber 1 4 Hex Cap Screw Steel, Zinc Plated AR 5 Clapper, 2"-8" (DN50-200) Stainless Steel 1 Clapper, 10"-12" (DN250-300) Ductile Iron 4,16 No. Part Material Qty. 6 Clapper FacingEPDME" Grade " 1 7 Spring Stainless Steel 1 8 Hinge Shaft Stainless Steel 1 9 RetainingRingStainless Steel AR 11 Retention Bolt Stainless Steel 1 13 Retaining Disc Stainless1 Steel 1 18 17 No. Part Material Qty. 14 Locknut Stainless Steel 1 15 1/2"I NPT Cast Iron 2 16 Adhesive Thread Sealer AR 17 Nameplate Aluminum 1 18 Rivet Steel 2 19 Spacer Stainless Steel 1 2" - 8" (DN50-DN200) SEE DETAIL B 11 5 9 VIEW A 111 111111111111 i1 1I1 2 10"-12" 7 (DN250 - DN300) 11,16 lulu■ ) 19 5 /1 6 2' -8" 10"-12" (DN50-DN200) (DN250 - DN300) DETAIL B FIGURE 2 MODEL CV -1F GROOVED END SWING CHECK VALVES ASSEMBLY 5.0 500 700 1000 II FLOW RATE IN LITERS PER MINUTE (LPM) (1 GPM = 3,785 LPM) 2000 3000 5000 7000 10000 20000 30000 50000 I i i 4.0 M�■iiii� o� co X11111111111■�■■111'■■I■■SII"C■■■■■iil■r� ■■■■..■r.■■��.�■ �■■■■■■■ 2 i■ Innen■■■IA i■■�■■■vii■■■■■■■u/uno lliNI• iii ■■■■■■■ Q Q I O I111■1111 1-■■■■■II■II■■■�■/1II1■■■■■■■�II111111■1111■■■11/1�11■IA■■■ cn ■■■■■■■ - �■ o imnm d 3.0 ■■■■■■ T I Z ,•■111111 O �1111111.,,1111'1111111111111J111111111111111E1111G11111 Q d " ■■■■■ V V ■ `O /IIIIIN ,.o i■■■■■ II■■■■I,■I�■■■■■■■I/IIII■IIIIIII■■I■■III/I■■■■ 0,20 m o = 1111■ A 4 M■■II111 A■■■■ h IN ► z 1111 ti .,I,'a (• I■■■III o 111■■■■ ' ' I■■ o ,11111111111111111111111111111111'ICIIII Pc z ■■■■ A * 1111111 z IIIIUUI 211■ h I■I111■■■■■r4I1111111111111■r1■1I1/1■■■■■ air w w 1111■■I `�% A `� 111111 v .11111■■ ,11■ I■■1111■■ �� IIIIIII■■■■911■■■■■ 2.0 __■.■.■ ■■ I.■..■.■ ,■■■■■■■ ,z .■■ Q ...1111_ o /111111111 111_1... m < SIM■■■I■■I•�■■INM■■■■■ 4111111■J■■ ` ■■■■■■1■ o ,■■■1■111111 ■11INNI■■II■■1E■■■■ In Cl) ■■■■Ii■■■I1■■II■■..U. b 1111111■ 0 AMU I■■■■■11■ N I■■■■■111■■ 1/■■■I■■11■■■■■ w m ■■■■I■■IAI■■II■■■■■■ 111■111■ _ ■■■1 w Cl) co 0 .■■■■■■I = I■■■■1111■ �O II 1111.,,,1 p W ■■■II■■III1■I,■■■■■■II■/411111111 h I■■■ I■■■■■■1I /■■■■■11II h III p Q E ■■I■■ MI■I/■■■■■■I■1,111111111 IA■■I o I■■■■■III I■■■■■III = All o I■■I■I■■■■■ 0,10 C o -J LI1 a ¢ ■IIPMA■■■IINI■■■■■■■1/111111111■■I■■■ AI■■■■■■I 0 1■■■■■I■II Q All a KI■Pd■■IIIII.■■lIII211111111111■Ii.1111■•■■.NS 111 co ,A■■�■■■■I Tlo=.■■■111■■■■I 0,08 aw II <n ■■■1111 0 dl z o WHIM I■■■■111 =111 0 I■■■■111■■■■■ z 1.0 Ince........■..m.•■■■, a.■■■■II■�MM�■.■■■■MI■�■■■.■ ■■ 0,07 d ■■■■■■r.■■■T■■■141■■■■■■■1■111/J■■■■■1/11��■■■■■■I�■M■■■■■ 111 Ory. 11■MI■■■■11EN•■■■ 0,06 Z IMEMIE Z 0 0.8 ■■■MANNEUMM■■X11■■11I1UJ1■■■■� MINM■■■■/I■■■■■■■■■:r11. /11■■■■■■U 1111■ z 0.7 "iii"'p' pp' '' Fr pr �/ 0,05 z Ji iii 0,30 0.5 100 200 300 400 600 1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 10000 15000 FLOW RATE IN GALLONS PER MINUTE (GPM) GRAPH A MODEL CV -1F GROOVED END SWING CHECK VALVES NOMINAL PRESSURE LOSS VS. FLOW 0,04 TFP1550 Page 4 of 6 Valve Size Inch (DN) Pipe O.D. Inch (mm) Part Number 2 2.37 Americas Only (50) (60,3) 59-590-0-020 2-1/2 (65) 2.88 (73,0) 59-590-0-025 76,1 mm (65) 3.00 (76,1) 59-590-0-076 3 3.50 59-590-0-030 (80) (88,9) (60,3) 4 (100) 4.50 (114,3) 59-590-0-040 139,7 mm (125) 5.50 (139,7) 59-590-0-139 5 (125) 5.56 (141,3) 59-590-0-050 165,1 mm (150) 6.50 (165,1) 59-590-0-165 6 (150) 6.63 (168,3) 59-590-0-060 8 (200) 8.63 (219,1) 59-590-0-080 10 (250) 10.75 (273,1) 59-590-0-100 12 12.75 59-590-0-120 (300) (323,9) 59025EPDME TABLE A MODEL CV -1F GROOVED END SWING CHECK VALVES PART NUMBER SELECTION Valve Size Inch (DN) Pipe O.D. Inch (mm) Cover Gasket Part Number Clapper Facing Part Number Clapper Assembly Part Number Americas Only EMEA/APAC Americas Only EMEA/APAC Americas Only EMEA/APAC 2 2.37 595907020 97670501 59020EPDM 59020EPDM 97670201A 97670201 (50) (60,3) 2-1/2 2.88 595907030 97561801 59025EPDME 59025EPDM 97562801A 97562065 (65) (73,0) 76,1 mm 3.00 595907030 97561801 59025EPDME 59025EPDM — 97562801 (65) (76,1) 3 3.50 595907030 97561801 59030EPDME 59030EPDM 97562201A 97562201 (80) (88,9) 4 4.50 595907040 97512001 59040EPDME 59040EPDM 97549001A 97549001 (100) (114,3) 139,7 mm 5.50 595907040 97512001 59050EPDME 59050EPDM — 97565501 (125) (139,7) 5 5.56 595907040 97512001 59050EPDME 59050EPDM 97565501A 97562125 (125) (141,3) 165,1 mm 6.50 595907060 97521801 . 59060EPDME 59060EPDM — 97524101 (150) (165,1) 6 6.63 595907060 97521801 59060EPDME 59060EPDM 97524101A 97562150 (150) (168,3) 8 8.63 595907080 97547901 59080EPDME 59080EPDM 97592201A 97592201 (200) (219,1) 10 10.75 595907100 97600001 59100EPDM ' 59100EPDM 97598001A 97598001 (250) (273,1) 12 12.75 595907120 97600002 59120EPDM 59120EPDM 97647701A 97647701 (300) (323,9) TABLE B MODEL CV -1F GROOVED END SWING CHECK VALVES REPLACEMENT VALVE PARTS PART NUMBER SELECTION COVER OUTLET INLET VERTICAL ORIENTATION INLET HORIZONTAL ORIENTATION FIGURE 3 MODEL CV -1F GROOVED END SWING CHECK VALVES PROPER ORIENTATION TFP1550 Page 5 of 6 Limited Ordering Warranty Procedure For warranty terms and conditions, visit Contact your local distributor for avail- www.tyco-fire.com. ability. When placing an order, indicate the full product name and Part Number (P/N). Model CV -1F Check Valve Specify: Model CV -1F Grooved End Swing Check Valve, size (specify), P/N (specify per Table A) Replacement Valve Parts Refer to Figure 2 to identify Parts. Cover Gasket Specify: Model CV -1F Grooved End Swing Check Valve, Cover Gasket, size (specify), P/N (specify per Table B) Clapper Facing Specify: Model CV -1F Grooved End Swing Check Valve,- Clapper Seal Facing, EPDM Grade "E", size (specify), P/N (specify per Table B) Clapper Assembly Includes items 2, 3, 5-14, and 17-19. Specify: Model CV -1F Grooved End Swing Check Valve, Clapper Assembly, size (specify), P/N (specify per Table B) TFP155O Page 6 of 6 r GLOBAL HEADQUARTERS 11400 Pennbrook Parkway, Lansdale, PA 19446 I Telephone +1-215-362-0700 Copyright © 2016 Tyco Fire Products, LP. All rights reserved. two Fire Protection Products tqcci Fire Protection Products Worldwide www.tyco-fire.com Contacts Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve External Resetting General Description The TYCO Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valves are differential valves used to automatically control the flow of water into dry pipe fire protection sprinkler systems upon operation of one or more automatic sprinklers. The DPV-1 also provides for actuation of fire alarms upon system operation. The Model DPV-1 features are as follows: • External reset. • 250 psi (17,2 bar) pressure rating. • Unique offset single clapper design enabling a simple compact valve to minimize installation labor. • Ductile iron construction to ensure a lightweight valve to minimize ship- ping cost. • A variety of inlet and outlet connections. • Compact, Pre -Trimmed, and Semi - Assembled, easy to operate valve trim. • Simple reset procedure through the elimination of priming water. Dry pipe sprinkler systems are used in unheated warehouses, parking garages, store windows, attic spaces, loading docks, and other areas exposed to freezing tempera- tures, where water filled pipe cannot be utilized. When set for service, the dry pipe sprinkler system is pressur- ized with air (or nitrogen). The loss of pressure through an operated auto- matic sprinkler in response to heat from a fire permits the DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve to open and allow a flow of water into the sprinkler system piping. Table B establishes the minimum required system air pressure that includes a safety factor to help prevent false operations that might occur due to water supply fluctuations. Available Sizes and End Connections End Connection Nominal Valve Size 2-1/2 Inch (DN65) 3 Inch (DN80) i4 -Inch (DN100) 6 Inch (DN150) Flange x Flange N/A N/A • • Flange x Groove N/A N/A • • Groove x Groove , •. ,__, • • • = Available N/A = Not Available NOTICE The Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valves described herein must be installed and maintained in compliance with this document, as well as with the applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Association, in addition to the standards of any other authori- ties having jurisdiction. Failure to do so may impair the performance of these devices. The owner is responsible for main- taining their fire protection system and devices in proper operating con- dition. Contact the installing contrac- tor or product manufacturer with any questions. Page 1 of 20 JANUARY 2016 TFP1O2O TFP1020 Page 2 of 20 6 7 CLAPPER ASSEMBLY 8 11 12 13 RESET 14 PLUNGER CD ---PARTS 17 10 5 NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. REF. 1 Valve Body 1 NR 2 Air and Water Seat 1 NR 3 Handhole Cover 1 NR 4 Handhole Cover Gasket 1 (b) 5 1/2-13 UNC x 1" Hex Head Cap Screw: 2-1/2 & 3 Inch Valves 5 CH 4 Inch Valve 6 CH 6 Clapper 1 (a) 7 Clapper Facing 1 (a) or (b) 8 Clapper Facing Retaining Plate 1 (a) 9 2-1/2 and 3 Inch Valves: 1/4" x 3/8" Long #10-32 Shoulder Screw 5 (a) 4 Inch Valve: 1/4-20 UNC x 1/2" Socket Head Cap Screw 7 (a) 10 Clapper Hinge Pin 1 (a) 11 Reset Knob 1 (c) or (d) 12 Reset Spring 1 (c) 13 Reset Bushing 1 (c) 14 Reset Bushing 0 -Ring 1 (b), (c) or (e) 15 Reset Plunger 0 -Ring 1 (b) or (c) 16 Reset Plunger 1 (c) 17 Reset Latch Subassembly 1 (c) 18 Dow Corning FS3452 Flourosilicone Grease, 1.5 g 1 (b) or (c) NR: Not Replaceable CH: Common Hardware REPLACEMENT PARTS NO. DESCRIPTION P/N (a) Clapper Assembly Includes Items 6-10: 2-1/2 & 3 Inch Valves 92-310-2-203 4 Inch Valve 92-310-2-403 (b) Repair Parts Kit Includes Items 4,7,14,15,&18: 2-1/2 & 3 Inch Valves 92-310-1-204 4 Inch Valve 92-310-1-404 (c) Reset Plunger Parts Kit Includes Items 11-18 92-310-1-405 (d) Reset Knob, Item 1192-310-1-406 (e) Reset Bushing 0 -Ring, Item 14 92-310-1-407 FIGURE 1 - PART 1 OF2 MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE 2-1/2, 3, AND 4 INCH (DN65, DN80, DN100) ASSEMBLIES TFP1020 Page 3 of 20 NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. REP. PART 1 Valve Body 1 NR 2 Air and Water Seat 1 NR 3 Water Seal 0 -Ring 1 NR 4 Air Seal 0 -Ring1 NR NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. REP. PART 5 Socket Head Cap Screw 3/8-16UNC x1"8 NR 6 Handhole Cover 1 NR 7 Handhole Cover Gasket 1 (b) 10 CLAPPER ASSEMBLY 11 14 15 16 Of 17 18, 21 12 19 20 RESET PLUNGER PARTS NO. DESCRIPTION QTY. REP. PART 8 Hex Head Cap Screw 5/8-11 UNC x 1"6 CH 9 Clapper 1 (a) 10 Clapper Facing 1 (a) or (b) 11 Clapper Facing Retaining Plate 1 (a) 12 Socket Head Cap Screw 1/4-20 UNC x 1/2':.9 (a) 13 Clapper Hinge Pin1 (a) 14 Reset Knob 1 (c) or (d) 15 Reset Spring 1 (c) 16 Reset Bushing 1 (c) 17 Reset Bushing 0 -Ring 1 (b), (c) or (e) 18 Reset Plunger 0 -Ring 1 (b) or (c) 19 Reset Plunger 1 (c) 20 Reset Latch Subassembly 1 (c) 21 Dow Corning FS3452 Flourosilicone Grease, 1.5 g 1 (b) or (c) NR: Not Replaceable CH: Common Hardware REPLACEMENT PARTS NO. DESCRIPTION P/N (a) Clapper Assembly Includes Items 9-13 92-310-2-603 (b) Repair Parts Kit Includes Items 7, 10, 17, 18, 21 92-310-1-604 (c) Reset Plunger Parts Kit Includes Items 14-21 92-310-1-405 (d) Reset Knob, Item 1492-310-1-406 (e) Reset Bushing 0 -Ring, Item 17 92-310-1-407 13 FIGURE 1 - PART 2 OF 2 MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE 6 INCH (DN150) ASSEMBLY 8 TFP1020 Page 4 of 20 Technical Data Approvals UL and C -UL Listed FM and NYC under MEA 172-02-E (4 and 6 inch). Dry Pipe Valve The TYCO Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valves are for vertical installations (flow going up), and they are rated for use at a maximum service pressure of 250 psi (17,2 bar). The Valve dimensions are shown in Figure 7. Flanged connections are available and drilled per ANSI, ISO, AS, and JIS spec- ifications (Ref. Table A). The grooved outlet connections, as applicable, are cut in accordance with standard groove specifications for steel pipe. They are suitable for use with grooved end pipe couplings that are listed or approved for fire protection system service. Avail- able combinations of inlet and outlet connections are detailed in the Order- ing Procedure section. They are also noted in the "Available End Connection and Sizes" table located on Page 1. Threaded port connections of valves having flanges drilled to ANSI, AS, or JIS specifications are NPT threaded per ANSI Standard B1.20.1. Threaded port connections of valves having flanges drilled to ISO are available either threaded per ISO 7-1 or NPT threaded per ANSI Standard B1.20.1. Valves with NPT threaded ports will readily accept the trim arrangements detailed in Parts 2 and 3 of Figures 4, 5, and 6. Components of the DPV-1 Valves are shown in Figure 1. The Body and Hand - hole Cover are ductile iron. The Hand - hole Cover Gasket is neoprene, and the Clapper Facing is EPDM. The Air/ Water Seat Ring is brass, the Clapper is bronze or aluminum bronze, and both the Clapper Retaining Plate and Latch are bronze. The Hinge Pin is aluminum bronze, and the fasteners for the Hand - hole Cover are carbon steel. Valve Trim Installation dimensions are given in Figure 7, and the Valve Trim and Pre - Trimmed Valve Assemblies are illus- trated in Figures 4, 5, and 6. The Valve Trim and Pre -Trimmed Valve forms a part of the laboratory listings and approval of the DPV-1 Valve and is necessary for the proper operation of the DPV-1 Valve. Each package of trim and pre -trimmed includes the follow- ing items: • Water Supply Pressure Gauge • System Air Pressure Gauge • Air Supply Connections • Main Drain Valve • Low Body Drain Valve • Alarm Test Valve • Automatic Drain Valve • Drip Funnel • Connections For Optional Quick Opening Device (Accelerator) Also included in the Pre Trimmed Valve Assembly, which can be ordered sepa- rately for the Valve Trim, includes the following items: • Model BFV-300 butterfly valve • Figure 577 grooved coupling • PS10-2 waterflow alarm switch • PS40-2 low air pressure alarm switch Note: When the system pressure is greater than 175 psi (12,1 bar), provision is to be made to replace the standard order 300 psi (20,7 bar) Water Pressure gauge with a separately ordered 600 psi (41,4 bar) Water Pressure Gauge. Air Supply Table B shows the system air pres- sure requirements as a function of the water supply pressure. The air (or nitro- gen) pressure in the sprinkler system is recommended to be automatically maintained by using one of the follow- ing pressure maintenance devices, as appropriate: • Model AMD -1 Air Maintenance Device (pressure reducing type). • Model AMD -2 Air Maintenance Device (compressor control type). • Model AMD -3 Nitrogen Maintenance Device (high pressure reducing type). The Pressure Relief Valve provided with the valve trim is factory set to relieve at a pressure of approximately 45 psi (3,1 bar). If the normal system air pres- sure is less than or exceeds 40 psi (2,8 bar), then the pressure Relief Valve must be reset to relieve at a pressure that is in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction. Quick Opening Device As an optiori, the Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve may be equipped with the VIZOR Electronic Dry Pipe Valve Accel- erator (4 and 6 inch sizes) as detailed in Technical Data Sheet TFP1105 or the Model ACC -1 Mechanical Dry Pipe Valve Accelerator (2-1/2, 3, 4, and 6 inch sizes) as detailed in Technical Data Sheet TFP1112. The VIZOR or the ACC -1 is used to reduce the time to valve actuation fol- lowing the operation of one or more automatic sprinklers. In some cases the use of a quick opening device such as the VIZOR or the ACC -1 may be required to meet the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association to meet water delivery times. Nominal Valve Size Flange Drilling Specification Nominal Dimensions in Inches and (mm) ANSI B16.11 (Class 125) ISO 7005-2 (PN16)2 J S B 2210 (10K) AS 2129 Table E) Dim. A Dim. B Qty. N Dim. A Dim. B Qty. N Dim. A Dim. B Qty. N Dim. A Dim. B Qty. N 4 Inch (DN100) 7.50 (190,5) 0.757.09 (19,0) 8 (180,0) 0.75 (19,0) 8 6.89 (175,0) 0.59 (15,0) 8 7.00 (178,0) 0.71 (18,0) 8 6 Inch (DN150) 9.50 (241,3) 0.889.45 (22,2) 8 (240,0) 0.91 (23,0) 8 9.45 (240,0) 0.75 (19,0) 8 9.25 (235,0) 0.87 (22,0) 8 1. Drilling same as ANSI B16.5 (Class 150) and ANSI B 6.42 (Class 150). 2. Drilling same as BS 4504 Section 3.2 (PN16) and DIN 2532 (PN16). TABLE A DIMENSIONAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SELECTION OF FLANGE DRILLING Dim. A Bolt Circle Diameter Dim. B Bolt Hole Diameter Qty. N Number of Bolt Holes 9.0 a 7.0 z 50 ¢ 4.0 D 3.0 w 2.0 a- 0 z a 10 z Q. 0.7 0 p 0.5 cr 04 U 0.3 ccw a 02 z 0 z 0.1 100 200 300 500 700 1000 2000 3000 FLOW RATE IN GALLONS PER MINUTE (GPM) The approximate friction losses, based on the Hazen and Williams formula and expressed in equivalent length of Schedule 40 pipe with C=100 are as follows: 2.2 feet for the 2-1/2 inch valve at a typical flow rate of 250 GPM 4.9 feet for the 3 inch valve at a typical flow rate of 350 GPM 8.9 feet for the 4 inch valve at a typical flow rate of 600 GPM 22 feet for the 6 inch valve at a typical flow rate of 1500 GPM FIGURE 2 MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVES NOMINAL PRESSURE LOSS VS. FLOW FLOW RATE IN LITRES PER MINUTE (LPM) (1 GPM = 3.785 LPM) 500 700 1000 2000 3000 1 1 1111'1 11 11 II l J MO • • 5000 UUU 1 10000 J 0,60 _ 0,50 0 2 eer ■ MIN ■ ■ U ■ I m MI_ 0,40 0,30 0,20 —0,10 = 0,08 0,06 _ 0,05 0,04 0,03 0,02 0,01 Operation The TYCO Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve is a differential type valve that utilizes a substantially lower system (air or nitro- gen) pressure than the supply (water) pressure, to maintain the set position shown in Figure 3A. The differential nature of the DPV-1 is based on the area difference between the air seat and the water seat in combination with the ratio of the radial difference from the Hinge Pin to the center of the Water Seat and the Hinge Pin to the center of the Air Seat. The difference is such that 1 psi (0,07 bar) of system air pressure can hold approximately 5.5 psi (0,38 bar) of water supply pressure. Table B establishes the minimum required system air pressure that includes a safety factor to help prevent false operations that occur due to water supply fluctuations. The Intermediate Chamber of the DPV-1 is formed by the area between the Air Seat and Water Seat as shown in Figure 3B. The Intermediate Chamber normally remains at atmospheric pres- sure through the Alarm Port connection and the valve trim to the normally open Automatic Drain Valve (Fig. 4, 5, or 6). Having the Intermediate Chamber, Figure 3B, open to atmosphere is criti- cal to the DPV-1 Valve remaining set, otherwise the full resulting pressure of the system air pressure on top of the Clapper Assembly cannot be realized. For example, and assuming a water supply pressure of 100 psi (6,9 bar), if the system air pressure is 25 psi (1,7 bar) and there was 15 psi (1,0 bar) pressure trapped in the Intermediate Chamber, the resulting pressure across the top of the Clapper would only be 10 psi (0,7 bar). This pressure would be insufficient to hold the Clapper Assem- bly closed against a water supply pres- sure of 100 psi (6,9 bar). It is for this reason that the plunger of the Auto- TFP1020 Page 5 of 20 Maximum Water Supply Pressure psi System Air Pressure Range psi 20 10 60 15 - 23 80 20 - 28 100 25 - 33 120 30 - 38 145 35 - 43 165 40 - 48 185 45 - 53 205 50 - 58 225 55 - 63 250 60 - 68 TABLE B SYSTEM AIR PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS matic Drain Valve must be depressed during several of the resetting steps, as well as during inspections, making certain that the Automatic Drain Valve is open. When one or more automatic sprin- klers operate in response to a fire, air pressure within the system piping is relieved through the open sprin- klers. When the air pressure is suf- ficiently reduced, the water pressure overcomes the differential holding the Clapper Assembly closed and the Clapper Assembly swings clear of the water seat, as shown in Figure 3C, This action permits water flow into the system piping and subsequently to be discharged from any open sprinklers. Also, with the Clapper Assembly open, the intermediate chamber is pressur- ized and water flows through the alarm port (Ref. Figure 3B) at the rear of the DPV-1 Valve to actuate system water flow alarms. The flow from the alarm port is also sufficient to close the oth- erwise normally open Automatic Drain Valve in the valve trim. After a valve actuation and upon sub- sequent closing of a system main control valve to stop water flow, the Clapper Assembly will latch open as shown in Figure 3D. Latching open of the DPV-1 will permit complete drain- ing of the system (including any loose scale) through the main drain port. During the valve resetting procedure and after the system is completely drained, the external reset knob can be easily depressed to externally unlatch the Clapper Assembly, as shown in Figure 3E. As such, the Clapper Assembly is returned to its normal set position to facilitate setting of the dry pipe sprinkler system, without having to remove the Handhole Cover. TFP1020 Page 6 of 20 1" NPT AIR SUPPLY PORT 01 1/2" NPT WATER SUPPLY PRESSURE & ALARM TEST PORT 02 CLAPPER ASSEMBLY LATCHED OPEN AIR PRESSURE TO SYSTEM t FROM WATER SUPPLY CLAPPER ASSEMBLY IN SET POSITION 3/4" NPT ALARM PORT OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE FIGURE 3A SET POSITION ' WATER SEAT DRAIN FROM SYSTEM Z 03 CLAPPER ASSEMBLY FULLY OPEN WATERFLOW TO SYSTEM I CLAPPER LATCH PIVOTS TO ALLOW CLAPPER ASSEMBLY TO FULLY OPEN CLAPPER ASSEMBLY VALVE WATERWAY 3/4" NPT LOW BODY DRAIN PORT WATER SUPPLY SHUT OFF FIGURE 3D DRAIN POSITION IV A MI FIGURE 3B SET POSITION INTERMEDIATE CHAMBER RESET ASSEMBLY CLAPPER LATCH MAIN DRAIN PORT: 1-1/4" NPT* (2-1/2 INCH & 3 INCH VALVES) 2" NPT (4 INCH VALVE) AIR SEAT 03 ALARM PORT INTERMEDIATE CHAMBER CLAPPER LATCH PIVOTS TO UNLATCH CLAPPER ASSEMBLY * DN40 FOR VALVES WITH ISO THREADED PORTS FROM WATER SUPPLY FIGURE 3C OPERATED POSITION DRAIN FROM SYSTEM COMPLETE Z ALARM PORT WATERFLOW TO ALARM PUSH HERE TO RESET VALVE I RESET KNOB WATER SUPPLY SHUT OFF FIGURE 3E RESET POSITION FIGURE 3 - PART 1 0F2 MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVES 2-1/2, 3, AND 4 INCH (DN65, DN80, AND DN100) SET AND OPEN POSITIONS CLAPPER ASSEMBLY RESEATED TFP1020 Page 7 of 20 1" NPT AIR SUPPLY PORT 01 CLAPPER ASSEMBLY IN SET POSITION CLAPPER ASSEMBLY LATCHED OPEN 3/4" NPT LOW BODY DRAIN PORT AIR PRESSURE TO SYSTEM r FROM WATER SUPPLY FIGURE 3A SET POSITION DRAIN FROM SYSTEM WATER SEAT CLAPPER ASSEMBLY FULLY OPEN CLAPPER LATCH PIVOTS TO ALLOW CLAPPER ASSEMBLY TO FULLY OPEN 03 02 3/4" NPT ALARM PORT OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE 1/2" NPT WATER SUPPLY PRESSURE & ALARM TEST PORT CLAPPER ASSEMBLY WATERFLOW TO SYSTEM I ..s� v Amy INTERMEDIATE CHAMBER ALARM PORT 03 VALVE WATERWAY FIGURE 3B SET POSITION INTERMEDIATE CHAMBER RESET ASSEMBLY CLAPPER LATCH PIVOTS TO UNLATCH CLAPPER ASSEMBLY 2" NPT MAIN DRAIN PORT WATER SUPPLY SHUT OFF FIGURE 3D DRAIN POSITION FROM WATER SUPPLY FIGURE 3C OPERATED POSITION DRAIN FROM SYSTEM COMPLETE ALARM PORT WATERFLOW TO ALARM PUSH HERE TO RESET VALVE I RESET KNOB 1111 FIGURE 3- PART 2OF2 MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVES 6 INCH (DN150) SET AND OPEN POSITIONS WATER SUPPLY SHUT OFF FIGURE 3E RESET POSITION CLAPPER ASSEMBLY RESEATED TFP1020 Page 8 of 20 NOTES: 1. SEE FIGURE 4 PART 3 FOR TRIM ARRANGEMENT WITH BILL OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENT PART NUMBERS. 2. TRIM SHOWN FULLY ASSEMBLED; COMPONENTS SUCH AS GAUGES AND SWITCHES MAY REQUIRE ASSEMBLY IN TRIM AT INSTALLATION. 1 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR LOCAL SPRINKLER 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION _ FOR SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE GAUGE ALARM TEST VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) SYSTEM WATER SUPPLY PRESSURE GAUGE 3/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN LOW BODY DRAIN VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) 2-1/2 INCH (DN65) or 3 INCH (DN80) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE (GxG ONLY) MAIN DRAIN VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) SYSTEM SHUT-OFF VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN) 1-1/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN LOW AIR PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY CONTROL VALVE 06 (NORMALLY OPEN) WATERFLOW PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH GROOVED COUPLING 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR OPTIONAL ACCELERATOR AUTOMATIC. DRAIN VALVE 1-1/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION DRIP TO DRAIN FUNNEL FIGURE 4 - PART 1 OF 3 2-1/2 AND 3 INCH (DN65 AND DN80) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE PRE -TRIMMED ASSEMBLY AIR SUPPLY CONTROL VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN) 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR WATERFLOW PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH 1-1/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN 1 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR LOCAL SPRINKLER ALARM TEST VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR OPTIONAL ACCELERATOR AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVE 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR OPTIONAL AIR PRESSURE SWITCH NOTES: 1. INSTALL TRIM ASSEMBLIES IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER. 2. SEE FIGURE 3 FOR VALVE PORT IDENTIFICATION. ROUTE 1/4" TUBING TO DRIP FUNNEL. 3. SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE GAUGE MAIN DRAIN VALVE A (NORMALLY CLOSED) .. 5 DRIP FUNNEL B SYSTEM WATER SUPPLY PRESSURE GAUGE 3/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN FIGURE 4 - PART 2 OF 3 2-1/2 AND 3 INCH (DN65 AND DN80) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE EXPLODED ARRANGEMENT OF SEMI -ASSEMBLED TRIM 2-1/2 INCH (DN65) or 3 INCH (DN80) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE (GxG ONLY) LOW BODY DRAIN VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) 1-1/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN TFP1020 Page 9 of 20 NO. DESCRIPTION QTY P/N 1 250 psi/ 1750 kPa Air Pressure Gauge 1 92-343-1-012 2 300 psi/ 2000 kPa Water Pressure Gauge 1 92-343-1-005 3 1/4" Gauge Test Valve 2 46-005-1-002 4 Model AD -1 Automatic Drain Valve 1 52-793-2-004 5 1/4" Pressure Relief Valve 1 92-343-1-020 6 1/2" Ball Valve 2 46-050-1-004 7 3/4" Angle Valve 1 46-048-1-005 8 1-1/4" Angle Valve 1 46-048-1-007 9 1/2" Swing Check Valve 2 46-049-1-004 10 Drip Funnel Connector 1 92-211-1-005 11 Drip Funnel Bracket 1 92-211-1-003 12 Drip Funnel 1 92-343-1-007 24 32 141 20 NO. DESCRIPTION QTY P/N 13 3/32" Vent Fitting 1 92-032-1-002 14 1/4" Tube, 18" Long 1 CH 15 1/4" Plug 2 CH 16 1/2" Plug 2 CH 17 1" Plug 1 CH 18 1/2" Union 1 CH 19 1/2" x 1/4" Reducing Bushing 1 CH 20 1/2" 90° Elbow 3 'CH 21 3/4" 90° Elbow 1 CH 22 1-1/4" 90° Elbow1 CH 23 1/2" Cross 2 CH 24 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/4" Reducing Tee 1 CH 25 1/2" Tee 1 CH 26 1/2" x 1/4" x 1/2" Reducing Tee 2 CH 27 1/2" x 1/2" x 3/4" Reducing Tee 1 CH 45 16 rtTe v\ a\ll�� 32 39 28 44' 25 31 18 31 26 16 4 3 15 2-1/2 INCH (DN65) or 3 INCH (DN80) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE (GxG ONLY) NO. DESCRIPTION QTY P/N 281"x1"x1/2" Reducing Tee 1 CH 29 Not Used PIPE NIPPLES: 30 1/4" x 3" 2 31 1/2" x Close 4 32 1/2" x 1-1/2" 8 33 1/2" x 2" 1 34 1/2" x 4-1/2" 1 35 1/2" x 6" 1 36 3/4" x Close 1 37 3/4" x 1-1/2" 1 38 3/4" x 2-1/2" 1 39 1" x Close 1 40 1-1/4" x Close 1 41 1-1/4"x4" 1 CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH COMPONENTS INCLUDED ONLY IN PRE -TRIMMED VALVE ASSEMBLIES: 42 Model BFV-300 Butterfly Valve, 2-1/2" (DN65) 1 59300G025NS 3" (DN80) 1 59300G030NS 43 Figure 577 Coupling, 2-1/2" (DN65) 1 57725ACP 3" (DN80) 1 57730ACP 44 Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch, Model PS10-2 1 25710 45 Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch, Model PS40-2 1 25730 LOCATION FOR OPTIONAL ELECTRICALLY SUPERVISED N.O. ALARM CONTROL VALVE 23 36 41 ll` i�(i� _ 8 5°1. 22 0 40 13 (GREEN TINT) 14 31 43 42 26 30 NOTES: 1. SEE FIGURE 3 FOR VALVE PORT IDENTIFICATION. 2. ROUTE 1/4" TUBING, ITEM 14, TO DRIP FUNNEL, ITEM 12. 3. ALL FITTINGS AND NIPPLES ARE GALVANIZED. 4. CH: COMMON HARDWARE 5. ITEMS 42-45 INCLUDED ONLY IN PRE -TRIMMED VALVE ASSEMBLIES AS APPLICABLE; OTHERWISE SEPARATELY ORDERED. FIGURE 4 - PART 3 OF 3 2-1/2 AND 3 INCH (DN65 AND DN80) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE EXPLODED ARRANGEMENT OF VALVE TRIM TFP1020 Page 10 of 20 1. SEE FIGURE 5 PART 3 FOR TRIM ARRANGEMENT WITH BILL OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENT PART NUMBERS. 2. TRIM SHOWN FULLY ASSEMBLED; COMPONENTS SUCH AS GAUGES AND SWITCHES MAY REQUIRE ASSEMBLY IN TRIM AT INSTALLATION. 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY 1 INCH NPT\ CONNECTION FORLOCAL - SPRINKLER 3/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN ALARM TEST VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE GAUGE LOW BODY DRAIN VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) SYSTEM WATER SUPPLY PRESSURE GAUGE 4 INCH (DN100) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE (FxG SHOWN) FLANGE ADAPTER OR GROOVED COUPLING MAIN • DRAIN VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) SYSTEM SHUT-OFF VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN) LOW AIR PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH SYSTEM / AIR SUPPLY CONTROL VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN) 2 INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN 1-1/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION DRIP TO DRAIN FUNNEL 3/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR WATER MOTOR ALARM WATERFLOW PRESSURE ALARM 1/2 INCH NPT SWITCH CONNECTION FOR OPTIONAL ACCELERATOR AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVE FIGURE 5 - PART 1 OF 3 4 INCH (DN100) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE PRE -TRIMMED ASSEMBLY SLOPE DOWN 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR OPTIONAL ACCELERATOR 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR WATERFLOW PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH AIR SUPPLY CONTROL VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN) AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVE 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR OPTIONAL AIR PRESSURE SWITCH SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE GAUGE MAIN DRAIN VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) 3/4 INCH NPT \ CONNECTION 1 .. '►� FOR WATER f>� MOTOR ALARM �11�' %Y 1W 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY .•i ALARM /, ��� �. TEST VALVE I! (NORMAL)�%Y ,> - CLOSED pi 3/4' INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN SYSTEM WATER SUPPLY PRESSURE GAUGE DRIP FUNNEL 1-1/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN FIGURE 5 - PART 2 OF 3 4 INCH (DN100) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE EXPLODED ARRANGEMENT OF SEMI -ASSEMBLED TRIM 1 INCH NPT B CONNECTION FOR LOCAL SPRINKLER LOW BODY DRAIN VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) NOTES: INSTALL TRIM ASSEMBLIES IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER. 2. SEE FIGURE 3 FOR VALVE PORT IDENTIFICATION. 3. ROUTE 1/4" TUBING TO DRIP FUNNEL. 4. SLOPE ASSEMBLY B DOWN TOWARD BACK OF VALVE TO FACILITATE SUFFICIENT LOW BODY DRAINAGE. 1. 2 INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN 4 INCH (DN100) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE (FxG SHOWN) TFP1020 Page 11 of 20 47 16 48 28 18 34 SLOPE DOWN LOCATION r FOR OPTIONAL ELECTRICALLY SUPERVISED N.O. ALARM CONTROL VALVE 24 33 25 33 19 29 15 (GREEN 34 TINT) 18 NOTES: 1. SEE FIGURE 3 FOR VALVE PORT IDENTIFICATION. 2. ROUTE 1/4" TUBING, ITEM 16, TO DRIP FUNNEL, ITEM 14. 3. SLOPE 3/4" ANGLE VALVE, 12 ITEM 9, DOWN TOWARD BACK OF VALVE TO FACILITATE SUFFICIENT LOW BODY DRAINAGE. 4. ALL FITTINGS AND NIPPLES ARE GALVANIZED. 5. CH: COMMON HARDWARE 6. ITEMS 45-48 INCLUDED ONLY IN PRE -TRIMMED VALVE ASSEMBLIES AS APPLICABLE; OTHERWISE SEPARATELY ORDERED. 14 41 4 INCH (DN100) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE (FxG SHOWN) NO. DESCRIPTION QTY P/N 1 250 psi/ 1750 kPa Air Pressure Gauge 1 92-343-1-012 2 300 psi/ 2000 kPa Water Pressure Gauge 1 92-343-1-005 3 1/4" Gauge Test Valve 2 46-005-1-002 .4 1/4" Pressure Relief Valve 1 92-343-1-020 5 1/2" Angle Valve 1 46-048-1-004 6 Model AD -1 Automatic Drain Valve 1 52-793-2-004 7 1/2" Ball Valve 1 46-050-1-004 8 1/2" Swing Check Valve 1 46-049-1-004 9 3/4" Angle Valve 1 46-048-1-005 10 3/4" Swing Check Valve 1 46-049-1-005 11 2" Angle Valve 1 46-048-1-009 12 Drip Funnel Connector 1 92-211-1-005 13 Drip Funnel Bracket 1 92-211-1-003 14 Drip Funnel 1 92-343-1-007 15 3/32" Vent Fitting 1 92-032-1-002 16 1/4" Tube, 24" Long 1 CH 17 1/4" Plug 2 CH 18 1/2" Plug 2 CH 19 3/4" Plug 1 CH 20 1" Plug 1 CH 28 35 32 NO. DESCRIPTION QTY P/N 21 1/2" x 1/4" Reducing Bushing 1 CH 22 1/2" Union 1 CH 23 3/4" Union 1 CH 24 1/2" 90° Elbow 1 CH 25 1/2" 45° Elbow 1 CH 26 1/2" Cross 1 CH 27 1/2" Tee 2 CH 28 1/2" x 1/4" x 1/2" Reducing Tee 2 CH 29 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/4" Reducing Tee 1 CH 30 3/4" x 1/2" x 3/4" Reducing Tee 3 CH 311"x1"x1/2" Reducing Tee 1 CH PIPE NIPPLES: 32 1/4" x 3" 2 CH 33 1/2" x Close 2 CH 34 1/2" x'1-1/2" 7 CH 35 1/2" x 2" 1 CH 36 1/2" x 2-1/2" 1 CH 37 1/2" x 3" 1 CH 38 1/2" x 3-1/2" 1 CH 39 3/4" x Close 2 CH 40 3/4" x 1-1/2" 2 CH 11 44 NO. DESCRIPTION QTY P/N 41 3/4" x 2" 1 CH 42 3/4" x 3" 1 CH 43 1" x4" 1 CH 44 2" x 4-1/2" 1 CH COMPONENTS INCLUDED ONLY IN PRE -TRIMMED VALVE ASSEMBLIES: 45 Model BFV-300 Butterfly Valve, 4" (DN100) 1 59300G040NS 46 Butterfy Valve Assembly Component: GxG DPV-1 Valves, Figure 577 Coupling, 4" (DN100) 1 57740ACP FxF, FxG DPV-1 Valves, Figure 71 Flange Adapter, 4" (DN100) 1 7140S 47 Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch, Model PS10-2 1 25710 48 Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch, Model PS40-2 1 25730 FIGURE 5- PART 3OF3 4 INCH (DN100) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE EXPLODED ARRANGEMENT OF VALVE TRIM TFP1020 Page 12 of 20 NOTES: 1. SEE FIGURE 6 PART 3 FOR TRIM ARRANGEMENT WITH BILL OF MATERIALS AND COMPONENT PART NUMBERS. 2. TRIM SHOWN FULLY ASSEMBLED; COMPONENTS SUCH AS GAUGES AND SWITCHES MAY REQUIRE ASSEMBLY IN TRIM AT INSTALLATION. 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY 1 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR LOCAL SPRINKLER DRIP FUNNEL MAIN DRAIN VALVE (NORMALLY 2 INCH NPT CLOSED) CONNECTION TO DRAIN SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE GAUGE 6 INCH (DN150) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE (GxG SHOWN) SYSTEM WATER SUPPLY . PRESSURE GAUGE GROOVED COUPLING OR FLANGE ADAPTER LOW AIR PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY CONTROL VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN) ALARM TEST VALVE SYSTEM (NORMALLY / WATERFLOW SHUT-OFF CLOSED) 3/4 INCH NPT PRESSURE VALVE CONNECTION ALARM (NORMALLY FOR WATER SWITCH OPEN) MOTOR ALARM FIGURE 6 - PART 1 OF 3 6 INCH (DN150) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE PRE -TRIMMED ASSEMBLY LOW BODY DRAIN VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVE 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR OPTIONAL ACCELERATOR 1-1/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR OPTIONAL SYSTEM AIR PRESSURE AIR SUPPLY SWITCH PRESSURE GAUGE 1 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR LOCAL - SPRINKLER MAIN DRAIN VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR SYSTEM AIR SUPPLY AIR SUPPLY CONTROL VALVE (NORMALLY X11) «' 03, c07 OPEN) isT NOTES: 4. SLOPE 3/4" ANGLE VALVE AND 3/4" x 4-1/2" NIPPLE (OF ASSEMBLY B) INTO DRIP FUNNEL TO FACILITATE SUFFICIENT LOW BODY DRAINAGE. LOW BODY DRAIN VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) 01 2 INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN NOTES: 1. INSTALL TRIM ASSEMBLIES IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER. 2. SEE FIGURE 3 FOR VALVE PORT IDENTIFICATION. 3. ROUTE 1/4" TUBING TO DRIP FUNNEL. 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR OPTIONAL ACCELERATOR AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVE DRIP FUNNEL —,� SLOPE TO FIT 1/2 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR WATERFLOW PRESSURE ALARM SWITCH 3/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION FOR WATER MOTOR ALARM D 6 INCH (DN150) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE (FxF SHOWN) 1-1/4 INCH NPT CONNECTION TO DRAIN SYSTEM WATER SUPPLY PRESSURE GAUGE FIGURE 6- PART 2OF3 6 INCH (DN150) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE EXPLODED ARRANGEMENT OF SEMI -ASSEMBLED TRIM ALARM TEST VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) TFP1020 Page 13 of 20 42 14 BACK OF VALVE 29 35 NOTES: 1. SEE FIGURE 3 FOR VALVE PORT IDENTIFICATION. 5 SLOPE TO FIT 1 17 2. ROUTE 1/4" TUBING, ITEM 16, TO DRIP FUNNEL, ITEM 14. 3. SLOPE 3/4" ANGLE VALVE, ITEM 9, AND 3/4" x 4-1/2" NIPPLE, ITEM 42, INTO DRIP FUNNEL, ITEM 14, TO 40 FACILITATE SUFFICIENT 15 LOW BODY DRAINAGE. (GREEN 18 TINT) 4. ALL FITTINGS AND NIPPLES ARE GALVANIZED. 5. 6. 35 27 CH: COMMON HARDWARE ITEMS 45-48 INCLUDED ONLY IN PRE -TRIMMED VALVE ASSEMBLIES AS APPLICABLE; OTHERWISE SEPARATELY ORDERED. 16 35 28 31 37 40 31 10 47 LOCATION FOR OPTIONAL ELECTRICALLY SUPERVISED N.O. ALARM CONTROL VALVE 19 41 6 INCH (DN150) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE (GxG SHOWN) NO. DESCRIPTION QTY P/N 1 250 psi/ 1750 kPa Air Pressure Gauge 1 92-343-1-012 2 300 psi/ 2000 kPa i Water Pressure Gauge 1 92-343-1-005 3 1/4" Gauge Test Valve 2 46-005-1-002 4 1/4" Pressure Relief Valve 1 92-343-1-020 5 1/2" Angle Valve 1 46-048-1-004 6 Model AD -1 Automatic Drain Valve 1 52-793-2-004 7 1/2" Ball Valve ... 1 46-050-1-004 8 1/2" Swing Check Valve 1 46-049-1-004 9 3/4" Angle Valve .. 1 46-048-1-005 10 3/4" Swing Check Valve 1 46-049-1-005 11 2" Angle Valve 1 46-048-1-009 12 Drip Funnel Connector 1 92-211-1-005 13 Drip Funnel Bracket 1 92-211-1-003 14 Drip Funnel 1 92-343-1-007 15 3/32" Vent Fitting 1 92-032-1-002 16 1/4" Tube, 24" Long 1 CH 17 1/4" Plug 2 CH 18 1/2" Plug 2 CH 19 3/4" Plug 1 CH 20 1" Plug 1 CH 21 1/2" x 1/4" Reducing Bushing 1 CH 22 1/2" Union 1 CH 23 3/4" Union 1 CH 24 1/2" 90° Elbow 1 CH 46 45 17 3 33 NO. DESCRIPTION QTY 25 1/2" 45° Elbow 26 1/2" Cross 27 1/2" Tee 28 1/2" x 1/4" x 1/2" Reducing Tee 29 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/4" Reducing Tee 30 3/4" 90° Elbow 31 3/4" x 1/2" x 3/4" Reducing Tee 321"x1"x1/2" Reducing Tee PIPE NIPPLES: 33 1/4" x 3" 34 1/2" x Close P/N 1 CH 1 CH 2 CH 2 CH 1 CH 1 CH 3 CH 1 CH 2 CH 1 CH 25 34 24 NO. DESCRIPTION QTY P/N 35 1/2" x 1-1/2" 8 CH 36 1/2" x 2" 1 CH 37 1/2" x 2-1/2" 1 CH 38 1/2" x 3" 1 CH 39 1/2" x 6" 1 CH 40 3/4" x 1-1/2" 5 CH 41 3/4" x 2" 1 CH 42 3/4" x 4-1/2" 2 CH 431°x4" 1 CH 44 2" x 4-1/2" 1 CH COMPONENTS INCLUDED ONLY IN PRE -TRIMMED VALVE ASSEMBLIES: 45 Model BFV-300 Butterfly Valve, 6" (DN150) 1 59300G060NS 46 Butterfy Valve Assembly Component: GxG DPV-1 Valves, Figure 577 Coupling, 6" (DN150) 1 57760ACP FxF, FxG DPV-1 Valves, Figure 71 Flange Adapter, 6" (DN150) 1 7160S 47 Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch, Model PS10-2 1 25710 48 Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch, Model PS40-2 1 25730 FIGURE 6 - PART 3 OF 3 6 INCH (DN150) MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE EXPLODED ARRANGEMENT OF VALVE TRIM TFP1020 Page 14 of 20 7-1/8" (180 mm) 8-3/8" (213 mm) 12" (300 mm) 20-7/16" (520 mm) 16-1 /8" (409,6 mm) 2-1/2 or 3 INCH VALVES 9-5/8" (245 mm) 9-1/4" (235 mm) 2-1/2 & 3 INCH (DN65 & DN80) VALVE 4 INCH (DN100) VALVE FxF: 18-3/16" (462 mm) FxG: 18-1/4" (464 mm) GxG: 18-5/16" (465 mm) 6 INCH (DN150) VALVE FIGURE 7 - PART 1 OF 2 MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS, PRE -TRIMMED VALVE TFP102O Page 15 of 20 6-3/4" (170 mm) 8" (200 mm) 12" (300 mm) 6" (150 mm) 16-9/16" (420,7 mm) 12-1/4" (311,2 mm) 2-1/2 or 3 INCH VALVES 6" (150 mm) f 9-1/4" (235 mm) 2-1/2 & 3 INCH (DN65 & DN80) VALVE 11-1/2" 7-1/4" (190 mm) (290 mm) 17-1/4" (440 mm) FxF: 13-5/8' (346,1 mm) FxG: 13-11/16" (347,7 mm) GxG: 13-3/4" (349,3 mm) 2-1/2" (65 mm) 1 18-3/4" (475 mm) 16" (406,4 mm) FxF, FxG, or GxG 4-1/2" (115 mm) f 4 INCH (DN 100) VALVE FIGURE 7 - PART 2 OF 2 • MODEL DPV-1 DRY PIPE VALVE INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS, VALVE AND SEMI -ASSEMBLED TRIM TFP1O2O Page 16 of 20 Installation General Instructions Proper operation of the Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve depends upon its trim being installed in accordance with the instructions given in this Technical Data Sheet. Failure to follow the appropriate trim diagram may prevent the DPV-1 Valve from functioning properly, as well as void listings, approvals, and the manufacturer's warranties. Failure to latch open the Clapper Assembly prior to a system hydro- static test may result in damage to the Clapper Assembly. The DPV-1 Valve must be installed in a readily visible and accessible location. The DPV-1 Valve and associated trim must be maintained at a minimum tem- perature of 40°F (4°C). Heat tracing of the DPV-1 Valve or its associated trim is not permitted. Heat tracing can result in the formation of hardened mineral deposits that are capable of preventing proper operation. The Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve is to be installed in accordance with the fol- lowing criteria: • All nipples, fittings, and devices must be clean and free of scale and burrs before installation. Use pipe thread sealant sparingly on male pipe threads only. • The DPV-1 Valve must be trimmed in accordance with Figures 4, 5, or 6, as applicable. If the DPV-1 is to be equipped with a Dry Pipe Valve Accelerator, refer to the Technical Data Sheet TFP1105 for the VIZOR Electronic Dry Pipe Valve Accel- erator or TFP1112 for the Model ACC -1 Mechanical Dry Pipe Valve Accelerator. • Care must be taken to make sure that check valves, strainers, globe valves, etc. are installed with the flow arrows in the proper direction. • Drain tubing to the drip funnel must be installed with smooth bends that will not restrict flow. • The main drain and drip funnel drain may be interconnected provided a check valve is located at least 12 inches (300 mm) below the drip fun- nel. The Low Body Drain Valve (Fig- ure 4, 5, or 6) may be piped so as to discharge into the Drip Funnel or to a separate drain. • Suitable provision must be made for disposal of drain water. Drainage water must be directed such that it will not cause accidental damage to property or danger to persons. • Unused pressure alarm switch and/ or water motor alarm connections must be plugged. • The Pressure Relief Valve provided with the Valve Trim is factory set to relieve at a pressure of approximately 45 psi (3,1 bar), which can typically be used for a maximum normal sys- tem air pressure of 40 psi (2,8 bar). The Pressure Relief Valve may be reset to a lower or higher pressure; however, it must be reset to relieve at a pressure which is in accordance with the requirements of the author- ity having jurisdiction. To reset the Pressure Relief Valve, first loosen the jam nut and then adjust the cap accordingly — clockwise for a higher pressure setting or counter -clockwise for a lower pressure setting. After veri- fying the desired pressure setting, tighten the jam nut. • Installation of an Air Maintenance Device, as described in the Techni- cal Data Section, is recommended. • An Inspector's Test Connection as required By NFPA 13 must be pro- vided on the system piping at the most remote location from the Model DPV-1 Valve. • Conduit and electrical connections are to be made in accordance with the requirements of the author- ity having jurisdiction and/or the National Electric Code. • Before a system hydrostatic test is performed in accordance with NFPA 13 system acceptance test require- ments, the Clapper Assembly is to be manually latched open (Ref. Fig- ure 3D); the Automatic Drain Valve (Figure 4, 5, or 6) is to be temporar- ily replaced with a 1/2 inch NPT plug, the 3/32 inch Vent Fitting (Item 13, Figure 4; Item 15, Figure 5; or Item 15, Figure 6) is to be temporarily replaced with a 1/4 inch NPT plug, and the Handhole Cover Bolts are to be tightened using a cross -draw sequence. Valve Setting Procedure Steps 1 through 11 are to be performed when initially setting the Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve; after an operational test of the fire protection system; or, after system operation due to a fire. NOTES: If the DPV-1 is equipped with a Dry Pipe Valve Accelerator, refer to its resetting instructions before reset- ting the DPV-1. Refer to TFP1105 for the VIZOR or TFP1112 for the ACC -1. Based on the instructions provided, reset the Accelerator at the appropriate time during the resetting of the DPV-1. Unless otherwise noted, refer to Figure 4, 5, or 6 to identify functional trim components. Step 1. Close the Main Control Valve, and close the Air Supply Control Valve. If the DPV-1 is equipped with a Dry Pipe Valve Accelerator, remove the Dry Pipe Valve Accelerator from service in accordance with its Technical Data Sheet (Refer to TFP1105 for the VIZOR or TFP1112 for the ACC -1). Step 2. Open the Main Drain Valve and all auxiliary drains in the system. Close the auxiliary drain valves after water ceases to discharge. Leave the Main Drain Valve open. Step 3. Depress the plunger of the Automatic Drain Valve to verify that it is open and that the DPV-1 Valve is com- pletely drained. Step 4. Open the Optional Alarm Control Valve, as applicable, if it was closed to silence local alarms. Step 5. As necessary, replace all sprin- klers that have operated. Replacement sprinklers must be of the same type and temperature rating as those which have operated. NOTICE In order to prevent the possibility of a subsequent operation of an over- heated solder type sprinkler, any solder type sprinklers which were possibly exposed to a temperature greater than their maximum rated ambient must be replaced. Step 6. Push down on the Reset Knob (Figure 3E) to allow the Clapper Assem- bly to re -seat. Step 7. Pressurize the system with air (or nitrogen) to 10 psi (0,7 bar), and then individually open all auxiliary drain valves in the system piping to drain any remaining water in trapped sec- tions. Close each drain valve as soon as water ceases to discharge. Also partially open the Low Body Drain Valve to assure that the riser is com- pletely drained. Close the Low Body Drain Valve as soon as water ceases to discharge. Step 8. Refer to Table B and then restore the system to the normal system air pressure as necessary to hold the DPV-1 Valve closed. Step 9. Depress the plunger on the Automatic Drain Valve to make sure it is open and that there is no air discharging. The absence of air discharging from the Automatic Drain Valve is an indica- tion of a properly set air seat within the DPV-1 Valve. If air is discharging, refer to the Care and Maintenance section under Automatic Drain Valve Inspection to determine/correct the cause of the leakage problem. Step 10. Partially open the Main Control Valve. Slowly close the Main Drain Valve as soon as water dis- charges from the drain connection. Depress the plunger on the Automatic Drain Valve to make sure that it is open and that there is no water discharging. The absence of water discharging from the Automatic Drain Valve is an indica- tion of a properly set water seat within the DPV-1 Valve. If water is discharg- ing, refer to the Care and Maintenance section under the Automatic Drain Valve Inspection to determine/correct the cause of the leakage problem. If there are no leaks, the DPV-1 Valve is ready to be placed in service and the Main Control Valve must then be fully opened. Note: After setting a fire protection system, notify the proper authorities and advise those responsible for moni- toring proprietary and/or central station alarms. Step 11. Once a week after a valve is reset following an operational test or system operation, the Low Body Drain Valve (and any low point drain valves) should be partially opened (and then subsequently closed) to relieve drain - back water. Continue this procedure until drain -back water is no longer present. Care and Maintenance The following procedures and inspec- tions should be performed as indicated, in addition to any specific requirements of the NFPA, and any impairment must be immediately corrected. Before closing a fire protection system main control valve for maintenance work on the fire protection system that it controls, permission to shut down the affected fire protection system must be obtained from the proper authorities and notify all personnel who may be affected by action. The owner is responsible for the inspection, testing, and maintenance of their fire protection system and devices in compliance with this document, as well as with the applicable standards of the National Fire Protection Associa- tion (e.g., NFPA 25), in addition to the standards of any authority having juris- diction. Contact the installing contrac- tor or sprinkler manufacturer regarding any questions. Automatic sprinkler systems are rec- ommended to be inspected, tested, and maintained by a qualified Inspec- tion Service in accordance with local requirements and/or national codes. The operational test procedure and waterflow pressure alarm test pro- cedure will result in operation of the associated alarms. Consequently, notification must first be given to the owner and the fire department, central station, or other signal station to which the alarms are connected. Annual Operation Test Procedure Note: Unless otherwise noted, refer to Figure 4, 5, or 6 to identify functional trim components. Proper operation of the DPV-1 Valve (i.e., opening of the DPV-1 Valve during a fire condition) should be verified at least once a year as follows: Step 1. If water must be prevented from flowing beyond the riser, perform the following steps. • Close the Main Control Valve. • Open the Main Drain Valve. • Open the Main Control Valve one turn beyond the position at which water just begins to flow from the Main Drain Valve. • Close the Main Drain Valve. Step 2. Open the system's Inspector's Test Connection. Step 3. Verify that the DPV-1 Valve has operated, as indicated by the flow of water into the system and that all waterflow alarms operate properly. Step 4. Close the system's Main Control Valve. Step 5. Reset the DPV-1 Valve in accordance with the Valve Setting Procedure. Note: It is recommended that the requirement of NFPA 25 to annually inspect the inside of the valve be per- formed at this time and prior to reset- ting the DPV-1 Valve. Refer to the Automatic Drain Valve Inspection sub- section Steps 2 through 5 for instruc- tions with regard to the inspection of the Clapper Facing. Quarterly Waterflow Alarm Test Procedure Testing of the system waterflow alarms should be performed quarterly. To test the waterflow alarm, open the Alarm Test Valve, which will allow a flow of water to the Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch and/or Water Motor Alarm. Upon satisfactory completion of the test, close the Alarm Test Valve. TFP1O2O Page 17 of 20 Water Pressure Inspection The Water Pressure Gauge is to be inspected monthly (per NFPA 25) to ensure that normal system water pres- sure is being maintained. Air Pressure Inspection The Air Pressure Gauge is to be inspected monthly (per NFPA 25) to ensure that normal system air pressure is being maintained. Automatic Drain Valve Inspection The Automatic Drain Valve should be inspected monthly (per NFPA 25) by depressing the plunger and check- ing to ensure that the Automatic Drain Valve is not discharging water and/or air. A discharge of water and/or air is an indication that the air and/or water seats are leaking, which could subse- quently cause a false operation should the intermediate chamber become inadvertently pressurized. If leakage is present, take the DPV-1 Valve out of service (i.e., close the main control valve, open the main drain valve, close the air supply control valve, remove the Dry Pipe Valve Accelerator from service, as applicable, in accor- dance with its Technical Data Sheet (Refer to TFP1105 for the VIZOR or TFP1112 for the ACC -1), and open the Inspector's Test Connection to relieve the system air pressure to 0 psig as indicated on the System Air Pressure Gauge), and then after removing the Handhole Cover, perform the follow- ing steps: Step 1. Make sure that the Seat Ring is clean and free of any nicks or signifi- cant scratches. Step 2. Remove the Clapper Assem- bly from the valve by first pulling out the Hinge Pin. Step 3. Disassemble the Clapper Facing Retainer from the Clapper so that the Clapper Facing can be removed and inspected. Make sure that the Clapper Facing does not show signs of compression set, damage, etc. Replace the Clapper Facing if there is any signs of wear. Step 4. Clean the Clapper Facing, Clapper, and Clapper Facing Retainer, and then reassemble the Clapper Assembly. Step 5. Reinstall the Clapper Assembly with its Hinge Pin and then reinstall the Handhole Cover. TFP1020 Page 18 of 20 Limited Warranty For warranty terms and conditions, visit www.tyco-fire.com. Ordering Procedure Refer to Table A for Flange Drilling Specifications. Standard DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve (American Standard Flange Drilling, Threaded Ports, and Groove Outside Diameter, as applicable) Specify: (specify size) Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve with (specify Inlet x Outlet) end connections, P/N (specify). 2-1/2 Inch (DN65) GxG, 2.88 inch (73,1 mm) O.D. Groove x 2.88 inch (73,1 mm) O.D. Groove 52-310-1-925 3 Inch (DN80) GxG, 3.50 inch (88,9 mm) O.D. Groove x 3.50 inch (88,9 mm) O.D Groove .... 52-310-1-930 4 Inch (DN100) GxG, 4.50 inch (114,3 mm) O.D. Groove x 4.50 inch (114,3 mm) O.D. Groove .... 52-310-1-940 FxG, ANSI Drilled Flange x 4.50 inch (114,3 mm) O.D. Groove .... 52-310-1-440 FxF, ANSI Drilled Flange x ANSI Drilled Flanged .. 52-310-1-040 6 Inch (DN150) GxG, 6.62 inch (168,3 mm) O.D. Groove x 6.62 inch (168,3 mm) O.D. Groove .... 52-310-1-960 FxG, ANSI Drilled Flange x 6.62 inch (168,3 mm) O.D. Groove .... 52-310-1-460 FxF, ANSI Drilled Flange x ANSI Drilled Flanged .. 52-310-1-060 Pre -Trimmed DPV-1 Assemblies with Butterfly Valve Specify: 2-1/2 Inch DPV-1 Pre Trimmed Valve Assembly, P/N 52-310-3-925 Specify: 3 Inch DPV-1 Pre -Trimmed Valve Assembly, P/N 52-310-3-930 Specify: 4 Inch DPV-1 Pre -Trimmed Valve Assembly, P/N (specify) FxF 52-310-3-040 FxG 52-310-3-440 GxG 52-310-3-940 Specify: 6 Inch DPV-1 Pre -Trimmed Valve Assembly, P/N (specify) FxF 52-310-3-060 FxG 52-310-3-460 GxG 52-310-3-960 Pre -Trimmed DPV-1 Assemblies without Butterfly Valve Specify: 4 Inch DVP-1 Pre -Trimmed Valve Assembly without Butterfly, P/N (specify) FxF 52-310-4-040 FxG 52-310-4-440 Specify: 6 Inch DVP-1 Pre -Trimmed Valve Assembly without Butterfly, P/N (specify) FxF 52-310-4-060 FxG 52-310-4-460 Standard Galvanized Semi -Assembled DPV-1 Trim Specify: 2-1/2 and 3 Inch DPV-1 Semi - Assembled Galvanized Trim, P/N 52-309-2-005. Specify: 4 Inch DPV-1 Semi -Assembled Galvanized Trim, P/N 52-309-2-001 Specify: 6 Inch DPV-1 Semi -Assembled Galvanized Trim, P/N 52-309-2-002 Optional Accelerator VIZOR Electronic Dry Pipe Accelerator (with Trim) (Details provided in TFP1105) Specify: VIZOR Electronic Dry Pipe Accelerator for use with the 4 or 6 inch TYCO Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve trim, P/N 52-312-3-001 Model ACC -1 Mechanical Accelerator (Details provided in TFP1112) Specify: Model ACC -1 Dry Pipe Accelerator, P/N 52-311-1-001, and Galvanized Accelerator Trim for Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve, P/N 52-311-2-010 Optional 600 PSI Water Pressure Gauge Specify: 600 PSI Water Pressure Gauge, P/N 92-343-1-004 Accessories Order the Technical Data Sheets for the following, as applicable, for details and additional accessories: Model PS10-2 Potter Electric Waterflow Pressure Alarm Switch P/N 25710 Model PS40-2 Potter Electric Low Air Pressure Alarm Switch P/N 25730 • Model WMA -1 Water Motor Alarm P/N 52-630-1-001 Model AMD -1 Air Maintenance Device P/N 52-324-2-002 Model AMD -2 Air Maintenance Device P/N 52-326-2-001 Model AMD -3 Nitrogen Maintenance Device - P/N 52-328-2-001 Replacement Valve Parts Specify: (description) for use with (specify size) Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve, P/N (see Figure 1 Parts 1 and 2 as applicable). Replacement Trim Parts Specify: (description) for use with (specify size) Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve, P/N (Figures 4, 5, or 6, Part 3 as applicable). Weights The following are the nominal weights for the valves and trim: Pre -Trimmed DPV-1 Valve Assemblies: 2-1/2 Inch (DN65) GxG Dry Pipe Valve 871bs (40kg) 3 Inch (DN80) GxG Dry Pipe Valve 901bs (42kg) 4 Inch (DN100) GxG Dry Pipe Valve ... 1211bs.(56kg) 4 Inch (DN100) FxG Dry Pipe Valve 1351bs (64kg) 4 Inch (DN100) FxF Dry Pipe Valve 145bs (69kg) 6 Inch (DN150) GxG Dry Pipe Valve 1751bs (81kg) 6 Inch (DN150) FxG Dry Pipe Valve 195lbs (90kg) 6 Inch(DN150) FxF Dry Pipe Valve 2081bs (96kg) Standard Galvanized Semi -Assembled DPV-1 Trim: 2-1/2 Inch (DN65) Valve Trim 231bs (11kg) 3 Inch (DN80) Valve Trim 231bs (11kg) 4 Inch (DN100) Valve Trim 301bs (14kg) 6 Inch (DN150) Valve Trim 301bs (1414 DPV-1 Valve: 2-1/2 Inch (DN65) GxG Dry Pipe Valve 371bs (17kg) 3 Inch (DN80) GxG Dry Pipe Valve 381bs (18kg) 4 Inch (DN100) GxG Dry Pipe Valve 571bs (26kg) 4 Inch (DN100) FxG Dry Pipe Valve 67lbs (31kg) 4 Inch (DN100) FxF Dry Pipe Valve 771bs (36kg) 6 Inch (DN150) GxG Dry Pipe Valve 951bs (44kg) 6 Inch (DN150) FxG Dry Pipe Valve 108Ibs (50kg) 6 Inch(DN150) FxF Dry Pipe Valve 121Ibs (56kg) Other DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valves Notes: Other DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valves are valves ordered with a any com- bination of flange, threaded ports, or groove outside diameter not offered under "Standard DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve" offerings. Valves with NPT threaded ports are intended for use with the "Standard Galvanized Semi -Assembled DPV-1 Valve Trim" offered and detailed in this document. Valves with ISO threaded ports are intended for use with special order trim that is provided by local dis- tributors to meet the specific needs of certain localities. Please contact your local distributor regarding valves and valve trim for specific localities. Specify: (specify size) Model DPV-1 Dry Pipe Valve with (specify inlet x outlet) connections with (specify NPT or ISO) threaded ports, P/N (specify). Part Numbers For Other 2-1/2 Inch (DN65) Dry Pipe Valves Valves with NPT Ports GxG, 3.00"(76,1 mm) Outside Dia. Groove x 3.00" (76,1 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-930 Valves with ISO Ports GxG, 2.88"(73,0 mm) Outside Dia. Groove x 2.88" (73,0 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-920 GxG, 3.00"(76,1 mm) Outside Dia. Groove x 3.00" (76,1 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-940 Part Numbers For Other 3 Inch (DN80) Dry Pipe Valves Valves with ISO Ports GxG, 3.50"(88,9 mm) Outside Dia. Groove x 3.50" (88,9 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-922 Part Numbers For Other 4 Inch (DN100) Dry Pipe Valves Valves with NPT Ports FxG, ISO Flange x 4.50" (114,3 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-253 FxG, AS Flange x 4.50" (114,3 mm Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-613 FxG, JIS Flange x 4.50" (114,3 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-813 FxF, ISO Flange x ISO Flange P/N 52-309-1-133 FxF, AS Flange x AS Flange P/N 52-309-1-513 FxF, JIS Flange x JIS Flange P/N 52-309-1-713 Valves with ISO Ports GxG, 4.50"(114,3 mm) Outside Dia. Groove x 4.50" (114,3 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-923 FxG, ISO Flange x 4.50" (114,3 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-213 FxF, ISO Flange x ISO Flange P/N 52-309-1-113 Part Numbers For Other 6 Inch (DN150) Dry Pipe Valves Valves with NPT Ports GxG, 6.50"(165,1 mm) Outside Dia. Groove x 6.50" (165,1 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-935 FxG, ANSI Flange x 6.50" (165,1 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-435 FxG, ISO Flange x 6.62" (168,3 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-255 TFP1020 Page 19 of 20 FxG, ISO Flange x 6.50" (165,1 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-335 FxG, AS Flange x 6.62" (168,3 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-615 FxG, AS Flange x 6.50" (165,1 mm Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-635 FxG, JIS Flange x 6.62" (168,3 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-815 FxG, JIS Flange x 6.50" (165,1 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-835 FxF, ISO Flange x ISO Flange P/N 52-309-1-135 FxF, AS Flange x AS Flange P/N 52-309-1-515 FxF, JIS Flange x JIS Flange P/N 52-309-1-715 Valves with ISO Ports GxG, 6.62"(168,3 mm) Outside Dia. Groove x 6.62"(168,3 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-925 GxG, 6.50"(165,1 mm) Outside Dia. Groove x 6.50"(165,1 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-945 FxG, ISO Flange x 6.62"(168,3 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-215 FxG, ISO Flange x 6.50"(165,1 mm) Outside Dia. Groove P/N 52-309-1-315 FxF, ISO Flange x ISO Flange P/N 52-309-1-115 TFP1020 Page 20 of 20 GLOBAL HEADQUARTERS 11400 Pennbrook Parkway, Lansdale, PA 194461 Telephone +1-215-362-0700 Copyright © 2016 Tyco Fire Products, LP. All rights reserved. VICO Fire Protection Products ICAL PD] F I CAIIONS Flexible Sprinkler Drops Braided Flexible Sprinkler Connection Data Sheet EASYFLEX Flexible Sprinkler Drops are designed to significantly reduce labor and installation costs. By eliminating the need for pipe cutting and midline connections, you save valuable time and money. Easyflex flexible sprinkler connections offer braided and unbraided flexible hoses in 2',3',4',5', and 6' with top loading or front loading brackets for variety of ceiling and wall applications: T -Bars, metal studs, hat channels, wood beams, concrete sidewalls, and more. The system is qualified to be installed at commercial, hotel, retail, restaurants, cultural, entertainment, educational, government, healthcare, and religious buildings. EASYFLEX Flexible Sprinkler Drops Appliance Standards National Fire Protection Association (NEPA): • NFPA 13: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems • NFPA 13D: Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in One and Two -Family Dwellings and Manufactured Homes • NFPA 13R: Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems in residential Occupancies up to and including four stones in height • NFPA 13 Section 9.2.1.3.3.3 : No hangers are required for flexible connections as long as the length does not exceed 6ft. American Society for Testing and Methods (ASTM): • ASTM C635: Standard specifications for the manufacture, performance, and testing of metal suspension systems for acoustical tile and lay -in panel ceilings • ASTM C636: Standard practice for installation of metal ceiling suspension systems for acoustical tile and lay -in panels Factory Mutual (FM), FM Class No, 1637: • Approved standard for flexible sprinkler hose with threaded end fittings Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), UL 2443: • Standard for flexible sprinkler hose with fittings for fire protection service International Building Code (IBC) Section 1621 / American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 7 9.6.2.6.2 & 9.6.2.6.2.2: • Flexible Sprinkler Connections are an alternative solution to install without seismic escutcheons Job Name : Engineer / Architect : Job Location : Wholesaler : Submittal Date : Contractor : WEST OFFICE Toll Free (888) 577-8999 • info@easyflexusa.com EAST OFFICE Toll Free (855) 388-2600 • info@easyflexeast.com FASYFLff TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BRAIDED FLEXIBLE HOSE 3 2 .� awe 11000101114 i I�I�I�I�I�I�I i• .AI.I.I.AAI. ‘0111#1141110 \\NNSSNX,NN I.I.I.I.I.I. , 11411 1111111111111111111 4" 1. TUBE 2. ISOLATION RING 3. SEALING GASKET 4. NUT 5. NIPPLE (1") 6. REDUCER 7. BRAID 8. PRESS RING (INNER) 9. PRESS RING (OUTER) SPECIFICATIONS Lengths Available 24", 36", 48", 60" and 72" Outlet 1/2" or 3/4" Hose Type Braided Max. Ambient Temperature Rating 225°F Max. Working Pressure Rating 175 psig * No hangers and seismic escutcheons required *Required torque to assemble reducer and nipple with the flexible hose : 50 ft -lb c LISTED FRICTION LOSS DATA US EFB Series Braided Hose TBS Bracket Systems Hose Stainless Steel 304 Nut & Nipple Zinc -Plated Steel Sealing Gasket / Isolation Ring EPDM/ NYLON Minimum Bend Radius 4" (UUULC) and 8" (FM) * DO NOT bend within 2.52 inches from connection nuts Connection Inlet 1"NPT Outlet 1/2" or 3/4"NPT Length (in.) Outlet Connection K -Factor Max. Number of 90° Bends Equivalent Length of 1 in. Schedule 40 Pipe, ft. 24" 1/2" 5.6 1 18 3/4" 8.0 1 18 36" 1/2" 5.6 2 31 3/4" 8.0 2 34 (48") (i/2) 4j (5.6 3 3/4" 8.0 3 51 60" 1/2" 5.6 4 60 3/4" 8.0 4 65 72" 1/2" 5.6 4 71 3/4" 8.0 4 72 * UL: 4" minimum bend radius, where C=120 WEST OFFICE Toll Free (888) 577-8999 • info@easyflexusa.com EAST OFFICE Toll Free (855) 388-2600 • info@easyflexeast.com EASVFLE2C TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BRAIDED FLEXIBLE HOSE 3 2 .cu 110111101111#11 I.AAI.AAAI iiiimputtIiIl $ romm, 1. TUBE 2. ISOLATION RING 3. SEALING GASKET 4. NUT 5. NIPPLE (1") 6. REDUCER 7. BRAID 8. PRESS RING (INNER) 9. PRESS RING (OUTER) SPECIFICATIONS Lengths Available 24", 36", 48", 60" and 72" Outlet 1/2" or 3/4" Hose Type Braided . 1/2" or 3/4"NPT Max. Ambient Temperature Rating 225°F Max. Working Pressure Rating 175 psig No hangers and seismic escutcheons required ' Required torque to assemble reducer and nipple with the flexible hose : 50 ft -lb APPROVED FRICTION LOSS DATA EFB Series Braided Hose OGSB, TBS Bracket Systems Hose Stainless Steel 304 Nut & Nipple Zinc -Plated Steel Sealing Gasket / Isolation Ring EPDM/ NYLON Minimum Bend Radius 4" (UL/ULC) and 8" (FM) ' DO NOT bend within 2.52 inches from connection nuts Connection Inlet 1 "NPT Outlet 1/2" or 3/4"NPT Length (in.) . Outlet Connection K -Factor Max. Number of 90° Bends Equivalent Length of 1 in. Schedule 40 Pipe, ft. 24" 1/2" 5.6 1 27.0 3/4" 8.0 1 18.6 36" 1/2" 5.6 2 37.4 3/4" 8.0 2 30.4 (48".) C1' /2" 0.6 3 54.9} 3/4" 8.0 3 48.3 60" 1/2" 5.6 4 72.5 3/4" 8.0 4 66.2 72" 1/2" 5.6 4 90.5 3/4" 8.0 4 83.0 ' FM: 8" minimum bend radius, where C=120 WEST OFFICE Toll Free (888) 577-8999 • info@easyflexusa.com EAST OFFICE Toll Free (8551 388-2600 • infoeeasvflexeast r -nm FIRE SPRINKLER CORPORATION SPRINKLER CABINETS FOR REPLACEMENT AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS SIX SPRINKLER CABINET FOR 1/2" OR 3/4" SPRINKLERS P/N 312390 (TWELVE SPRINKLER CABINET! FOR W' OR 3/4" SPRINKLERS') (157N-3123921 When storing concealed sprinklers, Twelve Sprinkler Cabinet holds six units and Six Sprinkler Cabinet holds three units. 989-846-4583 1-800-248-0278 AUGUST2002 4077 AI RPARK DRIVE, STANDISH, MICHIGAN 48658 B-5 FAX 989-846-9231 www.globesprinkler.com BULLETIN SPRCAB, REV. #2 Identification Signs Description Manufactured from .020" white coated aluminum. All sign types are screen printed with a fade resistant red ink. Each sign is shipped with a clear protective plastic coating which can be re- moved at time of installation. Each sign type meets or exceeds NFPA13 requirements. All signs (except 7" round) are drilled in four corners to allow for easy installation. All signs (except 7" round) may be installed with sign chain or with any fastener that is suitable for the material that the sign is being attached. The 7" round bell signs are center drilled to allow for installation directly to the bell gong assembly. Type "A" 9" x 7" Control valve signs are drilled with the same four hole pattern as Type "B" 6" x 2" signs to allow for attachment of Type "B" to Type "A". liaid'ailr NI. <0% a. 1."1% fl fuNCS PT Installation Installation of aluminum signs is accomplished by several methods. The most common installation procedure is to use #16 Single Jack chain to hang the sign on the area being identified. Since all of the above mentioned signs are predrilled at all four corners, the last link of the chain can be opened and hooked through the top holes on the signs and hung on the appropriate valve or piping. The signs may also be fastened to a flat surface with fasteners appropriate to the base material. (The 9" x 7" Fire Alarm Bell sign must be drilled with a 3/8" hole if it is to be attached directly to the bell gong.) • 3198 LIONSHEAD AVE CARLSBAD, CA 92010 TEL + 1 760 599-1168 + 1 800 344-1822 FAX + 1 800 344-3775 © 2012 Fire Protection Products, Inc. ■►Ilhlll,l�.iii 1WaTaLV Specifications Material: .020" aluminum with removable plastic coating Sizes: 6" x 2" 4" x 6" 5"x7" 9" x 7" 12" x 10" 8.5"x11" 7" Round See current catalog for a full listing of all available signs. CR/ ' 1` I M� -zi ar tay ©MO MOM Base Plate Mounted 0 Directional air shroud for reduced pump temperatures , Standard Features i 0 Totally enclosed heavy-duty belt guard O Heavy-duty single stage cast iron compressor pump 0 Powder coated, extra heavy steel base plate Made in Somerset, PA USA a Large canister intake filter with replaceable filter elements 0 Splash lubricated o Magnetic starter is included on all 5HP and larger units o Belt driven with a large flywheel for extra cooling and easier start-up 0 Industrial/Commercial grade UL Listed electric motor O Each unit is filled with Jenny Ultimate Blue Compressor Pump Oil 0 Thermal overload motor protection • Fl2S-30S Base Mounted System Size Maximum Gallons in system to be pumped to 40 PSI in 30 Minutes K15S-30S 220 290 350 425 480 600 885 985 1215 1775 1950 2115 Model Pump Fl 3S -BS Fl 2S -BS F34S-BS K34S-BS F1S-BS K1S-BS K15S-BS K2S-BS G2S-BS G3S-BS GC5S-BS J5S-BS Tank Mounted/30 Gallon F K F K G J HP 1/3 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 220 F13S-30UMS ' F 1/3 '290 F12S-30UMS 1/2 350 F34S-30UMS 3/4 425 K34S-30UMS K 480 F1 S-30UMS F 1 600 K1 S-30UMS K 885 K15S-30UMS 1-1/2 985 K2S-30UMS 2 1215 G2S-30UMS G 1775 G3S-30UMS 3 1950 GC5S-30UMS GC 5 2115 J5S-30UMS J Power Supply 115 Volt (through 2 HP) or 230 Volt 1 Phase 208, 230, 460 or 575 Volt 3 Phase 115 Volt (through 2 HP) 230 Volt 1 Phase 208, 230, 460 or 575 Volt 3 Phase Tank Mounted Additional Standard Features is Tanks are powder coated and ASME certified o Protectively mounted fittings o Manual tank drain(s) o Large canister intake filter with replaceable filter elements o Special unloading valves to assist in motor starting G Tank gauge o Pressure relief safety valve o Auto Start/Stop control with pressure unloader set at 25-40 PSI Pump RPM CFM del'd @ 40 PSI Optional Auto Control Group 670 2.9 4.4 950 3.8 ACGF 1200 4.4 7.4 520 5.3 ACGK 1430 6.0 ACGF 790 7.4 1030 1140 10.9 ACGK 1280 12.4 630 15.1 950 21.8 ACGD 1030 24.2 830 26.0 ACGD 670 2.9 950 3.8) 1200 4.4 520 5.3 1430 6.0 790 7.4 1140 10.9 1280 12.4 630 15.1 950 21.8 1030 24.2 830 26.0 Options ASME National Board tank Magnetic starter 17 gallon tank o Vertical tank Low oil level switch 0 Oil sight glass Automatic tank drain a Air line filter Aftercooler 0 Dryer Control Group 7 LANSDALE INTERNATIONAL 1050 Broadway, Westville, NJ 08093 P. 800-908-0523 F. 856-456-9223 www.lansdaleinternational.com WATERFLOW_/ MANIFOLD] DETECTOR BODY BALL VALVE (QRVNQONNEC110N) OR TEST DRAIN UL/FM* APPROVED BASIC ASSEMBLY (3" (80MM) VERSION SHOWN) LISTED RowTestAssombly E116616 46P2 MATERIAL LIST NO Description Qty 1 LANSDALE AIR / WATER - 3-1/2" DIA 0-300 PSI w/ STAINLESS STEEL CASE UL & FM approved 1 2 1/4" 3 -Way VALVE 1 3 System Sensor Water Flow Switch w retard UL/FM Approved 1 4 1/4 x 2 Black Nipple 1 5 1/4 Black CI Plug 1 6 Commercial Riser Body Sch 40 A53 Steel Pipe 1 7 Black Nipple _x close 1 8 Galvanized Street Elbow (90 degree) 1 9A Ball Valve 300 PSI, 600 WOG UL/FM approved 1 9B Lansdale International or equal, Test & Drain UL/FM Approved 1 Nominal Size 2" 2.5" 3" (49 6" A 13" 13" 13" 13" 13" B (Ball Valve) 13" 133/4" 153/4" (1-91/2-11 20" B (Test & Drain) 131/2" 141/4" 161/4" (19") 203/4" C 51/4" 5" 51/2" i7" 81/4" D 91/4" 91/2" 91/2" a103/s" 11" E (Ball Valve) 55/8" 71/8" 93/43"(1'2178'1131/2" E (Test & Drain) 1.0" 101/4" 12¼"143/4" 1141/z" F 31/2" 31/2" 31/2" 1311?' 31/2" G 41/2" 41/2" 41/2" (4V7 41/2" H 31/z" 31/2" 31/2„ 31/2" 31/2" * AVAILABLE WITH PRESSURE RELIEF OPTION Body Size 2" 2.5 " 3" '47) 6" Ball Valve Size 1" 1.25" 1.25" i2") 2" Test & Drain Size 1" 1.25" 1.25" $2"" 2" NOTE: All tolerances (with exception of the grooves) plus or minus 1/4 of an inch. All Welds to be 1/4" fillet surface prep of body - SSPC-SP-7 finished with 2.5 mils Bengal Red TGIC/ Acryllic Epoxy powder coat, electrostatically applied. PROJECT INFORMATION APPROVAL STAMP Project: I■ Approved Address: ® Approved as noted Contractor: P Not approved Engineer: Remarks: Submittal Data: Notes 1: Notes 2: FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL BOOK TWIN PEAKS 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY, TUKWILA, WA 98188 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FIRE ALARM PANEL BOOSTER POWER SUPPLY REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR INITIATING DEVICES MODULES NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES RI IRMITTAI R(NIK RY HFI PC;ATF-INC ( M - 1 RRR 274 14A2 FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL BOOK TWIN PEAKS 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY, TUKWILA, WA 98188 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LEGEND EQUIPMENT LEGEND QTY SYM MANUFACTURER MODEL # DESCRIPTION BACKBOX 1 ® FIRELITE MS -25 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL, ADDRESSABLE SURFACE 1 ® FIRELITE FCPS24FS6 BOOSTER POWER SUPPLY SURFACE 1 to FIRELITE ANN -80 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SURFACE 2 ®WP SYSTEM SENSOR PC2RK HORN STROBE RED MULTI CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 4 ®H SYSTEM SENSOR PC2RH HORN STROBE RED HIGH CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 3 PI SYSTEM SENSOR PC2R HORN STROBE RED MULTI CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 3 AWP SYSTEM SENSOR P2RK HORN STROBE RED MULTI CD, WEATHER PROOF, WALL MOUNT 4" SQUARE 1 El H SYSTEM SENSOR SCRH STROBE WHITE HIGH CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 5 s!' SYSTEM SENSOR SCR STROBE RED MULTI CD, CEILING MOUNT 4` OCTO 2 ❑s FIRELITE MMF-301 MINI -MONITOR MODULE 4" SQUARE 2 I -- BY OTHERS KITCHEN HOOD SURFACE 2 (] FIRELITE MDF300 MONITOR MODULE DUAL, ADDRESSABLE 4" SQUARE 1 © FRELITE BG-12LX MANUAL PULL STATION, ADDRESSABLE 1 GANG, DEEP 1 Q FIRELITE SD355 PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR W/ _9114LPBT 4" OCTO 4 ® FIRELITE CRF -300 RELAY CONTROL MODULE 4" SQUARE 4 8 FIRELITE D355PL DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR (PROVIDE BY OTHER) SURFACE 1 - BY OTHERS EXISTING SPRINKLER FLOW SWITCH - 2 g - BY OTHERS EXISTING SPRINKLER TAMPER SWITCH - 4 El SYSTEM SENSOR RTS151 REMOTE TEST STATION SINGLE GANG TOTAL OF NUMBER OF DEVICES BEING INSTALLED: 44 STANLEY Convergent Security Solutions, Inc. 2700 RICHARDS ROAD SUITE 202 BELLEVUE, WA 98005 425-957-7000 PHONE 425-746-0084 FAX SI IRMITTAI RfCfl( RY HFI P(;ATF—IN(: (;fm - 1 RRR 274 1482 FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL BOOK TWIN PEAKS 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY, TUKWILA, WA 98188 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FIRE ALARM PANEL STANLEY Convergent Security Solutions, Inc. 2700 RICHARDS ROAD SUITE 202 BELLEVUE, WA 98005 425-957-7000 PHONE 425-746-0084 FAX SI IRMITTAI R(1(lK RY HFI P(ATF-INr. CFM - 1 RRR 774 14R7 1(Ms-25(E) Rev 2 Addressable FACP With Built-in Communicator DF -60702:A1 • Al -15 Fl re•LITeALarms by Honeywell Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panels General The Fire•Lite MS -25(E) is a 25 point addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with built-in Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT). This control panel supports up to 25 addressable devices in any combination of detectors and mod- ules. With simple programming, operation on standard wire, and features such as drift compensation and maintenance alert, the MS -25(E) is a preferred alternative to conventional control panels in both new and retrofit applications. The JumpStart® (or auto -learn) feature and easy -to -set code - wheel addressing of Honeywell Fire Systems (HFS) or equiva- lent Fire•Lite detectors and modules enable the system to be configured for fire protection without a programming utility. The default programming can be modified using the panels embed- ded web server. The integral DACT transmits system status (alarms, troubles, supervisories, etc.) to a remote monitoring location via the public switched telephone network. Reporting formats are con- tact ID, SIA 8 or SIA 20. NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, the term MS -25 is used in this data sheet to refer to the MS -25 and the MS -25E. For details on the Canadian version, see DF -60704. Features • SBUS supports two ANN -80 Remote Annunciators • JumpStart® auto -learn feature reduces installation time and makes programming easy. • Built-in digital communicator. • IP communicator compatible • Two programmable Style Y (Class B) notification appliance circuits (NACs). • Selectable strobe synchronization for System Sensor®, Gentex®, Wheelock® or AMSECO devices. • Two programmable Form -C relays and one Form -C trouble relay. • Automatic detector sensitivity testing (NFPA 72 compliant). • Point status eliminates calibrated smoke test requirements for NFPA 72. • Drift compensation. • Alarm verification per zone of detectors. • Walk -test. • Detectors and modules are code -wheel addressed for faster installation time. • Maintenance alert region. • Uses standard wire (unshielded or twisted pair). • Central Station reporting up to five zones. • Custom programming performed through the control panel's built-in browser; no programming software is required. SLC Communication • Single addressable SLC loop (Class B) requirements. • 25 addressabledevice capacity (any combination of addressable detectors and modules). • Compatible with Honeywell Fire Systems (HFS) or equiva- lent Fire•Lite detectors and modules. which meets NFPA Style 4 Notification Appliance Circuits (NACS) • Two independently programmable output circuits. Circuits can be configured for the following outputs: — Style y (Class B). — Door Holder Service (cannot be used for notification appliances). — Aux Power Source (cannot be used for notification appli- ances). • Silence Inhibit and Auto -silence timer options. • Continuous or Temporal code. • Selectable strobe synchronization per NAC. • Up to 2.0 A total output power, 1.0 A for auxiliary power and door holder. Each circuit can source up to the(total system, (current 2.0 A. DF -60702:A1 • 9/16/2011 — Page 1 of 4 Programming and Software • Auto -learn JumpStart® feature for easy programming reduces installation time. • Two programmable Form -C relay outputs. • 5 programming zones. • Custom programming can be performed through control panel's built-in browser. User Interface LED INDICATORS • AC Power (green) • Fire Alarm (red) • Supervisory (yellow) • Alarm Silenced (yellow) • System Trouble (yellow) • Disabled (yellow) BG-12LX Addressable Pull Station D355PL or HFS-D Duct Smoke Detector MMF-301 or HFS-MM Miniature Monitor Module CRF -300 or HFS-MR Addressable Relay Module SD355 or HFS=P Intelligent Photoelectric Detector H355 or HFS-T Intelligent Temperature Sensor • Low Battery Fault (yellow) • Ground Fault (yellow) • Walk Test (yellow) KEYPAD CONTROLS • Acknowledge • Silence • Drill • System Reset (lamp test) • 10 -key numeric keypad • 5 Zones Disable keypad • 2 NACs Disable keypad Bells, Strobes, Horns, and NACs Page 2 of 4 — DF -60702:A1 • 9/16/2011 Product Line Information MS -25: Combination DACT/Fire Alarm Control Panel with one SLC loop. Includes main circuit board with display, transformer, backbox with door, manual, and required screws, cables, key, etc. Red, 120 VAC. MS -25E: Same as MS -25, but operates from 220/240 VAC. MS -25C: Same as MS -25, but listed for Canadian applica- tions. For details on the Canadian version, see DF -60704. HONEYWELL FIRE SYSTEMS DEVICES HFS-P: Honeywell Fire Systems addressable photoelectric smoke detector. Includes base. HFS-PT: Honeywell Fire Systems addressable photoelectric smoke detector with thermal sensor. Includes base. HFS-T: Honeywell Fire Systems addressable fixed tempera- ture heat detector. Includes base. HFS-MM: Honeywell Fire Systems addressable Mini -Monitor module for normally -open contact devices. HFS-MR: Honeywell Fire Systems addressable relay module. HFS-D: Honeywell Fire Systems addressable photoelectric duct smoke detector. Includes detector. FIRE•LITE EQUIVALENT DEVICES BG-12LX: Addressable dual -action manual pull station. SD355: Addressable low -profile photoelectric smoke detector. SD355T: Addressable low -profile photoelectric smoke detec- tor with thermal sensor. H355: Fast -response, low -profile heat detector. D355PL: InnovairFlex low -flow non -relay duct -detector hous- ing; includes SD355R. MMF-301: Miniature version of MMF-300. Excludes LED and Style D option. Connects with wire pigtails. May mount in device backbox. CRF -300: Addressable relay module containing two isolated sets of Form -C contacts, which operate as a DPDT switch. 1300: This module isolates the SLC loop from short circuit con- ditions COMPATIBLE ANNUNCIATORS ANN -80(-W): Remote LCD annunciator mimics the informa- tion displayed on the FACP LCD display. Recommended wire type is un -shielded. (Basic model is red; order -W version for white; see DF -52417.) ANN-SB8OKIT R: Red surface mount backbox with angled wedge. ANN-SB8OKIT W: White surface mount backbox with angled wedge. MISCELLANEOUS SB -I/O: Surface -mount backbox for the BG-12LX, plastic. BG12TR: Optional trim ring for semi -flush mounting the pull - station. BB -26: Battery backbox, holds up to two 25 AH batteries and CHG-75. BB -55F: Battery box, houses two 55 AH batteries. CHG-75: Battery charger for lead -acid batteries with a rating of 25 to 75 AH. CHG-120F: Remote battery charging system for lead -acid bat- teries with a rating of 55 to 120 AH. Requires additional BB - 55F for mounting. BAT Series: Batteries. See DF -52397. 005220: City Box Transmitter Module. 007860: DACT Phone Cord (2 required). IPDACT-2/2UD, IPDACT Internet Monitoring Module: Connects to primary and secondary DACT telephone output ports for internet communications over customer provided eth- ernet internet connection. Requires compatible Teldat VisorALARM Central Station Receiver. Can use DHCP or static IP. (See DF -60407 or DF -52424 for more information.) IPSPLT: Y -adaptor option allows connection of both panel dialer outputs to one IPDACT-2/2UD cable input. IPENC: External mounting enclosure consisting of mounting bracket IPBRKT, and screws. When using the supplied phone cables, enclosure must be mounted within 6" (15.24 cm) of the FACP. Red. Wiring Requirements While shielded wire is not required, it is recommended that all SLC wiring be twisted -pair to minimize the effects of electrical interference. Refer to the panel manual for wiring details. DF -60702:A1 • 9/16/2011 — Page 3 of 4 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS System Capacity • Intelligent Signalling Line Circuits 1 • Addressable device capacity 25 • Programmable software zones 5 • Annunciators 2 Electrical Specifications • AC Power: MS -25: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 1.5 A. MS -25E: 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 0.75 A. AC wire size is minimum 14 AWG (2.00 mm2) with 600 V insulation. Nonpower -limited, super- vised. • Battery: Charging capacity 7-33 AH (18 AH for ULC appli- cations). MS -25 cabinet holds maximum of two 7 AH batter- ies. Larger batteries require a separate battery cabinet, such as the BB -26 or BB -55F. • Communication Loop: Supervised and power -limited. • Notification Appliance Circuits: — Terminal Strip provides connections for two NACs, Style Y (Class B). — Maximum signaling current: 2.0 A. — End -of -Line Resistor: 4.7 kOhm, �/2 watt (P/N 71252 UL listed) for Style Y (Class B) NAC. Refer to the MS -25 man- ual for listed compatible devices. 1 • (Standby Current::135_r1A! •AlarmCurr' a t7220_mA • Aux Power Circuits: 1.0A @ 24 VDC per circuit, power - limited • Two Programmable Relays and One Fixed Trouble Relay: — Contact rating: 2.5 A @ 24 VDC (resistive). — Form -C relays, nonpower -limited, nonsupervised. Physical Specifications • Dimensions: 15.2" H (38.42 cm) x 12.75" W (32.39 cm) x 3.4" D (8.57 cm) • Weight: 11.5 lbs. (5.2 kg) • Color: Red Temperature and Humidity Ranges This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0 — 49°C/32 — 120°F and at a relative humidity 93% ± 2% RH (noncondensing) at 32°C ± 2°C (90°F ± 3°F). However, the useful life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme tempera- ture ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a normal room temperature of 15 — 27°C/60 — 80°F. Agency Listings and Approvals The listings and approvals below apply to the basic MS -25(E) control panel. In •some cases, certain modules ,may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in pro- cess. Consult factory for latest listing status. • UL Listed: S624 • CSFM: 7165-0075:0217 For the ULC -listed version, see DN -60641. NFPA Standards The MS -25(E) complies with the following NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Systems requirements: — LOCAL (Automatic, Manual, Waterflow and Sprinkler Supervisory). — AUXILIARY (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow) (requires 5220 module). — REMOTE STATION (Automatic, Manual, Waterflow and Sprinkler Supervisory) (Where a DACT is not accepted, the alarm, trouble and supervisory relays may be con- nected to UL 864 listed transmitters. — PROPRIETARY (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow). — CENTRAL STATION (Automatic, Manual and Waterflow, and Sprinkler Supervised). Fire•Lite® Alarms®, JumpStart®, and System Sensor@ are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. ©2011 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. ISO 9001 CEFtTIFIEGIO ENGINEERING S MANUEIBTURING QUALITY SYSTEMS This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact Fire•Lite Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. www.firelite.com Made in the U.S. A Page 4 of 4 — DF -60702:A1 • 9/16/2011 FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL BOOK TWIN PEAKS 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY, TUKWILA, WA 98188 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BOOSTER POWER SUPPLY STANLEY Convergent Security Solutions, Inc. 2700 RICHARDS ROAD SUITE 202 BELLEVUE, WA 98005 425-957-7000 PHONE 425-746-0084 FAX SI IRMITTAI RC1nK RY HFI PC;ATF-INC. rnM - 1 RIR 774 1487 (FCPS-24FS6-' Volt, 6,Amp Power Supply DF -52301:A2 • D-025 FIne•«TeeALarms by Honeywell Power Supplies/Accessories General The Fire•Lite FCPS-24FS6(C/E) is a compact, cost-effec- tive, 6 -amp remote power supplies with battery charger. The FCPS-24FS6(C/E) may be connected to any 12 or 24 volt fire alarm control panel (FACP) or may stand-alone. Primary appli- cations include notification appliance (bell) circuit (NAC) expansion (to support ADA requirements and NAC synchroni- zation) or auxiliary power to support 24 volt system accesso- ries. The FOPS provides regulated and filtered 24 VDC power to four notification appliance circuits configured as either two Class B (Style Y) and Class A (Style Z, with ZNAC-4 option module) or four class B only. Alternately, the four outputs may be configured as any combination of resettable/non-resettable power outputs (optimal for powering four -wire smoke detec- tors. The FFCPS-24FS6(C/E) also contains a battery charger capable of charging up to 7.0 Amp hour batteries. FCPS- 24FS6(C/E) is ULC -listed. NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, the term FCPS-24FS6 used in this document refers to the standard FCPS-24FS6, FCPS- 24FS6C, FCPS-24FS6E Features • UL -Listed Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) synchroniza- tion using System Sensor, Wheelock, or Gentex "Com- mander2" appliances. • Operates as a "sync -follower" or as a "sync -generator" (default). See note on page 2. • Contains two fully -isolated input/control circuits - triggered from FACP NAC (NAC expander mode) or jumped perma- nently "ON" (stand-alone mode). • Two Class B (Style Y) or Class A (Style Z, with ZNAC-4 module) NACs (circuits 1 & 3) • 6 -amp full load output, with 3 amps maximum/circuit, in NAC expander mode (UL 864). • 4 -amp continuous output in stand-alone mode (UL 1481). • Compatible with coded inputs; signals passed through. • Optional power -supervision relay (EOLR-1). • In stand-alone mode, output power circuits may be config- ured as: resettable, (reset line from FACP required), non-resettable, or a mix of two and two. • Fully regulated and filtered power output - optimal for pow- ering four -wire smoke detectors, annunciators, and other system peripherals requiring regulated/filtered power. • Power -limiting technology meets UL power -limiting require- ments. • Form -C normally -closed trouble relay. • Fully supervised power supply, battery, and NACs. • Selectable earth fault detection. • AC trouble report selectable for immediate 2 -hour delay. • Works with virtually any UL 864 fire alarm control which uti- lizes an industry -standard reverse -polarity notification cir- cuit (including unfiltered and unregulated bell power). • Requires input trigger voltage of 9 - 32 VDC. • Self-contained in compact, locking cabinet - 15"H x 14.5"W x 2.75"D (cm: 38.1 H x 36.83W x 6.985D). • Includes integral battery charger capable of charging up to 18 AH batteries. Cabinet capable of housing 7.0 AH batter- ies. • Battery charger may be disabled via DIP switch for applica- tions requiring larger batteries. • Fixed, clamp -type terminal blocks accommodate up to 12 AWG (3.1 mm2) wire. Specifications Primary (AC) Power: • FCPS-24FS6: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 3.2A maximum. • FCPS-24FS6/E: 240 VAC, 50 Hz, 1.6A maximum. • Wire Size: minimum #14 AWG (2.0mm2) with 600 V insula- tion. Control Input Circuit: • Trigger Input Voltage: 9 to 32 VDC. • Trigger Current: 2.0 mA (16 - 32 V); Per Input: 1.0 mA (9 - 16 V). Trouble Contact Rating: 5 A at 24 VDC. Auxiliary Power Output: Specific application power 500 mA maximum. Output Circuits: • +24 VDC filtered, regulated. • 3.0 A maximum for any one circuit. • Total continuous current for all outputs (stand-alone mode): — FCPS-24F: 4.0 A maximum. (Total short-term current for all outputs (NAC expander mode):' FCPS-24F: 6.0 A maximum DF -52301:A2. 5/17/13 — Page 1 of 4 Secondary Power (Battery) Charging Circuit: • Supports lead -acid batteries only. • Float -charge voltage: 27.6 VDC. • Maximum current charge: 250 mA. • Maximum battery capacity: 7.0 AH. Applications Example 1: Expand notification appliance power an additional 6.0 A. Use up to four Class B (Style Y) outputs or four Class A (Style Z) outputs (using ZNAC-4). For example, the FACP noti- fication appliance circuits will activate the FCPS when reverse - polarity activation occurs. Trouble conditions on the FCPS are sensed by the FACP through the notification appliance circuit. Example 2: Use the FCPS to expand auxiliary regulated 24 - volt system power up to 4.0 A. Both resettable and non -reset - table power options are available. Resettable outputs are cre- ated by connecting the resettable output from the FACP to one or both of the FCPS inputs. Example 3: Use addressable control modules to activate the FCPS instead of activating it through the FACP notification appliance circuits. This typically allows for mounting the FCPS at greater distances* away from the FACP while expanding system architecture in various applications. For example, an addressable control module is used to acti- vate the FCPS, and an addressable monitor module is used to sense FCPS trouble conditions. Local auxiliary power output from the FCPS provides power to the addressable control module. *NOTE: Addressable FACP5 are capable of locating control and monitor modules at distances of up to 10,000 feet (3,046 meters) . Sync Follower/Generator Note In some installations, it is necessary to synchronize the flash timing of all strobes in the system for ADA compliance. Strobes accomplish this by monitoring very short timing pulses on the NAC power which are created by the FACP. When installed at the end of a NAC wire run, the FCPS-24FS6 can track (i.e. "follow") the strobe synchronization timing pulses on the existing NAC wire run. This maintains the overall system flash timing of the additional strobes attaches to the FCPS. When the FCPS-24FS6 is configured (via DIP switch settings) as a "sync follower," the FCPS's NAC outputs track the strobe synchronization pulses present at the FCPS's sync input ter- minal. The pulses originate from an upstream FACP or other power supply. When the FCPS-24FS6 is configured (via DIP switch settings) as a "sync generator," the FCPS's sync input terminals are not used. Rather, the FCPS is the originator of the strobe synchro- nization pulses on the FCPS's NAC outputs. In "sync genera- tor" mode, the sync type (System Sensor, Wheelock, or Gentex) is selectable via DIP switch settings. Standards and Codes The FCPS-24FS6 complies with the following standards: • NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code. • UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems (NAC expander mode). • UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Alarm Systems. Agency Listings and Approvals These listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in this document. In some cases, certain modules or applications may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. • UL Listed: S2424, S1287 • ULC Listed: S2424 • CSFM Approved: 7315-0076:176 • MEA: 387-94E Ordering Information FCPS-24FS6: 6.0 A, 120 VAC remote charger power supply. Includes main printed circuit board, transformers, enclosure (15"H x 14.5"W x 2.75"D [cm: 38.1 H x 36.83W x 6.985D]), and installation instructions. FCPS-24FS6 is ULC -listed. FCPS-24FS6E: 6.0 A, 240 VAC remote charger power supply. Includes main printed circuit board, transformers, enclosure (15"H x 14.5"W x 2.75"D [cm: 38.1 H x 36.83W x 6.985D]), and installation instructions. ZNAC-4: Class A (Style Y) NAC option module. EOLR-1: 12/24 VDC end -of -line relay for monitoring four -wire smoke detector power. BAT -1270: Battery, 12 -volt, 7.0 AH (two required). PS -1270: Battery, 12 -volt, 7.0 AH (two required). 90286: Optional module mounting kit, is required to install an addressable module on the power supply main circuit board. Page 2 of 4 — DF -52301:A2.5/17/13 Style Y NAC or Door Holder Power Output #4 NOTE: All NAC outputs can be converted to Style Z with ZNAC-4 option module. Style Y NAC Output #3 Style Y NAC Output #2 Style Y NAC. Output #1 FCPS Trouble Contact Output AC NI+ Power 24 VDC Specific �+ Application Power NAC Control /11111. Input #2 (from FACP) FCPS INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTIONS are programmable by SW1 DIP switch settings Battery Charger Simplified Block Diagram NAC Control + MI Input #1 (from FACP) • Sync Input DF -52301:A2.5/17/13 — Page 3 of 4 0 C N o o O 0 T > To O E E ° ° z z T awa dN l' a. CU O 0 LL o E ~ 9 U co Ot H LL 1 w c U o O 0 0 a U .. N E E°d0 i+io -o c N o E 0 o c 00 0 c+iCt U 9° 7 X ..513°) a' n I nUS + Aux. 24 VDC" — Control Input 2 + Control Input 2 E E U 0 + Out/Trouble Contact — Control Input 1 + Control Input 1 0 e 00 00 + 1 ZZNN TB1: Supervised w AC Neutral O I a uy m r - a I®I e C C c C C C C C C 0. 0 1 e 0 0 ❑❑❑ 0 0 e ono 0101018 1101 INN 1 V 45'6 J O O m C C E E 00-I- 0-73 t-. CO CO V 0 ■ 000 0 0 000 cc C)) 00 N 0 0 M. MM MP Mrv 0 0 00) 3 ° g J CoQ y`d`n Og O °>>mo E 0w�'� O o E ZF m ON d 0U m W Q O' m Z O LL ' U a a 0 co co + Board Layout System Sensor® and FireLite® Alarms are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. 02013 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. ISO 9001 CERT IFIEO ENGINEERING A MANUEACIURING QUALITY SYSTEMS This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact Fire•Lite Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. www.firelite.com Made in the U.S. A Page 4 of 4 — DF -52301:A2 • 5/17/13 FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL BOOK TWIN PEAKS 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY, TUKWILA, WA 98188 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR STANLEY Convergent Security Solutions, Inc. 2700 RICHARDS ROAD SUITE 202 BELLEVUE, WA 98005 425-957-7000 PHONE 425-746-0084 FAX RI IRMITTAI RC)flK RY HFI P(;ATF-INC. (:()M - 1 RRR 774 1487 ANN -80 80 -Character LCD Serial Annunciator df -52417:c • B-90 Fire•LITe farms by Honeywell Annunciators General The ANN -80 annunciator is a compact, backlit, 80 -character LCD fire annunciator that mimics the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) display. It provides system status indicators for AC Power, Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, and Alarm Silenced condi- tions. The ANN -80 and the FACP communicate over a two -wire serial interface employing the ANN -BUS communication format. Connected devices are powered, via two additional wires, by either the host FACP or a remote UL -listed, filtered power supply. ANN -80 is red; for white, order ANN -80-W. The ANN -80 displays English-language text of system point information including device type, zone, independent point alarm, trouble or supervisory status, as well as any custom alpha labels programmed into the control panel. It includes con- trol switches for remote control of critical system functions. (A keyswitch prevents unauthorized operation of the control switches.) Up to eight ANN -80s may be connected to the ANN -BUS of each FACP. No programming is required, which saves time dur- ing system commissioning. Features • Listed to UL Standard 864, 9th Edition. • Backlit 80 -character LCD display (20 characters x 4 lines). • Mimics all display information from the host panel. • Control switches for System Acknowledge, Signal Silence, Drill, and Reset. • Control switches can be independently enabled or disabled at the FACP. • Keyswitch enables/disables control switches and mechani- cally locks annunciator enclosure • Keyswitch can be enabled or disabled at the FACP. • Enclosure supervised for tamper. • System status LEDs for AC Power, Alarm, Trouble, Supervi- sory, and Alarm Silence. • Local sounder can be enabled or disabled at the FACP. • ANN -80 connects to the ANN -BUS terminal on the FACP and requires minimal panel programming. • Displays device type identifiers, individual point alarm, trou- ble, supervisory, zone, and custom alpha labels. • Time -and date display field. • Surface mount directly to wall or to single, double, or 4" square electrical box. • Semi -flush mount to single, double, or 4" square electrical box. Use ANN-SB8OKIT for angled view mounting. • Can be remotely located up to 6,000 feet (1,800 m) from the panel. • Backlight turns off during AC loss to conserve battery power but will turn back on if an alarm condition occurs. • May be powered by 24 VDC from the host FACP or by remote power supply (requires 24 VDC). • Up to eight ANN -80s can be connected on the ANN -BUS. Controls and Indicators • AC Power • Alarm • Trouble • Supervisory • Alarm Silenced Specifications • • • • • Operating voltage range: 18 VDC to 28 VDC. Current consumption @ 24 VDC nominal (filtered and non- resettable)40 mA maximum.; Ambient temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C). Relative humidity: 93% ± 2% RH (noncondensing) at 32°C ± 2°C (90°F ± 3°F). 5.375" (13.65 cm.) high x 6.875" (17.46 cm.) wide x 1.375" (3.49 cm.) deep. For use indoors in a dry location. All connections are power -limited and supervised. Agency Listings and Approvals The listings and approvals below apply to the ANN -80. In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. • UL: S2424 • FM approved • CSFM: 7120-0075:211 • MEA: 442-06-E The ANN -BUS POWERING THE DEVICES ON THE ANN -BUS FROM AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY The ANN -BUS can be powered by an auxiliary power supply when the maximum number of ANN -BUS devices exceeds the ANN -BUS power requirements. See the FACP manual for more information. df -52417:c • 05/22/09 — Page 1 of 2 ANN -BUS DEVICE ADDRESSING Each ANN -BUS device requires a unique address (ID Number) in order to communicate with the FACP. A maximum of 8 devices can be connected to the FACP ANN -BUS communication circuit. See the FACP manual for more information. WIRE REQUIREMENTS: COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUIT The ANN -80 connects to the FACP ANN -BUS communications circuit. To determine the type of wire and the maximum wiring distance that can be used with FACP ANN -BUS accessory mod- ules, it is necessary to calculate the total worst case current draw for all modules on a single 4 -conductor bus. The total worst case current draw is calculated by adding the individual worst case currents for each module. NOTE: For total worst case current draw on a single ANN -BUS refer to appropriate FACP manual. After calculating the total worst case current draw, the following table specifies the maximum distance the modules can be located from the FACP on a single wire run. The table ensures 6.0 volts of line drop maximum. In general, the wire length is lim- ited by resistance, but for heavier wire gauges, capacitance is the limiting factor. These cases are marked in the chart with an asterisk (*). Maxi- mum length can never be more than 6,000 feet (1,800 m), regardless of gauge used. See table below. WIRE REQUIREMENTS: POWER CIRCUIT • 14 to 18 AWG (0.75 - 2.08 mm2) wire for 24 VDC power cir- cuit is acceptable. Power wire distance limitation is set by 1.2 volt maximum line drop form source to end of circuit. • All connections tare power -limited and supervised. • A maximum of eight ANN -80 modules may be connected to this circuit. Communication Pair Wiring Distance: FACP to Last ANN -BUS Module Total Worst Case Current Draw (amps) 22 Gauge 18 Gauge 16 Gauge 14 Gauge 0.100 1,852 ft. 4,688 ft. * 6,000 ft. *6,000 ft. 0.200 926 ft. 2,344 ft. 3,731 ft. 5,906 ft. 0.300 617 ft. 1,563 ft. 2,488 ft. 3,937 ft. 0.400 463 ft. 1,172 ft. 1,866 ft. 2,953 ft. 0.500 370 ft. 938 ft. 1,493 ft. 2,362 ft. 0.600 309 ft. 781 ft. 1,244 ft. 1,969 ft. 0.700 265 ft. 670 ft. 1,066 ft. 1,687 ft. 0.800 231 ft. 586 ft. 933 ft. 1,476 ft. 0.900 206 ft. 521 ft. 1 829 ft. 1,312 ft. 1.000 (max.) 185 ft. 469 ft. ! 746 ft. 1,181 ft. WIRING CONFIGURATION The following figure illustrates the wiring between the FACP and ANN -BUS devices. ORDERING OPTIONS: ANN -80: Red 80 character LCD Annunciator. ANN -80-W: White, 80 character LCD Annunciator. ANN -BUS and power ANN-SB8OKIT R: ,Red surface mount backbox with angled wiring are supervised wedge. and power limited. ANN-SB8OKIT W: (White surface mount backbox with angled wedge. ANN -BUS Device 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FACP Wiring to ANN -BUS Device FireLite® Alarms is a,registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. ©2009 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. ISO 9001 CERTIFIECO ENGINEERING R MANUFAGIDRING QUALITY SYSTEMS This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact Fire•Lite Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. www.firelite.com Made in the U.S. A. Page 2 of 2 — df -52417:c • 05/22/09 FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL BOOK TWIN PEAKS 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY, TUKWILA, WA 98188 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INITIATING DEVICES STANLEY Convergent Security Solutions, Inc. 2700 RICHARDS ROAD SUITE 202 BELLEVUE, WA 98005 425-957-7000 PHONE 425-746-0084 FAX RI IRMITTAI R(Y K RY HFI PnATF-IN( rfM - I RRR 274 1dR,2 (SD355(A) Series Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Detectors DF -52384:D • E-160 Flre•LITe®ALarms by Honeywell Addressable Devices General The SD355(A), SD355T(A), and SD355R(A) addressable, low -profile plug-in photoelectric detectors use a state-of-the- art photoelectric sensing chamber with communications to provide open area protection and are used exclusively with Fire•Lite's Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACPs). The SD355T(A) adds thermal sensors that will alarm at a fixed temperature of 135°F (57°C). Since these detectors are addressable, they will help emergency personnel quickly locate a fire during its early stages, potentially saving precious rescue time while also reducing property damage. Two LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indica- tion. Remote LED annunciator capability is available as an optional accessory, PN RA100Z(A). The SD355R(A) is a remote test capable detector for use with D355PL(A) or DNR(A)/DNRW duct smoke detector housings. Features SLC LOOP • Two -wire loop connection. • Unit uses base for wiring. ADDRESSING • Addressable by device. • Rotary, decimal addressing: 01 – 99 with MS-9200UD(LS), and 01 –159 with MS-9600UD(LS). ARCHITECTURE • Unique single -source, dual-chamber design to respond quickly and dependably to a broad range of fires. • Sleek, low -profile design. • Integral communications and built-in type identification. • Built-in tamper-resistant feature. • Removable cover and insect -resistant screen for simple field cleaning. OPERATION • Withstands air velocities up to 4,000 feet -per -minute (20 m/ sec.) without triggering a false alarm. • Factory preset at 1.5% nominal sensitivity for panel alarm threshold level. • Visible LED "blinks" when the unit is addressed (communi- cating with the fire panel) and latches on in alarm. MECHANICALS • Sealed against back pressure. • Direct surface mounting or electrical box mounting. • Mounts to: single -gang box, 3.5" (8.89 cm) or 4.0" (10.16 cm) octagonal box, or 4.0" (10.16 cm) square electrical box (using a plaster ring — included). OTHER SYSTEM FEATURES • Fully coated circuit boards and superior RF/transient pro- tection. • 94 -VO plastic flammability rating. • Low standby current. SD355(A) in B210LP(A) Base OPTIONS • Remote LED output connection, PN RA100Z(A). 0 z W Applications Use photoelectric detectors in life -safety applications to pro- vide a broad range of fire -sensing capability, especially where smoldering fires are anticipated. Ionization detectors are often better than photoelectric detectors at sensing fast, flaming fires. Construction These detectors are constructed of off-white fire resistant plas- tic. SD355(A) series plug-in, low -profile smoke detectors are designed to commercial standards and offer an attractive appearance. Installation SD355(A) series plug-in detectors use a detachable mounting base to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Mount base (all base types) on an electrical backbox which is at least 1.5" (3.81 cm) deep. For a chart of compatible junction boxes, see DF -60059. NOTE: Because of the inherent supervision provided by the SLC loop, end -of -line resistors are not required. Wiring `T --taps" or branches are permitted for Style 4 (Class B) wiring. SD355R(A) mounts in a D355PL(A) or DNR(A)/DNRW duct detector housing. Operation Each SD355(A) series detector uses one of 99 possible addresses on the MS-92000D(LS) and up to 318 (159 on each loop) on the MS-9600UD(LS) Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). It responds to regular polls from the system and reports its type and status. The addressable photoelectric sensor in the SD355(A) series has a unique unipolar chamber that responds quickly and uni- formly to a broad range of smoke conditions. It can withstand wind gusts up to 4,000 feet -per -minute (20 m/sec.) without sending an alarm level signal. Because of its unipolar cham- ber, the SD355(A) series is approximately two times more responsive than most photoelectric sensors. This makes it a more stable detector. DF -52384:D • 2/11/2015 — Page 1 of 2 Detector Sensitivity Test Each detector can have its sensitivity tested (required per NFPA 72, Chapter 14 on Inspection, Testing and Maintenance) when installed/connected to a MS-92000D(LS) or MS- 96000D(LS) addressable fire alarm control panel. The results of the sensitivity test can be printed off the MS-92000D(LS) or MS-96000D(LS) for record keeping. Specification Voltage range: 15 — 32 VDC (peak). 5tandby,current:,300 pA @_24sVDC 1�"` +LED current: 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC (latched "ON")i Air velocity: 4,000 ft./min. (20 m/sec.) maximum. Size: 2.1" (5.33 cm) high; base determines diameter. — B210LP(A): 6.1" (15.5 cm) diameter. — B501(A): 4.1" (10.4 cm) diameter. — B200SR(A): 6.875" (17.46 cm) diameter. — B224RB(A): 6.2" (15.748 cm) diameter. Weight: 3.6 oz. (102 g). Operating temperature range: for SD355(A): 0°C to 49°C (32°F to 120°F); for SD355T(A): 0°C to 38°C (32°F to 100°F). SD355R(A): installed in a DNR(A)/DNRW -20°C to 70°C (-4°F to 158°F). Temperature: 0°C — 49°C (32°F — 120°F). Relative humidity: 10% — 93%, non -condensing. Listings Listings and approvals below apply to the SD355(A), SD355T(A), and SD355RT(A) detectors. In some cases, cer- tain modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. • UL Listed: S1059. • ULC Listed: S1059. • CSFM: 7272-0075:0194. • MEA: 243-02-E. • FM approved. Product Line Information NOTE: "A" suffix indicates ULC Listed model. SD355: Addressable photoelectric detector; B210LP base included. SD355A: Sames as SD355 with ULC Listing; B210LPA base included. SD355T: Same as SD355 but with thermal element; B210LP base included. SD355TA: Same as SD355T with ULC Listing; B210LPA base included. SD355R: Remote test capable addressable photoelectric detector for use with a D355PL(A) or DNRA/DNRW duct detector housing; B210LP base included. SD355RA: Same as SD355R with ULC Listing for use with a D355PLA or DNRA duct detector housing; B210LPA base included. INTELLIGENT BASES NOTE: "A" suffix indicates ULC Listed model. NOTE: The detector's plug-in base can be changed off for special applications. For details about intelligent bases and their mount- ing, see DF -60059. B210LP(A): Plug-in detector base (included); standard U.S. flanged low -profile mounting base. B210LPBP: Bulk pack of B210LP; package contains 10. B501(A): Standard European flangeless mounting base. B501 BP: Bulk pack of B501; package contains 10. B200SR(A): Intelligent sounder base capable of producing sound output with ANSI Temporal 3 or continuous tone. Replaces B501 BH series bases in retrofit applications. B224RB(A): Plug-in System Sensor relay base. Screw termi- nals: up to 14 AWG (2.0 mm2). Relay type: Form -C. Rating: 2.0 A @ 30 VDC resistive; 0.3 A @ 110 VDC inductive; 1.0 A @ 30 VDC inductive. B224BI(A): Plug-in System Sensor isolator detector base. Maximum 25 devices between isolator bases (see DF -52389). ACCESSORIES F110: Retrofit flange to convert B210LP(A) to match the B350LP(A) profile, or to convert older high-profile bases to low -profile. F110BP: Bulk pack of F110; package contains 15. F210: Replacement flange for B210LP(A) base. RA100Z(A): Remote LED annunciator. 3 — 32 VDC. Mounts to a U.S. single -gang electrical box. For use with B501(A) and B210LP(A) bases only. SMB600: Surface mounting kit M02-04-00:Test magnet. M02-09-00: Test magnet with telescoping handle. XR2B: Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/or removal of detector heads from bases in high ceiling applica- tions. XP -4: Extension pole for XR2B. Comes in three 5 -foot (1.524 m) sections. T55-127-010: Detector removal tool without pole. BCK-200B: Black detector covers for use with SD355(A) only; box of 10. WCK-200B: White detector covers for use with SD355(A) only; box of 10. FireLite® Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. ©2015 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. ISO 9001 CERTI FIFO ENGINEERING & MRNONIBTURINR QUALITY SYSTEMS This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact Fire•Lite Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. www.firelite.com Page 2 of 2 — DF -52384:D • 2/11/2015 I (Bi2LX.' Addressable Manual Pull Station DF -52013:D • E-100 FIre•LITe®ALarms by Honeywell General The Fire -Lite BG-12LX is a state-of-the-art, dual -action (i.e., requires two motions to activate the station) pull station that includes an addressable interface (mounted inside) for Fire-Lite's addressable fire alarm control panels (FACPs) Because the BG-12LX is addressable, the control panel can display the exact location of the activated manual station. This leads fire personnel quickly to the location of the alarm. Features • Maintenance personnel can open station for inspection and address setting without causing an alarm condition. • Built-in bicolor LED, which is visible through the handle of the station, flashes in normal operation and latches steady red when in alarm. • Handle latches in down position and the word "ACTIVATED" appears to clearly indicate the station has been operated. • Captive screw terminals wire -ready for easy connection to SLC loop (accepts up to 12 AWG/3.25 mm2 wire). • Can be surface mounted (with SB -10 or SB -I/O) or semi - flush mounted. Semi -flush mount to a standard single - gang, double -gang, or 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical box. • Smooth dual -action design. • Meets ADAAG controls and operating mechanisms guide- lines (Section 4.1.3[13]); meets ADA requirement for 5 lb. maximum activation force. • Highly visible. • Attractive shape and textured finish. • Key reset. • Includes Braille text on station handle. • Optional trim ring (BG12TR). • Meets UL 38, Standard for Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. Construction Shell, door, and handle are molded of durable polycarbonate material with a textured finish. Specifications • Shipping Weight: 9.6 oz. (272.15 g) • Normal operating voltage: 24 VDC. • Maximum SLC loop voltage: 28.0 VDC. • (Maximum SLC standby current: 375 NA.' • Maximum SLC alarm current: 5 mA.' • Temperature Range: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) • Relative Humidity: 10% to 93% (noncondensing) • For use indoors in a dry location Installation The BG-12LX will mount semi -flush into a single -gang, double - gang, or standard 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical outlet box, or will surface mount to the model SB -10 or SB -I/O surface back - box. If the BG-12LX is being semi -flush mounted, then the optional trim ring (BG12TR) may be used. The BG12TR is usually needed for semi -flush mounting with 4" (10.16 cm) or double -gang boxes (not with single -gang boxes). Operation Pushing in, then pulling down on the handle causes it to latch in the down/activated position. Once latched, the word "ACTI- VATED" (in bright yellow) appears at the top of the handle, while a portion of the handle protrudes from the bottom of the station. To reset the station, simply unlock the station with the key and pull the door open. This action resets the handle; clos- ing the door automatically resets the switch. Each manual station, on command from the control panel, sends data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch. Two rotary decimal switches allow address settings (1 — 159 with Breakaway Tab removed for MS -9600 Series, 1 — 99 and MS-92000DLS, 1 — 50 for MS-9050UD). Architectural/Engineering Specifications Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non -coded, with a key - operated reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so designed that after actual Emergency Operation, they cannot be restored to normal except by use of a key. An operated sta- tion shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected as activated. Manual stations shall be constructed of red -colored polycarbonate material with clearly visible operat- ing instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in white letters, 1.00 inches (2.54 cm) or larger. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching backbox SB -10 or SB -I/O; or semi -flush mounting on a standard single -gang, double -gang, or 4" (10.16 cm) square electrical box, and shall be installed DF -52013:D • 4/13/2012 — Page 1 of 2 within the limits defined by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) or per national/local requirements. Manual Stations shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed. Manual stations shall connect with two wires to one of the con- trol panel SLC loops. The manual station shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch. Manual stations shall provide address setting by use of rotary decimal switches. Product Line Information BG-12LX: Dual -action addressable pull station. Includes key locking feature. (Listed for Canadian and non -Canadian appli- cations.) SB -10: Surface backbox; metal. SB -I/O: Surface backbox; plastic. BG12TR: Optional trim ring. 17003: Keys, set of two. Agency Listings and Approvals In some cases, certain modules or applications may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in pro- cess. Consult factory for latest listing status. • UL/ULC Listed: S711 (listed for Canadian and non -Cana- dian applications). • MEA: 67-02-E. • CSFM: 7150-0075:0184. • FM Approved. Patented: U.S. Patent No. D428,351; 6,380,846; 6,314,772; 6,632,108. FireLite® Alarms® is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. ©2012 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. ISO 9001 CERVIIIIFIEEP 6YCIf�EHllN a MANIIMCTOluf16 • QUALITY SYSTEMS This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact Fire.Lite Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. www.firelite.com Made in the U.S. A. Page 2 of 2 — DF -52013:D • 4/13/2012 Intelligent Addressable Devices II (D355PL(A)/DNRW InnovairFlex Intelligent Non -Relay Photoelectric Duct Smoke Detector DF -60430:C2 • E-650 Fire•uTe°ALarms by Honeywell General The Fire•Lite InnovairFlex® D355PL(A) intelligent non -relay photoelectric duct smoke detector and DNRW watertight non - relay photoelectric duct smoke detector feature a pivoting housing that fits both square and rectangular footprints capa- ble of mounting to a round or rectangular duct. DNRW duct smoke detector, with its NEMA -4 rating, is listed as a watertight, UV resistant enclosure providing protection against falling dirt, rain, and windblown dust, splashing and hose directed water, allowing operators to use the detector in the most extreme environments. These units sense smoke in the most challenging conditions, operating in airflow speeds of 100 to 4,000 feet per minute (0.5 to 20.32 m/s), temperatures of -4°F to 158°F (-20°C to 70°C), and a humidity range of 0 to 95 percent (non -condensing.) An improved cover design isolates the sensor head, which allows for ease of maintenance. A cover tamper feature indi- cates a trouble signal for a removed or improperly installed sensor cover. The Fire•Lite InnovairFlex housing provides a 3/ 4 -inch conduit knockout and ample space to facilitate easy wir- ing and mounting of a relay module. The Fire•Lite InnovairFlex duct smoke detector can be custom- ized to meet local codes and specifications without additional wiring. The new InnovairFlex product line is compatible with all previous Innovair models, including remote test accessories. Features • Photoelectric, integrated low -flow technology. • Air velocity rating from 100 ft/min to 4,000 ft/min (0.5 m/s to 20.32 m/s). • Versatile mounting options: square or rectangular configu- ration. • Broad ranges for operating temperature (-4°F to 158°F, - 20°C to 70°C) and humidity (0% to 95% non -condensing). • Patented sampling tube installs from front or back of the detector with no tools required. • Cover tamper signal. • Increased wiring space with a newly added 3/4" conduit knockout. • Available space within housing to accommodate mounting of a relay module. • Easily accessible code wheels on sensor head (sold sepa- rately). • Clear cover for convenient visual inspection. • Remote testing capability. • Requires com line power only. • Accommodates the installation of an addressable relay module, sold separately, (CRF -300) for applications requir- ing a Form -C relay. Specifications Size: (Rectangle) 14.38 in Width, 2.5 in (6.6 cm) Depth. Size: (Square) 7.75 in (19.7 cm) Length; 9 in (22.9 cm) Width; 2.5 in (6.35 cm) Depth. Weight: 1.6 lb (0.73 kg). Operating Temperature Range: -4°F to 158°F (-20°C to 70°C). Storage Temperature Range: -22°F to 158°F (-30°C to 70°C). Operating Humidity Range: 0% to 95% relative humidity (non -condensing). Air Duct Velocity 100 to 4,000 ft/min (0.5 to 20.32 m/s). (37 cm) Length; 5 in (12.7 cm) Accessories Fire•Lite provides system flexibility with a variety of accesso- ries, includirig tworemote test stations and different means of visible and audible system annunciation. As with our duct smoke detectors, all duct smoke detectors accessories are UL listed. D355PLs and DNRWs with a date code of 0013 or higher do not require external 24VDC for remote test applications when used with a remote -test -capable detector. ACCESSORY CURRENT LOADS AT 24 VDC Device Standby Alarm RA100Z OmA 12 mA Max RTS151/ RTS151KEY OmA 12mA Max Agency Listings and Approvals Consult product manual for lists of compatible UL -Listed devices. In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Con- sult factory for latest listing status. • UL: S1059. • ULC: S1059 DF -60430:C2 • 12/18/2012 — Page 1 of 2 • CSFM: 3242-1653:0209. • FM approved. Product Line Information D355PL: Intelligent non -relay photoelectric low flow smoke detector housing. Includes SD355R Detector. DNRW: Watertight intelligent non -relay photoelectric low flow duct smoke detector housing. Does not include detector head. SD355R(A): Remote test capable addressable low -profile photoelectric smoke detector. SD355(A): Addressable low -profile photoelectric smoke detec- tor. DCOIL: Remote test coil. Required for older DNR(W) duct detector housing. DST1: Metal sampling tube duct width up to 1 ft (0.3m). DST1.5: Metal sampling tube duct widths up to 1 ft to 2 ft (0.3 to 0.6 m). DST3: Metal sampling tube duct widths up to 2 ft to 4 ft (0.6 to 1.2 m). DST5: Metal sampling tube duct widths up to 4 ft to 8 ft (1.2 to 2.4 m). DST10: Metal sampling tube duct widths up to 8 ft to 12 ft (2.4 to 3.7 m). DH4000E-1: Weatherproof enclosure. ETX: Metal exhaust tube duct, width 1 ft (0.3 m). M02-04-00: Test magnet. P48-21-00: End cap for metal sampling tubes. RA100Z: Remote annunciator alarm LED. RTS151: Remote test station. RTS151 KEY: Remote test station with key lock. Important Note • DNRW duct detector housings with a date code of 0013 or higher do not require a DCOIL or auxiliary 24 VDC for remote test applications when used with a remote test capable detector. • DNRW duct detector housings with a date code of 0012 or earlier require a DCOIL and auxiliary 24 VDC power for remote test applications. Fire•Lite® Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. ©2012 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. ISO 9001 C E oze ENGINEERING A MANUFACTURING QUALITY SYSTEMS This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact Fire•Lite Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. www.firelite.com Made in the U.S. A. Page 2 of 2 — DF -60430:C2 • 12/18/2012 .SYSTEM SENSOR® Duct Smoke Detector Accessories Expand the versatility of the lnnovairFlexim line of duct smoke detectors with System Sensor notification and test accessories. Available Accessories APA151 MHR MHW RA100Z/RA100ZA RTS151 RTS151KEY RTS2 AOS RTS2-AOS Piezo Annunciator Mini -Horn, Red Mini -Horn, White Remote Annunciator Remote Test Station Remote Test Station with Key Multi -Signaling Accessory Add -On Strobe Multi -Signaling Accessory Agency Listings LISTED S2522 APPROVED 3034401 7300-1653:0212 7300-1653:0211 7135-1653:0196 9080301 C E Duct smoke detector accessories add functionality to the duct smoke detection system by allowing quick, convenient inspections at eye level and effective audible and visible notification options. All System Sensor duct smoke detectors and accessories are UL listed. The APA151 piezo annunciator, which replaces the APA451 with a new, improved look, provides an audible alarm signal, a red LED to indicate alarm status, and a green LED to indicate power status. It is intended for use with System Sensor 4 -wire conventional duct smoke detector applications without a system control panel, to comply with NFPA 90A. The MHR and MHW SpectrAlerte Advance mini -horns feature temporal or continuous tones at high and low volume settings. Their small footprint allows mounting to single -gang back boxes for applications where a small device is desired. The RA100Z and RA100ZA remote annunciators are designed for both conventional and intelligent applications. Their red LED provides visual indication of an alarm condition. The RTS1 51 and RTS1 51 KEY remote test stations are automatic fire detector accessories designed to test duct smoke detectors from a convenient location. For 4 -wire detectors, the RTS151KEY test station features a multi -colored LED that alternates between steady green and red. For 2 -wire detectors, the LED illuminates red for alarm. The RTS2 and RTS2-AOS multi -signaling accessories are designed to work with InnovairFlex 4 -wire conventional duct smoke detectors. These accessories include a key switch that can be used to select one of two connected sensors to be tested, reset, or both by a push button switch. They also enable sensitivity measurements using the SENS-RDR sensitivity reader (sold separately). The AOS (Add -On Strobe) is an optional accessory included with the RTS2- AOS model. Specifications, Duct Smoke Detector Accessories Voltage Regulated 24 VDC Operating Voltage 16 to 33 VDC Maximum Alarm Current 30 mA Temperature Range 0°C to 49°C (32°F to 120°F) Relative Humidity 10 to 93% non -condensing Wire Gauge 12 to 18 AWG Dimensions 4.6"Hx2.9"Wx.45"D ;MHR/MHW ,SpectrAIertgAdvance)Mmi-Horns Voltage Sounder Current Draw Regulated 12 DC or FWR (Full Wave Rectified) or Regulated 24 VDC or RNR 22 mA RMS max. at 8 to 17.5 Volts DC 29 mA RMS max. at 16 to 33 Volts DC Temperature Range 0°C to 49°C (32°F to 120°F) Humidity Range 10 to 93% non -condensing Nominal Sounder 3 kHz Frequency Wire Gauge 12 to18AWG Dimensions 4.6"Hx2.9"Wx0.45"D ,RA100Z/RA100ZARemote Annunciator Voltage Range Maximum Alarm Current Conventional System: 3.1 to 32 VDC Intelligent System: 18 to 32 VDC 10 mA Dimensions 4.6"Hx2.8"Wx1.3"D • (RTS151 UL S4011 e 41, RA100Z UL S2522 RTS151 KEY UL S2522 MHW UL S4011 ,RTS151 RemoteTest Station Power Requirements Test Switch Alarm LED: 2.8 to 32 VDC, 12 mA max. Total Current: 105 mA max. 10 VA@32VDC Reset Switch 10VAQ32VDC Alarm Response Time 40 seconds max. Temperature Range —10°C to 60°C (14°F to 140°F) Relative Humidity 95% non -condensing Wire Gauge 14 to 18 AWG Dimensions 4.8"Hx2.90"Wx 1.4"D RTS151KEY1RemoteTest St'ation,witti_Key Power Requirements Power LED (Green): 14 to 35 VDC, 12 mA max. Alarm LED (Red): 2.8 to 32 VDC, 12 mA max. Total Current: 105 mA max. Alarm Response Time 40 seconds max. Temperature Range —10°C to 60°C (14°F to 140°F) Relative Humidity 95% non -condensing Wire Gauge 14 to18AWG Dimensions 4.6"Hx2.75"Wx1.8"D ;RTS2_and _RTS2-AOS Multi -signaling Accessory Voltage 20 to 29 VDC Power Requirements Standby: 3.0 mA max. Trouble: 16.0 mA max. Alarm without strobe: 30 mA max. Alarm with strobe: 55 mA max. Sounder 85 dBA at ten feet Temperature Range —10°C to 60°C (14°F to 140°F) Relative Humidity 95% non -condensing Wire Gauge 14 to 22 AWG Dimensions 4.8"Wx5.3"Hx1.6"D For the very latest product specifications and listing information, please visit the System Sensor Web site at www.systemsensor.com. APA151 UL S4011 r i MHR UL S4011 RTS2-AOS UL S2522 AOS *T SYSTEM �$ SENSOR' 3825 Ohio Avenue • St. Charles, IL 60174 Phone: 800-SENSOR2 • Fax: 630-377-6495 www.systemsensor.com a2013 System Sensor Product specifications subject to change without notice. Visit systemsensor.com for cunent product information, including the latest version of this data sheet. HVDS20202. 8/13 FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL BOOK TWIN PEAKS 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY, TUKWILA, WA 98188 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODULES STANLEY Convergent Security Solutions, Inc. 2700 RICHARDS ROAD SUITE 202 BELLEVUE, WA 98005 425-957-7000 PHONE 425-746-0084 FAX RI IRMITTAI RflflK RY HFI P(;ATF-INC. r. lM - 1 RRR 774 14A2 MMF-300(A) Series, MDF -300 Addressable Monitor Modules DF -52121:E • E-325 Flre-LITe°ALarms by Honeywell General Four different monitor modules are available for Fire•Lite's intelligent control panels to suit a variety of applications. Moni- tor modules are used to supervise a circuit of dry -contact input devices, such as conventional heat detectors and pull stations, or monitor and power a circuit of two -wire smoke detectors (MMF-302(A)). MMF-300(A) is a standard -sized module (typically mounts to a 4" [10.16 cm] square box) that supervises either a Style D (Class A) or Style B (Class B) circuit of dry -contact input devices. MMF-301(A) is a miniature monitor module a mere 1.3" (3.302 cm) H x 2.75" (6.985 cm) W x 0.65" (1.651 cm) D that super- vises a Style B (Class B) circuit of dry -contact input devices. Its compact design allows the MMF-301(A) to be mounted in a single -gang box behind the device it monitors. MMF-302(A) is a standard -sized module used to monitor and supervise compatible two -wire, 24 volt, smoke detectors on a Style D (Class A) or Style B (Class B) circuit. MDF -300(A) is a standard -sized dual monitor module used to monitor and supervise two independent two -wire Style B (Class B) dry -contact initiating device circuits (IDCs) at two separate, consecutive addresses in intelligent, two -wire sys- tems. LiteSpeedTM is a communication protocol developed by Fire•Lite Engineering that greatly increases the speed of com- munication between analog intelligent devices. Intelligent devices communicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices within the group has new information, the panel CPU stops the group poll and concentrates on single points. The net effect is response speed greater than five times that of other communication protocols. MMF-300(A) Monitor Module • Built-in type identification automatically identifies this device as a monitor module to the control panel. • Powered directly by two -wire SLC loop. No additional power required. • High noise (EMF/RFI) immunity. • SEMS screws with clamping plates for ease of wiring. • Direct -dial entry of address: 01 — 159 on MS -9600 series panels, 01 — 99 on other compatible systems. • LED flashes during normal operation and latches on steady to indicate alarm. The MMF-300(A) Monitor Module is intended for use in intelli- gent, two -wire systems, where the individual address of each module is selected using the built-in rotary switches. It pro- vides either a two -wire or four -wire fault-tolerant Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) for normally -open -contact fire alarm and supervisory devices. The module has a panel -controlled LED indicator. The MMF-300(A) can be used to replace M300(A) modules in existing systems. MMF-300(A) APPLICATIONS Use to monitor a zone of four -wire smoke detectors, manual fire alarm pull stations, waterflow devices, or other normally - open dry -contact alarm activation devices. May also be used to monitor normally -open supervisory devices with special MOMS. ALMn •, KCESSOfrf COSASSOKISS 1.0,111111/0 KCESSOSY TO a°v •'.) SLC -.• -" TS O.' .1.) ftneovx Of uten rotareurto ALL MOMS .6 ISIVIG M1.9 17 SUP TS SUP .14 ) 1y ') :Ft; WE. ,i,4-^701 T� MMF-300(A) (Type H) supervisory indication at the control panel. Monitored circuit may be wired as an NFPA Style B (Class B) or Style D (Class A) Initiating Device Circuit. A 47K Ohm End -of -Line Resistor (provided) terminates the Style B circuit. No resistor is required for supervision of the Style D circuit. MMF-300(A) OPERATION Each MMF-300(A) uses one of the available module addresses on an SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the control panel and reports its type and the status (open/nor- mal/short) of its Initiating Device Circuit (IDC). A flashing LED indicates that the module is in communication with the control panel. The LED latches steady on alarm (subject to current limitations on the loop). MMF-300(A) SPECIFICATIONS Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. Maximum current draw: 5.0 mA (LED on). Average operating current: 375 pA (LED flashing), 1 com- munication every 5 seconds, 47k EOL. Maximum IDC wiring resistance: 1500 Ohms. Maximum IDC Voltage: 11 Volts. EOL resistance: 47K Ohms. Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C). Humidity range: 10% to 93% noncondensing. Dimensions: 4.5" (11.43 cm) high x 4" (10.16 cm) wide x 1.25" (3.175 cm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (10.16 cm) square x 2.125" (5.398 cm) deep box. (MMF-301(A) Mini Monitor Module • Built-in type identification automatically identifies this device as a monitor module to the panel. • Powered directly by two -wire SLC loop. No additional power required. • High noise (EMF/RFI) immunity. DF -52121:E • 07/30/2015 — Page 1 of 4 • Tinned, stripped leads for ease of wiring. • Direct -dial entry of address: 01 — 159 on MS -9600 series panels, 01 — 99 on other compatible systems The MMF-301(A) Mini Monitor Module can be installed in a single -gang junction directly behind the monitored unit. Its small size and light weight allow it to be installed without rigid mounting. The MMF-301(A) is intended for use in intelligent, two -wire systems where the individual address of each module is selected using rotary switches. It provides a two -wire initiat- ing device circuit for normally -open -contact fire alarm devices. The MMF-301(A) can be used to replace M301(A) modules in existing systems. MMF-301(A) APPLICATIONS Use to monitor a single device or a zone of four -wire smoke detectors, manual fire alarm pull stations, waterflow devices, or other normally -open dry -contact devices. May also be used to monitor normally -open supervisory devices with special supervisory indication at the control panel. Monitored circuit/ device is wired as an NFPA Style B (Class B) Initiating Device Circuit. A 47K Ohm End -of -Line Resistor (provided) terminates the circuit. MMF-301(A) OPERATION Each MMF-301(A) uses one of the available module addresses on an SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the control panel and reports its type and the status (open/nor- mal/short) of its Initiating Device Circuit (IDC). MMF-301(A) SPECIFICATIONS Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. Average operating current(350 pA,1;communication every 5 seconds, 47k EOL; (600 pA Maxi(Communicating, IDC Shorted). Maximum IDC wiring resistance: 1500 Ohms. Maximum IDC Voltage: 11 Volts. Maximum IDC Current: 450 pA. EOL resistance: 47K Ohms. Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C). Humidity range: 10% to 93% noncondensing. Dimensions: 1.3" (3.302 cm) high x 2.75" (6.985 cm) wide x 0.65" (1.651 cm) deep. Wire length: 6" (15.24 cm) minimum. MMF-302(A) Interface Module • Supports compatible two -wire smoke detectors. • Supervises IDC wiring and connection of external power source. • High noise (EMF/RFI) immunity. • SEMS screws with clamping plates for ease of wiring. • Direct -dial entry entry of address: 01 — 159 on MS -9600 series panels, 01 — 99 on other compatible systems. • LED flashes during normal operation. • LED latches steady to indicate alarm on command from control panel. The MMF-302(A) Interface Module is intended for use in intelli- gent, addressable systems, where the individual address of each module is selected using built-in rotary switches. This module allows intelligent panels to interface and monitor two - wire conventional smoke detectors. It transmits the status (normal, open, or alarm) of one full zone of conventional detectors back to the control panel. All two -wire detectors being monitored must be UL compatible with the module. The MMF-302(A) can be used to replace M302(A) modules in existing systems. MMF-302 (A) APPLICATIONS Use the MMF-302(A) to monitor a zone of two -wire smoke detectors. The monitored circuit may be wired as an NFPA Style B (Class B) or Style D (Class A) Initiating Device Circuit. A 3.9 K Ohm End -of -Line Resistor (provided) terminates the end of the Style B or D (class B or A) circuit (maximum IDC loop resistance is 25 Ohms). Install ELR across terminals 8 and 9 for Style D application. MMF-302(A) OPERATION Each MMF-302(A) uses one of the available module addresses on an SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the control panel and reports its type and the status (open/nor- mal/short) of its Initiating Device Circuit (IDC). A flashing LED indicates that the module is in communication with the control panel. The LED latches steady on alarm (subject to current limitations on the loop). MMF-302(A) SPECIFICATIONS Nominal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. Maximum current draw: 5.1 mA (LED on). Maximum IDC wiring resistance: 25 Ohms. Average operating current: 270 pA, 1 communication and 1 LED flash every 5 seconds, 3.9k eol. EOL resistance: 3.9K Ohms. External supply voltage (between Terminals T10 and T11): • DC voltage: 24 volts power limited. • Ripple voltage: 0.1 Vrms maximum. • Current: 90 mA per module maximum. Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C). Humidity range: 10% to 93% noncondensing. Dimensions: 4.5" (11.43 cm) high x 4" (10.16 cm) wide x 1.25" (3.175 cm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (10.16 cm) square x 2.125" (5.398 cm) deep box. (MDF -300('A) Dual Monitor Module The MDF -300(A) Dual Monitor Module is intended for use in intelligent, two -wire systems. It provides two independent two - wire initiating device circuits (IDCs) at two separate, consecutive addresses. It is capable of monitoring normally open contact fire alarm and supervisory devices. The module has a single panel - controlled LED. Page 2 of 4 — DF -52121:E • 07/30/2015 NOTE: The MDF -300(A) provides two Style B (Class B) IDC cir- cuits ONLY. Style D (Class A) IDC circuits are NOT supported in any application. MDF -300(A) SPECIFICATIONS Normal operating voltage range: 15 to 32 VDC. Maximum current draw: 6.4 mA (LED on :a Average operatingcurrent:-750 pA (LED flashing); Maximum IDC wiring resistance: 1,500 Ohms. Maximum IDC Voltage: 11 Volts. Maximum IOC Current: 240 pA EOL resistance: 47K Ohms. Temperature range: 32° to 120°F (0° to 49°C). Humidity range: 10% to 93% (non -condensing). Dimensions: 4.5" (11.43 cm) high x 4" (10.16 cm) wide x 1.25" (3.175 cm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (10.16 cm) square x 2.125" (5.398 cm) deep box. MDF -300(A) AUTOMATIC ADDRESSING The MDF -300(A) automatically assigns itself to two address- able points, starting with the original address. For example, if the MDF -300(A) is set to address "26", then it will automati- cally assign itself to addresses "26" and "27". NOTE: "Ones" addresses on the MDF -300(A) are 0, 2, 4, 6, or 8 only. Terminals 6 and 7 use the first address, and terminals 8 and 9 use the second address. CAUTION: Avoid duplicating addresses on the system. Installation MMF-300(A), MMF-302(A), and MDF -300(A) modules mount directly to a standard 4" (10.16 cm) square, 2.125" (5.398 cm) deep, electrical box. They may also be mounted to the SMB500 surface -mount box. Mounting hardware and installa- tion instructions are provided with each module. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regu- lations. These modules are intended for power -limited wiring only. The MMF-301(A) module is intended to be wired and mounted without rigid connections inside a standard electrical box. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. Agency Listings and Approvals In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult fac- tory for latest listing status. • UL: S2424. • ULC: S2424. • FM Approved. • CSFM: 7300-0075:0185. • MEA: 72-01-E. Product Line Information NOTE: "A" suffix indicates ULC -listed model. MMF-300(A): Monitor module. MMF-301(A): Monitor module, miniature. MMF-302(A): Monitor module, two -wire detectors. MDF -300(A): Monitor module, dual, two independent Class B circuits. SMB500: Optional surface -mount backbox. NOTE: See installation instructions and refer to the SLC Wiring Manual, PN 51309. Architects'/Engineers' Specifications Specifications of these devices and all FireLite products are available from FireLite. DF -52121:E • 07/30/2015 — Page 3 of 4 Fire Lite® is a registered trademark and LiteSpeedT"' and FireWatchTM are trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. • ©2015 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. ISO 9001 CERTIFIES UF6INEMIN6 6 MAM IFACIURIN6 QUALITY SYSTEMS This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact Fire•Lite Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. www.firelite.com Page 4 of 4 — DF -52121:E • 07/30/2015 Addressable Devices i(cRF-300A) Relay Module df -60379:A1 • E-400 Fire uTe farms by Honeywell General The CRF -300(A) Addressable Relay Module provides the sys- tem with a dry -contact output for activating a variety of auxil- iary devices, such as fans, door holders, dampers, control equipment, etc. Addressability allows the dry contact to be activated through panel programming, on a select basis. LiteSpeedTM is a communication protocol developed by Fire•Lite Engineering that greatly enhances the speed of com- munication between analog intelligent devices. Intelligent devices communicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices within the group has new information, the panel CPU stops the group poll and concentrates on single points. The net effect is response speed greater than five times that of other designs. Features • Built-in type identification automatically identifies these devices to the control panel. • Internal circuitry and relay powered directly by two -wire SLC loop. • Integral LED "blinks" green each time a communication is received from the control panel and turns on in steady red when activated. • High noise immunity (EMF/RFI). • Wide viewing angle of LED. • SEMS screws with clamping plates for wiring ease. • Direct -dial entry of address: 01— 159 for MS -9600(A) series panels, 01 — 99 on MS-92000DLS(A) and MS-9050UD(A). Applications The CRF -300(A) may be programmed to operate dry contacts for door holders, Air Handling Unit shutdown, etc., and to reset four -wire smoke detector power. Construction • The face plate is made of off-white heat -resistant plastic. • Controls include two rotary switches for direct -dial entry of address setting. • The CRF -300(A) is configured for a single Class B (Style Y) or Class A (Style Z) Notification Appliance Circuit. • The CRF -300(A) provides two Form -C dry contacts that switch together. Operation Each CRF -300(A) uses one of the addresses on a SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the control panel and reports its type and status, including the open/normal/short status of its Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC). The LED blinks with each poll received. On command, it activates its internal relay. NOTE: Open/short supervision is suspended with the CRF -300. Rotary switches set a unique address for each module. The address may be set before or after mounting. The built-in TYPE CODE (not settable) will identify the module to the con- trol panel, so as to differentiate between a control module and a relay module. CRF -300(A) 8 Specifications Normal operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. Maximum SLC current;draw:_6.5 mA (LED on). Average operating current: 230 pA direct poll (CLIP mode), 255 pA group poll (LiteSpeed mode) with LED flashing. EOL resistance: not used. Temperature range: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C). Humidity range: 10% to 93% non -condensing. Dimensions: 4.5" (11.43 cm) high x 4" (10.16 cm) wide x 1.25" (3.175 cm) deep. Mounts to a 4" (10.16 cm) square x 2.125" (5.398 mm) deep box. Relay Contact Ratings Load Description Application Maximum Voltage Current Rating Resistive Non -Coded 30 VDC 3.0 A Resistive Coded 30 VDC 2.0 A Resistive Non -Coded 110 VDC 0.9 A Resistive Non -Coded 125 VAC 0.9 A Inductive (UR=5ms) Coded 30 VDC 0.5 A Inductive (UR=2ms) Coded 30 VDC 1.0 A Inductive (PF=0.35) Non -Coded 125 VAC 0.5 A df -60379:A1 • 08/04/09 — Page 1 of 2 Agency Listings and Approvals In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult fac- tory for latest listing status. • UL: S2424 • ULC: S2424 • FM approved • CSFM: 7300-0075:185 • MEA: 72-01-E Product Line Information CRF -300(A): Intelligent addressable relay module. : Intelligent addressable relay module, ULC listed model. SMB500: Optional surface -mount backbox. NOTE: For installation instructions, see document 156-1190-005 and refer to the SLC Wiring Manual, document 51309. LiteSpeedTM is a trademark and Fire•Lite® Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. ©2009 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. ISO 9001 CER - I F I E ED ENGINEERING 8 MANUFACTURING QUALITY SYSTEMS This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact Fire•Lite Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. www.firelite.com Made in the U.S. A Page 2 of 2 — df -60379:A1 • 08/04/09 FIRE ALARM SUBMITTAL BOOK TWIN PEAKS 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY, TUKWILA, WA 98188 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES STANLEY Convergent Security Solutions, Inc. 2700 RICHARDS ROAD SUITE 202 BELLEVUE, WA 98005 425-957-7000 PHONE 425-746-0084 FAX RI IRMITTAI RCflK RY HFI (.C)M - 1 RRR 274 148,7 *Th, SYSTEM SENSOR Outdoor Selectable - Output Horns, Strobes, and Horn Strobes for Wall Applications SpectrAlert® Advance outdoor audible visible products are rich with features that cut installation times and maximize profits. Features • Weatherproof per NEMA 4X, IP56 • Listed to UL 1638 (strobe) and UL 464 (horn) • Compatible with System Sensor synchronization protocol and legacy SpectrAlert products • Field -selectable candela settings: 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, and 185 • Automatic selection of 12- or 24 -volt operation at 15 and 15/75 candela • Rotary switch for horn tone and three volume selections • Horn rated at 88+ dBA at 16 volts • Rated from —40°F to 151°F • Universal mounting plate with an onboard shorting spring that tests wiring continuity before devices are installed • Plug-in design with minimal intrusion into the back box • Tamper-resistant construction • Listed for ceiling or wall mounting Agency Listings SIGNALING LISTED S4011 (chimes, horn strobes, horns) APPROVED S3593 (outdoor and alert strobes) 3023572 MEA approved MEA452-05-E 7300-1653 187 (outdoor strobes) 7125-1653.188 (horn strobes, chime strobes) 7135-1653:189 (horns, chimes) SPECTFert A® V A N C E SpectrAlert Advance offers the broadest line of outdoor horns, strobes, and horn strobes in the industry. With white or red plastic housings, wall or ceiling mounting options, and plain or FIRE -printed devices, SpectrAlert Advance can meet virtually any application requirement, including indoor, outdoor, wet, and dry applications in temperatures from —40°F to 151°F. Like the entire SpectrAlert Advance line, outdoor horns, strobes, and horn strobes for wall applications include a variety of features that increase application flexibility and simplify installation. First, field -selectable settings, including candela, automatic selection of 12- or 24 -volt operation, horn tones, and three volume options enable installers to easily adapt devices to meet requirements. Next, SpectrAlert Advance devices use a universal mounting plate for both wall and ceiling applications. This mounting plate includes an onboard shorting spring that ensures wiring continuity before devices are installed, so installers can verify proper wiring without mounting the devices and exposing them to potential construction damage. Once the plates are mounted, all SpectrAlert Advance devices utilize a plug-in design with a single captured screw to speed installation and virtually eliminate costly ground faults. Outdoor devices ship with weatherproof plastic back boxes (metal back boxes are available separately) that accommodate in -and - out wiring for daisy chaining devices. Plastic back boxes feature removable side flanges and improved resistance to saltwater corrosion. Knock -outs located on the back eliminate the need to drill holes for screw-in mounting. Plastic and metal weatherproof back boxes come with 3/4 -inch top and bottom conduit entries and 3/4 -inch knock -outs at the back. A screw-in NPT plug with an 0 -ring gasket for a watertight seal is included with each back box. SpectrAlert Advance Outdoor Horn, Strobe, and Horn Strobe Specifications Architect/Engineer Specifications General SpectrAlert Advance outdoor horns, strobes, and horn strobes shall mount to a weatherproof back box. A universal mounting plate shall be used for mounting ceiling and wall products. The notification appliance circuit wiring shall terminate at the universal mounting plate. Also, SpectrAlert Advance products, when used with the Sync•Circuit'° Module accessory, shall be powered from a non -coded notification appliance circuit output and shall operate on a nominal 12 or 24 volts. When used with the Sync•Circuit Module, 12 -volt -rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 9 and 17.5 volts; 24 -volt -rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 17 and 33 volts. Outdoor SpectrAlert Advance products shall operate between —40 and 151 degrees Fahrenheit from a regulated DC or full -wave rectified unfiltered power supply. Strobes and horn strobes shall have field -selectable candela settings including 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, and 185. Strobe The strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance Model listed to UL 1971 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The strobe shall be wired as a primary -signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe's entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The strobe must be installed with its weatherproof back box in order to remain outdoor approved per UL. The strobe shall be suitable for use in wet environments. Horn Strobe Combination The horn strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance Model listed to UL 1971 and UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The horn strobe shall be wired as a primary -signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe's entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The horn shall have three audibility options and an option to switch between a temporal three pattern and a non -temporal (continuous) pattern. These options shall be set by a multiple position switch. On four -wire products, the strobe shall be powered independently of the sounder. The horn or horn strobe models shall operate on a coded or non -coded power supply. The horn strobe must be installed with its weatherproof back box in order to remain outdoor approved per UL. The horn strobe shall be suitable for use in wet environments. Physical/Electrical Specifications Operating Temperature —40°F to 151°F (-40°C to 66°C) Strobe Flash Rate 1 flash per second Nominal Voltage Regulated 12 DC/FWR or regulated 24 DC/FWR1 Operating Voltage Rangel 8 to 17.5 V (12 V nominal) or 16 to 33 V (24 V nominal) Input Terminal Wire Gauge 12 to18AWG Wall -Mount Dimensions (including lens) Horn Dimensions 5.6"Lx4.7"Wx2.5"D(142mmLx119mmWx64mmD) 5.6"Lx4.7"Wx 1.3"D(142mmLx 119 mm W x 33 mm D) Wall -Mount Weatherproof Back Box Dimensions (SA-WBB) 5.7"L x 5.1"W x 2.0"D (145 mm L x 130 mm W x 51 mm D) Notes: 1. Full Wave Rectified (FWR) voltage is a non-regulated, time -varying power source that is used on some power supply and panel outputs. 2. P, S, PC, and SC products will operate at 12 V nominal only for 15 and 15/75 cd. AVDS01201 UL Current Draw Data UL Max. Strobe Current Draw (mA RMS) 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts Candela DC FWR DC FWR Standard Candela Range 15 123 128 66 71 15/75 142 148 77 81 30 75 95 110 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 94 158 181 202 UL Max. Horn Current Draw (mA RMS) Sound Pattern dB 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts DC FWR DC FWR Temporal Temporal High Medium 57 55 69 75 44 49 58 69 96 Temporal 153 Non -Temporal 176 Non -Temporal 195 Non -Temporal High Candela Range 115 NA NA 135 NA NA 210 205 Coded 228 207 Coded 150 NA 177 NA NA NA 246 220 Coded 281 251 185 NA NA 286 258 Low High Medium Low High Medium Low 38 57 42 41 57 44 40 44 56 50 44 55 51 46 44 69 60 50 69 56 52 48 75 69 50 75 69 50 UL Max. Current Draw (mA RMS), 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, Standard Candela Range (15=115 cd) DC Input 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts 15 15/75 (15, 15/75 (30 75 95 110 115 Temporal High Temporal Medium Temporal Low Non -Temporal High 137 132 132 141 147 144 143 152 (79 69 66 91 90 80 77 100 (107/ 97 93 116 176 157 154 176 194 182 179 201 212 201 198 221 218 210 207 229 Non -Temporal Medium 133 145 75 85 102 163 187 207 216 Non -Temporal Low FWR Input 131 . 144 68 79 96 156 182 201 210 Temporal High Temporal Medium 136 155 129 152 88 97 112 168 190 210 218 78 88 103 160 184 202 206 Temporal Low Non -Temporal High Non -Temporal Medium Non -Temporal Low 129 142 134 132 151 161 155 154 76 103 85 80 86 112 95 90 101 126 110 105 160 181 166 161 184 203 189 184 194 221 208 202 201 229 216 211 UL Max. Current Draw ,(mA'RMS), 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, High Candela Range (1357185 cd) DC Input 16-33 Volts 135 150 177 185 FWR Input 16-33 Volts 135 150 177 185 Temporal High Temporal Medium Temporal Low Non -Temporal High Non -Temporal Medium Non -Temporal Low Candela Derating 245 259 290 297 Temporal High 235 253 288 297 Temporal Medium 232 251 282 292 Temporal Low 255 270 303 309 Non -Temporal High 242 259 293 299 Non -Temporal Medium 238 254 291 295 Non -Temporal Low 215 209 207 233 219 214 231 224 221 248 232 229 258 250 248 275 262 256 265 258 256 281 267 262 For K series products used at low temperatures, listed candela ratings must be reduced in accordance with this table. Strobe Output (cd) Listed Candela Candela rating at —40°F 15 Do not use below 32°F 15/75 30 75 44 95 70 110 110 115 115 135 135 150 150 177 177 185 185 Horn Tones and Sound Output Data Horn and Horn Strobe Output (dBA) Switch Sound 8-17.5 16-33 24 -Volt Nominal Volts Volts Reverberant Anechoic Position Pattern dB DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR 1 Temporal 2 Temporal 3 Temporal 4 Non - Temporal High Medium Low High 78 74 71 78 74 73 84 80 76 84 80 76 88 86 83 88 86 80 99 98 96 96 94 89 82 82 88 88 93 92 100 100 5 Non- Medium 78 78 85 85 90 90 98 98 Temporal 6 Non- Low Temporal 75 75 81 81 88 84 96 92 7t- gt gt Coded Coded Coded High 82 Medium 78 Low 75 82 78 75 88 88 85 85 81 81 93 90 88 92 90 85 101 101 97 98 96 92 tSettings 7, 8, and 9 are not available on 2 -wire horn strobe. AVDS01201 SpectrAlert Advance Diagrams Wall -Mount Horn Strobes Wall Plastic Weatherproof Back Box Wall -Mount Horn Strobe with Plastic Weatherproof Back Box SpectrAlert Advance Ordering Information Model ;;, Description Wall Horn Strobes P2RK't 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) P2RHK*t 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, Red, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) P2WK*t 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, White, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) P2WHK*t 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, White, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) P4RKt 4 -Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) P4WK 4 -Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, White, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) P2RHK-120 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, Red, Outdoor, 120 V (includes plastic weatherproof back box) Wall Strobes SRK*t Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) SRHK*t Strobe, High cd, Red, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) SWK*t Strobe, Standard cd, White, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) SWHK*t Strobe, High cd, White, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) Horns HRKt Horn, Red, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) Accessories SA-WBB Red, Metal Weatherproof Back Box SA-WBBW White, Metal Weatherproof Back Box Notes: * Add "-P" to model number for plain housing (no "FIRE" marking on cover), e.g., P2RK-P. t Add "-R" to model number for weatherproof replacement device (no back box included), only for use with weatherproof outdoor flush mounting plate, WTP and WTPW. "Standard cd" refers to strobes that include 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, and 115 candela settings. "High cd" refers to strobes that include 135, 150, 177, and 185 candela settings. When replacing standard outdoor units both the device and back box must be replaced. *T SYSTEM $ SENSOR' 3825 Ohio Avenue • St. Charles, IL 60174 Phone: 800-SENSOR2 • Fax: 630-377-6495 02012 System Sensor Product specifications subject to change without notice Visit systemsensor corn for current product information, including the latest version of this data sheet AVDS01201 • 3/12 Th SYSTEM SENSOR Outdoor Selectable - Output Strobes and Horn Strobes for Ceiling Applications SpectrAlert® Advance outdoor audible visible products are rich with features that cut installation times and maximize profits. Features • Weatherproof NEMA 4X, IP56 rated • Listed to UL 1638 (strobe) and UL 464 (horn) • Compatible with System Sensor synchronization protocol and legacy SpectrAlert products • Field -selectable candela settings: 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, and 185 • Automatic selection of 12- or 24 -volt operation at 15 and 15/75 candela • Rotary switch for horn tone and three volume selections • Horn rated at 88+ dBA at 16 volts • Rated from —40°F to 151°F • Universal mounting plate with an onboard shorting spring that tests wiring continuity before devices are installed • Plug-in design with minimal intrusion into the back box • Tamper-resistant construction • Listed for ceiling or wall mounting Agency Listings SIGNALING LISTED 54011 (chimes, horn strobes, horns) APPROVED S3593 (outdoor and alert strobes) 3023572 MEA approved MEA452-05-E 7300-1653 187 (outdoor strobes) 7125-1653 188 (horn strobes, chime strobes) 7135-1653.189 (horns, chimes) SPECTRAlert f✓frtEo'SR >i SS r e•nesr<o SpectrAlert Advance offers the broadest line of outdoor horns, strobes, and horn strobes in the industry. With white or red plastic housings, wall or ceiling mounting options, and plain or FIRE -printed devices, SpectrAlert Advance can meet virtually any application requirement, including indoor, outdoor, wet, and dry applications in temperatures from —40°F to 151°F. Like the entire SpectrAlert Advance line, outdoor strobes and horn strobes for ceiling applications include a variety of features that increase application flexibility and simplify installation. First, field - selectable settings, including candela, automatic selection of 12- or 24 -volt operation, horn tones, and three volume options enable installers to easily adapt devices to meet requirements: Next, SpectrAlert Advance devices use a universal mounting plate for both wall and ceiling applications. This mounting plate includes an onboard shorting spring that ensures wiring continuity before devices are installed, so installers can verify proper wiring without mounting the devices and exposing them to potential construction damage. Once the plates are mounted, all SpectrAlert Advance devices utilize a plug-in design with a single captured screw to speed installation and virtually eliminate costly ground faults. Outdoor devices ship with weatherproof plastic back boxes (metal back boxes are available separately) that accommodate in -and - out wiring for daisy chaining devices. Plastic back boxes feature removable side flanges and improved resistance to saltwater corrosion. Plastic and metal weatherproof back boxes come with 3/4 -inch top and bottom conduit entries and 3/4 -inch knock -outs at the back. Three screw-in NPT plugs with 0 -ring gaskets for a watertight seal is included with each back box. SpectrAlert Advance Outdoor Strobe, and Horn Strobe Specifications Architect/EngineerSpecifications General SpectrAlert Advance outdoor horns, strobes, and horn strobes shall mount to a weatherproof back box. A universal mounting plate shall be used for mounting ceiling and wall products. The notification appliance circuit wiring shall terminate at the universal mounting plate. Also, SpectrAlert Advance products, when used with the Sync•Circuit'° Module accessory, shall be powered from a non -coded notification appliance circuit output and shall operate on a nominal 12 or 24 volts. When used with the Sync•Circuit Module, 12 -volt -rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 8.5 and 17.5 volts; 24 -volt -rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 16.5 and 33 volts. Outdoor SpectrAlert Advance products shall operate between —40 and 151 degrees Fahrenheit from a regulated DC or full - wave rectified unfiltered power supply. Strobes and horn strobes shall have field -selectable candela settings including 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, and 185. Strobe The strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance Model listed to UL 1638 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The strobe shall be wired as a primary -signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe's entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The strobe must be installed with its weatherproof back box in order to remain outdoor approved per UL. The strobe shall be suitable for use in wet environments. Horn Strobe Combination The horn strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance Model listed to UL 1638 and UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The horn strobe shall be wired as a primary -signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe's entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The horn shall have three audibility options and an option to switch between a temporal three pattern and a non -temporal (continuous) pattern. These options shall be set by a multiple position switch. On four - wire products, the strobe shall be powered independently of the sounder. The horn strobe on a 2 -wire model shall work on a non -coded power supply. The horn on 4 -wire horn strobe models shall operate on a coded or non -coded power supply. The horn strobe must be installed with its weatherproof back box in order to remain outdoor listed per UL. The horn strobe shall be suitable for use in wet environments. Physical/Electrical Specifications Operating Temperature —40°F to 151°F (-40°C to 66°C) Strobe Flash Rate 1 flash per second Nominal Voltage Regulated 12 DC/FWR or regulated 24 DC/RA/R1 Operating Voltage Rangel 8 to 17.5 V (12 V nominal) or 16 to 33 V (24 V nominal) Operating Voltage Range with MDL3 Sync Module 8.5 to 17.5V (12 V nominal) or 16.5 to 33V (24 V nominal) Input Terminal Wire Gauge 12 to 18 AWG Ceiling -Mount Dimensions (including lens) Strobe / Horn Strobe Dimensions 6.8"diameter x 2,5"high (173 mm diameter x 64 mm high) 5.6"Lx4.7"Wx1.3"D(142mmLx119mmWx33mmD) Strobe / Horn Strobe Dimensions with Back Box Ceiling -Mount Weatherproof Back Box Dimensions 5.6"Lx4.7"Wx1.3"D(142mmLx119mmWx33mmD) 7.1"diameter x 2.0"high (180 mm diameter x 51 mm high) Notes: 1. Full Wave Rectified (FWR) voltage is a non-regulated, time -varying power source that is used on some power supply and panel outputs. 2. Products will operate at 12 V nominal only for 15 and 15/75 cd. AVDS11401 UL Current Draw Data UL0Max. Strobe Current Draw (mA RMS) 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts Candela DC FWR UL Max. Horn Current Draw for 4 -Wire Horn Strobes (mA RMS) DC FWR Sound Pattern Standard Candela Range 15 123 128 66 71 15/75 142 148 77 81 High Candela Range 30 75 95 110 115 135 150 177 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 94 158 181 202 210 228 246 281 96 153 176 195 205 207 220 251 185 NA NA 286 258 dB 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts DC FWR DC FWR Temporal Temporal Temporal High Medium Low 57 44 38 55 49 44 69 58 44 75 69 48 Non -Temporal Non -Temporal Non -Temporal Coded Coded Coded High Medium Low High Medium Low 57 42 41 57 44 40 56 50 44 55 51 46 69 60 50 69 56 52 75 69 50 75 69 50 UL Max. Current Draw (mA RMS), 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, Standard Candela Range (15-115 cd) le DC Input 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts 15 15/75 15 15/75 30 (75: 95 110 Temporal High Temporal Medium Temporal Low Non -Temporal High 137 132 132 141 147 144 143 152 79 69 66 91 90 80 77 100 107 97 93 116 c1761 157 154 176 194 182 179 201 212 201 198 221 /218 210 207 229 Non -Temporal Medium 133 145 75 85 102 163 187 207 216 Non -Temporal Low FWR Input 131 144 68 79 96 156 182 201 210 Temporal High 136 155 Temporal Medium 129 152 88 97 112 78 88 103 168 190 160 184 210 218 202 206 Temporal Low Non -Temporal High Non -Temporal Medium Non -Temporal Low 129 142 134 132 151 161 155 154 76 103 85 80 86 112 95 90 101 126 110 105 160 181 166 161 184 203 189 184 194 221 208 202 201 229 216 211 UL Max. Current Draw (mA RMS), 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, High Candela Range (135-185 cd) DC Input 16-33 Volts 135 150 177 185 FWR Input 16-33 Volts 135 150 177 185 Temporal High Temporal Medium Temporal Low 245 235 232 259 253 251 290 288 282 297 297 292 Temporal High Temporal Medium Temporal Low 215 209 207 231 224 221 258 250 248 265 258 256 Non -Temporal High Non -Temporal Medium Non -Temporal Low Candela Derating For K series products used at low temperatures, listed candela ratings must be reduced in accordance with this table. 255 270 303 309 Non -Temporal High 242 259 293 299 Non -Temporal Medium 238 254 291 295 Non -Temporal Low 233 219 214 248 232 229 275 262 256 281 267 262 • . - • u .0 • >:c: Listed Candela Candela rating at —40°F 15 Do not use below 32°F 15/75 30 75 44 95 70 110 110 115 115 135 135 150 150 177 177 185 185 Horn Tones and Sound Output Data Horn Strobe Output (dBA) Switch Position 1 2 3 4 Sound Pattern Temporal Temporal Temporal Non - Temporal dB High Medium Low High 8-17.5 Volts DC 78 74 71 FWR 78 74 73 16-33 Volts DC FWR 24 -Volt Nominal 84 80 76 84 80 76 Reverberant Anechoic DC FWR DC FWR 88 88 99 98 86 86 96 96 83 80 94 89 82 82 88 88 93 92 100 100 5 Non- Medium 78 78 Temporal 85 85 90 90 98 98 6 Non- Low Temporal 75 75 81 81 88 84 96 92 7t Coded 8t Coded 9t Coded High 82 82 88 88 93 Medium 78 78 85 85 90 Low 75 75 81 81 88 92 90 85 101 101 97 98 96 92 tSettings 7, 8, and 9 are not available on 2 -wire horn strobe. AVDS11401 SpectrAlert Advance Diagrams 2 Ceiling -Mount Horn Strobes Ceiling Plastic Weatherproof Back Box Ceiling -Mount Horn Strobe with Plastic Weatherproof Back Box SpectrAlert Advance Ordering Information Modelo ;Descriptions,_ Ceiling Horn Strobes (PC2RK) 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) PC2RHK 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, Red, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) PC2WK 2 -Wire, Horn Strobe, Standard cd, White, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) PC2WHK 2 -Wire, Horn Strobe, High cd, White, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) Ceiling Strobes SCRK Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) SCRHK Strobe, High cd, Red, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) SCWK Strobe, Standard cd, White, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) SCWHK Strobe, High cd, White, Outdoor (includes plastic weatherproof back box) Accessories SA-WBBC Red, Metal Weatherproof Back Box SA-WBBCW White, Metal Weatherproof Back Box MP120K Notes: "Standard cd" refers to strobes that include 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, and 115 candela settings. "High cd" refers to strobes that include 135, 150, 177, and 185 candela settings. When replacing outdoor units, both the device and back box must be replaced. *T SYSTEM � SENSOR 3825 Ohio Avenue • St. Charles, IL 60174 Phone: 800-SENSOR2 • Fax: 630-377-6495 ©2015 System Sensor Product specifications subject to change without notice Visit systemsensor corn for current product information, including the latest version of this data sheet AVDS11402 • 02/15 SYSTEM SENS0i-Ai Indoor Selectable - Output Strobes and Horn Strobes for Ceiling Applications SpectrAlen ® Advance audible visible notification products are rich with features guaranteed to cut installation times and maximize profits. Features • Plug-in design with minimal intrusion into the back box • Tamper-resistant construction • Automatic selection of 12- or 24 -volt operation at 15 and 15/75 candela • Field -selectable candela settings on ceiling units: 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, and 185 • Horn rated at 88+ dBA at 16 volts • Rotary switch for horn tone and three volume selections • Universal mounting plate for ceiling units • Mounting plate shorting spring feature checks wiring continuity before device installation • Electrically Compatible with legacy SpectrAlert devices • Compatible with MDL3 sync module • Listed for ceiling or wall mounting Agency Listings SIGNALING LISTED APPROVED S4011 (chimes, horn strobes. horns) 3023572 S5512 (strobes) MEA approved MEA452-05-E 7125-1653:0186 (indoor strobes) 7125-1653:0188 (horn strobes. chime strobes) 7135-1653:0189 (horns, chimes) SPECTRert The SpectrAlert Advance series offers the most versatile and easy-to-use line of horns, strobes, and horn strobes in the industry. With white and red plastic housings, wall and ceiling mounting options, and plain and FIRE -printed devices, SpectrAlert Advance can meet virtually any application requirement. Like the entire SpectrAlert Advance product line, ceiling -mount strobes and horn strobes include a variety of features that increase their application versatility while simplifying installation. All devices feature a plug-in design with minimal intrusion into the back box, making installations fast and foolproof while virtually eliminating costly and time-consuming ground faults. To further simplify installation, SpectrAlert Advance utilizes a universal mounting plate so you can mount them to a wide array of back boxes. With an onboard shorting spring, installers can test wiring continuity before the device is installed. Installers can also easily adapt devices to a suit a wide range of application requirements using field -selectable candela settings, automatic selection of 12- or 24 -volt operation, and a rotary switch for horn tones with three volume selections. SpectrAlert Advance Specifications Architect/Engineer Specifications General SpectrAlert Advance strobes and horn strobes shall mount to a standard 4 x 4 x 11/2 -inch back box, 4 -inch octagon back box, or double - gang back box. Two -wire products shall also mount to a single -gang 2 x 4 x 17/8 -inch back box. A universal mounting plate shall be used for mounting ceiling and wall products. The notification appliance circuit wiring shall terminate at the universal mounting plate. Also, SpectrAlert Advance products, when used with the Sync•Circuit° Module accessory, shall be powered from a non -coded notification appliance circuit output and shall operate on a nominal 12 or 24 volts. When used with the Sync•Circuit Module, 12 -volt -rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 8.5 and 17.5 volts; 24 -volt -rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall operate between 16.5 and 33 volts. Indoor SpectrAlert Advance products shall operate between 32 and 120 degrees Fahrenheit from a regulated DC or full -wave rectified unfiltered power supply. Strobes and horn strobes shall have field -selectable candela settings including 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, and 185. Strobe The strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance Model listed to UL 1971 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The strobe shall be wired as a primary -signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for . visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe's entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. Horn Strobe Combination The horn strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance Model listed to UL 1971 and UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The horn strobe shall be wired as a primary -signaling notification appliance and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobe's entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The horn shall have three audibility options and an option to switch between a temporal three pattern and a non -temporal (continuous) pattern. These options are set by a multiple position switch. On four -wire products, the strobe shall be powered independently of the sounder. The horn on horn strobe models shall operate on a coded or non -coded power supply. Synchronization Module The module shall be a System Sensor Sync•Circuit model MDL3 listed to UL 464 and shall be approved for fire protective service. The module shall synchronize SpectrAlert strobes at 1 Hz and horns at temporal three. Also, while operating the strobes, the module shall silence the horns on horn strobe models over a single pair of wires. The module shall mount to a 4 11/16 x 4 11/16 x 2 1/8 -inch back box. The module shall also control two Style Y (class B) circuits or one Style Z (class A) circuit. The module shall synchronize multiple zones. Daisy chaining two or more synchronization modules together will synchronize all the zones they control. The module shall not operate on a coded power supply. Physical/Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Temperature 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) Humidity Range 10 to 93% non -condensing Strobe Flash Rate 1 flash per second Nominal Voltage Regulated 12 DC/FWR or regulated 24 DC/FWR1 Operating Voltage Rangel 8 to 17.5 V (12 V nominal) or 16 to 33 V (24 V nominal) Operating Voltage Range (MDL3) Input Terminal Wire Gauge 8.5 to 17.5V (12 V nominal) or 16.5 to 33 V (24V nominal) 12 to18AWG Ceiling -Mount Dimensions (including lens) Ceiling -Mount Surface Mount Back Box Skirt Dimensions (SBBCR, SBBCW) 6.8" diameter x 2.5" high (173 mm diameter x 64 mm high) 6.9" diameter x 3.4" high (175 mm diameter x 86 mm high) Notes: 1. Full Wave Rectified (FWR) voltage is a non-regulated, time -varying power source that is used on some power supply and panel outputs. 2. P, S, PC, and SC products will operate at 12 V nominal only for 15 and 15/75 cd. AVDS10101 UL Current Draw Data UL Max. Strobe Current Draw (mA'RMS) Candela 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts DC FWR DC FWR Standard Candela Range 123 128 (66 71 15/75 142 148 77 81 (75 95 NA NA NA NA NA NA (94' 181 96 153 176 110 NA NA 202 195 115 NA NA 210 205 High Candela Range 135 NA NA 228 207 150 NA NA 246 220 177 NA NA 281 251 185 NA NA {286' 258 UL Max. Current Draw (mA RMS), 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, Standard Candela. Range (15-115 cd) _® DC Input `'� (Ternporal High Temporal Medium 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts 15 137 132 15/75 15; 147 144 69 V9 15/75 90 80 30 107 97 75; (7176 157 95 194 182 0110 115 12, 218 201 210 Temporal Low Non -Temporal High Non -Temporal Medium Non -Temporal Low FWR Input 132 141 133 131 143 152 145 144 66 91 75 68 77 100 85 79 93 116 102 96 154 176 163 156 179 201 187 182 198 221 207 201 207 229 216 210 Temporal High Temporal Medium Temporal Low 136 129 129 155 152 151 88 78 76 97 88 86 112 103 101 168 160 160 190 184 184 210 202 194 218 206 201 Non -Temporal High Non -Temporal Medium Non -Temporal Low 142 134 132 161 155 154 103 85 80 112 95 90 126 110 105 181 166 161 203 189 184 221 208 202 229 216 211 UL Max. Current Draw (mA RMS); 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, High Candela Range (135-185 cd) DC Input 16-33 Volts 135 150! 177 185 FWR Input 16-33 Volts 135 150 177 185 Temporal High Temporal Medium Temporal Low Non -Temporal High Non -Temporal Medium Non -Temporal Low 245 235 232 255 242 238 (259' 290 253 288 251 282 270 303 259 293 254 291 1297r 297 292 309 299 295 Temporal High Temporal Medium Temporal Low Non -Temporal High Non -Temporal Medium Non -Temporal Low 215 231 258 209 224 250 207 221 248 233 248 275 219 232 262 214 229 256 265 258 256 281 267 262 Horn Strobe Tones and Sound Output Data Horn Strobe Output (dBA) Switch Position Sound Pattern dB 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts 24 -Volt Nominal Reverberant Anechoic DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR 1 Temporal 2 Temporal 3 Temporal 4 Non -Temporal 5 Non -Temporal 6 Non -Temporal 7t Coded 8t Coded Coded gt High Medium Low High • Medium Low High Medium Low 78 74 71 82 78 75 82 78 75 78 74 73 82 78 75 82 78 75 84 80 76 88 85 81 88 85 81 84 80 76 88 85 81 88 85 81 88 86 83 93 90 88 93 90 88 88 86 80 92 90 84 92 90 85 99 98 96 96 94 89 100 100 98 98 96 92 101 101 97 98 96 92 tSettings 7, 8, and 9 are not available on 2 -wire horn strobes. AVDS10101 SpectrAlert Advance Dimensions 6.8" 2 5" Ceiling -mount horn strobes SpectrAlert Advance Ordering Information Model %Description Ceiling Horn Strobes (PC2R1' PC2R-P PC2R PC2W 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, (no "FIRE") marking 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, Red Standard cd, Red, Plain I-- 2.5" --{ I C Ceiling back box surface mount back box Model 0E4., ;Description; Ceiling Strobes I(SCR) Strobe, Standard cd, Red I~fSCFj High cd, Red Standard cd, White PC2W-P 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, (no "FIRE") marking Standard cd, White,' Plain PC2W-SP 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, White, "Fuego" marking PC2WH 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, White PC2WH-P 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, White, Plain (no "FIRE") marking PC2WH-SP 2 -Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, White, "Fuego" PC4R 4 -Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, Red PC4RH 4 -Wire Horn Strobe, High cd, Red PC4W 4 -Wire Horn Strobe, Standard cd, White Strobe, High cd, Red SCW Strobe, Standard cd, White SCW-P SCWH Strobe, High cd, White Accessories Strobe, Standard cd, White, Plain (no "Fire") marking SBBCR Surface Mount Back Box, Ceiling, Red SBBCW Surface Mount Back Box, Ceiling, White Notes: All -P models have a plain housing (no "FIRE" marking on cover) All -SP models have "FUEGO" marking on cover "Standard cd" refers to strobes that include 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, and 115 candela settings "High cd" refers to strobes that include 135, 150, 177, and 185 candela settings. *T SYSTEM �� SENSOR 3825 Ohio Avenue • St. Charles, IL 60174 Phone: 800-SENSOR2 • Fax: 630-377-6495 ©2015 System Sensor Product specit canons subject to change without notice Visit systemsensor corn for current product information, including the latest version of this data sheet AVDS10102 • 03115 Fire•u-remarms FILE by Honeywell .0/0(t/ PeirkS PI4 V 9/6 /Via) skit (11,-t/ ty:tt) "wprfit Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel MS-9050UD MS.9O5OUDC MS.9O5OUDE ti Manual Document 52413 11/20/2015 Rev: K Fire Alarm & Emergency Communication System Limitations While a life safety y m may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for life and property insurance! An automatic fire allit made up of smoke detectors, heat detect . mOm—typically pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control panel (FACP) with remote notifi- cation capability—can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. An emergency communication system—typically made up of an automatic fire alarm system (as described above) and a life safety communication system that may include an autonomous control unit (ACU), local operating console (LOC), voice commu- nication, and other various interoperable communication meth- ods—can broadcast a mass notification message. Such a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire or life safety event. The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detectors be located throughout a protected premises following the recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72), manufacturer's recommendations, State and local codes, and the recommendations contained in the Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no charge to all installing dealers. This document can be found at http:// www.systemsensor.com/appguides/. A study by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (an agency of the United States government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in as many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are designed to provide early warning against fire, they do not guarantee warning or protection against fire. A fire alarm system may not provide timely or adequate warning, or simply may not function, for a variety of reasons: Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second -floor detector, for example, may not sense a first -floor or basement fire. Particles of combustion or "smoke" from a developing fire may not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors because: • Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, chim- neys, even wet or humid areas may inhibit particle or smoke flow. • Smoke particles may become "cold," stratify, and not reach the ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located. • Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air outlets, such as air conditioning vents. • Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reach- ing the detector. The amount of "smoke" present may be insufficient to alarm smoke detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at var- ious levels of smoke density. If such density levels are not cre- ated by a developing fire at the location of detectors, the detectors will not go into alarm. Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing limitations. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing cham- bers tend to detect smoldering fires better than flaming fires, which have little visible smoke. Detectors that have ionizing -type sensing chambers tend to detect fast -flaming fires better than smoldering fires. Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable in their growth, neither type of detector is necessarily best and a given type of detector may not provide adequate warning of a fire. Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate warn- ing of fires caused by arson, children playing with matches (especially in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent explosions (caused by escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materi- als, etc.). Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm only when heat on their sensors increases at a predetermined rate or reaches a predetermined level. Rate -of -rise heat detec- tors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate -of -rise feature of each detector should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist. Heat detectors are designed to protect property, not life. IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the same room as the control panel and in rooms used by the system for the connection of alarm transmission wiring, communications, signaling, and/or power. If detectors are not so located, a devel- oping fire may damage the alarm system, compromising its abil- ity to report a fire. Audible warning devices such as bells, horns, strobes, speakers and displays may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building. Any warning device may fail to alert people with a disability or those who have recently consumed drugs, alcohol, or medication. Please note that: • An emergency communication system may take priority over a fire alarm system in the event of a life safety emergency. • Voice messaging systems must be designed to meet intelligi- bility requirements as defined by NFPA, local codes, and Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). • Language and instructional requirements must be clearly dis- seminated on any local displays. • Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures in people with conditions such as epilepsy. • Studies have shown that certain people, even when they hear a fire alarm signal, do not respond to or comprehend the meaning of the signal. Audible devices, such as horns and bells, can have different tonal patterns and frequencies. It is the property owner's responsibility to conduct fire drills and other training exercises to make people aware of fire alarm signals and instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm sig- nals. • In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can cause temporary or permanent hearing loss. A life safety system will not operate without any electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only for a specified time and only if the batteries have been properly maintained and replaced regularly. Equipment used in the system may not be technically compat- ible with the control panel. It is essential to use only equipment listed for service with your control panel. Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a prem- ises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or tem- porarily disabled. For added protection against telephone line failure, backup radio transmission systems are recommended. The most common cause of life safety system malfunction is inadequate maintenance. To keep the entire life safety system in excellent working order, ongoing maintenance is required per the manufacturer's recommendations, and UL and NFPA stan- dards. At a minimum, the requirements of NFPA 72 shall be fol- lowed. Environments with large amounts of dust, dirt, or high air velocity require more frequent maintenance. A maintenance agreement should be arranged through the local manufacturer's representative. Maintenance should be scheduled monthly or as required by National and/or local fire codes and should be per- formed by authorized professional life safety system installers only. Adequate written records of all inspections should be kept. Limit -D-1-2013 2 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Installation Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem -free installation with long-term reliability: WARNING - Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and associ- ated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or insert- ing cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until manuals are read and understood. CAUTION - System Re -acceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 after any pro- gramming operation or change in site-specific software. Re - acceptance testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. All compo- nents, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified. This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49° C/32-120° F and at a relative humidity 93% ± 2% RH (non - condensing) at 32°C ± 2°C (90°F ± 3°F). However, the useful life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic com- ponents may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a normal room temperature of 15-27° C/60-80° F. Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indi- cating device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device voltage. Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to light- ning induced transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to an increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Ser- vices Department if any problems are anticipated or encoun- tered. Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifi- cations, verify that they will not interfere with battery, trans- former, or printed circuit board location. Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in -lbs. Over - tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. This system contains static -sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before han- dling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit. Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro- gramming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper installation. Precau-D1-9-2005 FCC Warning WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class A computing devices pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which is designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when devices are operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interfer- ence, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her own expense. Canadian Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radiation noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Cana- dian Department of Communications. Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits radi- oelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appa- reils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada. LiteSpeedTM, Lite -Connect""', and SWIFT"' are trademarks; and Fire -Lite® Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. The Chrome"" browser is a trademark of Google Inc. ©2015 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 3 Software Downloads In order to supply the latest features and functionality in fire alarm and life safety technology to our customers, we make frequent upgrades to the embedded software in our products. To ensure that you are installing and programming the latest features, we strongly recommend that you download the most current version of software for each product prior to commissioning any system. Contact Technical Support with any questions about software and the appropriate version for a specific application. Documentation Feedback Your feedback helps us keep our documentation up-to-date and accurate. If you have any comments or suggestions about our online Help or printed manuals, you can email us. Please include the following information: •Product name and version number (if applicable) •Printed manual or online Help •Topic Title (for online Help) 'Page number (for printed manual) 'Brief description of content you think should be improved or corrected 'Your suggestion for how to correct/improve documentation Send email messages to: FireSystems.TechPubs@honeywell.com Please note this email address is for documentation feedback only. If you have any technical issues, please contact Technical Services. 4 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Table of Contents Section 1: Product Description 12 1.1: Features and Options 12 1.2: Specifications 14 1.3: Controls and Indicators 15 1.4: Circuits 16 1.5: Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter 17 1.6: Components 17 1.6.1: Intelligent Addressable Detectors: Newer Series 18 1.6.2: Intelligent Addressable Modules: Newer Series 18 1.6.3: 300 Series Intelligent Addressable Devices 18 1.6.4: Device Accessories 18 1.7: Optional Modules and Accessories 19 1.8: Getting Started 21 1.9: Telephone Requirements and Warnings 21 1.9.1: Telephone Circuitry 21 1.9.2: Digital Communicator 21 1.9.3: Telephone Company Rights and Warnings 22 1.9.4: For Canadian Applications 22 Section 2: Installation 24 2.1: Mounting the Backbox 24 2.2: Mounting the Chassis/Transformer/Main Circuit Board 25 2.3: Power 28 2.3.1: AC Power and Earth Ground Connection 28 2.3.2: Battery Power 28 2.4: Relays 29 2.5: Notification Appliance Circuits 30 2.5.1: Configuring NACs 30 2.6: UL Power -limited Wiring Requirements 31 2.7: Digital Communicator 32 2.8: Optional Modules/Accessories Installation 33 2.8.1: 4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation 33 2.8.2: ANN -SEC Option Card 35 2.9: ANN -BUS Devices 36 Guidelines 36 2.9.1: ANN -BUS Wiring 36 Calculating Wiring Distance for ANN -BUS Modules 37 Wiring Configuration 39 Powering ANN -BUS Devices from Auxiliary Power Supply 39 2.9.2: ANN -BUS Device Addressing 40 2.9.3: ANN -80(C) Remote Fire Annunciator/Indicator 40 Specifications 40 Installation 41 Opening/Closing Annunciator 41 Mounting 41 Wiring ANN -80 to FACP 42 2.9.4: ANN-S/PG Serial/Parallel Interface Module 43 Specifications 44 PRN -7 Printer Installation 44 PRN -6F Printer Installation 45 2.9.5: ANN -I/O LED Driver Module 46 ANN -I/O Board Layout 46 Specifications 47 ANN -I/O Connection to FACP 47 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 5 Table of Contents ANN -I/O Module LED Wiring 47 2.9.6: ANN -LED Annunciator Module 49 Specifications 49 Mounting and Installation 49 ANN -LED Board Layout and Connection to FACP 50 2.9.7: ANN-RLY Relay Module 50 Specifications 50 Mounting and Installation 51 ANN-RLY Board Layout and Connection to FACP 52 2.9.8: ANN -LC Lite -Connect Module 52 Specifications 52 Installation 52 Mounting 52 Wiring the ANN -LC to the MS-9050UD 53 Section 3: Programming 55 3.1: Programming Data Entry 55 3.2: User Programming 56 3.3: Initial Power -up 57 3.4: Programming Screens Description 57 3.5: Programming and Passwords 57 3.6: Master Programming Level 58 3.6.1: Autoprogram 58 3.6.2: Point Program 59 Detector Programming 59 Module Programming 66 3.6.3: Zone Setup 78 Enable 78 Disable 78 Zone 17, 18, and 19 78 Zones Installed 79 Zones Enabled 79 Zones Disabled 79 Zone Type 79 Zones Available 80 3.6.4: Loop Setup 81 Style 81 Loop Protocol 81 3.6.5: System Setup 81 Trouble Reminder 82 Banner 82 Time -Date 83 Timers 84 NAC (Notification Appliance Circuit) 86 Relays 90 Canadian Option 91 Waterflow Silenceable 91 Lite -Connect 91 3.6.6: Verify Loop 93 3.6.7: History 93 View Events 94 Erase History 94 3.6.8: Walktest 94 3.6.9: Option Modules 95 ANN -BUS 96 Onboard DACT 106 3.6.10: Password Change 118 6 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Table of Contents 3.6.11: Clear Program 118 3.6.12: Program Check 119 3.7: Maintenance Programming Level 119 3.7.1: Disable Point 120 3.7.2: History 120 3.7.3: Program Check 121 3.7.4: Walktest 122 3.7.5: System 123 3.7.6: Zone Setup 124 Section 4: Operating Instructions 126 4.1: Panel Control Buttons 126 4.1.1: Acknowledge/Step 126 4.1.2: Alarm Silence 126 4.1.3: Drill/Hold 2 Sec 126 4.1.4: Reset 126 4.2: Status Indicators and LEDs 126 4.3: Normal Operation 127 4.4: Trouble Operation 128 4.5: Alarm Operation 129 4.6: Supervisory Operation 130 4.7: Process Monitor Operation 130 4.8: Hazard/Tornado Condition Operation 131 4.9: Medical Alert Condition Operation 131 4.10: NAC Operation 132 4.11: Programmed Zone Operation 132 4.12: Disable/Enable Operation 132 4.13: Waterflow Circuits Operation 132 4.14: Detector Functions 132 4.15: Time Functions: Real -Time Clock 133 4.16: Synchronized NAC Operation 133 4.17: Coded Operation 133 4.18: Presignal 134 4.19: Positive Alarm Sequence 134 4.20: Special System Timers 135 4.20.1: Silence Inhibit Timer 135 4.20.2: Autosilence Timer 135 4.20.3: Trouble Reminder 135 4.20.4: Waterflow Retard Timer 135 4.20.5: Alarm Verification (None or One Minute) 135 4.21: Walktest 136 4.22: Read Status 136 4.22.1: System Point 137 4.22.2: Zones 138 4.22.3: Power 138 4.22.4: Trouble Reminder 139 4.22.5: Timers 139 4.22.6: NAC 139 4.22.7: Relays 139 4.22.8: Program Check 140 4.22.9: History 140 4.22.10: ANN -BUS 140 4.22.11: Phone Line 141 4.22.12: Central Station 141 4.22.13: Service Terminal 141 4.22.14: Print 142 4.22.15: Time -Date 143 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 7 Table of Contents Section 5: Central Station Communications 144 5.1: Transmittal Priorities 147 Section 6: Local/Remote Site Upload/Download 149 6.1: Remote Download 149 6.2: Transferring a Program 150 6.3: Security Features 150 Section 7: Power Supply Calculations 152 7.1: Overview 152 7.2: Calculating the AC Branch Circuit 152 7.3: Calculating the System Current Draw 153 7.3.1: Overview 153 7.3.2: How to Use Table 7.3 to Calculate System Current Draw 153 7.4: Calculating the Battery Size 155 7.4.1: NFPA Battery Requirements 155 7.4.2: Selecting and Locating Batteries 155 Appendix A: Software Zones 156 A.1: Correlations 156 Appendix B: Default Programming 161 Appendix C: NFPA Standard -Specific Requirements 163 C.1: Central Station/Remote Station Transmitter: Connection to FACP Dry Contacts 167 C.2: MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip - Silenceable 168 Appendix D: FACP with Keltron 169 Appendix E: Wire Requirements 170 E.1: NAC Wiring 171 Appendix F: HVAC Control 172 F.1: Control Module Operation 172 F.1.1: HVAC SHUTDN 172 F.2: Monitor Module Operation 172 F.2.1: HVAC RESTART 172 F.2.2: HVAC OVRRIDE 173 Appendix G: Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions 174 G.1: Transmission Format Between DACT and Receiver 174 G.2: Ademco Contact ID Typical Printout 174 Appendix H: Canadian Applications 179 H.1: ANN -LED Annunciator Installation for Canadian Applications 179 H.2: AC Power Connections for Canadian Applications 182 Index 183 MS-9050UD Series Fire Alarm Control Panel Operating Instructions 189 8 MS -9050 Series Manual—P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 It is imperative that the installer understand the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and be familiar with the standards set forth by the following regulatory agencies: • Underwriters Laboratories/Underwriters Laboratories Canada • National Fire Protection Association Before proceeding, the installer should be familiar with the following; documents. NFPA NFPA Standards NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 70 National Electrical Code Underwriters Laboratories Documents: UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station UL 228 Door Closers—Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1610 Central Station Burglar Alarm Units UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances UL 1971 Signaling Devices for Hearing Impaired UL 2017 General -Purpose Signaling Devices and System CAN/ULC - S524-01 Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm System CAN/ULC - S561-03 Installation and Services for Fire Signal Receiving Centers and Systems CAN/ULC - S527-99 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems CAN/ULC - S559-04 Equipment for Fire Signal Receiving Centers and Systems This Class (A) digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES -003. Cet appareil numerique de la classe (A) est conforme a la norme NMB -003 du Canada. Other: Canadian Electrical Code, Part I EIA -232E Serial Interface Standard EIA -485 Serial Interface Standard NEC Article 250 Grounding NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods NEC Article 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems Applicable Local and State Building Codes Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (LAHJ) Fire -Lite Documents: Fire -Lite Device Compatibility Document #15384 SLC Wiring Manual Document #51309 CHG-120F Battery Charger Document #50888 CHG-75 Battery Charger Document #51315 ANN -80(C) Product Installation Doc. Document #52749 ANN-(R)LED Product Installation Doc. Document #53032 ANN -I/O Product Installation Doc. Document #151416 ANN-RLY Product Installation Doc. Document #53033 ANN-S/PG Product Installation Doc. Document #151417 ANN -LC Product Installation Doc. Document #LS 10158-000FL-E This product has been certified to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864, 9th Edition. Operation of this product with products not tested for UL 864, 9th Edition has not been evaluated. Such operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 9 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 0 LA Notification Appliance Circuits Special Application Power NAC #1 shown Style Y (Class B) (Power -limited, Class 2, Supervised) NAC #2 shown Style Z (Class A) (Power -limited, Class 2, Supervised) 2.5 amps max. per circuit.Total available current is 2.5 amps. NAC #1 ELR-4.7, '/2W NAC #2 For specific UL wiring information, refer to "UL Power -limited Wiring Requirements" on page 31. Transformer Connector Nonpower -limited Supervised i 114 BIAIAIB B AIA B 5 617 8 TB1 0 41110 J1 O SLC Loop Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for detailed information on wiring addressable devices for Style 4, 6, and 7. (Power -limited, Class 2, Supervised Circuit) Charger Disable Jumper (cut to disable FACP onboard battery charger) 02O J� BATTERY TB2 J8 BASIC SYSTEM CONNECTIONS 2 Programmable Relays & 1 Fixed Trouble Relay Nonsupervised Contact Ratings: 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resistive) 0.5 amp @ 30 VAC (resistive) Contacts shown below in normal condition (AC power with no alarm, trouble, or supervisory activity). A Fail Safe Trouble relay owiton � ^ NO position during the DB9F trouble conditions and under loss of all power. ANN -BUS (EIA -485) for Annunciator (*Factory default relay programming) Connection (Power -limited, Trouble Supervisory* Class 2, NC NO C NO NC C Supervised) NC NO C EIA -232 to personal computer personal computer with FACP Upload/Download utility,50 foot maximum wihin same room, (Nonsupervised, Power - limited, Class 2 Circuit) 0000 9 8 7 6 Alarm' NO NC C TBS R8111Ecomes N TB8 Cut JP28 to 4XTMF JP28 Su4pXTMF e ��r ervis JR J3 LCD DISPLAY 4 white red green 4—black TB7 TB3 Remove this jumper to enable supervisory trelay when 4XTMF is installed. To disable ground fault JP1 detection, remove jumper/shunt from JP1 AC POWER SUPERVISORY FIRE ALARM ALARM SILENCED TROUBLE 2ABC 3DEFsre CK r � � 40111 5JKL 6MNO CLEAR 7PRS 8TUV 9WXY ESC *QZ 0 # 1. MODE DRI s1. ENTER S_I SILENCED 14 RESET J13 ANN -SEC Option Card connector KISSOFF LED3 IS LED2RI PRIMARY ACTIVE ¢ Qo 2 g PHONE LINE N PHONE LINE JR I Battery 24 VDC, nonpower -limited, supervised, 18 Amp Hour max. PS2 Keyboard Interface SW1 FLASH IMEMORY LOAD ENABLE SWITCH K SECONDARY ACTIVE ® LED1 PH1 `--' PHO DACT Phone Line Jacks (nonpower -limited, supervised) ;wm inokipn0906 ANN -LC Lite -Connect Module Doc. #LS10158-000FL-E ANN -BUS 4 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL • fl Peripheral Devices ANN -80(C) LCD Text Annunciator/ Indicator Doc. #52749 PH1 & PH2 Telephone SLC Loop ANN-RLY 10 Form -C Relay Card Doc.#53033 _BO 00 00 00 ANN -I/O LED Driver Doc. #151416 N N ANN-(R)LED LED Display Doc. #53032 I PDACT Internet Protocol Communicator Doc.#53109 4XTMF Municipal Box Transmitter ANN-S/PG Printer Driver Doc.#151417 N FIRE Addressable Devices and SLC Wiring Doc.#51309 Battery Connector maw •000o...o Sea NO CHG-120F Charger Doc. #50888 Local PC CHG-75 Charger Doc.#51315 1 905OUDpe2i.wmf MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 11 Section 1: Product Description The MS-9050UD is a combination FACP (Fire Alarm Control Panel) and DACT (Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) all on one circuit board. This compact, cost effective, intelligent addressable control panel has an extensive list of powerful features. The combination of Fire-Lite's newer series devices and legacy 300 Series devices, along with the MS-9050UD FACP, offer the latest in fire protection technology. The power supply and all electronics are contained on a single circuit board housed in a metal cabinet, providing a complete fire control system for most applica- tions. Available accessories include local and remote upload/download software, remote annuncia- tors and reverse polarity/city box transmitter. The integral DACT transmits system status (alarms, troubles, AC loss, etc.) to a Central Station via the public switched telephone network. It also allows remote programming or interrogation of the control panel using the PS -Tools Upload/Download utility via the public switched telephone net- work. Any personal computer with Windows® XP or newer, and compatible modem with a speed of 2400 baud or faster and Upload/Download software kit PK -CD, containing PS -Tools, may serve as a Service Terminal. This allows download of the entire program or upload of the entire program, history file, walktest data and current status. The MS-905OUDC is a ULC -approved Canadian version of the FACP which offers the same fea- tures as the MS-9050UD, but is supplied standard with a dress panel and one built-in ANN -LED annunciator. Refer to"Canadian Option" on page 91 for a full description. The MS-905OUDE offers the same features as the MS-9050UD but allows connection to 220/240 VAC power. NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, the terms FACP and MS-9050UD are used in this manual to refer to all versions of the FACPs. Inventory When the MS-9050UD shipment is received, check to make certain that all parts have been included in the shipment. The MS-9050UD shipment should consist of one of each of the follow- ing: / main circuit board with display / chassis with transformer / backbox with door / plastic bag containing screws, cables, key, etc. / manual 1.1 Features and Options Built-in DACT (Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) with remote upload/download Single addressable SLC loop which meets NFPA Style 4, 6 and 7 requirements • 50 addressable device capacity (any combination of addressable detectors and addressable control/relay/monitor modules totaling 50) • 20 software zones • Two onboard NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits) which can be configured as Style Y (Class B) or Style Z (Class A) circuits • 2.5 amps total output power • Two programmable relays and one fixed trouble relay • Built-in Programmer • Telephone Line Active LEDs 12 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Features and Options Product Description • Communication Confirmation (Kissoff) LED • Touchtone/Rotary dialing • EIA -232 PC interface for local upload/download • 80 -character LCD display (backlit) • Real-time clock/calendar with daylight savings time control • History file with 500 event capacity • Advanced fire technology features: ✓ Automatic drift compensation ✓ Maintenance alert ✓ Detector sensitivity test capability (NFPA 72 compliant) ✓ Automatic device type -code verification ✓ Point trouble identification • Waterflow selection per module point • Alarm verification selection per detector point • Walktest, silent or audible • PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) per addressable detector and Pre -signal per point (NFPA 72 compliant) • Silence inhibit timer option per NAC • Autosilence timer option per NAC • Continuous, March Time, Temporal or California code for main circuit board NACs with two- stage capability • Selectable strobe synchronization per NAC • Remote Acknowledge, Alarm Silence, Reset and Drill via addressable modules or remote annunciator • Auto -program (learn mode) reduces installation time. Reports two devices set to the same address • Password and key -protected nonvolatile memory • User programmable password • Fully programmable from local keypad or optional keyboard • SLC operates up to 10,000 ft. (3,000 m) with twisted, unshielded fire wire • Compatible with Fire -Lite addressable devices (refer to the SLC Wiring Manual) • Compatible with legacy Fire -Lite 300 Series addressable devices (refer to the SLC Wiring Manual) • Optional 4XTMF module (conventional reverse polarity/city box transmitter) • Optional ANN -I/O LED Driver module • Optional ANN-S/PG printer interface module • Optional ANN -80 remote LCD annunciator • Optional ANN -80C remote LCD indicator (for Canadian applications) • Optional ANN -LED Annunciator Module annunciates alarm, trouble and supervisory • Optional ANN-RLED Annunciator Module annunciates alarms only • Optional ANN-RLY Form -C Relay Module • Optional ANN -LC Lite -Connect Module • Optional Dress Panel DP -51050 (a modified dress panel with the ANN -LED is included standard with the MS-905OUDC) • Optional PRN-6F/PRN-7 Serial Printer (requires ANN-S/PG module) • Optional PS -Tools programming utility for local or remote Upload/Download of programming and data (available for download from www.firelite.com) MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 13 Product Description Specifications 1.2 Specifications Refer to Illustration on page 10 for terminal locations and connections. For wire specifications, refer to "Wire Requirements" on page 170. AC Power - Transformer Connection MS-9050UD: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 3.0 amps MS-905OUDE: 240 VAC, 50 Hz, 1.5 amps Wire size: minimum 14 AWG (2.00 mm2) with 600 V insulation Nonpower -limited, supervised Battery (Lead Acid Only) - J1 Maximum Charging Circuit: Normal Flat Charge - 27.4 VDC @ 4.3 amps peak inrush current tapering to a maximum of 2.8 amps of continuous charging current. Maximum Battery Charger Capacity: 18 Amp Hour, (FACP cabinet holds maximum of two 18 Amp Hour batteries) For greater than 18 Amp Hour up to 120 Amp Hour batteries, use the CHG-75 or CHG-120F Bat- tery Charger and BB -26 or BB -55F Battery Box, respectively. Jumper JP30 on the FACP main circuit board, must be removed to disable the FACP battery char- ger when using an external battery charger. Minimum Battery: 7 Amp Hour Nonpower -limited, supervised SLC Communication Loop - TB2 24 VDC nominal, 27.6 VDC maximum Maximum length is 10,000 ft. (3,000 m) total twisted, unshielded fire wire Maximum loop current is 400 mA (short circuit) or 100 mA (normal) Maximum loop resistance is 40 ohms Supervised and power -limited circuit Refer to SLC Loop manual for wiring information Notification Appliance Circuits/Special Application (Auxiliary) Power - TB1 Terminal Block provides connections for up to two NACs, Style Y (Class B) or Style Z (Class A) Special Application power Power -limited, supervised circuitry For wire specifications, refer to "NAC Wiring" on page 171. Nominal operating voltage: 24 VDC Current -limit: fuseless, electronic, power -limited circuitry Maximum signaling current per circuit: 2.5 amps special application, 250 mA regulated for NACs Maximum signaling current per circuit: 1.0 amp for auxiliary power and door holders End -of -Line Resistor: 4.7 Kid ''A watt (P/N 71252 UL listed) for Style Y (Class B) NAC Refer to the Fire -Lite Device Compatibility Document for listed compatible devices A circuit programmed for door holders or auxiliary power does not support notification appli- ances. Two Programmable Relays and One Fixed Trouble Relay - TB5, TB6 & TB7 Contact rating: 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resistive), 0.5 amps @ 30 VAC (resistive) Form -C relays, nonpower -limited, nonsupervised Refer to Figure 2.5 on page 29 for information on power -limited relay circuit wiring EIA -232 - TB3 EIA -232 PC applications connections: Terminal 5 (Receive), 6 (Transmit), 7 (DTR), 8 (Ground) Power -limited, supervised 14 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Controls and Indicators Product Description NAC #1 NAC #2 Primary ANN -BUS ANN -SEC Option Card Special Application Primary ANN -BUS Power - TB3 Nominal Operating Voltage: 24 VDC Maximum Current (Terminals 1 & 2): 500 mA Power -limited, supervised Special Application Secondary ANN -BUS Power - ANN -SEC - TB1 Nominal Operating Voltage: 24 VDC Maximum Current (Terminals 1 & 2): 500 mA Power -limited, supervised The following figure illustrates the maximum current that is possible for each major panel output circuit and the total current available from the FACP. TBI , z 3 4 6 7 8 TB3 3 4 TBI 1 2 3 4 Nonresettable/ Resettable Power 2.5 amps max per circuit #1 OR 2.5 amps max #2 per circuit 0.5 amp max per circuit 0.5 amp max per circuit TBI 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Refer to the battery calculations section for additional information. Figure 1.1 Current Availability 1.3 Controls and Indicators LCD Display The FACP uses an 80 -character (4 lines X 20 characters) high viewing angle LCD display. The display includes a long life LED backlight that remains illuminated. If AC power is lost and the system is not in alarm, the LED backlight will turn off to conserve batteries. LED Indicators Alarm 2.5 amps max per panel Standby 1.0 amp max per panel powerdis9050.wmf SYSTEM ALL NORMAL 10:00A 092105 LED indicators are provided to annunciate the following conditions: MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 15 Product Description Circuits AC Power (green) Fire Alarm (red) Supervisory (yellow) • Trouble (yellow) • Alarm Silenced signals (yellow) Key Panel Mounted on the main circuit board, the key panel includes a window for the LCD display and LED indicators as listed above. The key panel, which is visible with the cabinet door closed, has 25 keys, including a 16 key alpha -numeric pad similar to a telephone keypad. Function keys: • Acknowledge/Step • Alarm Silenced • Drill (Manual Evacuate) • Reset (lamp test) Service/program keys: • Keys labeled 1 to 9 • * key • # key P • 1st Event key • Clear key • Escape key • Mode key • Four cursor keys (up, down, left and right) • Enter key Local Piezo Sounder A piezo sounder provides separate and distinct pulse rates for alarm, trouble and supervisory condi- AC POWER FIRE ALARM SUPERVISORY ALARM SILENCED TROUBLE 2ABC 3DEF 1s I,cn. 4GHI 5JKL 6MNO CLEAR 7PRS STUN 9WXY ESC *OZ QRccacc # • MODE �c�x a.Er ALARM SILENCED 1.4 Circuits ORIILUL ENTER 4J RESET Figure 1.2 Membrane/Display Panel SLC Communication Loop One SLC loop is provided on the FACP main circuit board. The SLC loop, configurable for NFPA Style 4, 6 or 7, provides communication to addressable detectors, monitor (initiating device) and control (output device) modules. Refer to the SLC Wiring manual for information on wiring devices. Output Circuits The following output circuits are available on the FACP: • Charger - 24 VDC Battery Charger (up to 18 AH batteries) • NAC (Notification Appliance Circuits) - Two NACs configurable for Style Y (Class B) or Style Z (Class A), are provided with various programmable features. 16 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter Product Description Relays One fixed and two fully programmable Form -C dry contact relays are provided. The fixed fail-safe relay monitors system trouble and the two programmable relays are factory default programmed for system alarm and system supervisory. Contacts are rated 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resistive) and 0.5 amps @ 30 VAC (resistive). The programmable relays can be programmed for the following oper- ations: • fire alarm • silenceable alarm • trouble • supervisory • supervisory auto-resettable • DACT communication failure • process monitor • process monitor auto-resettable • hazard alert • medical alert • AC loss 1.5 Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter Two modular phone jacks allow easy connection to telephone lines. Modular jacks are labeled PH1 for Primary Phone Line and PH2 for Secondary Phone Line. Two telephone line active red LEDs are provided as well as a green Kissoff LED. The integral digital communicator provides the fol- lowing functions: • Line Seizure: takes control of the phone lines disconnecting any premises phones • Off/On Hook: performs on and off -hook status to the phone lines • Dialing the Central Station(s) number: default is Touch -Tone®, programmable to rotary • For tone burst or touchtone type formats: discern proper Ack and Kissoff tone(s). The frequency and time duration of the tone(s) varies with the transmission format. The control panel will adjust accordingly. • Communicate in the following formats: ✓ 12 Tone Burst types: 20 pps (3+1, 4+1, 4+2, 3+1 Exp., 4+1 Exp., 4+2 Exp.) ✓ 3 Touchtone Types 4+1 Ademco Express 4+2 Ademco Express Ademco Contact ID 1.6 Components Main Circuit Board The main circuit board contains the system's CPU, power supply, other primary components and wiring interface connectors. The 4XTMF option module plugs in and is mounted to the main cir- cuit board. The circuit board is delivered mounted to a chassis in the MS-9050UD backbox (refer to circuit board illustration on page 10). MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 17 Product Description Components Cabinet The MS-9050UD backbox provides space for two batteries (up to 18 Amp Hour). Ample knockouts are provided for system wiring. Also available is an optional dress panel, which mounts to the inside of the cabinet (required by ULC for Canadian installations). Batteries The MS-9050UD cabinet provides space for two bat- teries (up to 18 Amp Hour). Batteries larger than 18 Amp Hour require an external charger such as the CHG-75 or CHG-120F and a UL listed battery box such as the BB -55F. Batteries must be ordered sepa- rately. \Lttery Cable P/N 75203 Wiral MS_9050UD.wmf co 0 1.6.1 Intelligent Addressable Detectors: Newer Series Intelligent, addressable detectors provide information to the control panel on an SLC Signaling Line Circuit (refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for detailed information on addressable devices, device installation, wiring and operation). This allows the control panel to continually process the information to determine the status (alarm, trouble, maintenance or normal) of each detector. Each detector responds to an SLC address that is set in the detector head using built-in rotary decimal switches. Note that a blinking LED on an intelligent detector indicates communication between the detector and the control panel. Refer to the Fire -Lite Device Compatibility Document for a list of approved conventional detectors. 1.6.2 Intelligent Addressable Modules: Newer Series The newer series of Control Modules and Monitor Modules provide an interface between the con- trol panel and conventional notification and initiating devices. Each module can be set to respond to an address with built-in rotary switches. A blinking LED on a monitor module indicates com- munication between the module and the control panel. These devices can also be used when installed on older systems. Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for information on addressable devices. Refer to the Fire -Lite Device Compatibility Document for a list of approved conventional notification and initiating devices. 1.6.3 300 Series Intelligent Addressable Devices Fire-Lite's 300 Series Intelligent Addressable Devices are fully compatible with the MS-9050UD FACP. Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for device information. 1.6.4 Device Accessories End -of -Line Resistor Assembly Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for device information. The 47 KU End -of -Line Resistor assem- bly (P/N: R -47K) is used to supervise the MMF-300, MDF -300, MMF-301 and CMF -300 module circuits. The 3.9 KO End -of -Line Resistor assembly is used to supervise the MMF-302 module circuit. The End -of -Line resistors are included with each module. Power Supervision Relay The UL -listed End -of -Line power supervision relay is used to supervise the power to 4 -wire smoke detectors and notification appliances. 18 MS -9050 Series Manual - P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Optional Modules and Accessories Product Description EOL-C(R/W) Mounting Plate The EOL -CR (red) and EOL -CW (white) are single End -of -Line resistor plates which are required for use in Canada. An ELR, which is supplied with each module and fire alarm control panel, is mounted to the EOL-C(R/W) plate. Resistors mounted to the plate can be used for the supervision of a monitor and control module circuit. 1.7 Optional Modules and Accessories The MS-9050UD main circuit board includes option module connectors for the following module: 4XTMF Transmitter Module The 4XTMF provides a supervised output for local energy municipal box transmitter, alarm and trouble reverse polarity. It includes a disable switch and disable trouble LED. A jumper on the module is used to select an option which allows the reverse polarity circuit to open with a system trouble condition if no alarm condition exists. The module plugs into connectors J8 and J9 which are located near the top center of the main circuit board. When the 4XTMF module is installed, Jumper JP28, on the main circuit board, must be cut to allow supervision of the module. ANN -80 LCD Annunciator The ANN -80 is a remote LCD annunciator which mimics the information displayed on the FACP LCD display and provides remote RESET, SILENCE, ACKNOWLEDGE, and DRILL. ANN -80C LCD Indicator (Canadian applications) The ANN -80C is a remote LCD indicator which mimics the information displayed on the FACP LCD display but does not allow remote control of the FACP. ANN -LED Annunciator Module The ANN -LED Annunciator Module provides three LEDs for each zone: Alarm, Trouble and Supervisory. An ANN -LED module is installed in the dress panel for the Canadian version. ANN-RLY Relay Module The ANN-RLY Module, which can be mounted inside the cabinet, provides 10 Form -C relays. ANN-S/PG Serial/Parallel Printer Gateway The ANN-S/PG module provides a connection for a serial or parallel printer. ANN -I/O LED Driver Module The ANN -I/O module provides connections to a user supplied graphic annunciator. ANN -SEC Secondary ANN -BUS Module The ANN -SEC module provides another ANN -BUS port for more wiring flexibility and for Cana- dian applications requiring remote annunciation. ANN -LC Lite -Connect Module The ANN -LC provides a multi-FACP system where a single communicator and phone line for Alarm, Trouble, and Supervisory reporting to a central station is shared using fiber-optic cables. DP -51050 Dress Panel A dress panel DP -51050 is available as an option. The dress panel restricts access to the system wiring while allowing access to the membrane switch panel. The Canadian version is supplied standard with a modified dress panel. TR -CE Trim -ring A trim -ring TR -CE is available as an option. The trim -ring allows semi -flush mounting of the cab- inet. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 19 Product Description Optional Modules and Accessories Battery Boxes BB -26 The BB -26 battery box may be used to house up to two 26 AH batteries and the CHG-75 Battery Charger. The battery box, which is red and is provided with knockouts, was designed specifically to compliment mounting below the FACP. BB -55F The BB -55F battery box may be used to house two 26 AH batteries, two 60 AH batteries or one 100 AH battery. When the CHG-120F is mounted in the BB -55F, two 26 All or one 60 AH battery may also be housed in the battery box. PS -Tools Programming Utility The PS -Tools Programming Utility can be used to locally or remotely program an MS-9050UD directly from most IBM compatible personal computers (PC), running Windows® XP (or newer). MS-9050UD program files can also be created and stored on the PC and then downloaded to the control panel. The part number PK -CD Kit includes the Windows-based Programming Utility soft- ware on CD-ROM with online help file. A serial cable (P/N: PRT/PK-CABLE), which must be purchased separately, is required for local connection of the PC to the RS -232 (PC/Printer) termi- nals at TB3 of the MS-9050UD main circuit board. Remote programming requires that the PC have a 2400 baud (or faster) modem. Important: Remote modification of FACP programming requires that the panel be enabled for remote download (refer to "Remote Download" on page 149). Remote interrogation of panel pro- gramming, history logs, detector status, etc., is possible without enabling the remote download option. Battery Chargers CHG-75 Battery Charger The CHG-75 is capable of charging up to 75 AH lead -acid batteries with the FACP. The FACP bat- tery charger must be disabled, by removing jumper JP30, when using the CHG-75. The charger and up to 26 AH batteries can be housed in the BB -26 battery box. Larger batteries and the charger can be housed in the BB -55F battery box which can be mounted up to 20 feet away from the control panel. Refer to the CHG-75 Manual for additional information. CHG-120F Battery Charger The CHG-120F is capable of charging up to 120 All lead -acid batteries with the FACP. The FACP battery charger must be disabled, by removing jumper JP30, when using the CHG-120F. The bat- teries and charger can be housed in the BB -55F battery box which can be mounted up to 20 feet away from the control panel. Note that when using the BB -55F for housing the charger and batter- ies greater than 26AH, multiple BB-55Fs are required. Refer to the CHG-120F Manual for addi- tional information. IPDACT, IPDACT-2, IPDACT-2UD - IP Communicator The IPDACT, IPDACT-2, and IPDACT-2UD are a compact, Internet Protocol Communicators designed to allow FACP status communication to a Central Station via the internet. No telephone lines are required when using any IPDACT. Using Contact ID protocol from the FACP, any IPDACT converts the standard DACT phone communication to a protocol that can be transmitted and received via the internet. It also checks connectivity between the FACP and Central Station. Refer to the IPDACT Series Product Installation Document P/N 53109 for additional information. 20 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Getting Started Product Description 1.8 Getting Started The following is a brief summary of the minimal steps involved in bringing an MS-9050UD on- line: • Install Backbox and Main Circuit Board (refer to "Mounting the Backbox" on page 24). Address and Install Intelligent Devices (refer to the SLC Wiring Manual). Enter Autoprogramming (refer to"Autoprogram" on page 58). Resolve Programming Conflicts. Go to Point Program to Enter Specific Data (refer to"Point Program" on page 59). Use the right and left arrow keys to navigate between devices. 1.9 Telephone Requirements and Warnings 1.9.1 Telephone Circuitry AC Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) = 03B DC Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) = 0.0B AC Impedance: 10.0 Mega Ohm Complies with FCC Part 68 Mates with RJ31 X Male Connector Supervision Threshold: loss of phone line voltage for 2 minutes The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area. 1.9.2 Digital Communicator Before connecting the control panel to the public switched telephone network, the installation of two RJ31X jacks is necessary. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact: Manufacturer: Fire•Lite Alarms, Inc. One Fire -Lite Place Northford, CT 06472 (203) 484-7161 Product Model Number: MS-9050UD FCC Registration Number: US:1W6ALO3B9050UD AC Ringer Equivalence: 0.3B DC Ringer Equivalence: 0.0B This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the inside of the FACP door is a label that contains, among other information, a product identi- fier in the format US:AAAEQ##77000C. If requested, this number must be provided to the tele- phone company. Alarm dialing equipment must be able to seize the telephone line and place a call in an emergency situation. It must be able to do this even if other equipment (telephone, answering system, com- puter modem, etc.) already has the telephone line in use. To do so, alarm dialing equipment must be connected to a properly installed RJ3IX jack that is electrically in series with and ahead of all other equipment attached to the same telephone line. If there are any questions concerning these MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 21 Product Description Telephone Requirements and Warnings instructions, consult the telephone company or a qualified installer about installing the RJ31X jack and alarm dialing equipment. Refer to"Digital Communicator" on page 32 for an illustration of the proper installation of this equipment. Important! The DACT must not be used to dial a phone number that is call -forwarded. 1.9.3 Telephone Company Rights and Warnings The telephone company, under certain circumstances, may temporarily discontinue services and/or make changes in its facilities, services, equipment or procedures which may affect the operation of this control panel. However, the telephone company is required to give advance notice of such changes or interruptions. If the control panel causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company reserves the right to temporarily discontinue service. Advance notification will be provided except in cases when advance notice is not practical. In such cases, notification will be provided as soon as possible. The opportunity will be given to correct any problems and to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. DO NOT CONNECT THIS PRODUCT TO COIN TELEPHONE, GROUND START, OR PARTY LINE SERVICES. When the control panel activates, premise phones will be disconnected. Two separate phone lines are required. Do not connect both telephone interfaces to the same tele- phone line. The control panel must be connected to the public switched telephone network upstream (as first device) of any private telephone system at the protected premises. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by ACTA. This equip- ment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compliant RJ31X male modular plug and compatible modular jack that is also compliant. 1.9.4 For Canadian Applications The following is excerpted from CP -01 Issue 5: NOTICE: The Industry Canada (IC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements docu- ment(s). The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users's satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility des- ignated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equip- ment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspections authority, or electrician. 22 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Telephone Requirements and Warnings Product Description "The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. the termi- nation of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the REN of all devices does not exceed 5." DOC Compliance - "This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emis- sions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Depart- ment of Communications." Representative: NOTIFIER/FIRE•LITE, CANADA 10 Whitmore Road Woodbridge, Ontario L4L 7Z4 Phone: (905) 856-8733 FAX: (905) 856-9687 IC Certificate Number: 2132A-9050UD Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 0.3B MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 23 Section 2: Installation The cabinet may be either semi -flush or surface mounted. The cabinet mounts using two key slots and two 0.250" (6.35 mm) diameter holes located in the backbox. The key slots are located at the top of the backbox and the two securing holes at the bottom. Carefully unpack the system and check for shipping damage. Mount the cabinet in a clean, dry, vibration -free area where extreme temperatures are not encountered. The area should be readily accessible with sufficient room to easily install and maintain the panel. Locate the top of the cabinet approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) above the floor with the hinge mounting on the left. Determine the number of conductors required for the devices to be installed. Sufficient knockouts are provided for wiring convenience. Select the appropriate knockout(s) and pull the conductors into the box. All wiring should be in accordance with the National and/or Local codes for fire alarm systems. 2.1 Mounting the Backbox The circuit board contains static -sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any boards so that static charges are removed from the body. Use static sup- pressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies. To prevent damage to the circuit board and to facilitate backbox mounting, the chassis with main circuit board and transformer can be easily removed. Loosen the two 3/8" nuts securing the top flanges of the chassis, then slide the chassis up to free it from the lower tabs. Place the chassis assembly in a safe location until it can be reinstalled in the backbox. ✓ Mark and predrill hole in the wall for the center top keyhole mounting bolt using the dimensions illustrated in Figure 2.3 on page 26. / Install center top fastener in the wall with the screw head protruding. ✓ Place backbox over the top screw, level, and secure. ✓ Mark and drill the left and right upper and lower mounting holes. Note: outer holes (closest to sidewall) are used for 16" O.C. stud mounting. ✓ Install remaining fasteners and tighten. mounting tab holes FACP Main Circuit Board on Chassis Al `mounting studs backbox stud mounting holes OudbdUnmn.cdr Ground Stud —10.6 backbox stud mounting hole--- -O 0 Backbox -qv mounting tab backbox stud 0 0.0_ mounting hole Figure 2.1 Chassis Removal 24 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Mounting the Chassis/Transformer/Main Circuit Board Installation 2.2 Mounting the Chassis/Transformer/Main Circuit Board One transformer is supplied standard with the control panel. Install the transformer and chassis in the location indicated in the following illustration. 1. When the location is dry and free of construction dust, install the chassis/transformer/circuit board assembly. 2. Mount the chassis to the backbox by aligning the two mounting tabs with the slots in the backbox, then position the two mounting hole tabs over the studs with nuts located in the upper portion of the backbox. 3. Slide the tabs located on the bottom of the chassis into the mounting slots in the backbox by pressing the chassis down. 4. Secure the chassis to the backbox by tightening the two mounting nuts (#10-32) at the top, and to ensure proper grounding, use a 3/8" nut driver or socket. 5. If the main circuit board is not already attached to the chassis, install it by positioning the ten mounting holes over the studs on the chassis and secure with the supplied screws. 6. Ensure the transformer plug is connected to Connector J2 on the FACP main circuit board 7. Complete the installation as detailed in the following sections. mounting tab hole FACP Main Circuit Board on Chassis Ground Stud —411.-® mounting stud Transformer is mounted to the bac of the chassis in the lower left corner_ NrN mounting slots 0 0 0 Backbox 10 4 l ■I a 1-1-41__ mounting tab Figure 2.2 Main Circuit Board/Chassis Installation 9050udbdmn.cdr MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 25 Installation Mounting the Chassis/Transformer/Main Circuit Board 1.625" (4.128 c Hinge Slot for optional Dress Panel 4.13 cm I.1 1,,,,625*,.; 6Y5 ; 2.325" (5.91 cm) I 7.0 cm --414:- I 2.75" 0 0 12.13crt A 4.775" i r -' - 4.13 c 1.625" -+- 29 95 cm 11.792" 0 0 138.1 cm 115.00" `-f o Mounting slots for optionail Trim Ring\ I o - Semi-Fush mounting hole 2.00" 4.128 cm Hinge Slot for optional Dress Panel I3.37 cm I 5.1 cmi I i I I 3.37 cm k1.325114-2.00"4;4-2.00"+14-2.00-�iF2.00"cif-2.00"1.325 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000)00000000000000000000000000000 16.65" (42.29 cm) 12.00" (30.48 cm) 1.25" (3.2 - � 1 II 16.0" 40.64 cln 15.0" 38.1 c 60" 15.24 cm J NIS A 48.37. 19.0" Semi -Flush Mounting Do not recess box more than 3.875" into wall to avoid covering venting holes on top of box. 4.1 cm jt 1.620 4.1cm 0; 12.13cm ' 4.775" :r. T---�-_- - A cm 17.83cm 7.02" 4.45cm I. 1.75" - *- ;1-, i 4.45cm c>1.75" 0; 16.00" (40.64 cm) 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1.00" (2.54 cm) - ) 2 4.535" 11.52 cm 13.23 cm 5.207" 1 1.304( 3.30 cm Figure 2.3 FACP Cabinet Mounting 5.207" -i 13.23 cm 9050udencl.wmf 26 MS -9050 Series Manual - P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Mounting the Chassis/Transformer/Main Circuit Board Installation Left Side Top Door = 19.26" (48.92 cm) Backbox = 19.0" (48.26 cm) Bottom L m§sm- Door = 16.821" (42.73 cm) Backbox = 16.65" (42.29 cm) L Depth = 5.207" (13.23 cm) 000000000e000000soavesaeeeeeeveovooe>0000eooe>oo a000eao>oa<0000<o>oo>0000000>oa0000aooae00000000 Figure 2.4 FACP Cabinet Dimensions lL Depth = —00 5.257" 4 (13.3531 Right Side 9050udcab2.wmf MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 27 Installation Power 2.3 Power WARNING: RISK OF DAMAGE AND ELECTRICAL SHOCK SEVERAL DIFFERENT SOURCES OF POWER CAN BE CONNECTED TO THIS PANEL. DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER BEFORE SERVICING. THE PANEL AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT MAY BE DAMAGED BY REMOVING AND/OR INSERTING CARDS, MODULES OR INTERCONNECTING CABLES WHILE THIS UNIT IS ENERGIZED. 2.3.1 AC Power and Earth Ground Connection Primary power required for the MS-9050UD/C FACP is 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 3.0 amps or 240 VAC, 50 Hz, 1.5 amps for the MS-905OUDE. Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Arti- cle 760 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and/or local codes. Use 14 AWG (2.00 mm2) or larger wire with 600 volt insulation rating. Make certain that the AC main circuit breaker is off before wiring any connections between the mains and the control panel. Connect wiring from the AC mains to the Transformer on the FACP, being careful to observe proper connections. Connect the AC ground wire to the Ground Stud located in the left side of the backbox. Refer to Figure 2.2 on page 25 and the illustration below for location of the stud. If installing an optional ANN -LC, ensure that the ground for the AC mains cable is installed first, closest to the backbox. This connection is vital for maintaining the control panel's immunity to unwanted transients gener- ated by lightning and electrostatic discharge. Apply AC power to the panel only after the system is completely installed and visually checked. Note that AC power must be applied to the panel before installing the battery interconnect cable (refer to the following section). For AC connections to the MS-905OUDC, refer to"AC Power Connections for Canadian Applica- tions" on page 182. 2.3.2 Battery Power Before connecting the batteries to the FACP, make certain that the interconnect cable between the batteries is not connected. Do not connect the interconnect cable until the system is com- pletely installed. Observe polarity when connecting the batter- ies. Connect the battery cable to J1 on the main circuit board. Refer to"Power Supply Calculations" on page 152, for calcula- tion of the correct battery rating. Interconnect Cable WARNING: BATTERIES CONTAIN SULFURIC ACID BATTERIES CONTAIN SULFURIC ACID WHICH CAN CAUSE SEVERE BURNS TO THE SKIN AND EYES AND CAN DESTROY FABRICS. IF CONTACT IS MADE WITH SULFURIC ACID, IMMEDIATELY FLUSH THE SKIN OR EYES WITH WATER FOR 15 MINUTES AND SEEK IMMEDIATE MEDICAL ATTENTION. 28 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Relays Installation AC Connection to Transformer leads: HOT NEUTRAL Battery Connection to J1 on FACP O Ground Stud I 2.4 Relays 9050udpowr.cdr The FACP provides two programmable Form -C relays and one fixed fail-safe Form -C trouble relay, all with contacts rated for 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resistive) or 0.5 amps @ 30 VAC (resistive). Note that relay connections must be nonpower -limited. Refer to UL Power -limited wiring require- ments. Note that the programmable relay labeled as Relay 1 is factory default programmed as Alarm and programmable Relay 3 is factory default programmed as Supervisory. The relay labeled Relay 2 is fixed as a Trouble relay and cannot be changed. It is a fail- safe relay which will transfer on any trouble or total power failure. TB5 RELAY 1 ALARM CONTACTS NO NC C ®®® ' ( TB6 RELAY 2 TROUBLE CONTACTS NC NO C ® 1' TB7 RELAY 3 SUPV CONTACTS NO NC C ® ® • ( Relay contacts shown with power applied to panel and no active troubles, alarms or supervisories Figure 2.5 Relay Terminals 9050udrely.wmf MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 29 Installation Notification Appliance Circuits 2.5 Notification Appliance Circuits The control panel provides two NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits) Style Y (Class B) or Style Z (Class A). Each circuit is capable of 2.5 amps of current. Total current in alarm for all external devices cannot exceed 2.5 amps (refer to "Calculating the System Current Draw" on page 153). Use UL listed 24 VDC notification appliances only. Circuits are supervised and power -limited. Refer to the Fire -Lite Device Compatibility Document for a listing of compatible notification appli- ances. The NACs, which are located on the main circuit board, may be expanded via the Fire -Lite FCPS Series field charger/power supplies. NACs can also be configured for auxiliary power. If set for auxiliary power (door holder, resettable power, non-resettable power) do not connect notification appliances. Refer to Section 1.2, "Speci- fications" for power capability. The following sections describe the configuration and wiring of Style Y and Style Z Notification Appliance Circuits on the FACP main circuit board. 2.5.1 Configuring NACs The Notification Appliance Circuits are configured for Style Y (Class B) or Style Z (Class A) by properly wiring the NAC devices to TB 1 on the main circuit board as illustrated below. Style Y (Class B) Notification Appliance Circuits, supervised and power -limited - 4.7 KS2, 1/ watt P/N:71252 UL listed Polarized Bells Polarized Strobes Polarized Horns Notification Appliance Circuit polarity shown in alarm state terminal number NAC 1 NAC 2 Style Z (Class A) Notification Appliance Circuits, supervised and power -limited Polarized Bells TBI Figure 2.6 NAC Wiring Polarized Strobes Polarized Horns Dummy Load all unused circuits with a 4.7 KS2, '14 watt resistor across the B+ & B - terminals or wire jumpers between A+ & B+ and A- & B-. 9050udnac.wmf 30 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 UL Power -limited Wiring Requirements Installation 2.6 UL Power -limited Wiring Requirements Transformer Wires (nonpower - limited, supervised) AC Power Hot Neutral Ground Ground Stud Power -limited and nonpower -limited circuit wiring must remain separated in the cabinet. All power -limited circuit wiring must remain at least 0.25" (6.35 mm) away from any nonpower -lim- ited circuit wiring and nonpower -limited circuit wiring must enter and exit the cabinet through dif- ferent knockouts and/or conduits. If installing an optional ANN -LC, ensure that the ground for the AC mains is installed first, closest to the backbox. A typical wiring diagram for the FACP is shown below. Power -limited Circuits (Class 2) maintain minimum 0.25" between power - limited and nonpower -limited circuits wiring • S Power -limited 1 Nonpower -limited Circuits (Class 1) • Circuits (Class 2) TB J2 3 I I IIS/,A(11, 0 ,' ams ,� ' E► f �•r!�� 7 al � o ��uC�r� i !)l}�} �3e'7 >����7 C:C. dIIIC.'C75 C'+C C:C: _ TBS TBfi TBT I r JP2 10o �_ JPIfi I ////' ...".„........1,...... ) //// ANN -SEC O ......... ..... ...... // //t i 4XTMF ] .,.,.,,,,,,,,, ,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, =JP, // Al // I/ /i/i dashed lines //// ilii represent wiring 1/// behind PCB //// O //// El O ///t l l t t LED] ® LED2® 1111 1111 1111 J,_. 1 1 1 fi■ BA �' DIN (IIIA HG BW, I rr 111111 1111111" To Batteries (nonpower -limited, Class 1, supervised) 0 e®e O =O Power -limited Circuits (Class 2) flu 00 9050udulpwr3.w LED, P VI EtM 0 Figure 2.7 Typical UL Power -limited Wiring Requirements Nonpower - limited, (Class 1) supervised Telephone Circuit Power -limited Circuits (Class 2) Nonpower - limited, supervised Fiber Circuit MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 31 Installation Digital Communicator 2/ Digital Communicator Network Service Provider's Facilities Telephone Line Two independent telephone lines can be connected to the control panel. Telephone line con- trol/command is made possible via double line seizure as well as usage of an RJ31X style intercon- nection. Note that it is critical that the panel's digital communicator be located as the first device on the incoming telephone circuit to properly function. Important! The DACT must not be used to dial a phone number that is call -forwarded per require- ments of UL 864 9th Edition. RJ31X Jack Customer Premises Equipment and Wiring Computer Unused RJ -11 Jack MS-9050UD Network Demarcation Point Telephone Answering System Fax Machine Unused RJ -11 Jack Figure 2.8 DACT Installation Te ephone 9050ACTAdact.wmf 32 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Optional Modules/Accessories Installation Installation The control panel's digital communicator is built into the main circuit board. Connection and wir- ing of two phone lines is required as shown below. KISSOFF LED3 ❑o LED2 ❑o PRIMARY ACTIVE 2 PHONE LINE a. ❑o LED1 SECONDARY ACTIVE PHONE LINE PH1 - - PH2 0 (Secondary Lines) Incoming Telco Phone Lines Tip Green Wire Ring Red Wire Ring To premise phones Tip Secondary Phone Line —► PH -2 (Primary Lines) Tip Green Wire Incoming Telco Red Wire Phone Lines Ring Ring To premise phones Tip Note: Shorting bars inside RJ31X Jack removed during male plug insertion. Modular Female Connectors Male Plug Connectors Figure 2.9 Wiring Phone Jacks 7 foot cable MCBL-7 (ordered separately) 2.8 Optional Modules/Accessories Installation ♦— Primary Phone Line PH -1 9050udjack2.wmf WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK IA, DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER (AC AND DC) BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING ANY MODULES OR WIRING. 2.8.1 4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation The 4XTMF provides a supervised output for a local energy municipal box transmitter in addition to alarm and trouble reverse polarity. A jumper option allows the reverse polarity circuit to open with a system trouble condition if no alarm condition exists. A disable switch allows disabling of the transmitter output during testing to prevent accidental calling of the monitoring service. Local Energy Municipal Box Service (NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems): Supervisory Current: 5.0 mA Trip Current: 350 mA (subtracted from notification appliance power) Coil Voltage: 3.65 VDC Maximum Coil Resistance: 14.6 ohms Maximum allowable wire resistance between panel and trip coil: 3 ohms Municipal Box wiring can leave the building Remote Station Service (NFPA 72 Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems) - Intended for connec- tion to a polarity reversal circuit or a Remote Station receiving unit having compatible rat- ings: MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 33 Installation Optional Modules/Accessories Installation Maximum load for each circuit: 10 mA Reverse polarity output voltage: 24 VDC Remote Alarm and Remote Trouble wiring can leave the building Before installing the module, place the disconnect switch to the right (disconnect) position to pre- vent accidental activation of the municipal box. Note that a Disconnect LED will illuminate after the module is installed in the MS-9050UD. In addition, the System Trouble LED will turn on to indicate the Disconnect condition. Note: 4XTMF Module is not directly suitable for transmitting reverse polarity supervisory signal. For an application using reverse polarity of a supervisory signal, refer to "FACP with Keltron" on page 169. }Remote Alarm (power -limited)* }Remote Trouble (power -limited)* No connection }Municipal Box (nonpower -limited)' + - + - + - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 * Wiring from these terminals can exit the protected premises. Dummy load terminals 6 and 7 (4.7Kn, A watt resistor) if Municipal Box is not connected. Polarities are shown for module activation TBL Jumper Connect to FACP at J8 & J9 Figure 2.10 4XTMF Transmitter Module Disconnect LED Disconnect Switch shown in disconnect position The following steps must be followed when installing the 4XTMF module: 1. Remove all power (Primary and Secondary) from the FACP before installing 4XTMF. 2. Cut jumper JP28 on the main circuit board to allow the control panel to supervise the 4XTMF module. 3. Remove two screws securing main circuit board to mounting plate and install two standoffs for securing 4XTMF module to main circuit board. Refer to Figure 2.11 for standoff locations on main circuit board. 4. Carefully plug the connectors on the 4XTMF module into connectors J8 and J9 on the MS- 905OUD main circuit board, being careful not to bend any pins. 5. Secure 4XTMF module to standoffs with supplied screws removed in step 3. 6. Reapply power to the FACP. 7. For proper 4XTMF operation, the main circuit board output relays must be programmed for the factory default settings: Alarm Relay 1, Trouble Relay 2, and Supervisory Relay 3. 34 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Optional Modules/Accessories Installation Installation 8. When the installation has been completed, enable the 4XTMF module by sliding the disconnect switch to the left. 9. Test system for proper operation. OIeeeeeeeI 0=r =9O INO I rE II4- -ms— 0 ♦ .-o—o � JR4 II ttittiMtit! 4XTMF >Standof O SL B+ A+ TB2 J8 & J9 Connectors SHIFT fl\ Standoff ® RBA IALM COMM RELAY!RROUBIEO:CAC1E RELAY 1SURVCCPIADS O NO NC C NC NO C NO NC C SEC TB5 4XTMF JP28 J8 J9 J3 � 7 p1 TB6 Jumper JP28 REMOVE JPI TO DISABLE GND FLT annnnmmnn.unumB LCD DISPLAY ® JP1 TB7 JP2 I REMOVE JUMPER TO ENABLE SPV RELAY Jumper JP2 J6 111 KEYBOARD CONNECTOR MS-9050UD Figure 2.11 4XTMF Connectors to MS-9050UD Connectors 9050ud4xtm.wmf NOTE: Jumper JP2 on the FACP main circuit board can be used to configure the FACP supervisory relay for operation with the 4XTMF module. Relay 3 at TB3 must be programmed as a supervisory relay. Removing the jumper from JP2 will allow the 4XTMF to generate a trouble if the supervisory contact opens Leaving the jumper on JP2 will prevent generation of a trouble if the supervisory contact opens 2.8.2 ANN -SEC Option Card The ANN -SEC option card allows for a secondary ANN -BUS. Install the ANN -SEC as follows. 1. Remove the chassis mounting screw to the right of TB7 and replace it with the supplied 0.5" x 4-40 male-female standoff. 2. Install the header into J13 on the main circuit board. MS -9050 Series Manual—P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 35 Installation ANN -BUS Devices 3. Secure the ANN -SEC to the circuit board with the supplied screw. RELAY 2 TROUBLE CONTACTS RELAY 3 SOY CONTACTS NC NO C NO NC, C T86 connector to J13 on main circuit board FACP Circuit Board TB7 JP2 1 ANN -SEC D PW A B RS -232 PC CONNECTOR RCV OMT DTR GND' standoff and screw Figure 2.12 Installing the ANN -SEC Option Card 2.9 ANN -BUS Devices 9050annsec.wmf QWARNING: RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DISCONNECT ALL SOURCES OF POWER (AC AND DC) BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING ANY MODULES OR WIRING. Guidelines • A variety of optional annunciation devices can be connected to an ANN -BUS communication circuit. ANN Series devices can be connected to the primary communication circuit (EIA -485) terminals on TB3. A secondary communication circuit (EIA -485) for these devices is available at TB] on the ANN -SEC card. • When using one ANN -BUS circuit, up to eight (8) annunciators can be supported. • When using both ANN -BUS communication circuits, the primary circuit supports up to three (3) annunciators and the secondary circuit supports up to (5) annunciators. Compatible devices include: — ANN -80 LCD Annunciator — ANN -80C LCD Indicator (Canadian Applications) — ANN-S/PG Serial/Parallel Printer Interface Module — ANN -I/O LED Driver Module — ANN -LED Annunciator Module ANN-RLED Annunciator Module (red alarm LEDs only) ANN-RLY Relay Module ANN -LC Lite -Connect Module • When operating two ANN -BUS circuits, only one ANN-S/PG Printer module can be used in the system. • The panel is capable of operating a primary ANN -BUS (TB3) and a secondary ANN -BUS (TB 1 on ANN -SEC card) simultaneously. 2.9.1 ANN -BUS Wiring This section contains information on calculating ANN -BUS wire distances and the types of wiring configurations (Class B). 36 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 ANN -BUS Devices Installation Calculating Wiring Distance for ANN -BUS Modules The following instructions will guide the installer in determining the type of wire and the maximum wiring distance that can be used with FACP ANN -BUS accessory modules. To calculate the wire gauge that must be used to connect ANN -BUS modules to the FACP, it is nec- essary to calculate the total worst case current draw for all modules on a single 4 -conductor bus. The total worst case current draw is calculated by adding the individual worst case currents for each module. The individual worst case values are shown in the following table: Model Number Worst Case Current Drawl ANN -80(C) LCD Annunciator/Indicator 0.040 amps ANN-S/PG Serial/Parallel Printer Interface Module 0.040 amps ANN -I/O LED Driver Module 0.200 amps ANN-RLY Relay Module 0.075 amps ANN-(R)LED Annunciator Module 0.068 amps ANN -LC Lite -Connect Module 0.150 amps 1 Total worst case current draw on a single ANN -BUS cannot exceed 0.5 amp. If current draw exceeds 0.5 amps, refer to "Powering ANN -BUS Devices from Auxiliary Power Supply" on page 39. After calculating the total worst case current draw, Table 2.1 specifies the maximum distance the modules can be located from the FACP on a single wire run. The table ensures 6.0 volts of line drop maximum. In general, the wire length is limited by resistance, but for heavier wire gauges, capacitance is the limiting factor. These cases are marked in the chart with an asterisk (*). Maxi- mum length can never be more than 6,000 feet (1,800 m), regardless of gauge used. The formula used to generate this chart is shown in the note below. Wiring Distance: ANN -BUS Modules to FRCP Total Worst Case Current Draw (amps) 22 Gauge 18 Gauge 16 Gauge 14 Gauge 0.100 1,852 ft. 4,688 ft. * 6,000 ft. *6,000 ft. 0.200 926 ft. 2,344 ft. 3,731 ft. 5,906 ft. 0.300 617 ft. 1,563 ft. 2,488 ft. 3,937 ft. 0.400 463 ft. 1,172 ft. 1,866 ft. 2,953 ft. 0.500 370 ft. 938 ft. 1,493 ft. 2,362 ft. Table 2.1 Wiring Distances The following formulas were used to generate the wire distance chart: 6.0 Volts Maximum Resistance (Ohms) Maximum Wire Length (feet) (6,000 feet maximum) Total Worst Case Current Draw (amps) Maximum Resistance (Ohms) Rpu where: Rpu = Ohms per 1,000 feet for various Wire Gauges (see table below) *500 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 37 Installation ANN -BUS Devices Wire Gauge Ohms per 1,000 feet (Rpu) 22 16.2 18 6.4 16 4.02 14 2.54 Exception: When using the ANN-RLY module, the installer must ensure that the maximum 24VDC power line drop does not exceed 0.3 volts. This results in the following wiring limitations: Wire Gauge Maximum Wire Length 18 312 feet 16 497 feet 14 787 feet 12 1,250 feet Wiring Distance Calculation Example: Suppose a system is configured with the following ANN -BUS modules: • 3 ANN -80 Remote Fire Annunciators • 1 ANN-S/PG Serial/Parallel Printer Interface Module • 1 ANN -I/O LED Driver Module The total worst case current is calculated as follows: ANN -80 Current Draw = 3 X 0.040 amps = 0.120 amps ANN-S/PG Current Draw = 1 X.0.040 amps = 0.040 amps ANN -I/O Current Draw = 1 X.0.200 amps = 0.200 amps Total Worst Case Current Draw = 0.360 amps Using this value and referring to the Wiring Distance Table 2.1 on page 37, it can be found that the available options are: ✓ 463 feet maximum using 22 Gauge wire ✓ 1,172 feet maximum using 18 Gauge wire ✓ 1,866 feet maximum using 16 Gauge wire / 2,953 feet maximum using 14 Gauge wire 38 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 ANN -BUS Devices Installation Wiring Configuration Figure 2.13 illustrates the wiring between the FACP and ANN -BUS devices. ANN -BUS and power wiring are supervised and power -limited TB1 4 3 2 1 ANN -BUS Device MS-9050UD TB3efirdeririee r61 cil 12 o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Primary ANN -BUS Figure 2.13 FACP wiring to ANN -BUS Device Powering ANN -BUS Devices from Auxiliary Power Supply Figure 2.14 illustrates the powering of ANN -BUS devices from an auxiliary power supply such as the FCPS-24FS6/8, when the maximum number of ANN -BUS devices exceeds the ANN -BUS power requirements. UT1 0 El B2 NO UNC COM TBS 1 ;G7 15 ;51 3 2 1 J3 JP2 -24 VDC "UX- IFi 10 tIs1 9+24 VDC IN2- B 1N2* IV11 T UT1- 6 OUT1.pqq' 5 on- JI 4 INV. 3 IL IN- 2 4C IN• lVi 1 TB4 O FCPS-24FS6/8 Cut Ground Fault Detection jumper JP1 (FACP monitors for ground faults) ANN -BUS and power wiring are supervised and power -limited TB3 1 2 3 4 5 6 MS-9050UD 7 8 TB1 ann8otofcps.wmf 4 3 2 1 ANN -80 Figure 2.14 Powering ANN -BUS Devices from FCPS-24FS6/8 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 39 Installation ANN -BUS Devices 2.9.2 ANN -BUS Device Addressing Each ANN -BUS device requires a unique address (ID Number) in order to communicate with the FACP. A 5 -position DIP switch on each device is used to set this address. The address set for these devices must also be programmed at the FACP for the specific device (refer to the programming section titled "ANN -BUS" on page 96). A maximum of 8 devices can be connected to the FACP ANN -BUS communication circuit. Device addresses do not need to be sequential and can be set to any number between 01 and 08. Note that 00 is not a valid address. The following table shows the DIP switch setting for each address. When installed and enabled through FACP programming, the ANN -LC will always be set to address 08. No dip switch settings are used to set the address on the ANN -LC. :1 NOTE: Address (ID Number) DIP switches on some devices may have more than 5 switch positions. Unless otherwise specified in the documentation supplied with each device, switch positions 6 and above must be set to OFF. Address Switch 51 Switch 4 Switch 3 Switch 2 Switch 1 not valid OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 01 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 02 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 03 OFF OFF OFF ON ON 04 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 05 OFF OFF ON OFF ON 06 OFF OFF ON ON OFF 07 OFF OFF ON ON ON 08 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 1 Switch 5 must be set to OFF for ANN -BUS devices to be recognized. 2.9.3 ANN -80(C) Remote Fire Annunciator/Indicator The ANN -80(C) Annunciator/Indicator is a compact, 80 character, backlit LCD remote fire annun- ciator which mimics the FACP display. It also provides system status indicators for AC Power, Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory and Alarm Silenced conditions. The ANN -80 Annunciator provides a button for Reset, Silence, Acknowledge, and Drill. The ANN -80C does not provide these buttons. Communication between the ANN -80(C) and FACP is accomplished over a two wire serial inter- face employing the ANN -BUS communication format. The devices are powered, via two addi- tional wires, from either the host FACP or remote UL -listed, filtered, power supply. Specifications • Operating Voltage Range: 18 VDC to 28 VDC • Current Consumption @ 24 VDC nominal (filtered and nonresettable): ✓ Normal/Standby (no activity): 37.0 mA ✓ Trouble: 39.0 mA ✓ Alarm: 40.0 mA ✓ AC Fail ( not backlit): 15.0 mA • For use indoors in a dry location 40 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 ANN -BUS Devices Installation Installation Ensure that all power (AC and DC) has been removed from the FACP before installing the annunci- ator. Opening/Closing Annunciator The following procedure details the steps used to open the annunciator in order to access the termi- nal block and DIP switches (refer to figure below): 1. Turn the key switch to the ON (Unlocked) position by turning the key counter -clockwise 2. Push in the snap latch located on the right side of the unit while pulling the cover open 3. To close the cover, make certain the key switch is in the ON (Unlocked) position. Swing the cover closed, snapping it shut 4. Turn the key switch to the OFF (Locked) position by turning clockwise and remove the key Annunciator cover with LCD display Annunciator backplate Key switch shown in OFF/Locked position Press in latch and Pull annunciator cover open 01 = co Mounting The ANN -80 can be surface or semi -flush mounted to a single, double or 4" square electrical box. Select and remove the appropriate knockout(s), pull the necessary wires through the knockouts and mount the annunciator in or on the wall depending on the type of installation desired. The ANN-SB8OKIT(-R/-W) is an available mounting kit for the ANN -80 annunciator. The kit comes with a surface backbox and surface wedge for angled viewing. The two pieces can be used separately or can be stacked together. The ANN -80 cover must be attached to the annunciator backplate before mounting the annunciator to the electrical box/wall. The cover cannot be reattached or removed after the annunciator has been mounted. Annunciator mounted on surface wedge from the ANN-SB8OKIT MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Annunciator mounted on surface backbox from the ANN-SB8OKIT Annunciator mounted on stacked surface wedge and backbox from the ANN-SB8OKIT aann8Okitmount.wmf 41 Installation ANN -BUS Devices Wiring ANN -80 to FACP The following steps can be used as a guide to wire the annunciator. Make certain all power has been removed from the FACP prior to annunciator installation. 1. Route wires from hole in backplate, through wiring channel and then to ANN -80 terminal block TB I. 11111111 TBI 0 wiring channel wires 0 0 0 d 2. Remove appropriate amount of wire insulation. 3. Connect the wiring from the FACP ANN -BUS to annunciator TB 1 terminals 3 (A) & 4 (B). Make certain to connect A to A and B to B. 4. If appropriate, connect the wiring going to the next device on the ANN -BUS to TB 1 terminals 3 & 4. Make certain to connect A to A and B to B. 5. Connect the wiring from the 24 VDC power source to annunciator TB 1 terminals 1 (-) & 2 (+). Make certain to observe proper polarity. 6. If appropriate, connect the power wiring going to the next device to terminals 1 (-) & 2 (+). Make certain to observe proper polarity. 7. After all connections are made, remove extra wire from inside of annunciator by dressing it neatly through wire channel. with any excess wire pushed back through hole into electrical box. 42 MS -9050 Series Manual—P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 ANN -BUS Devices Installation ANN -BUS and power wiring are supervised and power -limited Primary ANN -BUS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FACP Figure 2.15 ANN -80 Wiring to FACP The following table shows the ANN -80 connections to the MS-9050UD. MS-9050UD (TB3) ANN -80 (TBI) Terminal 1 GND (-) Terminal 1 (-) Terminal 2 PWR (+) Terminal 2 (+) Terminal 3 A (ANN -BUS) Terminal 3 (A) Terminal 4 B (ANN -BUS) Terminal 4 (B) Programming Following installation and wiring of the ANN -80 LCD annunciator to the FACP, the annunciator must be added to the system via FACP programming. Refer to the programming section titled "ANN -BUS" on page 96 in this manual for detailed programming information. Select the LCD option for programming. Trouble Response If the ANN -80 is installed but the ANN -BUS is not enabled at the FACP, the ANN -80 will indicate a trouble condition by NOT turning on its AC Power indicator. The LCD will also display Key Bus Trouble and the piezo will sound approximately once every 10 seconds. Note that the FACP will provide no indication of an ANN -80 trouble. To clear the ANN -80 trouble condition, enable the ANN -BUS and program the address correspond- ing to the address set on the ANN -80 at the FACP. 2.9.4 ANN-S/PG Serial/Parallel Interface Module The ANN-S/PG Serial/Parallel Interface module allows the connection of a serial or parallel printer to the FACP for a real-time log of system events, detector status reports and event history. The module is provided with a plastic enclosure for surface mounting. Proceed with the installation as described in the following: 1. Ensure that all power (AC and DC) has been removed from the FACP. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 43 Installation ANN -BUS Devices 2. Connect the ANN-S/PG to the FACP as illustrated in Figure 2.16. ANN -BUS and power wiring are supervised and power -limited Primary ANN -BUS MS-9050UD TB3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ANN-S/PG Module Parallel 'NC- Cable Connectors for connection .' to printer Serial annspgto9050ud.wmf Figure 2.16 ANN-S/PG Connection to FACP 3. Using the DIP switches on the back of the ANN-S/PG module, assign an ID number (address) to the module. 4. Select the address and configuration options for the ANN-S/PG module as described in the Programming section of this manual (refer to "ANN -BUS" on page 96). Note that the Auto -configure feature allows the programmer to quickly bring all installed ANN -BUS modules online (refer to "Auto -Configure" on page 104). 5. Connect a printer to the ANN-S/PG Parallel or Serial connectors (refer to Figure 2.16). Only one printer can be connected. Specifications • Operating Voltage: 24 VDC • Current (Alarm and Standby): 45 mA • Ambient Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) • Max. Wiring Distance from FACP: 6,000 ft. (1,800 m) • Mounting: Surface • Dimensions: 6"W x 7-3/4"H x 1-7/16"D (15.2 cm W x 19.7 cm H x 3.7 cm D) • For indoor use in a dry location only PRN -7 Printer Installation When connected to the FACP via the ANN-S/PG module, the PRN -7 prints the status changes within the control panel and time -stamps the printout with the time of day and date that the event occurred. It provides 80 columns of data on standard 9" x 11" tractor -feed paper. This section contains information on connecting a printer to the control panel and setting the printer options. • Connecting a PRN -7 Printer Remote printers require a primary AC power source. If required for the fire alarm system configuration (for example, a Proprietary Fire Alarm System), a remote printer requires a secondary power source (battery backup). Since a secondary power source is not provided as a standard feature, a separate UL -listed Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) should be used. The building emergency power supply may be used, as long as it meets the power continuity requirements of NFPA 72. Refer to NFPA 72 for further details. Connect the remote printer to the FACP via the ANN-S/PG module using a standard DB -9 cable. One end of the cable will plug into the DB -9 connector on the PRN -7 printer and the other end plugs into the serial connector on the ANN-S/PG module. 44 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 ANN -BUS Devices Installation • Setting Printer Options Refer to the documentation supplied with the PRN -7 printer for instructions on using the printer menu controls. Set the printer options (under the menu area) as shown in the following table: Option Setting Option Setting Font LPI ESC Character Bidirectional Copy HS Draft 6 LPI ESC ON CPI Skip Emulate I/O Buffer Serial Baud Format Protocol Character Set SI.Zero Auto LF 10CPI 0.5 LQ -2550 64K 9600 or 2400 7 Bit, Even, 1 Stop XON/XOFF Standard On On CG -TAB Country Auto CR Graphic E -US ASCII OFF Color Option Formien Lines Standard Barcode Barcode Not Installed 6LPI=60 Exec 10.5 Off Unsecured Table 2.2 PRN -7 Setup Options PRN -6F Printer Installation When connected to the FACP via the ANN-S/PG module, the PRN prints the status changes within the control panel and time -stamps the printout with the time of day and date that the event occurred. It provides 80 columns of data on standard 9" x 11" tractor -feed paper. This section contains infor- mation on connecting a printer to the control panel and setting the printer options. • Connecting PRN -6F Printer Remote printers require a primary AC power source. If required for the fire alarm system configu- ration (for example, a Proprietary Fire Alarm System), a remote printer requires a secondary power source (battery backup). Since a secondary power source is not provided as a standard feature, a separate UL -listed Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) should be used. The building emergency power supply may be used, as long as it meets the power continuity requirements of NFPA 72. Refer to NFPA 72 for further details. Connect the remote printer to the FACP via the ANN-S/PG module using a standard DB -25 cable. One end of the cable will plug into the DB -25 connector on the PRN printer and the other end plugs into the parallel connector on the ANN-S/PG module. Note that the 9 -pin DB -9 port on the ANN- S/PG is used to connect a serial printer. The 25 -pin port is used for a Centronics parallel printer cable. Connect either a serial or parallel printer, but not both at the same time. • Setting Printer Options Refer to the documentation supplied with the PRN -6F printer for instructions on using the printer menu controls. Set the printer options (under the menu area) as shown in the following table: Option Setting Option Setting Font HS Draft LPI 6 LPI ESC Character ESC Bidirectional Copy ON CG -TAB Graphic Country E -US ASCII CPI 10CPI Skip 0.5 Emulate Epson FX -850 I/O Buffer 40K Serial Table 2.3 PRN -6F Setup Options MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 45 Installation ANN -BUS Devices Auto CR OFF Color Option Formien Lines Standard Not Installed 6LPI=60 Exec 10.5 Baud 9600 or 2400 Format 7 Bit, Even, 1 Stop Protocol XON/XOFF Character Set Standard SI.Zero On Auto LF On PAPER BIN 1 12/72" BIN 2 12/72" SINGLE 12/72" PUSH TRA 12/72" PULL TRA 12/72" PAP ROLL 12/72" Table 2.3 PRN -6F Setup Options 2.9.5 ANN -I/O LED Driver Module The ANN -I/O is an LED driver module that can be used in a wide variety of applications, including as an interface with most customized graphic annunciators. The ANN -I/O can drive up to 40 LEDs. The module is provided with a plastic enclosure for mounting inside the annunciator or accessory box. The following sections describe hardware installation. Refer to the section titled"ANN-BUS" on page 96 for programming information. ANN -I/O Board Layout Figure 2.17 illustrates the ANN -UO board showing locations of screw terminals for connection to the FACP, pin connectors for connecting LEDs and the DIP switch for selecting the ANN -BUS ID number. Terminals not used (future) A 1 1 1 IR 1 A A 1.11.2 1 1 P1 P2 P3 P4 1 10 11 20 21 30 31 LED Outi LED Out -i LED Outi LED Out] LED Power LED Power LED Power LED Power Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 11111111111 III11111111 1T2\1J\li►IC�1�� 0 ANN -BUS Connector Figure 2.17 ANN -I/O Board Layout ANN -BUS (ID#) Address DIP switch 46 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 ANN -BUS Devices Installation Specifications • Max. ANN -BUS Voltage: 28 VDC • Max. Current: ✓ Alarm: 200 mA ✓ Standby: 35 mA ✓ Each LED: 10 mA • Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) • For indoor use in a dry location only ANN -I/O Connection to FACP The ANN -I/O connects to the FACP via the ANN -BUS as illustrated in Figure 2.18. After the ANN -I/O is connected to the panel, it must be added to the system via FACP programming. Refer to the section titled "Modules Installed" on page 96. 000000000 000000 000 00000000.. 0000 00000 o 1 10 I •• 11 20 _ , • 21 30 t , 31 40 ED Out- ED Power nM ..epi LED Out] LED Power nn{ ttempi LED Out- LED Power nM uempi LED Out] LED Power net* steed ANN -I/O Module Primary ANN -BUS :C;CCa,—:-t-m MS-9050UD TB3 ANN -BUS and power wiring are supervised and power -limited 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 2.18 ANN -I/O Connection to FACP ANN -I/O Module LED Wiring There are four 12 -pin connectors on the ANN -I/O module for connecting LEDs. Each set of 10 LEDs get their power from Pin 11 of the corresponding connector. Internal resistors are sized so that there is approximately 10 mA of current for each LED. No series resistors are required. LED outputs can be mapped to output circuits. Refer to the programming section titled "Modules Installed" on page 96 of this manual. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 47 Installation ANN -BUS Devices The LEDs are wired as illustrated in Figure 2.19. Note that the illustration depicts only connectors PI and P2. Wiring is identical for P3 (LEDs 21-30) and P4 (LEDs 31-40). P1 Pin# LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 LED 9 LED 10 LED Power no connectloi LED 11 LED 12 LED 13 LED 14 LED 15 LED 16 LED 17 LED 18 LED 19 LED 20 LED Power no connection P2 Pfn # Cathode 1 LEDs Anode 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 11 k XAfi"k k k 7 10 11 f 12 LED 11 LED 12 LED 13 LED 14 LED 15 LED 16 LED 17 LED 18 LED 19 LED 20 LED Power no connection P2 Pfn # Cathode 1 LEDs Anode Figure 2.19 ANN -I/O LED Wiring Cathode LEDs Anode 0 CC 48 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 Figure 2.19 ANN -I/O LED Wiring Cathode LEDs Anode 0 CC 48 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 ANN -BUS Devices Installation 2.9.6 ANN -LED Annunciator Module The ANN -LED and ANN-RLED annunciator modules provide LED annunciation of general sys- tem faults and input zones/points when used with a compatible FACP. The ANN -LED module pro- vides alarm (red), trouble (yellow) and supervisory (yellow) indication for up to ten input zones or addressable points. The ANN-RLED provides alarm (red) indication for up to 30 input zones or addressable points. Multiple ANN-(R)LED modules may be used for full system coverage. Figure 2.20 ANN -LEDs (shown in possible stacked configuration) 3 Y yN 41 C C 10 Specifications • Max. ANN -BUS Voltage: 24 VDC • Max. Current: ✓ Alarm: 68 mA ✓ Standby: 28 mA • Operating Temperature: 32° F to 120° F (0° C to 49° C) • For indoor use in a dry location only Mounting and Installation The ANN -LED Module is supplied with a metal backbox, mounting bracket, and cover. Refer to the ANN -LED Installation Document #53032 for more information. Figure 2.21 Exploded View of ANN -LED a 3 C MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 49 Installation ANN -BUS Devices ANN -LED Board Layout and Connection to FACP Figure 2.22 illustrates the ANN -LED board showing locations of screw terminals for connection to the FACP and the DIP switches for selecting the ANN -BUS ID number. ANN -BUS (ID#) Address DIP switch Ground wire from mounting screw to FACP Earth Ground stud is required for some Canadian applications. (Refer to "ANN -LED Annunciator Installation for Canadian Applications" on page 179). -24 VDC +24 VDC MS-9050UD TB3 eeee to OrraTw 000000pp ANN -LED ANN -BUS and power wiring are supervised and power -limited Primary ANN -BUS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 Figure 2.22 ANN -LED Connection to FACP annledto9050ud.wmf 2.9.7 ANN-RLY Relay Module The ANN-RLY relay module provides 10 programmable Form -C relays when used with a compat- ible FACP. Specifications • Operating Voltage: 24 VDC • Max. Current: ✓ Alarm: 75 mA ✓ Standby: 15 mA • Operating Temperature: 32° F to 120° F (0° C to 49° C) • For indoor use in a dry location only 50 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 ANN -BUS Devices Installation Mounting and Installation The ANN-RLY relay module can be mounted inside the FACP main circuit board chassis or inside the ROME Series enclosure. Refer to the ANN-RLYlnstallation Document #53033 for instructions on chassis mounting or to the ROME Series Installation Document #53530 for mounting in the sep- arate backbox. FACP Chassis Installation FACP Backbox Installation using ANN-MBRLY mounting bracket ROME Series Installation using ANN-MBRLY mounting bracket mounting hooks through mounting slots mounting holes ANN-RLY on A MBRLY mounting bracket Figure 2.23 ANN-RLY Mounting Options ann-rlyinchassis. wmf ann_mbriyincab3.wmf rome-relay-plate3.wmf MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 51 Installation ANN -BUS Devices ANN-RLY Board Layout and Connection to FACP Figure 2.24 illustrates the ANN-RLY board showing locations of screw terminals for connection to the FACP and the DIP switches for selecting the ANN -BUS ID number. ANN -BUS (ID#) Address DIP switch ■ ® T82 TB4 TB5 TB3 Li TB6 ANN -BUS- +AB 0 TBI 0 +24 VDC -24 VDC 0000 ANN-RLY ANN -BUS and power wiring are supervised and power -limited Primary ANN -BUS FACP 00000000 1 2 3 4 5 8 7 8 0 Figure 2.24 ANN-RLY Connection to FACP 2.9.8 ANN -LC Lite -Connect Module Specifications • Operating Voltage: 24 VDC • Max. Current: 150 mA • Operating Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) • For indoor use in a dry location only Installation Ensure that all power (AC and DC) has been removed from the FACP before installing the ANN -LC. Mounting The ANN -LC mounts inside the FACP cabinet. Slide the two tabs of the bracket into the backbox protrusions on the lower right side. Secure with the included self -tapping screw. Refer to the ANN -LC Product Installation Document for more information. 52 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 ANN -BUS Devices Installation backbox ANN -LC protrusions Figure 2.25 Mounting the ANN -LC into the Backbox Wiring the ANN -LC to the MS-9050UD • Without an ANN -SEC Card The ANN -LC connects from the MS-9050UD via ribbon cable. Using the 21" ribbon cable, connect the MS-9050UD at J13 to J3 on the ANN -LC. Run the ribbon cable up behind the MS-9050UD board. QWARNING: OBSERVE PROPER ALIGNMENT (RED STRIPE ON CABLE) CONNECTING MISMATCHED PINS WILL CAUSE PERMANENT DAMAGE TO THE BOARD. WHEN ATTACHING THE RIBBON CABLE, BE SURE IT DOES NOT GET OVERLY TWISTED. O B. A+ A. B. B. A+ A. B. B. 1. 93. A.1" RI EMI NO NC C NC NO C TB! JP]B OJB MS-9050UD Observe proper alignment! (Red stripe on cable) Jl JM Jo ANN -LC J3 J13 Do not Use Figure 2.26 Wiring the ANN -LC Directly to the MS-9050UD 9050toFLLC.wmf CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT DOWNSTREAM DEVICES WHEN USING THE RIBBON CABLE TO DIRECTLY CONNECT THE ANN -LC TO THE MS-9050UD, DO NOT CONNECT ANY ANN -BUS DEVICES DOWNSTREAM FROM THE ANN -LC. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 53 Installation ANN -BUS Devices ■ With an ANN -SEC Card Connect the ANN -SEC as shown in Section 2.8.2. Connect TB1 on the ANN -SEC to TB1 on the ANN -LC as shown below. Additional secondary ANN -BUS devices can be connected to TB2 on the ANN -LC. NIANINUMlNCI MINN NC NO C NO NC power - limited, supervised power - limited, supervised Note: Figure 2.27 is just a graphical representation for terminal wiring purposes only. Actual wiring from the ANN -SEC to the ANN -LC should be run behind the board, between the board and chassis. Maintain at least 0.25" (6.35 mm) spacing between power -limited and nonpower -limited circuit wiring. J 0 U N N O 0 0 L. TBI TB2 0 ANN -LC to ANN -BUS devices downstream Figure 2.27 Wiring the ANN -LC to the MS-9050UD Via the ANN -SEC Card Programming Following installation and wiring of the ANN -LC module to the FACP, the module must be added to the system via FACP programming. Select the LCD option for system programming. Refer to the programming section titled "Lite -Connect" on page 91 in this manual for detailed programming information. 54 MS -9050 Series Manual—P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Section 3: Programming NOTICE TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION AND OTHER INVOLVED PARTIES This product incorporates field -programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864, certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values or not used at all as indicated below: Program feature or option Permitted in UL 864? (Y/N) Possible settings Settings permitted in UL 864 Trouble Call Limit N Refer to "Trouble Call Limit (Dialer Runaway Prevention)" on page 107. Trouble Call Limit = 0 (factory default): unlimited calling to Central Station for any trouble condition Trouble Call Limit = 1 - 99: limits call for each unique trouble to from 1 to 99 within a 24 hour period Trouble Call Limit = 0 for unlimited Central Station trouble calls Remote Download Y Refer to "Remote Download" on page 149. Remote Download - Proprietary No Remote Download - Proprietary Yes Remote Download Proprietary Yes for Proprietary Installations Only 3.1 Programming Data Entry Programming can be accomplished using the MS-9050UD keypad or by connecting an optional standard computer keyboard. The keyboard can be connected to the PS -2 connector J6 on the con- trol panel main circuit board. The information presented in this section refers to programming the MS-9050UD via the onboard keypad. If an optional computer keyboard is connected to the MS-9050UD main circuit board, the following table describes the keyboard keys which correspond to the onboard keypad keys. Keypad Keys Computer Keyboard Keys 1st Event Home CLR Delete ESC Esc RECALL Insert # # A - Z A - Z 0-9 0-9 • (on QZ key) Space bar / / 4 4 T T y 4, ENTER Enter ACK/STEP F1 SILENCE F2 DRILL F3 RESET F4 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 55 Programming User Programming 3.2 User Programming The MS-9050UD is completely field programmable and requires no special software skills. While programming the MS-9050UD, the fire protection capabilities of the control panel are enabled. Site-specific programming may be accomplished in three ways: Autoprogramming Feature - This is a convenient method for quickly bringing the FACP addressable SLC devices on-line without the necessity of programming each device individually. Refer to "Autoprogram" on page 58 for a detailed description of Autoprogramming • Manual programming or editing, using the FACP keypad or a PC keyboard • Off-line Programming and Editing Feature - allows creation and editing of site-specific custom programs using a Windows-based computer. For programs requiring a large amount of data entry, this method may be preferred. A PK -CD programming kit can be ordered for this purpose The System All Normal screen will be displayed in a programmed system with no active alarms, troubles or supervisories, as illustrated below: SYSTEM ALL NORMAL 10:00A 012110 Read Status and Manual Dial mode can be entered while the panel is in any mode of operation. Manual Dial mode, however, cannot be entered while the panel is communicating with the Central Station. If an alarm or supervisory event exists at the panel, the event must be cleared before enter- ing Programming mode. To access any of the programming or read status features, the Enter or Mode key must be pressed, which will cause the LCD to display the following: 1=READ STATUS MODE 2=PROGRAMMING MODE 3=MANUAL DIAL MODE 4=REMOTE DOWNLOAD Pressing 1, while this screen is being displayed, will cause the control panel to enter the Read Sta- tus Mode which allows the user to view the programmed features and status of the control panel The Read Status feature is not password protected. Refer to"Read Status" on page 136 for a detailed description of this feature. Pressing 2 will select user Programming Mode which may only be accomplished by an authorized person. After pressing 2, a screen will prompt for a password. After entering the correct password, the user may select from a list of programming options. Pressing 3 will select the Manual Dial Mode which allows the user to enter a troubleshoot mode of operation. Pressing 4 will select Remote Download which allows the user to enable the remote programming option. Refer to"Remote Download" on page 149. Exit Programming, Read Status, and Manual Dial Mode The programmer can exit any mode by repeatedly pressing the keypad ESC (Escape) key until the display reads System All Normal. Note that the data which is entered during Programming mode is not saved until the programmer exits this mode by repeatedly pressing the `ESC' key. If the Reset key is pressed or power is lost before exiting Programming mode, all data just entered will be lost. User Programming Levels There are two user programming levels: • User Master Program Level 1 is used for programming panel specific data relating to device types, zoning, messages, control panel functions, etc. 56 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Initial Power -up Programming • User Maintenance Program Level 2 is used by a qualified operator to access features such as Disable/Enable, View and Clear History, Walktest and System Time Change. 3.3 Initial Power -up The following sections describe the initial programming procedures for a new system. The same procedures are used to modify programming in an existing system. After completing the wiring of addressable devices to the SLC, apply power to the control panel. If the addressable devices have not yet been programmed into the FACP, their LEDs will not flash and the following trouble message will be displayed. TROUBL IN SYSTEM NO DEVICES INSTALLED 09:03A 012110 3.4 Programming Screens Description Four options are available when the Enter key is pressed: Read Status, Programming, Manual Dial Mode and Remote Download. The Read Status and Programming options have multiple functions or features which may be chosen. To view all of the choices, it is necessary that the programmer scroll through a number of additional subscreens. These selections are displayed on multiple screens to make them more readable for the programmer. Refer to "Master Programming Level" on page 58, for additional information on the various screens. The title of the main option screen will always be displayed at the top of the subscreens for the pro- grammer's convenience. If additional subscreens exist, an Up or Down arrow will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen being viewed. The programmer can then press the keypad Up or Down arrow key to view the new subscreen. To select one of the choices in a screen, the pro- grammer presses the keypad numerical key corresponding to the desired choice. Note that subscreens may also have multiple options which require viewing more than one screen. The same process, as detailed in the previous paragraphs, is followed to view all option choices. 3.5 Programming and Passwords There are two factory set programming passwords which will access the Programming screens as indicated in the following examples. From either of the screens, access to specific system and device features or programming may be obtained. All user programming entries are stored in non- volatile memory. The factory set passwords can be changed by the user as described in "Password Change" on page 118. If an invalid password is entered, the blinking cursor will return to the first password character position. To exit Programming, Read Status, Manual Dial mode or Remote Download at any time, press the ESC (Escape) key repeatedly. Note that Programming mode must be exited using the ESC key in order to store the program data entered during this mode. If the Reset key is pressed or power is lost before exiting Programming mode, the data just entered will not be saved. To access user Programming mode, press the Enter or Mode key. The LCD will display the follow- ing: 1=READ STATUS MODE 2=PROGRAMMING MODE 3=MANUAL DIAL MODE 4=REMOTE DOWNLOAD MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 57 Programming Master Programming Level To enter the user Programming mode, press 2. The display will read as follows: PROGRAMMING ENTER PASSWORD ***** Entering the Master level password (default 00000) will cause the following screen to appear: PROGRAMMING 1=AUTOPROGRAM v 2=POINT PROGRAM 3=ZONE SETUP If the Maintenance level password (default 11111) is entered, the following screen will appear: PROGRAMMING 1=POINT PROGRAM v 2=HISTORY 3=PROGRAM CHECK Note that in the two preceding screens, an arrow appears to inform the programmer that additional options can be viewed by pressing the keypad down arrow key. 3.6 Master Programming Level 3.6.1 PROGRAMMING 1=AUTOPROGRAM 2=POIHT PROGRAM 3=2ONE SETUP Programming Screen #1 58 When the Master Program Level password is entered, the control panel will enter user Program- ming mode. In this mode, the piezo sounder remains off, the trouble relay is activated and the sys- tem Trouble LED flashes until Programming mode is exited. The following display will appear: 1=AUTOPROGRAM v 2=POINT PROGRAM 3=ZONE SETUP Programming Screen #1 The down arrow which appears in the display indicates that additional programming choices can be viewed by pressing the down arrow key on the keypad. If a down and up arrow appear in the dis- play, pressing the `down' arrow key will display the subsequent Programming Screens as illustrated below while pressing the 'up' arrow key will display the previous screen. PROGRAMMING 1=LOOP SETUP 2=SYSTEM SETUP 3=VERIFY LOOP B Programming Screen #2 PROGRAMMING 1=HISTORY 2=WALKTEST Programming Screen #3 PROGRAMMING 1=PASSWORD CHANGE Li 2=CLEAR PROGRAM 3=PROGRAM CHECK Programming Screen #4 Autoprog ram Pressing 1 while viewing Programming Screen #1, will select the Autoprogram option, which prompts the control panel to poll all devices installed on the SLC loop. The primary purpose of autoprogramming is to allow the installer a fast and easy way to bring the system on-line as quickly as possible. The first time the system is powered -up, it should be autoprogrammed. If the system is already programmed and Autoprogram is initiated, the system will only add default values for newly installed devices. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming 3.6.2 PROGRAMMING 1=AUTOPROGRAM 2=POINT PROGRAM 32ONE SETUP Programming Screen #1 When Autoprogram is selected, the control panel will begin autoprogramming the system by com- municating with each addressable device installed on the SLC loop. While autoprogramming, the panel will display the following: AUTOPROGRAM AUTOPROGRAMMING! PLEASE WAIT Autoprogram Progress Screen When Autoprogramming is completed, the control panel will display the type and quantity of each device installed on the SLC loop similar to the following display: U OF DET LOOP1 022 U OF MON LOOP1 015 U OF CON LOOP1 010 Autoprogram Result Screen #1 In the preceding example, the display indicates that the SLC Loop has 22 addressable detectors, 15 monitor modules and 10 control modules installed. Pressing the ESC key will return the display to Programming Screen #1. Point Program The Point Program option allows the programmer to add a new addressable device to an SLC loop, delete an existing device from a loop or change the programming for an existing device. Pressing 2, while viewing Programming Screen #1, will select the Point Program option and display the fol- lowing screen: POINT PROGRAM SELECT TYPE 1=DETECTOR 2=MODULE Point Program Screen Detector Programming Pressing 1, while viewing the Point Program Screen, will allow the programmer to add, delete or change the programming of an addressable detector. The following screen will be displayed by the control panel: ■ Add Detector DETECTOR 1=ADD 2=DELETE 3=EDIT Detector Screen Pressing 1 while viewing the Detector Screen will display the following screen which allows the programmer to add a new detector address to programming: ADD DETECTOR ENTER DETECTOR: *** Add Detector Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. The programmer keys in the three digit detector address, such as 005. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 59 Programming Master Programming Level DETECTOR 1 -ROD 3 1 E Detector Screen When the last digit is keyed -in, the following screen will be displayed: DETECTOR TYPE — 1=SMOKE(PHOTO) 2=USER—DEFINED-1 3=SMOKE(ION) Press the down arrow key to view additional choices. Press the number corresponding to the desired selection to program that type to the newly added detector. When the type has been selected, the following screen will be displayed: ADD DETECTOR DETECTOR: 005 IS ADDED The programmer can continue adding detectors by pressing the ESC key which will return the dis- play to the Add Detector Screen. • Delete Detector Pressing 2 in the Detector Screen will display the Delete Detector Screen which allows the pro- grammer to delete a specific detector: DELETE DETECTOR ENTER DETECTOR: *** Delete Detector Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. The programmer keys in the three digit detector address, such as 005. When the last digit is keyed -in, the following screen will be displayed: DELETE DETECTOR DETECTOR: 005 IS DELETED The programmer can continue deleting detectors by pressing the ESC key which will return the dis- play to the Delete Detector Screen. • Edit Detector The programmer can change a detector's existing or factory default programming by pressing 3 in the Detector Screen. The following screen will be displayed: EDIT DETECTOR ENTER POINT ADDRESS *** Edit Detector Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. The programmer keys in the three digit detector address, such as 017. When the last digit is keyed -in, if the selected address has not been added to programming, a screen showing information about a device that is installed with a lower address, closest to the selected address, will be displayed. If no detectors have been installed on the loop, the following will be displayed: NO DETECTOR INSTALLED Edit Detector Screen #1 60 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming 1 EDIT D DETECTOR IFICRTION Edit Detector Screen #2 If the selected address has been added to programming, device summary screens will be displayed. These screens allow the programmer to view all device settings at a single glance. Pressing the left or right arrow keys will allow the programmer to rapidly view the devices at the previous or next address (if installed). If a detector (such as a photoelectric detector) with the selected address is not physically installed on the SLC or has a communication fault but the address is programmed in the system, the follow- ing screen will be displayed: TROUBL SMOKE(PHOTO) <ADJ><NOUN> ZNNN * 10017 Edit Detector Screen #1 If the selected address has been added to programming and a detector (such as a photoelectric detector) with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and is communicating with the control panel, the following will be displayed: NORMAL SMOKE (PHOTO) <ADJ><NOUN> ZNNN V 10017 Edit Detector Screen #1 To change the programming for the displayed detector. press the keyboard 'down' arrow key to view the Edit Detector screens. In the preceding example: ✓ Normal - indicates that the detector with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and communicating with the control panel (enabled) ✓ <ADJ><NOUN> - represents the adjective and noun, which have been programmed, describing the location of the displayed device ✓ ZNNN - represents the first of five possible software zones that the detector is assigned to (NNN = the three digit zone number from 000 - 019) ✓ V or * - indicates whether or not alarm verification is enabled (V = alarm verification enabled and * = alarm verification disabled) ✓ 1D017 - represents the Loop, Device type and Device address (1 = SLC Loop, D=Detector and 017 = Detector Address 017) The following examples show the editing of a photoelectric smoke detector with address 017, located on the SLC loop: EDIT DETECTOR 10017 1=ENABLED YES 2=TYPE SMOKE(PHOTO) 3=VERIFICATION OFF Edit Detector Screen #2 EDIT DETECTOR 10017 q 1=ZONE ASSIGNMENT 00 ** ** ** ** Edit Detector Screen #4 Enable/Disable Detector EDIT DETECTOR 10017 1=WALKTEST NO 2=PAS NO 3=PRE–SIGNAL NO Edit Detector Screen #3 EDIT DETECTOR 10017 �? 1=ADJECTIVE/NOUN Ll 2=DESCRIPTION ******************** Edit Detector Screen #5 To Enable or Disable the detector, press the 1 key while viewing the Edit Detector Screen #2. Each press of the key will toggle the screen between Enabled Yes and Enabled No. If Enabled No is selected, the detector will not be polled by the control panel, preventing the detector from reporting alarms and troubles to the panel. The control panel will display the device type and address which has been disabled and will turn on the Trouble LED. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 61 Programming Master Programming Level EDIT DETECTOR 1 -ENABLED 2 -TYPE 3- VERIFICATION Edit Detector Screen #2 Type To select the type of detector being programmed, press the 2 key while viewing the Edit Detector Screen #2. This will cause the control panel to display the following Detector Type Screen: DETECTOR TYPE 1=SMOKE(PHOTO) v 2=USER–DEFINED-1 3=SMOKE (ION) Detector Type Screen #1 Pressing the down arrow key will display additional detector types as indicated in the following table. Detector Type Action When Activated Smoke Photo Fire Alarm User -Defined -1 same as previous (Smoke Photo) Smoke Ion Fire Alarm User -Defined -2 same as previous (Smoke Ion) Heat Detect Fire Alarm User -Defined -3 same as previous (Heat Detect) Smoke DuctP Fire Alarm User -Defined -4 same as previous (Smoke DuctP) Photo w/Heat Fire Alarm User -Defined -5 same as previous (Photo w/Heat) Duct Supery Supervisory, latching User -Defined -6 same as previous (Duct Superv) Photo Supery Supervisory, latching User -Defined -7 same as previous (Photo Super) future not used While viewing any Detector Type screen, select the type of detector being programmed by pressing the corresponding keyboard number key. The display will return to Edit Detector Screen #2 and indicate the selection next to the Type option. r.=. &I NOTE: If a detector is selected to be a SUPERV DUCTP type, it will function like a supervisory point not a fire alarm point. The supervisory LED and supervisory relay will activate, not the fire alarm LED or alarm relay, if the detector senses smoke. EDIT DETECTOR 14YALKTEST 2 -PAS 3 -PRE -SIGNAL Edit Detector Screen #3 62 Verification Alarm verification is used to confirm that a smoke detector activation is a true alarm condition and not a false alarm. This feature is selected by pressing 3 while viewing the Edit Detector Screen #2 so that the display reads Verification On. Each time the 3 key is pressed, the display will toggle between Verification On and Verification Off. For a detailed description, refer to "Alarm Verifica- tion (None or One Minute)" on page 135. Walktest The Walktest feature allows one person to test the system devices without the necessity of manually resetting the control panel after each device activation. To enable a device for the Walktest feature, press 1 while viewing the Edit Detector Screen #3 until the display reads Walktest Yes. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between Walktest Yes and Walktest No. Refer to "Walk - test" on page 136. MS -9050 Series Manual—PIN 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming EDIT DETECTOR 1=WRLKTEST 2=PRS 3=PRE-SI6MfL Edit Detector Screen #3 PAS The PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) option will program the detector to delay panel activation (including alarm relay and communicator) for a period of 15 seconds plus a programmable time of up to 3 minutes. Zone 17, however, will activate immediately and may be used to connect a signal- ing device to indicate PAS activation (do not use a Notification Appliance Circuit for this purpose). To enable the PAS feature, press 2 while viewing the Edit Detector Screen #3 until the display reads PAS Yes. Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between PAS Yes and PAS No. Refer to "Positive Alarm Sequence" on page 134. For example, if a detector with address 005 is to be configured for PAS operation: / Select PAS Yes when editing the detector set to address 005 ✓ Program the desired zone or zones to be activated by this detector, in this example Z001 ✓ Program an output, such as a control module that is to be activated by detector 005 by assigning the same zone to it; in this example Z001 ✓ Program an output, such as a control module, for PAS activation by assigning zone Z17 to it. This control module may be connected to a signaling device used to indicate a PAS condition (do not use a Notification Appliance Circuit for this purpose) ✓ Enable zones Z001 and Special Purpose Zone PAS 17 and set the PAS delay timer to some value With the preceding program settings, when the detector with address 005 is activated, zone Z17 will cause its associated control module to activate immediately, sounding the connected PAS sig- naling device. Following the PAS delay time, zone Z001 will cause its associated control module to activate and the control panel will initiate an alarm condition. Note that a detector can be enabled for either PAS or Pre -signal but not both. Pre -signal The Pre -signal option programs the detector to delay panel activation for a preprogrammed time delay of up to three minutes while allowing for visual verification by a person. Note that the alarm relay and communicator will respond to the initial alarm immediately. In addition, Zone 18 will activate. This zone can be programmed to a control module which may be used to activate a sounder or indicator which the installer designates as a Presignal indication (do not use a Notifica- tion Appliance Circuit for this purpose). To enable the Pre -signal feature, press 3 while viewing Edit Detector Screen #3 until the display reads Pre -signal Yes. Each press of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Pre -signal Yes and Pre -signal No. Refer to "Presignal" on page 134. For example, if a detector with address 005 is to be configured for Pre -Signal operation: / Select Pre -signal Yes when editing the detector set to address 005 / Program the desired zone or zones to be activated by this detector, in this example Z001 ✓ Program an output, such as a control module that is to be activated by detector 005 by assigning the same zone to it; in this example Z001 ✓ Program an output, such as a control module, for Pre -signal activation by assigning zone Z18 to it. This control module may be connected to a signaling device used to indicate a Pre -signal condition (do not use a Notification Appliance Circuit for this purpose) ✓ Enable zones Z001 and Special Purpose Zone Pre -signal 18 and set the Pre -signal delay timer to some value With the preceding program settings, when the detector with address 005 is activated, zone Z18 will cause its associated control module to activate immediately, sounding the connected signaling device to indicate the Pre -signal condition. Following the Pre -signal delay time, zone Z001 will cause its associated control module to activate and the control panel will initiate an alarm condition. Note that a detector can be enabled for either PAS or Pre -signal but not both. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 63 Programming Master Programming Level EDIT DETECTOR 1=ZONE ASSI6H ENT 00 ** ** ** ** Edit Detector Screen #4 EDIT DETECTOR 1=ADJECTIVE/HOUH 2=DESCRIPTION ******************* Edit Detector Screen #5 1 -STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2 -STANDARD NOUN 3 -CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4 CUSTOM NOUN Adjective/Noun Screen 64 Zone Assignment A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each addressable detector. Pressing 1 while view- ing Edit Detector Screen #4 displays the following screen: ZONE ASSIGNMENT Z@8 Z** Z** Z** Z** Zone Assignment Screen Note that Z** represents the Zone Number(s) corresponding to this device. The factory default for an unprogrammed device is ZOO for general alarm zone. A flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left. Enter the two digit number corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this device. The cursor moves to the next Z** designation. Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zone ZOO. When all desired changes have been made, press the Enter key to store the zone assignments. The display will return to the Edit Detector Screen #4. Note that the left and right arrow keys can be used to navigate through the zones and the CLEAR key can be used to quickly clear a zone. Adjective/Noun The Adjective/Noun selection allows the programmer to enter specific descriptors about the detec- tor currently being programmed. Pressing 1 while viewing Edit Detector Screen #5 will cause the following screen to be displayed: 1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2=STANDARD NOUN 3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4=CUSTOM NOUN Adjective/Noun Screen Pressing 1 while viewing the Adjective/Noun Screen will cause the following screen(s) to be dis- played. Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed to see all the Adjective screens. Press the number corresponding to the adjective that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the detector currently being programmed. When an adjective has been selected, it will appear at the top of the display as indicated by the asterisks. ******************** 1=NORTH 2=SOUTH 3=EAST Adjective Screen #1 ******************** 1=REAR 2=UPPER 3=LOWER Adjective Screen #3 ******************** 1=3RD 2=4TH 3=5TH B Adjective Screen #5 ******************** 1=FLOOR4 2=FLOOR5 3=ROOM 4 Adjective Screen #7 ******************** 1=WEST 2=FRONT 3=CENTER B Adjective Screen #2 ******************** 1=MAIN 2=FIRST 3=2ND B Adjective Screen #4 ******************** 1=FLOOR1 2=FLOOR2 3=FLOOR3 B Adjective Screen #6 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming Adjective/Noun Screen 1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2=STANDARD NOUN 3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE *CUSTOM NOUN Adjective/Noun Screen EDIT DETECTOR 1=ADJECTIVE/NOUN 2 -DESCRIPTION Edit Detector Screen #5 Pressing 2 while viewing the Adjective/Noun Screen will cause the following screen(s) to be dis- played. Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed to see all the Noun screens. Press the number corresponding to the noun that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the detec- tor currently being programmed When a noun has been selected, it will appear at the top of the display as indicated by the asterisks. ******************** 1=BASEMENT 2=BOILER RM 3=CLASSROOM Noun Screen #1 ******************** 1=ELEVATOR 2=ENTRANCE 3=FLOOR Noun Screen #3 ******************** 1=KITCHEN 2=LOBBY 3=OFFICE Noun Screen #5 ******************** 1=STAIRWAY 2=STOREROOM 3=WING B Noun Screen #7 ******************** 1=CLOSET 2=CORRIDOR 3=ELECTRIC RM B Noun Screen #2 ******************** 1=GARAGE 2=HALLWAY 3=HVAC RM B Noun Screen #4 ******************** 1=PATIENT 2=RESTROOM 3=ROOM C Noun Screen #6 ******************** 1=ZONE fi Noun Screen #8 Pressing 3 or 4 while viewing the Adjective/Noun Screen will display screens similar to the previ- ous Adjective and Noun Screens. The new screens will list custom Adjectives and Nouns which have been programmed into the control panel by the user utilizing the PK -CD programming kit. These descriptors are selected as described in the previous sections. Description The Description selection allows the programmer to enter additional information about the detector currently being programmed. This information will be displayed as part of the device label on the display. Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Detector Screen #5 will cause the following screen to be displayed: DESCRIPTION 10002 ******************** Adjective/Noun Screen A flashing cursor will appear at the first asterisk to the left. The programmer can enter additional descriptive information about the device being programmed. This information will appear on the display along with the standard device label information. A maximum of 20 characters (including spaces) can be entered. To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad, repeatedly press the appropriate key until the desired character is displayed in the first position. For example, to enter the letter B, press the 2 (ABC) key three times to toggle through the characters 1, A, and B. Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat the process to enter the next character. To enter a space, press the * (QZ) key four times until a blank appears in the desired position. When all characters have been entered, press the Enter key to store the information. The display will return to the Edit Detector Screen #5, display- ing the new information at the bottom of the screen. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 65 Programming Master Programming Level POINT PROGRAM SELECT TYPE 1 -DETECTOR 2•MODULE Point Program Screen #2 Recall/Increment Function In addition, the user may use the Recall/Increment function at any time when the cursor is on the first letter of the Description, Adjective or Noun field as follows: • If the zero key is pressed, a 0 is placed in the first letter position. • If the zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions, the entire field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device programmed, and the cursor moves to the last character of the field (Recall function). The Recalled Adjective or Noun field may now be changed letter -by -letter. • If the zero key is pressed again with no other intervening key actions and the last character in the field is a number 0-9, the number is incremented by one (9 will change to 0). If the last character is a letter, it changes to a 0. • The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the zero key. As an example, the user could quickly enter `FLR 3_ROOM_305' as follows: 1. The cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective field. Press the zero key twice to display FLR_3. 2. With the cursor on the first letter of the Noun field, press the zero key twice to recall the dis- play ROOM 304. The cursor automatically jumps from the first to the last letter of the Noun field. 3. With the cursor on the last letter of the Noun field, press the zero key again to increment the room number to 305. 4. Press the Enter key to store the information. Module Programming Pressing 2, while viewing Point Program Screen #2, will allow the programmer to add, delete or change the programming of an addressable module. The following screen will be displayed by the control panel: MODULES 1=ADD 2=DELETE 3=EDIT Modules Screen ■ Add Module Pressing I while viewing the Modules Screen will display the following screen which allows the programmer to add a new module address to programming: ADD MODULE ENTER MODULES *** Add Module Screen #1 A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. The programmer keys in the three digit module address, such as 006. When the last digit is keyed -in, the following screen will be displayed: ROD MODULE 1=CONTROL 2=MONITOR Add Module Screen #2 66 MS -9050 Series Manual—PIN 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming 1 ES 2 --DELETE Modules Screen Pressing 1 for Control Module or 2 for Monitor Module will cause the following screen to be dis- played: ADD MODULE MODULES 006 IS ADDED Add Module Screen #3 The programmer can continue adding modules by pressing the ESC or left arrow key which will return the display to the Add Module Screen #1. ■ Delete Module Pressing 2 in the Modules Screen will display the Delete Module Screen which allows the pro- grammer to delete a specific module: DELETE MODULE ENTER MODULES *** Delete Module Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. Using the panel keypad, key in the module address such as 006. When the last digit is keyed in, the following confirmation that the module has been deleted will be displayed: DELETE MODULE MODULES 006 IS DELETED • Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module The programmer can change a modules existing or factory default programming by pressing 3 in the Modules Screen. The following screen will be displayed: EDIT MODULE ENTER MODULE ADDRESS *** Edit Module Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. The programmer keys in the three digit module address, such as 012. When the last digit is keyed -in, if the selected address has not been added to programming, a screen showing information about a device that is installed with a lower address, closest to the selected address, will be displayed. If no modules are installed on the loop, the following screen will be dis- played: NO MODULE INSTALLED Edit Module Screen If the selected address has been added to programming but a module (such as a monitor module) with the selected address is not physically installed on the SLC or has a communication fault, the following screen will be displayed: TROUBL MONITOR <ADJ><NOUN> ZNNN * 1M012 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 67 Programming Master Programming Level EDIT MONITOR 1-ENRBLED 2 -TYPE MONITOR Edit Monitor Screen #2 68 If the selected address has been added to programming and a module (such as a monitor module) with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and is communicating with the control panel, the following screen will be displayed: NORMAL MONITOR <ADJ><NOUN> ZNNN W 1MO12 To change the programmingfor the displayed module, press the keyboard down arrow key to view the following Edit Monitor screens. In the preceding example: ✓ Normal - indicates that the module with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and communicating with the control panel (enabled) ✓ <ADJ><NOUN> - represents the adjective and noun, which have been programmed, describing the location of the displayed device ✓ ZNNN - represents the first of five possible software zones that the module is assigned to (NNN = the two digit zone number from 000 - 019) ✓ 1M012 - represents the Loop, Device type and Device address (1 = SLC Loop 1, M=Module and 012 = Module Address 012) ✓ W or * - indicates whether or not the device is programmed for Walktest (W = programmed for walktest, * = not programmed for walktest). If the selected address corresponds to a control module, a screen displaying information about the control module with the selected address will be displayed as shown in "Edit Module Screen for Control Modules" on page 73. If the selected address corresponds to a monitor module, a screen displaying information about the module with the selected address will be displayed as illustrated in the following: NORMAL MONITOR — <ADJ><NOUN> ZNNN 1MO12 EDIT MONITOR 1MO12 1=ENABLED YES 2=TYPE MONITOR Edit Monitor Screen #2 EDIT MONITOR 1MO12 1=WALKTEST YES B 2=ZONE ASSIGNMENT 00 ** ** ** ** Edit Monitor Screen #4 Enable/Disable Module EDIT MONITOR 1MO12 1=PRE—SIGNAL NO Edit Monitor Screen #3 EDIT MONITOR 1MO12 n 1=ADJECTIVEINOUN 2=DESCRIPTION ******************** Edit Monitor Screen #5 To Enable or Disable the monitor module, press the 1 key while viewing the Edit Module Screen #2. Each press of the key will toggle the screen between Enabled Yes and Enabled No. If Enabled No is selected, the module will not be polled by the control panel, preventing the module from reporting alarms and troubles to the panel. The control panel will indicate a system trouble condi- tion if any devices are disabled. Type Monitor Using the PK -CD Upload/Download utility program, unique user -defined monitor types can be cre- ated and loaded into the FACP for later use. The FACP response to the activation of a user -defined type is the same as most previous standard types in the list, thus allowing a variety of user -defined MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming types and responses. To select the type of monitor module being programmed, press the 2 key while viewing the Edit Monitor Screen #2. This will cause the control panel to display the first Monitor Type Screen as illustrated below MONITOR TYPE 1=PULL—STATION v 2=USER—DEFINED-1 3=WATERFLOW Monitor Type Screen #1 To view additional Monitor Type Screens, press the down arrow key. While viewing one of the Monitor Type screens, select the type of monitor module being programmed by pressing the corre- sponding keypad number key. The display will return to the Edit Monitor Screen #2 which will show the new type selection. The following table lists all of the Monitor Types available for pro- gramming and their respective functions. Monitor module type selection will affect the function of the point as follows: Monitor Type Action When Activated Pull -Station Fire Alarm User -Defined -1 Fire Alarm Waterflow Fire Alarm Delayed (uses waterflow delay) User -Defined -2 Fire Alarm Delayed (uses waterflow delay) Monitor Fire Alarm User -Defined -3 Fire Alarm Future Use Future Use Future Use Future Use Smoke -Conventional'' z Fire Alarm User -Defined -51 Fire Alarm Heat -Conventional ` Fire Alarm User -Defined -6 2 Fire Alarm Medic -Alert 3 Piezo, latching User -Defined -7 Piezo, latching Hazard -Alert 3 Piezo, latching User -Defined -8 Piezo, latching Tomado-Alert 3 Piezo, latching User -Defined -9 Piezo, latching Future Use Future Use Future Use Future Use Tamper Supervisory, nonlatching (tracking) User -Defined -11 Supervisory, nonlatching (tracking) Supervisory Supervisory, latching User -Defined -12 Supervisory, latching Supervisory -AR 4 Supervisory, nonlatching (tracking) User -Defined -13 Supervisory, nonlatching (tracking) HVAC OVRRIDE ° Switch Supervisory, nonlatching (tracking) Power -Monitor AC Fault User -Defined -14 AC Fault Trouble -Monitor Trouble User -Defined -15 Trouble Proc-Mon 3 Piezo User -Defined -16 Piezo Procmon-AR 3' 4 Piezo, nonlatching (tracking) User -Defined -17 Piezo, nonlatching (tracking) Future Use Future Use Future Use Future Use Ack-Switch Acts like panel Acknowledge Key Sil-Switch Acts like panel Alarm Silence Key Reset -Switch Acts like panel Reset Key Table 3.1 Monitor Types MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 69 Programming Master Programming Level EDIT MONITOR 1•PRE-SIGNAL Edit Monitor Screen #3 EDIT MONITOR 141ALKTEST 2 -ZONE ASSIGNMENT 00 ** ** ** ** Edit Monitor Screen #4 Drill -Switch Acts like panel Drill Key PAS -Bypass PAS Disable HVAC RESTART' Switch Drill -Switch AR 4 Acts like panel Drill Key, nonlatching (tracking) b Table 3.1 Monitor Types 1 Conventional 2 -wire smoke detectors may be powered using an external power supply with an SLC Control Relay Module programmed for Resettable Power operation. A Control Relay Module set to the Resettable Power type will follow the main circuit board 24 VDC resettable power unless the control module is disabled. 2 Use only these Monitor Type IDs for the Zone Modules (MMF-302). The Zone Modules will not function correctly if any other Type ID is used. 3 Combination systems employing these non -fire monitor types require the SLC loop to be programmed by the installer for Style 4 operation and isolator modules must be employed on each non -fire branch of the SLC as per Figure 13 in the Fire -Lite SLC Wiring Manual (document number 51309). Fire and non -fire devices must not be used on the same SLC branch. 4 For entries ending in AR, AR refers to AutoResettable. 5 For HVAC RESTART AND HVAC OVRRIDE descriptions, refer to"HVAC Control" on page 172. 6 Drill Switch Auto-Resettable turns on the NACs and any control module mapped to the Drill Switch zone. Pre -signal To enable the Pre -signal feature, press 1 while viewing Edit Monitor Screen #3 until the display reads Pre -signal Yes. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between Pre -signal Yes and Pre -signal No. Refer to"Presignal" on page 134 for additional information. Walktest The Walktest feature allows one person to test the system devices without the necessity of manually resetting the control panel after each device activation. To enable devices, which are connected to a monitor module, for the Walktest feature, press 1 while viewing the Edit Monitor Screen #4 until the display reads Walktest Yes. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between Walktest Yes and Walktest No. Refer to"Walktest" on page 136 for additional information. Zone Assignment A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each addressable monitor module. Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Monitor Screen #4 displays the following screen: MON ZONE ASSIGN ZOO Z Z** Z** Z** Zone Assignment Screen Note that Z** represents the Zone Number(s) corresponding to this device. The factory default for an unprogrammed device is ZOO for general alarm zone. A flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left. Enter the two digit number corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this device. The cursor moves to the next Z** designation. Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zones ZOO. When all desired changes have been made, press the Enter key to store the zone assignments. The display will return to the Edit Monitor Screen #4. 70 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming EDIT MONITOR 1=ADJECTIVE/NOUN 2DESCRIPTION ******************* Edit Monitor Screen #5 l=STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2=STANDARD NOUN 3 CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4 CUSTOM NOUN Adjective/Noun Screen Adjective/Noun The Adjective/Noun selection allows the programmer to enter specific descriptors about the moni- tor module currently being programmed. Pressing 1 while viewing Edit Monitor Screen #5 will cause the following screen to be displayed: 1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2=STANDARD NOUN 3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4=CUSTOM NOUN Adjective/Noun Screen Pressing 1 while viewing the Adjective/Noun Screen will cause the following screen(s) to be dis- played. Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed to see all the Adjective screens. Press the number corresponding to the adjective that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the monitor module currently being programmed. ******************** 1=NORTH 2=SOUTH 3=EAST 3 Adjective Screen #1 ******************** 1=REAR 2=UPPER 3=LOWER Adjective Screen #3 ******************** 1=3RD 2=4TH 3=5TH Adjective Screen #5 ******************** 1=FLOOR 4 2=FLOOR 5 3=ROOM fi Adjective Screen #7 ******************** 1=WEST 2=FRONT 3=CENTER Adjective Screen #2 ******************** 1=MAIN 2=FIRST 3=2ND Adjective Screen #4 ******************** 1=FLOOR 1 2=FLOOR 2 3=FLOOR 3 B Adjective Screen #6 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 71 Programming Master Programming Level 1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2 -STANDARD NOUN 3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4=CUSTOM NOUN Adjective/Noun Screen EDIT MONITOR 1=ADJECTIVE/NOUN 2=DESCRIPTION ******************** Edit Monitor Screen #5 72 Pressing 2 while viewing the Adjective/Noun Screen wi played. Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be the number corresponding to the noun that is to be used itor module currently being programmed. 11 cause the following screen(s) to be dis- pressed to see all the Noun screens. Press as a descriptor for the location of the mon- ******************** 1=BASEMENT 2=BOILER RM 3=CLASSROOM Noun Screen #1 ******************** 1=ELEVATOR 2=ENTRANCE 3=FLOOR 0 Noun Screen #3 ******************** 1=KITCHEN 2=LOBBY 3=OFFICE B Noun Screen #5 ******************** 1=STAIRWRY 2=STOREROOM 3=WING B Noun Screen #7 ******************** 1=CLOSET 2=CORRIDOR 3=ELECTRIC RM B Noun Screen #2 ******************** 1=GARAGE 2=HALLWAY 3=HVAC RM B Noun Screen #4 ******************** 1=PATIENT 2=RESTROOM 3=ROOM B Noun Screen #6 ******************** 1=ZONE Noun Screen #8 Pressing 3 or 4 while viewing the Adjective/Noun Screen will display screens similar to the previ- ous Adjective and Noun Screens. The new screens will list Custom Adjectives and Nouns which have been programmed into the control panel using the PK -CD. These descriptors are selected as described in the previous sections. Description The Description selection allows the programmer to enter additional information about the monitor module currently being programmed. This information will be displayed as part of the device label on the LCD display. Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Monitor Screen #5 will cause the following screen to be displayed: DESCRIPTION 1M012 ******************** Adjective/Noun Screen A flashing cursor will appear at the first asterisk to the left. The programmer can enter additional descriptive information about the device being programmed. This information will appear on the LCD display along with the standard device label information. A maximum of 20 characters (including spaces) can be entered. To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad, repeatedly press the appropriate key until the desired character is displayed in the first position. For example, to enter the letter B, press the 2 (ABC) key three times to toggle through the characters 2, A and B. Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat the process to enter the next character. To enter a space, press the * (QZ) key four times until a blank appears in the desired position. When all characters have been entered, press the Enter key to store the information. The display will return to the Edit Monitor Screen #4, display- ing the new information at the bottom of the screen. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming MODULES 1 -ADO 2 -DELETE 3 -EDIT Modules Screen Recall/Increment Function In addition, the user may use the Recall/Increment function at any time when the cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective or Noun field as follows: • If the zero key is pressed, a 0 is placed in the first letter position. • If the zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions, the entire Adjective field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device programmed, and the cursor moves to the last character of the field (Recall function). The Recalled Adjective or Noun field may now be changed letter -by -letter. • If the zero key is pressed again with no other intervening key actions and the last character in the field is a number 0-9, the number is incremented by one (9 will change to 0). If the last character is a letter, it changes to a 0. • The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the zero key. As an example, the user could quickly enter `FLR_3_ROOM 305' as follows: 1. The cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective field. Press the zero key twice to display FLR_3. 2. With the cursor on the first letter of the Noun field, press the zero key twice to recall the dis- play ROOM 304. The cursor automatically jumps from the first to the last letter of the Noun field. 3. With the cursor on the last letter of the Noun field, press the zero key again to increment the room number to 305. 4. Press the Enter key to store the information. • Edit Module Screen for Control Modules The programmer can change a module's existing or factory default programming by pressing 3 in the Modules Screen. The following screen will be displayed: Edit Module Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. The programmer keys in the three digit module address, such as 002. When the last digit is keyed - in, if the selected address corresponds to a control module, a screen displaying information about the control module with the selected address will be displayed as illustrated in the following: NORMAL CONTROL r <AOJ><NOUN> ZNNN SW 1M002 Edit Control Screen #1 In the preceding example: ✓ Normal - indicates that the module with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and communicating with the control panel (enabled). ✓ <ADJ><NOUN> - represents the adjective and noun, which have been programmed, describing the location of the displayed device. ✓ Control - indicates that the selected module is a control module. ✓ S or * - represents Silenceable (S) or Nonsilenceable (*). / W or * - represents Waterflow Timer Delay (W = Waterflow Timer Delay enabled, * = Waterflow Timer Delay disabled). ✓ ZNNN - represents the first of five possible software zones that the module is assigned to (NNN = the three digit zone number from 000 - 019). MS -9050 Series Manual—P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 73 Programming Master Programming Level EDIT CONTROL 1 -ENABLED 2 -TYPE 30SILENCEABLE Edit Control Screen #2 EDIT CONTROL T_ ED 3 LSI ENCERBLE Edit Control Screen #2 ✓ 1M002 - represents the Loop, Device type and Device address (1 = SLC Loop, M=Module, and 002 = Module Address 02). To change the programming for the displayed module, press the keyboard down arrow key to view the following Edit Control screens: EDIT CONTROL 1=ENABLED YES B 2=TYPE CONTROL 3=SILENCEABLE YES Edit Control Screen #2 Enable/Disable Module EDIT CONTROL 1=WALKTEST YES g 2=ZONE ASSIGNMENT 00 ** ** ** ** AINIII Edit Control Screen #3 EDIT CONTROL n 1=ADJECTIVE/NOUN 2=DESCRIPTION ******************** Edit Control Screen #4 To Enable or Disable the control module, press the 1 key while viewing the Edit Control Screen #2. Each press of the key will toggle the screen between Enabled Yes and Enabled No. If Enabled No is selected, the module will not be polled by the control panel, preventing the module from activat- ing its output devices. The control panel will indicate a system trouble condition and the Disable LED will turn on if any devices are disabled. Type To select the type of control module being programmed, press the 2 key while viewing the Edit Control Screen #2. This will cause the control panel to display the following Control Type Screens: CONTROL TYPE 1=BLANK 2=BELL—CIRCUIT 3=HORN—CIRCUIT Control Type Screen #1 While viewing one of the Control Type screens, select the type of control module being pro- grammed by pressing the corresponding keypad number key. The display will return to the Edit Control Screen #2 and indicate the new type selection. NOTE: A control relay module set to the Resettable Power type will follow the main circuit board 24 VDC resettable power unless the control relay module is disabled. The following table contains control module type codes and their functions which are displayed in the Control Type screens: Control Type Special Function Blank NAC Type - Supervised Bell Circuit NAC Type - Supervised Horn Circuit NAC Type - Supervised Sounders NAC Type - Supervised Relay Relay Type - Ignore Open Circuit Strobe Circuit NAC Type - Supervised Control NAC Type - Supervised Resettable Power Relay Type - Ignore Open Circuit HVAC SHUTDN 2 Relay Type - Ignore Open Circuit 1 When using a control relay module to supply resettable power to conventional 2 -wire smoke detectors, the addressable monitor module must be programmed for "Smoke Conventional" operation. 2 For the HVAC SHUTDN description, refer to Section F.1, "Control Module Operation", on page 172. 74 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming EDIT CONTROL 1.ENABLED 2=TYPE 3=SILENCERBLE Edit Control Screen #2 EDIT CONTROL 1-WALKTEST 2 -ZONE ASSIGNMENT 00 ** ** ** ** Edit Control Screen #3 EDIT COTROL 1 ADJECCTIVE/NOUN 2 -DESCRIPTION Edit Control Screen #4 Silenceable The Silenceable selection allows the programmer to select whether output devices connected to the control module can be silenced, either by pressing the Alarm Silence key or by enabling Autosi- lence. Pressing the 3 key while viewing Edit Control Screen #2 will enable the Silenceable feature causing the display to read Silenceable Yes. Repeated presses of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Silenceable Yes and Silenceable No. Note that nonsilenceable outputs will not be activated for Fire Drill. Walktest The Walktest feature allows one person to test the system devices without the necessity of manually resetting the control panel after each device activation. To enable devices, which are connected to a control module, for the Walktest feature, press 1 while viewing the Edit Control Screen #3 until the display reads Walktest Yes. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between Walktest Yes and Walktest No. Refer to"Walktest" on page 136 for additional information. Zone Assignment A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each addressable control module. Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Control Screen #3 displays the following screen: ZONE ASSIGNMENT Zee Z?R* Z** Z** Z** Zone Assignment Screen Note that Z** represents the Zone Number(s) corresponding to this device. The factory default for an unprogrammed device is ZOO for general alarm zone. A flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left. Enter the two digit number corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this device. The cursor moves to the next Z** designation. Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zones ZOO. When all desired changes have been made, press the Enter key to store the zone assignments. The display will return to the Edit Control Screen #3. Adjective/Noun The Adjective/Noun selection allows the programmer to enter specific descriptors about the control module currently being programmed Pressing 1 while viewing Edit Control Screen #4 will cause the following screen to be displayed: 1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2=STANDARD NOUN 3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4=CUSTOM NOUN Adjective/Noun Screen MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 75 Programming Master Programming Level 1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2 -STANDARD NOUN 3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4 -CUSTOM NOUN Adjective/Noun Screen 1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE 2=STANDARD NOUN 3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE 4=CUSTOM NOUN Adjective/Noun Screen 76 Pressing I while viewing the Adjective/Noun Screen will cause the following screen(s) to be dis- played. Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed to see all the Adjective screens. Press the number corresponding to the adjective that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the control module currently being programmed. Adjective Screen #1 ******************** 1=REAR 2=UPPER 3=LOWER Adjective Screen #3 ******************** 1=3RD 2=4TH 3=5TH Adjective Screen #5 ******************** 1=FLOOR 4 2=FLOOR 5 3=ROOM Adjective Screen #7 ******************** 1=WEST 2=FRONT 3=CENTER B Adjective Screen #2 ******************** 1=MAIN 2=FIRST 3=2ND B Adjective Screen #4 ******************** 1=FLOOR 1 2=FLOOR 2 3=FLOOR 3 C Adjective Screen #6 Pressing 2 while viewing the Adjective/Noun Screen will cause the following screen(s) to be dis- played. Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed to see all the Noun screens. Press the number corresponding to the noun that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the con- trol module currently being programmed ******************** 1=BASEMENT 2=BOILER RM v 3=CLASSROOM Noun Screen #1 ******************** 1=ELEVATOR 2=ENTRANCE 3=FLOOR Noun Screen #3 ******************** 1=KITCHEN 2=LOBBY 3=OFFICE B Noun Screen #5 ******************** 1=STAIRWAY 2=STOREROOM 3=WING B Noun Screen #7 ******************** 1=CLOSET 2=CORRIDOR 3=ELECTRIC RM Noun Screen #2 ******************** 1=GARAGE 2=HALLWAY 3=HVAC RM B Noun Screen #4 ******************** 1=PATIENT 2=RESTROOM 3=ROOM Noun Screen #6 ******************** 1=ZONE Noun Screen #8 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming EDIT CONTROL 1-iDJECTIVE/NOUN 2 -DESCRIPTION Edit Control Screen #4 Pressing 3 or 4 while viewing the Adjective/Noun Screen will display screens similar to the previ- ous Adjective and Noun Screens. The new screens will list Custom Adjectives and Nouns which have been programmed into the control panel using the PK -CD programming kit. These descrip- tors are selected as described in the previous sections. Description The Description selection allows the programmer to enter additional information about the control module currently being programmed. This information will be displayed as part of the device label on the display. Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Control Screen #4 will cause the following screen to be displayed: DESCRIPTION 1M002 1=ADJECTIVEINOUN ******************* Adjective/Noun Screen A flashing cursor will appear at the first asterisk to the left. The programmer can enter additional descriptive information about the device being programmed. This information will appear on the display along with the standard device label information. A maximum of 20 characters (including spaces) can be entered. To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad, repeatedly press the appropriate key until the desired character is displayed in the first position. For example, to enter the letter B, press the 2 (ABC) key three times to toggle through the characters 1, A, and B. Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat the process to enter the next character. To enter a space, press the * (QZ) key four times until a blank appears in the desired position. When all characters have been entered, press the Enter key to store the information. The display will return to the Edit Control Screen #4, displaying the new information at the bottom of the screen. Recall/Increment Function In addition, the user may use the Recall/Increment function at any time when the cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective or Noun field as follows: • If the zero key is pressed, a 0 is placed in the first letter position. • If the zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions, the entire Adjective field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device programmed, and the cursor moves to the last character of the field (Recall function). The Recalled Adjective or Noun field may now be changed letter -by -letter. • If the zero key is pressed again with no other intervening key actions and the last character in the field is a number 0-9, the number is incremented by one (9 will change to 0). If the last character is a letter, it changes to a 0. • The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the zero key. As an example, the user could quickly enter `FLR 3_ROOM 305' as follows: 1. The cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective field. Press the zero key twice to display FLR_3. 2. With the cursor on the first letter of the Noun field, press the zero key twice to recall the dis- play ROOM 304. The cursor automatically jumps from the first to the last letter of the Noun field. 3. With the cursor on the last letter of the Noun field, press the zero key again to increment the room number to 305. 4. Press the Enter key to store the information. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 77 Programming Master Programming Level 3.6.3 Zone Setup Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen #2 will access the Zone Setup screens as illustrated below: PROGRAMMING 1=AUTOPROGRAM 2 -POINT PROGRAM 3=ZONE SETUP Programming Screen #2 ZONE SETUP 1=ENABLE 2=DISABLE 3=ZONE 17 18 19 Zone Setup Screen #1 ZONE SETUP 1=ENABLE 2=DISABLE 3=ZONE 17 18 19 Zone Setup Screen #1 ZONE SETUP 1=ENABLE 2=DISABLE 3=ZONE 17 18 19 Zone Setup Screen #1 Enable Pressing 1 for Enable, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #1, will display the following screen: ZONE SETUP 1=ZONES INSTALLED 2=ZONES ENABLED 3=ZONES DISABLED Zone Setup Screen #2 ZONE SETUP n 1=ZONE TYPES 2=ZONES AVAILABLE 3=FUTURE USE Zone Setup Screen #3 ZONE TO ENABLE Z Enable Screen This screens allows the programmer to enable zones, one at a time. A flashing cursor appears next to the Z, prompting the programmer to enter a two digit zone number (01 - 19). When the second digit is entered, the zone will be enabled and the cursor returns to the original position next to the Z. Another zone can then be enabled. Disable Pressing 2 for Disable, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #1, displays the following: ZONE TO DISABLE Z Disable Screen This screen allows the programmer to disable zones, one at a time. A flashing cursor appears next to the Z, prompting the programmer to enter a two digit zone number (01 - 19). When the second digit is entered, the zone will be disabled and the cursor will return to the original position next to the Z. Another zone can then be disabled. Zone 17, 18, and 19 Pressing 3 for Zone 17, 18, and 19, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #1, will display the following screen: SPEC PURPOSE ZONE 1=PAS 17 OFF 2=PRE—SIGNAL 18 OFF 3=TWO STAGE 19 OFF Zone 17, 18, and 19 Screen Zones 17, 18, and 19 can be programmed for normal zone operation or for special purpose applica- tions. In the above illustration, the three zones are shown Off, which means they can be pro- grammed to function in the same manner as all other zones, by assigning them to input and output devices in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen. Pressing 1 will cause the display to change to PAS 17 On. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between PAS 17 On and PAS 17 Off. When Zone 17 is programmed On, a PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) activation of any smoke detector will cause Zone 17 to activate. By assigning Zone 17 to a control module in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen, an output device connected to the control module can be used to indicate a PAS condition in the control panel. Do not assign Zone 17 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a PAS condition. Attempting to do so will generate an error message and will be prevented by soft- ware checks. 78 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming ZONE SETUP 1=ZONES INSTALLED 2=ZONES ENABLED 3 -ZONES DISABLED Zone Setup Screen #2 ZONE SETUP 1=ZONE TYPES 2=ZONES AVAILABLE 3 -FUTURE Zone Setup Screen #3 Pressing 2 will cause the display to change to Pre -signal 18 On. Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between Pre -signal 18 On and Pre -signal 18 Off. When Zone 18 is pro- grammed On, a Pre -signal activation of any device will cause Zone 18 to activate. By assigning Zone 18 to a control module in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen, an output device con- nected to the control module can be used to indicate a Pre -signal condition in the control panel. Do not assign Zone 18 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a Pre -signal condition. Attempting to do so will generate an error message and will be prevented by software checks. Pressing 3 will cause the display to change to Two Stage 19 On. Each press of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Two Stage 19 On and Two Stage 19 Off. Refer to "Two Stage Opera- tion" on page 88 for a description of this feature. Zones Installed Pressing 1 for Zones Installed, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #2, will display a screen similar to the following: ZONES INSTALLED 00 01 02 03 04 05 Zones Installed Screen This display will show all of the zones that have been programmed into the control panel. Zones Enabled Pressing 2 for Zones Enabled, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #2, will display a screen similar to the following: ZONES ENABLED 00 01 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Zones Enabled Screen This display will show all of the zones that are enabled in the control panel. Zones Disabled Pressing 3 for Zones Disabled, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #2, will display a screen similar to the following: ZONES DISABLED 03 Zones Disabled Screen This display will show all of the zones that are disabled in the control panel. Zone Type Zone Types must be programmed only if a DACT, programmed for zone reporting, is installed on the control panel. Pressing 1 for Zone Types, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #3, will display a screen similar to the following: ZONE TYPE PROG 1=Z00 MONITOR v 2=Z01 MONITOR 3=Z02 MONITOR Zones Installed Screen MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 79 Programming Master Programming Level -RI. ZONE SETUP 1=ZONE TYPES 2=ZONES AVAILABLE 3 -FUTURE Zone Setup Screen #3 80 The Zones Installed screen will show the system zones (default and user programmed) and their associated types. Note that an up and/or down arrow will appear in the upper right corner of the display, indicating that additional screens of zone information exists. Press the up or down arrow keys to view zones ZOO through Z19. Zone types can be changed by pressing the keypad number key corresponding to the zone in each Zones Installed Screen. Available zone types will be displayed in the resultant screens. For exam- ple, to change the zone type for zone Z02 in the screen illustrated above, press 3. The following screens will be displayed: ZONE TYPE PROG 1=MONITOR v 2=SMOKE PHOTO 3=WATERFLOW Zone Type Program Screen #1 ZONE TYPE PROD 1=SUPERVISORY 2=PROC. MON 3=SMOKE ION Zone Type Program Screen #4 ZONE TYPE PROD c 1=HEAT 2=PULL STATION 3=DUCT Zone Type Program Screen #2 ZONE TYPE PROD z 1=HONE Zone Type Program Screen #5 ZONE TYPE PROG 1=MEDICAL 2=HAZARD 3=TAMPER Zone Type Program Screen #3 To change the zone type for Z02 to Pull Station, scroll the display until Zone Type Program Screen #2 is displayed. Press 2 to program zone Z02 as a Pull Station zone. The display will return to the Zones Installed Screen showing zone Z02 and the Pull Station program type. Repeat the procedure for each zone to be changed. IMPORTANT! In Zone Type Program Screen #1, selecting WATERFLOW will assign a Waterflow silenceable zone type to the selected zone. Any signaling devices programmed to the same zone can be silenced by pressing the Alarm Silence key or by using the auto -silence feature. To program a waterflow circuit as nonsilenceable, refer to "System Setup" on page 81 and "Water - flow Silenceable" on page 91. NOTE: Zone Types are only relevant for Central Station reporting. Changing a zone type will only change how it is reported to the Central Station. NOTE: If a tornado zone is required, choose Zone Type "Hazard". Zones Available Pressing 2 while viewing Zone Setup Screen #3 will display the following screen: ZONES AVAILABLE 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 The display will show all of the zones that are still available for programming. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming 3.6.4 Loop Setup Loop Setup allows the programmer to configure the SLC Loop for NFPA Style 4, 6 or 7 wiring and to select the loop protocol. Pressing 1 while viewing Programming Screen #2 will cause the fol- lowing screen to be displayed: Programming Screen #2 LOOP SETUP 1=STYLE 4 2=PROTOCOL CLIP Loop Setup Screen Style To program the SLC Style for the loop, press 1 for Style, while viewing Loop Setup Screen. In the preceding example, the control panel is programmed for Style 4 SLC wiring as indicated by the 4 to the right of Style in the display. To change the style, press 1 to toggle the display to read Style 6. Each press of the I key will cause the display to toggle between Style 4 and Style 6. Note that, when programming the Loop Style, the programmer can only select between Style 4 and Style 6. To pro- gram a system for Style 7 wiring, the programmer must select the Loop Setup for Style 6. Style 7 wiring is the same as Style 6 with the added requirement that each device on the loop must have a pair of isolator modules, one on each side. The factory default setting is Style 4. Note on SLC Troubles: If the FACP reports an open fault on an SLC Loop programmed for Style 6, the trouble condition will latch at the FACP. When the SLC Loop has been repaired, the Reset button must be pressed at the FACP (at least 2 minutes after the trouble has been repaired) to clear the SLC trouble. Loop Protocol Loop Protocol refers to the SLC loop mode of operation. The only mode available is CLIP (Classic Loop Interface Protocol) which is used for the older legacy addressable devices such as the M300 Series modules and detectors as well as the newer devices. Pressing 2 while viewing the Loop Setup Screen will have no effect on programming. Device Addressing It is important to note that the MS-9050UD addressable device capacity is 50 detectors and con- trol/monitor modules. Addressable devices must not be set to addresses higher than 50. Program- ming will not allow addresses higher than 50. Important: Detectors and Modules cannot have the same address. For example, if a detector is installed at address 04, you cannot also have a module at address 04. Note that It is permissible to mix old and new addressable devices on the same loop. 3.6.5 System Setup System Setup allows the programmer to configure the following control panel features: • Trouble Reminder: This feature, when enabled, provides an audible reminder that an alarm or trouble still exists on the FACP after the control panel has been silenced. The control panel piezo sounder will pulse once every 15 seconds during an alarm and every two minutes during a trouble condition, after the Alarm Silence or Acknowledge key is pressed. The piezo will continue to sound at these rates until the alarm or trouble condition is cleared. Trouble Resound is independent of Trouble Reminder. If a silenced trouble condition is not cleared by midnight, the panel will reactivate the trouble sounder. • Banner: This option allows the user to change the top two lines of the LCD display from the factory default readout to a user defined readout when the control panel is in Normal condition. • Time -Date: This feature allows the programmer to set the time, display format (24 hr or 12 hr), date and daylight savings time feature into the FACP memory MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 81 Programming Master Programming Level PROGRAMMING !=LOOP SETUP 3 =VERIFY SETUP P� Programming Screen #2 1RCTORY 2=USER DEFINED Banner Screen • Timers: This option allows the programmer to set the PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) time delay, Pre -Signal time delay and Waterflow time delay. • NACs: This feature allows the programmer to configure the control panel Notification Appliance Circuits for a variety of options, such as circuit type, silenceable/nonsilenceable, autosilence, coding, silence inhibit, zone assignment and enable/disable. • Relays: This option allows programming of two onboard relays for activation by various control panel events, such as alarm, trouble, supervisory, etc. • Canadian Option: This option allows the automatic programming of the FACP to Canadian specifications (refer to "Canadian Option" on page 91). Important! For Canadian Applications, this option must be set to ON prior to any other panel programming. • Waterflow Silenceable: This option provides the ability to silence any output circuit activated by a monitor module programmed as a waterflow type. • Lite -Connect: This option allows the programmer to enable the ANN -LC module and configure the Lite -Connect circuit. Pressing 2 for System Setup, while viewing Programming Screen #2, will cause the following screens to be displayed: SYSTEM SETUP — 1=TROUBLE REM OFF v 2=BANNER 3=TIME—DATE System Setup Screen #1 Trouble Reminder SYSTEM SETUP 1=TIMERS 2=NAC 3=RELAYS System Setup Screen #2 SYSTEM SETUP 1=CANADIAN OPT. OFF 4 2=WATERFLOW SIL. NO 3=LITE—CONNECT System Setup Screen #3 The Trouble Reminder features causes the control panel piezo to sound a reminder `beep' for alarms and troubles, after the panel has been silenced. Refer to "System Setup" on page 81, for a detailed description of this feature. Pressing 1 while viewing System Setup Screen #1 will cause the display to toggle to Trouble Rem On, which enables this feature. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between Trouble Rem On and Trouble Rem Off. Banner The top line of the display, which appears when the control panel is in normal mode, can be changed by using the Banner option. Pressing 2 while viewing System Setup Screen #1 will cause the following to be displayed: BANNER 1=FACTORY 2=USER DEFINED Banner Screen Pressing 1 while viewing the Banner Screen will select the factory default banner setting and dis- play the following screen: FACTORY BANNER Factory Banner Screen The Factory Banner has now been selected and is stored in nonvolatile memory. Pressing the ESC key will return the display to the Banner Screen. 82 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming SYSTEM SETUP 1=TROUBLE REM 2= ME -DA -DATE System Setup Screen #1 Pressing 2 while viewing the Banner Screen will cause the following screens to be displayed: USER DEFINED BANNER PRESS ENTER IF OK User Defined Banner Screen #1 USER BANNER – LINE 2 PRESS ENTER IF OK *********** User Defined Banner Screen #2 These screens allow the programmer to enter a two line custom banner. A flashing cursor will appear in the bottom left corner of each display. A maximum of 20 characters (including spaces) can be entered into each screen for a total of two lines with 40 characters. After entering up to 20 characters in the first screen, press Enter to view the second screen. Enter up to 20 characters in the second screen in the same manner or just press Enter if a second banner line is not being entered. To quickly clear the current banner, press the CLR key. To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad, repeatedly press the appropriate key until the desired character is displayed in the first position. For example, to enter the letter B, press the 2 (ABC) key three times to toggle through the characters 1, A, and B. Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat the process to enter the next character. To enter a space, press the * (QZ) key four times to place a blank in the desired position. When all charac- ters have been entered, press the Enter key to store the information. The display will return to the Banner Screen. Time -Date The control panel time and date can be changed by pressing 3 while viewing the System Setup Screen #1. The following screen will be displayed: ■ Time TIME AND DATE 1=TIME 10:00 AM v 2=DATE 01-21-2010 3=CLOCK FORMAT 12HR Time -Date Screen #1 TIME AND DATE 1=DAYLIGHT SAVINGS 4 Time -Date Screen #2 To change the time, press 1 while viewing the Time -Date Screen. The following screen will be dis- played: ENTER TIME 0:00 AM 1=AM 2=PM Time Screen A flashing cursor is located toward the top left of the display. Below the cursor is the current time. To change the time, enter the two -digit hours followed by the two -digit minutes. The cursor will move one position to the right each time a digit is entered. After the last minutes digit is entered, the cursor will again move one position to the right. At this point enter 1 for AM or 2 for PM. The display will then return to the Time -Date Screen which will show the new time entry. If an error is made while entering a digit, press the CLR key to delete the entire entry and begin again. ■ Date To change the date, press 2 while viewing the Time -Date Screen. The following screen will be dis- played: ENTER DATE MONTH DAY YEAR 1-21-2010 Date Screen MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 83 Programming Master Programming Level TIME AND DATE 1 -DAYLIGHT SAVINGS Time & Date Screen #2 SYSTEM SETUP 1 -TIMERS 2=NAC 3=RELAYS System Setup Screen #2 84 A flashing cursor is located toward the top left of the display. Below the cursor is the current date. To change the date, enter the two -digit month followed by the two -digit day and then the two -digit year (01 for 2001, 02 for 2002, etc.). The cursor will move one position to the right each time a digit is entered. After the last year digit is entered, the display will return to the Time -Date Screen which will show the new date entry. If an error is made while entering a digit, press the CLR key to delete the entire entry and begin again. ■ Clock Format The clock can be configured to display 12 hour (AM & PM) or 24 hour (military) time. Pressing 3 while viewing the Time -Date screen will cause the display to toggle between 12HR and 24HR. Select 12HR for 12 hour display or 24HR for 24 hour display. If the clock is changed to 24 hour (military) format, the date will change to the European standard of Day -Month -Year (for display purposes only). • Daylight Savings Time Pressing 1 while viewing Time -Date Screen #2 will cause the following screens to be displayed: DAYLIGHT SAVINGS 1=ENABLED YES 2=START MONTH MAR 3=START WEEK WEEK -2 Daylight Savings Screen #1 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS 1=END MONTH NOV 4 2=END WEEK WEEK 1 Daylight Savings Screen #2 Pressing 1 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen #1 will cause the display to toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No. The control panel will automatically update the time for daylight savings time when Enabled Yes is selected. Pressing 2 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen #1 will display another screen which allows the programmer to select the month that daylight savings time will begin. In this sub -screen, pressing 1 will select March, 2 will select April, and 3 will select May. Pressing 3 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen #1 will display two sub -screens which allow the programmer to select the week of the month that daylight savings time will begin. In the first sub - screen, pressing 1 will select the first week, 2 will select the second week, and 3 will select the third week, while in the second sub -screen, pressing 1 will select the fourth week and 2 will select the last week of the selected month. Pressing I while viewing Daylight Savings Screen #2 will display another screen which allows the programmer to select the month that daylight savings time will end. In this sub -screen, pressing 1 will select September, 2 will select October, and 3 will select November. Pressing 2 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen #2 will display two sub -screens which allow the programmer to select the week of the month that daylight savings time will end. In the first sub - screen, pressing 1 will select the first week, 2 will select the second week, and 3 will select the third week, while in the second sub -screen, pressing 4 will select the fourth week and 5 will select the last week of the selected month. Timers Timer delays for PAS, Pre -signal and waterflow activation can be programmed by pressing 1 while viewing System Setup Screen #2. The following screen will be displayed: TIMERS 1=PAS DELAY 000 v 2=PRE SIGNAL 000 3=WATERFLOW 000 Timer Screen #1 TIMERS 1=AC LOSS DELAY 000 Timer Screen #2 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming TIMERS 1-P1:15 DELAY 000 2 -PRE SIGNAL 000 34.1RTERFLOW 000 Timer Screen #1 TDER 1 -PRS DELAY 000 2 -PRE SIGNAL 000 3-WATERFLOW 000 Timer Screen #1 • PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) Delay The factory default setting for PAS is 000 for no delay. To select a PAS delay of 001 to 180 seconds for all devices programmed for PAS, press 1 while viewing Timer Screen #1. The following dis- play will appear: PAS DELAY RANGE 0-180 SECONDS PAS Delay Screen A flashing cursor is positioned in the lower left corner of the display. Enter a delay time consisting of three digits, such as 005 for five seconds. Upon entering the third digit, the time delay will be stored in the control panel memory and the display will return to the Delay Screen which will indi- cate the new delay time. • Pre -signal Delay The factory default setting for Pre -signal delay is 000 for no delay. To select a Pre -signal delay of 001 to 180 seconds for all devices programmed for Pre -signal, press 2 while viewing Timer Screen #1. The following screen will be displayed: PRESIGNAL DELAY RANGE 0-180 SECONDS Pre -signal Delay Screen A flashing cursor is positioned in the lower left corner of the display. Enter a delay time consisting of three digits, such as 009 for nine seconds. Upon entering the third digit, the time delay will be stored in the control panel memory and the display will return to the Delay Screen which will indi- cate the new delay time. Note that detectors can be programmed for either PAS or Pre -signal operation, not both. Refer to "Edit Detector" on page 60 for programming details. • Waterflow Delay A delay can be added prior to declaring a waterflow type of alarm. Be careful to include any built- in delays of the waterflow device. The factory default setting for Waterflow delay is 000 for no delay. To select a Waterflow delay of 01 to 90 seconds for all devices programmed for Waterflow delay, press 3 while viewing Timer Screen #1. The following screen will be displayed: WATERFLOW DELAY RANGE 0-90 SECONDS Waterflow Delay Screen A flashing cursor is positioned in the lower left corner of the display. Enter a delay time consisting of two digits, such as 25 for twenty-five seconds. Upon entering the second digit, the time delay will be stored in the control panel memory and the display will return to the Delay Screen which will indicate the new delay time. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 85 Programming Master Programming Level TIMER iN LOSS DELAY Timer Screen #2 SYSTEM 1 TTIMERS SETUP 2.3NRC 32IRELRYS System Setup Screen #2 86 • AC Loss Delay The reporting of a loss of AC power to a central station can be delayed by programming the length of the desired delay. The factory default setting is 2 hours. Press 1 while viewing Timer Screen #2 to display the following: AC LOSS DELAY 1=NO DELAY 2=ENTER DELAY AC Loss Delay Screen #1 Pressing 1 while viewing AC Loss Delay Screen #1 will program the FACP to transmit an AC Loss report immediately to the central station. Pressing 2 while viewing AC Loss Delay Screen #1 will display the following: I AC LOSS DELAY RANGE 00-23 AC Loss Delay Screen #2 A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the display. The factory default setting is 02 hours. Type the two digit AC loss reporting delay in hours (00 to 23 hour delay). When the sec- ond digit is entered, the display will return to AC Loss Delay Screen #1. NOTE: Upon the loss of AC power at the control panel, relays programmed for 'AC Loss' will transfer immediately, regardless of the AC Loss Delay setting. If no troubles exist at the panel other than AC Loss, the System Trouble relay will delay its activation for the duration of the AC Loss Delay setting. NAC (Notification Appliance Circuit) The options for the NACs on the control panel main circuit board can be configure by pressing 2 while viewing System Setup Screen #2. The following screens will be displayed: NACS 1=NAC 1 2=NAC 2 NAC Selection Screen The Notification Appliance Circuits can be configured independently by pressing 1 for NAC 1 or 2 for NAC 2. The following screens will be displayed for each selection: NAC U 1=ENABLED YES v 2=TYPE BELL 3=SILENCEABLE YES NAC Screen #1 NAC X 1=ZONE 00 ** ** ** ** 2=SIL INHIBITED NO NAC Screen #3 NAC U 1=AUTO SILENCE 00 g 2=CODING STEADY NAC Screen #2 NAC U 1=SYNC TYPE S NAC Screen #4 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming 1-EEHRBBLED 2 -TYPE 3-SILENCERBLE NAC Screen #1 NRC 1 1 -AUTO SILENCE 2 -CODING TEMPORAL NAC Screen #2 • Enabled Pressing 1 while viewing NAC Screen #1 will cause the display to change to Enabled No. This will prevent the selected main circuit board NAC from activating its devices. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No. ■ Type The main circuit board NAC type can be programmed by pressing 2 while viewing NAC Screen #1. The following screen will be displayed. Press the down arrow key to view additional screens: NAC TYPE 1=BELL 2=HORN 3=STROBE Type Screen #1 Select the NAC device type by pressing the number corresponding to the type in the appropriate screen. When the selection is made, the display will return to NAC Screen #1. The following table contains NAC type codes and their functions: NAC Type Code Special Function Bell None Horn None Strobe None Synced Strobe Synchronized to manufacturer Strobe Sil Sync Same as Synced Strobe but Silence turns off audible & visual devices Door Holder NAC normally active Reset Power NAC normally active Non -Reset Power NAC normally active 1 Important: User should be aware that selecting Door Holder, Reset Power or Non -Reset Power types for an NAC will immediately activate (turn on) the NAC circuit and any devices connected to it, and therefore should not be used for notification appliances. • Silenceable Pressing 3 while viewing NAC Screen #1 will cause the display to change to Silenceable No. This will prevent the selected main circuit board NAC from being silenced by pressing the Alarm Silence key or by the Auto Silence feature. Each press of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Silenceable Yes and Silenceable No. Important: When a Notification Appliance Circuit with a mix of audible and visual devices is pro- grammed for silenceable and the synchronization feature is selected, only the audible devices will be turned off if the Silence key is pressed or if the Autosilence feature is enabled. The visual devices (strobes, etc.) will continue to operate. • Auto Silence The Auto Silence feature, when enabled, automatically silences all main circuit board silenceable notification appliances after a programmed length of time. To enable this feature and program the time delay before Auto Silence activation, press 1 while viewing NAC Screen #2. The following screens will be displayed: AUTO SILENCE 1=NO 2=5 MINUTES 3=10 MINUTES v Auto Silence Screen #1 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 AUTO SILENCE 1=15 MINUTES 2=20 MINUTES 3=25 MINUTES Auto Silence Screen #2 AUTO SILENCE 1=30 MINUTES Q Auto Silence Screen #3 87 Programming Master Programming Level To disable the Auto Silence feature, press 1 for No while viewing Auto Silence Screen #1. To enable the Auto Silence feature, press the number corresponding to the time delay which will elapse before Auto Silence activates. This information will be stored in memory and the display will return to NAC Screen #2. NOTE: All silenceable control modules will be controlled by the Autosilence timer for NAC 1. • Coding (only for NACs not programmed as Sync Strobe Type) The Coding feature allows the programmer to select the type of output that the main circuit board notification appliances will generate when activated. Pressing 2 while viewing NAC Screen #2 will cause the following displays to appear: CODING 1=STEADY 2=MARCH TIME 3=CALIFORNIA 3 Coding Screen #1 CODING 1=TEMPORAL 2=TWO STAGE 3 MIN 3=TWO STAGE 5 MIN Coding Screen #2 The programmer can select the notification appliance output by pressing the number corresponding to the desired output. The coding selections are: • Steady - a continuous output with no coding • March Time - 120 ppm (pulse -per -minute) output • California - 10 seconds on and 5 seconds off • Temporal - '/2 second on, 1/2 second off, 1/2 second on, '/2 second off, 1/2 second on, 11/2 second off • Two Stage 3 Minutes or 5 Minutes - Refer to "Two Stage Operation" on page 88. for a description of this feature Selection of one of the above options will cause the control panel to store the information in mem- ory and return the display to NAC Screen #2, which will display the new coding choice. Two Stage Operation Two Stage operation consists of the following: • 1st stage output - 20 ppm (pulse -per -minute) coding • 2nd stage output - Temporal coding as described above • Acknowledge button functions as the automatic alarm signal cancel button If Two Stage operation is programmed as the Coding option, the following sequence of events will occur during an alarm. 1. The on -board NACs which are programmed to General Alarm Zone 0 will activate with a 1st stage output upon activation of any alarm point. 2. If the activated alarm point is directly mapped to a zone which is programmed to an on -board NAC, that NAC will go directly to 2nd stage coding output. All other NACs not directly mapped to the activated alarm point's zone but assigned to Zone 0 will activate with a 1st stage output. 3. If, after the programmed time of 3 or 5 minutes, the Acknowledge switch has not been pressed, all NACs presently in 1st stage activation will go to 2nd stage activation. 4. If an Acknowledge switch has been pressed, the Alarm LED will turn from flashing to steady. Any NACs currently in 1st stage activation will remain in 1st stage. Pressing the Acknowl- edge switch does not affect NACs already in 2nd stage activation. 5. If another alarm point is activated and the countdown timer is counting, the alarm point will have no effect on the NACs unless the alarm point's zones are directly mapped to one of the NACs, in which case it will follow the procedure outlined in step 2. 88 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming NRC 2 1=ZONE ee 99 BB 0e ee 2•5IL INHIBITED NO NAC Screen #3 NRC x 1 -SYNC TYPE NAC Screen #4 6. If another alarm point is activated and the countdown timer has stopped counting due to the Acknowledge switch being pressed, the countdown timer will restart and the NACs will respond as outlined in step 2. NACs already in 2nd stage activation will not be affected. 7. Any control modules assigned to special Zone 19 will be activated either by direct mapping of an input device programmed to Zone 19 or if an NAC enters 2nd stage operation. 8. Control modules that are programmed to the same zone as the activated input device will not be delayed for activation. ■ Zone A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each main circuit board NAC. Pressing 1 while viewing NAC Screen #3 displays the following screen: ZONE ASSIGNMENT ZOO Z** Z** Z** Z** Zone Screen Note that Z** represents the Zone Number(s) corresponding to the selected NAC. The factory default for an unprogrammed device is ZOO for general alarm zone. A flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left. Enter the two digit number corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this NAC. The cursor moves to the next Z** designation. Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zone ZOO. When all desired changes have been made, press the Enter key to store the zone assignments. The display will return to the NAC Screen #3 which will show the zone assignments just entered. NOTE: Zones do no apply to NACs programmed as Door Holder, Reser Power, or Non -Reset Power. • Silence Inhibited The Silence Inhibit feature, when enabled, prevents the silencing of the selected main circuit board NAC for a period of one minute. Resetting the FACP will also be prevented for one minute while the NAC programmed for silence inhibit is activated. Pressing 2 while viewing NAC Screen #3 will cause the display to change from the factory default of Silence Inhibit No to Silence Inhibit Yes. Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between the two options. • Sync Type If synchronized strobes were selected as the Type of device installed, the type of synchronization must be selected in this option. Pressing 1 while viewing NAC Screen #4 will cause the following screen to be displayed: NAC SYNC TYPE 1=SYSTEM SENSOR 2=WHEELOCK 3=GENTEX Pressing 1 while viewing this screen will select System Sensor synchronization, 2 will select Whee- lock and 3 will select Gentex. Maximum Number of Strobes for Synchronization The total current draw for each Notification Appliance Circuit cannot exceed 2.5 amps. Refer to the manufacturer's documentation supplied with the Strobes to determine the maximum current draw for each strobe and ensure that the circuit maximum is not exceeded. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 89 Programming Master Programming Level SYSTEM SETUP 1 -TIMERS 3•RELRYS System Setup Screen #2 90 To ensure proper strobe and circuit operation, there is also a limit to the number of strobes that can be attached to each circuit. Following is a list of the strobes that have been tested with this FACP and the maximum number that can be connected to each NAC. Make sure that the NAC maximum current is not exceeded: ✓ System Sensor: 40 Strobes ✓ Wheelock: 25 Strobes ✓ Gentex: 23 Strobes Relays Pressing 3 while viewing System Setup Screen #2 will allow the programmer to configure two main circuit board Form -C relays from the following screen: RELAYS 1=RELAY 1 2=RELAY 2 3=RELAY 3 Relays Selection Screen To program Relay 1 or Relay 3, press the number corresponding to the selected relay. Note that Relay 2 is fixed as a Trouble relay. Selecting Relay 2 will have no effect on its programming. The following screen will appear for each relay to be programmed: RELAY 2 1=TYPE ALARM Relay Type Screen Pressing 1 for Type while viewing the Relay Screen will cause the following screens to be dis- played: RELAY 1=ALARM 2=SUPERVISORY 3=SUPERVISORY AR ,u, Relay Screen #1 RELAY 1=PROCESS MON AR 2=AC LOSS 3=HAZARD Relay Screen #3 A RELAY 1=TROUBLE 2=COMM FAIL 3=PROCESS MON g Relay Screen #2 RELAY 1=MEDICAL Q 2=SILEHCEABLE ALARM Relay Screen #4 While viewing the selected screen, press the number corresponding to the desired relay type to pro- gram the main circuit board relay. The choice will be stored in memory and the display will return to the Relay Type Screen which will show the programmed type choice. Press the Escape key to return to the Relays Selection Screen and repeat the preceding procedure for the remaining relays. Notes: 1. AR (AutoResettable) in SUPERVISORY AR and PROCMONAR means that a relay with the Supervisory and/or Process Monitor type code, when activated, will automatically reset when the corresponding condition is cleared. 2. A relay programmed with the Silenceable Alarm type will activate upon any alarm and reset when the alarm is cleared and/or when the Alarm Silence button is pressed. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming SYSTEM SETUP 1IRN OPT. OFF 24IRTERFLOY SIL. NO 3-LITE-WMNECT System Setup Screen #3 Canadian Option Pressing 1 while viewing System Setup Screen #3 will configure the FACP to comply with Cana- dian requirements. The display will change to Canadian Opt. On. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between Canadian Opt. On and Canadian Opt. Off. The factory default setting is Canadian Opt. Off. SYSTEM SETUP 1=CANADIAN OPT. OFF 2=WATERFLOW SIL. NO System Setup Screen #3 For Canadian applications, remote annunciation must be done using the secondary ANN -BUS. The Canadian Options configures the FACP with the following as required by Canada: • The following monitor module type codes are not available: / non -latching supervisory ✓ non -latching process monitor ✓ non -latching drill ✓ process monitor ✓ hazard / tornado ✓ medical alert • The auto -silence timer can only be set to 0 or 20 minutes. • Addressable ionization smoke detector sensitivity is automatically monitored using Canadian specifications. • Positive Alarm Sequence, the Pre -Signal option, and their corresponding timers are not available for Canadian applications. • The installer must write in the Date of Final Assembly on the Master Marking and Warranty label located on the FACP backbox door. Waterflow Silenceable Pressing 2 while viewing System Setup Screen #3 will allow the programmer to configure the sys- tem for silenceable on nonsilenceable waterflow circuits. Each press of the 2 key will toggle the display between Waterflow Sil. No and Yes. When Waterflow Sil. No is selected, all output devices associated with a waterflow type input device, will be nonsilenceable. When Waterflow Sil. Yes is selected, all output devices associated with waterflow type input devices, will be silenceable. The factory default setting is Waterflow Sil. No. Lite -Connect Pressing 3 while viewing System Setup Screen #3 will allow the programmer to configure the system for the Lite -Connect circuit. LITE -CONNECT 1=ENABLED YES 2=HUB MODE SETUP 3=NODE MODE SETUP Lite -Connect Setup Screen Pressing I while viewing the Lite -Connect Setup Screen will allow the programmer to enable the Lite -Connect circuit. Select Enabled Yes if an ANN -LC has been installed and wired to the secondary ANN -BUS. Each press of the 1 key will toggle the display between Enabled No and Enabled Yes. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 91 Programming Master Programming Level EDIT NODES U YES PIEED HRELED SGPT 341CCOUHT CODES Edit Nodes ## Screen • Hub Mode Setup Pressing 2 while viewing the Lite -Connect Setup Screen will allow the programmer to configure the MS-9050UD as the Lite -Connect hub FACP. The following screen is displayed. HUB MODE SETUP 1=ENABLED NO 2=EDIT NODES Hub Mode Setup Screen Pressing 1 while viewing the Hub Mode Setup Screen will allow the programmer to enable the MS-9050UD as the hub of the Lite -Connect circuit. One MS-9050UD FACP must act as a hub in every Lite -Connect circuit. Select Enabled Yes if the current MS-9050UD will serve as the hub. Each press of the 1 key will toggle the display between Enabled No and Enabled Yes. Pressing 2 while viewing the Hub Mode Setup Screen will allow the programmer to edit the nodes on the Lite -Connect circuit. The following screen is displayed. There is an edit node screen for every available node on the Lite -Connect circuit (02-17). Scroll left or right to view the appropriate node number. EDIT NODES US 1=ENABLED YES 2=TYPE SGPT 3=ACCOUNT CODES Edit Node ## Screen Pressing 1 while viewing the Edit Node ## Screen will allow the programmer to enable an FACP as a specific node on the Lite -Connect circuit. Each press of the 1 key will toggle the display between Enabled No and Enabled Yes. Pressing 2 while viewing the Edit Node ## Screen will allow the programmer to specify which type of FACP will participate as a specific node on the Lite -Connect circuit. The following screen is displayed. NODE TYPE 1=50 POINTS 2=198 POINTS Node Type Screen Press 1 if the selected node is an MS-9050UD FACP. Press 2 if the selected node is an MS-9200UDLS FACP. Pressing 3 while viewing the Edit Node ## Screen will allow the programmer to specify alternate account codes to be used to communicate that node's events to the Central Stations. If these values are left blank/zero the hub's account codes will be used to report the event. The following screen is displayed. ACCOUNT CODES 1=CENTRAL STATION 1 2=CENTRAL STATION 2 CS1= C52= Node Type Screen Press 1 or 2 to edit the central station account codes. The following screen displays for both selections. CENTRAL STATION X ACCOUNT CODE 4 CHAR RANGE 0—F Node Type Screen 92 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming LITE -CONNECT 1 -ENABLED YES 2=HUB MODE SETUP 3=NODE MODE SETUP Lite -Connect Setup Screen 3.6.6 PROGRAMMING 1 -LOOP SETUP 2=SYSTEM SETUP 3=VERIFY LOOP Programming Screen #2 A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the display. Enter the four -digit account code for each central station. After the last digit is entered, the display will return to the Account Code screen. • Node Mode Setup Pressing 3 while viewing the Lite -Connect Setup Screen will allow the programmer to configure the MS-9050UD as a node on the Lite -Connect circuit. NODE MODE SETUP 1=ENABLED YES 2=ADDRESS 1C Node Mode Setup Screen Pressing 1 while viewing the Node Mode Setup Screen will allow the programmer to enable the MS-9050UD as a node on the Lite -Connect circuit. Select Enabled Yes if an ANN -LC has been installed and wired to the secondary ANN -BUS port. Each press of the 1 key will toggle the display between Enabled No and Enabled Yes. Pressing 2 while viewing the Node Mode Setup Screen will allow the programmer to enter the address of the node on the Lite -Connect circuit. NODE ADDRESS ENTER NODE ADDRESS RANGE 02-17 Node Mode Setup Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the display. Enter the two -digit address which can be a value between 02 and 17. Address 01 is reserved for the hub. After the second digit is entered, the display will return to the Node Mode Setup screen. Verify Loop Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen #2, will select the Verify Loop option. During loop verification, the FACP polls each device on the SLC to determine if the device is communicating and whether or not it responds with the proper type identification. The following screen will be dis- played while verification is in progress: VERIFYING LOOPS PLEASE WAIT Verification Progress Screen When Loop verification has been completed, the display will indicate that the system is OK or, if problems have been detected, any device type programming errors. Use the up and down arrow keys to view all detected errors. 3.6.7 History PROGRAMMING 1 -HISTORY 241ALKTEST 3 -OPTION MODULES Programming Screen #3 The History option allows an authorized user to view or erase events which have occurred in the control panel. Pressing 1 while viewing Programming Screen #3 will display the History options as shown in the following display: HISTORY 1=VIEW EVENTS 2=ERASE HISTORY History Screen MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 93 Programming Master Programming Level HISTORY 1=VIEW EVENTS 2=ERASE HISTORY History Screen View Events Pressing 1 while viewing the History Screen will allow the user to select the events to be viewed as illustrated in the following: HISTORY 1=VIEW ALL 2=VIEW ALARMS 3=VIEW OTHER EVENTS View Events Screen While displaying the View Events screen, press 1 to view all events, 2 to view only alarms, or 3 to view other events. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through all of the displayed events. Erase History The Erase History option allows a user to erase all events from the history file. This will provide a clean slate in order to use the history file to track future events. Pressing 2 while viewing the His- tory Screen will display the following screen: ERASE HISTORY PROCEED? 1=YES 2=NO Erase History Screen Pressing 1 while viewing the Erase History Screen will erase all events from the History file. During this process, the display will read as follows: ERASING HISTORY PLEASE WAIT Erase History Wait Screen After the History file has been erased, the display will return to the History Screen. 3.6.8 Walktest Programming Screen #3 Walktest allows an individual to test the fire alarm system without the necessity to reset the control panel after each device activation. Pressing 2 while viewing the Programming Screen #3 will cause the following Walktest options to be displayed: WALKTEST 1=SILENT 2=AUDIBLE 3=VIEW RESULT Walktest Screen To perform a silent walktest which will not sound the NACs, press I while viewing the Walktest Screen. To perform an audible walktest, which will sound the NACs, press 2 while viewing the Walktest Screen. When either option is chosen, the panel will enter Walktest Mode and the follow- ing screen will be displayed: UNIT IN WALKTEST 1=VIEW WALKTEST LOG 2=VIEW POINTS 3=VIEW SUMMARY Unit In Walktest Screen From this screen, it is possible to view the walktest log, untested system points or a summary of the addressable devices tested during the current walktest. The user can select between any of these screens without interrupting the current walktest session. The walktest session will not end until the Unit In Walktest screen is exited by pressing the Escape key. 94 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming 3.6.9 PROGRAMMING 1=HISTORY 2=YRLKTEST 3-3PTIOH MODULES Programming Screen #3 Pressing 1 for View Walktest Log while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will cause a screen sim- ilar to one of the following two screens to be displayed: NO EVENTS IN WALKTEST LOG OR ALARM: MONITOR NORTH CLASSROOM 2001 10*15A 012310 1M006 If there are no events in the current walktest session, the first screen will be displayed, indicating no events have been stored in the walktest log. If any events have been stored, a screen similar to the second will be displayed indicating the latest event. As walktest events occur, the display will change to indicate the latest event. All stored events can be scrolled on the screen by pressing the up or down arrow keys. To return to the first event, press the 1st Event key. Pressing 2 for View Points while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will display a new screen which will show only the points that have not yet been walk tested. The up and down arrow keys will allow viewing of all untested points. If a point is tested while it is being displayed, the screen will update and display the next untested point. A description on the bottom of the screen will indi- cate if the displayed point has been disabled, if the Walktest option has been disabled for that point or if the point is not yet tested. The total number of untested points can be seen in the upper right corner of the screen. Pressing 3 for View Summary while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will display a new screen which will show a total of the tested detectors, tested modules, untested detectors and untested modules for the current walktest session. The user can perform a one-person walktest by activating devices throughout the system. As each device is activated, the information about the activated device is store in the Walktest Log. The information can be viewed by choosing one of the options from the Unit In Walktest screen. After completion of the Walktest, press the Esc (Escape) key to exit Walktest Mode and return to the Walktest Screen. The results of the Walktest can now be viewed by pressing 3 while viewing the Walktest Screen. The following screen will be displayed: WALKTEST RESULTS View Result Screen Use the up and down arrow keys to view all of the walktest results which will be displayed as illus- trated in the preceding screen. Note that the Walktest log is stored in RAM. If all power (AC and DC) is removed from the FACP, the Walktest log information will be lost. This information is also overwritten when subsequent walktests are performed. Option Modules Options available for the MS-9050UD include annunciators, printer connection for acquiring hard- copy printouts of panel data and onboard DACT. Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen #3 will display the following screen: OPTION MODULES 1=ANN—BUS 2=ONBOARD DACT Options Screen MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 95 Programming Master Programming Level 1 ANN -BUS Pressing 1 while viewing the Option Modules screen will cause the control panel to display the fol- lowing screens. ANN–BUS 1=ENABLED NO v 2=MODULES INSTALLED 3=AUTO–CONFIGURE ANN -BUS Screen #1 ANN–BUS 1=ANN–S/PG OPTIONS U 2=ANN-80 OPTIONS 3=ANN–SECONDARY ANN -BUS Screen #2 A printer module and LCD annunciator module can be programmed into the MS-9050UD system. These devices communicate with the FACP over the ANN -BUS terminals on the control panel. ■ ANN -BUS Enabled The ANN -BUS must be enabled if any modules are connected to the ANN -BUS terminals. To enable the ANN -BUS, press 1 while viewing ANN -BUS screen #1 so that the display reads ANN - BUS Enabled Yes. Each press of the I key will cause the display to toggle between ANN -BUS Enabled Yes and ANN -BUS Enabled No. The factory default setting is ANN -BUS Enabled No. • Modules Installed If an ANN -BUS module is installed, press 2 while viewing ANN -BUS screen #1 to select ANN - BUS addresses for the module(s). The following screen will be displayed. ANN–BUS MODULES 1=ADDR. 1 NONE v 2=ADDR. 2 NONE 3=ADDR. 3 NONE ANN -BUS Modules Screen #1 Pressing the down arrow key will allow the programmer to view additional screens displaying Addresses 1-8. To select one or more addresses for the installed module(s), press the number key corresponding to the module address in each screen. The following screens will be displayed for each address: ANN–BUS MODULE ANN–BUS ADDRESS 1 1=TYPE NONE Pressing 1 for Type will display the following screens: ANN–BUS MODULE TYPE 1=NOT INSTALLED – 2=ANN-80 MODULE v 3=ANN–I/O MODULE Module Type Screen #1 ANN–BUS MODULE TYPE 1=ANN–S/PG MODULE 2=ANN–LED MODULE i 3=ANN–RLY MODULE Module Type Screen #2 Press the number corresponding to the module type that is installed with the selected address. NOTE: If the module type selected is the ANN -80 or ANN-S/PG or if Not Installed is selected, the ANN -BUS Address Screen shown on the previous page will be displayed following the module selection. The options selected for each of these modules will be the same for all modules of the same type (refer to "ANN-S/PG (Print) Options Screen" on page 104 and "ANN -80 Options Screen" on page 105). 96 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming If ANN -I/O, ANN -LED, orANN-RLYis the selected module type, the following ANN -BUS Address Screen will be displayed: ANN—BUS MODULES ANN—BUS ADDRESS U 1=TYPE ANN—I/O 2=MODULE OPTIONS ANN -BUS Address Screen Since the options for each of these module types can be individually set, pressing 2 for Module Options, while viewing the ANN -BUS Address Screen will display the available options as described below. ANN -I/O Options Screen ANN—I/O ADDR U 1=POINT/ZONE ZONE 2=RANGE 00-19 ACTIVE LEDS ONLY ANN -I/O Address Screen Pressing 1 while viewing the ANN -UO Address Screen will program the annunciator module to annunciate either Point (addressable device address) information or Zone information. Each press of the 1 key will toggle the display between Zone and Point. Pressing 2 while viewing the ANN -I/O Address Screen will select the Point range to be annunci- ated (refer to the tables in "ANN -I/O Zone Option" on page 98 and "ANN -UO Point Option" on page 98). If Point has been selected, each press of the 2 key for Range will change the points to be annunciated with the options being 01 - 30 and 31 - 50. Note that if Zone has been selected, the 2 key will have no effect since the only zones that can be annunciated are 00 - 19. The range cannot be changed. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 97 Programming Master Programming Level ANN -I/O Zone Option If Zone is selected as the module option, the first ten LED driver outputs on the ANN -I/O module will display the system status information. The remaining 20 LED driver outputs on the module will display the active/alarm status of each zone. The LED assignments for the ANN -I/O module will be as follows. Module LED Function 1 AC Fault 2 Fire Alarm 3 Supervisory 4 Trouble 5 Alarm Silenced 6 Not Used 7 Not Used 8 Not Used 9 Not Used 10 Not Used 11 Zone 00 - Active/Alarm 12 Zone 01 - Active/Alarm 13 Zone 02 - Active/Alarm 14 Zone 03 - Active/Alarm 15 Zone 04 - Active/Alarm 16 Zone 05 - Active/Alarm 17 Zone 06 - Active/Alarm 18 Zone 07 - Active/Alarm 19 Zone 08 - Active/Alarm 20 Zone 09 - Active/Alarm 21 Zone 10 - Active/Alarm 22 Zone 11 - Active/Alarm 23 Zone 12 - Active/Alarm 24 Zone 13 - Active/Alarm 25 Zone 14 - Active/Alarm 26 Zone 15 - Active/Alarm 27 Zone 16 - Active/Alarm 28 Zone 17 - Active/Alarm 29 Zone 18 - Active/Alarm 30 Zone 19 - Active/Alarm 31 Not Used 32 Not Used 33 Not Used 34 Not Used 35 Not Used 36 Not Used 37 Not Used 38 Not Used 39 Not Used 40 Not Used ANN -I/O Point Option If Point is selected as the module option, the first ten LED driver outputs on the first ANN -I/O module will display the system status information. The remaining 30 LED driver outputs on the first module and 20 LED driver outputs on the second module will be used to display the active/alarm status of each point in the Point Range programmed for that particular module. The 98 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming points that will be annunciated on a particular ANN -I/O module depend on the programming options selected as far as the device type (detector or module) to be annunciated. The LED assign- ments for each ANN -I/O module will be as follows. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 99 ANN -I/O Module #1 Function ANN -I/O Module #2 Function Module LED 1 AC Fault Not Used 2 Fire Alarm Not Used 3 Supervisory Not Used 4 Trouble Not Used 5 Alarm Silenced Not Used 6 Not Used Not Used 7 Not Used Not Used 8 Not Used Not Used 9 Not Used Not Used 10 Not Used Not Used 11 Point 01 - Active/Alarm Point 31 - Active/Alarm 12 Point 02 - Active/Alarm Point 32 - Active/Alarm 13 Point 03 - Active/Alarm Point 33 - Active/Alarm 14 Point 04 - Active/Alarm Point 34 - Active/Alarm 15 Point 05 - Active/Alarm Point 35 - Active/Alarm 16 Point 06 - Active/Alarm Point 36 - Active/Alarm 17 Point 07 - Active/Alarm Point 37 - Active/Alarm 18 Point 08 - Active/Alarm Point 38 - Active/Alarm 19 Point 09 - Active/Alarm Point 39 - Active/Alarm 20 Point 10 - Active/Alarm Point 40 - Active/Alarm 21 Point 11 - Active/Alarm Point 41 - Active/Alarm 22 Point 12 - Active/Alarm Point 42 - Active/Alarm 23 Point 13 - Active/Alarm Point 43 - Active/Alarm 24 Point 14 - Active/Alarm Point 44 - Active/Alarm 25 Point 15 - Active/Alarm Point 45 - Active/Alarm 26 Point 16 - Active/Alarm Point 46 - Active/Alarm 27 Point 17 - Active/Alarm Point 47 - Active/Alarm 28 Point 18 - Active/Alarm Point 48 - Active/Alarm 29 Point 19 - Active/Alarm Point 49 - Active/Alarm 30 Point 20 - Active/Alarm Point 50 - Active/Alarm 31 Point 21 - Active/Alarm Not Used 32 Point 22 - Active/Alarm Not Used 33 Point 23 - Active/Alarm Not Used 34 Point 24 - Active/Alarm Not Used 35 Point 25 - Active/Alarm Not Used 36 Point 26 - Active/Alarm Not Used 37 Point 27 - Active/Alarm Not Used 38 Point 28 - Active/Alarm Not Used 39 Point 29 - Active/Alarm Not Used 40 Point 30 - Active/Alarm Not Used MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 99 Programming Master Programming Level PROGRAMMING 1-INN-RLY OPTIONS 2-IFM4-LED OPTIONS ANN -BUS Screen #3 ANN -LED Options Screen Pressing 2 for Module Options while viewing ANN -BUS Address Screen when the ANN -LED option is selected, will display the following screen: ANN -LED ADDR U - ZONES 00-09 v ALARM, TRBL, SUN ANN -LED Address Screen #1 ANN -LED MDR U 1=POINT/ZONE ZONE 2=ALARM/ATS ATS 3=RANGE ZN00-09 ANN -LED Address Screen #2 The first screen indicates that the ANN -LED at the selected ANN -BUS address is programmed to annunciate Alarms, Troubles and Supervisories for Zones 00 through 09. The programming can be changed using ANN -LED Address Screen 2. Pressing 1 while viewing ANN -LED Address Screen #2 will program the annunciator module to annunciate either Point (addressable device address) information or Zone information. Each press of the 1 key will toggle the display between Point and Zone. Pressing 2 while viewing ANN -LED Address Screen #2 will program the annunciator module to annunciate only Alarms or Alarms, Troubles and Supervisories (ATS). Each press of the 2 key will toggle the display between Alarms and ATS. Pressing 3 while viewing ANN -LED Address Screen #2 will select the Point or Zone range to be annunciated (refer to the tables in "ANN-RLED Zone Option - Alarm Only" on page 100 and "ANN-RLED Point Option - Alarm Only" on page 101). Pressing the 3 key will display an addi- tional screen where the range can be selected. • If Zone has been selected, and Alarms Only are to be annunciated, the 3 key will have no effect since all zones can be displayed on only one ANN -LED module. • If Zone has been selected, and Alarms, Troubles and Supervisories are to be annunciated, the new screen will give the options of annunciating Zone 0 - 9 or 10 - 19. Two ANN -LED modules are required to annunciate all zones in this configuration. • If Points has been selected, and Alarms Only are to be annunciated, the new screen will give the options of annunciating Points 1 - 30 and 31 - 50. Two ANN -LED modules are required to annunciate all points in this configuration. • If Point has been selected, and Alarms, Troubles and Supervisories are to be annunciated, the new screens will give the options of annunciating Points 1 - 10, 11 - 20, 21 - 30, 31 - 40 or 41 - 50. Five ANN -LED modules are required to annunciate all points in this configuration. ANN-RLED Zone Option - Alarm Only If Zone is selected as the module option, and the module is programmed to annunciate alarms only, the first ten LEDs on the ANN-RLED module will display the system status information. The next 20 LEDs on the module will display the active/alarm status of each zone. The last 10 LEDs are not used. The LED assignments for the ANN-RLED module will be as follows. ANN-RLED Module Alarm Silenced NAC 1 Fault NAC 2 Fault Not Used Not Used Earth Fault Battery Fault Charger Fault Disabled Maintenance Zone 00 Active/Alarm Zone 01 Active/Alarm Zone 02 Active/Alarm Zone 03 Active/Alarm Zone 04 Active/Alarm Zone 05 Active/Alarm Zone 06 Active/Alarm Zone 07 Active/Alarm Zone 08 Active/Alarm Zone 09 Active/Alarm Zone 10 Active/Alarm Zone 11 Active/Alarm Zone 12 Active/Alarm Zone 13 Active/Alarm Zone 14 Active/Alarm Zone 15 Active/Alarm Zone 16 Active/Alarm Zone 17 Active/Alarm Zone 18 Active Alarm Zone 19 Active/Alarm Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 100 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming ANN -LED Zone Option - Alarm, Trouble and Supervisory If Zone is selected as the module option, and the module is programmed to annunciate alarms, troubles, and supervisories, the first ten LEDs on the first ANN -LED module will display the sys- tem status information. The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and the last 30 LEDs on the second module will display the alarm, trouble and supervisory status for each of the ten zones in the Zone Range programmed for that particular module. The LED assignments for each ANN -LED module will be as follows. First ANN -LED Module Alarm Silenced NAC 1 Fault NAC 2 Fault Not Used Not Used Earth Fault Battery Fault Charger Fault Disabled Maintenance Zone 00 Active/Alarm Zone 01 Active/Alarm Zone 02 Active/Alarm Zone 03 Active/Alarm Zone 04 Active/Alarm Zone 00 Trouble Zone 01 Trouble Zone 02 Trouble Zone 03 Trouble Zone 04 Trouble Zone 00 Supervisory Zone 01 Supervisory Zone 02 Supervisory Zone 13 Supervisory Zone 04 Supervisory Zone 05 Active/Alarm Zone 06 Active/Alarm Zone 07 Active/Alarm Zone 08 Active Alarm Zone 09 Active/Alarm Zone 05 Trouble Zone 06 Trouble Zone 07 Trouble Zone 08 Trouble Zone 09 Trouble Zone 05 Supervisory Zone 06 Supervisory Zone 07 Supervisory Zone 08 Supervisory Zone 09 Supervisory Second ANN -LED Module Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Zone 10 Active/Alarm Zone 11 Active/Alarm Zone 12 Active/Alarm Zone 13 Active/Alarm Zone 14 Active/Alarm Zone 10 Trouble Zone 11 Trouble Zone 12 Trouble Zone 13 Trouble Zone 14 Trouble Zone 10 Supervisory Zone 11 Supervisory Zone 12 Supervisory Zone 13 Supervisory Zone 14 Supervisory Zone 15 Active/Alarm Zone 16 Active/Alarm' Zone 17 Active/Alarm Zone 18 Active/Alarm Zone 19 Active/Alarm Zone 15 Trouble Zone 16 Trouble Zone 17 Trouble Zone 18 Trouble Zone 19 Trouble Zone 15 Supervisory Zone 16 Supervisory Zone 17 Supervisory Zone 18 Supervisory Zone 19 Supervisory ANN-RLED Point Option - Alarm Only If Point is selected as the module option and the module is programmed to annunciate alarms only, the first ten LEDs on the first ANN-RLED module will display the system status information. The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and LEDs 11 - 30 on the second module will display the active/alarm status of each point in the Point Range programmed for that particular module. The LED assignments for each ANN-RLED module will be as follows. First ANN-RLED Module (Point Range 01 - 30) Alarm Silenced NAC 1 Fault NAC 2 Fault Not Used Not Used Earth Fault Battery Fault Charger Fault Disabled Maintenance MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 101 Programming Master Programming Level Point 01 Active/Alarm Point 02 Active/Alarm Point 03 Active/Alarm Point 04 Active/Alarm Point 05 Active/Alarm Point 06 Active/Alarm Point 07 Active/Alarm Point 08 Active/Alarm Point 09 Active/Alarm Point 10 Active/Alarm Point 11 Active/Alarm Point 12 Active/Alarm Point 13 Active/Alarm Point 14 Active/Alarm Point 15 Active/Alarm Point 16 Active/Alarm Point 17 Active/Alarm Point 18 Active/Alarm Point 19 Active/Alarm Point 20 Active/Alarm Point 21 Active/Alarm Point 22 Active/Alarm Point 23 Active/Alarm Point 24 Active/Alarm Point 25 Active/Alarm Point 26 Active/Alarm Point 27 Active/Alarm Point 28 Active/Alarm Point 29 Active/Alarm Point 30 Active/Alarm Second ANN-RLED Module (Point Range 31 - 50) Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Point 31 Active/Alarm Point 32 Active/Alarm Point 33 Active/Alarm Point 34 Active/Alarm Point 35 Active/Alarm Point 36 Active/Alarm Point 37 Active/Alarm Point 38 Active/Alarm Point 39 Active/Alarm Point 40 Active/Alarm Point 41 Active/Alarm Point 42 Active/Alarm Point 43 Active/Alarm Point 44 Active/Alarm Point 45 Active/Alarm Point 46 Active/Alarm Point 47 Active/Alarm Point 48 Active/Alarm Point 49 Active/Alarm Point 50 Active/Alarm Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used ANN -LED Point Option - Alarm, Trouble and Supervisory If Point is selected as the module option, and the module is programmed to annunciate alarms, troubles and supervisories, the first ten LEDs on the first ANN -LED module will display the sys- tem status information. The remaining 30 LEDs on the first module and the last 30 LEDs on the remaining modules will display the alarm, trouble and supervisory status for each of the ten points in the Point Range programmed for that particular module. The LED assignments for each ANN - LED module will be as follows. First ANN -LED Module (Point Range 01 - 10) Alarm Silenced NAC 1 Fault NAC 2 Fault Not Used Not Used Earth Fault Battery Fault Charger Fault Disabled Maintenance Point 01 Active/Alarm Point 02 Active/Alarm Point 03 Active/Alarm Point 04 Active/Alarm Point 05 Active/Alarm Point 01 Trouble Point 02 Trouble Point 03 Trouble Point 04 Trouble Point 05 Trouble Point 01 Supervisory Point 02 Supervisory Point 03 Supervisory Point 04 Supervisory Point 05 Supervisory Point 06 Active/Alarm Point 07 Active/Alarm Point 08 Active/Alarm Point 09 Active/Alarm Point 10 Active/Alarm Point 06 Trouble Point 07 Trouble Point 08 Trouble Point 09 Trouble Point 10 Trouble Point 06 Supervisory Point 07 Supervisory Point 08 Supervisory Point 09 Supervisory Point 10 Supervisory 102 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming Second ANN -LED Module (Point Range 11 - 20) Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Point 11 Active/Alarm Point 12 Active/Alarm Point 13 Active/Alarm Point 14 Active/Alarm Point 15 Active/Alarm Point 11 Trouble Point 12 Trouble Point 13 Trouble Point 14 Trouble Point 15 Trouble Point 11 Supervisory Point 12 Supervisory Point 13 Supervisory Point 14 Supervisory Point 15 Supervisory Point 16 Active/Alarm Point 17 Active/Alarm Point 18 Active/Alarm Point 19 Active/Alarm Point 20 Active/Alarm Point 16 Trouble Point 17 Trouble Point 18 Trouble Point 19 Trouble Point 20 Trouble Point 16 Supervisory Point 17 Supervisory Point 18 Supervisory Point 19 Supervisory Point 20 Supervisory The LED assignments for the modules annunciating Point Ranges 21 - 30, 31 - 40 and 41 - 50, will follow the same pattern as the second ANN -LED Module: third module Point Range 21 - 30, fourth module Point Range 31 - 40 and fifth module Point Range 41 - 50. ANN-RLY Options Screen Pressing 2 for Module Options while viewing ANN -BUS Address Screen when the ANN-RLY option is selected, will cause the following screen to be displayed: ANN-RLY - RDDR. X 7 1=RELRY 1 ZONE 00 2=RELRY 2 ZONE 01 3=RELRY 3 ZONE 02 ANN-RLY Options Screen The ANN-RLY module provides ten Form -C relays which can be programmed for various func- tions. The initial screen displays Relays 1 through 3. Pressing the down arrow key will display the remaining relays for this module. To program any of the ANN-RLY relays, while viewing the appropriate ANN-RLY Option screen, press the number key corresponding to the relay to be programmed. Following is a list of the avail- able programming options for each relay: • Alarm • Supervisory • Supervisory AR • Trouble • Comm Fail • Process Mon • Process Mon AR • AC Loss • Hazard • Medical • Silenceable Alarm • Zone Active XX (where XX = programmed zone 00 to 19) MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 103 Programming Master Programming Level • Auto -Configure The ANN -BUS Auto -Configure features allows the programmer to quickly bring all installed ANN -BUS modules online. The software will search for all ANN -BUS modules and automatically program the device type and address into the system. The ANN -BUS must be enabled for the Auto - Configure feature to work. Pressing 3 while viewing ANN -BUS Screen #1 will begin the Auto - Configure process and cause the following screen to be displayed: ANN–BUS AUTO–CONGFIGURE IN PROGRESS PLEASE WAIT Auto -Configure Screen • ANN-S/PG (Print) Options Screen The Print option allows the programmer to configure the optional printer. Pressing 1 while viewing ANN -BUS screen #2 will display the following screens: ANN–S/PG OPTIONS 1=PORT PAR v 2=PRINTER SUPS NO 3=OFFLINE TIMER 60 ANN-S/PG Options Screen #1 ANN–S/PG OPTIONS 1=BAUD RATE N/A 2=DATA BITS N/A 3=PARITY N/A ANN-SIPG Options Screen #2 ANN–S/PG OPTIONS 1=STOP BITS N/A 4 ANN-S/PG Options Screen #3 Pressing I for Port while viewing ANN-S/PG Options screen #1 will allow the programmer to select between a Parallel and Serial Port for printer connection. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between Port PAR (parallel) and Port SER (serial). It is important to note that the interface selected determines which options are available to the user. If the Parallel Port option is selected, the user has the option to supervise the printer and select an offline timer for the supervision by pressing 2 for Printer Supervision while viewing Print Options screen #1. Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between Printer Supv NO for no supervision and Printer Supv YES for printer supervision. Note that this option is not selectable if the Serial Port option has been selected. If the Parallel Port option is selected, the user has the ability to select an Offline Timer by pressing 3 while viewing Print Options screen #1. The resultant screen allows the programmer to program the Offline Timer for a delay of between 0 and 255 seconds before loss of printer supervision is reported as a trouble. If the Serial Port option is selected, the Printer Supv and Offline Timer options will not be available. The Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity and Stop Bits options are only available when the Serial Port option has been selected. Pressing 1 for Baud Rate while viewing ANN-S/PG Options screen #2 will cause a screen to appear which allow the user to select a Baud Rate of 19200, 9600, or 2400. Pressing 2 for Data Bits while viewing ANN-S/PG Options screen #2 will cause a screen to appear which allows the user to select 7 or 8 Data Bits. Pressing 3 for Parity while viewing ANN-S/PG Options screen #2 will cause a screen to appear which allows the user to select between No Parity, Even Parity, or Odd Parity. Pressing 1 for Stop Bits while viewing ANN-S/PG Options screen #3 will cause a screen to appear which allows the user to select between 1.0 or 2.0 Stop Bits. 104 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming • ANN -80 Options Screen Pressing 2 while viewing ANN -BUS screen #2 will display the following screen: ANN -80 OPTIONS 1=PIEZO ENABLE 2=LOCK ENABLE 3=ACK BTN ENABLE ANN -80 Options Screen #1 ANN -80 OPTIONS 1=SIL BTN ENABLE 2=RST BTN ENABLE 3=ORL BTN ENABLE ANN -80 Options Screen #2 The Piezo Enable option allows the programmer to select whether the piezo sounder on any installed ANN -80 module will ever sound. Pressing 1 while viewing the ANN -80 Options Screen #1 causes the display to toggle between Piezo Enable Yes and Piezo Enable No. The Lock Enable option allows the programmer to select whether or not any installed ANN -80 annunciator must be unlocked by its key before any annunciator key presses will function. Pressing 2 while viewing the ANN -80 Options Screen #1 causes the display to toggle between Lock Enable Yes (annunciator must be unlocked for keys to function) and Lock Enable No (lock position is ignored). The Acknowledge Button Enable (ACK BTN ENABLE) option allows the programmer to select whether the Ack/Step button on any installed ANN -80 annunciator will function normally or always be ignored. Pressing 3 while viewing the ANN -80 Options Screen #1 causes the display to toggle between Ack Btn Enable Yes (Ack/Step button functions normally) and Ack Btn Enable No (Ack/Step button never functions). The Silence Button Enable (SIL BTN ENABLE) option allows the programmer to select whether the Silence button on any installed ANN -80 annunciator will function normally or always be ignored. Pressing 1 while viewing the ANN -80 Options Screen #2 causes the display to toggle between Sil Btn Enable Yes (Silence button functions normally) and Sil Btn Enable No (Silence button never functions). The Reset Button Enable (RST BTN ENABLE) option allows the programmer to select whether the Reset button on any installed ANN -80 annunciator will function normally or always be ignored. Pressing 2 while viewing the ANN -80 Options Screen #2 causes the display to toggle between Rst Btn Enable Yes (Reset button functions normally) and Rst Btn Enable No (Reset button never func- tions). The Drill Button Enable (DRL BTN ENABLE) option allows the programmer to select whether the Drill button on any installed ANN -80 annunciator will function normally or always be ignored. Pressing 3 while viewing the ANN -80 Options Screen #2 causes the display to toggle between Drl Btn Enable Yes (Drill button functions normally) and Drl Btn Enable No (Drill button never func- tions). • ANN -SECONDARY Options Screen Pressing 3 while viewing ANN -BUS screen #2 will display the following screen: ANN -SECONDARY 1=ENABLED NO The ANN -SECONDARY must be enabled if any modules are connected to the ANN -SEC option card at J13. To enable the Secondary ANN -BUS, press 1 while viewing ANN -SECONDARY screen so that the display reads ANN -SECONDARY Enabled Yes. Each press of the I key will cause the display to toggle between ANN -SECONDARY Enabled Yes and ANN -SECONDARY Enabled No. The factory default setting is ANN -SECONDARY Enabled No. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 105 Programming Master Programming Level OPTION MODULES 1=RNN-BUS 2=ONBORRD DRCT 3 -FUTURE USE Option Module Screen 1-ENN RBLLERD D DRCT 2-PRIMRRY PHONE 3 -SECONDARY PHONE Onboard DACT The Onboard DACT (Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) provides communication to a cen- tral station. Pressing 2 while viewing the Option Module Screen will cause the following screens to be displayed: ON BOARD DRCT 1=ENABLED YES v 2=PRIMARY PHONE 3=SECONDARY PHONE On Board DACT Screen #1 • Onboard DACT Enable ON BOARD DRCT 1=RING COUNT 03 2=CENTRAL STATION 3=MANUAL DIAL MODE On Board DACT Screen #2 ON BOARD DACT n 1=SUPERV PHONE LINE On Board DACT Screen #3 To enable the onboard DACT, press 1 while viewing Onboard DACT Screen #1 until the display reads Enabled Yes. The display will toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No with each press of the key. The factory default setting is Enabled No. • Primary Phone Press 2 while viewing On Board DACT Screen #1 to program the type of primary phone line being connected to the DACT. The following screen will be displayed: ON BOARD DRCT PRIMARY PHONE LINE 1=TYPE TOUCHTONE Primary Phone Line Screen To select the type, press 1 while viewing the Primary Phone Line screen. The following screen will be displayed: PHONE LINE 1=TOUCHTONE 2=ROTARY Primary Phone Type Screen Press 1 to select Touchtone dialing or 2 to select Rotary dialing. • Secondary Phone Press 3 while viewing On Board DACT Screen #1 to program the type of secondary phone line On Board DACT Screen # being connected to the DACT. The following screen will be displayed: II ON BOARD DACT SECONDARY PHONE LINE 1=TYPE TOUCHTONE Secondary Phone Line Screen To select the type, press 1 while viewing the Secondary Phone Line screen. The following screen will be displayed: PHONE LINE 1=TOUCHTONE 2=ROTARY Secondary Phone Type Screen Press 1 to select Touchtone dialing or 2 to select Rotary dialing. Ring Count The ring count designates the number of rings allowed on the phone line prior to answering an On Board DACT Screen #2 incoming call from a service terminal. The factory default is 0 which means the control panel will not answer any incoming calls. This entry may be programmed for 1 to 25 rings. 106 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming To change the Ring Count, press 1 while viewing the OnBoard DACT Screen #2. The following screen will be displayed: RING COUNT 0-25 RANGE Ring Count Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the display. Enter the two -digit ring count which can be a value between 00 and 25. After the second digit is entered, the display will return to the Service Terminal screen. ■ Central Station Central Station programming configures the control panel DACT for contacting the central station. Pressing 2 while viewing On Board DACT Screen #2 will cause the following screens to be dis- played: CENTRAL STATION 1=REPORTING DISABLED 2=REPORT BACKUP 3=CALL LIMIT 0 Central Station Screen #1 CENTRAL STATION 1=PRIMARY 2=SECONDARY 3=REPORT STYLE Central Station Screen #2 Note that the user will be prevented from entering the Central Station Options Screen while the DACT is busy calling the Central Station. Reporting Enable To enable the DACT for reporting FACP activity to the central station, press 1 while viewing Cen- tral Station Screen #1 so the display reads Reporting Enabled. Each press of the 1 key will toggle the display between Reporting Disabled and Reporting Enabled. Backup Reporting The DACT can be programmed to transmit reports to primary and/or secondary central station phone numbers as a backup. Press 2 while viewing Central Station Screen #1 to display the follow- ing screen: BACKUP REPORTING 1=BACKUP ONLY 2=BOTH 3=FIRST AVAILABLE Backup Reporting Screen Press I to have all reports transmitted to the central station secondary phone number as a backup only if the primary phone line fails, 2 to transmit all reports to both the primary and secondary phone numbers all of the time, or 3 to send reports to the first available phone number. • Trouble Call Limit (Dialer Runaway Prevention) The Call Limit option limits the number of DACT trouble calls to the Central Station, to a pro- grammed amount between 0 and 99, for each unique trouble within a 24 hour period. All call limit counters reset (clear) at each midnight. Separate limit counters keep track of each unique type of trouble. Note that the number of phone number (communication) faults called to the Central Sta- tion are not limited by this feature. No subsequent restoral message is sent to the Central Station(s) for a particular trouble whose call limit has been reached. Local DACT annunciation will still track the particular trouble and restoral. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 107 Programming Master Programming Level To set the Trouble Call Limit, press 3 while viewing Central Station Screen #1. The following screen will be displayed. Backup Reporting Screen Enter a value between 00 and 99, then press Enter to set the Call Limit to this value. r - L 1 -- ... -= NOTE: Entering a value of 00 will disable the Trouble Call Limit allowing the DACT to call the — Central Station an unlimited number of times. This is the factory default setting. CENTRAL STATION 1=PRIMARY 2=SECONDARY 3=REPORT STYLE Central Station Screen #2 CENTRAL STATION 1=TEST TIME INT 2=ACCOUNT CODE 3=24HR TST TIME Primary/Secondary Screen #1 CENTRAL STATION 1=TEST TIME INT 2=ACCOUNT CODE 3=24HR TST TIME Central Station Primary and Secondary Phone Numbers Pressing 1 for Primary or 2 for Secondary will display the following screens. Note that the following information must be entered for both the Primary and Secondary Central Station Phone Numbers. CENTRAL STATION U – 1=TEST TIME INT 24 v 2=ACCOUNT CODE 0000 3=24HR TST TIME 0000 Primary/Secondary Screen #1 CENTRAL STATION 1=COMM FORMAT ADEMCO–CONTACT–ID Primary/Secondary Screen #3 Test Time Interval CENTRAL STATION c 1=PHONE NUMBER Primary/Secondary Screen #2 CENTRAL STATION fl 1=EVENT CODES Primary/Secondary Screen #4 Pressing 1 while viewing Primary/Secondary Screen #1 will cause the following screens to be dis- played: TEST TIME INTERVAL 1=24 HOURS 2=12 HOURS 3=8 HOURS Test Time Interval Screen #1 TEST TIME INTERVAL 1=6 HOURS Test Time Interval Screen #2 The test report sent to the Central Station phone number may be sent once every 6, 8, 12, or 24 hours. Select the desired Test Time Interval by pressing the corresponding digit in the screens shown above. Account Code Pressing 2 while viewing Primary/Secondary Screen #1 will cause the following screen to be dis- played: Primary/Secondary Screen #1 108 Account Codes Screen MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming CENTRAL STATION 1 -TEST TIME INT 2 -ACCOUNT CODE 3-24+ TST TIME Primary/Secondary Screen #1 CENTRAL STATION 1 -PHONE NUMBER The Account Code, which is assigned by a Central Station, depends on the communication format being used. The Account Code screen will have a flashing cursor in the lower left corner. Enter the supplied account code using 0 - 9 and A- F keys. Enter the first digit, then press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right. Repeat the process until all digits are entered. Press the right arrow key to store the Account Code in memory. 24 Hour Test Time Pressing 3 while viewing Primary/Secondary Screen #1 will cause the following screen to be dis- played: 24 HOUR TEST TIME RANGE 0000-2359 24 Hour Test Time Screen Use the 24 Hour Test Time screen to program the time that the DACT will transmit the 24 Hour Test to the Central Station. A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the screen. Enter a four digit number representing the test time using military time (0000 = midnight and 2359 = 11:59PM). Phone Number Pressing 1 while viewing Primary/Secondary Screen #2 will cause the following screen to be dis- played: Pnmary/Secondary Screen #2 CENTRAL STATION 1 -COMM FORMAT Primary/Secondary Screen #3 PHONE NUMBER 20 NUMBERS MAXIMUM Phone Number Screen The Phone Number screen is used to enter the Central Station phone number that the DACT will be contacting. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered with valid entries being 0 - 9 and A - F where A = *, B = #, C = look for secondary dial tone for up to 2 seconds (then dial anyway), D = 3 second pause, E = 5 second pause, and F = end of phone number (must be entered at end of phone number). A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the screen. Enter the first digit then press the right arrow key to move the cursor to the right one position. Enter the second digit and repeat the process until all digits are entered. Press the Enter key to store the phone number in memory. Enter the digits as you would like the number to be dialed. For example, if it's necessary to dial 9 before dialing a number outside the building, you may wish to pause after dialing 9. Enter 9 fol- lowed by D for a three second pause or E for a five second pause, then the phone number followed by an F to indicate the end of the number. Communication Format Pressing 1 while viewing Primary/Secondary Screen #3 will cause the following screens to be dis- played: COMM FORMAT 1=RDEMCO EXPRESS 4P1 2=ADEMCO EXPRESS 4P2 3=3P15 C18 A23 Comm Format Screen #1 COMM FORMAT 1=4P1E C19 A14 2=4P25 C18 A23 3=4P2E C18 A23 Comm Format Screen #4 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 COMM FORMAT 1=3P1E C18 A23 2=3P15 C19 A14 3=3P1E C19 A14 Comm Format Screen #2 COMM FORMAT 1=4P25 C19 A14 2=4P2E C19 A14 3=ADEMCO CONTACT ID Comm Format Screen #5 COMM FORMAT 1=4P15 C18 A23 2=4P1E C18 A23 3=4P15 C19 A14 Comm Format Screen #3 109 Programming Master Programming Level CENTRAL STATION 1 -EVENT CODES The Communication Format is determined by the type of receiver that the DACT is transmitting to. Consult your Central Station for proper selection or consult our factory representatives. For any format chosen, the control panel automatically programs all of the event codes. Select the Communication Format by pressing the corresponding number key while viewing the appropriate Comm Format screen. The following table describes each format: Screen Selection Communication Format Description ADEMCO EXPRESS 4P1 4+1 Ademco Express Standard, DTMF, 1400/2300 ACK ADEMCO EXPRESS 4P2 4+2 Ademco Express Standard, DTMF, 1400/2300 ACK 3P1S C18 A23 3+1 Standard 1800 Hz Carrier, 2300 Hz ACK 3P1E C18 A23 3+1 Expanded 1800 Hz Carrier, 2300 Hz ACK 3P1S C19 A14 3+1 Standard 1900 Hz Carrier, 1400 Hz ACK 3P1E C19 A14 3+1 Expanded 1900 Hz Carrier, 1400 Hz ACK 4P1S C18 A23 4+1 Standard 1800 Hz Carrier, 2300 Hz ACK 4P1E C18 A23 4+1 Expanded 1800 Hz Carrier, 2300 Hz ACK 4P1S C19 A14 4+1 Standard 1900 Hz Carrier, 1400 Hz ACK 4P1E C19 A14 4+1 Expanded 1900 Hz Carrier, 1400 Hz ACK 4P2S C18 A23 4+2 Standard 1800 Hz Carrier, 2300 Hz ACK 4P2E C18 A23 4+2 Expanded 1800 Hz Carrier, 2300 Hz ACK 4P2S C19 A14 4+2 Standard 1900 Hz Carrier, 1400 Hz ACK 4P2E C19 A14 4+2 Expanded 1900 Hz Carrier, 1400 Hz ACK ADEMCO CONTACT ID Contact ID, DTMF, 1400/2300 ACK Table 3.2 Communication Formats Event Codes Pressing 1 while viewing Primary/Secondary Screen #4 will cause the following screen to be dis- Primary/Secondary Screen #4 played: EVENT CODES 1=PULL STATION 2=MON—USER—DEF-1 3=WATERFLOW Event Code Screen Pressing the down arrow key allows viewing of all Events associated with the selected Communi- cation Format. Pressing the number corresponding to the event displayed in each screen will dis- play its default event code which can be customized by the programmer. For example, pressing 1 for Pull Station will display the following screen which allows the Event Code to be changed from the default value. PULL STATION 115 Event Code Screen The tables on the following pages list all of the Events and their default Event Codes for the various Communication Formats. 110 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming 3+1, 4+1 Express, and 4+1 Standard The information shown in Table 3.3 is automatically programmed for the Central Station phone number Event Codes when any of these Formats are selected. Enter 0 for an Event Code Setting to disable the report. Event Description Event Code Active Settings Restore! PULL STATION 1 E MON-USER-DEF-1 1 E WATERFLOW 1 E MON-USER-DEF-2 1 E SMOKE (PHOTO) 1 E DET -USER -DEF -1 1 E SMOKE (ION) 1 E DET -USER -DEF -2 1 E HEAT DETECT 1 E DET -USER -DEF -3 1 E SMOKE DUCT -P 1 E DET -USER -DEF -4 1 E PHOTO W/HEAT 1 E DET -USER -DEF -5 1 E DUCT SUPERVISORY 8 E DET -USER -DEF -6 8 E PHOTO SUPERV 8 E DET -USER -DEF -7 8 E MONITOR 1 E MON-USER-DEF-3 1 E SMOKE CONVEN 1 E MON-USER-DEF-5 1 E HEAT CONVEN 1 E MON-USER-DEF-6 1 E MEDIC ALERT 0 0 MON-USER-DEF-7 0 0 HAZARD ALERT 0 0 MON-USER-DEF-8 0 0 TORNADO ALRT 0 0 MON-USER-DEF-9 0 0 TAMPER 8 E MON-USER-DEF-11 8 E MON SUPERVISORY 8 E MON-USER-DEF-12 8 E MON SUPERV AUTO 8 E MON-USER-DEF-13 8 E HVAC OVRRIDE 8 E POWER MON 6 A MON-USER-DEF-14 6 A TROUBLE MON POINT_FAULT code will always be transmitted MON-USER-DEF-15 POINT_FAULT code will always be transmitted PROCESS MON 0 0 MON-USER-DEF-16 0 0 PROCMON AR 0 0 MON-USER-DEF-17 0 0 Table 3.3 Event Codes MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 111 Programming Master Programming Level POINT FAULT F D POINT_DISABLE 4 5 AC_FAIL 9 3 DRILL B C SLC 1 OPEN FAULT 6 A SLC 1 SHORT FAULT 6 A GROUND FAULT 6 A LOW BATTERY 6 A NO_BATTERY 6 A TELCO LINE 1 6 A TELCO LINE 2 6 A COMM FAULT 1 6 A COMM FAULT 2 6 A TOTAL COMM FLT 1 0 0 PRINTER FAULT 6 A NAC 1 FAULT 6 A NAC 2 FAULT 6 A 27V SYS PWR FAULT 6 A NAC 1 DISABLE 4 5 NAC 2 DISABLE 4 5 CS CALC FAULT 6 A CHARGER FAULT 6 A OPTION CARD 1 FAULT 6 A ANN -BUS PWR FAULT 6 A ZONE DISABLE 4 5 MODEM CHIP FAULT 6 A ANN -BUS COMM FAULT 6 A NO_DEVICES_INSTLLD 6 A NODES COMM FAULT 6 A LC CLASS A FAULT 6 A OFF_NORMAL_MESSAGE 6 A 24_HOUR_TEST 9 0 24 HOUR ABNORMAL TES F 0 UPDOWN REQUEST 7 0 UPLOAD SUCCESS 7 0 DOWNLOAD SUCCESS 7 0 UPDOWN FAILURE 7 0 GENERAL_ALARM 0 0 GENERAL_SUPERVISORY 0 0 Talble 3.3 Event Codes (Continued) 1 The FACP will not transmit a TOTAL COMM FAULT message to the Central Station upon communication restoral. This event code is used only for a local indication of a communication fault. 112 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming 4+2 Standard, 4+2 Express, 3 + 1, 4 + 1, and 4+2 Expanded Formats The information shown in Table 3.4 is automatically programmed for the Central Station phone number Event Codes when any of these Formats are selected. Enter 00 for an Event Code Setting to disable the report. Event Description Event Code Active Settings Restoral PULL STATION 11 El MON-USER-DEF-1 11 El WATERFLOW 11 El MON-USER-DEF-2 11 El SMOKE (PHOTO) 11 El DET -USER -DEF -1 11 El SMOKE (ION) 11 El DET -USER -DEF -2 11 El HEAT DETECT 11 El DET -USER -DEF -3 11 El SMOKE DUCT -P 11 El DET -USER -DEF -4 11 El PHOTO W/HEAT 11 El DET -USER -DEF -5 11 El DUCT SUPERVISORY 81 El DET -USER -DEF -6 81 El PHOTO SUPERV 81 El DET -USER -DEF -7 81 El MONITOR 11 El MON-USER-DEF-3 11 El SMOKE CONVEN 11 El MON-USER-DEF-5 11 El HEAT CONVEN 11 El MON-USER-DEF-6 11 El MEDIC ALERT 00 00 MON-USER-DEF-7 00 00 HAZARD ALERT 00 00 MON-USER-DEF-8 00 00 TORNADO ALRT 00 00 MON-USER-DEF-9 00 00 TAMPER 81 El MON-USER-DEF-11 81 El MON SUPERVISORY 81 El MON-USER-DEF-12 81 El MON SUPERV AUTO 81 El MON-USER-DEF-13 81 El HVAC OVRRIDE 81 El POWER MON 81 El MON-USER-DEF-14 81 El TROUBLE MON POINT_FAULT code will always be transmitted MON-USER-DEF-15 POINT_FAULT code will always be transmitted PROCESS MON 00 00 MON-USER-DEF-16 00 00 PROCMON AR 00 00 Table 3.4 Event Codes MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 113 Programming Master Programming Level MON-USER-DEF-17 00 00 POINT_FAULT Fl D1 POINT_DISABLE 41 51 AC_FAIL 92 93 DRILL 97 98 SLC 1 OPEN FAULT 43 53 SLC 1 SHORT FAULT 44 54 GROUND FAULT 61 Al LOW BATTERY 62 A2 NO_BATTERY 63 A3 TELCO LINE 1 64 A4 TELCO LINE 2 65 A5 COMM FAULT 1 6A AA COMM FAULT 2 6B AB TOTAL COMM FLT I 00 00 PRINTER FAULT 6C AC NAC 1 FAULT 66 A6 NAC 2 FAULT 67 A7 27V SYS PWR FAULT 45 55 NAC 1 DISABLE 4B 5B NAC 2 DISABLE 4C 5C CS CALC FAULT 46 56 CHARGER FAULT 47 57 OPTION CARD 1 FAULT 48 58 ANN -BUS PWR FAULT 49 59 ZONE DISABLE 42 52 MODEM CHIP FAULT 49 59 ANN -BUS COMM FAULT 49 59 NODES COMM FAULT 6A AA LC CLASS A FAULT 6A AA NO_DEVICES_INSTLLD 4A 5A OFF NORMAL MESSAGE 6F AF 24_HOUR_TEST 99 00 24 HOUR ABNORMAL TES FB 00 UPDOWN REQUEST 71 00 UPLOAD SUCCESS 72 00 DOWNLOAD SUCCESS 73 00 UPDOWN FAILURE 74 00 GENERAL_ALARM 00 00 GENERAL_SUPERVISORY 00 00 Table 3.4 Event Codes (Continued) 1 The FACP will not transmit a TOTAL COMM FAULT message to the Central Station upon communication restoral. This event code is used only for a local indication of a communication fault. 114 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming Ademco Contact ID Format The information shown in Table 3.5 is automatically programmed for the Central Station phone number Event Codes when Ademco Contact ID Format is selected. Enter 000 for an Event Code Setting to disable the report. Event Description Event Code Settings 4+2 Active Zone Point Restoral Active PULL STATION 115 Zone Point El 11 MON-USER-DEF-1 115 Zone Point El 11 WATERFLOW 113 Zone Point El 11 MON-USER-DEF-2 113 Zone Point El 11 SMOKE (PHOTO) 111 Zone Point El 11 DET -USER -DEF -1 111 Zone Point El 11 SMOKE (ION) 111 Zone Point 11 11 DET -USER -DEF -2 111 Zone Point 11 11 HEAT DETECT 114 Zone Point 11 11 DET -USER -DEF -3 114 Zone Point 11 11 SMOKE DUCT -P 116 Zone Point 11 11 DET -USER -DEF -4 116 Zone Point 11 11 PHOTO W/HEAT 111 Zone Point 11 11 DET -USER -DEF -5 111 Zone Point 11 11 DUCT SUPERVISORY 200 Zone Point 11 81 DET -USER -DEF -6 200 Zone Point 11 11 PHOTO SUPERV 200 Zone Point 11 81 DET -USER -DEF -7 200 Zone Point 11 11 MONITOR 110 Zone Point 11 11 MON-USER-DEF-3 110 Zone Point 11 11 SMOKE CONVEN 111 Zone Point 81 11 MON-USER-DEF-5 111 Zone Point 11 11 HEAT CONVEN 114 Zone Point 81 11 MON-USER-DEF-6 114 Zone Point 11 11 MEDIC ALERT 100 Zone Point 11 0 MON-USER-DEF-7 100 Zone Point 11 0 HAZARD ALERT 150 Zone Point 11 0 MON-USER-DEF-8 150 Zone Point 11 0 TORNADO ALRT 150 Zone Point 11 0 MON-USER-DEF-9 150 Zone Point 11 0 TAMPER 144 Zone Point 0 81 MON-USER-DEF-11 144 Zone Point 0 81 MON SUPERVISORY 200 Zone Point 0 81 MON-USER-DEF-12 200 Zone Point 0 81 MON SUPERV AUTO 200 Zone Point 0 81 MON-USER-DEF-13 200 Zone Point 0 81 HVAC OVRRIDE 200 Zone Point 81 81 POWER MON 330 Zone Point 81 81 MON-USER-DEF-14 330 Zone Point 81 81 TROUBLE MON POINT_FAULT code will always be transmitted 81 MON-USER-DEF-15 POINT_FAULT code will always be transmitted 81 PROCESS MON 000 81 0 MON-USER-DEF-16 000 81 0 PROCMON AR 000 81 0 Table 3.5 Event Codes MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 115 Programming Master Programming Level MON-USER-DEF-17 000 81 0 POINT FAULT 380 Zone Point Fl POINT DISABLE 570 Zone Point 41 AC_FAIL 301 0 0 0 92 DRILL 604 0 0 0 97 SLC 1 OPEN FAULT 371 0 0 0 43 SLC 1 SHORT FAULT 372 0 0 0 44 GROUND FAULT 310 0 0 Fl 61 LOW BATTERY 302 0 0 41 62 NO_BATTERY 311 0 0 92 63 TELCO LINE 1 351 0 0 97 64 TELCO LINE 2 352 0 0 43 65 COMM FAULT 1 354 1 1 44 6A COMM FAULT 2 354 2 2 61 6B TOTAL COMM FLT 1 000 N/A N/A 62 0 PRINTER FAULT 336 0 0 63 6C NAC 1 FAULT 321 0 0 64 66 NAC 2 FAULT 322 0 0 65 67 27V SYS PWR FAULT 300 0 0 6A 45 not used 000 0 0 6B 49 NAC 1 DISABLE 521 0 0 0 4B NAC 2 DISABLE 522 0 0 6C 4C CS CALC FAULT 304 0 0 66 46 CHARGER FAULT 300 0 0 67 47 OPTION CARD 1 FAULT 331 0 0 45 48 ANN -BUS PWR FAULT 333 0 0 49 49 ZONE DISABLE 570 0 0 4B 42 MODEM CHIP FAULT 330 0 0 4C 49 ANN -BUS COMM FAULT 333 0 0 46 49 NO_DEVICES_INSTLLD 380 0 0 47 4A NODES COMM FAULT 554 0 0 6A AA LC CLASS A FAULT 555 0 0 6A AA OFF_NORMAL_MESSAGE 308 0 0 48 6F 24_HOUR_TEST 602 0 0 49 99 24 HOUR ABNORMAL TES 608 0 0 42 FB UPDOWN REQUEST 411 0 0 49 71 UPLOAD SUCCESS 416 0 0 49 72 DOWNLOAD SUCCESS 412 0 0 4A 73 UPDOWN FAILURE 413 0 0 6F 74 GENERAL_ALARM 000 0 0 99 0 GENERAL_SUPERVISORY 000 0 0 FB 0 Table 3.5 Event Codes (Continued) 1 The FACP will not transmit a TOTAL COMM FAULT message to the Central Station upon communication restoral. This event code is used only for a local indication of a communication fault. 116 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Master Programming Level Programming CENTRAL STATION 1 -PRIMARY 2 -SECONDARY 3T STYLE POINT Central Station Screen #2 ON BOARD MCI 1=SERVICE TERMINAL 2 -CENTRAL STATION 3 -MANUAL DIAL MODE Report Style Pressing 3 while viewing Central Station Screen #2 will cause the Report Style display to toggle between Point and Zone. Setting the Report Style to Point will program the DACT to report indi- vidual point status to the Central Station. The control panel is capable of monitoring a total of 50 addressable devices. Setting the Report Style to Zone will program the DACT to report zone status to the Central Station. The control panel is capable of monitoring a total of 20 individual zones. NOTES: 1. Detector/Module Address 01 will be reported to the Central Station as Point 01, 2. Detector/Module Address 02 as Point 02, with reports continuing in a similar fashion up to Detector/Module Address 50 which will be reported as Point 50. ■ Manual Dial Mode Pressing 3 while viewing On Board DACT Screen #2 will cause the following screen to be dis- On Board DACT Screen #2 played: MANUAL DIAL MODE 1=PRIMARY PHONE 2=SECONDARY PHONE Note that Manual Dial Mode cannot be entered while the panel is communicating with the Central Station. Pressing 1 for Primary Phone or 2 for Secondary Phone will display the following screen: MANUAL DIAL MODE 1=GO OFF HOOK 2=DIAL DIGITCS) 3=GO ON HOOK Pressing 1 for Go Off Hook will cause the DACT to access the selected phone line (similar to tak- ing the phone handset off the cradle). The selected phone line's red Active LED will turn on. Pressing 2 for Dial Digit(s) will display a screen which allows the user to key in the phone number to be dialed. The first digit is keyed in and then the right arrow key is pressed to move the cursor to the next position. The next digit is keyed in and the process is repeated until all digits have been entered. Pressing the Enter key will cause the number just entered to be dialed. LNOTE: It is not necessary to go off -hook prior to dialing. Pressing the Enter key in Dial Digit mode will cause the panel to automatically go off -hook prior to dialing. ON BOARD DACT 1=SUPERV PHONE LINE On Board DACT Screen #3 Pressing 3 for Go On Hook will cause the DACT to hang-up, deselecting the previously selected phone line. The phone line's red Active LED will turn off. • Phone Line Supervision Pressing I while viewing On Board DACT Screen #3 will cause the following screen to be dis- played: SUPERVISE PHONE LINE 1=PHONE LINE 2 YES The Phone Line 2 option allows the programmer to select whether the second phone line is super- vised. Pressing 1 while viewing the On Board DACT Screen #3 causes the display to toggle between Yes and No. The factory default setting is Yes. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 117 Programming Master Programming Level 3.6.10 MMING 1•RPSYORD CHANGE 2 -CLEAR PROGRAM 3 -PROGRAM CHECK Programming Screen #4 Password Change The factory set passwords, which have been programmed into the control panel, can be changed by selecting the Password Change option. Pressing 1 while viewing Programming Screen #4 will cause the following screen to be displayed: PASSWORD CHANGE 1=MASTER 2=MAINTENANCE 3=REMOTE DOWNLOAD Password Change Screen Press 1 to change the Master Programming Level password, 2 to change the Maintenance Level password or 3 to change the Remote Download password. Note that the passwords will not be dis- played on annunciators. The following screen will appear when one of the change options is selected: ENTER NEW FIVE DIGIT PASSWORD L Enter Password Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the center of the display. Enter a new five digit password (such as 10101 for the Master Level). After the fifth digit is entered, the following screen will be displayed: VERIFY NEW PASSWORD Password Change Screen The new five digit password must be re-entered to accept the change. The display will then return to the initial Password Change Screen. 3.6.11 Clear Program Pressing 2 while viewing Programming Screen #4, will select the Clear Program option. This will cause the LCD to display the following screen: Programming Screen #4 CLEAR PROGRAM 1=WHOLE SYSTEM 2=ALL POINTS Clear Program Screen #1 Pressing 1, for Whole System while viewing the Clear Program Screen #1, will clear all general system programming options and all programmed addressable devices from the nonvolatile mem- ory of the FACP. This function is useful when the control panel is first installed, prior to autopro- gramming. Note that it is necessary to autoprogram after using the Clear Whole System function. Pressing 2, for ALL POINTS while viewing the Clear Program Screen #1, will clear all program- ming related to the SLC loop and connected addressable devices. Before executing any of the Clear commands listed above, the control panel will provide a warning to the user by prompting with the following display: WARNING! SYSTEM CHANGE PROCEED? 1=YES 2=NO Pressing 1 will cause the control panel to carry out the selected clear option. Pressing 2 will pre- vent programming from being cleared. 118 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Maintenance Programming Level Programming 3.6.12 PROGRAMMING 1 -PASSWORD CHANGE 213CLERR PROGRAM 3 -PROGRAM CHECK Programming Screen #4 PROGRAMCHECK 1=NACS NO INPUT 2 -ZONES NO INPUT 3=ZONES NO OUTPUT Program Check Screen Program Check The Program Check feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have been pro- grammed to the Notification Appliance Circuits on the control panel but have not been pro- grammed to Initiating Devices as well as other circuits with no input or output correlations. Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen #4 will cause the following screen to be displayed: PROGRAM CHECK 1=NACS NO INPUT 2=ZONES NO INPUT 3=ZONES NO OUTPUT Pressing 1 while viewing the Program Check screen will display an NAC screen similar to the fol- lowing. NACS NO INPUT NAC 1 05 10 12 15 17 The example above indicates that NAC 1 has been programmed to Zones 05, 10, 12, 15, and 17 but no input devices have been programmed to any of these zones. Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the NAC zones without input assignments for NAC 1 and NAC 2. Pressing 2 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen similar to the following: ZONES NO INPUT 05 07 09 10 11 1M001 The Zone No Input screen allows the programmer to view the zones which have not been pro- grammed to at least one input device (not including general alarm Zone 00). The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05, 07, 09, 10, and 11 have been programmed to an address- able module (control module in this example) with an address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any input devices. Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without input assignments. Pressing 3 while viewing Program Check screen will cause a screen similar to the following to be displayed: ZONES NO OUTPUT 05 07 09 10 11 10001 The Zone No Output feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have not been pro- grammed to at least one output device (not including general alarm Zone 00). The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05, 07, 09, 10, and 11 have been programmed to an address- able detector with an address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any output devices. Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without output assignments. 3.7 Maintenance Programming Level To access Maintenance Programming mode, press the Enter key. The LCD will display the follow- ing: 1=READ STATUS 2=PROGRAMMING 3=MANUAL DIAL MODE 4=REMOTE DOWNLOAD MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 119 Programming Maintenance Programming Level To enter the Maintenance Programming mode, press 2. The display will read as follows: PROGRAMMING ENTER PASSWORD When the Maintenance level password (default 11111) is entered, the following screen will appear: PROGRAMMING 1=POINT PROGRAM v 2=HISTORY 3=PROGRAM CHECK Note that in the preceding screens, an arrow appears to inform the programmer that additional options can be viewed by pressing the keypad down arrow key, as shown in the following screen. 3.7.1 Disable Point Pressing 1 for Point Program, while viewing Maintenance Screen #1 will cause the following screens to be displayed: Maintenance Screen #1 PROGRAMMING 1=WALKTEST 2=SYSTEM 3=ZONE SETUP POINT PROGRAM 1=DETECTOR 2=MODULE Device Select Screen Select the device type by pressing 1 for an addressable detector or 2 for an addressable module. The operator will be prompted to enter the three digit device address as shown in the following example for a detector: EDIT DETECTOR ENTER POINT ADDRESS Address Select Screen A flashing cursor will appear in the bottom left corner of the display, prompting for the three digit device address. When the third digit is enter, 001 for example, a screen will appear which will allow enabling or disabling of the selected point, as illustrated in the following example: EDIT DETECTOR 10001 1=ENABLED YES Enable/Disable Select Screen Pressing 1 repeatedly will cause the display to toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No. 3.7.2 History PROGRAMMING o RYPROGRAM 3•PROGRAM CHECK Maintenance Screen #1 120 Pressing 2 while viewing Maintenance Screen #1 will cause the following screen to be displayed: HISTORY 1=VIEW EVENTS 2=ERASE HISTORY History Screen MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Maintenance Programming Level Programming The History feature allows the operator to view control panel events which have been stored in a history file in memory and erase the contents of the history file Pressing 1 while viewing the History screen will cause the following screen to be displayed: HISTORY 1=VIEW ALL 2=VIEW ALARMS 3=VIEW OTHER EVENTS Events Screen To view all the events which have occurred in the control panel since the history file was last erased, press 1 while viewing the Events screen. To view only alarms which have occurred, press 2 while viewing the Events screen. To view events other than alarms, press 3. The most recent event will be displayed on the screen. To view all of the selected events, press the up or down arrow keys to scroll through the list of events. If no events have occurred, the display will read NO EVENTS IN HISTORY. Pressing 2 while viewing the History Screen will cause the following screen to be displayed: ERASE HISTORY PROCEED? 1=YES 2=NO Erase History Screen Pressing 1 while viewing the Erase History Screen will cause the message ERASING HISTORY, PLEASE WAIT to be displayed. The display will then return to the History Screen. Pressing 2 will cause the display to return to the History Screen without erasing the History file. 3.7.3 Program Check PROGRAMMING 1 -POINT PROGRAM 2 -HISTORY 3-PROGRfM9 CHECK Maintenance Screen #1 Pressing 3 while viewing Maintenance Screen #1 will cause the following screen to be displayed: PROGRAM CHECK 1=NAGS NO INPUT 2=ZONES NO INPUT 3=ZONE NO OUTPUT Program Check Screen The Program Check feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have been pro- grammed to the Notification Appliance Circuits on the control panel but have not been pro- grammed to Initiating Devices as well as other circuits with no input or output correlations. Pressing I while viewing Program Check screen will cause a screen similar to the following to be displayed. NACS NO INPUT NAC 1 05 10 12 15 17 The example above indicates that NAC 1 has been programmed to Zones 05, 10, 12, 15, and 17 but no input devices have been programmed to any of these zones. Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the NAC zones without input assignments for both NAC 1 and NAC 2. Pressing 2 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen similar to the following: ZONES NO INPUT 05 07 09 10 11 1M001 The Zone No Input screen allows the programmer to view the zones which have not been pro- grammed to at least one input device (not including general alarm Zone 00). The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05, 07, 09, 10, and 11 have been programmed to an address - MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 121 Programming Maintenance Programming Level able module (control module in this example) with an address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any input devices. Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without input assignments. Pressing 3 while viewing Program Check screen will cause a screen similar to the following to be displayed: ZONES NO OUTPUT 05 07 09 10 11 10001 The Zone No Output feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have not been pro- grammed to at least one output device (not including general alarm Zone 00). The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05, 07, 09, 10, and 11 have been programmed to an address- able detector with an address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any output devices. Use the up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without output assignments. 3.7.4 Walktest Maintenance Screen #2 To perform a walktest, press 1 while viewing Maintenance Screen #2. The following screen will be displayed: WALKTEST 1=SILENT 2=AUDIBLE 3=VIEW RESULT Walktest Screen The operator can press 1 to perform a silent walktest or 2 to perform an audible walktest. Pressing 1 or 2 will cause the control panel to enter Walktest Mode and will display the following screen: UNIT IN WALKTEST 1=VIEW WALKTEST LOG 2=VIEW POINTS 3=VIEW SUMMARY Unit In Walktest Screen From this screen, it is possible to view the walktest log, untested system points or a summary of the addressable devices tested during the current walktest. The user can select between any of these screens without interrupting the current walktest session. The walktest session will not end until the Unit In Walktest screen is exited by pressing the Escape key. Pressing 1 for View Walktest Log while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will cause a screen sim- ilar to one of the following two screens to be displayed: NO EVENTS IN WALKTEST LOG OR ALARM: MONITOR NORTH CLASSROOM Z001 104115A 012310 1M006 If there are no events in the current walktest session, the first screen will be displayed, indicating no events have been stored in the walktest log. If any events have been stored, a screen similar to the second will be displayed indicating the latest event. As walktest events occur, the display will change to indicate the latest event. All stored events can be scrolled on the screen by pressing the up or down arrow keys. To return to the first event, press the 1st Event key. Pressing 2 for View Points while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will display a new screen which will show only the points that have not yet been walk tested. The up and down arrow keys will allow viewing of all untested points. If a point is tested while it is being displayed, the screen will update and display the next untested point. A description on the bottom of the screen will indi- 122 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Maintenance Programming Level Programming cate if the displayed point has been disabled, if the Walktest option has been disabled for that point or if the point is not yet tested. The total number of untested points can be seen in the upper right corner of the screen. Pressing 3 for View Summary while viewing the Unit In Walktest screen will display a new screen which will show a total of the tested detectors, tested modules, untested detectors and untested modules for the current walktest session. To end the Walktest session, press the Escape key to return to the Walktest screen. Pressing 3 for View Results while viewing the Walktest screen, after a walktest session has been completed, will allow the operator to view the final results of the most recent walktest. 3.7.5 System To program the time and date into the control panel, press 2 while viewing Maintenance Screen #2. The following display will appear: SYSTEMS 1=TIME/DATE System Screen Pressing 1 while viewing the System Screen will cause the following screen to be displayed: TIME AND DATE 1=TIME 01:00 AM 2=DATE 01-21-2010 3=CLOCK FORMAT 12HR Time and Date Screen To change the time, press 1 to display the following screen: ENTER TIME 1:00 AM 1=AM 2=PM Time Screen A flashing cursor will appear on the left side of the display. Enter the four digit number corre- sponding to the time (0000 - 1259). When the fourth digit is entered, the cursor will move one position to the right. Press 1 for AM or 2 for PM to complete entering the time. The display will return to the Time and Date Screen displaying the new time. To change the date, press 2 while viewing the Time and Date Screen. The following screen will be displayed: MONTH DAY YEAR 1-21-2013 Date Screen A flashing cursor will appear on the left side of the display. Enter the two digit month, two digit day and four digit year. The cursor will move one position to the right after each entry. When the fourth digit of the year has been entered, the display will return to the Time and Date Screen which will show the new date. To change between 12 hour and 24 hour format, press 3 while viewing the Time and Date screen. Each press of the 3 key will toggle the display between 12 HR and 24 HR format. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 123 Programming Maintenance Programming Level 3.7.6 Zone Setup Pressing 3 while viewing Maintenance Screen #2 will display the following screen: Maintenance Screen #2 ZONE SETUP 1=ENABLE 2=DISABLE 3=ZONE 17 18 19 Zone Setup Screen Pressing 1 while viewing Zone Setup screen will display the following screen: ZONE TO ENABLE Z Enable Screen A flashing cursor appears to the right of the Z. To enable a zone, enter the two digit zone number (00 - 19). After the second digit is entered, the zone will be enabled and the cursor will return to the original position. The next zone to be enabled can then be entered. Press Esc (Escape) to return to the previous screen. Pressing 2 while viewing Zone Setup screen will display the following screen: ZONE TO DISABLE Z Disable Screen A flashing cursor appears to the right of the Z. To disable a zone, enter the two digit zone number (00 - 19). After the second digit is entered, the zone will be disabled and the cursor will return to the original position. The next zone to be disabled can then be entered. Press Esc (Escape) to return to the previous screen. Pressing 3 while viewing Zone Setup screen will display the following screen: SPEC PURPOSE ZONE 1=PAS 17 OFF 2=PRE–SIGNAL 18 OFF 3=TWO STAGE 19 OFF Disable Screen Zones 17, 18, and 19 can be programmed for normal zone operation or for special purpose applica- tions. In the above illustration, the three zones are shown Off, which means they can be pro- grammed to function in the same manner as all other zones, by assigning them to input and output devices in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen. Pressing 1 will cause the display to change to PAS 17 On. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between PAS 17 On and PAS 17 Off. When Zone 17 is programmed On, a PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) activation of any smoke detector will cause Zone 17 to activate. By assigning Zone 17 to a control module in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen, an output device connected to the control module can be used to indicate a PAS condition in the control panel. Do not assign Zone 17 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a PAS condition. Pressing 2 will cause the display to change to Pre -signal 18 On. Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between Pre -signal 18 On and Pre -signal 18 Off. When Zone 18 is pro- grammed On, a Pre -signal activation of any device will cause Zone 18 to activate. By assigning Zone 18 to a control module in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen, an output device con- nected to the control module can be used to indicate a Pre -signal condition in the control panel. Do not assign Zone 18 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a Pre -signal condition. Pressing 3 will cause the display to change to Two Stage 19 On. Each press of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Two Stage 19 On and Two Stage 19 Off. Refer to "Two Stage Opera- tion" on page 88 for a description of this feature. 124 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Notes MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 125 Section 4: Operating Instructions 4.1 Panel Control Buttons 4.1.1 Acknowledge/Step The first press of the Acknowledge/Step button silences the piezo sounder, changes flashing indica- tors/LEDs to steady and also changes the status field on the LCD display from capital letters to small letters. When the piezo is silenced, an acknowledge message is sent to the printer and the his- tory file. Acknowledge also sends a silence piezo command to the optional annunciators connected to the FACP. When more than one event exists, the first press of the Acknowledge/Step button functions as described in the preceding paragraph. Subsequent pressing of the button steps through each off -nor- mal active event, with alarm events having a higher priority than trouble and supervisory events. 4.1.2 Alarm Silence The Alarm Silence button performs the same functions as Acknowledge/Step. In addition, if an alarm exists, it turns off all silenceable NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits) and causes Alarm Silenced indicator to turn on. It also sends an `alarm silenced' message to the printer, history file and optional annunciators. A subsequent new alarm will resound the system NACs. Note that the Alarm Silenced indicator is turned off by pressing the Reset button, the Drill button or subsequent activation of the NACs. 4.1.3 Drill/Hold 2 Sec When the Drill button is held for a minimum of two seconds (time required to prevent accidental activations), the FACP turns on both main panel NAC outputs and all silenceable circuits such as control modules that are programmed as silenceable, and turns off the Alarm Silenced indicator if it was previously on. The EVAC IN SYSTEM message is shown on the LCD display. The same mes- sage is sent to the printer and history file. The Alarm Silence button can be used to turn off all silenceable NAC outputs following activation by the Drill button. 4.1.4 Reset Pressing and releasing the Reset button turns off all control module0s and NACs, temporarily turns off resettable power to 4 -wire detectors, causes a RESET IN SYSTEM message to be displayed on the LCD and sends the same message to the printer and history file. It also performs a lamp test by turning on all indicators/LEDs (except the Ground LED), piezo sounder and LCD display segments after the Reset button is released. Any alarm or trouble that exists after a reset will resound the sys- tem. 4.2 Status Indicators and LEDs The five status indicators which are located on the front panel and the three LEDs located on the main circuit board, operate as follows: AC Power AC Power indicator illuminates green if AC power is applied to the FACP. A loss of AC power will turn off this indicator. 126 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Normal Operation Operating Instructions Fire Alarm Fire Alarm indicator flashes red when one or more alarms occur. It illuminates steady when the Acknowledge/Step or Alarm Silence button is pressed. The Fire Alarm indicator turns off when the Reset button is pressed. The indicator will remain off if all alarms have been cleared. Supervisory Supervisory indicator flashes yellow when one or more supervisory conditions occur, such as a sprinkler valve tamper condition. It illuminates steady when the Acknowledge/Step or Alarm Silence button is pressed. It turns off when the Reset button is pressed and remains off if all super- visory alarms have been cleared. Trouble Trouble indicator flashes yellow when one or more trouble conditions occur. It stays on steady when the Acknowledge/Step or Alarm Silence button is pressed. The indicator turns off when all trouble conditions are cleared. This indicator will also illuminate if the microprocessor watchdog circuit is activated. Alarm Silenced Alarm Silenced indicator illuminates yellow after the Alarm Silence button is pressed while an alarm condition exists. It turns off when the Drill or Reset button is pressed. Primary Line Active This is a red LED, located on the main circuit board, that indicates the primary phone line is active. Secondary Line Active This is a red LED, located on the main circuit board, that indicates the secondary phone line is active. Kiss -off This is a green LED, located on the main circuit board, that blinks when a Central Station has acknowledged receipt of each transmitted message or when a portion of upload or download data has been accepted from a Service Terminal. 4.3 Normal Operation With no alarms or troubles in the system, the display message is System All Normal along with the current time and date as shown below. To set the time and date, refer to the appropriate section in this manual. SYSTEM ALL NORMAL 10:00A 100913 The MS-9050UD performs the following functions at regular intervals while in Normal mode: ✓ Monitors AC input voltage and battery voltage ✓ Monitors and reports status of SLC loop, option cards and control panel ✓ Polls all devices on the SLC loop and flashes each device LED while checking for valid replies, alarms, troubles, etc. ✓ Refreshes LCD display and updates time ✓ Scans control panel keypad for key presses ✓ Performs autotest for all SLC devices ✓ Tests memory ✓ Updates and reads all communication buses (EIA -485, EIA -232, etc.) MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 127 Operating Instructions Trouble Operation 4.4 Trouble Operation With no alarms in the system, the detection of a trouble will cause the following: The piezo to pulse 1 second On and 1 second Off The system Trouble LED to flash one second On and one second Off The trouble relay to activate TROUBL with device type, noun/adjective, address and trouble description will appear on the LCD display The same message, along with the time and date, is sent to the optional printer and the history buffer. Communicate the trouble conditions to the Central Station • Terminate upload or download communications Note that specific troubles will initiate additional actions; for example, loss of AC power will turn off the AC Power LED, etc. Addressable Smoke Detectors, Monitor Modules and Control Modules For addressable devices connected to the SLC loop, the following is a typical message that could appear on the LCD display for a device trouble: � TROUBL SMOKE (PHOTO) <AOJ> <NOUN> INVREP 10:00R 100913 10001 The information displayed in the above example provides the following information: • First line in display: — The type of event; in this example TROUBL indicating a device trouble — Device type identifier; in this example, SMOKE (PHOTO) indicates a Photoelectric smoke detector. Other device type identifiers which can be displayed include SMOKE (ION) for Ionization Detector, HEAT for Heat Detector, CONTROL for Control Module, and MONITOR for Monitor Module, PULL STATION for a manual pull box, etc. Refer to "Edit Detector" on page 60,"Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module" on page 67, and"Edit Module Screen for Control Modules" on page 73 for information on additional device types. • Second line in display: — <ADJ>; refers to the user programmed adjective descriptor from library list resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC. — <NOUN>; refers to the user programmed noun descriptor from library list resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC. • Third line in display: INVREP indicates an invalid reply from the addressable device. Other possible troubles include: / SHORT - indicating a shorted circuit on an addressable device ✓ OPEN - indicating an open circuit on an addressable device ✓ DIRTY] - maintenance alert indicating that a detector is near but below the allowed alarm limit and is in need of maintenance before the performance is compromised ✓ DIRTY2 - maintenance alert indicating that a detector needs immediate maintenance since it has been within 80% of its alarm threshold for 24 hours ✓ INVREP - maintenance alert indicating a hardware problem in the detector / TEST F - indicating a detector has failed the automatic test operation which functionally checks its sensing chamber and electronics 128 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Alarm Operation Operating Instructions ✓ INV ID - indicating that an incorrect device code (Type ID) has been programmed for an installed device (for example, Photo has been programmed but an Ion detector has been installed) ✓ SW TBL - indicating a module has failed the testing of its Class A switching relay • Fourth line in display: — Time; the current time in this example is 10:OOA which represents 10:00 AM — Date; the current month, day and year in this example is 10 for October, 09 for the 9th day of the month and 13 for the year 2013 — Device Address; 1D001 in this example 1 represents SLC Loop, D represents a detector, and 001 represents device address 001 Pressing the Acknowledge/Step or Alarm Silence key will cause the pulsing piezo to silence and the system Trouble LED to change from flashing to on steady. This block acknowledgment occurs regardless of the number of troubles, alarms and supervisory events active in the system. When the Acknowledge/Step key is pressed and at least one new alarm or trouble exists in the system, the `acknowledge' message is sent to the printer and history file. If the trouble clears, either before or after the Acknowledge/Step key is pressed, the `clear trouble' message is sent to the printer and his- tory file. If all troubles clear and there are no supervisory or fire conditions active in the system, the system returns to normal mode operation and the System All Normal message is shown on the LCD display and sent to the history and printer files. The auto -restore feature will restore cleared troubles even if the troubles were never acknowledged. Note that pressing the Alarm Silence key when only trou- bles exist in the system will have the same effect as pressing the Acknowledge/Step key except the Alarm Silenced LED will light. 4.5 Alarm Operation Alarm operation is similar to trouble operation with the following differences: The piezo sounder produces a steady output as opposed to a pulsed output The Fire Alarm LED flashes 1 second On and 1 second Off The LCD displays Alarm along with the device name, type, address, adjective/noun, associated zones and time/date Communicate the alarm to the Central Station Alarms latch and are not allowed to clear automatically • Alarms activate software zones if so programmed • Timers for Silence Inhibit, Autosilence and Trouble Reminder are started • Alarms activate the general alarm relay and general alarm zone ZOO • The trouble relay is not activated • Store event in history buffer • Terminate upload or download communications A typical alarm display would be as illustrated below: ALARM PULL STATION <ADJ? <NOUN> 2000 10:00A 091213 1M001 Note that the device type, which in this example is PULL STATION, can be any other programma- ble alarm type. The information displayed in the above example provides the following information: • First line in display: — The type of event; in this example ALARM indicating an alarm condition MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 129 Operating Instructions Supervisory Operation – Device type identifier; in this example, PULL STATION indicates a manual pull box. Other device type identifiers which can be displayed include SMOKE (ION) for Ionization Detector, HEAT for Heat Detector, CONTROL for Control Module, and MONITOR for Monitor Module, PULL STATION for a manual pull box, etc. Refer to "Edit Detector" on page 60,"Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module" on page 67 and"Edit Module Screen for Control Modules" on page 73 for information on additional device types. • Second line in display: – <ADJ>; refers to the user programmed adjective descriptor from library list resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC. – <NOUN>; refers to the user programmed noun descriptor from library list resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC. • Third line in display: Z000 indicates the zone programmed to this device which, in this example, is general alarm Zone 000. Note that a single device can be programmed to five different zones but only the first zone will be displayed. • Fourth line in display: – Time; the current time in this example is 10:00A which represents 10:00 AM – Date; the current month, day and year in this example is 09 for September, 12 for the 12th day of the month and 13 for the year 2013 – Device Address; IM001 in this example 1 represents SLC Loop, Mrepresents a module, and 001 represents device address 001 4.6 Supervisory Operation Supervisory operation is similar to alarm operation but with the following differences: • The piezo sounder pulses 1/2 second On and 1/2 second Off • The Supervisory LED flashes '/2 second On and '/2 second Off • The LCD displays the status label Active Supervisory along with the device name, type, address, adjective/noun, associated zones, and time/date • Communicate the supervisory condition to the Central Station • The supervisory relay is activated • The alarm relay is not activated • Silenced alarms are resounded • Timers are not started • Store event in history buffer • Terminate upload or download communications A typical Supervisory event would be displayed as illustrated in the following: ACTIVE SUPERVISORY <RDJ> <NOUN> 2000 10:00R 062513 1M001 Note that, like alarms, supervisory signals latch (except when programmed for supervisory autore- settable) and can be assigned to software zones. Supervisory alarms do not cause resound as do other alarm conditions. Open circuits in supervisory wiring are processed by the control panel the same way as other trouble conditions. Refer to "Alarm Operation" on page 129, for a description of the information displayed on the control panel LCD. 4.7 Process Monitor Operation Process Monitor operation will initiate the following events: • The piezo sounder pulses '/4 second On and '4 second Off 130 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Hazard/Tornado Condition Operation Operating Instructions • The LCD displays a process monitor message along with the device name, type, address, adjective/noun, associated zones, and time/date • Communicate the process monitor condition to the Central Station (if the default event code has been changed from 000 to a reportable event code) • Relays programmed for process monitoring will be activated • The alarm relay is not activated • Fire Alarm NACs will not activate • SLC NACs (control modules) will activate • Timers are not started • Store event in history buffer • Activate appropriate LED on the ANN -LED annunciator (required for this application) • Each ANN -LED can support up to 10 zones. Note that, like supervisories, process monitor signals latch (except when programmed for process monitor autoresettable) and can be assigned to software zones. 4.8 Hazard/Tornado Condition Operation Hazard/Tornado operation is intended for Manual activation. Hazard/Tornado Condition operation will initiate the following events: • The piezo sounder pulses 1/4 second On, '/a second Off • The LCD displays a hazard message along with the device name, type, address, adjective/noun, associated zones, and time/date • Communicate the hazard condition to the Central Station (if the default event code has been changed from 000 to a reportable event code) • Relays programmed for hazard will be activated • The alarm relay is not activated • Fire Alarm NACs will not activate • SLC NACs (control modules) will activate • Timers are not started • Store event in history buffer • Activate appropriate LED on the ANN -LED annunciator (required for this application) • Each ANN -LED can support up to 10 zones. Hazard conditions latch. They can be assigned to software zones. 4.9 Medical Alert Condition Operation Medical alert operation is: • not intended for nurse call stations (applications) per UL 1069. • not intended for signaling professional medical staff. • to be used for summoning security guards or other trained personnel within the facility • intended for Manual activation. Medical Alert Condition operation will initiate the following events: • The piezo sounder 1/4 second On, 1/4 second Off • The LCD displays a medical alert message along with the device name, type, address, adjective/noun, associated zones, and time/date • Communicate the medical alert condition to the Central Station (if the default event code has been changed from 000 to a reportable event code) MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 131 Operating Instructions NAC Operation • Relays programmed for medical alert will be activated • The alarm relay is not activated • Fire Alarm NACs will not activate • SLC NACs (control modules) will activate • Timers are not started • Store event in history buffer • Activate appropriate LED on the ANN -LED annunciator (required for this application) • Each ANN -LED can support up to 10 zones. Medical alert conditions latch. They can be assigned to software zones. 4.10 NAC Operation There are two programmable NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits) resident on the MS-9050UD main circuit board which can be wired for Style Y (Class B) or Style Z (Class A) . Both NACs may be programmed as silenceable or nonsilenceable and may also be programmed for steady or coded operation. Coded operation provides a choice between March Time, Temporal or California coding. 4.11 Programmed Zone Operation Each addressable detector and monitor module can be assigned to a maximum of five software alarm zones. A general alarm zone ZOO may be listed for output (control) points, but it is not neces- sary to list ZOO for input points, since this is the default zone for all alarm input devices. Zone ZOO is not activated by supervisory points. When an input device alarms and is not disabled, it activates all software zones assigned to it. An output device that is not disabled is turned on when any of the software zones to which it is pro- grammed become active. Only fire alarms can turn on any of the two main NACs. Note that hazards/tornado alerts do not turn on the two main NACs. 4.12 Disable/Enable Operation Input points which are disabled do not cause an alarm or any zone activation. Disabled output points are held in the off state. All disabled points are treated as if they were in trouble, with the exception being the status label that will be displayed is DISABL. 4.13 Waterflow Circuits Operation If an alarm exists from a monitor module point that has a waterflow type code and its mapped NAC control module outputs are programmed for nonsilenceable operation, the Alarm Silence key will not function. Also, any output zone activated by a waterflow device will not be silenceable if the Waterflow Silenceable option is set to NO in system programming. 4.14 Detector Functions Maintenance Alert Each addressable detector is monitored by the control panel for its maintenance status. If a detector is near but below the allowed alarm limit, a `maintenance alert' message will automatically be dis- played, signaling that the detector is in need of servicing. 132 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Time Functions: Real -Time Clock Operating Instructions Automatic Test Operation An automatic test of an addressable detector is performed each minute, resulting in a complete SLC loop test in approximately 1 hour (if the loop has the maximum number of devices installed). The detector's sensing chamber and electronics are functionally tested for normal, safe operation. A trouble message is displayed upon failure of this test. A System Reset will clear this trouble. Type Code Supervision The FACP monitors addressable hardware device codes at slow intervals. Mismatch of any type code, compared to the system program, will cause a device trouble. System Alarm Verification The control panel may be programmed to perform alarm verification to help eliminate the nuisance of false alarms. Alarm verification applies to smoke detectors only. Smoke Detector Data Smoke detector data is monitored by the FACP, eliminating the need to test the sensitivity of each detector at its location. A printout of each detector's data can be retrieved from the FACP using an optional printer or Windows° HyperTerminal. Detector sensing ability can decrease with age and should be monitored as part of a system's routine maintenance. 4.15 Time Functions: Real -Time Clock The MS-9050UD includes a crystal -based clock that provides time of day, date and day of week. Time is displayed as 12 or 24 hour time with month/day/year and is stored in RAM. Daylight sav- ings time change -over is programmable and automatic. If both AC and battery are lost, the time must be reset. 4.16 Synchronized NAC Operation Synchronization is a panel feature that controls the activation of notification appliances in such a way that all devices will turn on and off at exactly the same time. This is particularly critical when activating strobes which must be synchronized to avoid random activation and a potential hazard or confusion. The FACP can be programmed to operate with a variety of manufacturer's devices. Important: When a Notification Appliance Circuit with a mix of audible and visual devices is pro- grammed for silenceable and the synchronization feature is selected, only the audible devices will be turned off if the Silence key is pressed. The visual devices (strobes, etc.) will continue to oper- ate. 4.17 Coded Operation The NAC circuits resident on the control panel main circuit board can be programmed for coded operation. The available pulse rates which can be programmed for coded operation are as follows: • Continuous: Steady output with no pulsing • March Time: Pulses at 120 ppm (pulses per minute) • Temporal Code: Pulses at '/z second On, 1/2 second Off, 'A second On, '/z second Off, '/z second On, 1'' second Off • California Code: 10 seconds On, 5 seconds Off • Two -Stage Pulses at 20 ppm (pulses per minute) for 3 or 5 minutes and then changes to Temporal MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 133 Operating Instructions Presignal 4.18 Presignal Presignal option programs an initiating device to delay the activation of NACs and/or control mod- ules while allowing visual verification by a person. Once a detector or monitor module triggers an alarm, the onboard piezo sounds immediately, but the NACs are not activated for a user pro- grammed time duration of up to three minutes. Note that the alarm relay and communicator will respond to the initial alarm immediately. In addition, Zone 18 will activate. This zone can be pro- grammed to a control module which may be used to activate a sounder or indicator which the installer designates as a Presignal indication. Do not assign Zone 18 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a Pre -signal condition. After the programmed delay, the NACs will activate if the source of the alarm is not cleared. Note that if a second alarm occurs during the programmed time delay, the alarm will be processed imme- diately, causing activation of the appropriate output zones. The events which occur upon Presignal activation are as follows: ✓ onboard piezo sounds immediately ✓ control panel LCD display will indicate a presignal event and the active point ✓ control points programmed to Zone 18 will activate ✓ annunciators (if enabled) will sound the local piezo, and pulse the alarm LED and zone LED ✓ outputs (NACs and control modules) of associated zones will be inhibited from activating for a user programmed time delay of up to three minutes ✓ second alarm occurring anytime during the time delay will cause immediate activation of all associated outputs Presignal does not affect monitor modules programmed as waterflow, supervisory, process moni- toring or remote switches. Presignal operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 4.19 Positive Alarm Sequence PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) option will program a detector to delay panel activation (including alarm relay and communicator) for a period of 15 seconds. Zone 17, however, will activate imme- diately and may be used to connect a signaling device to indicate PAS activation. Do not assign Zone 17 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate a PAS condition. When a detector triggers an alarm, the onboard piezo sounds immediately, but the NACs are pre- vented from activating for 15 seconds. This inhibit time is factory set and cannot be changed. Press- ing the Alarm Silence or Acknowledge/Step key during the 15 second inhibit time will silence the piezo sounder and start a timer which prevents activation of NACs for an additional time duration which can be user programmed for up to three minutes. After the programmed delay, the NACs will activate if the source of the alarm is not cleared. Note that if a second alarm occurs during either time delay, the alarm will be processed immediately, causing activation of the appropriate output zones. The events which occur upon PAS activation are as follows: ✓ onboard piezo sounds immediately ✓ control panel LCD display will indicate a presignal event and the active point / control points programmed to Zone 17 will activate ✓ annunciators (if enabled) will sound the local piezo, and pulse the alarm LED and zone LED / outputs (NACs and control modules) of associated zones will be inhibited from activating for a factory set duration of 15 seconds ✓ pressing the Alarm Silence or Acknowledge/Step key will start a timer which inhibits output activation for additional time delay of up to three minutes which is user programmable ✓ second alarm occurring anytime during either time delay will cause immediate activation of all associated outputs PAS operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 134 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Special System Timers Operating Instructions Note that the PAS BYPASS monitor type code, when activated, will inhibit the PAS capability until the PAS BYPASS monitor is deactivated. While PAS is inhibited, signaling devices will immediately place the control panel into alarm. This feature may be employed by wiring a normally open device, such as a switch, to a monitor module which has been programmed for PAS BYPASS. 4.20 Special System Timers 4.20.1 Silence Inhibit Timer This option, if selected, prevents the Alarm Silence key from functioning for 60 seconds following an alarm. A new alarm during the initial 60 second period will not cause the timer to restart with a new 60 seconds. Silence Inhibit operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 4.20.2 Autosilence Timer If Autosilence is selected, the notification appliances, programmed as silenceable, will automati- cally be silenced after a programmable duration of from 5 to 30 minutes. Pressing the Drill key will restart the timer. Autosilence operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Juris- diction. 4.20.3 Trouble Reminder If selected, this feature causes a reminding `beep' every 15 seconds during an alarm (after the Alarm Silence key is pressed) and every two minutes during a trouble condition (after the Acknowl- edge/Step or Alarm Silence key is pressed). The `beeps' from the onboard piezo sounder will occur until the alarm or fault is cleared. Note that enabling/disabling the Trouble Reminder feature has no effect on Trouble Resound. When an existing trouble in the system is silenced, if the trouble condition is not cleared before midnight, the piezo will resound, indicating that the trouble condition still exists. 4.20.4 Waterflow Retard Timer If selected, this option will delay the activation of a waterflow type alarm for a programmable time duration from 1 to 90 seconds. This delay is in addition to any time delay inherent in the waterflow device. This feature requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 4.20.5 Alarm Verification (None or One Minute) If alarm verification is selected, an addressable smoke detector's alarm is ignored for a retard time of 23 seconds and the detector's alarm condition is automatically reset. There will be no alarm indi- cation at the FACP during the Retard period. A confirmation period of 60 seconds follows, during which a subsequent alarm from the same detector will cause the panel to immediately activate the appropriate outputs and indicate the alarm condition at the FACP. If a different detector alarms any time during the first detector's verification period, the panel will immediately activate all appropri- MS-9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 135 Operating Instructions Walktest ate outputs and indicate the alarm condition at the FACP. If no additional detector alarms occur within 83 seconds of the first alarm (23 second retard plus 60 second confirmation), the timer resets and the panel is ready to verify any new detector alarms which may occur. 0 sec. 23 sec. Detector Alarm Verification (Retard + Confirmation) Detector Goes Into Alarm RETARD CONFIRMATION (60 seconds 83 s c. Alarm Ignored -44111— Control Panel Processes Alarm if Same Detector is Still in Alarrt-- Different Detector Alarms L During First Detectors Verification Period i 1 Control Panel Immediately Processes Alarn NOTE: Alarm Verification is available only for addressable smoke detectors, not conventional smoke detectors. 4.21 Walktest Walktest is a feature which allows one person to test the fire alarm system. An audible walktest will momentarily sound the Notification Appliance Circuits in the building and store the walktest infor- mation in a file at the panel. A silent walktest will not sound the NACs but will store the walktest information in a file which can be viewed at the panel. Disabled NAC devices will not activate during walktest. Alarm/Shorted Condition When in audible Walktest, the panel responds to each new alarm and activates its programmed con- trol outputs for four seconds, if those outputs have been programmed for silenceable activation. It also stores each alarm in the walktest history file which can be sent to an optional printer. The stored display will be the same as if the device actually activated except the colon (:) in the time stamp is replaced with an asterisk (*). Open Condition Addressable devices as well as all main circuit board NACs are monitored for fault conditions during Walktest mode. When a new trouble condition occurs, the FACP will activate all NACs and control modules programmed for Walktest, then shut them off after eight seconds. While in Walktest, the trouble relay is activated and the system Trouble LED flashes (as in all of the Program and status change operations). The alarm relay is not activated. 4.22 Read Status Read Status functions do not require a password. The control panel will continue to provide fire protection while in Read Status mode. This mode can be entered while the control panel is in alarm or trouble. If a new alarm or trouble occurs during these functions, the Read Status is exited to pre- vent confusion. 136 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Read Status Operating Instructions Read Status Entry When the operator presses the control panel Enter key, the LCD will display the following: 1=READ STATUS MODE 2=PROGRAMMING MODE 3=MANUAL DIAL MODE 4=REMOTE DOWNLOAD Pressing 1, while this screen is being displayed, will cause the control panel to enter the Read Sta- tus mode which allows the user to view and print the programmed features and status of the control panel. The following screens will be displayed: READ STATUS 1=SYSTEM POINT 2=ZONES 3=POWER 3 Read Status Screen #1 READ STATUS a 1=ANN—BUS 2=PHONE LINE 3=CENTRAL STATION Read Status Screen #4 4.22.1 System Point Pressing 1 while viewing Read Status Screen #1 will cause the following screen to be displayed: READ STATUS 1 -SYSTEM POINT 3 -ZONES POWER Read Status Screen #1 READ STATUS 1=TROUBLE REMINDER 2=TIMERS 3=NACS Read Status Screen #2 READ STATUS 1=SERVICE TERMINAL 4 2=PRINT 3=TIME—DATE Read Status Screen #5 READ STATUS 1=RELAYS 2=PROGRAM CHECK 3=HISTORY Read Status Screen #3 READ SYSTEM POINT SELECT TYPE 1=DETECTOR 2=MODULE The operator selects the type of device which is to be viewed by pressing 1 for Detector or 2 for Module. If 1 is pressed, the display will change to the following screen: READ SYSTEM POINT ENTER DETECTORU Entering the three digit detector address will cause the control panel to display the current status of the selected device. For example, if a detector with address 001 on the SLC loop is entered, a dis- play similar to the following will appear: NORMAL SMOKE(PHOTO) NORTH CLASSROOM Z005 V 10001 The information in the preceding display includes: • NORMAL - the present status (could also be ALARM, TROUBL, DISABL, etc.) • SMOKE (PHOTO) - the device type which is a photoelectric smoke detector (could also be ION for ionization smoke detector) • NORTH CLASSROOM - the Adjective/Noun label for this device • Z005 - the first of five possible assigned software zones • 1D001 - 1 = SLC Loop, D = Detector, 001 = Address 001 • V - Alarm Verification Enabled (V = Yes, * = No) • S - Silenceable for control modules (S = Yes, * = No) MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 137 Operating Instructions Read Status • W - Walktestable for control and monitor modules (W = Yes, * = No) Pressing the down arrow key, while viewing the screen shown above, will allow the operator to view additional programming information about the selected device, such as: • Enable/Disable Status • Device Type • Alarm Verification On/Off (for detectors) • Walktest Yes/No • PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) Yes/No (for detectors only) • Pre -Signal Yes/No (for detectors and monitor modules) • Zone Assignments (five maximum) • Adjective/Noun descriptor • Silenceable Yes/No (for control modules) 4.22.2 Zones READ STATUS I SYSTEM POINT 3 �P OYER Read Status Screen #1 138 Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen #1 will cause the following screens to be displayed: ZONES 1=ZONES INSTALLED v 2=ZONES ENABLED 3=ZONES DISABLED Zones Screen #1 ZONES 1=SPECIAL PURPOSE 4 2=ZONE TYPE 3=FUTURE USE Zones Screen #2 From the preceding screens, the control panel operator can view: • Zones Installed - all software zones programmed into the system (20 maximum) • Zones Enabled - all software zones that are enabled • Zones Disabled - all software zones that have been disabled • Special Purpose - on or off programming for Special Purpose Zones 17 reserved for PAS, 18 reserved for Pre -signal and 19 reserved for Two Stage Operation • Zone Type - the Type assigned to each installed zone (default is Alarm) 4.22.3 Power Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen #1 will cause the following screens to be displayed: POWER BATTERY 27.21V v ANN–BUS PWR 27.75V CHARGER 27.75V Power Screen #1 POWER SYSTEM PWR 27.60V 4 Power Screen #2 A real-time display of the control panel voltages can be used to determine if a problem exists in the system. The following table lists the circuit being measured, possible conditions and their respective volt- age ranges: Circuit Condition Voltage Range Battery Normal Battery (nominal) Low Battery No Battery 27.05 to 28.15 VDC 17.7 to 20.4 VDC 0 to 17.6 VDC ANN -BUS Power Normal 21.25 to 27.50 VDC Charger Normal 21.87 to 29.84 VDC System Power Nominal 27.60 VDC MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Read Status Operating Instructions 4.22.4 Trouble Reminder READ STATUS 1 -TROUBLE REMINDER 2iiTIMERS 34NAC Read Status Screen #2 Pressing 1 while viewing Read Status Screen #2 will display the following screen: TROUBLE REMINDER TROUBLE REM ON The screen indicates whether the Trouble Reminder feature is On or Off. The factory default setting is Trouble Rem OFF. 4.22.5 Timers Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen #2 will cause the following Timer screens to be dis- played: TIMERS P AS DELAY 000 PRE SIGNAL 000 W ATERFLOW 000, TIMERS AC LOSS DELAY 2 These screens will indicate the delay time, in seconds, for each of the first three possible delay options. The AC Loss Delay time is displayed in hours. 4.22.6 NAC Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen #2 will display the following screen: NAC 1=NAC 1 2=NAC 2 The operator can press 1 to view the programmed options for NAC 1 or 2 to view the programmed options for NAC 2. The resulting screens will display the following information: Enable/Disable Status Circuit Type (Bell, Strobe, etc.) Silenceable/Nonsilenceable Auto Silence Enable/Disable and time delay (in minutes) Coding Selection (Temporal, Steady, etc.) • Zone Assignments Silence Inhibit Enabled/Disabled • Synchronization Type (System Sensor, Wheelock, or Gentex) 4.22.7 Relays Pressing 1 while viewing Read Status Screen #3 will display the following screen: RELAY 1=RELAY 1 2=RELAY 2 3=RELRY 3 The operator can view the programmed option for each relay by pressing the corresponding number key. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 139 READ STATUS 1 -RELAYS 2 -PROGRAM CHECK 3HISTORY • Read Status Screen #3 Operating Instructions Read Status 4.22.8 Program Check Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen #3 will cause a screen similar to the following to be displayed: PROGRAM CHECK 1=NACS NO INPUT 2=ZONES NO INPUT 3=ZONES NO OUTPUT Pressing 1 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen which will indicate if any input zones have not been programmed to one of the Notification Appliance Circuits. Use the up and down arrow keys to view all NACs. Pressing 2 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen which will indicate if any output zones have not been programmed to at least one input zone. Use the up and down arrow keys to view all zones. Pressing 3 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen which will indicate if any input zones have not been programmed to at least one output zone. Use the up and down arrow keys to view all zones. 4.22.9 History Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen #3 will display the following screen: HISTORY 1=VIEW ALL 2=VIEW ALARMS 3=VIEW OTHER EVENTS The operator can view all events which have been stored in the history file, only alarms or other events, such as troubles or supervisories, by pressing the corresponding number key. 4.22.10 ANN -BUS Pressing 1 while viewing Read Status Screen #4 will display the following screens: ANN—BUS — ENABLED v 2=MODULES INSTALLED 3=ANN—SIPG OPTIONS ANN -BUS Screen #1 ANN—BUS 1=ANN-80 OPTIONS 2=ANN—SECONDARY ANN -BUS Screen #2 Pressing 2 for Modules Installed, while viewing ANN -BUS Screen #1 will display screens with ANN -BUS Addresses 1 through 8. Selecting an address will display information about the device which has been assigned that address. Pressing 3 for ANN-S/PG Options, while viewing ANN -BUS Screen #1 will display screens detail- ing the setting for the ANN -SPG printer installed. This information includes: • Port Parallel/Serial • Printer Supervision Yes/No • Off Line Timer setting • Baud Rate • Data Bits • Parity • Stop Bits Pressing 1 for ANN -80 Options, while viewing ANN -BUS Screen #2 will display screens detailing the settings for this device. The information includes: • Piezo Enable/Disable 140 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Read Status Operating Instructions • Lock Enable/Disable • Acknowledge Button Enable/Disable • Silence Button Enable/Disable • Reset Button Enable/Disable • Drill Button Enable/Disable Pressing 2 for ANN -SECONDARY Options, while viewing ANN -BUS Screen #2 will display screens detailing the settings for this device and would display the following screen: ANN—SECONDARY ENABLED ANN -SECONDARY Screen #2 4.22.11 Phone Line Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen #4 will display the following screen: PHONE LINE PRIMARY TOUCHTONE SECONDARY TOUCHTONE This screen indicates the both the Primary and Secondary phone lines have been configured for touchtone dialing operation. 4.22.12 Central Station READ STATUS 1=ANN-BUS 2=PHONE LINE 3=CENTRAL STATION Read Status Screen #4 Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen #4 will display the following screens: CENTRAL STATION REPORTING ENABLED v REPORT BOTH CALL LIMIT 10 Central Station Screen #1 CENTRAL STATION n 1=PRIMARY 2=SECONDARY 3=REPORT STYLE Central Station Screen #2 Central Station Screen #1 indicates whether the Central Station Reporting is enabled or disabled, if the Reports will be sent to one or both the Primary and Secondary Central Station phone numbers and the Call Limit for DACT trouble calls within a 24 hour period. Central Station Screen #2 pro- vides information on the Primary and Secondary Central Station programming which includes: • Test Time Interval • Account Code • 24 Hour Test Time • Phone Number Communication Format Event Codes 4.22.13 Service Terminal READ STATUS 1=SERVICE TERMINAL 2RINT 3=TIME-DATE Read Status Screen #5 Pressing 1 for Ring Count, while viewing Read Status Screen #5 will display the following screens: SERVICE TERMINAL RING COUNT 03 Service Terminal Screen MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 141 Operating Instructions Read Status 4.22.14 Print RERD STATUS 1=SERVICE TERMINAL 3=TIME-DATE Read Status Screen #5 To print program data or control panel status, press 2 while viewing Read Status Screen #5. The following screens will be displayed: PRINT 1=HISTORY 2=WALKTEST LOG 3=WALKTEST SUMMARY Print Screen #1 PRINT 1=DETECTOR DATA 2=DACT SUMMARY 3=EXIT PRINTING Print Screen #2 Pressing 1 while viewing Print Screen #1 allows the user to print the History file which will detail all of the system activities since the file was last cleared from memory. Pressing 2 while viewing Print Screen #1 allows the user to print the Walktest log which will detail all of the system activations during walktest since the log was last cleared. Refer to "Walktest" on page 94 for additional information on the display. Pressing 3 while viewing Print Screen #1 allows the user to print the Walktest summary. This screen will display a total of the tested detectors, tested modules, untested detectors and untested modules for the current walktest session. Refer to "Walktest" on page 94 for additional information on the display. Pressing 1 while viewing Print Screen #2 allows the user to print the detector data for each address- able smoke detector connected to the system. A printout, similar to the following example, will be generated if an optional printer is connected to the FACP. LOOP NO. DETECTOR ADDRESS DETECTOR TYPE CUSTOM LABEL UPPER LIMIT CHAMBER READING %OBS./FT. 1 2 SMOKE (PHOTO) 4012 1999 1.73 1 3 SMOKE (ION) 2844 1350 0.8333 1 4 SMOKE (PHOTO) 4096 1694 1.73 Chamber Value The Chamber value should be within the recommended range for the following smoke detectors: • SD350(T), SD355(T), D350P(R), D355P(R), SD300(T), AD350, and AD355 Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 405 - 2100 (obscuration of 1.00%/ft to 3.66%/ft.) • CP350, CP355 and CP300 Addressable Ionization Smoke Detectors: 750 - 2100 (obscuration of 0.50%/ft. to 1.44%/ft.) The smoke detector will still function properly beyond the high limit in the above recommended range, up to a point where the FACP issues a maintenance warning. However, it is recommended that the smoke detectors be maintained within the recommended range to avoid maintenance warn- ings or false alarms. If the smoke detector's chamber reading is not within the recommended range, clean the detector and check the chamber reading again. If the reading is still not within the recommended range, the detector is suspect (not cleanable) and should be replaced. Maintenance Alert The software determines when the drift compensation for a detector reaches an unacceptable level that can compromise detector performance. When a detector reaches an unacceptable level, the control panel indicates a maintenance alert. Table 4.1 summarizes the three levels of maintenance alert: 142 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Read Status Operating Instructions Maintenance Level FACP Status Displays Indicates Low Chamber Value INVREP A hardware problem in the detector Maintenance Alert DIRTY1 Dust accumulation that is near but below the allowed limit. DIRTY 1 indicates the need for maintenance before the performance of the detector is compromised Maintenance Urgent DIRTY2 Dust accumulation above the allowed limit. Table 4.1 Maintenance Alert Levels Figure 4.1 illustrates a graphic representation of the maintenance levels: DIRTY T Functional Range Recommended Range LOW VALUE Maintenance Urgent Maintenance Alert Low Chamber Reading Figure 4.1 Diagram of Maintenance Levels Drift Compensation Drift compensation uses software algorithms that identify and compensate for long-term changes in the data readings from each addressable smoke detector. These long-term changes in detector data readings are typically caused by dirt and dust accumulation inside the smoke chamber. Drift com- pensation performs the following functions: • Samples each photoelectric smoke detector every 6 seconds and each ionization smoke detector every 3 seconds • Allows a smoke detector to retain its original ability to detect actual smoke and resist false alarms, even as dirt and dust accumulate • Reduces maintenance requirements by allowing the control panel to automatically perform the periodic sensitivity measurements required by NFPA Standard 72 The FACP software also provides filters to remove transient noise signals, usually caused by elec- trical interference. Pressing 2 while viewing Print Screen #2 allows the user to print the DACT summary which will detail all of the onboard DACT settings. Refer to "Onboard DACT" on page 106 for additional information on the display. Pressing 3 while viewing Print Screen #2 exits the user from the print menu. 4.22.15 Time -Date The operator can view the daylight savings time and the month and week when daylight savings time will begin and end. Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen #5 will display the following screens: READ STATUS 1 -SERVICE TERMINAL 2=PRINT 3 -TIME -DATE Read Status Screen #5 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS ENABLED YES START MONTH MAR START WEEK WEEK 2 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS 4 END MONTH NOV END WEEK WEEK 1 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 143 Section 5: Central Station Communications The control panel transmits zone and system status reports to Central Stations via the public switched telephone network. Two supervised telephone line connections are made to interface the control panel to the telephone lines. Two optional 7 foot telephone cords are available for this pur- pose and can be purchased separately. The control panel supervises both telephone lines for proper voltage. A delay of two minutes will occur before a fault in either phone line connection is reported as a trouble. When a fault is detected, an audible trouble signal will sound, the yellow trouble LED will blink, the LCD display will indicate the phone line trouble and the trouble condition will be reported to the Central Station over the remaining operational phone line. The control panel comes with line seizure capability provided for both the primary and secondary telephone line interfaces. Any time that the control panel needs to make a call to a Central Station, line seizure will disconnect any local premises phones sharing the same telephone line. All transmissions to the Central Stations will be sent over the primary phone line. In the event of noisy phone lines, transmissions will be sent over the backup secondary phone line. Two phone numbers must be programmed, the primary Central Station phone number and the sec- ondary Central Station phone number. All system reports will be transmitted to the primary Central Station phone number. Reports will automatically be sent to the secondary Central Station phone number if attempts to transmits to the primary Central Station phone number are unsuccessful. If 10 total attempts to communicate are unsuccessful, a Communicator Failure report will be dis- played. Note that as an option, all reports may also be sent to the secondary Central Station phone number. The MS-9050UD meets NFPA 72 National Fire Code reporting requirements for: (a) the type of signal, (b) condition and (c) location of the reporting premises. The general priority reporting structure is: 1. Zone Alarms and Restores 2. Zone Troubles and Restores 3. System Troubles and Restores 4. 24-hour Test 144 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Central Station Communications The control panel is capable of reporting detailed messages depending upon the format in use. Table 5.1 shows the reporting structure for all formats. Table 5.1 Format Selection Refer to Table 5.2 for an explanation of each letter code in Table 5.1. Refer to Table 5.3 for a list of compatible receivers. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 145 Format Format Format Format Report 3+1/4+1/Standard 4+1 Express 3+1/4+1/Expanded 4+2/Standard 4+2 Express 4+2/Expanded Alarm SSS(S) A SSS(S) A AAA(A) Z SSSS AA2 SSSS AZ Alarm Restore SSS(S) RA SSS(S) RA RARARA(RA) Z SSSS RARA2 SSSS RAZ Zone Trouble (Zone Open) SSS(S) TZ SSS(S) TZ TZTZTZ(TZ) Z SSSS TZTZ2 SSSS TZZ Zone Trouble Restore SSS(S) RTZ SSS(S) RTZ RTZRTZRTZ(RTZ) Z SSSS RTZRTZ2 SSSS RTZZ System Trouble SSS(S) TS SSS(S) TS TSTSTS(TS) Y SSSS TSTS2 SSSS TSY System Trouble Restore SSS(S) RTS SSS(S) RTS RTSRTSRTS(RTS) Y SSSS RTSRTS2 SSSS RTSY Zone Disable SSS(S) DZ SSS(S) DZ DZDZDZ(DZ) Z SSSS DZDZ2 SSSS DZZ Zone Disable Restore SSS(S) RDZ SSS(S) RDZ RDZRDZRDZ(RDZ) Z SSSS RDZRDZ2 SSSS RDZZ Low Battery SSS(S) L SSS(S) L LLL(L) L2 SSSS LL2 SSSS LL2 Low Battery Restore SSS(S) RL SSS(S) RL RLRLRL(RL) RL2 SSSS RLRL2 SSSS RLRL2 AC Loss SSS(S) P SSS(S) P PPP(P) P2 SSSS PP2 SSSS PP2 AC Loss Restore SSS(S) RP SSS(S) RP RPRPRP(RP) RP2 SSSS RPRP2 SSSS RPRP2 Fire Drill SSS(S) FD SSS(S) FD FDFDFD(FD) FD2 SSSS FDFD2 SSSS FDFD2 Fire Drill Restore SSS(S) RFD SSS(S) RFD RFDRFDRFD(RFD) RFD2 SSSS RFDRFD2 SSSS RFDRFD2 Supervisory Condition SSS(S) V SSS(S) V WV(V) Z SSSS W2 SSSS VZ Supervisory Condition Restore SSS(S) RV SSS(S) RV RVRVRV(RV) Z SSSS RVRV2 SSSS RVZ Test Report SSS(S) X SSS(S) X SSSS XX2 SSSS XX2 Upload or Download SSS(S) UD SSS(S) UD SSS UDUD2 SSS UDUD2 Table 5.1 Format Selection Refer to Table 5.2 for an explanation of each letter code in Table 5.1. Refer to Table 5.3 for a list of compatible receivers. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 145 Central Station Communications Where SSS or SSSS = Subscriber ID A = Alarm (1st digit) A2 = Alarm (2nd digit) Z = Zone Number RA = Alarm Restore (1st digit) RA2 = Alarm Restore (2nd digit) TZ = Zone Trouble (1st digit) TZ2 = Zone Trouble (2nd digit) RTZ = Zone Trouble Restore (1st digit) RTZ2 = Zone Trouble Restore (2nd digit) TS = System Trouble (1st digit) TS2 = System Trouble (2nd digit) RTS = System Trouble Restore (1st digit) RTS2 = System Trouble Restore (2nd digit) DZ = Zone Disable (1st digit) DZ2 = Zone Disable (2nd digit) RDZ = Zone Disable Restore (1st digit) RDZ2 = Zone Disable Restore (2nd digit) L = Low Battery (1st digit) L2 = Low Battery (2nd digit) RL = Low Battery Restore (1st digit) RL2 = Low Battery Restore (2nd digit) P = AC Loss (1st digit) P2 = AC Loss (2nd digit) RP = AC Loss Restore (1st digit) RP2 = AC Loss Restore (2nd digit) FD = Fire Drill (1st digit) FD2 = Fire Drill (2nd digit) RFD = Fire Drill Restore (1st digit) RFD2 = Fire Drill Restore (2nd digit) V = Supervisory Condition (1st digit) V2 = Supervisory Condition (2nd digit) RV = Supervisory Condition Restore (1st digit) RV2 = Supervisory Condition Restore (2nd digit) X = Test Report (1st digit) X2 = Test Report (2nd digit) Y = A trouble corresponding to the following: 7 = Ground Fault 8 = Low Battery 9 = not used A = Telco Primary Line Fault B = Telco Secondary Line Fault C = Main Bell Fault, Annunciator Bell D = Communication Fault to Primary Number E = Communication Fault to Secondary Number F = System Off Normal Fault/System Fault (Slave Operation, see Chapter 6) UD = Upload/download (1st digit) UD2 = Upload/download (2nd digit) Table 5.2 Format Selection Address Explanation 1 NOTE: For Expanded Reporting, the control panel automatically adds the digit corresponding to the zone number and the second digit corresponding to any system trouble condition. Only the first digit is programmable. 146 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Transmittal Priorities Central Station Communications 5.1 Transmittal Priorities The integral communicator transmits highest priority events first. Events, in terms of priority, are listed below in descending order: 1. Alarms (highest priority level) ✓ Pull stations / Waterflow ✓ Smoke detector ✓ Other alarm types 2. Supervisory Zone 3. System Troubles ✓ Zone disabled ✓ Fire drill ✓ AC fail (after delay) ✓ Zonal faults ✓ Earth fault ✓ Low battery ✓ Telephone line fault ✓ Notification Appliance Circuits fault ✓ Communication trouble ✓ Annunciator trouble / System off normal 4. Restoral Reports ✓ Zone alarm ✓ Supervisory ✓ Zone(s) enabled ✓ Fire drill ✓ AC / Zone fault / Earth ✓ Battery ✓ Telephone line ✓ Notification Appliance Circuits ✓ Communication / Annunciator trouble ✓ System off normal 5. 24 Hour Test (lowest priority) Red LEDs are provided on the circuit board to identify which telephone line is activated. Also, a green LED labeled Kissoff will turn on whenever the control panel has successfully transmitted reports to the Central Station. The Kissoff LED may turn on several times during communications with a Central Station. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 147 Central Station Communications Transmittal Priorities The table below shows UL listed receivers which are compatible with the MS-9050UD. Format - L .c • O ^ CDM OAS mo E� Yo Yo LL N 13 OC O C COD a < �° o rn o o> U N y c It � a,- O O S 40 to IX 17 (73 L. N N2 00 V O o Q a 4+1 Ademco Express V V V V V V V V ✓ 4+2 Ademco Express V V V V V V V V V 3+1/Standard/1800/2300 ✓ V V ✓ V V V 3+1/Expanded/1800/2300 V V V V V V V 3+1/Standard/1900/1400 V V V V V V V 3+1/Expanded/1900/1400 V V V V V V V 4+1/Standard/1800/2300 V V V V V V V V 4+1/Expanded/1800/2300 V V V V V V V V 4+1/Standard/1900/1400 V V V V V V V V 4+1/Expanded/1900/1400 V V V V V V V V 4+2/Standard/1800/2300 V V V V V V V V V V 4+2/Expanded/1800/2300 V V V V V V V V V V 4+2/Standard/1900/1400 V V V V V V V V V V 4+2/Expanded/1900/1400 ✓ V V ✓ ✓ V V ✓ V V Ademco Contact ID V V V V V V V V V Not Used Table 5.3 Compatible UL Listed Receivers 1. With version 3.9 software 2. With 685-8 Line Card with Rev. 4.4d software 3. With 9002 Line Card Rev. 9035 software or 9032 Line Card with 9326A software 4. With 124077V2.00 Receiver and 126047 Line Card Rev. M 5. With V.7301 Receiver S/W 6. With 01.01.03 Receiver S/W and Line Card 01.01.03 7. Surgard System III software version 1.6 8. Surgard MLR -2 software version 1.86 9. With DSP4016 and V1.6 Line Card 10. With 124060V206B and 124063 Line Card Rev. B IMPORTANT! It is the installer's responsibility to ensure that the Digital Alarm Communica- tor/Transmitter is compatible with the Central Station Receiver, utilized by the monitoring service, prior to installation. The Compatibility Table provides a list of compatible receivers and associated software versions for the receivers. Changes in the hardware and/or software by the receiver man- ufacturers may affect the receiver compatibility with the FACP DACT. After completing the instal- lation, communication between the DACT and Central Station Receiver must be tested and verified. 148 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Section 6: Local/Remote Site Upload/Download The control panel may be programmed or interrogated off-site via the public switched telephone network. Any personal computer with Windows® XP or greater, with a 2400 baud compatible modem and Fire -Lite Upload/Download software kit P/N PK -CD, may serve as a Service Terminal. This allows download of the entire program or upload of the entire program, history file, walktest data, current status, time and date. The control panel may also communicate to a local PC at the job -site. The PC must be connected to TB3 as shown on page 10, using cable P/N: PRT/PK-CABLE. Important: Remote modification of FACP programming requires that the panel be enabled for remote download (refer to "Remote Download" on page 149). Remote interrogation of panel pro- gramming, history logs, detector status, etc., is possible without enabling the remote download option. CAUTION: To prevent the 'request for upload/download' message(s) from being reported to the Central Station(s), make certain to disable all upload/download reports back to both Central Sta- tions (refer to "Central Station" on page 107). After the downloading process, the fire protection may be inactive for up to 2 minutes while the fire panel re -initializes. After successfully downloading a program, make certain to perform the following steps: 1. Review all programmed entries and compare to intended program data 2. Test all affected panel operations 3. Immediately correct any problems found 6.1 Remote Download NFPA 72 requirements state that a technician must be on-site and at the control panel whenever the PS -Tools programming utility is used to download any information to the FACP. For this reason, a new option has been added to the FACP which allows an individual at the FACP to enter a pass- word and either enable the proprietary mode where downloading will be allowed at any time or access a specific password protected screen where downloading will be allowed regardless of the current proprietary setting. The Remote Download option can be selected from the main menu screen as shown below: 1=READ STATUS MODE 2=PROGRAMMING MODE 3=MANUAL DIAL MODE 4=REMOTE DOWNLOAD Pressing 4 for Remote Download while viewing the main menu will cause the following screen to be displayed: REMOTE DOWNLOAD ENTER PASSWORD The Remote Download password (default 00000) must be entered to access the Remote Download feature. Note that the default password can be changed using the Password Change option (refer to "Password Change" on page 118). Entering the correct password will cause the following screen to be displayed: REMOTE DOWNLOAD 1=PROPRIETARY NO 2=ACCEPT DOWNLOAD MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 149 Local/Remote Site Upload/Download Transferring a Program Pressing I for Proprietary No (factory default setting), while viewing the Remote Download screen, will cause the display to toggle from Proprietary No to Proprietary Yes. Each press of the I key will cause the display to toggle between Proprietary No and Proprietary Yes. Selecting Propri- etary Yes will program the FACP to allow remote programming downloads from the PS -Tools pro- gramming utility at all times without the need to access the Remote Download screen. Pressing 2 for Accept Download will cause the following screen to be displayed: *ALLOWING DOWNLOADS* IF YOU EXIT THIS SCREEN DOWNLOADS WILL BE DISABLED! While this screen is displayed, remote programming downloads are allowed regardless of the Pro- prietary setting. Exiting this screen will disable any further downloads to the FACP. Also, follow- ing 30 minutes of inactivity (including up/downloading), the Accept Download screen will time- out, causing the display to return to the System All Normal screen. 6.2 Transferring a Program The first time that the control panel is contacted, a secret code is loaded in by a Service Terminal. Future upload or download requests cause verification of the secret code by the control panel before processing of data is allowed. If the secret code is not verified, the control panel will termi- nate the request. While the control panel is communicating with the remote Service Terminal, one of the DACT's red phone line active LEDs and the green Kissoff LED will remain on steady. These LEDs do not light for local (direct connect) programming. In order to download to the panel, the following must be true: ✓ The control panel must be in the Normal Mode of operation. Downloading is not allowed if the panel is in any other mode. ✓ There cannot be any active communications ongoing with a Central Station receiver. ✓ All active events must be successfully 'kissed -off by the Central Station(s). The communicator must be in a standby state with no new information waiting to be transmitted to a Central Station. 6.3 Security Features Upload and download with the control panel have been carefully designed to include key security features to ensure proper functionality. Any time a transfer is initiated, the control panel and the Service Terminal will communicate and transfer data before contacting a Central Station. When the data transfers are completed and the control panel disconnects from the Service Terminal, the control panel will call the Central Station and report one of the following conditions: • Upload/download request received • Upload and/or download request successful • Upload/download failed The key features are listed and explained in the following sections. Secret Code Verification A secret code is stored in the control panel by a Service Terminal to prevent unauthorized access. The secret code is created at the Service Terminal by the master user and cannot be viewed or changed by anyone other than a master user. Viewing of the secret code is prohibited at the control panel. Prior to allowing an upload or download of data, the control panel will verify the secret code transmitted by the Service Terminal. 150 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Security Features Local/Remote Site Upload/Download Time-out at Control Panel Upon answering an incoming (modem) call on the primary Central Station phone line, the control panel will listen for a modem connection signal. If this signal is not received within 30 seconds, the control panel will disconnect the call. Upon successful connection (secret code verified), if no communication occurs within five minutes, the panel will disconnect the call. Whether a PC is connected locally (at the job -site) or remotely (modem), 2 minutes of inactivity will result in an upload/download time-out. Upon time-out, transfer activity will be reported to the Central Station (if enabled) and the connection will be terminated. Error Checking As each block of data is received by the control panel, it is checked for accuracy. If an error is detected, the block is retransmitted until correct, up to a maximum of four times. If the Secret Code is not verified and four errors occur, the call is disconnected and the report that the upload/down- load was not successful is called to the Central Station(s). Central Station Data Protection The primary and secondary Central Station phone numbers, communications format, account code, test time and programmable event codes are vital Central Station information. These blocks of data are protected from partial programming due to faulty phone connections, line noise and other errors. This prevents the panel from being confused due to a wrong phone number, account code, test time and most critical formatting errors. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 151 Section 7: Power Supply Calculations 7.1 Overview This section contains instructions and tables for calculating power supply currents in alarm and standby conditions. This is a four -step process, consisting of the following: 1. Calculating the total amount of AC branch circuit current required to operate the system 2. Calculating the power supply load current for non -fire and fire alarm conditions and calculating the secondary (battery) load 3. Calculating the size of batteries required to support the system if an AC power loss occurs 4. Selecting the proper batteries for your system 7.2 Calculating the AC Branch Circuit The control panel requires connection to a separate, dedicated AC branch circuit, which must be labeled FIRE ALARM. This branch circuit must connect to the line side of the main power feed of the protected premises. No other non -fire alarm equipment may be powered from the fire alarm branch circuit. The branch circuit wire must run continuously, without any disconnect devices, from the power source to the control panel. Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the National Electrical Codes as well as local codes. Use 14 AWG (2.00 mm2) wire with 600 volt insulation for this branch circuit. Use Table 7.1, to determine the total amount of current, in AC amperes (A), that must be supplied to the system. Device Type Number of Devices Current Draw (AC amps) Total Current per Device MS-9050UD or MS-9050UDE 1 X 3.0 or = 1.5 [ ] X [ ] = Sum Column for AC Branch Current Required = Table 7.1 AC Branch Circuit Requirements 152 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Calculating the System Current Draw Power Supply Calculations 7.3 Calculating the System Current Draw 7.3.1 Overview The control panel must be able to power all internal and external devices continuously during the non -fire alarm condition. To calculate the non -fire alarm load on the system power supply when primary power is applied, use Calculation Column 1 in Table 7.3 on page 154. The control panel must support a larger load current during a fire alarm condition. To calculate the fire alarm load on the power supply, use Calculation Column 2 in Table 7.3 on page 154. The secondary power source (batteries) must be able to power the system during a primary power loss. To calculate the non -fire alarm load on the secondary power source, use Calculation Column 3 in Table 7.3 on page 154. When calculating current draw and the battery size, note the following: • `Primary' refers to the main power source for the control panel • `Secondary' refers to the control panel's backup batteries • All currents are given in amperes (A). Table 7.2 shows how to convert milliamperes and microamperes to full amperes. To convert... Multiply Example Milliamperes (mA) to amperes (A) mA x 0.001 3 mA x 0.001 = 0.003A Microamperes (pA) to amperes (A) pA x 0.000001 300 pA x 0.000001 = 0.0003 A Table 7.2 Converting to Full Amperes 7.3.2 How to Use Table 7.3 to Calculate System Current Draw Use Table 7.3 on page 154 to calculate current draws as follows: 1. Enter the quantity of devices in all three columns 2. Enter the current draw where required. Refer to the Fire -Lite Device Compatibility Document for compatible devices and their current draw. 3. Calculate the current draws for each in all columns. 4. Sum the total current for each column. 5. Copy the totals from Column 2 and Column 3 to Table 7.4 on page 155. Following are the types of current that can be entered into Table 7.3 on page 154: ✓ Calculation Column 1 - The primary supply current load that the control panel must support during a non -fire alarm condition, with AC power applied ✓ Calculation Column 2 - The primary supply current load that the control panel must support during a fire alarm condition, with AC power applied ✓ Calculation Column 3 - The standby current drawn from the batteries in a non -fire alarm condition during a loss of AC power MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 153 Power Supply Calculations Calculating the System Current Draw Table 7.3 contains columns for calculating current draws. For each column, calculate the current and enter the total (in amperes) in the bottom row. When finished, copy the totals from Calculation Column 2 and Calculation Column 3 to Table 7.4 on page 155. Table 7.3 System Current Draw Calculations 1 If using the Reverse Polarity Alarm output, add 0.005 amps; if using the Reverse Polarity Trouble output, add another 0.005 amps. 2 Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for standby current. 3 Must use compatible listed Power Supervision Relay. 4 Maximum alarm current for each sounder base is 0.035 amps which must be supplied by aux. 24VDC source. 5 Total current draw listed above cannot exceed 2.7 amps. 154 MS -9050 Series Manual - P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Calculation Column 1 Primary, Non -Fire Alarm Current (amps) Calculation Column 2 Primary, Fire Alarm Current (amps) Calculation Column 3 Secondary, Non -Fire Alarm Current (amps) Device Type Qty X [current draw] = Total Qty X [current draw] = Total Qty X [current draw] = Total Main Circuit Board 1 X[0.120]= 0.120 1 X[0.200]= 0.200 1 X[0.120]= 0.120 4XTMF [ ] X[0.005]= [ ] X[0.011]1= [ ] X[0.005]= ANN -SEC Card 1 max X[0.003]= 1 max X[0.003]= 1 max X[0.003]= 4 -wire Detector Heads [ ] X[ ]1= [ ] X[ ]_ [ ] X[ ]_ Power Supervision Relays3 [ ] X[0.025]= [ ] X[0.025]= [ ] X[0.025]= CP350 & CP355 [ ] X[0.00030]= maximum alarm draw 0.400 for all devices [ ] X[0.00030]= SD350 & SD355 [ ] X[0.00030]= [ ] X[0.00030]= SD350T & SD355T [ ] X[0.00030]= [ ] X[0.00030]= AD350 & AD355 [ ] X[0.00030]= [ ] X[0.00030]= H350 & H355 [ ] X[0.00030]= [ ] X[0.00030]= H350R & H355R [ ] X[0.00030]= [ ] X[0.00030]= H355HT [ ] X[0.00030]= [ ] X[0.00030]= D355PL [ ] X[0.00030]= [ ] X[0.00030]= B200SR4 [ ] X[0.0005]= [ ] X[0.001]= B224RB Relay Base [ ] X[0.00050]= [ ] X[0.00050]= B224B1 Isolator Base [ ] X[0.00045]= [ ] X[0.00045]= MMF-300 [ ] X[0.00050]= [ ] X[0.00040]= MMF-300-10 [ ] X[0.00350]= [ ] X[0.00350]= MDF -300 [ ] X[0.00075]= [ ] X[0.00075]= MMF-301 [ ] X[0.000375]= [ ] X[0.000375]= MMF-302 [ ] X[0.00027]= [ ] X[0.00027]= MMF-302-6 [ ] X[0.00200]= [ ] X[0.00200]= BG-12LX [ ] X[0.00023]= [ ] X[0.00023]= CMF -300 [ ] X[0.00039]= [ ] X[0.00039]= CMF -300-6 [ ] X[0.00225]= [ ] X[0.00225] CRF -300 [ ] X[0.00027]= [ ] X[0.00027]= CRF -300-6 [ ] X[0.00145]= [ ] X[0.00145]= 1300 [ ] X[0.00040]= [ ] X[0.00040]= ANN -80(C) [ ] X[0.0370]= [ ] X[0.0400]= [ ] X[0.0150]= ANN -I/O [ ] X[0.0350]= [ ] X[0.2000]= [ ] X[0.0350]= ANN-RLY [ ] X[0.0150]= [ ] X[0.0750]= [ ] X[0.0150]= ANN-(R)LED [ ] X[0.0280]= [ ] X[0.0680]= [ ] X[0.0280]= ANN-S/PG [ ] X[0.0450]= [ ] X[0.0450]= [ ] X[0.0450]= ANN -LC [ ] X[0.150]= [ ] X[0.150]= [ ] X[0.150]= Secondary Non -Alarm = NAC #1 [ ] X[ ]_ NAC #2 [ ] X[ ]= Sum each columns for totals Primary Non -Alarm = Primary Alarm = Table 7.3 System Current Draw Calculations 1 If using the Reverse Polarity Alarm output, add 0.005 amps; if using the Reverse Polarity Trouble output, add another 0.005 amps. 2 Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for standby current. 3 Must use compatible listed Power Supervision Relay. 4 Maximum alarm current for each sounder base is 0.035 amps which must be supplied by aux. 24VDC source. 5 Total current draw listed above cannot exceed 2.7 amps. 154 MS -9050 Series Manual - P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Calculating the Battery Size Power Supply Calculations 7.4 Calculating the Battery Size Use Table 7.4 to calculate the total Standby and Alarm load in ampere hours (AH). This total load determines the battery size (in AH), required to support the control panel under the loss of AC power. Complete Table 7.4 as follows: 1. Enter the totals from Table 7.3 on page 154, Calculation Columns 2 and 3 where shown. 2. Enter the NFPA Standby and Alarm times (refer to `NFPA Requirements' below). 3. Calculate the ampere hours for Standby and Alarm, then sum the Standby and Alarm ampere hours. 4. Multiply the sum by the derating factor of 1.2 to calculate the proper battery size (in AH). 5. Write the ampere hour requirements on the Protected Premises label located inside the cabinet door. Secondary Standby Load (total from Table 7.3 Calculation Column 3) [ ] Required Standby Time (24 hours) X[ ] = AH Primary Alarm Load (total from Table 7.3 Calculation Column 2) [ ] Required Alarm Time (for 5 min., enter 0.084, for 10 min., enter 0.168) X[ ] = AH Sum of Standby and Alarm Ampere Hours = AH Multiply by the Derating Factor X 1.2 Battery Size, Total Ampere Hours Required = AH Table 7.4 Total Secondary Power Requirements at 24 VDC 7.4.1 NFPA Battery Requirements NFPA 72 Local and Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by 5 minutes in alarm. NFPA 72 Central, Auxiliary and Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems require 60 hours of standby followed by 5 minutes in alarm. Batteries installed in a system powered by a generator need to provide at least 4 hours of standby power. 7.4.2 Selecting and Locating Batteries Select batteries that meet or exceed the total ampere hours calculated in Table 7.4. The control panel can charge batteries in the 7 AH to 18 AH range. The control panel cabinet is capable of housing batteries up to 18 AH. Batteries larger than 18 AH require a UL listed external battery charger and cabinet such as the BB -26, BB -55F, or other UL -listed external battery cabinet. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 155 Appendix A: Software Zones A.1 Correlations Setup and configuration of an addressable system is different than a conventional system. In a con- ventional system, assignment of input devices (smoke detectors, pull stations, heat detectors, etc.) to zones is accomplished through wiring. The wiring is direct from clearly marked panel terminals to any device assigned to a particular zone. Connection of output devices (horns, bells, strobes, etc.) in a conventional system is accomplished by direct wiring of the output devices to Notification Appliance Circuit terminals. In an addressable system, a minimum of a single pair of wires (SLC communication loop) is used to connect all addressable input and output devices. Communications between the FACP (Fire Alarm Control Panel) and all addressable devices takes place over the wire pair which originates from the FACP. Software programming is used to configure the system as opposed to direct wiring. Zone assignments are created via software means, hence the term software zones. Setup of an MS-9050UD software zone is accomplished by panel programming. Each addressable device can be assigned to a maximum of five software zones. Each software zone, however, may have from 1 to 50 addressable input and output devices assigned to it. Monitor modules, control modules and detectors comprise a group of 50 addresses, each device having a unique address from 1 to 50. Be careful not to duplicate addresses between devices. Refer to the following page for an example of zoning. In the example on the following page: • Zone 01 has the following addressable devices assigned to it: / SD355 smoke detectors with addresses 01 and 02 / MMF-300 monitor module with address 03 / MMF-302 monitor module with address 04 and 05 ✓ CMF -300 control modules with addresses 06, 07, 10, 11, and 13 • Zone 02 has the following addressable devices assigned to it: ✓ MMF-302 monitor module with addresses 04 and 05 ✓ CP355 smoke detectors with addresses 15 and 16 ✓ CMF -300 control modules with addresses 20, 11, and 21 • Zone 03 has the following addressable devices assigned to it: / SD355 smoke detectors with addresses 22, 24, and 25 ✓ MMF-302 control module with address 30 / CMF -300 control modules with addresses 11, 31, and 32 The example points out some of the key assignment features of the MS-9050UD. Addresses of detectors, monitor modules and control modules are not duplicated. The control module with address 11 is assigned to three software zones (providing floor above and floor below). Be careful to properly plan the installation prior to installing any devices. 156 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Correlations Software Zones Correlation of Input and Output Zones Input Devices Zones Output Devices The zone correlations which are shown graphically above are also presented in Table A.1 on page 158. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 157 Software Zones Correlations ADDRESSABLE DEVICE ZONE ASSIGNMENT Address Device Type Zone Number ADJ/NOUN 01 SD355 1 FIRST HALL 02 SD355 1 ELEV. LOBBY 03 MMF-300 1 04 MMF-302 1, 2 05 MMF-300 1, 2 06 CMF -300 1 07 CMF -300 1 08 09 10 CMF -300 1 11 CMF -300 1, 2, 3 12 13 CMF -300 1 14 15 CP355 2 2ND FLOOR 16 CP355 2 ROOM 210 17 18 19 20 CMF -300 2 21 CMF -300 2 22 SD355 3 3RD FLOOR 23 24 SD355 3 MEZZANINE 25 SD355 3 MECH. ROOM 26 27 28 29 30 MMF-302 3 31 CMF -300 3 32 CMF -300 3 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Table A.1 Detector Programming Sheet Example 158 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Correlations Software Zones ADDRESSABLE DEVICE ZONE ASSIGNMENTS Address Device Type Zone Number ADJ/NOUN 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Table A.2 Blank Programming Sheet MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 159 Software Zones Correlations ADDRESSABLE DEVICE ZONE ASSIGNMENTS Address Device Type Zone Number ADJ/NOUN 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Table A.3 Blank Programming Sheet 160 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Appendix B: Default Programming The following table provides a list of the programming options and their factory default settings. Program Option Factory Default Program Option Factory Default Master Password 00000 NAC 1 & 2 Enable Enabled Maintenance Password 11111 NAC 1 & 2 Silenceable Yes Detector Programming Not Installed NAC 1 & 2 Type Bell Detector Type Smoke -Photo NAC 1 & 2 Sync Type System Sensor Detector Verification Off NAC 1 & 2 Autosilence 0 Detector Walktest Yes NAC 1 & 2 Coding Steady Detector PAS No NAC 1 & 2 Zones Zone 000 only Detector Presignal No NAC 1 & 2 Silence Inhibit No Detector Zone Assign. 000 only Relay 1 Alarm Detector Adj/Noun none Relay 2 Trouble (fixed) Module Programming Not Installed Relay 3 Supervisory Module Type Monitor Trouble Call Limit 0 Module Walktest Yes ANN -BUS Enabled No (not used) Onboard DACT Enabled No Module Presignal No Ring Count 0 Module Zone Assign. 000 only Central Station Reporting Disabled Module Adj/Noun none DACT Backup Reporting First Available Zone 0 Enable Enabled DACT Report Style By Point Zone 1 Enable Enabled Central Station 1 & 2 Account Code 0000 Zone 2 Enable Enabled Central Station 1 & 2 Test Time 0000 Zone 3 Enable through Zone 19 Enable Enabled Central Station 1 & 2 Test Time Interval 24 Hour Central Station 1 & 2 Phone Number Enabled Central Station 1 & 2 Format Ademco Contact ID Zone 0 Type through Zone 19 Type Monitor Monitor Line 1 Touchtone/Rotary Touchtone Line 2 Touchtone/Rotary Touchtone Supervise Phone Line 2 Yes Special Purpose Zones 17, 18, 19 No ANN -BUS Enabled No Loop Style Style 4 ANN-S/PG Port Parallel Loop Protocol CLIP (fixed) ANN-S/PG Baud 9600 Trouble Reminder Off ANN-S/PG Data Bits 7 Banner ANN-S/PG Parity Even Time Format 12 Hr ANN-S/PG Stop Bits 1 Hours Setting 12 ANN-S/PG Offline Timer 60 Minutes Setting 00 ANN-S/PG Printer Supervision No AM -PM Setting AM ANN -80 Piezo Enabled Yes Month Setting 01 ANN -80 Lock Enabled Yes Day Setting 01 ANN -80 Acknowledge Button Enabled Yes Year Setting 06 ANN -80 Silence Button Enabled Yes Canadian Option Off ANN -80 Reset Button Enabled Yes AC Loss Delay 2 Hours ANN -80 Drill Button Enabled Yes Daylight Savings Enabled ANN -I/O Point/Zone Zone MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 161 Default Programming Month Start Daylight Savings March ANN -I/0 Range 00-19 Week Start Daylight Savings Week 2 ANN -I/0 Active LEDs Only Month End Daylight Savings November ANN-RLY Relay 1 Zone 1 Zone 10 Week End Daylight Week 1 through Verification OFF ANN-RLY Relay 10 Waterflow Silenceable No ANN -LED Point/Zone Zone PAS Timer 0 ANN -LED Alarms/ATS (Alarm, Trbl, Supv) ATS Presignal Timer 0 ANN -LED Range 0 - 9 Waterflow Retard Timer 0 162 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Appendix C: NFPA Standard -Specific Requirements The MS-9050UD has been designed for use in commercial, industrial and institutional applications and meets the requirements for service under the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards outlined in this Appendix. The minimum system components required for compliance with the appropriate NFPA standard are listed below: MS-9050UD Control Panel Contains the main control board, cabinet (backbox and door), main power supply transformer and power supply. Batteries Refer to "Power Supply Calculations" on page 152, for Standby Power Requirements. Initiating Devices Connected to one of the control panel's Initiating Device Circuits Notification Appliances Connected to the control panel's Notification Appliance Circuits via a control module. The additional equipment listed below is needed for compliance with the NFPA 72 standards: NFPA 72 NATIONAL FIRE ALARM STANDARDS FOR: NFPA 72 Central Station Service (Protected Premises Unit) or Remote Station Service Onboard Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter for connection to a compatible listed Central Station DACR or Protected Premises Receiving Unit. This unit must be installed as outlined in "Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter" on page 17. OR 4XTMF Transmitter Module for connection to the Fire -Lite RS82 Remote Station Receiver. See Figure C.2, "Remote Station Connection Using 4XTMF Module," on page 165, for installation instructions for this unit. NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System 4XTMF Transmitter Module for connection to a compatible listed Local Energy Municipal Box. This unit must be installed as illustrated in the section titled "4XTMF Transmitter Module Installa- tion" on page 33 and as outlined in Figure C.1, "Municipal Box Connected to 4XTMF Transmitter Module," on page 164. NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm System MS-9050UD Alarm, Trouble and Supervisory contacts connected to Transmitter(s). See Figure C.3, "Proprietary Protective Signaling System," on page 166, for installation instructions for this unit. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 163 NFPA Standard -Specific Requirements NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System All connections are power -limited and supervised. This application is not suitable for separate transmission of sprinkler supervisory or trouble conditions. Notes: 1. 3 ohms maximum loop resistance allowed for wiring from control panel to Municipal Box. 2. Cut JP28 on the MS-9050UD main circuit board to supervise placement of 4XTMF module and circuit. 3. Remove JP2 on the MS-9050UD main circuit board to enable FACP Supervisory relay. 4. Refer to "4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation" on page 33 for detailed information. Polarities shown in alarm condition + Municipal Box Circuit Nonpower -limited Gamewell Model M34-56 Local Energy Municipal Box J 11 11 11 11 11 11 1 0000000 100 ip C=0111.1.4) f p.=40.-•=. It LW ILLUMMILLI 4XTMF Figure C.1 Municipal Box Connected to 4XTMF Transmitter Module NFPA 72 Remote Station Protective Signaling System Notes: 164 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 NFPA Standard -Specific Requirements NG! SOW IS 01 r01.1 ittr4I°TATION7 mow -fl V® 1. Cut Jumper JP28 on the MS-9050UD main circuit board to supervise placement of the 4XTMF module. 2. Refer to "4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation" on page 33 for detailed information. T.C. CYT DRESSER Mat It AMPS ONIIIOC CARO Df C) wear uDE 2-14111411.'""— I IDDiI aicu :E I' pD X1 1 nteu T fr.° ISI �- L —I—Agit. ® 1NIYT LOITIONTE SOME CARO 1 lMil ODCUIT SIDE 1 - I ®swwTEs AITACLuILV T,I �®1 " _ T'fLIL'0:7741O LCNE 0IS) CIRCUIT 11. ®1 J i$ j �r , ILtmrEty CMD IDD[1 CIRCUIT ®DNI[ —I ®nVit. IE_ . ?.glr cnc w arei NR CONS JR RS82 Remote Station Receiver UL listed. Refer to Instruction Manual for Remote Station Receiver Model RS82. ffI TNWIOY SIER RECURRENCES TYPES ELMNER EI ISSOC POWS% SONIC ;39:21 :en! SONIC Ii ' IED! OU EQUIVALENT YIYUY W D fTTER% f.rl SIZE f 0 Y i Cutting TBL Jumper allows the TBi ' reverse polarity circuit to open &411110 DE with a s Y stem trouble condition A U U #' if no alarm condition exists. -� J2�n■y 4 0 Polarity Shown is - Normal Standby Power -limited (Dummy load with a 4.7KS2, % watt resistor when no connection is made.) 4XTMF Transmitter Module Figure C.2 Remote Station Connection Using 4XTMF Module MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 165 NFPA Standard -Specific Requirements NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems MS-9050UD Addressable Fire Control Panel MS-9050UD Main Board Form -C Alarm contact 1 programmed to activate on General Alarm. Cover Tamper ij Form -C Trouble contact which 1 will automatically activate on any Trouble condition. Form -C relay contact programmed to activate on Supervisory condition. C T � i Notes: 1. Connection between the MS-9050UD and the transmitter are supervised by the transmitter. 2. This MS-9050UD/Transmitter arrangement can be employed for NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling System. 3. Potter Electric Model EFT -C has not been tested for UL 864 9th Edition and is for use in retrofit applications only. 12 VAC Parer Input See Note 1 — Ij 3 7 sErm"9 Return Feed 11 Shunt — ®12 Central Office Line - Limited E nergy - 15001C O .1 amps man McCulloh Circuit increase Motor (krio. Speed Control girl 1100 ELM ITE Potter Electric Signal Company Transmitter Model EFT -C used to transmit Rlatm and Trouble Signals .j 12 IOC — 7 Power Input See Note 1 —9,3 —I/9 Return — '9,10 Feed — ®11 Shunt — 012 C Office — Line - Limited Energy - 15000C 0.1 amps man McCulleh Circuit increase Motor r o Speed f1 Control Potter Electric Signal Company Iran Model EFT -C used to transmit Alarm and Trouble Signals Figure C.3 Proprietary Protective Signaling System 166 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Central Station/Remote Station Transmitter: Connection to FACP Dry Contacts NFPA Standard -Specific Requirements C.1 Central Station/Remote Station Transmitter: Connection to FACP Dry Contacts The dry contacts of the FACP programmable relays can be used to trip a UL -864 Listed Central Station/Remote Station Transmitter. The FACP contacts must be supervised by the Central Sta- tion/Remote Station Transmitter module using End -of -Line Resistors (ELRs) with a value deter- mined by the Transmitter manufacturer. Power is also provided by the Central Station/Remote Station Transmitter manufacturer. Refer to the Central Station/Remote Station Transmitter manu- facturer's manual for details. Typical Central Station/Remote Station Transmitter Module Typical Input Zone Triggers 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TB5 Q a 0 0 I- CTS RELAY2 ?IBLEC NC 0 RE 3SUPVCONTAJ NC C. TB6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 *Note: The Trouble Relay is a fail- safe relay. With power applied to the FACP and no troubles in the panel, the wiring should be connected to the NO and C contacts as indicated in the illustration. SBUS SBUS RS-485RS-232 PC CONNECTOR GND PWR SBUSA'BUS RCV XMT DTR GND TB7 TB3 MS-905OUDMain Circuit Board Figure C.4 FACP Dry Contacts Connection to Central Station/Remote Station Transmitter ms905OUDdryxmit.wmf MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 167 NFPA Standard -Specific Requirements MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip - Silenceable C.2 MBT-1 Municipal Box Trip - Silenceable The following figure illustrates the connection of the MBT-1 (Municipal Box Trip) between the FACP and a Local Energy Municipal Box. The use of an addressable control module programmed for General Alarm and Silenceable allows silencing of the Municipal Box without resetting the panel or box. Alarm polarity shown! Connect wires to two red terminals on box. Note: 1052 maximum loop resistance due to wiring from power supply to Municipal Box. Gamewell Model M34-56 Local Energy Municipal Box (All contacts shown in energized position. white wire The addressable Control Module must be programmed as Silenceable and General Alarm. n n T11 (9 T10 T1 TB T2 TB T3 ^ T4 re :\�? T5 U U CMF -300 Control Module B 0 NACI NAC2 B. A. A- B- B. A. A- B TB1 24 VDC, Nonresettable 11 SLC Bi At -B [ Shield - To next device + on SLC Loop Braided-shield/Drain Wire MBT-1 brown wire I PY-Y EOLR-1 Power - Supervision Relay red SHIELD A- A BAIMAB 11301 REN21B7AFCBON BAIBMCBBCD NO NC C NC NO C NON C TB2 165 SLC Loop TNT MS-9050UD TBS Figure C.5 MBT-1 Silenceable black 9050ud mbt-1.wmf 168 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Appendix D: FACP with Keltron The following figure illustrates the connections between the FACP and Keltron Receiver/Transmit- ter. CAUTION: POSSIBLE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE FOR REASONS OF WIRING DIAGRAM CLARITY, TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS OF KELTRON MODULES ARE NOT SHOWN IN ACTUAL ORDER. FOLLOW KELTRON MANUAL AND MODULE MARKINGS FOR EXACT TERMINAL LOCATIONS TO PREVENT SEVERE MODULE DAMAGE! IMPORTANT! All connections between the FACP and Keltron modules must be made within 20 feet and enclosed within conduit or equivalently protected against mechanical injury. Keltron 95M3158 TTM -RPS 1. Terminals 7 and 8: Remote station alarm/trouble inputs. 2. Terminals 9 and 10: Sprinkler supervisory input. 07 0s 09 010 1 ® TIP RING KELTRON 20 EARTH 95M3158 30 rfi TTM -RPS 40 - UL -Listed 50 60 R1 3.3K 0.5w R2 3.3K 0.5w RP -3 3K TIP; ® 1 RING; ® 2 EARTH; KELTRON* +1 0 3 95M3083 -0 4 TRM-RP 0 5 UL -Listed 06 TO 80 s0 100 • To Central / • Remote • Station NO NC C ALARM NC NO C TRBL i Sprinkler I Supervisory Signal NO NC C suPv Fire Alarm Control Panel (terminal blocks are not shown in their actual positions in order to clarify wiring connections) Alarm/Trouble Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 4XTMF Module Note: Cut TBL jumper on 4XTMF module to send alarm/trouble signal from the same pair or terminals. aw 1.0111116T - To * Power Supply *Note: For more information, refer to Keltron manual. 24V Non-Resettable Power Figure D.1 FACP With Keltron Wiring Note: 24V Non-resettable power from an external power source MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 169 Appendix E: Wire Requirements T -tapping of the SLC loop wiring is allowed for 2 -wire (Style 4) configurations. The total resis- tance of any branch cannot exceed 40 ohms. The total wire length of all branches cannot exceed 10,000 feet (3,000 m). Connecting external system accessories to the MS-9050UD main circuits must be carefully consid- ered to ensure proper operation. It is important to use the correct type of wire, wire gauge and wire run length for each MS-9050UD circuit. Reference the charts below to specify wire requirements and limitations for each MS-9050UD circuit. SLC Loop Using Twisted, Unshielded Wire While shielded wire is not required, it is recommended that all SLC wiring be twisted -pair to mini- mize the effects of electrical interference. Use the following table to determine the specific wiring requirements for the SLC when various wire is used. NOTE: If the SLC loop is to be run in conduit with Notification Appliance Circuits, the risk of encountering problems can be greatly reduced by exclusively employing electronic sounders (such as MA/SS-24D) instead of more electronically noisy notification appliances such as electromechanical bells or horns CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS WIRE REQUIREMENTS Circuit Type Circuit Function Wire Type and Limitations Recommended Max. Distance Feet (meters) Wire Gauge and Compatible Brands SLC loop (power -limited) Connects to Addressable Devices Twisted, shielded pair 40 ohms maximum per length of Style 6 and 7 loops. 40 ohms per branch maximum for Style 4 loops 10,000 (3,000 m) 8,000 (2,400 m) 4,875 (1,450 m) 3,225 (980 m) 12 AWG (3.25 mm2): Genesis 4410, Signal 98230, Belden 9583, WPW999 14 AWG (2.00 mm2):Genesis 4408 & 4608 Signal 98430, Belden 9581, WPW995 16 AWG (1.30 mm2): Genesis 4406 & 4606 Signal 98630, Belden 9575, WPW991 Direct Burial Cgble Isotec NP713110VNQ-S 18 AWG (0.75 mml): Genesis 4402 & 4602 Signal 98300, Belden 9574, WPW975 Direct Burial Cable Isotec NP714110VNQ-S Twisted, unshielded pair 40 ohms maximum per length of Style 6 and 7 loops. 40 ohms per branch maximum for Style 4 loops 10,000 (3,000 m) 8,000 (2,400 m) 4,875 (1,450 m) 3,225 (980 m) 12 AWG (3.25 mm2): Belden 5020UL & 6020UL, Genesis WG -4315 & WG -4515 14 AWG (2.00 mm2):Belden 5120UL & 6120UL, Genesis WG -4313 & WG -4513 16 AWG (1.30 mm2): Belden 5220UL & 6220UL, Genesis WG -4311 & WG -4511 18 AWG (0.75 mm2): Belden 5320UL & 6320UL, Genesis WG -4306 & WG -4506 Untwisted, unshielded pair 1 3,000 (900 m) 12-18 AWG (3.25 - 0.75 mm2) using listed wire ANN -BUS (EIA -485) (power -limited) Connects to annunciator modules Twisted pair with a characteristic impedance of 120 ohms or less 6,000 (1,800 m) refer to Table 2.1, "Wiring Distances," on page 37. EIA -232 (power -limited) connects to PC computer Twisted, shielded pair 50 (15 m) 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) minimum MMF-300 and MMF-301 (power -limited) Initiating Device Circuit: Contact Closure Maximum loop wire resistance is 1500 ohms 2,500 (760 m) 12-18 AWG (3.25 - 0.75 mm2) MMF-302 (power -limited) Initiating Device Circuit: Two -wire Modules No more than a 2.4 volt drop allowed at end of circuit. Maximum loop wire resistance is 25 ohms 2,500 (760 m) 12-18 AWG (3.25 - 0.75 mm2) CMF -300 (power -limited) Notification Appliance Circuit In alarm, no more than a 1.2 volt drop allowed at end of circuit Distance limitation set by 1.2 volt maximum line drop 12-18 AWG (3.25 - 0.75 mm2) Table E.1 FACP Wire Specifications 1 When using untwisted, unshielded wire, full conduit is recommended for optimum EMI/RFI protection. 170 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 NAC Wiring Wire Requirements E.1 NAC Wiring The following table lists NAC wiring requirements for the FACP. NAC Load (Amps) Max. allowable total loop resistance (ohms) CLASS -B Max. allowable wire pair length (feet) CLASS -A Max. allowable wire pair length (feet) AWG 12 solid AWG 14 solid AWG 16 solid AWG 18 solid AWG 12 solid AWG 14 solid AWG 16 solid AWG 18 solid 0.25 13.20 3420 2150 1350 849 1710 1075 675 425 0.5 6.60 1710 1075 675 425 855 537 337 212 0.75 4.40 1140 717 450 283 570 358 225 142 1 3.30 855 537 337 212 427 269 169 106 1.25 2.64 684 430 270 170 342 215 135 85 1.5 2.20 570 358 225 142 285 179 112 71 1.75 1.89 489 307 193 121 244 154 96 61 2 1.65 427 269 169 106 214 134 84 53 2.25 1.47 380 239 150 94 190 119 75 47 2.5 1.32 342 215 135 85 171 107 67 42 Table E.2 NAC Wiring Requirements for FACP Notes: 1. Calculations are based on Direct -Current Resistance data for uncoated copper wire, per National Electrical Code (2005 Edition) Table 8, Conductor Properties. 2. These distances reflect the worst case scenario and are based on the current draw of the highest candela strobes at the low end of the supported NAC voltage with the entire load at the end of the circuit. Further distances can be achieved by performing a point-to-point voltage calculation that more accurately reflects the specific devices used and how they are dispersed on the circuit. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 171 Appendix F: HVAC Control The FACP can be programmed to shut down a building's HVAC fans in the event of a fire. The fans cannot be restarted until the fire alarm condition has been cleared and the FACP has been reset to a normal (non -alarm) condition. IMPORTANT! This HVAC feature is not to be used for smoke control. It is only designed to shut down fans during a fire alarm condition. F.1 Control Module Operation F.1.1 HVAC SHUTDN The HVAC SHUTDN type code can be assigned to any addressable control relay module for the purpose of shutting down HVAC fans during a fire alarm condition. Devices connected to a mod- ule with this type code are unsupervised. To program this feature in the FACP: • Program the HVAC SHUTDN type code to the control relay module which will be used to shut down the fans (refer to Type under the section titled"Edit Module Screen for Control Modules" on page 73). • Program the control relay module to a software zone and program alarm input devices which, when activated are to cause fan shutdown, to the same software zone (refer to Zone Assignment under the section titled"Edit Module Screen for Control Modules" on page 73). • Monitor the control relay module using an addressable monitor module programmed for Trouble Monitor. The monitor module label should be programmed to indicate HVAC SHUTDOWN. When the control relay module is active (HVAC SHUTDN), the monitor module will indicate a trouble condition at the FACP and the display should indicate that the HVAC is shut down. Once activated, the HVAC SHUTDN control module remains activated, even if the FACP is silenced or reset. After the alarm condition on the FACP has been cleared and the panel reset, the HVAC SHUTDN control relay module remains activated and the fans remain off. The monitor module programmed for Trouble Monitor which is being used to supervise the control relay mod- ule, will indicate a trouble condition at the control panel and the LCD should display that the HVAC is shut down. The fans can only be restarted when the HVAC SHUTDN control relay mod- ule is deactivated by the HVAC RESTART module. F.2 Monitor Module Operation F.2.1 HVAC RESTART The HVAC RESTART type code can be assigned to any addressable monitor module for the pur- pose of resetting (deactivating) the HVAC SHUTDN control relay module and turning the fans back on. The HVAC RESTART monitor module acts globally throughout the FACP system and therefore is not programmed to a particular software zone. To program this feature in the FACP: • Program the HVAC RESTART type code to the monitor module which will be used to deactivate the HVAC SHUTDN control relay module and restart the fans (refer to Type Monitor under the section titled "Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module" on page 67). The HVAC RESTART monitor module does not latch when activated. Pressing a switch connected to the monitor module will deactivate the HVAC SHUTDN control relay module only if there are no alarm conditions. The HVAC SHUTDN control relay module can be deactivated if trouble con- ditions exist on the FACP. 172 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Monitor Module Operation HVAC Control F.2.2 HVAC OVRRIDE The HVAC OVRRIDE type code can be assigned to any addressable monitor module for the pur- pose of overriding or preventing the HVAC SHUTDN control relay modules from activating. The HVAC OVRRIDE monitor module acts globally throughout the FACP system and therefore is not programmed to a particular software zone. To program this feature in the FACP: • Program the HVAC OVRRIDE type code to the monitor module which will be used to override the HVAC SHUTDN control relay module and prevent the fans from turning off (refer to Type Monitor under the section titled "Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module" on page 67). The HVAC OVRRIDE monitor module does not latch when activated. Activating a switch con- nected to the monitor module will override all HVAC SHUTDN control relay modules in the sys- tem, preventing the HVAC SHUTDN modules from activating and causing the FACP LCD to display an active HVAC OVRRIDE module and turn on the Supervisory LED. Releasing the switch will allow the HVAC SHUTDN control relay modules to activate with subsequent alarms, turning off the fans. As an example, pressing the HVAC OVRRIDE switch with no alarms in the system will prevent the fans from being turned off when an alarm does occur. As long as the switch is activated, the fans will not shutdown for any alarms. If the system is still in alarm when the switch is released, the fans will not shutdown unless another alarm occurs after the switch is released. Important! If an alarm exists in the system and HVAC Shutdown has already occurred, HVAC OVRRIDE will have no effect on the HVAC SHUTDN control relay modules. HVAC OVRRIDE will prevent HVAC Shutdown from occurring only if it is initiated prior to an alarm condition. — NOTE: Activation of the HVAC OVRRIDE module causes a supervisory event that will be communicated to the Central Station if enabled. MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 173 Appendix G: Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions This appendix describes the various Event Codes and their messages which are available for the Ademco Contact ID Format. G.1 Transmission Format Between DACT and Receiver The transmission string for the Ademco Contact ID Format is as follows: SSSS 18 QXYZ GG CCC where SSSS 18 Q XYZ GG CCC Notes: = Four digit Subscriber ID Account Code = Identifies transmission as Contact ID to the receiver at the Central Station = Event Qualifier where 1 = New Event and 3 = New Restore = Event code = Group number = Zone/Point number 1. 18, which is used in the reporting structure to identify the transmission as Contact ID, is not printed out in the alarm and trouble report. 2. GG Group Number is fixed at '00' except for multi -building systems using the Lite -Connect (ANN -LC) fiber card where GG indicates the node number. 3. CCC for Zone or Point Number: / Zone Number is transmitted as '00' for zone 0 up to '19' for zone 19 ✓ Point Number is transmitted as '01' for point/address 1 up to '50' for point/address 50 G.2 Ademco Contact ID Typical Printout A typical printout from a Central Station receiver (such as the Ademco 685) of alarm and trouble reports in the Ademco Contact ID Reporting Structure follows: Time Date Rcvr/Line ID SSSS OXYZ GG CCCC 11:28 03/25 11 7777 E110 00 C001 - general fire alarm on zone one 11:28 03/25 11 7777 El 11 00 C002 - smoke detector alarm on zone two 11:28 03/25 11 7777 E380 00 C003 - fault on zone three 11:28 03/25 11 7777 E570 00 C009 - Zone nine disabled 11:28 03/25 11 7777 R110 00 C001 - Zone one alarm restored 11:28 03/25 11 7777 RI11 00 C002 - smoke detector zone two restored 11:28 03/25 11 7777 R380 00 C003 - zone three fault restored 11:28 03/25 11 7777 R570 00 C009 - zone nine reenabled 11:28 03/25 11 7777 E158 00 C006 - high temperature, zone six 11:28 03/25 11 7777 E151 00 C007 - gas detected, zone seven Notes: 1. 11 is an example of a Receiver/Line Card, showing which receiver and line card the message was transmitted to. 2. Q, which is the Event Qualifier for the reporting structure, is printed out in the report as an E for New Event or R for New Restore. 174 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Ademco Contact ID Typical Printout Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions EVENT CODE CLASSIFICATIONS 100 ALARMS Medical Fire Panic Burglary General 24 Hour 200 SUPERVISORY Fire EVENT Medical Alarms - 100 100 Medical 101 Pendant Transmitter 102 Fail to report in Fire Alarms - 110 110 Fire Alarm 111 Smoke 112 Combustion 113 Waterflow 114 Heat 115 Pull Station 116 Duct 117 Flame 118 Near Alarm Panic Alarms - 120 120 Panic Alarm 121 Duress 122 Silent 123 Audible Burglar Alarms - 130 130 Burglary 131 Perimeter 132 Interior 133 24 -Hour 134 Entry/Exit 135 Day/Night 136 Outdoor 137 Tamper 138 Near Alarm General Alarms - 140 140 General Alarm 141 Polling loop open 300 TROUBLES 400 OPEN/CLOSE REMOTE ACCESS 500 DISABLES/ BYPASSES System Open/Close System Sounder/Relay Remote Access Sounder/Relay System Peripheral Access Control System Peripheral Communication Communication Protective Loop Sensor MESSAGE EMERG - Personal Emergency - # EMERG - Personal Emergency - # EMERG - Fail to Check-in - # FIRE - Fire Alarm - # FIRE - Smoke Detector - # FIRE - Combustion - # FIRE - Waterfiow - # FIRE - Heat Sensor - # FIRE - Pull Station - # FIRE - Duct Sensor - # FIRE - Flame Sensor - # FIRE - Near Alarm - # PANIC - Panic - # PANIC - Duress - # PANIC - Silent Panic - # PANIC - Audible Panic - # BURG - Burglary - # BURG - Perimeter - # BURG - Interior - # BURG - 24 -Hour BURG - Entry/Exit - # BURG - Day/Night - # BURG - Outdoor - # BURG - Tamper - # BURG - Near Alarm - # ALARM - General Alarm - # ALARM - Polling Loop Open - # 600 TEST/MISC. Test MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 175 Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions Ademco Contact ID Typical Printout EVENT 142 Polling loop short 143 Expansion module failure 144 Sensor tamper 145 Expansion module tamper 24 -Hour Non -Burglary - 150 and 160 150 24 -Hour Non -Burg 151 Gas detected 152 Refrigeration 153 Loss of heat 154 Water leakage 155 Foil break 156 Day trouble 157 Low bottled gas level 158 High Temp 159 Low Temp 161 Loss of air flow Fire Supervisory - 200 and 210 200 Fire supervisory 201 Low water pressure 202 Low CO2 203 Gate valve sensor 204 Low water level 205 Pump activated 206 Pump failure System Troubles - 300 and 310 300 System trouble 301 AC loss 302 Low system battery 303 RAM checksum bad 304 ROM checksum bad 305 System reset 306 Panel program changed 307 Self -test failure 308 System shutdown 309 Battery test failure 310 Ground fault 311 No battery Sounder/Relay Troubles - 320 320 Sounder/Relay 321 Bell 1 322 Bell 2 323 Alarm relay 324 Trouble relay 325 Reversing relay 326 Bell 3 327 Bell 4 176 MESSAGE ALARM - Polling Loop Short - # ALARM - Exp. Module Fail - # ALARM - Sensor Tamper - # ALARM - Exp. Module Tamper - # ALARM - 24 -Hr. Non -Burg - # ALARM - Gas Detected - # ALARM - Refrigeration - # ALARM - Heating System - # ALARM - Water Leakage - # ALARM - Foil Break - # ALARM - Day Zone - # ALARM - Low Gas Level - # ALARM - High Temperature - # ALARM - Low Temperature - # ALARM - Air Flow - # SUPER. - Fire Supervisory - # SUPER. - Low Water Pressure - # SUPER. - Low CO2 SUPER. - Gate Valve - # SUPER. - Low Water Level - # SUPER. - Pump Activation - # SUPER. - Pump Failure - # TROUBLE - System Trouble TROUBLE - AC Power TROUBLE - System Low Battery TROUBLE - RAM Checksum (restore not applicable) TROUBLE - ROM Checksum (restore not applicable) TROUBLE - System Reset (restore not applicable) TROUBLE - Prog. Change (restore not applicable) TROUBLE - Self Test Failure TROUBLE - System Shutdown TROUBLE - Battery Test Failure TROUBLE - Ground Fault - # TROUBLE - No Battery TROUBLE - Sounder/Relay - # TROUBLE - Bell/Siren #1 TROUBLE - Bell/Siren #2 TROUBLE - Alarm Relay TROUBLE - Trouble Relay TROUBLE - Reversing Relay TROUBLE - Bell/Siren #3 TROUBLE - Bell/Siren #4 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Ademco Contact ID Typical Printout Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions EVENT MESSAGE System Peripheral Troubles - 330 and 340 330 System peripheral 331 Polling loop open 332 Polling loop short 333 Expansion module failure 334 Repeater Failure 335 Local printer paper out 336 Local printer failure Communication Troubles - 350 and 360 350 Communication 351 Telco 1 fault 352 Telco 2 fault 353 Long range radio transmitter fault 354 Fail to communicate 355 Loss of radio supervision 356 Loss of central polling Protection Loop Troubles - 370 370 Protection loop 371 Protection loop open 372 Protection loop short 373 Fire trouble Sensor Troubles - 380 380 Sensor trouble 381 Loss of supervision - RF 382 Loss of supervision - RPM 383 Sensor tamper 384 RF transmitter low battery Open/Close - 400 400 Open/Close 401 Open/Close by user 402 Group Open/Close 403 Automatic Open/Close 404 Late Open/Close 405 Deferred Open/Close 406 Cancel 407 Remote arm/disarm 408 Quick arm 409 Keyswitch Open/Close Remote Access - 410 411 Callback request made 412 Success - download/access 413 Unsuccessful access 414 System shutdown 415 Dialer shutdown 416 Success - upload/access TROUBLE - Sys. Peripheral - # TROUBLE - Polling Loop Open TROUBLE - Polling Loop Short TROUBLE - Expansion Module Failure - # TROUBLE - Repeater Failure - # TROUBLE - Printer Paper Out TROUBLE - Local Printer TROUBLE - Communication Trouble TROUBLE - Phone Line #1 TROUBLE - Phone Line #2 TROUBLE - Radio Transmitter TROUBLE - Fail to Communicate TROUBLE - Radio Supervision TROUBLE - Central Radio Polling TROUBLE - Protection Loop - # TROUBLE - Protection Loop Open - # TROUBLE - Protection Loop Short - # TROUBLE - Fire Loop - # TROUBLE - Sensor Trouble - # TROUBLE - RF Sensor Supervision - # TROUBLE - RPM Sensor Supervision - # TROUBLE - Sensor Tamper - # TROUBLE - RF Sensor Batt. - # OPENING OPENING - User # OPENING - Group User # OPENING - Automatic OPENING - Late Opening not used OPENING - Cancel OPENING - Remote Opening not applicable OPENING - Keyswitch CLOSING CLOSING - User # CLOSING - Group User # CLOSING - Automatic CLOSING - Late Closing not used CLOSING - Cancel CLOSING - Remote CLOSING - Quick Arm CLOSING - Keyswitch REMOTE - Callback Requested (restore not applicable) REMOTE - Successful Access (restore not applicable) REMOTE - Unsuccessful Access (restore not applicable) REMOTE - System Shutdown REMOTE - Dialer Shutdown REMOTE - Successful Access (restore not applicable) MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 177 Ademco Contact ID Format Event Code Descriptions Ademco Contact ID Typical Printout EVENT Access Control - 420 421 Access denied 422 Access report by user System Disables - 500 and 510 Sounder/Relay Disables - 520 520 Sounder/Relay disable 521 Bell 1 disable 522 Bell 2 disable 523 Alarm relay disable 524 Trouble relay disable 525 Reversing relay disable 526 Bell 3 disable 527 Bell 4 disable MESSAGE ACCESS - Access Denied - User # (restore not used) ACCESS - Access Granted - User # (restore not used) DISABLE - Sounder/Relay - # DISABLE - Bell/Siren - #1 DISABLE - Bell/Siren - #2 DISABLE - Alarm Relay DISABLE - Trouble Relay DISABLE - Reversing Relay DISABLE - Bell/Siren - #3 DISABLE - Bell/Siren - #4 System Peripheral Disables - 530 and 540 Communication Disables - 550 and 560 551 Dialer disabled DISABLE - Dialer Disable 552 Radio transmitter disabled DISABLE - Radio Disable Bypasses - 570 570 Zone bypass 571 Fire bypass 572 24 -Hour zone bypass 573 Burglar bypass 574 Group bypass Test Misc. - 600 601 Manual trigger test 602 Periodic test report 603 Periodic RF transmission 604 Fire test 605 Status report to follow 606 Listen -in to follow 607 Walk test mode 608 System abnormal test BYPASS - Zone Bypass - # BYPASS - Fire Bypass - # BYPASS - 24 -Hour Bypass - # BYPASS - Burg. Bypass - # BYPASS - Group Bypass - # TEST - Manually Triggered (restore not applicable) TEST - Periodic (restore not applicable) TEST - Periodic Radio (restore not applicable) TEST - Fire Test (restore not used) STATUS - Status Follows (restore not applicable) LISTEN - Listen -in Active (restore not applicable) TEST - Walk Test Mode TEST - System Abnormal Test 178 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Appendix H: Canadian Applications H.1 ANN -LED Annunciator Installation for Canadian Applications • The FACP is supplied with a Dress Panel and one ANN -LED annunciator. • • When installing and programming the FACP, the Canadian Option must be set to ON prior to any other panel programming (refer to "Canadian Option" on page 91 of the Programming Section of this manual). • The optional, local ANN -LED annunciators must be adjacent and close-nippled to the FACP with the wiring in metal conduit. • When using additional ANN -LED annunciators on the primary ANN -BUS circuit, a ground wire must be daisy -chained between circuit board mounting screws on each annunciator and then connected from the last annunciator board to the Earth Ground stud in the FACP backbox. This applies only to the primary ANN -BUS circuit. • If remote indicators are desired, they must be connected to the secondary ANN -BUS circuit. This requires the use of the ANN -SEC option card. • The installer must write in the Date of Final Assembly on the Master Marking and Warranty Label located on the FACP backbox door. • To comply with CAN/ULC-S559-04, the 4XTMF option must be utilized along with the configuration shown in Figure H.3. ANN -LED Annunciator on Primary ANN -BUS Optional Secondary ANN -BUS using ANN -SEC Option Card. FACP ■• ■ i� 00 00 00 00 00 ANN -LED ANN -SOC ANN -I/O ANN-S/PG ANN-RLY Figure H.1 FACP Minimum Configuration - Single ANN -LED Annunciator m s_9050 U Da n n_led. wmf MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 179 Canadian Applications ANN -LED Annunciator Installation for Canadian Applications Supplied ANN -LED Annunciator Optional Secondary ANN -BUS using ANN -SEC Option Card. Primary ANN -BUS in metal conduit (adjacent to FACP) .— metal conduit ANN -LED ANN -80C FACP Optional ANN -LED Annunciators i n Figure H.2 FACP Maximum Configuration - Five ANN -LED Annunciators C' C yl E 180 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 ANN -LED Annunciator Installation for Canadian Applications Canadian Applications Notes: 1. The CRF -300 and the MMF-300 must be mapped to the same zone which is programmed for supervisory operation. 2. No other device can be mapped to that supervisory zone. 3. Wire gauge must be 18AWG minimum. T11 T10 MMF-300* T1 T9 T2 T8 T3 T4 T6 T5 eeel (to remote station receiver) CRF-300* Terminal IDs T10 - Comm2 T1 - SLC - T9 - N.C. 2 T2 - SLC + T8 - N.O. 2 T7 - Comm1 T6 - N.C. 1 T5 - N.O. 1 ° 0 °= T11 O T19 CRF -300* T1 T9 T2 T8 T3 rt T4 T6 T5 jam' ce%Z red (+) violet black (-) violet EOLR-1 47KS2 resistor TB2- SLC Loop Output Non-resettable Aux Power 24 VDC- TB1 *If the SLC device does not match the one in this figure, refer to the SLC manual appendix, which contains wiring conversion charts for type V and type H modules. Figure H.3 Alternate Transmission for Supervisory Signals FACP revpol9050.wmf MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 181 Canadian Applications AC Power Connections for Canadian Applications H.2 AC Power Connections for Canadian Applications For Canadian applications, an AC terminal block is supplied standard with the MS-905OUDC. The AC terminal block is factory installed on the bottom left of the circuit board chassis. CAUTION: RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK TURN OFF ALL POWER (AC & DC) BEFORE MAKING ANY CONNECTIONS. Refer to the following illustrations for location and wiring information. Ow Ow 11 AC Terminal Bloc FACP Chassis transformer connections • CAUTION! Make certain that all power (AC & DC) has been turned off before making any connections. Connect wires from AC main to terminal block as shown. Ground wire to FACP backbox Earth Ground stud Figure H.4 AC Terminal Block Connections 9050udchassis acterm.wmf 9050udacterm.wmf 182 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Index Numerics 24 Hour Test Time 109 300 Series addressable devices 18 4XTMF 13 4XTMF module 164, 165 installation steps 34 4XTMF module installation 33 4XTMF Transmitter Module 19 A AC Branch Circuit calculations 152 AC Loss Delay 86 AC Power 28 current 14 current, maximum 28 voltage 14 wiring 14, 28 Account Code 108, 109 Acknowledge/Step 16, 126 add Detector 59 add Module 66 addressable 12 addressable detectors see also detectors 13 addressable modules 18 see also modules 13 addressing see also device addressing 81 see also module or detector addressing 18 Ademco Contact ID format 174 Adjective control module 76 list 64 monitor module 71 multiple entries 66 Adjective/Noun 64, 65 control module 75 monitor module 71 Alarm 129 Alarm Silence 16, 126 alarm verification 13, 62, 133, 135 ANN -80 LCD Annunciator 40 ANN -80C Indicator 40 ANN -BUS EIA -485 15 guidelines 36 Power 15 Secondary 15 ANN -UO LED Driver Module 46 ANN -LC 52 programming 91 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 ANN -LED Annunciator Module 49, 50 ANN-RLY Relay Module 50 ANN-S/PG Printer Module 43 ANN -SEC 15 ANN -SEC option card 35 Automatic Test Operation 133 Autoprogramming 13, 56, 58 Autosilence 13, 135 NAC 87 B backbox 18 see also cabinet 27 Backup Reporting 107 Banner 81 setting 82 battery 18 cable connection 28 charger 16 charger capacity 14 Charging Circuit 14 see also secondary power 14, 28 battery box 20 battery charger 20 external 20 BB -26 see also battery box 20 BB -55F see also battery box 20 Ci cabinet dimensions 26, 27 cabinet mounting 24 Calculate System Current Draw 153 Calculating the Battery Size 155 call limit 55, 107 Canadian Applications 22 Canadian Option 82, 91 Central Station 107, 151 account code 109 communications 1144 phone number 109 Phone Numbers 108 report style 117 CHG-120F see also battery charger 20 CHG-75 see also battery charger 20 Class A 30 Class B 30 Classic Loop Interface Protocol 81 183 D -G Index Clock Format 84 Coded Operation 133 Coding NAC 88 coding two stage operation 88 communications format 109, 110 Control Buttons 126 control module 18 description display 77 display 73 edit 73 enable/disable 74 noun 76 noun/adjective 75, 76 silenceable 75 type 74 type codes 74 Correlations 156 current AC Power 28 availability 15 Current Draw Calculations 154 D DACT enable 106 onboard 106 data see also detector data and sensitivity 133 Data Entry via computer keyboard 55 via keypad 55 data values see also detector data and sensitivity 13 Date setting 83 Daylight Savings Time 84 Default Programming 161 Delete Detector 60 Delete Module 67 Description control module 77 detector label 65 monitor module 72 Detector add 59 adding description 64 delete 60 edit 60 enable/disable 61 screen display 61 type 62 verification 62 detector data 133, 142, 143 printout 142 recommended range 142 184 Detector Programming 59 Device Accessories 18 device addressing 81 dialer runaway 55, 107 Digital Communicator 21 dimensions cabinet 26 DIRTY1 143 DIRTY2 143 Disable 78 Disable Point Maintenance Level 120 Downloading 150, 151 dress panel 18, 19 drift compensation 13, 143 definition 143 Drill 16, 126 E edit control module 73 detector 60 detector screens 61 module, monitor 67 EIA 14 EIA -232 see also Printer/PC interface 13 Enable 78 Enable/Disable control module 74 detector 61 module, monitor 68 End -of -Line Resistor Assembly 18 Enter key 57 EOL-C(R/W) Mounting Plate 19 Erase History 94 Error Checking 151 event code classification 175 event codes 110 exiting programming 56, 57 Read Status 56, 57 F FACP see also Fire Alarm Control Panel 12 Features 12 Fire Alarm Control Panel see also FACP 12 Format Selection Address 145 Form -C relay 17, 29 G general alarm zone 70 see also zone Z00 64 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 Index H–N guidelines 36 H Hazard Condition 131 History 93 erase 94 Maintenance Level 120 view events 94 History file 13 HVAC Control 172 HVAC OVRRIDE 173 HVAC RESTART 172 HVAC SHUTDN 172 I Indicators 15 Installation 24 intelligent 12 Internet Protocol Communicator 20 Inventory 12 INVREP 143 IPDACT 20 K Key Panel 16 function keys 16 service/program keys 16 keyboard and keypad 55 L lamp test 16 LCD display 13, 15 LED AC Power 126 Alarm Silenced 127 Fire Alarm 127 Kiss -off 127 Primary Line Active 127 Secondary Line Active 127 see also Indicators 15 Supervisory 127 Trouble 127 Lite -Connect 82, 91 Local Energy Municipal Box Service 33 Loop Setup 81 M Maintenance Alert 13, 132 levels 142 maintenance alert 143 Maintenance Program Level 2 57, 119 Manual Dial Mode 117 Manual programming 56 Master Program Level 1 56, 58 Medical Alert 131 Mode key 57 Module add 66 addressing 18 delete 67 edit monitor 67 enable/disable 68 see also addressable modules 18 Module Programming 66 Monitor module 18 adjective 71 enable/disable 68 noun 72 noun/adjective 71 type 68 type action 69 Type list 69 type selection 69 Mounting cabinet 24 main circuit board 24 municipal box transmitter 33 N NAC 14, 16, 86, 87, 132 Auto Silence 87 coded 133 coding 88 current 14 End -of -Line Resistor 14 power 12 see also Notification Appliance Circuit 12, 30 silence inhibit 89 silenceable 87 Style configuration 30 Style Y wiring diagram 30 synchronized 133 type codes 87 voltage, operating 14 wiring Style 30 NAC enable/disable 87 NAC options 82 NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System 163, 164 NFPA 72 Central Station Service (Protected Premises Unit) or Remote Station Service 163 NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm System 163 NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling Sys- tems 166 NFPA 72 Remote Station Protective Signaling System 164 NFPA Battery Requirements 155 NFPA Standard 163 nonpower -limited relay connections 29 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 185 O–R Index nonsilenceable waterflow 80, 91 Normal 127 normal display 56 Notification Appliance Circuit 14, 86 see also NAC 12, 30 Noun list 65 monitor module 72 multiple entries 66 0 Off-line Programming 56 Operating Instructions 126 Operation alarm 129 disable/enable 132 hazard condition 131 medical alert 131 NAC 132 normal 127 process monitor 130 programmed zone 132 supervisory 130 trouble 128 waterflow 132 Option Modules 19, 33, 95 Options 12 Output Circuits 16 P PAS 63, 78, 134 see also Positive Alarm Sequence 13, 63 PAS BYPASS 135 PAS timer 84 Password 13, 57 change 118 Maintenance Level 2 58, 120 Master Level 1 58 PC interface 13 Phone Number 109 Piezo see also sounder 16 Point Program 59 Positive Alarm Sequence 63, 134 see also PAS 13 power NAC 12 power supply calculations 152 Power -up first time 57 Pre -signal 13, 63, 79 function 134 selection 70 Pre -signal Delay timer 85 Pre -signal timer 84 Primary Phone 106 primary power see also AC Power 28 printer connection 44 printer module installation 44 printer options 45 PRN -6F 45 Process Monitor 130 PROCMON AR 90 Program check 119 check correlations 119 clear 118 Program Check Maintenance Level 121 program keys see also Key Panel 16 Programming 55, 56 autoprogramming 56 exiting 56 factory default 161 Level 1 56 Level 2 57 manual 56 Master Level 1 58 modules 66 off-line computer 56 via computer keyboard 55 via panel keypad 55 Programming Levels 56 Programming Screens 57 Programming Sheet 158, 159 Programming Utility see also PK -CD 20 Proprietary Yes see also Remote Upload 150 PS -Tools 20 R Read Status 56, 137 annunciators 141 exiting 56 history 140 NAC 139 power 138 Print 142 program check 140 relay 139 system point 137 Time -Date 143 timers 139 trouble reminder 139 zones 138 Real -Time Clock 133 Recall/Increment Function 66, 73, 77 186 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 SITE DATA PARCEL NUMBER: 352304-9123 TOTAL PARCEL SZE = 98,682 SF EXISTING USE: RESTAURANT PROPOSED USE: RESTAURANT ZONING: RIC - TUKWILA URBAN CENTER BUILDING DATA EXISTING NEWPORT BAY EXISTING MIZUKI BUFFET TOTAL PROPOSED MIN PEAKS EXISTING MIZUKI BUFFET TOTAL PARKING DATA = 7,907 SF = 8,523 5F = 16,430 SF = 6,930 SF = 8,523 SF = 15,453 SF EXISTING PARKING PROVIDED STALLS = 128 STALLS ACCESSIBLE STALLS = 6 STALLS TOTAL STALLS = 134 STALLS PARKING RATIO = 8.2 / 1000 SF FUTURE PARKING PROPOSED STALLS = 128 STALLS FUTURE STALLS = 6 STALLS TOTAL STALLS = 134 STALLS FUTURE PARKING RA110 = 8.7 / 1000 SF SETBACKS PER TUKWILA ZONING CODE FRONT = 15 FEET REAR = 5 FEET SDE = 5 FEET LEGEND STD. DUTY PAVEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT CONCRETE AP MMI NT SIDEWALK PAVEMENT PER ARCH. PLANS CURB AT BUILDING SIDEWALK CONCRETE CURB & GUTTER CONCRETE CURB (a? PIPE BOLLARD ® NUMBER OF PARKING STALLS PER ROW C DENOTES COMPACT STALL • ADA ACCESSIBLE PARKING SIGN 2 � .�: %10.x.>�:,'.Date ::.,,-,;:`'"gy;<-;., •v;:*: i 12/01/2015 PACIAND SITE KEY ® 6" WIDE FIRE LANE STRIPING PAINTED TRAFFIC YELLOW MOH "NO PARKING FIRE LANE" PAINTED KITH 4" HIGH YELLOW LEI IU6NG AT 25' o.c. Q AREA S1RIPED AT SINGLE WHITE (4') UNES AT 45' 0 2'-0" o.o, © PEDESTRIAN CROSSWALK W1TH 4" WIDE PAINTED WHITE STRIPING PARALLEL TO DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC AT 2'-0" 0.C. UNLESS NOTED 01HERW15E. SEE SITE PLAN FOR WIDTH. OD EAT PORCH. SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT SZE, LOCATION FOR STOOPS, STAIRS AND/OR RAMPS THAT MAY BE REWIRED. RAMP PAVEMENT FLUSH WITH THE TOP OF STOOP. ® 6'0 PIPE BOLLARD TTP. SEE ARCH. PLANS ® AT GRADE DELIVERY DOOR LOCATION. SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT SZE AND LOCATION FOR COORDINATION WITH CML PLANS © CONCRETE TRANSFORMER PAD. CONTRACTOR 10 COORDINATE WITH LOCAL POWER COMPANY FOR DETAILS. O ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACE TYPICAL SEE DETAIL SHEET FOR ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACE SIZE, SIGN 410 SYMBOL ('VAN' -INDICATES 001 ACCESSIBLE SPACE) OI 18" CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER TYPICAL Oj CONCRETE CURB ® CONCRETE SIDEWALK • CURB RAMP DETAIL • PAINTED DIRECTIONAL ARROW A A 461;' 14P NOT USED ® CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE AND REPLACE PAVEMENT AS NECESSARY FOR UTILITY INSTALLATION EXISTING STRIPING TO BE REMOVED. NEW UGHT POLE (MANUFACTURER: STRE5SCREIE GROUP) POLE: KM90RE-13.4 ARM: (MOD) KA40-T-1 LUMINAIRE: K203-P2G5-I11-40(SS.)-7042-120(M1)-KPLIO-XPG PHOTOMETRICS THE NEW BUILDING EXTERIOR LIGHTING IS PROPOSED TO BE LOCATED UNDER THE COVERED PA110 SEATING AREA AND THE COVERED SERVICE YARD. DECORATIVE LIGHTING WILL BE INSTALLED ON THE BUILDING AND UNDER DE ENTRANCE EVE. IT IS NOT EXPECTED THE LIGHTING WALL INCREASE THE SITE LIGHTING FOOT CANDLES GIVEN THE LOCATION AND 00)809ARD DIRECTION OF 1HE FIXTURES THE EXTERIOR UGHTING WILL NOT HAVE AN AFFECT THE EXISTING LIGHT CONDITIONS IN 111E PARKING AREA OR NEAR THE PROPERTY BOUNDARIES 111E PROJECT WILL NOT BE ADDING WALL PACKS TO THE EXTERIOR LIGHTING. NO MODIFICATIONS WILL BE MADE TO 111E EXISTING PARKING LOT LIGHTING. Description RFI #6 RESPONSE 01/25/2016 PACLAND CITY COMMENT RESPONSES Know what's below. CaII before you dig. GRAPHIC SCALE 20 0 10 20 40 80 ( 1N FEET ) 1 inch = 20 EL 01/26/2016 8* :II PERMIT . CM_ _droll RoMtNoa GUFF 10-492-061 EXISTING AND wyki PROPOSED ACCESS wv64 PONT 36' ROW EXISTING TRANSFORMER AND ELECTRICAL ,UNCTION TO REMAIN EXISTING ADA ACCESS p AT 5.69 TO 8.3R NEW HANDRAILS TO BE INSTALLED 5 82'5;'27, a EXISTING RAMP AND cl BOLLARDS TO BE o REMOVED N` NO REWSIONS PROPOSED IN EXI511110 PARKING AREA 30' EXISTING UTILITY CORRIDOR PER SHORT PLAT L99-0053 (POWER, TELEPHONE, FIBER OPDCS) 5' REQUIRED YARD SETBAC Pl6- ap — EXISTING CONCRETE PATIO AND 'P L TREWS TO BE REMOVED-----4 I 1PNCPETE Pn00 < WK EXISTING FIRE WAVVe TE HYDRANT TO REMAIN. 15' REQUIRED FRONT YARD SETBACK 30' EXISTING UTILITY CORRIDOR PER SHORT PLAT L99-0053 (POTTER, TELEPHONE, FIBER OPTICS) b PROPOSED FREESTANDING S EXISTING PEDESTRIAN ACCESS TO REMAIN 1s: EXISTING EDGE OF BLDG fd)cp '5 29 0 SCO 0 MPED CONCRETE ACCESS FOR TRASH ENCLOSURE OADING AREA 0 EXISTING MIZUKI BUFFET 8.523 S' TO REMAIN 1505 Westlake Ave. N. 596e 305 Seattle, WA 98109 T (206) 522-9510 F 12005224391 Wmv.P tw TWIN PEAKS 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 SI Index S–T Receivers 148 Relay 14, 17, 29, 90 connections 29 contact rating 14, 17, 29 fixed 29 Form -C 14, 90 programmable 12, 17, 29 programming 90 selections 90 trouble 12, 17, 29 Relay options 82 Remote Download 149 Remote Station Service 33 remote switch functions 13 REN see also Ringer Equivalence Number 21 Report Style 117 Reporting Enable 107 Reset 16, 126 Ring Count 106 Ringer Equivalence Number 21 ROME Series 51 rules for ANN -BUS wiring 36 S secondary ANN -BUS 15, 35 Secondary Phone 106 Secondary Power Requirements 155 Secret Code 150 Security Features 150 sensitivity 133, 143 see also smoke detector sensitivity 133 Signal rate 13 Signaling Line Circuit see also SLC 14 Silence Inhibit 13, 89, 135 Silenceable control module 75 NAC 87 waterflow 91 Silenceable Alarm Relay 90 silenceable circuits synchronized signals 87 Silenceable waterflow 80 SLC 13, 16 current 14 reference manual 14 resistance 14 see also Signaling Line Circuit 12, 14 Style 16 voltage 14 wiring length 14 SLC Loop Protocol 81 SLC Style 81 smoke detector chamber reading 142 data 133, 142 sensitivity 13, 133 Software Zones 12, 156 sounder 16 Specifications 14 strobe synchronization 13 Style 12 Style Y 30 NC configuration 30 Style Z 30 NAC configuration 30 subscreen 57 Supervisory 130 SUPERVISORY AR 90 supervisory relay configuring for Transmitter Module 35 sync programming 86 see also synchronization 89 synchronization 133, 139 by manufacturer 89 programming 89 see also strobe synchronization 13 synchronized 133 synchronized signals 133 and silenceable circuits 87 System Maintenance Level 123 System Point 137 System Setup 81 T Telephone Circuitry 21 Telephone Company Rights and Warnings 22 telephone line 32 Terminal 106 Test Time Interval 108, 109 Time and Date Maintenance Level 123 Time setting 83 Time -Date setting 81, 83 Time-out 151 Timers 82 Total Comm Fault 112, 114, 116 Transmittal Priorities 147 Transmitter Module 33 coil resistance 33 current 33 see also 4XTMF 19 supervisory relay config. 35 voltage 33 Trouble 128 trouble call limit 55 trouble display 128 trouble relay 12 MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 187 U–Z Index Trouble Reminder 81, 135, 139 Zone 18 78 Trouble Resound 81, 135 Zone Assignment 64, 70, 89 trouble responses 128 control module 75 Two Stage 79 Zone Setup 78 two stage operation 88 Maintenance Level 124 Type zone type 79 control module 74 list 80 detector 62 Zone Z17 63 monitor module 68 Zone Z18 NAC 87 pre -signal zone 63 type code Zones 138, 156 control module 74 see also software zones 12 supervision 133 Zones Disabled 79 verification 13 Zones Enabled 79 Zones Installed 79 U zones per device 64 UL power -limited wiring requirements 31 see also power -limited and nonpower -lim- ited 29 Upload/Download 149 V Verification detector 62 Verify Loops 93 View Events 94 voltage measurements 138 ranges 138 w Walktest 13, 62, 75, 94 audible 94 Maintenance Level 122 operation 136 selection 70 silent 94 waterflow nonsilenceable 80, 91 silenceable 80, 91 Waterflow Delay timer 84, 85 Waterflow Retard Timer 135 Waterflow Silenceable 82 Wire Requirements 170 wiring AC Power 28 wiring Style 12 z Z00 64, 70 Z17 PAS zone 63 Z18 63 Zone 17 78 188 MS -9050 Series Manual —PIN 52413:K 11/20/2015 Cut along dotted line. MS-9050UD Series Fire Alarm Control Operating Instructions Panel NORMAL - Only AC POWER is illuminated green. PANEL KEY - The key to open the panel can be found at the following All other indicators are off. LCD display will read SYSTEM ALL location: NORMAL. WHEN AUDIBLE DEVICES ARE SOUNDING - FOR AN ALARM 1. Evacuate the protected area 2. Notify the monitoring service and/or the Fire Department immediately. Tell them briefly what happened and what your current status is. Phones: Fire Department Monitoring Service 3. If the Fire Department is responding, be prepared to provide directions to arriving firefighters. FOR TROUBLE, SUPERVISORY, AND EMERGENCY ALARMS 1. Notify the monitoring service and/or applicable first responders if this panel is connected to either one, and tell them what is happening. 2. Silence audible devices by unlocking and opening the panel and pressing the ACKNOWLEDGE/STEP button. The applicable indicator will remain illuminated. Contact authorized service personnel immediately! (See Below). WARNING! DO NOT ALLOW TROUBLE CONDITIONS TO REMAIN LOGGED IN THE SYSTEM. THE PROTECTION THE SYSTEM OFFERS HAS BEEN COMPROMISED OR ELIMINATED, WHEN A TROUBLE CONDITION EXISTS. To return to normal after an alarm 1. Do not enter the protected area until safe to do so. 2. Clear all initiating devices. Smoke detectors will not reset if there is still smoke in the area. 3. Reset the control panel (PRESS the RESET button) Power failure or brownout If AC power drops too low or fails, AC POWER indicator will extinguish, the system TROUBLE indicator will turn on yellow, and the panel buzzer and any other audible trouble devices will sound. Contact authorized service personnel immediately. See below. Fire•uTe®ALarms by Honeywell In the event of trouble, contact the local Fire -Lite Service Representative Name: Company: Address: Telephone Number: Manual activation (Fire Drill or otherwise) Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) can be activated by pressing and holding the DRILL button for at least two seconds. NOTE: You may want to disconnect the municipal box by sliding the DISCONNECT switch, located on the 4XTMF module, to its disconnect position (to the right). If a DACT is connected, notify the monitoring service before conducting any fire drills or tests. Alarm Silencing Notification Appliance Circuits may be silenced by pressing the ALARM SILENCE button. ALARM SILENCED will turn on yellow. Subsequent alarms will reactivate circuits. Press the RESET button to clear the "silenced" condition. NOTE: Notification Appliance Circuits may be programmed as nonsilenceable. Also, Signal Silence Inhibit, if enabled, will prevent silencing of NACs for one minute after an alarm (see manual). To test the indicators, LCD display and piezo Press and release the RESET button and check all indicators/LEDs. Every indicator/LED should be on, LCD shows all pixels on, piezo sounder beeps. For more information, refer to the MS-9050UD Series Manual, Document #52413. It is kept in the following location: THIS SHEET SHALL BE FRAMED ADJACENT TO THE CONTROL PANEL Document #52663 Rev. C 4/7/2010 ECN 10-321 Manufacturer Warranties and Limitation of Liability Manufacturer Warranties. Subject to the limitations set forth herein, Manufacturer warrants that the Products manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility and sold by it to its authorized Distributors shall be free, under normal use and service, from defects in material and workmanship for a period of thirty six months (36) months from the date of manufacture (effective Jan. 1, 2009). The Products manufactured and sold by Manufacturer are date stamped at the time of production. Manufacturer does not warrant Products that are not manufactured by it in its Northford, Connecticut facility but assigns to its Distributor, to the extent possible, any warranty offered by the manufacturer of such product. This warranty shall be void if a Product is altered, serviced or repaired by anyone other than Manufacturer or its authorized Distributors. This warranty shall also be void if there is a failure to maintain the Products and the systems in which they operate in proper working conditions. MANUFACTURER MAKES NO FURTHER WARRANTIES, AND DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS, TRADEMARKS, PROGRAMS AND SERVICES RENDERED BY MANUFACTURER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE OF, OR AS A RESULT OF, PERSONAL, COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USES OF ITS PRODUCTS. This document constitutes the only warranty made by Manufacturer with respect to its products and replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Manufacturer. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligation of this warranty is authorized. Manufacturer does not represent that its products will prevent any loss by fire or otherwise. Warranty Claims. Manufacturer shall replace or repair, at Manufacturer's discretion, each part returned by its authorized Distributor and acknowledged by Manufacturer to be defective, provided that such part shall have been returned to Manufacturer with all charges prepaid and the authorized Distributor has completed Manufacturer's Return Material Authorization form. The replacement part shall come from Manufacturer's stock and may be new or refurbished. THE FOREGOING IS DISTRIBUTOR'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY IN THE EVENT OF A WARRANTY CLAIM. Wam-HL-08-2009.fm MS -9050 Series Manual — P/N 52413:K 11/20/2015 191 ® Fire•LITe Alarms by Honeywell World Headquarters 1 Firelite Place Northford, CT 06472-1653 USA 203-484-7161 fax 203-484-7118 www.firelite.com IS ' I I CE_ IRTIM n =EMS WMFAMSIi !MITT SYSTEMS i BACK - UP BATTERY CAL CUL A TIONS PROJECT NAME : Newport Bay Restaurant PROJECT ADDRESS : South Center Pkwy. & S. 180th St. Tukwila, Wa. TYPE OF PANEL : Silent Knight MODEL NUMBER : 5207 Control Panel TO : Tukwila Fire Dept. ATTN : FROM : JAMES FOSSETT Ace Fire & Security Systems P.O. Box 3363 Lacey, Wa. 98509-3363 1-800-354-1555 ' WORKSHEET 1-1 CALCULATING TOTAL BACK-UP BATTERY LOAD FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS A B IS IA TYPE OF DEVICE # OF DEVICE CURRENT PER DEVICE IDLE STATUS CURRENT PER DEVICE ALARM STATUS SUB TOTAL DEVICE CURRENT IDLE STATUS SUB TOTAL DEVICE CURRENT ALARM STATUS 1 ; !Silent Control 1 0.120 0.700 0.120 0.700 2 5230 Annuciator 1 0.060 0.120 0.060 0.120 3 I RE Symoke 2 -Detector 3 0.000070 0.060 0.00021 0.180 4 I 5ii5cd Sensor 10 --- 0.074 --- 0.740 s. Sensor 5 ' S5 75cd Strobe Light 3 --- 1 --- 0.049 0.030 --- --- 0.147 0.030 6 j Sprinkler Bell 7 81 9 10' 11' 12 13 141 15 16 17! 18 19, 20 TOTALS FROM COLUMNS Is & IA SHEET 1-4IF USEDI 0.18021 A I.An LA 'NI Ince COLUMN Is TOTAL DEVICE CURRENT IDLE STATUS Is= SYSTEM STANDBY CURRENT Ts= TIME DURATION (24 HRS) IA= SYSTEM ALARM CURRENT COLUMN IA TOTAL DEVICE CURRENT ALARM STATUS 1.917 TA= TIME DURATION IN ALARM (5 MIN.=0.0833) K = 1.25 BATTERY CAPACITY COEFFICENT *IF MORE SPACE IS NEEDED USE SHEET 1-2 f_ ( IS x TS) + ( IA x TA ) ] x K = A.H. 0.18021 x24) + ( ,Asn x0.0833) x1.25= 5.6059 TOTAL AMP.HRS. = 5.7 SIZE OF BATTERY PROVIDED : 7.0 COMMERCIAL FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL Model 5207 Fire Control Panel with Digital Communicator and Accu -Zone® Your All -In -One Answer For Fire Protection. The Model 5207 is an all -in -one fuseless local fire evacuation control panel and digital communicator designed for applications requiring manual fire alarm, automatic fire alarm and water flow for sprinkler supervision. The basic unit offers fire alarm for one to eight zones, expandable to 16 with the optional 5210 expansion module. It is compatible with both two - and four -wire smoke detectors. Compact, easy to install and service, it delivers the features you'd expect to find in fire systems costing much more. Features • Eight zones, 6 Class B (Style A) and 2 Class A (Style D). 8 Expander Zones are Class B (Style A). Zones are interchangeable using the Model 7181 Zone Converter. • UL, FM, MEA (BSA), CSFM Listed and Approved. • Event Memory. • Fuseless design reduces service time. • 24 VDC power supply. • Compatible with 2- and 4 -wire smoke detectors as well as water flow and sounding devices. • ANSI cadence pattem output. • Four programmable (Style Y) supervised signal circuits, including steady. pulse and temporal. • Programmable smoke verification, pre - alarm delay, and cross -zoning can minimize false alarms. • Four general purpose relays (Form C 24 volts at 2.5 amps resistive). • Built-in approved digital communicator with UL required priority reporting. • Flexible programming capabilities including up/downloading and use of remote annunciator. • Accu -Zone® diagnostics facilitate local and remote troubleshooting. • Walk Test. Specifications Electrical: Operating Voltage: Primary AC: Accessory Current: Mechanical: Dimensions: Weight: Color: 24 VDC 120 VRMS @ 60 Hz, 2A 5A @ 24 VDC 16"Wx26.4"Hx4"D (40.6cm W x 67cm H x 10.2cm D) 25 lbs. (11.4 kg.) Red Telephone Requirements: FCC Registration No.: AC6USA-65475-AL-E Type of Jack: RJ31X (2 required) General Purpose Relays: 4 Form C: 24 Volts @ 2.5 amps resistive Indication Lights: AC/DC Power: Operating Temperature 329F to 1202F (02C to 492C) Indicator Lights: AC/DC (Green): ALARM (Red): ON=System running on AC Flashing=On DC power ON=Supervisory Alarm Flashing=Fire Alarm 5207 TROUBLE (Yellow): ON=Trouble Condition OFF=No Troubles SILENCE (Yellow): ON=If trouble or alarm has been silenced MEMORY (Yellow): ON=If an Alarm is reset SET MODE (Yellow):ON=If panel is in test or REPORT program mode. Flashing=Panel reporting SILENT KNIGHT COMMERCIAL FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL Model 5207 Fire Control Panel With Digital Communicator and Accu -Zone® Optional Accessories Model 5230 Reads Annuadator This 4 -wire, 16 -zone remote annunciator English-language is easy to operate. Its fourteen function keys can perform the same operations as the main system annunciator, including silencing, resetting, and the displaying of alarms, troubles and alarm memory. The Model 5230 can be used to program all programmable options and with the use of access codes prevent unwanted tampering. Zona Expansion The 5210 adds eight additional Class B (Style A) zones to the 5207, enabling use of both 2- and 4 -wire smoke detectors. Model 4180 Stales Display Models The 4180 provides 16 outputs to give alarm and trouble conditions by zone. Two units can be connected to annunciate all 16 zones on a 5207 control. The 16 outputs can be used to drive LEDs or a graphic annunciator. (Non -supervised) Model 7181 fin Zoos Cormier Converts Class B zones to Class A and vice versa. Model 5220 Direct Conga Module Used for city box and polarity reversing direct wire applications. Model 5530 Downloading Modem SIA format modem for remote programming the 5207. 5541 Downloadiag Software For remote programming the 5207 with an IBM PC or compatible computer. Requires a 5530 modem. The modem and software can be purchased as a package, order part number 5561. 5280 Printer interface Allows connection of a standard computer printer to provide a printed record of the 5207 system activity. (Printer not supplied.) Engineering Specifications The contractor shall provide a complete electrically supervised fire alarm and communications system. The system shall contain a fire alarm control/communicator and panel to supervise and operate heat and product of combustion detection devices, alarm signal devices, visual annunciator and an integral digital communicator to transmit fire alarm and supervisory signals to a central station. The control/communicator shall be UL listed or FM approved for use under NFPA 72 for Central Station. Local Protective, Remote Signaling, and Auxiliary Signaling standards. It shall provide power and control for eight supervised detection zones, four supervised alarm signal circuits and a dual digital communicator. The control/communicator shall be expandable to sixteen supervised detection zones and shall be able to communicate to a central station in SIA, SK FSK1, SK 4/2 or Radionics BFSK formats. The control/communicator shall be model 5207. There shall be two Class A and six Class B detection zones. They shall accommodate heat detectors, products of combustion detectors, manual pull stations, sprinkler flow switches and gate valve supervisory switches intermixed as permitted by NFPA 72. Products of combustion may either be 2- or 4 -wire and shall be cross listed by UL for use on the system. The detection zones shall be programmed to (1) be cross zoned so that two individual zones must sense products of combustion. (2) automatically reset a detector to verify that products of combustion exist. (3) see a single detector in alarm before the alarm is sounded and a signal is transmitted to the central station. There shall be four 1 amp supervised (Style Y) alarm signal circuits. They shall cause the notification appliances to ring steady/pulsing/temporal throughout the premises until reset or silenced. The control shall be equipped with four auxiliary relays that shall be programmed to operate on (1) pre -alarm. (2) tamper alarm. (3) special alarm, (4) fire alarm, (5) trouble. (6) no -silence. (7) alarm by specific zone (1-16). The relays shall remain energized until the panel is silenced, reset or the trouble condition is cleared, unless "no -silence" is selected. The controVcommunicator shall have an integral annunciator to indicate sequentially zones in trouble and system functions. LEDs shall augment the display to make clear to an operator the system status. An integral touchpad shall be provided to operate and interrogate the system. Vital operations such as alarm silencing or reset shall be simple and obvious to an operator. Authorization pass codes may or may not be used. The control/communicator shall have the capability to supervise two telephone lines, seize the phone line, and send the alarm signal on one or both lines without the addition of any more equipment. It shall sound a local trouble signal if the telephone service is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds and it shall transmit a signal indicating the loss of phone line service to the central station over the remaining phone line. A signal shall also be transmitted indicating the restoral of phone service. The control/communicator shall be able to report the loss of either phone line without regard to which phone line failed initially. If both lines fail, a local signal shall sound. The controlcommunicator shall have the ability to send a test signal to the central station every 24 hours. The test signal shall be able to be transmitted at a specific time of day or night by setting a program feature within the panel. The alarm signals transmitted to the central station shall indicate which of the eight zones is in alarm and which zones are in trouble, depending on which format is used. Restoral from alarm or trouble signals shall also be transmitted by zone. The control/communicator shall be capable of communicating to Silent Knight, Radionics or Ademco central station receivers. SILENT KNIGHT 7550 Meridian Circle, Maple Grove, MN 55369-4927 800-446-6444 or in Minnesota 612-493-6435 FAX: 612-493-6475 World Wide Web: http://www.silentknight.com MADE IN AMERICA FORM# 350376, Rev. 11/97 Copyright © 1997 Silent Knight E S L PRODUCT INFORMATION BUL • Intelligent, self -diagnostics • Field replaceable optical chamber • Low -profile design • Plug-in terminal block • Advanced false alarm immunity LETIN 429 SERIES Self -Diagnostic, Two -Wire, Photoelectric Smoke Detectors Model numbers: 429AT, 429C, 429CT, 429CRT, 429CST, and 429CSST USTED *mown California State Fire Marshal Approved MEA (New York Cityi The ESL 429 Series self-diagnostic, two -wire smoke detectors continually monitor their own sensitivity and operational status, and provide a visual trouble indication if they drift out of sensitivity range or fail internal diagnostics. This meets NFPA 72 field sensitivity testing requirements without the need for external meters. Additional diagnostic information is activated by applying a magnet near the detector's integral reed switch. This initiates a self-diagnostic routine and provides visual indication of sensitivity level, or if service is required. The 429 Series is easily cleaned by simply replacing ESL's proprietary field -replaceable optical chamber. All models are designed to reduce false alarms from dust, insects, RFI and external light. An integral combination rate -of -rise and fixed 135°F (57°C), 50 -foot rated, heat sensor is available with all 'T" model detectors (see selection guide). An integrated silicon heat sensor and a dedicated microprocessor are used to detect heat and perform the rate of rise calcula- tions, for earlier heat detection. continued ESL 429 Series Smoke Detectors Architectural and Engineering Specifications The ESL 429 Series low -profile, self-diagnostic, two -wire smoke detectors work on the light scattering principle. A pulsed infrared light -emitting diode serves as the light source, and a high-speed photo -diode as the sensing element. When the amount of light reflected onto the photodiode reaches the sensitivity setting, the smoke sampling rate increases. Three (3) successive smoke sensings above the sensitivity setting are required to sound an alarm. This design has superior protection against false alarms caused by dust, insects, RF and ambient -light. A confirmed alarm causes the normally flashing power indicator LED to light continuously and the optional alarm relay (available in "R" models) to operate. A trouble indication is automatically displayed by flashing the LED every second. This meets NFPA 72 field sensitivity testing requirements. An internal 85 dB horn (available in "S" models) emits a steady tone when the detector alarms and a pulsed tone when power polarity is reversed. Also available is the "SS" model which chirps when the unit goes outside the approved sensitivity range for more than one day. Resetting the detector will silence chirp for one day, until unit is restored to proper sensitivity. Product Data Sensitivity max min ... Operating temperature range Operating humidity range Minimum voltage - C, CT, CRT, CST, CSST - AT Maximum voltage - C, CT, CRT, CST, CSST - AT Maximum ripple (peak to peak) Typical average standby current Field wiring size 3. I - 1.0%/ft. 3.1 + 0.50%/ft. 32°F to 120°F 0°C to 50°C 0 to 95% RH 8.5 V 6.5 V 33 V 20 V 10% 70jA Selection Guide 14 - 24 AWG The proprietary optical sensing chamber is field replaceable, allowing duicx and easy cleaning and maintenance. Models with auxiliary relays are approved for releasing service. The very low profile 429 Series detectors are equipped with a hinged cover, a concealed tamper-resistant latch, and insect screens. All wiring terminates in plug-in, clamp -type screw terminals. The detectors mount to a standard single -gang electrical box, a four -inch octagonal, four -inch square electrical box, or WIREMOLD No. 5739 fixture box. Smoke Detector Spacing On smooth ceilings (as defined in NFPA 72), spacing of 30 feet (9.1 meters) may be used as a guide. Other spacing may be used depending on ceiling height, high air movement, and other conditions or response requirements. A 1.85' (4.70 cm) l A 6.1' (15.5 cm) Alarm current .... draws max of 60 mA if not limited by panel Max. avg. polarity reverse current - CST Sounder specifications Heat detector specifications fixed temp. 135°F ± 5°F (57.2°C ± 2.8°C) rate of rise ... 15°F/min. & > 105°F (8.3°C/min. & > 40.6°C) Relay specifications 2A ® 28 V DC or 120 V AC Packaging 10 detectors are packed in a carton Color white cover/white base with UV inhibitor to prevent yellowing 2 -wire compatibility see ESL Compatibility Index Listings UL 268. FM, CSFM and MEA (New York City) for Canadian ULC listed products use 428 series 10 mA 85 dB at 10 ft. Designator Feature Description H Isolated Fixed Temp. and Rate of Rise Heat Detector Isolated fixed 135'F (57°C) and rate of rise heat detector, independently trips the LED and alarm relay output. Smoke detector activates internal sounder (local alarm) and auxiliary relay, but does not latch. Approve° as both single station smoke alarm and system heat detector. Ideal for hotel, motel and dormitory rooms where smoking is allowed. R Auxiliary Relay Used to activate other devices such as elevator recall, door holders, strobes. etc. Listed for releasing service. S Built-in Sounder 85db built-in sounder alarms when smoke is detected or when power wiring polarity is reversed. SS Built-in Sounder with Sensitivity Status Output 85db built-in sounder alarms when smoke is detected or when power wiring polarity is reversed. Also, chirps when unit goes outside the approved sensitivity range for more than one day. Resetting detector will silence chirp for one day, until unit is restored to proper sensitivity. T Integrated Fixed Temp. and Rate of Rise Heat Detector Integrated fixed 135°F (57°C) temperature and rate of rise heat detector offers double protection. Either heat detector or smoke detector can trip and latch LED and alarm relay outputs. ESL A PRODUCT OF SENTROL. INC CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS 12345 SW Leveton Dr. Tualatin. OR 1)7062 Tel.: 503.692.4052 Fax: 503.691.7566 U.S. & Canada: 800.5472 556 Technical Service: 800.648.7424 Sentrol. Inc. reserves the right to change specifications without notice. 01995 Sentrol. Inc. E-1885-0395-FLG 15K Flre•LITe• ALarrns incorPoraTeo F-200 BG -8 Series Manual Fire Alarm Pull Stations Catalog Section: Conventional Initiating Devices February 28, 1996 GENERAL The BG -8 Manual Fire Alarm Pull Station provides a single- action, normally -open contact alarm initiating point for use with UL listed Fire Alarm Control Panels. FEATURES • Complies with Americans with Disabilities Act. • Sturdy metal construction. • Simple operation. • Operation does not require replacement of parts. • Drawing of flames on cover helps communicate purpose of this device to people who do not read English words. • Designed to prevent false alarms when bumped, shaken, or jarred. • Listed to UL 38. APPLICATIONS Designed for indoor use in atmospheres which are not potentially explosive. Use as a means of allowing anyone on the premises to turn in a non -coded alarm quickly, without chance of error. Typical uses include: 1. Schools. 2. Hospitals. 3. Retail stores. 4. Industrial plants. 5. Warehouses. Compatible with any appropriate control panel to: 1. Initiate local alarm signals. 2. Trip a municipal fire alarm box. 3. Start fire pumps. 4. Any other function that can be initiated or controlled by the closing of a switch contact. OPERATION The stations feature non -break -glass operation. They are operated by a pull on the pull cover. This causes a key latch to act against a retaining mechanism until adequate force is applied to open the station. As the station opens, a switch is released to initiate an alarm. The retainer in Model BG -8 is a permanent, high -tensile, flat spring, which eliminates the need for a glass retainer. When so operated, the cover hangs down (and cannot be reset with- out use of a reset key) indicating that the station was used to initiate an alarm. OPERATED STATIONS CAN BE SEEN UP TO 100 FEET AWAY. MEA 38-93-E ADA S711 California State Fire Marshal 7150-0075:148 1 PULL1 FIRE ALARM Fire•LITeJALarms BG -13 (Shown full size) The attractive design of the stations highlights their engi- neered simplicity and unusual dependability; bumping, shak- ing, or jarring will not activate the switch or circuit. Instruc- tions for operation of the station are clearly marked on the front of the pull cover. This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact Fire•Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 18 Fire•uTe Alarms 12 Clintonville Road, Northford. Connecticut 06472 ncoi*oraTee ISO -9001 Engineering and Manufacturing Quality System Certified to International Standard ISO -9001 Made in the U.S.A. Page 1 of 2 The BG -8 Station is die -formed from 1/8" thick satin finish aluminum, with the operating instructions in raised letters. BG -8 contacts rated at: 1 amp., 30 VAC, and 30 VDC. Master key fits all stations used in an installation of the same series. INSTALLATION The station mounts with two screws (supplied) to a stan- dard single -gang electrical switch box. It can also be mounted to a surface mount box. 6" wire leads are pro- vided for making easy connections. From previous station or fire alarm control panel. 0 PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION Model No. Description BG -8 Manual Fire Alarm Pull Station. Single action. Normally -open contact. BG-8SP Spanish manual Fire Alarm Pull Station with FUEGO (FIRE) and JALE (PULL) in large capital letters. Single action. Normally -open contact. BG -2R Surface mounting Back -Box for BG -8 series stations. One end tapped for 1/2" conduit. Color is red. To next station or end -of -line device. 0 BG -8 / BG-8SP (Rear View) BG Series Back Box Page 2 of 2 JALE 1 PULL 1 FUEGO FIRE ALARM FIre•LlTe'ALarms BG-8SP ARCHITECT/ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non -code, non -break -glass type equipment with a key operated reset, and so designed that after actual Emergency Opera- tion, they cannot be restored to normal except by use of a key. An operated station shall be designed such that upon activation, it will be visually detectable at a minimum distance of one hundred feet, front or side. Manual Stations shall be constructed of die -formed aluminum, with operating directions provided on the front cover in raised letters. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, five -eights inch high or larger. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching back -box, or semi -flush mounting on a stan- dard single -gang box or switch plate, and shall be installed 48" above the finished floor per ADA standards. Note: for installations in New York City, all Manual Pull Stations must be installed four (4) feet above the finished floor. Manual Stations shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed. SPECTRAlert Series Horns, Strobes, and Horn/Strobes *-1 SYSTEM SENSOR` A Division nt Pittway 3525 Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, 11. 60174 1-800 SF.NSOR2 (736-7672), Fax 6311-377-6495 http://www.systernsonsor.cont Horn/Strobe with Standard Plate Features Strobe with Small Footprint Plate Horn with Standard Plate • 24 volt strobe models: 15, 15/75, 30, 75 and 110 candela • 12 volt strobe models: 15 and 15/75 candela • Horn models operate on 12 and 24 volts • Low current draw: reductions as high as 45% • Two field selectable/reversible horn tones - 3000 Hz Interrupted - Electromechanical • Field selectable/reversible high -low dBA output on horn (low output on 24 volt models only) - 101 peak dBA @ 10 ft. high output* - 96 peak dBA @ 10 ft. low output* • Field selectable/reversible temp 3 pattern or non -temp 3 continuous pattern on horn • Horn/strobe can be wired either in tandem or independently Specifications • Universal mounting plate included with each unit • One screw mounting of strobe and horn/strobe to mounting plate • SpectrAlert strobe and horn/strobe take up zero room in the back box. • Single gang mounting without the use of a mounting plate (horn model only) • Self-contained screw covers • Aesthetically pleasing design • Synchronize horn and strobe with Sync•Circuit' module • Silence horn on horn/strobe over a single pair of wires using Sync•Circuit module • Sound output varies with tone and output options selected; sound levels based upon anechoic room measurements. Walk test: SpectrAlert horn/strobe and horn only work on "walk tests" with time durations of 4 seconds or greater. Input terminals: 12 to 18 AWG Dimensions Strobe and horn/strobe with universal plate: 5" x 55/8"x 215/t6" Strobe and horn/strobe with small footprint plate: 33/s"x 55/8" x 25/t6" Horn with universal mounting plate: 5" x 55/8" x 15/t6' Horn without mounting plate: 215/t6" x 55/t6" x 15/16" Weight, horn only: 7.2 oz. Weight, strobe and horn/strobe: 8.8 oz. Mounting: 4" x 4" x 1'/2" or 2" x 4" x 1'/e" standard boxes Indoor operating temperature: 32° to 120° F (0° to 49° C) Weatherproof (horn and horn/strobes) operating temperature: 32° to 150° F (0° to 66° C) (outdoor strobe only) : -40° F to 158°F (-40° C to 70°C) Voltages: 12 or 24 VDC and FWR unfiltered Operating voltage range*: 12 V, 10.5-17 V; 24 V, 20-30 V Operating voltage range* (with Sync•Circuit module, MDL): 12 V, 11-17; 24 V, 21-30 V • These products should be operated within their rated voltage range; UL does, however, test functional integrity to -20% and + 10% of manufacturer's stated ranges. MEA approved For listing information see "Notes" on bottom of page 6.) SpectrAlert Ordering Information All weatherproof models must use weatherproof back box model WBB. Avg. mA• Avg. mil' Red White Voltage Candela @ Nom. VDC @ Nom. FWR•• ;-- Horn / Strobes P1215 P1215W 12 15 124 167 P121575 P121575W 12 15/75 152 181 P2415 P2415W 24 15 68 78 P241575 P241575W 24 15/75 74 82 P2430 P2430W 24 30 92 100 P2475 P2475W 24 75 148 167 P24110 P24110W 24 110 165 209 P241575K (weatherproof) - 24 15/75 74 82 P2475K (weatherproof) - 24 75 148 167 P24110K (weatherproof) - 24 110 165 209 Canada P2415A P2415WA 24 15 68 78 P241575A P241575WA 24 15/75 74 82 P2475A P2475WA 24 75 148 167 P24110A P24110WA 24 110 165 207 P241575KA (weatherproof) - 24 15/75 74 82 P2475KA (weatherproof) 24 75 148 167 P24110KA (weatherproof) - 24 110 165 207 Latin America P241575F (FUEGO) 24 15/75 74 82 Strobes S1215 51215W 12 15 114 157 S121575 S121575W 12 15/75 142 171 S2415 52415W 24 15 43 60 S241575 S241575W 24 15/75 49 64 S2430 S2430W 24 30 67 82 S2475 S2475W 24 75 123 159 524110S24110W 24 110 140 191 S241575K (weatherproof) - 24 15/75 49 60 S2475K (weatherproof) - 24 75 123 159 S2411OK (weatherproof) - 24 110 140 191 Canada 52415A S2415WA 24 15 43 60 5241575A S241575WA 24 . 75 49 64 S2475A S2475WA 24 75 123 149 S24110A S24110WA 24 110 140 191 S241575KA (weatherproof) - 24 15/75 49 64 S2475KA (weatherproof) - 24 75 123 149 S24110KA (weatherproof) - 24 110 140 191 Latin America S241575F (FUEGO) 24 15/75 49 64 Horns H12/24 H12/24W 12/24 NA 10 / 25 10 / 18 H12/24K (weatherproof) - 12/24 NA 10 / 25 10 / 18 HC12/24 (for coded power) HC12/24W (for coded power) 12/24 NA 10 / 25 10 / 18 HC12/24K (for coded power, weatherproof) - 12/24 NA 10 / 25 10 1 18 Canada H12/24A H12/24WA 12/24 NA 10 / 25 10 / 18 H12/24KA (weatherproof) - 12/24 NA 10 / 25 10 / 18 HC12/24A (for coded power) HC12/24WA (for coded power) 12/24 NA 10 / 25 10 / 18 Sync•Clrcuit Module MDL MDLW 12/24 NA 16 24 Canada MDLA MDLWA 12/24 NA 16 24 Small Footprint Mounting Plate for Single Gang Only S -MP S-MPW NA NA NA NA Surface Mount Back Box Skirt BBS BBSW NA NA NA NA Universal Mounting Plate (replacement) D -MP D-MPW NA NA NA NA Weatherproof Back Box WBB - NA NA NA NA Notes: Agency Listings - Indoor models: UL, ULC, FM, CSFM, MEA. Weatherproof models: UL, CSFM, MEA. ULC. All SpectrAlert products are designed for wall mount only. Installation of less than 75 candela strobes may be permissible under the equivalent facilitation clause of the ADAAG (Sec. 2.2). However, it is the responsibility of the person or entity designing the fire alarm system to determine the acceptability of less than 75 candela strobes. All 15/75 candela strobes or hom/strobes are recommended for 20' x 20' rooms or less. • Horn and hom/strobe current draws assume horn is set at temp 3. electromechanical tone and high audibility. .' FWR - Full Wave Rectified System Sensor Worldwide Canada: The Far East: Italy: The United Kingdom: Telephone: 905-812-0767 Telephone: 852-2191-9003 Telephone: 39-40-9490-111 Telephone: 44-1403-276500 Fax: 905-812-0771 Fax: 852-2736-6580 Fax: 39-40-382137 Fax: 44-1403-276501 China: Telephone: 852-2191-9003 Fax: 852-2736-6580 India: Telefax: 91-022-8202564 Singapore: Telephone: 65-273-2230 Fax: 65-273-2610 This document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. System Sensor reserves the right to change product specifications at anytime. A05-936-05 #34618-98/CP1/10K MSB Series/Lead Type • Motor Driven Fire Bells AMSECO's patented motor driven fire bells have been the standard in the industry for decades. The micro -motor design requires only a minimal kick -out current. A built-in varistor suppression element prevents RF and EMF noise problems. • 6, 12, or 24 VDC. • Low current. SPECIFICATIONS: • Gong sizes 6", 8", or 10". • The gong is all steel construction for longer life and louder sound output. • Can be mounted on any 4" square electrical box or outside on a weather- proof back box (model BBX-4). Available with four wire leads (PV4) or terminals (PVT). Model Gong Rated Rated dBA at Indoor Operating Number € Size -: Voltage Current 10 ft. Measurement Temperature "far 3?F`'_: •-ri ' (VDC) (Amps) UL"' - (dBA) DC MOTOR BELLS -LEAD TYPE MSB-6B-PV4-6 6" 6 0.110 85 86-89 -31°F to 150°F -35°C to 66°C MSB-6B-PV4-12 6" 12 0.060 82 86-89 MSB-6B-PV4-24 6" 24 0.030 85 86-89 MSB-8B-PV4-6 8" 6 0.110 85 89-91 MSB-8B-PV4-12 8" 12 0.060 85 89-92 MSB-8B-PV4-24 8" 24 0.030 85 90-93 MSB-10B-PV4-6 10" 6 0.110 85 92-94 MSB-10B-PV4-12 10" 12 0.060 85 92-94 MSB-10B-PV4-24 10" 24 0.030 85 92-94 FIELD MOUNTING CONFIGURATIONS: DIMENSIONS: inches (mm) Wiring (Rear View) Observe Polarity From control panel USE BOTH TERMINALS IOR LEADS) FOR CONNECTION BREAK WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE ELECTRICAL SUPERVISION. Connector (Supplied by others) To next bell or end -of - line resistor amseco B E L L S 15 0 s i.J. SAW EXPOSED BRANCHLINE 1 UPRIGHT HEAD 2 112" BRANCHLINE STRUCTURAL BRACING 'W/OUT OREMNG • •O T6pID CBLINC ftS SECTION 4 7µ•d -o SOV3H NMOO 213.A0 d!1 3NI1H3 NVN6 WATER FLOW INFO: (FROM PAT BRODEN) STATIC: 150 PSI FLOWING: 6163 GPM at 20 P51 LOCATION: 5. 180TH ST/S. CENTER FARKWAY 10" WATER MOTOR GONG 6" FIRE RISER 6" P.I.V. "BY OTHERS" -11 //'---- ..../ 5" STOR7 .D.0 �� -' ION DD®NG 3 DRY PENDENT HEAD A C D E PATIO DINING G H 2 T -GRID 10" WATER MOTOR GONG tvITI z HYDRAULIC AREA REMOTE AREA Y 1 HANGE 4" MAIN w/TRAPEZE HANGER ® 12'-0" A.F.F. (SE TRAPEZE DETAIL THIS SHEET) V1 2 S 0 4 6" WET RISER FOR SPRINKLER SYSTEM Vew_®IMINEw•111s FASTEN TO TOP CHORD W/3e"x0-3" LAG & WASHER ONCITUDINAL EARTHQUAKE BRACE OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION DENSITY .13 GPM/SO.FT AREA OF APPLICATION 3000 SO FT. COVERAGE PER SPRINKLER ?30_ SPECIAL SPRINKLERS N0. OF SPRINKLERS CALCULATED 44 IN -RACK DEMAND 150 HOSE STREAMS___ 500-__ TOTAL WATER REQUIRED 890 GPM 49.4 INCLUDING HOSE STREAMS NAME OF CONTRACTOR ADVANCED FIRE PROTECTION NAME OF DESIGNER JAMES BRANDEBERRY ADDRESS P.O. BO% 1543 WOODINVILLE AUTHORITY HAVING J09100101109 TUKWILA & W.S.R 8 DED 090CE PIPE 10 1 W LL( Clf oo e -- rVirani01i it 2' 4' 6' 8' 10' 12' 14' 16' 18 _w _.11111•1111WIM.w_ww•1111111111.1111111111Mw_w 1" BRANCHLINE W/ UPRIGHT HEAD 5 / 3 ROOF PLAN BRANCHLINE WITH UP OVER DOWN HEADS iB -9r .a>0 1 -Er ®BUILDING SECTION 8 9 10 FASTEN TO TOP CHORD W/38",(0- 3" LAG & WASHER BRSiFIG0. 909FIiTiSWAY ACE NG N.1" SCH. 40 BRACE PIPE FID. Joao "FAST CLAMP"® SWAY BRACE AiiACnMENi ATERAL EARTHQUAKE BRACE B C F G H UNDER FLAT ROOF CORE AREA: HANG BRANCHLINES INSIDE WEB TRUSS at 10" g BOTTOM OF DECK. UNDER PITCH ROOF SEATING AREA: HANG BRANCHLINE EXPOSED WITH HEAD IN BEAN POCKET. © g 11" BOTTOM OF DECK. DEFLECTOR DISTANCE TO 8E MAX. 7" BOTTOM OF DECK. -1nREADEO BRACE PIPE 0001 V1 0 S BRANCHLINE a 00 V1 00 0 ACCEPTED Without Comments As Noted In Red Per The Attached Letter These plans have been reviewed by The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau for conformance with current city standards. Acceptance is subject to errors and omissions which do not authorize violations of adopted standards and ordinances. The responsibility for the adequacy of design rests totally with the designer. Additions, deletions or revisions to these drawings after this date will void this acceptance and will require a resubmittal of revised drawings for subsequent approve Final acceptance is subject to field test and inspection by The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. Date:. 2 By' NEWPORT RESTA/Anr FIG. 105 COACH SCREW HANGER ROD FI. 200 ADJU5TABLE RING HANGER COACH SCREW ROD AND RING T_CSRR FASTEN TO TOP CHORD W/3s"x0-3" LAG & WASHER FIG. � 1 26 LAG BOLT FIG. 58 THREADED SIDE BEAM BRACKET FIG. 100 ALL THREAD ROD FIG. 200ST ��— ADJUABLE RING HANGER li© THREADED SIDE BEAM BRACKET, ROD & RING 1 I WOOD CONSTRUCTION T_SBBRR 4" CENTRAL SPRINK GROOVED 90 ELBOW 6r4 CENTRAL SPRINK FLEXIBLE COUPLING 0 CENTRAL - 10" W.M.A. HEAD BOX\ MAIN DRAIN VA.—\\ 4" TO SYSTEM F 8� II tlr .I ADVANCED FIRE STARTS HERE -\ U�ty i• 4 SLAB LEVEL l €' PIPE SLEEVE-" THRU SLAB 6" 0.1.P. SUPPLY THRUST BLOCK (PER NEPA 24) 6" CENTRAL MODEL G FL K GR. ALARM VA. W/ BASIC TRIM AND (OPT) RETARD CHAMBER 4" CHECK VALVE 6" FEBCO 876V FL X FL. VERTICAL DDCVA W/ TAMPER SW. -T 1=1 I1=1 I 1=W=1=L. 11 II I1 1=. r111 -111-111-L __ TI=111IIf1 1�111Ii(T-_�.IPit PIP NG 6" RISER DETAIL ■ w=1.1111 4" OUT TO 5" 51091 CONNECTION ON WALL 5TORZ 044 30' ELBOW POINT TORWARD GROUND 111 U.G. PIPING GENERAL NOTES: SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGNED PER NFPA 13 AND W.S.R.B. ALL MATERIALS SHALL BE NEW AND U.L. LISTED OR F.M. APPROVED FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM TO BE INSTALLED, BRACED AND TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 13 N LOCALITIES SUBJECT TO FREEZING CONDITIONS IT IS THE OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE HEAT THROUGHOUT THE WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM AREAS AND IN ENCLOSURES FOR DRY PIPE, DELUGE AND OTHER TYPES OF VALVES CONTROLLING WATER SUPPLIES TO SPRINKLER SYSTEMS FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ABILITY OF THE STRUCTURE TO ADEQUATELY SUPPORT THE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM OR ANY APPURTENANCES THEREOF ALL ELECTRICAL, PAINTING OF PIPE, FURRING, CUTTING OR PATCHING TO BE BY OTHERS SPRINKLER HEADS ARE LOCATED IN CENTER OF CEILING TILE OWNER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PERIODIC INSPECTION, TESTING AND MAINTENANCE OF THE WATER BASED FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM(S) IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 25 ALL PIPING 1"-2" IS THREADED SCH. 40. 212" TO 4" IS GROOVED DYNAFLOW ADVANCED FIRE STARTS AT 6" & 4" FLANGE INSIDE RISER ROOM. THE UNDERGROUND PLAN IS FOR HYDRAULIC REFERENCE ONLY. SYSTEM IS CALCULATED FOR A .13/3000, WITH 150 HOSE ALLOWANCE INSIDE AND 50C HOSE ALLOWANCE OUTSDE.(PER W.S.R.B. FOR STAND ALONE RESAURA.NTS) TUKWILA FIRE DEPARNvt Ni Please call: 575-4407 and give this job No. qq— ott7 and exact address for shut- down or restoration approval, SPRINKLERS UPRIGHT OO 0 44/65 CENTRAL':' 155' BRASS PENDENT ®/® 44/27 91015010 155' QHROME DRY SIDEWALL 4 , 155 CHROME RCENTRAL ECESSED DRY, PENDENT 3 T 155' CHROME RCENTRAL ECESSED 187 TOTAL JO3 FILE DVANCED m-17 FIRE PROTECTION INC.J' F 10 199 P.O. B0% 1543 - WOODINVILLE, WA 98072 JOB: NEWPORT BAY RESTAURANT S. 180TH ST & S. CENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA,WA BY:JAMES B. DATE 1-21-99 SCALE 1/8"=1' PIPING PLAN & DETAILS MIN= 111111011111111111••••••11 *'212(12 1 OF 1 LA\ U 277'. 1574 D 1 6 1.8 1.9 2 ELEVATION BB 12-0 0-10 I/_■■_�_� � .■1 )♦ice _�317ft_- ■ ■.aeon■r- MEM_■._MINIIMININIIII_OMMIIIIIIIIIIIII1.IIIMIIMMICIIZ MINIMBLIMINIMMIIIMIIIIIMIIMIIIIIIIIIIIIIIMMICIN MININIMIKM1111111111111M MN /11MI_...NIIIIIIIIIIIIM_--.-_... somm_■■1tieemeimmuummumu_Rt_rsasarJwYLumaissammiiiiiiiiiimamssaminipmwr ..� moomMIMIIIIIIMIIIMIIIIIMMIIIMBINNI -_-�_ A- . r�=M �L��_ ■ ..or mom' �■■�_.�� teEU a. _� ►i U.__________ : ammmr4 me ..MIIIIIIIIMMIIIMI--- �..�.■�._ .� ■.=_� LE\.'ATION CC mer 4111111�.A -.. =11111111111111111_r immagm _ m, h hl� :. :: ECIIIIIIIIIIIMIIICNINIMMI1111111__ U1:-----mummanompumm� i.■-rr■1.wae Amu 11101111 9-9 11-3 111161011111111ifillifillifill DININ o Witi)c -i" As g" Per Tile -.-- ter Theze plans have been reviewen Tukwila Fire nt.ar B_ ea: r Anforrn • currerit City ce subject. rd nTrii5SiariS\ ici _:,4utnorizt adopted &ci d Gr i c e The rest, T: far the I s y n 1 S r; _ataliv +th tr. esiCt er. I u„Oa 1 +G=- - 1 10115 Cr hale drawings after this (late icipid- pid'1C2 and SviH r quire a nasut)mittai+, a Inr 3Lie5eeiq-Fht.approval. j .nni = ixa c _ ,_ a 'laid test and atop Tic Tukwiia Fire diditG:(e-1-IC, bu:iw,sl( IKW1LA FIRE DEPARTMENT ° vE" }. calI 206-575-4407 and Jw.,e.Y th;:, 7 ,re Permit rmit Nos 14 -S -III ?C:1 ox .^t z:d :-VSs for shut- Cown Cr rd. at::Cai approval. • by COVERED -t 6 DINING .-4 151 ROOLfi" 6 VOTES: 1. THE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM IS DESIGNED TO NFPA-13 (2013 EDITION) AND THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT. 2. BRIMSTONE FIRE SAFETY IS USING BRASS UPRIGHT HEADS IN THE SEATING AREA, WHITE SEMI -RECESSED PENDENT SPRINKLERS IN CEILINGS, WHITE CONCEALED DRY SPRINKLERS IN THE COOLER & FREEZER, AND A SIDEWALL UNDER THE GARAGE DOOR. 3. ALL DROPS AND ARM OVERS WILL BE THREADABLE THINWALL STEEL PIPE TO FLEX DROPS. 4. ALL HANGERS WILL BE SWD-20 SAMMY SIDEWINDERS TO THE 2X6 TRUSSES, HANGED PER NFPA-13. 5. THE CITY OF TUKWILA REQUIRES EXPANSION RINGS OVER OVERSIZED HOLES IF HARD PIPE DROPS ARE USED WITHOUT A MEANS FOR SEISMIC MOVEMENT, IE FLEX DROP. 6. BRIMSTONE FIRE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE PERFORMANCE, OR THE CODE COMPLIANCE OF ANY EXISTING SPRINKLER SYSTEM EXCEPT FOR WORK PERFORMED DIRECTLY BY BRIMSTONE FIRE SAFETY. 7. IT IS THE OWNERS AND TENETS RESPONSIBILITY TO MAINTAIN A 40' MINIMUM TEMPERATURE WHERE WET TYPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS ARE INSTALLED. 8. THE EXISTING SHELL SPRINKLER SYSTEM IS DESIGNED TO BE ORDINARY HAZARD GROUP 2 WITH A .20 GPM PER SQ. FT. OF A MAXIMUM 1550 SQ.FT. AT THE RATE OF 513.3 GPM AT 70.4 PSI AT THE BASE OF RISER WITH A 250 GPM HOSE ALLOWANCE. 9. THIS IS AN EXISTING RESTAURANT BUILDING BEING COMPLETELY GUTTED OUT AND REMODELED WiTH A NEW SPRINKLER SYSTEM. 10. THE TENET IS A RESTAURANT WITH AN ORDINARY GROUP 1 HAZARD THROUGH OUT THE SPACE, AS THE AHJ DOES NOT RECOGNIZE LIGHT HAZARD, AND THIS TENET IS NOT A CHANGE OF OCCUPANCY. 11. SPRINKLER AREA +- 1500 SQ. FT. 12. THE PEAK OF THE ROOF IS OVER 20'-0", SO NO OR AREA REDUCTION TAKEN. 13. GARAGE DOORS HAVE HORIZONTAL SIDE PROTECTION UNDER THEM. 14. THE ENTIRE BUILDING IS OF COMBUSTIBLE CONSTRUCTION, AND WILL HAVE UPRIGHT COVERAGE THROUGHOUT INCLUDING ABOVE CEILINGS. SCOPE OF RORe ) -4 �I Cps PAID WI\ 1 /4e"=1 -0" =ASS AR AL _AN 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 U MATCH LINE FP -2 20 -1=177 s I691110 OE nue RE (105) wort maw, loam (10) Pacer Two, 5p (6) mama NB W. (V)161 IO@1ML SEISMS. 0 L) 1 REMOTE AREA 1 HAZARD: ORD. G1 ZONE 1 SYSTEM TYPE: WET LOCATION: SEATING FLOWING OUTLETS:21 K FACTOR=5.6 DENSITY: 0.15 REMOTE AREA: 1500 FLOW: 658.4 GPM ® 77.9 PSI SAFETY FACTOR: 69.9% INCLUDES 250 GPM HOSE ALLOWANCE NOTES: AHJ DOESN'T RECOGNIZE LIGHT HAZARD, Sprinkler Head Schedule Symbol Count Thread K -Factor Description Note Ow 37 1/2' 5.6 UP/DOWN HEAD 0 '• 68 1/2' 5.6 UPRIGHT • 5 1/2" 5.6 DRY PENDENT ore Drop • 3 1/2' 5.6 PENDENT on Drop d 6 1/2" 5.6 HORIZONTAL. SIDEWALL 4 4 1/2" 5.6 DRY HORIZONTAL DRYWALL 160 - Total Number of Heads This Floor ® • 801 PDDOrt 5006005 .41E =rasp, 155, (' ORFRL KuSE RMF If./0, GUM, 1. N' EASY RDI W 0 E01H LIMIT1861/0 K MISS, Jr OFFICE I146, 05615 028E 00 030(1610 f9N0ee, toss, re, (-SE If own, 8.567V, 101E 001061N[ A' 141 FW COpER 12' 01/1 L.2 FOR FRIER 01 8.81 HAWN SPENCER 8035 ISS, r WEE (=54 G15626 Q 1115 bar 5515(0 51466610 IO62art1L maw, DRME. 155, PA JF 153716 This stamp implies that the designing agency has submitted the plans and required supporting calculations for professional review and the drawings/calculations are found to be in significant compliance with NFPA standards, specifically pamphlet NFPA 13 - 2013, subject to review comments noted in the May 18, 2016 review letter issued by this office. The review can be considered comprehensive only to the extent of the data supplied to the reviewer. Project: Twin Peaks - Tukwila, WA 10 Brimstone Fire # 16-1017 WOMER & ASSOCIATES FIRE PROTECTION CONSULTING ENGINEERS OPE OF WORK f^ S. 180TH STREET <EY LA\ NO SCALE PAID 1 unv41LA cc 03/ WASHINGTON STATE CERTIFICATE OF COMPETENCY FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Darin Syverson 3135-0914-C Level 3 Brimstone Fire Safety gement, L.L.C. BRIMSFS918K0 Signatur■ Dat■ SYMBOLS Deerbtbn Ce1Mg Heist Elev. below Top of Steel Elev. Above Finished nor 01*01ic Reference Points LSI Common C oneasan Pokes Denote* Hanger Lration Rise up or down Electrical tight (OH1) 0 Roam Hazard 0001000410 *inkier Mend Cage cooliNG SPRINKLER PIPE REVISIONS Drawing Title FIRE PROTECTION PLAN Project No. 16-1017 Drown By MARTIN TRAICOFF Scale 1/8"=1'-0" Date 02/10/2016 DWG Type SUBMITTAL ot40 z 0 FIRE SPRINKLER w 0 z TUKWILA, 98032 7920 SOUTHCENTER i'K c w b 05‘ 0IN. aimp� c E 052 c 2W a) Q ta= NH N L I) N D,OF3 • :LEVATI ON BB / • 5 z LOW POINT DRAIN ROUTE TO THE EXTERIOR I000 SERVICE YARD 5-7 1 lc 0-1N 432., =1= (6 o - 10J' REST Ez;0M VEin-11H-E ROOF TOP GLYCOL COMPRESSORS VERIFY TRUE LOCATION ON ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS nROOF TOP CC COMPRESSOF TRUE LOCATIA ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS ICE MA( CONDEr VERIFY E LOCF nROOF TOP CC COMPRESSOF TRUE LOCATI, ARCHITECTS DRAWINGS WO EN 75-10 ROOF TOP FRE COMPRESSOR TRUE LOCATIOI ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS lj —t7DITIVI-<'`'"FliilbtFrt'Sieme 38 IE FP -2 TWI \ 'EA<S TIAL 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 1 0 tOM.tri ,11.41 DI\I\G E NO SCALE EVATIO \ AA Mei / D I \ I \ G EL EVATIO \ BB NO SCALE FINISH 0,16 Fl ECJNTNC SYS7FM P7 -C3. TYPICAL \g7 PAN- EXOSE3 VILLES STUC-JR.E' FT 13 S AREA, TO CAL 6' CLCJD )r CB P7-5 1663 PIPE ST - CON: -2 POOLE "TIP BAN _ [CP, SEE Dig 4/1260 FL0CR PLAN A0 CONC-2 PR2vjruP UP' 366 Sf 1 ALIGNED '4/ 6660 THIS END TO,, SEE Di 4/1260 9AR EI 9 VA 'I ON 0410170 BAR EVATIO \ CC NO SCALE DIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILING ROOF TRUSS, RE: PLAN This stamp implies that the designing agency has submitted the plans and required supporting calculations for professional review and the drawings/calculations are found to be in significant compliance with NFPA standards, specifically pamphlet NFPA 13 - 2013, subject to review comments noted in the May 18, 2016 review letter issued by this office. The review can be considered comprehensive only to the extent of the data supplied to the reviewer. Project: Twin Peaks - Tukwila, WA Brimstone Fire # 16-1017 WOMER & ASSOCIATES FIRE PROTECTION CONSULTING ENGINEERS P WASHINGTON STATE CERTIFICATE OF COMPETENCY FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS lint(V17-SC" Level 3 Brimstone Fire Saf,,Management,L.L.C. BRIMSFS918K0 5/13/2016 Signature Date I a ROOF SHEAHI1NG, RE: PLAN SLOPED TOP CHORD OF TRUSS SLOPE T.O. OPENING "fr RE: ARCH. T.O. PLATE RE: PLAN OCKING TRUSSES 0 4'-0' o.c. . ROOF TRUSSES NOT OWH FOR CLARITY PSON H2.5A 0 EVERY IF TRUSS UNG JOIST, RE: PLAN d jib TO. CEILING \-r RE: ARCH. (8) 16d NAILS AT EA. CEILJNG JOIST TO FACE OF STUD BLOCKING BIM. STUDS CEILING JOIST LOCATIONS STUD WALL, RE: SHEET S000 FOR STUD/SHEATHING REQ'M., RE: PLAN FOR LOCATIONS OF SHEAR WALLS WOOD HEADER WHERE APPUCABLE, RE: PLAN 5 SECTION /DOW\ 3/4" = E VATI 0 \ DD NO SCALE / SYMBOLS Stenbol Decrial. CDGang Height —4 VG • Iles. Below Top of Steed Bev. Above Finished Floor Hydraulic Reference Points Common Connection Point Denotm Hefner L000tIon Rise up or down Electrical Ught Room Hazard acetification Sprinkler Head Cogs EXISTING SPRP1KLER PIPE REVISIONS Drawing Title FIRE PROTECTION PLAN Project No. 16-1017 Drawn By MARTIN TRAICOFF Scale Date 02/10/2016 DWG Type SUBMITTAL owo z 0 KWILA, 98032 17920 SOUTHCENTER I"KWY - p 2o 3 „ so CR.4 t, 3 0 ..... • 1 N OI 0, II „ .'4 • -4-=-1 0 11307-11 C Q.' t F -E' ,,,,,, <Z.-- R / Ii_ER Ur CQpR/ ER IS ;i S - .' - TAD C) ••=k,,V• 4 IL _____ G' il I .'141.111111111Mar MM. 1111C91161116.. ROOF TOP GLYCOL COMPRESSORS VERIFY TRUE LOCATION ON ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS nROOF TOP CC COMPRESSOF TRUE LOCATIA ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS ICE MA( CONDEr VERIFY E LOCF nROOF TOP CC COMPRESSOF TRUE LOCATI, ARCHITECTS DRAWINGS WO EN 75-10 ROOF TOP FRE COMPRESSOR TRUE LOCATIOI ARCHITECT'S DRAWINGS lj —t7DITIVI-<'`'"FliilbtFrt'Sieme 38 IE FP -2 TWI \ 'EA<S TIAL 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 1 0 tOM.tri ,11.41 DI\I\G E NO SCALE EVATIO \ AA Mei / D I \ I \ G EL EVATIO \ BB NO SCALE FINISH 0,16 Fl ECJNTNC SYS7FM P7 -C3. TYPICAL \g7 PAN- EXOSE3 VILLES STUC-JR.E' FT 13 S AREA, TO CAL 6' CLCJD )r CB P7-5 1663 PIPE ST - CON: -2 POOLE "TIP BAN _ [CP, SEE Dig 4/1260 FL0CR PLAN A0 CONC-2 PR2vjruP UP' 366 Sf 1 ALIGNED '4/ 6660 THIS END TO,, SEE Di 4/1260 9AR EI 9 VA 'I ON 0410170 BAR EVATIO \ CC NO SCALE DIAPHRAGM EDGE NAILING ROOF TRUSS, RE: PLAN This stamp implies that the designing agency has submitted the plans and required supporting calculations for professional review and the drawings/calculations are found to be in significant compliance with NFPA standards, specifically pamphlet NFPA 13 - 2013, subject to review comments noted in the May 18, 2016 review letter issued by this office. The review can be considered comprehensive only to the extent of the data supplied to the reviewer. Project: Twin Peaks - Tukwila, WA Brimstone Fire # 16-1017 WOMER & ASSOCIATES FIRE PROTECTION CONSULTING ENGINEERS P WASHINGTON STATE CERTIFICATE OF COMPETENCY FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS lint(V17-SC" Level 3 Brimstone Fire Saf,,Management,L.L.C. BRIMSFS918K0 5/13/2016 Signature Date I a ROOF SHEAHI1NG, RE: PLAN SLOPED TOP CHORD OF TRUSS SLOPE T.O. OPENING "fr RE: ARCH. T.O. PLATE RE: PLAN OCKING TRUSSES 0 4'-0' o.c. . ROOF TRUSSES NOT OWH FOR CLARITY PSON H2.5A 0 EVERY IF TRUSS UNG JOIST, RE: PLAN d jib TO. CEILING \-r RE: ARCH. (8) 16d NAILS AT EA. CEILJNG JOIST TO FACE OF STUD BLOCKING BIM. STUDS CEILING JOIST LOCATIONS STUD WALL, RE: SHEET S000 FOR STUD/SHEATHING REQ'M., RE: PLAN FOR LOCATIONS OF SHEAR WALLS WOOD HEADER WHERE APPUCABLE, RE: PLAN 5 SECTION /DOW\ 3/4" = E VATI 0 \ DD NO SCALE / SYMBOLS Stenbol Decrial. CDGang Height —4 VG • Iles. Below Top of Steed Bev. Above Finished Floor Hydraulic Reference Points Common Connection Point Denotm Hefner L000tIon Rise up or down Electrical Ught Room Hazard acetification Sprinkler Head Cogs EXISTING SPRP1KLER PIPE REVISIONS Drawing Title FIRE PROTECTION PLAN Project No. 16-1017 Drawn By MARTIN TRAICOFF Scale Date 02/10/2016 DWG Type SUBMITTAL owo z 0 KWILA, 98032 17920 SOUTHCENTER I"KWY - p 2o 3 / • .Y--41 II 11161 RIESE FP 11 11 PATIO 6-10,;,,;,: (n 21-0, �ATCHUNE FP -2 t MATCHLINE FP -3 17 MEN' RESTROD 6" FIRE UG APROX. 70'-0" LF(BY OTHERS RODDED & THRUST BLOCKED PER NFPA\724) 1 ' FIRE UG APPROX 25' - EXISTING 4" FDC UG APPROX 25'- EXISTING VAULT W/METER —EXISTING PIV NEW 4" FDC UG APROX. 70'-0" LF (BY OTHERS RODDED & THRUST BLOCKED PER NFPA-24) UNDERGROUND CONTRACTOR TO TIE INTO EXISTING 6" FIRE SERVICE LINE, AND EXTEND TO NEW RISER ROOM LOCATION UNDERGROUND CONTRACTOR TO TIE INTO EXISTING 4" FDC LINE, AND EXTEND TO NEW RISER ROOM LOCATION EXISTING FDC TWI \ P -A <S DAR IAL DLA\ L\D RGOL\D 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 2'-8" uc) 1'-2" 0 4" 90 WITH 4"X3" RC © 4" FLEX COUPLING © 4" SPRINKLER DISE © 4" WET SHOTGUN RISER © 4" GLOBE_ MODEL G-3 DRY VALVE O 4" FLANGE GOOVE ADADTE © 4" GROOVED BUTTERFLY VALVE WIT TAMPER • 4" GROOVED CAP WIT 1" TAPDED DRAIN O 2" PIPESTAND 0 4" FDC CONNECTION TO -EADER © 2" MAIN DRAIN CONNECTED TO WET/DRY RISER 0 4" APOLLO MODEL 4ALF-DC-BA- Doc Ar ® 6" 90 WITH 6X4 RC O 2" DRAIN .PIPE © 2" GALV 45 O 6" FLANGE BY GOOVE ADADTE © 6" STUB UP FLANGE 6-12" AFF BY OTHES 16" FRE SERVICE UNDER GROUND BY OTHES S© EXTERIOR WALL �} SLAB ON GRADE © 4" GLOBE CHECK VALVE © 4" GROOVED 90 ® 4" FDC UNDER GROUND JG DC PLA\ 3/8"=1'-0" v—IN 0 NO SCALE This stamp implies that the designing agency has submitted the plans and required supporting calculations for professional review and the drawings/calculations are found to be in significant compliance with NFPA standards, specifically pamphlet NFPA 13 — 2013, subject to review comments noted in the May 18, 2016 review letter issued by this office. The review con be considered comprehensive only to the extent of the data supplied to the reviewer. Project: Twin Peaks — Tukwila, WA Brimstone Fire # 16-1017 WOMER & ASSOCIATES FIRE PROTECTION CONSULTING ENGINEERS WASHINGTON STATE CERTIFICATE OF COMPETENCY FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS Darin Syverson 3135-0914-C Level 3 Brimstone Fire Safety gement, L.L.C. BRIMSFS918K0 Signature Date • Swnbd fees') Coding Hwpht Eau Bolos Top of Stall Elan. Mow Finished Floor 0 ""7(— C ail -711) 0 Hydraulic Reference Pointe Common Conneaeon Point Donate. Hangr Locating) Moo up or dam Bacolod Lot Room Hazard Classification Wally Hood Cope EASING SPPoNKLER PPE REVISIONS Drawing Title FIRE PROTECTION PLAN Project No. 16-1017 Drown By MARTIN TRAICOFF Scale SEE PLAN Date 04/13/2016 DWG Type sueulrrx. Dec J 0 DEAXCS UNDER GROUND F- TUKWILA, 98032 17920 SOUTHCENTER IKWY ~ N -.▪ 1 8 =▪ 3 tU asp an - eat 0 =3 coN a GI CO) 10 • N I ▪ N 3 O 3 ACCEPTED Without Comments As Noted In Red Per The Ajttached Letter r=tee clans hone been rovinn•r_d iziy The Tukwila Fire dread for conferi na..._.t-.re:icity �: re- is suidioetto snoreend o viciationo adopted inal acceptance is aubect to r•..•'_ ton. and inspection t The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. Date: alk/f`t By: - J/l ©19 3 ZLKne ,.. h -Y L-O,u. TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT Please call: 575-4407 and give this job No. 99-F-6Y�c and exact address for shut. down or restoration approval. WASHINGTON ALARM, INC: 1253 S. JACKSON STREET SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98144.2018. I FRCP) !ANN! KEY TO ALARM SYMBOLS Fire Warm Control ST Scan Communicator Fire Annunciator EOL End of Lme N Post Indicator Valve O Smoke Detector FS Flow Snitch Q Heat Detector Tamper Se,ttlt O Fixed Tem, Heat PS Pressure Swdcn CD Outside Sell Strobe ❑F Manuel Poll Station Di Dot Han, SR Smoke Damper Only _ Ci> 30C Strobe Only DQ Duct Detector - 75 750 Strobe Only ❑R - Elevate Recall - DH - Door Holder _ 01 t5C Horn/Strobe DI 75C Horn/Strobe 3e SOC Harnte000e arl4 tt0C Kan/Strobe Storw Nc,th1 rJp. +H ArvO E N. Stapt) i t Sc * 1 , c ,{ .5 C IID ti E Ver Su sru — II t 187 o r „cur, e b0 5' ,` I t ret Washington Alarm, Inc. 1253 S Jackson St Seattle, WA 98144 (206)328-3288 contact: Neal Rider Segale Building 18340 Southcenter Pkwy Tukwila, WA 98188 MIS MEWg LE FEB ij 4 199 t L, b I tC /ui-'-- SCALE: DATE: APPROVED BY: DRAWN BY REVWED DRAWING NUMBER 3-1, Dining Dining Dining Dining F1 Prep Cooking Service Men fl To FACP Fire Alarm Plan 1/8" = 1' — 0" Women Lobby Cooler Rest Room Office efus Dry Storage Storag Liquor Storage Lounge To FACP 3-7 zcNE 5 ZONE DF.SCR/PTION SPRINKLER WATERFLOW 2. SPRINKLER TAPER . PlV SUPERVISION 4. KITCHEN HOOD S AUTOMATIC & MAIIUAL DETECTION s. — 8. SPARES ZONE 8 ZONE 7 ZONE 6 zcNE 4 ZONE 3 ZONE 2 ZONE t u 41/ SILENT KMGHT 5207 FIRE ALARM CONTROL COMMUNICATOR 0 HOW OCT /2 X5 HOW CKT. f3 SPRNCEe BELL HORN aa. /3 OCT /2 ■ ■ CENTR RISER DIAGRAM PFKrE LAE /N CorECT ro PtG'E OE /2 Fame N COVECT LIEACA Tm WOVAC CROW FOR FRIARY POWER ACCEPTED Without Comments As Noted in Red 0 Per The Attached Letter These plans have been reviewed by The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau for conformance with current city standards. Acceptance is subject to errors and omissions which do not authorize violations of adopted andards and ordinances. The responsibility for the e equacy of design rests totally with the designer. Additions, deletions or revisions to these drawings after this date will void this acceptance and will require a resubmittal of revised drawings for.subsequent approval. TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT Please call: 575.4407 and give this job No. 99--FN7. and exact address for shut- down or restoration approval. SYMBOL LEGEND Final acceptance is subject to field test and inspection The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. Date: 1 f //f y By...i 5/2— (j)2,62 -4. -r - i 2_- ()2%e2�r- A/( oe ,nmiA;r ;") pe n FPS+ 72- V ive / Pro/Jee---th sp.-Acriv7 cs 0 0 0 FEE ALARM CONTRA PANEL ITE AM1X]ATCR MANIAC FUL STATION. WALL WANT 048'0 -ES IFF. SMOKE DETECTOR 135'RATE Cf REE. FEAT cETECTCR FEE ALMA HORN k STROEE LIGHT. WALL MINT 080 NOES OR 6 NOES FELON CELNG *1 -CI EVER 6 LOWER FRE ALARM STROff LOOT. WALL MOUNT 0 80 NOES OR 6 143 -ES EaCW CUM WHAT EVER 6 LOWER. SFRMER BELL SPl6Ia.ER SYSTEM WATERFLOW SNITCH SPRti4ER SYSTEM TAMER SWITCH SFRNQER SYSTEM N.V. SW1T0-1 ECL tBCATES ETD CF LIE DEICE r 3 Project Nerve: NEWP6RT BAY RESTAURANT / SOUTHCENTER PKWY. & SOU -111 van St )atc 1I13/8 ` r FRE ALARMt F. sem« As sham ALARMCJ055CW b Date Reviser Date Reweion SECURITY A P.O. ACE FIRE 1 SYSTEMS AMON N "4"44-16115 IA Edket-j;.5o9 Sheet- 1. Of. 1 AM prr4 BOX 881MI, JAN 15 1999 SHEET DRAWING TITLE FA01 COVER PAGE - SHEET SCHEDULE FA02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NOTES, SCOPE OF WORK AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FA03 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BATTERY AND VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS AND RISER DIAGRAM FA04 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LAYOUT - FLOOR PLAN ACCEPTED O Without Comments 12( As Noted in Real ❑ Per The Attached Letter These plans have bei • reviewed by The Tukwila Fire "-evention Burean aanformance with current City M_ ndards. Acceri7 cubject to errors and niosions wh±c`..,,r.norize violations of adopted andards ana �.-: ` =mry rhe responsibility for the equacy of des c:, *j c '.:;Wily with the designer. ;dd_dons, da!Fvacl,n ,y s to these drawings after this date will vo,d t1- . a -e niece and will require a resubmitt,+ s z; subsequent approval. Final accaora . e : s• x = ..d cast and inspection by The Tukwila FirM P: ;,= =au. Date: %.-AT I 51 NOTICE A completed, signed, Tukwila Fire Deportment Pre-test Certificate must be presented to the Inspector prior to commencement of Acceptance Testis ig of any Fire Alarm and Detection Systems. Failure of test will result in a Re -inspection Fee and termination ct the testing- TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT call Z05-575-4407 and giva this Fire Permit No. /G-1-l3y and exact address for shut- ,, .;own or resu; adc.n rpprov'at. �I,J 17rf4kt.- Iee_J t L•141.p oL. FA ah T.I� 11 la, drr4.k...4 k�S ISSUE SUBMITTAL SUBMITTAL SUBMITTAL SUBMITTAL DATE 06-07-16 06-07-16 06-07-16 06-07-16 Convergent Security Solutions Convergence Center of Excellence TWIN PEAKS 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY TUKWILAI. WA 98188 PAID jli'l 10 2015 TUKWILA FIRE REVISION RECORD REV DATE ISSUE DESCRIPTION BY AT5. DRlNKSS%SCENICVIESu GENERAL NOTES: INVENTION ARE THE PROPERTY OF BE USED ONLY FOR REFERENCE SUPPLIED. USE IS LIMITED TO THE CONTAINED HEREIN SHALL PARTY WITHOUT THE EXPRESS INC. CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS. ALL APPLICABLE TRADES. FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. SECURITY SOLUTIONS FLOOR PLANS. 1. THESE DRAWINGS, THEIR DESIGN, DETAIL AND STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS, INC. AND SHALL WORK ON THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY ARE CUSTOMER AND/OR END USER AND THE INFORMATION NOT BE COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY OUTSIDE WRITTEN CONSENT OF STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS, 2. INSTALLATION METHODS TO MEET ALL APPLICABLE 3. COORDINATE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION WITH 4. REFER TO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MANUALS S. DIRECT ANY TECHNICAL QUESTIONS TO THE STANLEY ENGINEERING STAFF. R. FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS REFER TO BUILDING a# STANLEY, RICHARDS�SUf1E202�t� „: Security - PH.425-957-7000 FX.425-746-0084 z...v.... il * www.stanleycss.com Convergence Center of Excellence STANLEY Convergent Security Solutions, Inc. CUSTOMER TWIN PEAKS SITE LOCATION 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY TUKWILA, WA 98188 TITLE COVER PAGE - SHEET SCHEDULE ENGINEER DATE 06-07-16 scALE JOB NO N.T.S 7097695 PROJECT MANAGER SHEET NO FA01 REv. 0 JP BY P -r10 .helPgate-Inexam 4738TJa EQUIPMENT LEGEND SCOPE OF WORK 1. A NEW FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FOR A NEW TWIN PEAKS LOCATED AT 17920 6. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DUCT DETECTORS WILL BE INSTALLED IN HVAC DESCRIPTION SOUTHCENTER PKWY, TUKWILA, WA 98188, BUILDING HAS ONE FLOOR AND UNITS; SYSTEMS FLOWING OVER 2,000 CFM AND MONITORED BY FIRE IFACPI A TOTAL AREA OF 8,909 SQF. ALARM SYSTEM. DUCT DETECTOR ACTIVATION WILL SHUT DOWN ALL FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL, ADDRESSABLE SURFACE A/C UNITS. 2. THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MONITORING ONLY USE A NEW ADDRESSABLE FCPS24FS6 BOOSTER POWER SUPPLY FACP FIRELITE MS -25: 7. VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS BASED ON END OF USEFUL BATTERY IFSAI FIRELITE LIFE 20.4 VDC 3. ALL FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT FOR THIS PROJECT SHALL BE RATED 2 ®WP " POWER LIMITED " 8. THIS SYSTEM IS A CENTRAL STATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AND WILL HORN STROBE RED MULTI CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO BE PROVIDED WITH 24 HOURS OF SECONDARY POWER SUPPLY. 4. THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL SHALL HAVE A STANDBY BATTERY STANLEY SECURITY SHALL BE UTILIZED AS A UL LISTED CENTRAL HORN STROBE RED HIGH CD, CEILING MOUNT BACKUP PROVIDING BATTERY POWER CAPACITY FOR THE ENTIRE SYSTEM STATION MONITORING AGENCY. CENTRAL STATION INFORMATION IS: I'e_I TO OPERATE FOR 24 HOURS IN NORMAL MODE AND THEN, AT THE END STANLEY CONVERGENT SECURITY SOLUTIONS, INC, SUITE 300, 6000 HORN STROBE RED MULTI CD, CEILING MOUNT OF THE PERIOD, FOR 5 MINUTES IN THE EMERGENCY MODE. NATHAN LN N, MINNEAPOLIS, MN 55442(ID# 100410-968) - PHONE: ytp SYSTEM SENSOR 877.476.4968 5. MINIMUM CABLE SIZE: 9. COMMUNICATION METHOD: +1i H A. # 18 AWG COPPER (2C # 18 FPLP) FOR: SMOKE DETECTORS, PULL DACT. DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER. FIRE ALARM STROBE WHITE HIGH CD, CEILING MOUNT STATIONS, B. # 14 AWG COPPER (2C # 14 FPLP) FOR: SPEAKERS, STROBES AND DACT IS PART OF MAIN FACP AND WILL PERFORM AS PER NFPA 72 (26.6.3.2) AND NFPA 101, TWO TELEPHONE LINE CONNECTIONS ef HORN/STROBES NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES. AS APPLICABLE. WITH LOCAL NUMBERS TO DIAL REMOTE SUPERVISING STATION, BY STROBE RED MULTI CD, CEILING MOUNT C. # 18 AWG COPPER (4C # 18 FPLP) FOR: FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR MEANS OF PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK LOOP START. © FIRELITE SILENCING/RESET OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PERMITTED ONLY WITH MINI -MONITOR MODULE 4" SQUARE KEY OR ACCESS CODE FROM FIRE ALARM PANEL. IH000) - INTERNET BASED TELCO -COMMUNICATIONS (COMCAST, FIOS, ETC.) KITCHEN HOOD SURFACE ARE NOT ALLOWED. QD FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NOTES 1. SHALL NOT 'T' TAP ANY SIGNAL OR INITIATING CIRCUITS. 16. FIRE ALARM PANELS SHALL HAVE DEDICATED A/C CIRCUIT, 2. DEVICES MUST BE WIRED IN SEQUENCE SHOWN, OR NOTIFY STANLEY OVERCURRENT DEVICE SHALL BE PROTECTED FROM UNAUTHORIZED BG-12LX SECURITY. USE AND BE LABELED IN RED "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT". 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL CABLING PER NEC. 17. ALL JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE LABELED "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT" 4. SHALL LEAVE 12'(FOOT) PIGTAILS AT FACP. IN RED. THE INSIDE AND OUTSIDE OF BACK BOXES SHALL BE PAINTED 5. SHALL BRING CONDUIT INTO FACP ONLY THROUGH KNOCKOUTS PROVIDED. RED. 6. MAINTAIN POLARITY ON ALL DEVICES, KEEPING CIRCUITS CLEAR OF ALL 18. NO SMOKE CONTROL PROVIDED. 4 GROUNDS AND SHORTS. 19. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SHALL BE POWER -LIMITED PER NEC. 7. VERIFY ALL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS WITH OWNER. 20. AUDIBLE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT SHALL BE DISTINCTIVE 8. DO NOT INSTALL A DETECTOR OR WIRING LESS THAN 3 FEET FROM A LIGHT FIXTURE BALLAST. THREE -PULSE TEMPORAL PATTERN FOR FIRE ALARM EVACUATION, SET HORNS ON "HIGH" FOR 88DB © 10'. 9. DO NOT INSTALL A DETECTOR LESS THAN 3 FEET FROM AN AIR HANDLER 21. AUDIO AND VISUAL NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT SHALL BE 2 VENT. SYNCHRONIZED. 10. SMOKE OR HEAT DETECTORS MOUNTED IN AN OPEN CEILING AREA SHALL 22. TAG ALL WIRING ENTERING CABINET(S) PER DRAWING. 4 BE MOUNTED AS CLOSE TO THE DECK AS POSSIBLE. MOUNTING TO THE 23. FULLY SPRINKLED FACILITY. RTS151 BOTTOM OF AN OPEN TRUSS IS NOT ACCEPTABLE. 24. CODE SUMMARY/COMPLIANCE: 11. INTERFACE CONTROLS FROM THE FACP SHALL BE WITHIN 3' OF THE 2013 NFPA70 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE BEING CONTROLLED. 2013 NFPA72 NATIONAL FIRE ALARM CODE 12. MOUNT PULL STATIONS 48" AFF TO TOP OF DEVICE. CITY TUKWILA, WASHINGTON ORDINANCE No. 2437 13. MOUNT WALL HORN/STROBE 80" AFF TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE OR 6" FROM 25. HORN/STROBE DEVICE LABEL DESCRIPTION: THE CEILING, WHICH EVER IS LOWER. CABLE TYPE CIRCUIT NUMBER 14. DUCT DETECTORS PROVIDED BY OTHERS. FIRE ALARM TO HANDLE POINT OF CONNECT ONLY. 15. VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS HAVE BEEN PERFORMED UTILIZING --- -1 DEVICE NUMBER IN CIRCUIT END -OF -LINE METHOD. EQUIPMENT LEGEND QTY SYM MANUFACTURER MODEL # DESCRIPTION BACKBOX 1 IFACPI FIRELITE MS -25 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL, ADDRESSABLE SURFACE 1 IFcPsI FIRELITE FCPS24FS6 BOOSTER POWER SUPPLY SURFACE 1 IFSAI FIRELITE ANN -80 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SURFACE 2 ®WP SYSTEM SENSOR PC2RK HORN STROBE RED MULTI CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 4 EH SYSTEM SENSOR PC2RH HORN STROBE RED HIGH CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 3 I'e_I SYSTEM SENSOR PC2R HORN STROBE RED MULTI CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 4 ytp SYSTEM SENSOR P2RK HORN STROBE RED MULTI CD, WEATHER PROOF, WALL MOUNT 4" SQUARE 1 +1i H SYSTEM SENSOR SCRH STROBE WHITE HIGH CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 5 ef SYSTEM SENSOR SCR STROBE RED MULTI CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 2 © FIRELITE MMF-301 MINI -MONITOR MODULE 4" SQUARE 2 IH000) - BY OTHERS KITCHEN HOOD SURFACE 2 QD FIRELITE MDF300 MONITOR MODULE DUAL, ADDRESSABLE 4" SQUARE 4 © FIRELITE BG-12LX MANUAL PULL STATION, ADDRESSABLE 1 GANG, DEEP 1 0 FIRELITE SD355 PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR W/ B114LPBT 4" OCTO 4 El FIRELITE CRF -300 RELAY CONTROL MODULE 4" SQUARE 4 '8 FIRELITE D355PL DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR (PROVIDE BY OTHER) SURFACE 1 - BY OTHERS EXISTING SPRINKLER FLOW SWITCH - 2 - BY OTHERS EXISTING SPRINKLER TAMPER SWITCH - 4 ❑T SYSTEM SENSOR RTS151 REMOTE TEST STATION SINGLE GANG TOTAL OF NUMBER OF DEVICES BEING INSTALLED: 49 NOTES: 1. DUCT DETECTORS SHALL REPORT A "SUPERVISORY" SIGNAL 2. TAMPER SWITCH SHALL HAVE A DISTINCTIVE SIGNAL PATHWAY CLASS DESIGNATION PATHWAY CLASS: SLC: AD BM CO DO ED X IDC: AD Bl CD DO ED X NAC: AD BM CD D❑ ED X❑ PATHWAY SURVIVABILITY LEVEL: 0❑ 1. 20 30 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SMOKE O ® O PULL STATION ALARM • ® A GENERAL TROUBLE CONDITION GENERAL SUPERVISORY CONDITION DUCT DETECTOR CONDITION 1 ► S DRINKS' SCENIC VIEES CABLE LEGEND TYPE SYSTEM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION A FIRE ALARM INITIATING CIRCUIT KITCHEN HOOD SYSTEM B FIRE ALARM SLC LOOP UNSHIELDED 18AWG, 2C, FPLP O • UNSHIELDED 14AWG, 2C, FPLP D FIRE ALARM AUDIO CIRCUIT SPRINKLER WATER FLOW SWITCH ® O • F DUCT DETECTOR RESER CIRCUIT 1804, 4 -CON, FPLP G SPRINKLER WIRE FORM MONITOR TO PIV, BACKFLOW DEVICES CIRCUIT. SPRINKLER TAMPER SWITCH GENERAL NOTES: 1. THESE DRAWINGS, THEIR DESIGN, DETAIL AND INVENTION ARE THE PROPERTY OF STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS, INC. AND SHALL RE USED ONLY FOR REFERENCE WORK ON THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY ARE SUPPLIED. USE IS LIMITED TO THE CUSTOMER AND/OR END USER AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHALL NOT RE COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY OUTSIDE PARTY WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS, INC. 2. INSTALLATION METHODS TO MEET ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS. 3. COORDINATE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION WITH ALL APPLICABLE TRADES. 4. REFER TO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MANUALS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. S. DIRECT ANY TECHNICAL QUESTIONS TO THE STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS ENGINEERING STAFF. H. FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS REFER TO BUILDING FLOOR PLANS. ' S TA N LEY ` BELu RICHARDS ROAD, SUITE 202 LEVU WA 98005 .7 Security - PH 425-957-7000 FX 425446-0084 - =.` www.stanleycss.com Convergence Center of Excellence STANLEY Convergent Security Solutions, Inc. CUSTOMER TWIN PEAKS BrrE LOCATION 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY TUKWILA, WA 98188 TITLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NOTES, SCOPE OF WORK AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION REVISION RECORD REV DATE ISSUE DESCRIPTION BY z,- 1 ► S DRINKS' SCENIC VIEES CABLE LEGEND TYPE SYSTEM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION A FIRE ALARM INITIATING CIRCUIT 18GA, 4 -CON, FPLP B FIRE ALARM SLC LOOP UNSHIELDED 18AWG, 2C, FPLP C FIRE ALARM STROBE/HORN CIRCUIT UNSHIELDED 14AWG, 2C, FPLP D FIRE ALARM AUDIO CIRCUIT 18GA, 2 -CON, FPLP E FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR CIRCUIT 186A, 4 -CON, FPLP F DUCT DETECTOR RESER CIRCUIT 1804, 4 -CON, FPLP G SPRINKLER WIRE FORM MONITOR TO PIV, BACKFLOW DEVICES CIRCUIT. 14GA, 4 -CON, THHN GENERAL NOTES: 1. THESE DRAWINGS, THEIR DESIGN, DETAIL AND INVENTION ARE THE PROPERTY OF STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS, INC. AND SHALL RE USED ONLY FOR REFERENCE WORK ON THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY ARE SUPPLIED. USE IS LIMITED TO THE CUSTOMER AND/OR END USER AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHALL NOT RE COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY OUTSIDE PARTY WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS, INC. 2. INSTALLATION METHODS TO MEET ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS. 3. COORDINATE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION WITH ALL APPLICABLE TRADES. 4. REFER TO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MANUALS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. S. DIRECT ANY TECHNICAL QUESTIONS TO THE STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS ENGINEERING STAFF. H. FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS REFER TO BUILDING FLOOR PLANS. ' S TA N LEY ` BELu RICHARDS ROAD, SUITE 202 LEVU WA 98005 .7 Security - PH 425-957-7000 FX 425446-0084 - =.` www.stanleycss.com Convergence Center of Excellence STANLEY Convergent Security Solutions, Inc. CUSTOMER TWIN PEAKS BrrE LOCATION 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY TUKWILA, WA 98188 TITLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM NOTES, SCOPE OF WORK AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ENGINEER G 06-07-16 SCALE N.T.S p7097695 PROJECT MANAGER SHEET NO. F AHO2 L REV. 0 lir BY JPEF BY 4735T4P-r10 www.A•IPgate-Inc.com FIRE ALARM RISER DIAGRAM 75 CD C3--1 185 CD 110 CD 115 CD 75 CD FCPS FACP 15 CD �(C) U C3-2 WP WP C3-3 C3-4 C3-5 15 CD 15 CD 75 CD 30 CD 15 CD C2-4 C2-5 C2-1 C2-2 150 CD j -(c) H C1-1 C2-3 IEOL C2-6 15 CD 30 CD 185 CD 185 CD 185 CD >120 VAC (BY OTHERS) WP )WP HH C1-2 C1-3 C1-4 >120 VAC (BY OTHERS) D-1 rR M-1 FSA 15 CD 110 CD WP C1-5 C1-6 C1-7 C1-8 L_ _ D-2 R.T.0-1 D D P M-13 M-11 M-10 M-9 I M-14 M-12 I L J SPRINKLER RISER M-8 M-7 M-6 HOOD S lEOL -5 HOOD iEOL FCPS-1-VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS NAC CIRCUIT TOTAL AMPS PER CIRCUIT LENGTH (FEET) WIRE GAUGE I-CPS-CKT.#1 1.625 201.464 I-CPS-CKT.#2 0.547 105.142 Awg-14 Awg-14 FCPS-CKT.#3 1.061 156.714 Awg-14 LAST DEVICE VOLTAGE (VDC) 18.344 VOLTAGE DROP (VDC) 20.039 19.356 2.056 0.361 1.044 3.233 FRCP - BATTERY CALCULATIONS QTY DESCRIPTION UNIT STANDBY CURRENT (A) STANDBY CURRENT (A) UNIT ALARM CURRENT (A) ALARM CURRENT (A) 1 FIRELITE - MS -25 - FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL, ADDRESSABLE 0.135 0.135 0.220 0.22 1 FIRELITE - ANN -80 - REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR 0.037 0.037 0.040 0.04 1 FIRELITE - SD355 - PROTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR W/B114LPBT 0.00030 0.0003 0.0065 0.0065 2 FIRELITE - MMF-301 - MINI -MONITOR MODULE 0.00035 0.0007 0.0006 0.0012 2 FIRELITE - MDF300 - MONITOR MODULE DUAL, ADDRESSABLE 0.00075 0.0015 0.00650 0.013 4 FIRELITE - D355PL - INNOVAIRFLEX DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR ADDRESSABLE 0.00030 0.0012 0.001 0.004 4 FIRELITE - CRF -300 - RELAY CONTROL MODULE 0.00025 0.001 0.0065 0.026 4 FIRELITE - BG-12LX - MANUAL PULL STATION, ADDRESSABLE 0.000375 0.0015 0.005 0.02 3 SYSTEM SENSOR-PC2RH-185 CD [B] TOTAL STANDBY CURRENT (A) 0.1782 [A] TOTAL ALARM CURRENT (A) 0.3307 1 SYSTEM SENSOR-PC2RK-115 CD [C] STAND Y24 HOURS 0 [D] ALARM TIME MINUTES 5 1 SYSTEM SENSOR-PC2RK-75 CD [B]X[C]=[E] TOTAL STANDBY AMP HOURS 4.277 [D]/60= [F] ALARM TIME IN HOURS 0.083 3 SYSTEM SENSOR -SCR -15 CD [A]X[F]=[G] TOTAL ALARM AMP -HOURS 0.028 [E]+[G]=[H] TOTAL AMP -HOURS 4.304 1 SYSTEM SENSOR -SCR -30 CD [H]x1.2= [I] TOTAL AMP HOURS X BY DERATING FACTOR 5.165 BATTERY REQUIRED IN AMP -HOURS 7 CALCULATION NOTES: BATTERY CAPACITY: 24 HOURS ALERTING DEVICES SOUND DURATION: 5 MIN DERATING FACTOR: 15% FCPS 1 - BATTERY CALCULATIONS QTY DESCRIPTION UNIT STANDBY CURRENT (A) STANDBY CURRENT (A) UNIT ALARM CURRENT (A) ALARM CURRENT (A) 1 FIRELITE - FCPS24FS6 - BOOSTER POWER SUPPLY 0.091 0.091 0.145 0.145 1 SYSTEM SENSOR-P2RK-110 CD 0 0 0.212 0.212 2 SYSTEM SENSOR-P2RK-15 CD 0 0 0.079 0.158 1 SYSTEM SENSOR-P2RK-30 CD 0 0 0.116 0.116 1 SYSTEM SENSOR-PC2R-110 CD 0 0 0.212 0.212 1 SYSTEM SENSOR-PC2R-15 CD 0 0 0.079 0.079 1 SYSTEM SENSOR-PC2R-75 CD 0 0 0.176 0.176 1 SYSTEM SENSOR-PC2RH-150 CD 0 0 0.259 0.259 3 SYSTEM SENSOR-PC2RH-185 CD 0 0 0.297 0.891 1 SYSTEM SENSOR-PC2RK-115 CD 0 0 0.218 0.218 1 SYSTEM SENSOR-PC2RK-75 CD 0 0 0.176 0.176 3 SYSTEM SENSOR -SCR -15 CD 0 0 0.066 0.198 1 SYSTEM SENSOR -SCR -30 CD 0 0 0.094 0.094 1 SYSTEM SENSOR -SCR -75 CD 0 0 0.158 0.158 1 SYSTEM SENSOR-SCRH-185 CD 0 0 0.286 0.286 [B] TOTAL STANDBY CURRENT (A) 0.091 [A] TOTAL ALARM CURRENT (A) 3.378 [C] STANDBY HOURS 24 [D] ALARM TIME MINUTES 5 [B]X[C]=[E] TOTAL STANDBY AMP HOURS 2.184 [D]/60= [F] ALARM TIME IN HOURS 0.083 [A]X[F]=[G] TOTAL ALARM AMP -HOURS 0.282 [E]+[G]=[H] TOTAL AMP -HOURS 2.466 [H]x1.2= [I] TOTAL AMP HOURS X BY DERATING FACTOR 2.959 BATTERY REQUIRED IN AMP -HOURS 7 CALCULATION NOTES: BATTERY CAPACITY: 24 HOURS ALERTING DEVICES SOUND DURATION: 5 MIN DERATING FACTOR: 15% REVISION RECORD REV DATE ISSUE DESCRIPTION BY � rpt • DRINKS- . SCENICVIE, Shr CABLE LEGEND TYPE SYSTEM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION A FIRE ALARM INITIATING CIRCUIT IBCA, 4 -CON, FPLP B FIRE ALARM SLC LOOP UNSHIELDED 18AWO, 2C, FPLP C FIRE ALARM STROBE/HORN CIRCUIT UNSHIELDED 14AWG, 2C, FPLP D FIRE ALARM AUDIO CIRCUIT 180A, 2 -CON, FPLP E FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR CIRCUIT 180A, 4 -CON, FPLP F DUCT DETECTOR RESET CIRCUIT 18GA, 4 -CON, FPLP 0 SPRINKLER WIRE FORM MONITOR TO Ply, BACKFLOW DEVICES CIRCUIT. 14GA, 4 -CON, THEN GENERAL NOTES: 1. THESE DRAWINGS, THEIR DESIGN, DETAIL AND INVENTION ARE THE PROPERTY OF STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS, INC. AND SHALL BE USED ONLY FOR REFERENCE WORK ON THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY ARE SUPPLIED. USE IS LIMITED TO THE CUSTOMER AND/OR END USER AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHALL NOT BE COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY OUTSIDE PARTY WITHOUT TEE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS, INC. 2. INSTALLATION METHODS TO MEET ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS. 3. COORDINATE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION WITH ALL APPLICABLE TRADES. 4. REFER TO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MANUALS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. 8. DIRECT ANY TECHNICAL QUESTIONS TO THE STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS ENGINEERING STAFF. 8. FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS REFER TO BUILDING FLOOR PLANS. STANLEY'�f ARD�AR9 800 SU77E202 g. Security" -'- PH.425-957-7000 FX425-746-0084 _ F ', www.stanieycss.com Convergence Center of Excellence STANLEY Convergent Security Solutions, Inc. CUSTOMER TWIN PEAKS SITE LOCATION 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY TUKWILA, WA 98188 TITLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM BATTERY AND VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS AND RISER DIAGRAM ENGINEERGATE 06.07-16 SCAL E JOS NO N.T.S 7097695 PROJECT MANAGER SHEET NO REV. DRAWN BY JP FA03 0 E 443g -1 -JP -MOO www.nelpe.te-Inc.cox HOOD) 150 CD C1-1 l -c (C) THIS ROOM IS MECHANICALLY VENTILATED f J PROVIDE 120VAC DEDICATED CIRCUITS FOR FIRE ALARM PANEL AND POWER SUPPLY FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LAYOUT - FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/8"=11-0" SPRINKLER t -` ( I ( I I RISER FOIE DTIVERIFFIIED I3I NOTE: ALL DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS PROVIDED BY OTHERS. EQUIPMENT LEGEND QTY SYM MANUFACTURER MODEL # DESCRIPTION BACKBOX IFACPI FIRELITE MS -25 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL ADDRESSABLE SURFACE 1 IFCPsI FIRELITE FCPS24FS6 BOOSTER POWER SUPPLY SURFACE 1 IFSAI FIRELITE ANN -80 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SURFACE 2 ®WP SYSTEM SENSOR PC2RK HORN STROBE RED MULTI CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 4 ®H SYSTEM SENSOR PC2RH HORN STROBE RED HIGH CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 3 ® SYSTEM SENSOR PC2R HORN STROBE RED MULTI CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 4 C WP SYSTEM SENSOR P2RK HORN STROBE RED MULTI CD, WEATHER PROOF, WALL MOUNT 4" SQUARE 1 ISI H SYSTEM SENSOR SCRH STROBE WHITE HIGH CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 5 I, SYSTEM SENSOR SCR STROBE RED MULTI CD, CEILING MOUNT 4" OCTO 2 GI FIRELITE MMF-301 MINI -MONITOR MODULE 4" SQUARE 2 IHooDI — BY OTHERS KITCHEN HOOD SURFACE 2 QD FIRELITE MDF300 MONITOR MODULE DUAL, ADDRESSABLE 4" SQUARE 4 © FIRELITE BG-12LX MANUAL PULL STATION, ADDRESSABLE I GANG, DEEP 1 © FIRELITE SD355 PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR W/ B114LPBT 4" OCTO 4 ® FIRELITE CRF -300 RELAY CONTROL MODULE 4" SQUARE 4 V FIRELITE D355PL DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR (PROVIDE BY OTHER) SURFACE 1 8 - BY OTHERS EXISTING SPRINKLER FLOW SWITCH - 2Q - BY OTHERS EXISTING SPRINKLER TAMPER SWITCH - 4 pT SYSTEM SENSOR RTS151 REMOTE TEST STATION SINGLE GANG TOTAL OF NUMBER OF DEVICES BEING INSTALLED: 49 REVISION RECORD REV DATE ISSUE DESCRIPTION BY M J EAT •, DRI S '5CENlCVIEWS • CABLE LEGEND TYPE SYSTEM DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION A FIRE ALARM INITIATING CIRCUIT 18GA, 4 -CON, FPLP B FIRE ALARM SLC LOOP UNSHIELDED 18AWG, 2C, FPLP C FIRE ALARM STROBE/HORN CIRCUIT UNSHIELDED 14AWG. 2C, FPLP D FIRE ALARM AUDIO CIRCUIT 18GA, 2 -CON, FPLP E FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR CIRCUIT 18GA, 4 -CON, FPLP F DUCT DETECTOR RESET CIRCUIT 18GA, 4 -CON, FPLP G SPRINKLER WIRE FORM MONITOR TO PLV, BACKFLOW DEVICES CIRCUIT. 14GA, 4 -CON, THHN GENERAL NOTES: 1. THESE DRAWINGS, THEIR DESIGN, DETAIL AND INVENTION ARE THE PROPERTY OF STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS, INC. AND SHALL BE USED ONLY FOR REFERENCE WORK ON THE PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY ARE SUPPLIED. USE IS LIMITED TO THE CUSTOMER AND/OR END USER AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHALL NOT BE COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY OUTSIDE PARTY WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS, INC. 2. INSTALLATION METHODS TO MEET ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS. 3. COORDINATE EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION WITH ALL APPLICABLE TRADES. 4. REFER TO EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION MANUALS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. S. DIRECT ANY TECHNICAL QUESTIONS TO THE STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS ENGINEERING STAFF. 6. FOR EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS REFER TO BUILDING FLOOR PLANS. 1 STANLEY ' 2TOOL0L��AROO�S A'E202 Security - PH.425-957-7000 FX -425-746-0084 •.-www.stanleycss.com Convergence Center of Excellence STANLEY Convergent Security Solutions, Inc. CUSTOMER TWIN PEAKS SITE LOCATION 17920 SOUTHCENTER PKWY TUKWILA, WA 98188 TITLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM LAYOUT - FLOOR PLAN ENGINEER DATE 06-07-16 SCALE AS NOTED 7097695 PROJECT MANAGER SHEET NO. FA04 REV. 0 JPDRAINS 9Y 473EF 5TJP-r10 www.helpgatmino.eom eg" 0 r`W(v{Klrffn'iR'L e GA-5Wm.Vg_ lifSul- Pitt q &ytwa UL3ou I (Ai, ACCEPTED -9 Without Comments As Noted in Red Per The Attached Letter These plans have bee;., viewed Tukwila City EirePrevention sure E wto cnt standards. Acte .rbject to errors and omissions whicc .horize violations of aoopted standards anti The responsinliley for the dequacy of desirt trtitalliy with theciesigner. Additions, deleto,it, ittii iaio.=s to these drawings atter rIs date w e void fhis acceptance and wit require a ubmittai of rcJc- a cc subsequent approval. Final acceptance is suoject floe cast and Inspection by The Tukwila Fire Preveruicrl F.ureau. 1 Date: (,'l0'/b 6y: ,I \ TES r I i I • // 7 /tel / AND Edit NOZZLES SLIED HY CAS V PATTERN IS BLOCKE➢ BY SHELVING. 'ENT INE FROM TANK TO FIRST NUZZLE D CHARBROILER DROPS ARE SNIPPED LOOSE. TORY PIPING EKTENUG A MAXIMUM OF 6' BOVE THE TOP OF TIC MOON - APPLIANCE ➢IMENSIONS LISTED REPRESENT THE COMING SURFACE SIZE. NOT THE OVERALL APPLIANCE SIZE. .._, - THISFIRE SYSTEM COMPLIES WITH U1. 300 REQUIREMENTST',: Job ST 2469683 Job Now, THIN PEAKS - TUKWILA, WA Dram By, System Slwr ANSIA-3A/3k/3k Tot. FP requiretl: 34 II II 1; II I O ,I .....-o I tl.0 OSN;$0.001 EO*C 60' VW x 30' Hon Q 35 KI (4+i t5I W 3041 fou 2t`i,3{a Sol pgppgp - 17RR CABINET 4NY7I1. SIS( IA 15 GALLON TANK IB 3 GALLON TANK 2 DEN MUTTON RELEASE 3 + REGULATED RELEASE 4 OOEU M REGULATED ACTUATOR OE 5 SULEK LIQUID AGENT 0 GAL, 6 AMSULEK LIQUID AGENT 119 GAL, 7 CARTRIDGE (101 20) 8 CARTRIDGE 001 IO) 9 CARTRIDGE ICT -301 30, 9B DOUBLE TANK CARTRIDGE ID TEST UNE MI DOUBLE MICROSVITCH 12 HOSE ASSEMBLY ODD DUCT NUZZLE (4309131 2V DUCT NOZZLE 1419337> IV - NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 1419336, iF NOZZLE ASSEMBLY (14193351419333) IN NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 3 NN NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 14193341 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY (4/933D) 245 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 1419340) 23D NOZZLE ASSEMBLY (419339) 2120 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 1429333) 290 NUZZLE ASSEMBLY (4 260 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 193411) (4 28 DETECTOR BRACKET 29 LOW TEMP FUSIBLE LINK 30 HIGH TEMP FUSIBLE LINK M6V MECHANICAL GAS VALVE EGV ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE 34 REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION S SWIVEL ADAPTOR 5Guriccrertt PV-tJJ'/ k, C T JKWILt FIRE DEPARTMENT r s.. ca-. 205-575-4407 and g:vg thc:, "ire Permit No. / (n - and exact sdctiTsss for shut- down or rlron approval. PAID Jim 10 201h UKWILA FIRE zo75/ 56FitiCtAtr fire icz a� 110Qsi-14 Datoz Ut4wwri U 1 i Bi (Zoic q15 -3 D � .... nm ® 00 35 KI (4+i t5I W 3041 fou 2t`i,3{a Sol pgppgp - 17RR CABINET 4NY7I1. SIS( IA 15 GALLON TANK IB 3 GALLON TANK 2 DEN MUTTON RELEASE 3 + REGULATED RELEASE 4 OOEU M REGULATED ACTUATOR OE 5 SULEK LIQUID AGENT 0 GAL, 6 AMSULEK LIQUID AGENT 119 GAL, 7 CARTRIDGE (101 20) 8 CARTRIDGE 001 IO) 9 CARTRIDGE ICT -301 30, 9B DOUBLE TANK CARTRIDGE ID TEST UNE MI DOUBLE MICROSVITCH 12 HOSE ASSEMBLY ODD DUCT NUZZLE (4309131 2V DUCT NOZZLE 1419337> IV - NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 1419336, iF NOZZLE ASSEMBLY (14193351419333) IN NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 3 NN NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 14193341 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY (4/933D) 245 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 1419340) 23D NOZZLE ASSEMBLY (419339) 2120 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 1429333) 290 NUZZLE ASSEMBLY (4 260 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 193411) (4 28 DETECTOR BRACKET 29 LOW TEMP FUSIBLE LINK 30 HIGH TEMP FUSIBLE LINK M6V MECHANICAL GAS VALVE EGV ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE 34 REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION S SWIVEL ADAPTOR 5Guriccrertt PV-tJJ'/ k, C T JKWILt FIRE DEPARTMENT r s.. ca-. 205-575-4407 and g:vg thc:, "ire Permit No. / (n - and exact sdctiTsss for shut- down or rlron approval. PAID Jim 10 201h UKWILA FIRE zo75/ 56FitiCtAtr fire icz a� 110Qsi-14 Datoz Ut4wwri U 1 i Bi (Zoic q15 -3 D 4/22/2016 NOLA - Fire Systems - Parts List Report Fire System Parts List Job # 2469683 - TWIN PEAKS - TUKWILA, WA Location: TUKWILA, WA Fire System #1 Ansul R102 ANSUL-3.0/3.0/3.0 Installed:Fire Cabinet Left Hood #1 (ITEM # 50) Hoods Covered:Hood # 1 Hood # 2 Hood#3 Gas-ValveR; / ,i�ityvt(At Tag: Supplied by Ship QtvltemCAS # Vendor # Description Dist CAS Units InstLoose 6 36 PE -HT PE -HT PULLEY ELBOW - High Temp Pulley Elbow, 0 6 EACH Compression Type 7 35 PE -LT PE -LT PULLEY ELBOW - Low Temp. Pulley Elbow, Set Screw 0 7 EACH Type ANSUL Part #415670 1 34 RPS -A RPS -A REMOTE PULL STATION - Red composite (without wire 0 1 EACH rope) 434618 (Old Macola #06-4835) 5 30 ANS-500FL ANS-500FL ;:FUSIBLE.LINK - 500deg F,R-1102 and PIRANHA 0i5—EACH 5 29 ANS-360FL ANS-360FL FUSIBLETINK -- 360deg F, R 102 and PIRANHA 0 5)EACH 10 28 S -DET S -DET DETECTOR - Series (Scissor Linkage) 0 10 EACH NEW#435547/435548 (0LD#417369/434480) 7 27 QPSA-1/2 QPSA-1/2 PULLEY SEAL- 1/2" Hood Seal (UL) 0 7 EACH 21 26 QSA-3/8 QSA-3/8 QUIK SEAL - 3/8" (UL) 0 21 EACH 9 25 418569 423572 NOZZLE ADAPTOR - Swivel Nozzle Adaptor (Replaces 0 9 EACH CAS Part # 418569) A0001274 3 24 419341 439844 NOZZLE - 260 Nozzle, Appliance (Replaces ANSUL 0 •3 EACH Part# 419352, CAS Part# 419341) A0001271 5 19 419338 439841 NOZZLE - 3N Nozzle, Appliance (Replaces ANSUL 0 5 EACH Part# 419349, CAS Part# 419338) A0001268 10 16 419335 439838 NOZZLE - 1N Nozzle, Plenum/Appliance (Replaces 0 10 EACH ANSUL Part# 419346, CAS Part# 419335) A0001265 3 14 419336 439839 NOZZLE - 1W Nozzle, Duct/Appliance (Replaces 0 3 EACH ANSUL Part# 419347, CAS Part# 419336) A0001266 2 12 HOSE 79007 HOSE - Rubber Hose 0 2 EACH 1 11 MICRO -SDA MICRO -SDA MICROSWITCH KIT- Includes 2 switcvhes and 0 1 EACH Mounting Hardware. Single Dual Electric Switch, One Standard Switch, One Alarm Duty Switch 437155 1 10 TLINK TLINK LINK - Test Link (1 test link) 1 0 EACH 1 9 DT -CART 73022 Double Tank Nitrogen Cartridge 1 0 EACH 3 5 LIQ -3.0 79372 AGENT - Ansulex Low PH Wet Chemical Agent, 3 3 0 EACH Gallon (UL) 79372 •1 3 ANS -OEM ANS -OEM REGULATED RELEASE - Ansul Regulated Mechanical 0 1 EACH Release/Bracket Assembly (79493), OEM, R-102, Cartridge Detection Included 3 1 AT - 3.0 AT - 3.0 TANK(#1 B) - 3.0 Gallon SS Tank (for use with Automan 0 3 EACH Release, Actuator, or SS Enclosure (UUULC)) 21 0 METALCAP-CBMETALCAP-CBBLOWOFF CAP - Metal 0 21 EACH https://nola.captiveaire.com/Order/FireSystems/PartsListReport.aspx?JobFireSystemld=782867 1/1 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-28 REV. 5 4-1-06 Nozzle Application Chart The following chart has been developed to assist in calculating the quantity and type of nozzle required to protect each duct, plenum, or appliance. NOTICE This chart is for general reference only. See complete details for each type of hazard. Minimum Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Hazard! Dimensions Quantity Heights Duc Transitionmited 1 (Single Nozzle) Perimeter — 50 in. (127 cm) Diameter-1.6_in. (40.6 cm) Length — Unlimited Perimeter —100 in. (254 cm) Diameter — 31 7/8 in. (81 cm) Length — Unlimited Perimeter — 150 in. (381 cm) Diameter — 48 in. (122 cm) Duct or Transition (Single Nozzle) Duct or Transition (Dual Nozzle) Electrostatic Precipitator (At Base of Duct) Plenum_ (Horizontal Protection) ► Plenum (Horizontal Protection) Plenum (Vertical Protection) ► Fryer (Split or Non -Split Vat) ► Fryer (Split or Non -Split Vat) Fryer (Split or Non -Split Vat)* Fryer (Non -Split Vat Only) Individual Cell _Length =140-ft(3:1 mj Length — 6 ft. (1.8 m) Width — 4 ft. (1.2 m) Length — 4 ft. (1.2 m) Width — 4 ft. (1.2 m) Maximum Size (without drip board) 14 in. (36 cm) x 15 in. (38 cm) Low Proximity Maximum Size (without drip board) 14 1/2 in. (37 cm) x 14 in. (36 cm) Medium Proximity Maximum Size (without drip board) 15 in. (38 cm) x 14 in. (36 cm) High Proximity Medium Proximity Maximum Size (without drip board) 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) x 19 in. (48.2 cm) High Proximity Low Proximity Maximum Size (without drip board) 18 in. (45.7 cm) x 18 in. (45.7 cm) High Proximity 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • For multiple nozzle protection of single fryers, see detailed Information on Pages 4-12 through 4-14. 13-16 in. (33 — 41 cm) 16-27 in. (41 — 69 cm) 27 — 47 in. 20 — 27 in. 21 — 34 in. 13-16 in. 25 — 35 in. (64-89 cm) Nozzle Part No. 430912 419337 2W 419337 2W 419334 1/2N 419335 430192 1W 419336 1W 419336 1W Nozzle Tip Stamping — Flow No. 1W 419342 419342 419339 419340 419338 419342 419338 290 290 230 245 3N 290 3N SECTION IV – SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-29 4-1-06 REV. 5 Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) Nozzle Tip Minimum Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Stamping – Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Part N . Flow No. 'Fry Non -Split Maximum Size Vat Only)* (with drip board) 21 in. (53 cm) x 14 in. (36 cm) (Fry Pot must not exceed 15 in. x 14 in. (38 cm x 36 cm)) High Proximity 1 27 – 47 in. 419339 230 Medium Proximity 1 20 – 27 in. 419340 245 =.Maximu '(wit h drip -boar -d) _ X25 3/8 in,_,(64,4 cm), ,'x 194/2-in._(49.5_cm) (Fry -pot -side must not exceed 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) x 19 in. (48.2 cm) High Proximity 1 ' 21_--344in. 419338 c.. 3N Low Proximity 1 13 –16 in. 419342 ',Fryer (Split or Non -Split Vat) Fryer (Split or Non -Split Vat) Range Maximum Size (with drip board) 18 in. (45.7 cm) x 27 3/4 in. (70.5 cm) High Proximity 1 25 – 35 in. 419338 3N (64-89 cm) Maximum Size (with drip board) 14 in. (36 cm) x 21 in. (53 cm) 1 13 – 16 in. 419342 290 Low Proximity (33 – 41 cm) Maximum Size (with drip board) 14 1/2 in. (37 cm) x 26 1/2 in. (67 cm) 1 16 – 27 in. 419342 290 Medium Proximity (41 – 69 cm) Longest -Side 1 Pa30-40_in 419335 -'_1 N--` 32 in.-(8fcm) (76 –102 cm) " Area – 384 sq. in. (2477 sq. cm) Longest Side 40 – 48 in. 419333 1F 28 in. (71 cm) (102 –122 cm) Area – 336 sq. in. (With Backsheif) (2168 sq. cm) Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 40 – 50 in. 419340 245'. 28 in. (71 cm) (102 –127 cm) Area – 672 sq. in. (4335 sq. cm) Longest Side (Medium Proximity) 1 30 – 40 in. 419341 260 32 in. (81 cm) (76 –102 cm) Area – 768 sq. in. (4955 sq. cm) Longest Side (Low Proximity) 2 15 – 20 in. 419342 290 36 in. (91 cm) (38 – 51 cm) Area –1008 sq. in. (6503 sq. cm) • For multiple nozzle protection of single fryers, see detailed information on Pages 4-7 through 4-11. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-30 REV. 3 10-1-02 Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) Hazard Griddle - Chain Broiler* (Overhead Protection) Maximum Hazard Dimensions Longest Side (High Proximity) 48 in. (122 cm) Area - 1440 sq. In. (9290 sq. cm) Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 in. (76 cm) Area - 720 sq. in. (4645 sq. cm) Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 36-irr (91 cm) 'Area =1080 sq. in. (6968 sq. cm) Longest Side (Medium Proximity) 48 in. (122 cm) Area -1440 sq. In. (9290 sq. cm) Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 48 in. (122 cm) Area - 1440 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) Longest Side - 34 in. (86 cm) 2 Area -1088 sq. in. (7019 sq. cm) Chain Broiler Length - 43 in. (109 cm) (Horizontal Protection) Width - 31 in. (79 cm) =Gas—Radiant—Char—Broiler,— Long t -Side = 36Tn_.(91_cm) Area 864-sgin: -- (5574 sq. cm) Longest Side - 34 in. (86 cm) Area - 680 sq. in. - (4388 sq. cm) Longest Side - 24 in. (61 cm) Area - 312 sq. in. (2013 sq. cm) Longest Side - 24 in. (61 cm) Area - 288 sq. in. (1858 sq. cm) Longest Side - 30 in. (76 cm) Area - 720 sq. in. (4645 sq. cm) Minimum Nozzle Quantity 1 1 Electric Char -Broiler Lava -Rock Broiler Natural Charcoal Broiler Lava -Rock or Natural Charcoal Char -Broiler 2 1 1 Nozzle Heights 30 - 50 in. (76 -127 cm) (perimeter located) 30 - 50 in. (76 -127 cm) (center located) 't35 .1_40 (89 -102 cm) (perimeter located) 20 - 30 in. (51 - 76 cm) (perimeter located) 10- 20 in. (25 - 51 cm) (perimeter located) 10- 26 in. (25 - 66 cm) 1 - 3 in. (3 - 8 cm) 45.— 40n (38 - 102 cm) 20 -50 in. (51 -127 cm) 18 - 35 in. (46 - 89 cm) 18-40 in. (46 -102 cm) 14 - 40 in. (36 -102 cm) • Minimum chain broiler exhaust opening — 12In. x 12 in. (31 cm x 31 cm), and not less than 60% of Internal broiler size. Nozzle Part No. 419341 Nozzle Tip Stamping - Flow No. 260 419342 290 419335/417332 ----I N/MSS 419342 290 419343 2120 419336/417333 1 W/1 WSS 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS 419335/417332 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS 419338 3N -6-i NSS The Atc,SUL A(JTOMAN Regulated Mechanical Release Assembly (3.0 gallon -Part No. 79290 or 1.5 gallon - Part No. 79291) con- tains the regulated release mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actuation piping; expellant piping; detection system; and additional equipment. This regulated release assembly is used in single, double, and multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface. The release mechanism can be used to intercon- nect both the actuation and expellant gas lines as required per system design. The regulator is designed to allow a constant flow of gas into the tank at 110 psi (759 kPa) when the system Is actuated. In single, double, and multiple -tank systems, the provided expel- lant gas hose connects the agent tank to the bottom outlet of the regulator. In double and multiple -tank system configurations, the back outlet of the regulator is used as an expellant gas feed for one additional tank --enclosure or tank -bracket hookup. The enclo- sure contains the required knockouts to facilitate this connection. If a pressure switch is to be attached to the regulator, additional fit- tings are required. The tank is mounted within the enclosure. The tank contains an adaptor/tube assembly with a burst disc union. The burst disc helps prevent siphoning of the agent up the pipe due to significant temperature fluctuations In the area where the tank is located. The tank is mild steel and, under normal conditions, requires hydrosta- tic testing every twelve years. The agent tank is shipped uncharged and must be tilled with only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant during Installation. The detection and additional equipment required per system design are connected to the release mechanism. The enclosure contains knockouts to facilitate detection and additional hookups. The system can be actuated automatically or manually. Automatic actuation occurs when a fusible link within the detection system separates in a fire condition: Manual actuation of the system Dccurs when personnel pull on the remote manual pull station Mil ring.' Total Tank Type of Flow No.* Quantity System Type of Hardware 1-5 1 Single 6-11 1 Single 12-16 2 Double 17-22 2 Double 23-27 3 ANSUL 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank ELECTRICAL SWITCHES )' The electrical switches are intended for use with electric gas3 valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric power shut-off devices and other electrical devices that ares; designed to shut off or turn on when the system is actuated. r;, Switches are available In kits: One Switch Kit, Part No. 423878,` Two Switch Kit, Part No. 423879, Three Switch Kit, Part No, 423880, and Four Switch Kit, Part No. 423881. Each switch has a set of single -pole, double -throw contacts rated at 21 amp, 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP, 250, 277 VAC. Mounting hardware is provided with each kit. R-102 RESTAURANT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (Standard UL 300 Listed) Nitrogen Cartridge Required LT -20-R (7032) LT -30-R (5373) Double (73022) • Nozzle Identification Chart Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Type Part No. Stamping "TAW Nozzle 419336 1W 1 WSS Nozzle 417333 1W 1NFNozzle 419335 1N 1 NS Nozzle 417332 1N 1/2N Nozzle 419334 .1/2N 3N Nozzle 419338 3N 2W Nozzle 419337 2W 2WH Nozzle 78078 2WH 1 230 Nozzle 419339 230 1 245 Nozzle 419340 245 1260 Nozzle 419341 260 290 Nozzle 419342 290 2120 Nozzle 419343 2120 1F Nozzle 419333 1F Carbon Dioxide Cartridge Required 101-10 (15850) 101-20 (17492) 101-30 (15851) Double (73022) 101-30 (15851)" LT -20-R (7032) 101-10 (15850) LT -A-101-30 (29187) 101-30 (15851)"" WNG-N Ac, -fu exKRusrpro spy 5 SVPPL'( it(I % tuTs OFF row (,off) wee -R-1-6901 sµurOFF Nozzle Flow 14 1 1 1 1 1/2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 EXTINGUISHING AGENT ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant (1.5 gallon — Part No. 79694 or 3.0 gallon — Part No. 79372) is a potassium -based solu- tion designed for fast knock -down and suppression of grease - related fires. The agent Is shipped in plastic containers which pro- vide one complete tank charge. Agent storage life expectancy is twelve years. The distributor must record the batch numbers and date of shipment receipt to be filed with each installation rpnnrr! SECTION IX - APPENDIX Ul EX. 34TO UW CExT4T 10-1-02 Page 91 REV_ 5 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE Note: System options do not cover all conceivable variations. They are listed here as a general guideline to show the most common type arrangement for multiple systems, Based on certain system designs utilizing manifolding, non-manifolding, 3 -tank systems, etc., other tank/cartridge combinations can be designed. The combinations below are based on 11 flow, 3.0 gallon tanks and 5 flow, 1.5 gallon tanks. More competitive designs may be available by utilizing 12 flow and 6 flow systems when appropriate. 'Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No.* Quantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Required Cartridge Required 1-5 1 Single 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT -20-R (423429) 6-11 1 Single 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT -30-R (423435) 12-16 2 Double 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 17-22 2 Double 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 23-33 3 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT -30-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 23-27 3 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT -20-R (423429) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank y28133 3 Multiple �3:07Gal Heg: Releasee N/A---=Double_(423493). (Optional) (2) 3.0 Gal _AdditionakTanks 34-38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT -20-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT -A-101-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 34-38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 39-44 4 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT -30-R (423435) 3.0 gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT -A-101-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 39-44 4 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)`** LT -A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 45-49 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443): 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 45-49 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 101-10 (423439) 101-30 (423443)'** 101-30 (423443)*** Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. If tanks are manifolded, only a °double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. If tanks are manifolded, either an LT -A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. Double (423493) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT 20-R (423429) LT -A-101-30 (423491) LT -A-101-30 (423491) DETECTION AGENT PIPING +"E.M.T. 3/8" SCH 40 I BLACK STEEL f G URuai l f Ansul 3 gal. Automan 2W Hood: 19'6" 2W Hood:. 7'9" 2W 1N 450° 450° 1N -145:0°1 1 N 450 53° " 1N 450° REMOTE PULL (Located in path of egress 1F 1F _. (2)ZN 4' Ran 2520 v V 1N ' 1N '•' 230 230 : 230 IMO ge Newport Bay 17920 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, Wa. 98188 Sanderson Safety Mark Patrick 2600 Airport Way S. Seattle, Wa. 98134 206-340-4300 ACCEPTED Without Comments As Noted In Red Per The Attached Letter 3'Griddle3' broiler a) o ,IP- >, Q 0 n. a) C. M C co U) v ca 2., u, V °) s) SgE o co Oc 0.- ,C ir3N V -0 • 2 O m-0- g a) c0) c N= v (Dz. 0 •0 _ > ,r- ,Fa)_o o0= 0 2 (4 0 « /17/7 (3) 15" Fryers TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTIVIEN1 Please call: 575-4407 and give this job No. 99 -'My and exact address for shut. down or restoration approval. V 1F 1F 'I1 Kettle r 3 RANGE. FILE Ai MAY 2 0 19,B9 -412)3\-\ S o?Z./ Nozzle Identification Chart Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Type Part No. Stamping 1W Nozzle 419336 1W 1WSS Nozzle 417333 1W 1N Nozzle 419335 1N 1NSS Nozzle 417332 1N 1/2N Nozzle 419334 1/2N 3N Nozzle 419338 3N 2W Nozzle 419337 2W 2WH Nozzle 78078 2WH 230 Nozzle 245 Nozzle 260 Nozzle 290 Nozzle 2120 Nozzle 1F Nozzle Nozzle Flow No. 1 1 1 1 1/2 3 2 2 419339 230 2 419340 245 2 419341 260 2 419342 290 2 419343 2120 2 419333 1F 1 2W Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 56928) The 2W Nozzle is for duct application (all duct protection except Option 2, 1.5 gallon system) and consists of four basic components: 1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease and other substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the nozzle. 2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening. 3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer and contains 3/8-18 NPT male threads. 4. The nozzle tip is brass and stamped with 2W (See Figure 14). The (2) stamped number indicates that this is a two flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers when determining system design. 230 Nozzle Assembly (Part No: 418117) The 230 nozzle application is for fryer/high proximity. This nozzle consists of four basic components: 1. The blow -off cap* keeps the orifice free of grease or other substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the nozzle. 2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening. 3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer. The mounting threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT. 4. The nozzle tip is chromed -plated and stamped with 230 (See Figure 15). The 2 indicates that this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers when determining system design. 1N Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 56930) The 1N nozzle application is for chain broilers, woks, electric char -broilers, lava rock char -broilers, natural charcoal broilers, and plenum coverage. This nozzle consists of four basic com- ponents: 1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the nozzle. 2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening. 3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer. The mounting threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT. 4. The nozzle tip is chrome -plated and stamped with 1N (See Figure 10). The (1) indicates that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number when determining system design. 5. This nozzle is also available in stainless steel (1NSS) Part No. 417332. 'Part is common to all nozzle assembles. 1F Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 418555) The 1F Nozzle is for range, protection and consists of five basic components: 1. The blow -off' cap keeps the orifice free of grease or other substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the nozzle. 2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening. 3. The nozzle body* is chrome -plated and houses the internal strainer. The mounting threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT. 4. The nozzle tip is brass and stamped with 1F (See Figure 21 a). The (1) indicates that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number when determining system design. 5. The tip retainer is chrome -plated and is necessary to secure the tip to the nozzle body to lock the discharge pattern position. 1/2N Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 56929) The 1/2N nozzle application is for upright broilers, salamanders, and electrostatic precipitators. This nozzle consists of four basic components 1. The blow -off cap' keeps the orifice free of grease or other substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the nozzle. 2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening. 3. The nozzle body' houses the strainer. The mounting threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT. 4. The nozzle tip is brass and stamped with 1/2N. (See Figure 11). The (1/2) indicates that this is a half -flow nozzle. A pair of these nozzles will equal one flow number when deter- mining system design. 2120 Nozzle Assembly (Part No. 418121) The 2120 nozzle application is for griddle/low proximity. This nozzle consists of four basic components: 1. The blow -off cape keeps the orifice free of grease or other substances that could interfere with agent distribution. An integral retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap to the nozzle. 2. The strainer keeps foreign particles, which are larger than the nozzle orifice, from blocking the opening. 3. The nozzle body* houses the strainer. The mounting threads on the body are 3/8-18 NPT. 4. The nozzle tip is chromed -plated and stamped with 2120 (See Figure 19). The 2 indicates that this is a two -flow nozzle t and must be counted as two flow numbers when deter- mining system design. Part is common to all nozzle assemblies. ci. ncL. c.'rJC AJJcMbL The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Mechanical Release Assembly (3.0 gallon — Part No. 79290 or 1.5 gallon — Part No. 79291) contains the regulated release mechanism, agent tank. expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup. and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actuation piping; expellant piping: detection system: and additional equipment. This regu- lated release assembly is used in single, double, and multiple - tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface. The release mechanism can be used to interconnect both the actu- ation and expellant gas lines as required per system design. The regulator is designed to allow a constant flow of gas into the tank at 100 psi (690 kPa) when the system is actuated. In single, double, and multiple -tank systems, the provided expel- lant gas hose connects the agent tank to the bottom outlet of the regulator. In double and multiple -tank system configurations, the back outlet of the regulator is used as an expellant gas feed for one additional tank -enclosure or tank -bracket hookup. The enclosure contains the required knockouts to facilitate this con- nection. If a pressure switch is to be attached to the regulator, additional fittings are required. The tank is mounted within the enclosure. The tank contains an adaptor/tube assembly with a burst disc union. The burst disc helps prevent siphoning of the agent up the pipe due to signifi- cant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is located. The tank is mild steel and, under normal conditions, requires hydrostatic testing every twelve years. The agent tank is shipped uncharged and must be filled with 1.53 gallons (5.8 L) or 3.06 gallons (11.6 L) of only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant during installation. The detection and additional equipment required per system design are connected to the release mechanism. The enclosure contains knockouts to facilitate detection and additional hookups. The system can be actuated automatically or manually. Auto- matic actuation occurs when a fusible link within the detection system separates in a fire condition. Manual actuation of the system occurs when personnel pull on the remote manual pull station pull ring. r\===\ TWO TANK ENCLOSURE 3 GALLON REGULATED DOUBLE TANK NITROGEN ASSEMBLY PART NO. 419604 RELEASE ASSEMBLY CARTRIDGE (INCLUDES (2) HOSES AND PART NO. 73022 (2) GROMMETS) EXTINGUISHING AGENT • ANSULEX Law pH Liquid Fire Suppressant (1.5 gallon — Part No. 79694 or 3.0 gallon — Part No. 79372) is a potassium -based solution designed for fast knock -down and suppression of grease -related fires. The agent is shipped in plastic containers which provide one complete tank charge. Agent storage life expectancy is twelve years. The distributor must record the batch numbers and date of shipment receipt to be filed with each instal- lation record. "ANSULEJC' LOW pH LIQUID FIRE SUPPRESSANT 3.0 GALLON 1.5 GALLON REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION The remote manual pull station (Part No. 4835, Part No. 54011, or Part No. 415255) is required for manual actuation of the regulated release assembly. The remote manual pull station should be mounted at a point of egress and positioned at a height deter- . mined by the authority having jurisdiction. Remote Pull Station, Part No. 415255, can also utilize a Trim Ring, Part No. 73859. Trim Ring Shipping Assembly includes 12 Trim Rings and must be ordered as Part No. 415256. PART NO. 4835 (WITHOUT CABLE) PART NO. 54011) (WITH 50 FT. OF CABLE) METAL STAMPED 000163 PART NO. 415255 (WITHOUT CABLE) - PLASTIC MOLDED 0o0496 ELEGTHICALSWITCHES The electrical switches are intended for use with electric g valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electri power shut-off devices and other electrical devices that are' designed to shut off or turn on when. the system is actuated. ; Switches are available in kits: One Switch Kit, Part No. 423878, Two Switch Kit, Part No. 423879, Three Switch Kit, Part No's 423880, and Four Switch tit, Part No. 423881. Each switch has set of single -pole, double -throw contacts rated at 21 amp, 1 HP,. 4 125; 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP, 250, 277 VAC. Mounting hardware is provided with each kit. MECHANICAL GAS VALVES The mechanical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of gas to the appliances upon actuation of the regulated release assem- bly. The valves are available in sizes of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1 1/4 in., 1 1/2 in., and 2 in. Ansul style; and 21/2 in. and 3 in. Asco style. The valves are rated for natural and LP gas. Both styles are UL Listed. Maximum operating pressure differential and operating pressure is . 100 psi (0.69 bar). Maximum test pressure is 50 psi (3.5 bar). Maximum Operating Pressure 55598 10 psi (69 kPa) 55601 10 psi (69 kPa) 55604 10 psi (69 kPa) 55607 10 psi (69 kPa) 55610 10 psi (69 kPa) 25937 5 psi (34.5 kPa) 25938 5 psi (34.5 kPa) Part tIsa Description 3/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 1 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 1 1/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 1 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 2 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 3 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) ANSUL STYLE 000164 ASCO STYLE 000165 FIGURE 21